diff options
| author | Bruce Momjian | 2011-04-10 15:42:00 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Bruce Momjian | 2011-04-10 15:42:00 +0000 |
| commit | bf50caf105a901c4f83ac1df3cdaf910c26694a4 (patch) | |
| tree | dac42d7795070f107eefb085c500f86a4d35f92f | |
| parent | 9a8b73147c07e02e10e0d0a34aa99d72e3336fb2 (diff) | |
pgindent run before PG 9.1 beta 1.
446 files changed, 5742 insertions, 5263 deletions
diff --git a/contrib/adminpack/adminpack.c b/contrib/adminpack/adminpack.c index c149dd6c63..99fa02e813 100644 --- a/contrib/adminpack/adminpack.c +++ b/contrib/adminpack/adminpack.c @@ -78,18 +78,19 @@ convert_and_check_filename(text *arg, bool logAllowed) /* Disallow '/a/b/data/..' */ if (path_contains_parent_reference(filename)) ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - (errmsg("reference to parent directory (\"..\") not allowed")))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), + (errmsg("reference to parent directory (\"..\") not allowed")))); + /* - * Allow absolute paths if within DataDir or Log_directory, even - * though Log_directory might be outside DataDir. + * Allow absolute paths if within DataDir or Log_directory, even + * though Log_directory might be outside DataDir. */ if (!path_is_prefix_of_path(DataDir, filename) && (!logAllowed || !is_absolute_path(Log_directory) || !path_is_prefix_of_path(Log_directory, filename))) ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - (errmsg("absolute path not allowed")))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), + (errmsg("absolute path not allowed")))); } else if (!path_is_relative_and_below_cwd(filename)) ereport(ERROR, diff --git a/contrib/auth_delay/auth_delay.c b/contrib/auth_delay/auth_delay.c index ca388c4498..4e0d5959d1 100644 --- a/contrib/auth_delay/auth_delay.c +++ b/contrib/auth_delay/auth_delay.c @@ -18,13 +18,13 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; -void _PG_init(void); +void _PG_init(void); /* GUC Variables */ static int auth_delay_milliseconds; /* Original Hook */ -static ClientAuthentication_hook_type original_client_auth_hook = NULL; +static ClientAuthentication_hook_type original_client_auth_hook = NULL; /* * Check authentication @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ _PG_init(void) { /* Define custom GUC variables */ DefineCustomIntVariable("auth_delay.milliseconds", - "Milliseconds to delay before reporting authentication failure", + "Milliseconds to delay before reporting authentication failure", NULL, &auth_delay_milliseconds, 0, diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_cash.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_cash.c index 7938a70f17..2664a26870 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_cash.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_cash.c @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ gbt_cash_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_date.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_date.c index ccd7e2ad3f..8a675e2f1d 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_date.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_date.c @@ -90,9 +90,9 @@ static float8 gdb_date_dist(const void *a, const void *b) { /* we assume the difference can't overflow */ - Datum diff = DirectFunctionCall2(date_mi, + Datum diff = DirectFunctionCall2(date_mi, DateADTGetDatum(*((const DateADT *) a)), - DateADTGetDatum(*((const DateADT *) b))); + DateADTGetDatum(*((const DateADT *) b))); return (float8) Abs(DatumGetInt32(diff)); } @@ -113,14 +113,14 @@ static const gbtree_ninfo tinfo = PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(date_dist); -Datum date_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum date_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum date_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { /* we assume the difference can't overflow */ - Datum diff = DirectFunctionCall2(date_mi, - PG_GETARG_DATUM(0), - PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)); + Datum diff = DirectFunctionCall2(date_mi, + PG_GETARG_DATUM(0), + PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)); PG_RETURN_INT32(Abs(DatumGetInt32(diff))); } @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ gbt_date_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float4.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float4.c index 932a941f88..266256b23c 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float4.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float4.c @@ -94,18 +94,18 @@ static const gbtree_ninfo tinfo = PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(float4_dist); -Datum float4_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum float4_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum float4_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - float4 a = PG_GETARG_FLOAT4(0); + float4 a = PG_GETARG_FLOAT4(0); float4 b = PG_GETARG_FLOAT4(1); float4 r; r = a - b; CHECKFLOATVAL(r, isinf(a) || isinf(b), true); - PG_RETURN_FLOAT4( Abs(r) ); + PG_RETURN_FLOAT4(Abs(r)); } @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ gbt_float4_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float8.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float8.c index 0c39980ba1..efbee0f3e4 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float8.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float8.c @@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ gbt_float8key_cmp(const void *a, const void *b) static float8 gbt_float8_dist(const void *a, const void *b) { - float8 arg1 = *(const float8 *)a; - float8 arg2 = *(const float8 *)b; + float8 arg1 = *(const float8 *) a; + float8 arg2 = *(const float8 *) b; float8 r; r = arg1 - arg2; @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ static const gbtree_ninfo tinfo = PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(float8_dist); -Datum float8_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum float8_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum float8_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ float8_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) r = a - b; CHECKFLOATVAL(r, isinf(a) || isinf(b), true); - PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( Abs(r) ); + PG_RETURN_FLOAT8(Abs(r)); } /************************************************** @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ gbt_float8_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int2.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int2.c index c06d170a5e..7841145b53 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int2.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int2.c @@ -94,12 +94,12 @@ static const gbtree_ninfo tinfo = PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(int2_dist); -Datum int2_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum int2_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum int2_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - int2 a = PG_GETARG_INT16(0); - int2 b = PG_GETARG_INT16(1); + int2 a = PG_GETARG_INT16(0); + int2 b = PG_GETARG_INT16(1); int2 r; int2 ra; @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ gbt_int2_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int4.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int4.c index ef7af524e7..0e4b4f85b0 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int4.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int4.c @@ -95,14 +95,14 @@ static const gbtree_ninfo tinfo = PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(int4_dist); -Datum int4_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum int4_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum int4_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - int4 a = PG_GETARG_INT32(0); - int4 b = PG_GETARG_INT32(1); - int4 r; - int4 ra; + int4 a = PG_GETARG_INT32(0); + int4 b = PG_GETARG_INT32(1); + int4 r; + int4 ra; r = a - b; ra = Abs(r); @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ int4_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (ra < 0 || (!SAMESIGN(a, b) && !SAMESIGN(r, a))) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_NUMERIC_VALUE_OUT_OF_RANGE), - errmsg("integer out of range"))); + errmsg("integer out of range"))); PG_RETURN_INT32(ra); } @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ gbt_int4_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int8.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int8.c index 1f14d82891..d54113d393 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int8.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int8.c @@ -95,14 +95,14 @@ static const gbtree_ninfo tinfo = PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(int8_dist); -Datum int8_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum int8_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum int8_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - int64 a = PG_GETARG_INT64(0); - int64 b = PG_GETARG_INT64(1); - int64 r; - int64 ra; + int64 a = PG_GETARG_INT64(0); + int64 b = PG_GETARG_INT64(1); + int64 r; + int64 ra; r = a - b; ra = Abs(r); @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ int8_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (ra < 0 || (!SAMESIGN(a, b) && !SAMESIGN(r, a))) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_NUMERIC_VALUE_OUT_OF_RANGE), - errmsg("bigint out of range"))); + errmsg("bigint out of range"))); PG_RETURN_INT64(ra); } @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ gbt_int8_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_interval.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_interval.c index 5195284afa..137a5fcd7f 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_interval.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_interval.c @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ intr2num(const Interval *i) static float8 gbt_intv_dist(const void *a, const void *b) { - return (float8)Abs(intr2num((Interval*)a) - intr2num((Interval*)b)); + return (float8) Abs(intr2num((Interval *) a) - intr2num((Interval *) b)); } /* @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ abs_interval(Interval *a) } PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(interval_dist); -Datum interval_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum interval_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum interval_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ gbt_intv_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_oid.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_oid.c index c81dd31799..3b0929b42b 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_oid.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_oid.c @@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ static const gbtree_ninfo tinfo = PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(oid_dist); -Datum oid_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum oid_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum oid_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - Oid a = PG_GETARG_OID(0); - Oid b = PG_GETARG_OID(1); - Oid res; + Oid a = PG_GETARG_OID(0); + Oid b = PG_GETARG_OID(1); + Oid res; if (a < b) res = b - a; @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ gbt_oid_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_time.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_time.c index 44f6923409..e9cfe33f45 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_time.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_time.c @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ gbt_time_dist(const void *a, const void *b) { const TimeADT *aa = (const TimeADT *) a; const TimeADT *bb = (const TimeADT *) b; - Interval *i; + Interval *i; i = DatumGetIntervalP(DirectFunctionCall2(time_mi_time, TimeADTGetDatumFast(*aa), @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ static const gbtree_ninfo tinfo = PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(time_dist); -Datum time_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum time_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum time_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ gbt_time_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_ts.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_ts.c index 9a0ec07a1e..9d3a5919a0 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_ts.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_ts.c @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ gbt_ts_dist(const void *a, const void *b) { const Timestamp *aa = (const Timestamp *) a; const Timestamp *bb = (const Timestamp *) b; - Interval *i; + Interval *i; if (TIMESTAMP_NOT_FINITE(*aa) || TIMESTAMP_NOT_FINITE(*bb)) return get_float8_infinity(); @@ -147,17 +147,17 @@ static const gbtree_ninfo tinfo = PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(ts_dist); -Datum ts_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum ts_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum ts_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { Timestamp a = PG_GETARG_TIMESTAMP(0); Timestamp b = PG_GETARG_TIMESTAMP(1); - Interval *r; + Interval *r; if (TIMESTAMP_NOT_FINITE(a) || TIMESTAMP_NOT_FINITE(b)) { - Interval *p = palloc(sizeof(Interval)); + Interval *p = palloc(sizeof(Interval)); p->day = INT_MAX; p->month = INT_MAX; @@ -169,25 +169,24 @@ ts_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) PG_RETURN_INTERVAL_P(p); } else - - r = DatumGetIntervalP(DirectFunctionCall2(timestamp_mi, - PG_GETARG_DATUM(0), - PG_GETARG_DATUM(1))); - PG_RETURN_INTERVAL_P( abs_interval(r) ); + r = DatumGetIntervalP(DirectFunctionCall2(timestamp_mi, + PG_GETARG_DATUM(0), + PG_GETARG_DATUM(1))); + PG_RETURN_INTERVAL_P(abs_interval(r)); } PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(tstz_dist); -Datum tstz_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum tstz_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); Datum tstz_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - TimestampTz a = PG_GETARG_TIMESTAMPTZ(0); - TimestampTz b = PG_GETARG_TIMESTAMPTZ(1); - Interval *r; + TimestampTz a = PG_GETARG_TIMESTAMPTZ(0); + TimestampTz b = PG_GETARG_TIMESTAMPTZ(1); + Interval *r; if (TIMESTAMP_NOT_FINITE(a) || TIMESTAMP_NOT_FINITE(b)) { - Interval *p = palloc(sizeof(Interval)); + Interval *p = palloc(sizeof(Interval)); p->day = INT_MAX; p->month = INT_MAX; @@ -202,7 +201,7 @@ tstz_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) r = DatumGetIntervalP(DirectFunctionCall2(timestamp_mi, PG_GETARG_DATUM(0), PG_GETARG_DATUM(1))); - PG_RETURN_INTERVAL_P( abs_interval(r) ); + PG_RETURN_INTERVAL_P(abs_interval(r)); } @@ -309,7 +308,7 @@ gbt_ts_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) key.upper = (GBT_NUMKEY *) &kkk->upper; PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &query, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } @@ -354,7 +353,7 @@ gbt_tstz_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) qqq = tstz_to_ts_gmt(query); PG_RETURN_FLOAT8( - gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &qqq, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) + gbt_num_distance(&key, (void *) &qqq, GIST_LEAF(entry), &tinfo) ); } diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_num.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_num.c index 17440a191b..64c95854df 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_num.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_num.c @@ -223,8 +223,8 @@ gbt_num_consistent(const GBT_NUMKEY_R *key, retval = (*tinfo->f_le) (query, key->upper); break; case BtreeGistNotEqualStrategyNumber: - retval = (! ((*tinfo->f_eq) (query, key->lower) && - (*tinfo->f_eq) (query, key->upper))) ? true : false; + retval = (!((*tinfo->f_eq) (query, key->lower) && + (*tinfo->f_eq) (query, key->upper))) ? true : false; break; default: retval = false; @@ -249,9 +249,9 @@ gbt_num_distance(const GBT_NUMKEY_R *key, if (tinfo->f_dist == NULL) elog(ERROR, "KNN search is not supported for btree_gist type %d", (int) tinfo->t); - if ( tinfo->f_le(query, key->lower) ) + if (tinfo->f_le(query, key->lower)) retval = tinfo->f_dist(query, key->lower); - else if ( tinfo->f_ge(query, key->upper) ) + else if (tinfo->f_ge(query, key->upper)) retval = tinfo->f_dist(query, key->upper); else retval = 0.0; diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_num.h b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_num.h index 243d3b5cb9..8935ed6630 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_num.h +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_num.h @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ typedef struct bool (*f_le) (const void *, const void *); /* less or equal */ bool (*f_lt) (const void *, const void *); /* less than */ int (*f_cmp) (const void *, const void *); /* key compare function */ - float8 (*f_dist) (const void *, const void *); /* key distance function */ + float8 (*f_dist) (const void *, const void *); /* key distance function */ } gbtree_ninfo; @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ typedef struct #define GET_FLOAT_DISTANCE(t, arg1, arg2) Abs( ((float8) *((const t *) (arg1))) - ((float8) *((const t *) (arg2))) ) -#define SAMESIGN(a,b) (((a) < 0) == ((b) < 0)) +#define SAMESIGN(a,b) (((a) < 0) == ((b) < 0)) /* * check to see if a float4/8 val has underflowed or overflowed @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ extern bool gbt_num_consistent(const GBT_NUMKEY_R *key, const void *query, const gbtree_ninfo *tinfo); extern float8 gbt_num_distance(const GBT_NUMKEY_R *key, const void *query, - bool is_leaf, const gbtree_ninfo *tinfo); + bool is_leaf, const gbtree_ninfo *tinfo); extern GIST_SPLITVEC *gbt_num_picksplit(const GistEntryVector *entryvec, GIST_SPLITVEC *v, const gbtree_ninfo *tinfo); diff --git a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_var.c b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_var.c index 8f3173e499..d74013af88 100644 --- a/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_var.c +++ b/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_var.c @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ gbt_var_consistent( || gbt_var_node_pf_match(key, query, tinfo); break; case BtreeGistNotEqualStrategyNumber: - retval = ! ((*tinfo->f_eq) (query, key->lower) && (*tinfo->f_eq) (query, key->upper)); + retval = !((*tinfo->f_eq) (query, key->lower) && (*tinfo->f_eq) (query, key->upper)); break; default: retval = FALSE; diff --git a/contrib/dummy_seclabel/dummy_seclabel.c b/contrib/dummy_seclabel/dummy_seclabel.c index 974806f1b6..5deb43fa9b 100644 --- a/contrib/dummy_seclabel/dummy_seclabel.c +++ b/contrib/dummy_seclabel/dummy_seclabel.c @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; /* Entrypoint of the module */ -void _PG_init(void); +void _PG_init(void); static void dummy_object_relabel(const ObjectAddress *object, const char *seclabel) diff --git a/contrib/file_fdw/file_fdw.c b/contrib/file_fdw/file_fdw.c index 6a84a00e8d..466c015107 100644 --- a/contrib/file_fdw/file_fdw.c +++ b/contrib/file_fdw/file_fdw.c @@ -45,17 +45,17 @@ struct FileFdwOption */ static struct FileFdwOption valid_options[] = { /* File options */ - { "filename", ForeignTableRelationId }, + {"filename", ForeignTableRelationId}, /* Format options */ /* oids option is not supported */ - { "format", ForeignTableRelationId }, - { "header", ForeignTableRelationId }, - { "delimiter", ForeignTableRelationId }, - { "quote", ForeignTableRelationId }, - { "escape", ForeignTableRelationId }, - { "null", ForeignTableRelationId }, - { "encoding", ForeignTableRelationId }, + {"format", ForeignTableRelationId}, + {"header", ForeignTableRelationId}, + {"delimiter", ForeignTableRelationId}, + {"quote", ForeignTableRelationId}, + {"escape", ForeignTableRelationId}, + {"null", ForeignTableRelationId}, + {"encoding", ForeignTableRelationId}, /* * force_quote is not supported by file_fdw because it's for COPY TO. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ static struct FileFdwOption valid_options[] = { */ /* Sentinel */ - { NULL, InvalidOid } + {NULL, InvalidOid} }; /* @@ -76,9 +76,9 @@ static struct FileFdwOption valid_options[] = { */ typedef struct FileFdwExecutionState { - char *filename; /* file to read */ - List *options; /* merged COPY options, excluding filename */ - CopyState cstate; /* state of reading file */ + char *filename; /* file to read */ + List *options; /* merged COPY options, excluding filename */ + CopyState cstate; /* state of reading file */ } FileFdwExecutionState; /* @@ -94,8 +94,8 @@ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(file_fdw_validator); * FDW callback routines */ static FdwPlan *filePlanForeignScan(Oid foreigntableid, - PlannerInfo *root, - RelOptInfo *baserel); + PlannerInfo *root, + RelOptInfo *baserel); static void fileExplainForeignScan(ForeignScanState *node, ExplainState *es); static void fileBeginForeignScan(ForeignScanState *node, int eflags); static TupleTableSlot *fileIterateForeignScan(ForeignScanState *node); @@ -109,8 +109,8 @@ static bool is_valid_option(const char *option, Oid context); static void fileGetOptions(Oid foreigntableid, char **filename, List **other_options); static void estimate_costs(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *baserel, - const char *filename, - Cost *startup_cost, Cost *total_cost); + const char *filename, + Cost *startup_cost, Cost *total_cost); /* @@ -149,16 +149,16 @@ file_fdw_validator(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * Only superusers are allowed to set options of a file_fdw foreign table. - * This is because the filename is one of those options, and we don't - * want non-superusers to be able to determine which file gets read. + * This is because the filename is one of those options, and we don't want + * non-superusers to be able to determine which file gets read. * * Putting this sort of permissions check in a validator is a bit of a * crock, but there doesn't seem to be any other place that can enforce * the check more cleanly. * - * Note that the valid_options[] array disallows setting filename at - * any options level other than foreign table --- otherwise there'd - * still be a security hole. + * Note that the valid_options[] array disallows setting filename at any + * options level other than foreign table --- otherwise there'd still be a + * security hole. */ if (catalog == ForeignTableRelationId && !superuser()) ereport(ERROR, @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ file_fdw_validator(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) */ foreach(cell, options_list) { - DefElem *def = (DefElem *) lfirst(cell); + DefElem *def = (DefElem *) lfirst(cell); if (!is_valid_option(def->defname, catalog)) { @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ fileGetOptions(Oid foreigntableid, prev = NULL; foreach(lc, options) { - DefElem *def = (DefElem *) lfirst(lc); + DefElem *def = (DefElem *) lfirst(lc); if (strcmp(def->defname, "filename") == 0) { @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ filePlanForeignScan(Oid foreigntableid, PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *baserel) { - FdwPlan *fdwplan; + FdwPlan *fdwplan; char *filename; List *options; @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ filePlanForeignScan(Oid foreigntableid, fdwplan = makeNode(FdwPlan); estimate_costs(root, baserel, filename, &fdwplan->startup_cost, &fdwplan->total_cost); - fdwplan->fdw_private = NIL; /* not used */ + fdwplan->fdw_private = NIL; /* not used */ return fdwplan; } @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ fileExplainForeignScan(ForeignScanState *node, ExplainState *es) /* Suppress file size if we're not showing cost details */ if (es->costs) { - struct stat stat_buf; + struct stat stat_buf; if (stat(filename, &stat_buf) == 0) ExplainPropertyLong("Foreign File Size", (long) stat_buf.st_size, @@ -368,8 +368,8 @@ fileBeginForeignScan(ForeignScanState *node, int eflags) &filename, &options); /* - * Create CopyState from FDW options. We always acquire all columns, - * so as to match the expected ScanTupleSlot signature. + * Create CopyState from FDW options. We always acquire all columns, so + * as to match the expected ScanTupleSlot signature. */ cstate = BeginCopyFrom(node->ss.ss_currentRelation, filename, @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ fileIterateForeignScan(ForeignScanState *node) { FileFdwExecutionState *festate = (FileFdwExecutionState *) node->fdw_state; TupleTableSlot *slot = node->ss.ss_ScanTupleSlot; - bool found; + bool found; ErrorContextCallback errcontext; /* Set up callback to identify error line number. */ @@ -410,8 +410,8 @@ fileIterateForeignScan(ForeignScanState *node) /* * The protocol for loading a virtual tuple into a slot is first * ExecClearTuple, then fill the values/isnull arrays, then - * ExecStoreVirtualTuple. If we don't find another row in the file, - * we just skip the last step, leaving the slot empty as required. + * ExecStoreVirtualTuple. If we don't find another row in the file, we + * just skip the last step, leaving the slot empty as required. * * We can pass ExprContext = NULL because we read all columns from the * file, so no need to evaluate default expressions. @@ -471,17 +471,17 @@ estimate_costs(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *baserel, const char *filename, Cost *startup_cost, Cost *total_cost) { - struct stat stat_buf; - BlockNumber pages; - int tuple_width; - double ntuples; - double nrows; - Cost run_cost = 0; - Cost cpu_per_tuple; + struct stat stat_buf; + BlockNumber pages; + int tuple_width; + double ntuples; + double nrows; + Cost run_cost = 0; + Cost cpu_per_tuple; /* - * Get size of the file. It might not be there at plan time, though, - * in which case we have to use a default estimate. + * Get size of the file. It might not be there at plan time, though, in + * which case we have to use a default estimate. */ if (stat(filename, &stat_buf) < 0) stat_buf.st_size = 10 * BLCKSZ; @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ estimate_costs(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *baserel, /* * Convert size to pages for use in I/O cost estimate below. */ - pages = (stat_buf.st_size + (BLCKSZ-1)) / BLCKSZ; + pages = (stat_buf.st_size + (BLCKSZ - 1)) / BLCKSZ; if (pages < 1) pages = 1; @@ -505,10 +505,9 @@ estimate_costs(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *baserel, ntuples = clamp_row_est((double) stat_buf.st_size / (double) tuple_width); /* - * Now estimate the number of rows returned by the scan after applying - * the baserestrictinfo quals. This is pretty bogus too, since the - * planner will have no stats about the relation, but it's better than - * nothing. + * Now estimate the number of rows returned by the scan after applying the + * baserestrictinfo quals. This is pretty bogus too, since the planner + * will have no stats about the relation, but it's better than nothing. */ nrows = ntuples * clauselist_selectivity(root, @@ -523,7 +522,7 @@ estimate_costs(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *baserel, baserel->rows = nrows; /* - * Now estimate costs. We estimate costs almost the same way as + * Now estimate costs. We estimate costs almost the same way as * cost_seqscan(), thus assuming that I/O costs are equivalent to a * regular table file of the same size. However, we take per-tuple CPU * costs as 10x of a seqscan, to account for the cost of parsing records. diff --git a/contrib/fuzzystrmatch/levenshtein.c b/contrib/fuzzystrmatch/levenshtein.c index 3d85d4175f..a84c46a4a4 100644 --- a/contrib/fuzzystrmatch/levenshtein.c +++ b/contrib/fuzzystrmatch/levenshtein.c @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ */ #ifdef LEVENSHTEIN_LESS_EQUAL static int levenshtein_less_equal_internal(text *s, text *t, - int ins_c, int del_c, int sub_c, int max_d); + int ins_c, int del_c, int sub_c, int max_d); #else static int levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, int ins_c, int del_c, int sub_c); @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ static int levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, * array. * * If max_d >= 0, we only need to provide an accurate answer when that answer - * is less than or equal to the bound. From any cell in the matrix, there is + * is less than or equal to the bound. From any cell in the matrix, there is * theoretical "minimum residual distance" from that cell to the last column * of the final row. This minimum residual distance is zero when the * untransformed portions of the strings are of equal length (because we might @@ -87,11 +87,13 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, /* * For levenshtein_less_equal_internal, we have real variables called - * start_column and stop_column; otherwise it's just short-hand for 0 - * and m. + * start_column and stop_column; otherwise it's just short-hand for 0 and + * m. */ #ifdef LEVENSHTEIN_LESS_EQUAL - int start_column, stop_column; + int start_column, + stop_column; + #undef START_COLUMN #undef STOP_COLUMN #define START_COLUMN start_column @@ -139,16 +141,16 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, stop_column = m + 1; /* - * If max_d >= 0, determine whether the bound is impossibly tight. If so, + * If max_d >= 0, determine whether the bound is impossibly tight. If so, * return max_d + 1 immediately. Otherwise, determine whether it's tight * enough to limit the computation we must perform. If so, figure out * initial stop column. */ if (max_d >= 0) { - int min_theo_d; /* Theoretical minimum distance. */ - int max_theo_d; /* Theoretical maximum distance. */ - int net_inserts = n - m; + int min_theo_d; /* Theoretical minimum distance. */ + int max_theo_d; /* Theoretical maximum distance. */ + int net_inserts = n - m; min_theo_d = net_inserts < 0 ? -net_inserts * del_c : net_inserts * ins_c; @@ -162,20 +164,20 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, else if (ins_c + del_c > 0) { /* - * Figure out how much of the first row of the notional matrix - * we need to fill in. If the string is growing, the theoretical + * Figure out how much of the first row of the notional matrix we + * need to fill in. If the string is growing, the theoretical * minimum distance already incorporates the cost of deleting the - * number of characters necessary to make the two strings equal - * in length. Each additional deletion forces another insertion, - * so the best-case total cost increases by ins_c + del_c. - * If the string is shrinking, the minimum theoretical cost - * assumes no excess deletions; that is, we're starting no futher - * right than column n - m. If we do start further right, the - * best-case total cost increases by ins_c + del_c for each move - * right. + * number of characters necessary to make the two strings equal in + * length. Each additional deletion forces another insertion, so + * the best-case total cost increases by ins_c + del_c. If the + * string is shrinking, the minimum theoretical cost assumes no + * excess deletions; that is, we're starting no futher right than + * column n - m. If we do start further right, the best-case + * total cost increases by ins_c + del_c for each move right. */ - int slack_d = max_d - min_theo_d; - int best_column = net_inserts < 0 ? -net_inserts : 0; + int slack_d = max_d - min_theo_d; + int best_column = net_inserts < 0 ? -net_inserts : 0; + stop_column = best_column + (slack_d / (ins_c + del_c)) + 1; if (stop_column > m) stop_column = m + 1; @@ -185,15 +187,15 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, /* * In order to avoid calling pg_mblen() repeatedly on each character in s, - * we cache all the lengths before starting the main loop -- but if all the - * characters in both strings are single byte, then we skip this and use - * a fast-path in the main loop. If only one string contains multi-byte - * characters, we still build the array, so that the fast-path needn't - * deal with the case where the array hasn't been initialized. + * we cache all the lengths before starting the main loop -- but if all + * the characters in both strings are single byte, then we skip this and + * use a fast-path in the main loop. If only one string contains + * multi-byte characters, we still build the array, so that the fast-path + * needn't deal with the case where the array hasn't been initialized. */ if (m != s_bytes || n != t_bytes) { - int i; + int i; const char *cp = s_data; s_char_len = (int *) palloc((m + 1) * sizeof(int)); @@ -214,8 +216,8 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, curr = prev + m; /* - * To transform the first i characters of s into the first 0 characters - * of t, we must perform i deletions. + * To transform the first i characters of s into the first 0 characters of + * t, we must perform i deletions. */ for (i = START_COLUMN; i < STOP_COLUMN; i++) prev[i] = i * del_c; @@ -228,6 +230,7 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, int y_char_len = n != t_bytes + 1 ? pg_mblen(y) : 1; #ifdef LEVENSHTEIN_LESS_EQUAL + /* * In the best case, values percolate down the diagonal unchanged, so * we must increment stop_column unless it's already on the right end @@ -241,10 +244,10 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, } /* - * The main loop fills in curr, but curr[0] needs a special case: - * to transform the first 0 characters of s into the first j - * characters of t, we must perform j insertions. However, if - * start_column > 0, this special case does not apply. + * The main loop fills in curr, but curr[0] needs a special case: to + * transform the first 0 characters of s into the first j characters + * of t, we must perform j insertions. However, if start_column > 0, + * this special case does not apply. */ if (start_column == 0) { @@ -285,7 +288,7 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, */ ins = prev[i] + ins_c; del = curr[i - 1] + del_c; - if (x[x_char_len-1] == y[y_char_len-1] + if (x[x_char_len - 1] == y[y_char_len - 1] && x_char_len == y_char_len && (x_char_len == 1 || rest_of_char_same(x, y, x_char_len))) sub = prev[i - 1]; @@ -331,6 +334,7 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, y += y_char_len; #ifdef LEVENSHTEIN_LESS_EQUAL + /* * This chunk of code represents a significant performance hit if used * in the case where there is no max_d bound. This is probably not @@ -348,15 +352,16 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, * string, so we want to find the value for zp where where (n - 1) * - j = (m - 1) - zp. */ - int zp = j - (n - m); + int zp = j - (n - m); /* Check whether the stop column can slide left. */ while (stop_column > 0) { - int ii = stop_column - 1; - int net_inserts = ii - zp; + int ii = stop_column - 1; + int net_inserts = ii - zp; + if (prev[ii] + (net_inserts > 0 ? net_inserts * ins_c : - -net_inserts * del_c) <= max_d) + -net_inserts * del_c) <= max_d) break; stop_column--; } @@ -364,14 +369,16 @@ levenshtein_internal(text *s, text *t, /* Check whether the start column can slide right. */ while (start_column < stop_column) { - int net_inserts = start_column - zp; + int net_inserts = start_column - zp; + if (prev[start_column] + (net_inserts > 0 ? net_inserts * ins_c : - -net_inserts * del_c) <= max_d) + -net_inserts * del_c) <= max_d) break; + /* - * We'll never again update these values, so we must make - * sure there's nothing here that could confuse any future + * We'll never again update these values, so we must make sure + * there's nothing here that could confuse any future * iteration of the outer loop. */ prev[start_column] = max_d + 1; diff --git a/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c b/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c index d55674c79f..2007801cf0 100644 --- a/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c +++ b/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ /* * When using a GIN index for hstore, we choose to index both keys and values. * The storage format is "text" values, with K, V, or N prepended to the string - * to indicate key, value, or null values. (As of 9.1 it might be better to + * to indicate key, value, or null values. (As of 9.1 it might be better to * store null values as nulls, but we'll keep it this way for on-disk * compatibility.) */ @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ gin_consistent_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { /* * Index doesn't have information about correspondence of keys and - * values, so we need recheck. However, if not all the keys are + * values, so we need recheck. However, if not all the keys are * present, we can fail at once. */ *recheck = true; diff --git a/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c b/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c index cb6200ab1d..5b278c14ff 100644 --- a/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c +++ b/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ hstore_delete_hstore(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (snullval != HS_VALISNULL(es2, j) || (!snullval && (svallen != HS_VALLEN(es2, j) - || memcmp(HS_VAL(es, ps, i), HS_VAL(es2, ps2, j), svallen) != 0))) + || memcmp(HS_VAL(es, ps, i), HS_VAL(es2, ps2, j), svallen) != 0))) { HS_COPYITEM(ed, bufd, pd, HS_KEY(es, ps, i), HS_KEYLEN(es, i), @@ -1000,7 +1000,7 @@ hstore_contains(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (nullval != HS_VALISNULL(ve, idx) || (!nullval && (vallen != HS_VALLEN(ve, idx) - || memcmp(HS_VAL(te, tstr, i), HS_VAL(ve, vstr, idx), vallen)))) + || memcmp(HS_VAL(te, tstr, i), HS_VAL(ve, vstr, idx), vallen)))) res = false; } else diff --git a/contrib/intarray/_int_bool.c b/contrib/intarray/_int_bool.c index 072e8cc897..4e63f6d66c 100644 --- a/contrib/intarray/_int_bool.c +++ b/contrib/intarray/_int_bool.c @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ gettoken(WORKSTATE *state, int4 *val) } else { - long lval; + long lval; nnn[innn] = '\0'; errno = 0; @@ -355,8 +355,8 @@ gin_bool_consistent(QUERYTYPE *query, bool *check) return FALSE; /* - * Set up data for checkcondition_gin. This must agree with the - * query extraction code in ginint4_queryextract. + * Set up data for checkcondition_gin. This must agree with the query + * extraction code in ginint4_queryextract. */ gcv.first = items; gcv.mapped_check = (bool *) palloc(sizeof(bool) * query->size); diff --git a/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c b/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c index 3ef5c4635a..9abe54e55f 100644 --- a/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c +++ b/contrib/intarray/_int_gin.c @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ ginint4_queryextract(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * If the query doesn't have any required primitive values (for - * instance, it's something like '! 42'), we have to do a full - * index scan. + * instance, it's something like '! 42'), we have to do a full index + * scan. */ if (query_has_required_values(query)) *searchMode = GIN_SEARCH_MODE_DEFAULT; @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ ginint4_queryextract(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) case RTOldContainsStrategyNumber: if (*nentries > 0) *searchMode = GIN_SEARCH_MODE_DEFAULT; - else /* everything contains the empty set */ + else /* everything contains the empty set */ *searchMode = GIN_SEARCH_MODE_ALL; break; default: @@ -116,6 +116,7 @@ ginint4_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(1); int32 nkeys = PG_GETARG_INT32(3); + /* Pointer *extra_data = (Pointer *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4); */ bool *recheck = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(5); bool res = FALSE; diff --git a/contrib/intarray/_int_tool.c b/contrib/intarray/_int_tool.c index ddf07f042b..bfc55501db 100644 --- a/contrib/intarray/_int_tool.c +++ b/contrib/intarray/_int_tool.c @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ rt__int_size(ArrayType *a, float *size) *size = (float) ARRNELEMS(a); } -/* Sort the given data (len >= 2). Return true if any duplicates found */ +/* Sort the given data (len >= 2). Return true if any duplicates found */ bool isort(int4 *a, int len) { @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ isort(int4 *a, int len) bool r = FALSE; /* - * We use a simple insertion sort. While this is O(N^2) in the worst + * We use a simple insertion sort. While this is O(N^2) in the worst * case, it's quite fast if the input is already sorted or nearly so. * Also, for not-too-large inputs it's faster than more complex methods * anyhow. diff --git a/contrib/isn/ISBN.h b/contrib/isn/ISBN.h index c0301ced1e..dbda6fb724 100644 --- a/contrib/isn/ISBN.h +++ b/contrib/isn/ISBN.h @@ -988,4 +988,3 @@ const char *ISBN_range_new[][2] = { {"10-976000", "10-999999"}, {NULL, NULL}, }; - diff --git a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c index 79892077c8..d96eef2c5a 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c +++ b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c @@ -25,9 +25,9 @@ #ifdef HAVE_GETOPT_H #include <getopt.h> #endif -#else /* WIN32 */ +#else /* WIN32 */ extern int getopt(int argc, char *const argv[], const char *optstring); -#endif /* ! WIN32 */ +#endif /* ! WIN32 */ extern char *optarg; extern int optind; diff --git a/contrib/pg_stat_statements/pg_stat_statements.c b/contrib/pg_stat_statements/pg_stat_statements.c index 87cf8c55cf..0236b87498 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_stat_statements/pg_stat_statements.c +++ b/contrib/pg_stat_statements/pg_stat_statements.c @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ typedef enum PGSS_TRACK_NONE, /* track no statements */ PGSS_TRACK_TOP, /* only top level statements */ PGSS_TRACK_ALL /* all statements, including nested ones */ -} PGSSTrackLevel; +} PGSSTrackLevel; static const struct config_enum_entry track_options[] = { diff --git a/contrib/pg_test_fsync/pg_test_fsync.c b/contrib/pg_test_fsync/pg_test_fsync.c index 49a7b3c2c0..305b3d0723 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_test_fsync/pg_test_fsync.c +++ b/contrib/pg_test_fsync/pg_test_fsync.c @@ -28,24 +28,28 @@ static const char *progname; -static int ops_per_test = 2000; -static char full_buf[XLOG_SEG_SIZE], *buf, *filename = FSYNC_FILENAME; -static struct timeval start_t, stop_t; - - -static void handle_args(int argc, char *argv[]); -static void prepare_buf(void); -static void test_open(void); -static void test_non_sync(void); -static void test_sync(int writes_per_op); -static void test_open_syncs(void); -static void test_open_sync(const char *msg, int writes_size); -static void test_file_descriptor_sync(void); +static int ops_per_test = 2000; +static char full_buf[XLOG_SEG_SIZE], + *buf, + *filename = FSYNC_FILENAME; +static struct timeval start_t, + stop_t; + + +static void handle_args(int argc, char *argv[]); +static void prepare_buf(void); +static void test_open(void); +static void test_non_sync(void); +static void test_sync(int writes_per_op); +static void test_open_syncs(void); +static void test_open_sync(const char *msg, int writes_size); +static void test_file_descriptor_sync(void); + #ifdef HAVE_FSYNC_WRITETHROUGH static int pg_fsync_writethrough(int fd); #endif -static void print_elapse(struct timeval start_t, struct timeval stop_t); -static void die(const char *str); +static void print_elapse(struct timeval start_t, struct timeval stop_t); +static void die(const char *str); int @@ -103,7 +107,7 @@ handle_args(int argc, char *argv[]) } while ((option = getopt_long(argc, argv, "f:o:", - long_options, &optindex)) != -1) + long_options, &optindex)) != -1) { switch (option) { @@ -176,7 +180,9 @@ test_open(void) static void test_sync(int writes_per_op) { - int tmpfile, ops, writes; + int tmpfile, + ops, + writes; bool fs_warning = false; if (writes_per_op == 1) @@ -353,7 +359,9 @@ test_open_syncs(void) static void test_open_sync(const char *msg, int writes_size) { - int tmpfile, ops, writes; + int tmpfile, + ops, + writes; printf(LABEL_FORMAT, msg); fflush(stdout); @@ -377,7 +385,6 @@ test_open_sync(const char *msg, int writes_size) close(tmpfile); print_elapse(start_t, stop_t); } - #else printf(NA_FORMAT, "n/a\n"); #endif @@ -386,22 +393,22 @@ test_open_sync(const char *msg, int writes_size) static void test_file_descriptor_sync(void) { - int tmpfile, ops; + int tmpfile, + ops; /* - * Test whether fsync can sync data written on a different - * descriptor for the same file. This checks the efficiency - * of multi-process fsyncs against the same file. - * Possibly this should be done with writethrough on platforms - * which support it. + * Test whether fsync can sync data written on a different descriptor for + * the same file. This checks the efficiency of multi-process fsyncs + * against the same file. Possibly this should be done with writethrough + * on platforms which support it. */ printf("\nTest if fsync on non-write file descriptor is honored:\n"); printf("(If the times are similar, fsync() can sync data written\n"); printf("on a different descriptor.)\n"); /* - * first write, fsync and close, which is the - * normal behavior without multiple descriptors + * first write, fsync and close, which is the normal behavior without + * multiple descriptors */ printf(LABEL_FORMAT, "write, fsync, close"); fflush(stdout); @@ -416,9 +423,10 @@ test_file_descriptor_sync(void) if (fsync(tmpfile) != 0) die("fsync failed"); close(tmpfile); + /* - * open and close the file again to be consistent - * with the following test + * open and close the file again to be consistent with the following + * test */ if ((tmpfile = open(filename, O_RDWR, 0)) == -1) die("could not open output file"); @@ -428,9 +436,8 @@ test_file_descriptor_sync(void) print_elapse(start_t, stop_t); /* - * Now open, write, close, open again and fsync - * This simulates processes fsyncing each other's - * writes. + * Now open, write, close, open again and fsync This simulates processes + * fsyncing each other's writes. */ printf(LABEL_FORMAT, "write, close, fsync"); fflush(stdout); @@ -458,7 +465,8 @@ test_file_descriptor_sync(void) static void test_non_sync(void) { - int tmpfile, ops; + int tmpfile, + ops; /* * Test a simple write without fsync @@ -494,7 +502,6 @@ pg_fsync_writethrough(int fd) return -1; #endif } - #endif /* diff --git a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm.h b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm.h index f3644fcce7..61de5d89d1 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm.h +++ b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm.h @@ -51,8 +51,9 @@ uint32 trgm2int(trgm *ptr); #endif #define ISPRINTABLETRGM(t) ( ISPRINTABLECHAR( ((char*)(t)) ) && ISPRINTABLECHAR( ((char*)(t))+1 ) && ISPRINTABLECHAR( ((char*)(t))+2 ) ) -#define ISESCAPECHAR(x) (*(x) == '\\') /* Wildcard escape character */ -#define ISWILDCARDCHAR(x) (*(x) == '_' || *(x) == '%') /* Wildcard meta-character */ +#define ISESCAPECHAR(x) (*(x) == '\\') /* Wildcard escape character */ +#define ISWILDCARDCHAR(x) (*(x) == '_' || *(x) == '%') /* Wildcard + * meta-character */ typedef struct { @@ -105,4 +106,4 @@ TRGM *generate_wildcard_trgm(const char *str, int slen); float4 cnt_sml(TRGM *trg1, TRGM *trg2); bool trgm_contained_by(TRGM *trg1, TRGM *trg2); -#endif /* __TRGM_H__ */ +#endif /* __TRGM_H__ */ diff --git a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c index aaca1f9737..43ac0b0c65 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c +++ b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gin.c @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ gin_extract_value_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ptr = GETARR(trg); for (i = 0; i < trglen; i++) { - int32 item = trgm2int(ptr); + int32 item = trgm2int(ptr); entries[i] = Int32GetDatum(item); ptr++; @@ -83,10 +83,11 @@ gin_extract_query_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) text *val = (text *) PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(2); - /* bool **pmatch = (bool **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(3); */ - /* Pointer *extra_data = (Pointer *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4); */ - /* bool **nullFlags = (bool **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(5); */ - int32 *searchMode = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(6); + + /* bool **pmatch = (bool **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(3); */ + /* Pointer *extra_data = (Pointer *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4); */ + /* bool **nullFlags = (bool **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(5); */ + int32 *searchMode = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(6); Datum *entries = NULL; TRGM *trg; int32 trglen; @@ -104,6 +105,7 @@ gin_extract_query_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) #endif /* FALL THRU */ case LikeStrategyNumber: + /* * For wildcard search we extract all the trigrams that every * potentially-matching string must include. @@ -112,7 +114,7 @@ gin_extract_query_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) break; default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized strategy number: %d", strategy); - trg = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ + trg = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ break; } @@ -125,7 +127,7 @@ gin_extract_query_trgm(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ptr = GETARR(trg); for (i = 0; i < trglen; i++) { - int32 item = trgm2int(ptr); + int32 item = trgm2int(ptr); entries[i] = Int32GetDatum(item); ptr++; @@ -146,9 +148,11 @@ gin_trgm_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(1); + /* text *query = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(2); */ int32 nkeys = PG_GETARG_INT32(3); - /* Pointer *extra_data = (Pointer *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4); */ + + /* Pointer *extra_data = (Pointer *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4); */ bool *recheck = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(5); bool res; int32 i, diff --git a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gist.c b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gist.c index d83265c11c..b328a09f41 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gist.c +++ b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_gist.c @@ -190,17 +190,18 @@ gtrgm_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) GISTENTRY *entry = (GISTENTRY *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); text *query = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); StrategyNumber strategy = (StrategyNumber) PG_GETARG_UINT16(2); + /* Oid subtype = PG_GETARG_OID(3); */ bool *recheck = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4); TRGM *key = (TRGM *) DatumGetPointer(entry->key); TRGM *qtrg; bool res; char *cache = (char *) fcinfo->flinfo->fn_extra, - *cacheContents = cache + MAXALIGN(sizeof(StrategyNumber)); + *cacheContents = cache + MAXALIGN(sizeof(StrategyNumber)); /* * Store both the strategy number and extracted trigrams in cache, because - * trigram extraction is relatively CPU-expensive. We must include + * trigram extraction is relatively CPU-expensive. We must include * strategy number because trigram extraction depends on strategy. */ if (cache == NULL || strategy != *((StrategyNumber *) cache) || @@ -222,7 +223,7 @@ gtrgm_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) break; default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized strategy number: %d", strategy); - qtrg = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ + qtrg = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ break; } @@ -251,20 +252,20 @@ gtrgm_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) *recheck = false; if (GIST_LEAF(entry)) - { /* all leafs contains orig trgm */ - float4 tmpsml = cnt_sml(key, qtrg); + { /* all leafs contains orig trgm */ + float4 tmpsml = cnt_sml(key, qtrg); /* strange bug at freebsd 5.2.1 and gcc 3.3.3 */ res = (*(int *) &tmpsml == *(int *) &trgm_limit || tmpsml > trgm_limit) ? true : false; } else if (ISALLTRUE(key)) - { /* non-leaf contains signature */ + { /* non-leaf contains signature */ res = true; } else - { /* non-leaf contains signature */ - int4 count = cnt_sml_sign_common(qtrg, GETSIGN(key)); - int4 len = ARRNELEM(qtrg); + { /* non-leaf contains signature */ + int4 count = cnt_sml_sign_common(qtrg, GETSIGN(key)); + int4 len = ARRNELEM(qtrg); if (len == 0) res = false; @@ -286,20 +287,20 @@ gtrgm_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * nodes. */ if (GIST_LEAF(entry)) - { /* all leafs contains orig trgm */ + { /* all leafs contains orig trgm */ res = trgm_contained_by(qtrg, key); } else if (ISALLTRUE(key)) - { /* non-leaf contains signature */ + { /* non-leaf contains signature */ res = true; } else - { /* non-leaf contains signature */ - int32 k, - tmp = 0, - len = ARRNELEM(qtrg); - trgm *ptr = GETARR(qtrg); - BITVECP sign = GETSIGN(key); + { /* non-leaf contains signature */ + int32 k, + tmp = 0, + len = ARRNELEM(qtrg); + trgm *ptr = GETARR(qtrg); + BITVECP sign = GETSIGN(key); res = true; for (k = 0; k < len; k++) @@ -328,6 +329,7 @@ gtrgm_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) GISTENTRY *entry = (GISTENTRY *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); text *query = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); StrategyNumber strategy = (StrategyNumber) PG_GETARG_UINT16(2); + /* Oid subtype = PG_GETARG_OID(3); */ TRGM *key = (TRGM *) DatumGetPointer(entry->key); TRGM *qtrg; @@ -355,17 +357,17 @@ gtrgm_distance(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { case DistanceStrategyNumber: if (GIST_LEAF(entry)) - { /* all leafs contains orig trgm */ + { /* all leafs contains orig trgm */ res = 1.0 - cnt_sml(key, qtrg); } else if (ISALLTRUE(key)) - { /* all leafs contains orig trgm */ + { /* all leafs contains orig trgm */ res = 0.0; } else - { /* non-leaf contains signature */ - int4 count = cnt_sml_sign_common(qtrg, GETSIGN(key)); - int4 len = ARRNELEM(qtrg); + { /* non-leaf contains signature */ + int4 count = cnt_sml_sign_common(qtrg, GETSIGN(key)); + int4 len = ARRNELEM(qtrg); res = (len == 0) ? -1.0 : 1.0 - ((float8) count) / ((float8) len); } diff --git a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_op.c b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_op.c index 52f9172f6d..dfb2df5048 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_op.c +++ b/contrib/pg_trgm/trgm_op.c @@ -273,9 +273,9 @@ get_wildcard_part(const char *str, int lenstr, const char *beginword = str; const char *endword; char *s = buf; - bool in_wildcard_meta = false; - bool in_escape = false; - int clen; + bool in_wildcard_meta = false; + bool in_escape = false; + int clen; /* * Find the first word character remembering whether last character was @@ -410,14 +410,14 @@ generate_wildcard_trgm(const char *str, int slen) { TRGM *trg; char *buf, - *buf2; + *buf2; trgm *tptr; int len, charlen, bytelen; const char *eword; - trg = (TRGM *) palloc(TRGMHDRSIZE + sizeof(trgm) * (slen / 2 + 1) * 3); + trg = (TRGM *) palloc(TRGMHDRSIZE + sizeof(trgm) * (slen / 2 + 1) *3); trg->flag = ARRKEY; SET_VARSIZE(trg, TRGMHDRSIZE); @@ -638,6 +638,7 @@ similarity_dist(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) float4 res = DatumGetFloat4(DirectFunctionCall2(similarity, PG_GETARG_DATUM(0), PG_GETARG_DATUM(1))); + PG_RETURN_FLOAT4(1.0 - res); } diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/check.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/check.c index 05aac8fde9..747244072d 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/check.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/check.c @@ -212,7 +212,10 @@ check_cluster_versions(void) old_cluster.major_version = get_major_server_version(&old_cluster); new_cluster.major_version = get_major_server_version(&new_cluster); - /* We allow upgrades from/to the same major version for alpha/beta upgrades */ + /* + * We allow upgrades from/to the same major version for alpha/beta + * upgrades + */ if (GET_MAJOR_VERSION(old_cluster.major_version) < 803) pg_log(PG_FATAL, "This utility can only upgrade from PostgreSQL version 8.3 and later.\n"); @@ -516,7 +519,7 @@ check_for_isn_and_int8_passing_mismatch(ClusterInfo *cluster) } if (script) - fclose(script); + fclose(script); if (found) { diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/controldata.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/controldata.c index 78c75e8a84..3ac2180d49 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/controldata.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/controldata.c @@ -505,8 +505,7 @@ check_control_data(ControlData *oldctrl, "\nOld and new pg_controldata date/time storage types do not match.\n"); /* - * This is a common 8.3 -> 8.4 upgrade problem, so we are more - * verbose + * This is a common 8.3 -> 8.4 upgrade problem, so we are more verbose */ pg_log(PG_FATAL, "You will need to rebuild the new server with configure\n" diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/exec.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/exec.c index 7095ba62a8..59a76bc8ae 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/exec.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/exec.c @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ static void check_data_dir(const char *pg_data); static void check_bin_dir(ClusterInfo *cluster); -static void validate_exec(const char *dir, const char *cmdName); +static void validate_exec(const char *dir, const char *cmdName); /* diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/file.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/file.c index 0024b6ee00..f8f7233593 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/file.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/file.c @@ -377,4 +377,5 @@ win32_pghardlink(const char *src, const char *dst) else return 0; } + #endif diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/function.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/function.c index c01ff046bb..322014cd23 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/function.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/function.c @@ -21,13 +21,13 @@ void install_support_functions_in_new_db(const char *db_name) { - PGconn *conn = connectToServer(&new_cluster, db_name); - + PGconn *conn = connectToServer(&new_cluster, db_name); + /* suppress NOTICE of dropped objects */ PQclear(executeQueryOrDie(conn, "SET client_min_messages = warning;")); PQclear(executeQueryOrDie(conn, - "DROP SCHEMA IF EXISTS binary_upgrade CASCADE;")); + "DROP SCHEMA IF EXISTS binary_upgrade CASCADE;")); PQclear(executeQueryOrDie(conn, "RESET client_min_messages;")); @@ -42,31 +42,31 @@ install_support_functions_in_new_db(const char *db_name) "LANGUAGE C STRICT;")); PQclear(executeQueryOrDie(conn, "CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION " - "binary_upgrade.set_next_array_pg_type_oid(OID) " + "binary_upgrade.set_next_array_pg_type_oid(OID) " "RETURNS VOID " "AS '$libdir/pg_upgrade_support' " "LANGUAGE C STRICT;")); PQclear(executeQueryOrDie(conn, "CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION " - "binary_upgrade.set_next_toast_pg_type_oid(OID) " + "binary_upgrade.set_next_toast_pg_type_oid(OID) " "RETURNS VOID " "AS '$libdir/pg_upgrade_support' " "LANGUAGE C STRICT;")); PQclear(executeQueryOrDie(conn, "CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION " - "binary_upgrade.set_next_heap_pg_class_oid(OID) " + "binary_upgrade.set_next_heap_pg_class_oid(OID) " "RETURNS VOID " "AS '$libdir/pg_upgrade_support' " "LANGUAGE C STRICT;")); PQclear(executeQueryOrDie(conn, "CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION " - "binary_upgrade.set_next_index_pg_class_oid(OID) " + "binary_upgrade.set_next_index_pg_class_oid(OID) " "RETURNS VOID " "AS '$libdir/pg_upgrade_support' " "LANGUAGE C STRICT;")); PQclear(executeQueryOrDie(conn, "CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION " - "binary_upgrade.set_next_toast_pg_class_oid(OID) " + "binary_upgrade.set_next_toast_pg_class_oid(OID) " "RETURNS VOID " "AS '$libdir/pg_upgrade_support' " "LANGUAGE C STRICT;")); diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/info.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/info.c index ceb1601cc6..f0cd8e5ede 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/info.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/info.c @@ -13,9 +13,9 @@ static void create_rel_filename_map(const char *old_data, const char *new_data, - const DbInfo *old_db, const DbInfo *new_db, - const RelInfo *old_rel, const RelInfo *new_rel, - FileNameMap *map); + const DbInfo *old_db, const DbInfo *new_db, + const RelInfo *old_rel, const RelInfo *new_rel, + FileNameMap *map); static void get_db_infos(ClusterInfo *cluster); static void get_rel_infos(ClusterInfo *cluster, DbInfo *dbinfo); static void free_rel_infos(RelInfoArr *rel_arr); @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ gen_db_file_maps(DbInfo *old_db, DbInfo *new_db, if (old_db->rel_arr.nrels != new_db->rel_arr.nrels) pg_log(PG_FATAL, "old and new databases \"%s\" have a different number of relations\n", - old_db->db_name); + old_db->db_name); maps = (FileNameMap *) pg_malloc(sizeof(FileNameMap) * old_db->rel_arr.nrels); @@ -52,24 +52,24 @@ gen_db_file_maps(DbInfo *old_db, DbInfo *new_db, if (old_rel->reloid != new_rel->reloid) pg_log(PG_FATAL, "Mismatch of relation id: database \"%s\", old relid %d, new relid %d\n", - old_db->db_name, old_rel->reloid, new_rel->reloid); + old_db->db_name, old_rel->reloid, new_rel->reloid); /* - * In pre-8.4, TOAST table names change during CLUSTER; in >= 8.4 - * TOAST relation names always use heap table oids, hence we - * cannot check relation names when upgrading from pre-8.4. + * In pre-8.4, TOAST table names change during CLUSTER; in >= 8.4 + * TOAST relation names always use heap table oids, hence we cannot + * check relation names when upgrading from pre-8.4. */ if (strcmp(old_rel->nspname, new_rel->nspname) != 0 || ((GET_MAJOR_VERSION(old_cluster.major_version) >= 804 || strcmp(old_rel->nspname, "pg_toast") != 0) && strcmp(old_rel->relname, new_rel->relname) != 0)) pg_log(PG_FATAL, "Mismatch of relation names: database \"%s\", " - "old rel %s.%s, new rel %s.%s\n", - old_db->db_name, old_rel->nspname, old_rel->relname, - new_rel->nspname, new_rel->relname); + "old rel %s.%s, new rel %s.%s\n", + old_db->db_name, old_rel->nspname, old_rel->relname, + new_rel->nspname, new_rel->relname); create_rel_filename_map(old_pgdata, new_pgdata, old_db, new_db, - old_rel, new_rel, maps + num_maps); + old_rel, new_rel, maps + num_maps); num_maps++; } @@ -85,9 +85,9 @@ gen_db_file_maps(DbInfo *old_db, DbInfo *new_db, */ static void create_rel_filename_map(const char *old_data, const char *new_data, - const DbInfo *old_db, const DbInfo *new_db, - const RelInfo *old_rel, const RelInfo *new_rel, - FileNameMap *map) + const DbInfo *old_db, const DbInfo *new_db, + const RelInfo *old_rel, const RelInfo *new_rel, + FileNameMap *map) { if (strlen(old_rel->tablespace) == 0) { @@ -110,8 +110,8 @@ create_rel_filename_map(const char *old_data, const char *new_data, } /* - * old_relfilenode might differ from pg_class.oid (and hence - * new_relfilenode) because of CLUSTER, REINDEX, or VACUUM FULL. + * old_relfilenode might differ from pg_class.oid (and hence + * new_relfilenode) because of CLUSTER, REINDEX, or VACUUM FULL. */ map->old_relfilenode = old_rel->relfilenode; @@ -185,7 +185,9 @@ get_db_infos(ClusterInfo *cluster) int ntups; int tupnum; DbInfo *dbinfos; - int i_datname, i_oid, i_spclocation; + int i_datname, + i_oid, + i_spclocation; res = executeQueryOrDie(conn, "SELECT d.oid, d.datname, t.spclocation " @@ -241,15 +243,19 @@ get_rel_infos(ClusterInfo *cluster, DbInfo *dbinfo) int num_rels = 0; char *nspname = NULL; char *relname = NULL; - int i_spclocation, i_nspname, i_relname, i_oid, i_relfilenode; + int i_spclocation, + i_nspname, + i_relname, + i_oid, + i_relfilenode; char query[QUERY_ALLOC]; /* * pg_largeobject contains user data that does not appear in pg_dumpall * --schema-only output, so we have to copy that system table heap and - * index. We could grab the pg_largeobject oids from template1, but - * it is easy to treat it as a normal table. - * Order by oid so we can join old/new structures efficiently. + * index. We could grab the pg_largeobject oids from template1, but it is + * easy to treat it as a normal table. Order by oid so we can join old/new + * structures efficiently. */ snprintf(query, sizeof(query), @@ -263,7 +269,7 @@ get_rel_infos(ClusterInfo *cluster, DbInfo *dbinfo) " ((n.nspname NOT IN ('pg_catalog', 'information_schema', 'binary_upgrade') AND " " c.oid >= %u) " " OR (n.nspname = 'pg_catalog' AND " - " relname IN ('pg_largeobject', 'pg_largeobject_loid_pn_index'%s) )) " + " relname IN ('pg_largeobject', 'pg_largeobject_loid_pn_index'%s) )) " /* we preserve pg_class.oid so we sort by it to match old/new */ "ORDER BY 1;", /* see the comment at the top of old_8_3_create_sequence_script() */ @@ -273,7 +279,7 @@ get_rel_infos(ClusterInfo *cluster, DbInfo *dbinfo) FirstNormalObjectId, /* does pg_largeobject_metadata need to be migrated? */ (GET_MAJOR_VERSION(old_cluster.major_version) <= 804) ? - "" : ", 'pg_largeobject_metadata', 'pg_largeobject_metadata_oid_index'"); + "" : ", 'pg_largeobject_metadata', 'pg_largeobject_metadata_oid_index'"); res = executeQueryOrDie(conn, query); diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.c index 061544cac8..e435aaef08 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.c @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * FYI, while pg_class.oid and pg_class.relfilenode are intially the same * in a cluster, but they can diverge due to CLUSTER, REINDEX, or VACUUM * FULL. The new cluster will have matching pg_class.oid and - * pg_class.relfilenode values and be based on the old oid value. This can + * pg_class.relfilenode values and be based on the old oid value. This can * cause the old and new pg_class.relfilenode values to differ. In summary, * old and new pg_class.oid and new pg_class.relfilenode will have the * same value, and old pg_class.relfilenode might differ. @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ */ - + #include "pg_upgrade.h" #ifdef HAVE_LANGINFO_H @@ -53,7 +53,8 @@ static void cleanup(void); /* This is the database used by pg_dumpall to restore global tables */ #define GLOBAL_DUMP_DB "postgres" -ClusterInfo old_cluster, new_cluster; +ClusterInfo old_cluster, + new_cluster; OSInfo os_info; int @@ -192,7 +193,7 @@ prepare_new_cluster(void) exec_prog(true, SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/vacuumdb\" --port %d --username \"%s\" " "--all --analyze >> %s 2>&1" SYSTEMQUOTE, - new_cluster.bindir, new_cluster.port, os_info.user, log_opts.filename); + new_cluster.bindir, new_cluster.port, os_info.user, log_opts.filename); check_ok(); /* @@ -205,7 +206,7 @@ prepare_new_cluster(void) exec_prog(true, SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/vacuumdb\" --port %d --username \"%s\" " "--all --freeze >> %s 2>&1" SYSTEMQUOTE, - new_cluster.bindir, new_cluster.port, os_info.user, log_opts.filename); + new_cluster.bindir, new_cluster.port, os_info.user, log_opts.filename); check_ok(); get_pg_database_relfilenode(&new_cluster); @@ -229,16 +230,16 @@ prepare_new_databases(void) prep_status("Creating databases in the new cluster"); /* - * Install support functions in the global-restore database - * to preserve pg_authid.oid. + * Install support functions in the global-restore database to preserve + * pg_authid.oid. */ install_support_functions_in_new_db(GLOBAL_DUMP_DB); /* * We have to create the databases first so we can install support - * functions in all the other databases. Ideally we could create - * the support functions in template1 but pg_dumpall creates database - * using the template0 template. + * functions in all the other databases. Ideally we could create the + * support functions in template1 but pg_dumpall creates database using + * the template0 template. */ exec_prog(true, SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/psql\" --set ON_ERROR_STOP=on " diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.h b/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.h index 8f72ea80d7..5ca570eb15 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.h +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.h @@ -85,6 +85,7 @@ typedef struct { char old_dir[MAXPGPATH]; char new_dir[MAXPGPATH]; + /* * old/new relfilenodes might differ for pg_largeobject(_metadata) indexes * due to VACUUM FULL or REINDEX. Other relfilenodes are preserved. @@ -92,7 +93,7 @@ typedef struct Oid old_relfilenode; Oid new_relfilenode; /* the rest are used only for logging and error reporting */ - char nspname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* namespaces */ + char nspname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* namespaces */ char relname[NAMEDATALEN]; } FileNameMap; @@ -180,7 +181,7 @@ typedef struct char *bindir; /* pathname for cluster's executable directory */ unsigned short port; /* port number where postmaster is waiting */ uint32 major_version; /* PG_VERSION of cluster */ - char major_version_str[64]; /* string PG_VERSION of cluster */ + char major_version_str[64]; /* string PG_VERSION of cluster */ Oid pg_database_oid; /* OID of pg_database relation */ char *libpath; /* pathname for cluster's pkglibdir */ char *tablespace_suffix; /* directory specification */ @@ -232,9 +233,10 @@ typedef struct /* * Global variables */ -extern LogOpts log_opts; +extern LogOpts log_opts; extern UserOpts user_opts; -extern ClusterInfo old_cluster, new_cluster; +extern ClusterInfo old_cluster, + new_cluster; extern OSInfo os_info; extern char scandir_file_pattern[]; @@ -246,8 +248,8 @@ void check_old_cluster(bool live_check, char **sequence_script_file_name); void check_new_cluster(void); void report_clusters_compatible(void); -void issue_warnings(char *sequence_script_file_name); -void output_completion_banner(char *deletion_script_file_name); +void issue_warnings(char *sequence_script_file_name); +void output_completion_banner(char *deletion_script_file_name); void check_cluster_versions(void); void check_cluster_compatibility(bool live_check); void create_script_for_old_cluster_deletion(char **deletion_script_file_name); @@ -309,11 +311,11 @@ typedef void *pageCnvCtx; int dir_matching_filenames(const struct dirent * scan_ent); int pg_scandir(const char *dirname, struct dirent *** namelist, - int (*selector) (const struct dirent *)); + int (*selector) (const struct dirent *)); const char *copyAndUpdateFile(pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, const char *src, const char *dst, bool force); const char *linkAndUpdateFile(pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, const char *src, - const char *dst); + const char *dst); void check_hard_link(void); @@ -329,10 +331,10 @@ void check_loadable_libraries(void); FileNameMap *gen_db_file_maps(DbInfo *old_db, DbInfo *new_db, int *nmaps, const char *old_pgdata, const char *new_pgdata); -void get_db_and_rel_infos(ClusterInfo *cluster); +void get_db_and_rel_infos(ClusterInfo *cluster); void free_db_and_rel_infos(DbInfoArr *db_arr); -void print_maps(FileNameMap *maps, int n, - const char *db_name); +void print_maps(FileNameMap *maps, int n, + const char *db_name); /* option.c */ @@ -352,12 +354,12 @@ void init_tablespaces(void); /* server.c */ -PGconn *connectToServer(ClusterInfo *cluster, const char *db_name); -PGresult *executeQueryOrDie(PGconn *conn, const char *fmt,...); +PGconn *connectToServer(ClusterInfo *cluster, const char *db_name); +PGresult *executeQueryOrDie(PGconn *conn, const char *fmt,...); void start_postmaster(ClusterInfo *cluster, bool quiet); void stop_postmaster(bool fast, bool quiet); -uint32 get_major_server_version(ClusterInfo *cluster); +uint32 get_major_server_version(ClusterInfo *cluster); void check_for_libpq_envvars(void); @@ -380,14 +382,14 @@ unsigned int str2uint(const char *str); /* version.c */ void new_9_0_populate_pg_largeobject_metadata(ClusterInfo *cluster, - bool check_mode); + bool check_mode); /* version_old_8_3.c */ void old_8_3_check_for_name_data_type_usage(ClusterInfo *cluster); void old_8_3_check_for_tsquery_usage(ClusterInfo *cluster); -void old_8_3_rebuild_tsvector_tables(ClusterInfo *cluster, bool check_mode); -void old_8_3_invalidate_hash_gin_indexes(ClusterInfo *cluster, bool check_mode); +void old_8_3_rebuild_tsvector_tables(ClusterInfo *cluster, bool check_mode); +void old_8_3_invalidate_hash_gin_indexes(ClusterInfo *cluster, bool check_mode); void old_8_3_invalidate_bpchar_pattern_ops_indexes(ClusterInfo *cluster, - bool check_mode); + bool check_mode); char *old_8_3_create_sequence_script(ClusterInfo *cluster); diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/relfilenode.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/relfilenode.c index d111b13de9..9a0a3ac18d 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/relfilenode.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/relfilenode.c @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ char scandir_file_pattern[MAXPGPATH]; */ const char * transfer_all_new_dbs(DbInfoArr *old_db_arr, - DbInfoArr *new_db_arr, char *old_pgdata, char *new_pgdata) + DbInfoArr *new_db_arr, char *old_pgdata, char *new_pgdata) { int dbnum; const char *msg = NULL; @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ transfer_all_new_dbs(DbInfoArr *old_db_arr, if (old_db_arr->ndbs != new_db_arr->ndbs) pg_log(PG_FATAL, "old and new clusters have a different number of databases\n"); - + for (dbnum = 0; dbnum < old_db_arr->ndbs; dbnum++) { DbInfo *old_db = &old_db_arr->dbs[dbnum]; @@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ transfer_all_new_dbs(DbInfoArr *old_db_arr, if (strcmp(old_db->db_name, new_db->db_name) != 0) pg_log(PG_FATAL, "old and new databases have different names: old \"%s\", new \"%s\"\n", - old_db->db_name, new_db->db_name); - + old_db->db_name, new_db->db_name); + n_maps = 0; mappings = gen_db_file_maps(old_db, new_db, &n_maps, old_pgdata, new_pgdata); @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ transfer_single_new_db(pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, for (fileno = 0; fileno < numFiles; fileno++) { if (strncmp(namelist[fileno]->d_name, scandir_file_pattern, - strlen(scandir_file_pattern)) == 0) + strlen(scandir_file_pattern)) == 0) { snprintf(old_file, sizeof(old_file), "%s/%s", maps[mapnum].old_dir, namelist[fileno]->d_name); @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ transfer_single_new_db(pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, unlink(new_file); transfer_relfile(pageConverter, old_file, new_file, - maps[mapnum].nspname, maps[mapnum].relname); + maps[mapnum].nspname, maps[mapnum].relname); } } } @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ transfer_single_new_db(pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, for (fileno = 0; fileno < numFiles; fileno++) { if (strncmp(namelist[fileno]->d_name, scandir_file_pattern, - strlen(scandir_file_pattern)) == 0) + strlen(scandir_file_pattern)) == 0) { snprintf(old_file, sizeof(old_file), "%s/%s", maps[mapnum].old_dir, namelist[fileno]->d_name); @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ transfer_single_new_db(pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, unlink(new_file); transfer_relfile(pageConverter, old_file, new_file, - maps[mapnum].nspname, maps[mapnum].relname); + maps[mapnum].nspname, maps[mapnum].relname); } } } @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ transfer_single_new_db(pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, */ static void transfer_relfile(pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, const char *old_file, - const char *new_file, const char *nspname, const char *relname) + const char *new_file, const char *nspname, const char *relname) { const char *msg; @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ transfer_relfile(pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, const char *old_file, if ((msg = linkAndUpdateFile(pageConverter, old_file, new_file)) != NULL) pg_log(PG_FATAL, - "error while creating link from %s.%s (%s to %s): %s\n", + "error while creating link from %s.%s (%s to %s): %s\n", nspname, relname, old_file, new_file, msg); } return; diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/server.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/server.c index a7d5787234..2a0f50eb2a 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/server.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/server.c @@ -194,12 +194,12 @@ start_postmaster(ClusterInfo *cluster, bool quiet) * because it is being used by another process." so we have to send all * other output to 'nul'. * - * Using autovacuum=off disables cleanup vacuum and analyze, but - * freeze vacuums can still happen, so we set - * autovacuum_freeze_max_age to its maximum. We assume all datfrozenxid - * and relfrozen values are less than a gap of 2000000000 from the current - * xid counter, so autovacuum will not touch them. - */ + * Using autovacuum=off disables cleanup vacuum and analyze, but freeze + * vacuums can still happen, so we set autovacuum_freeze_max_age to its + * maximum. We assume all datfrozenxid and relfrozen values are less than + * a gap of 2000000000 from the current xid counter, so autovacuum will + * not touch them. + */ snprintf(cmd, sizeof(cmd), SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/pg_ctl\" -l \"%s\" -D \"%s\" " "-o \"-p %d -c autovacuum=off " @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ stop_postmaster(bool fast, bool quiet) "\"%s\" 2>&1" SYSTEMQUOTE, bindir, #ifndef WIN32 - log_opts.filename, datadir, fast ? "-m fast" : "", log_opts.filename); + log_opts.filename, datadir, fast ? "-m fast" : "", log_opts.filename); #else DEVNULL, datadir, fast ? "-m fast" : "", DEVNULL); #endif diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/tablespace.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/tablespace.c index a575487621..6cdae51cf1 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/tablespace.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/tablespace.c @@ -78,8 +78,8 @@ set_tablespace_directory_suffix(ClusterInfo *cluster) { /* This cluster has a version-specific subdirectory */ cluster->tablespace_suffix = pg_malloc(4 + - strlen(cluster->major_version_str) + - 10 /* OIDCHARS */ + 1); + strlen(cluster->major_version_str) + + 10 /* OIDCHARS */ + 1); /* The leading slash is needed to start a new directory. */ sprintf(cluster->tablespace_suffix, "/PG_%s_%d", cluster->major_version_str, diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/util.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/util.c index 804aa0d1e5..9a6691ce75 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/util.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/util.c @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ #include <signal.h> -LogOpts log_opts; +LogOpts log_opts; /* * report_status() diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/version_old_8_3.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/version_old_8_3.c index 3ec4b59a05..0a60eec926 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/version_old_8_3.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/version_old_8_3.c @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ old_8_3_rebuild_tsvector_tables(ClusterInfo *cluster, bool check_mode) /* Rebuild all tsvector collumns with one ALTER TABLE command */ if (strcmp(PQgetvalue(res, rowno, i_nspname), nspname) != 0 || - strcmp(PQgetvalue(res, rowno, i_relname), relname) != 0) + strcmp(PQgetvalue(res, rowno, i_relname), relname) != 0) { if (strlen(nspname) != 0 || strlen(relname) != 0) fprintf(script, ";\n\n"); diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade_support/pg_upgrade_support.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade_support/pg_upgrade_support.c index 02d1512719..2c23cbab9d 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade_support/pg_upgrade_support.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade_support/pg_upgrade_support.c @@ -178,9 +178,9 @@ create_empty_extension(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) &textDatums, NULL, &ndatums); for (i = 0; i < ndatums; i++) { - text *txtname = DatumGetTextPP(textDatums[i]); - char *extName = text_to_cstring(txtname); - Oid extOid = get_extension_oid(extName, false); + text *txtname = DatumGetTextPP(textDatums[i]); + char *extName = text_to_cstring(txtname); + Oid extOid = get_extension_oid(extName, false); requiredExtensions = lappend_oid(requiredExtensions, extOid); } @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ create_empty_extension(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) InsertExtensionTuple(text_to_cstring(extName), GetUserId(), - get_namespace_oid(text_to_cstring(schemaName), false), + get_namespace_oid(text_to_cstring(schemaName), false), relocatable, text_to_cstring(extVersion), extConfig, diff --git a/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c b/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c index 7c2ca6e84d..0a3e5fd928 100644 --- a/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ typedef struct win32_pthread *pthread_t; typedef int pthread_attr_t; -static int pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, pthread_attr_t *attr, void *(*start_routine) (void *), void *arg); +static int pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, pthread_attr_t * attr, void *(*start_routine) (void *), void *arg); static int pthread_join(pthread_t th, void **thread_return); #elif defined(ENABLE_THREAD_SAFETY) /* Use platform-dependent pthread capability */ @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ static int pthread_join(pthread_t th, void **thread_return); typedef struct fork_pthread *pthread_t; typedef int pthread_attr_t; -static int pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, pthread_attr_t *attr, void *(*start_routine) (void *), void *arg); +static int pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, pthread_attr_t * attr, void *(*start_routine) (void *), void *arg); static int pthread_join(pthread_t th, void **thread_return); #endif @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ top: INSTR_TIME_SET_CURRENT(now); INSTR_TIME_ACCUM_DIFF(thread->exec_elapsed[cnum], - now, st->stmt_begin); + now, st->stmt_begin); thread->exec_count[cnum]++; } @@ -850,8 +850,8 @@ top: if (commands[st->state]->type == SQL_COMMAND) { /* - * Read and discard the query result; note this is not included - * in the statement latency numbers. + * Read and discard the query result; note this is not included in + * the statement latency numbers. */ res = PQgetResult(st->con); switch (PQresultStatus(res)) @@ -1716,16 +1716,16 @@ printResults(int ttype, int normal_xacts, int nclients, for (i = 0; i < num_files; i++) { - Command **commands; + Command **commands; if (num_files > 1) - printf("statement latencies in milliseconds, file %d:\n", i+1); + printf("statement latencies in milliseconds, file %d:\n", i + 1); else printf("statement latencies in milliseconds:\n"); for (commands = sql_files[i]; *commands != NULL; commands++) { - Command *command = *commands; + Command *command = *commands; int cnum = command->command_num; double total_time; instr_time total_exec_elapsed; @@ -1737,7 +1737,7 @@ printResults(int ttype, int normal_xacts, int nclients, total_exec_count = 0; for (t = 0; t < nthreads; t++) { - TState *thread = &threads[t]; + TState *thread = &threads[t]; INSTR_TIME_ADD(total_exec_elapsed, thread->exec_elapsed[cnum]); @@ -2014,9 +2014,9 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) * is_latencies only works with multiple threads in thread-based * implementations, not fork-based ones, because it supposes that the * parent can see changes made to the per-thread execution stats by child - * threads. It seems useful enough to accept despite this limitation, - * but perhaps we should FIXME someday (by passing the stats data back - * up through the parent-to-child pipes). + * threads. It seems useful enough to accept despite this limitation, but + * perhaps we should FIXME someday (by passing the stats data back up + * through the parent-to-child pipes). */ #ifndef ENABLE_THREAD_SAFETY if (is_latencies && nthreads > 1) @@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) threads = (TState *) xmalloc(sizeof(TState) * nthreads); for (i = 0; i < nthreads; i++) { - TState *thread = &threads[i]; + TState *thread = &threads[i]; thread->tid = i; thread->state = &state[nclients / nthreads * i]; @@ -2170,7 +2170,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) if (is_latencies) { /* Reserve memory for the thread to store per-command latencies */ - int t; + int t; thread->exec_elapsed = (instr_time *) xmalloc(sizeof(instr_time) * num_commands); @@ -2200,7 +2200,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) /* start threads */ for (i = 0; i < nthreads; i++) { - TState *thread = &threads[i]; + TState *thread = &threads[i]; INSTR_TIME_SET_CURRENT(thread->start_time); @@ -2472,7 +2472,7 @@ typedef struct fork_pthread static int pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, - pthread_attr_t *attr, + pthread_attr_t * attr, void *(*start_routine) (void *), void *arg) { @@ -2586,7 +2586,7 @@ typedef struct win32_pthread void *(*routine) (void *); void *arg; void *result; -} win32_pthread; +} win32_pthread; static unsigned __stdcall win32_pthread_run(void *arg) @@ -2600,7 +2600,7 @@ win32_pthread_run(void *arg) static int pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, - pthread_attr_t *attr, + pthread_attr_t * attr, void *(*start_routine) (void *), void *arg) { diff --git a/contrib/seg/seg.c b/contrib/seg/seg.c index afada2a0aa..fd284e0c07 100644 --- a/contrib/seg/seg.c +++ b/contrib/seg/seg.c @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ gseg_picksplit(GistEntryVector *entryvec, { seg = (SEG *) DatumGetPointer(entryvec->vector[i].key); /* center calculation is done this way to avoid possible overflow */ - sort_items[i - 1].center = seg->lower*0.5f + seg->upper*0.5f; + sort_items[i - 1].center = seg->lower * 0.5f + seg->upper * 0.5f; sort_items[i - 1].index = i; sort_items[i - 1].data = seg; } diff --git a/contrib/sepgsql/dml.c b/contrib/sepgsql/dml.c index 358a2643ca..22666b708e 100644 --- a/contrib/sepgsql/dml.c +++ b/contrib/sepgsql/dml.c @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ fixup_whole_row_references(Oid relOid, Bitmapset *columns) result = bms_copy(columns); result = bms_del_member(result, index); - for (attno=1; attno <= natts; attno++) + for (attno = 1; attno <= natts; attno++) { tuple = SearchSysCache2(ATTNUM, ObjectIdGetDatum(relOid), @@ -108,6 +108,7 @@ fixup_inherited_columns(Oid parentId, Oid childId, Bitmapset *columns) while ((index = bms_first_member(tmpset)) > 0) { attno = index + FirstLowInvalidHeapAttributeNumber; + /* * whole-row-reference shall be fixed-up later */ @@ -158,14 +159,13 @@ check_relation_privileges(Oid relOid, bool result = true; /* - * Hardwired Policies: - * SE-PostgreSQL enforces - * - clients cannot modify system catalogs using DMLs - * - clients cannot reference/modify toast relations using DMLs + * Hardwired Policies: SE-PostgreSQL enforces - clients cannot modify + * system catalogs using DMLs - clients cannot reference/modify toast + * relations using DMLs */ if (sepgsql_getenforce() > 0) { - Oid relnamespace = get_rel_namespace(relOid); + Oid relnamespace = get_rel_namespace(relOid); if (IsSystemNamespace(relnamespace) && (required & (SEPG_DB_TABLE__UPDATE | @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ check_relation_privileges(Oid relOid, { AttrNumber attnum; uint32 column_perms = 0; - ObjectAddress object; + ObjectAddress object; if (bms_is_member(index, selected)) column_perms |= SEPG_DB_COLUMN__SELECT; @@ -290,12 +290,12 @@ sepgsql_dml_privileges(List *rangeTabls, bool abort) { ListCell *lr; - foreach (lr, rangeTabls) + foreach(lr, rangeTabls) { - RangeTblEntry *rte = lfirst(lr); - uint32 required = 0; - List *tableIds; - ListCell *li; + RangeTblEntry *rte = lfirst(lr); + uint32 required = 0; + List *tableIds; + ListCell *li; /* * Only regular relations shall be checked @@ -328,25 +328,24 @@ sepgsql_dml_privileges(List *rangeTabls, bool abort) /* * If this RangeTblEntry is also supposed to reference inherited - * tables, we need to check security label of the child tables. - * So, we expand rte->relid into list of OIDs of inheritance - * hierarchy, then checker routine will be invoked for each - * relations. + * tables, we need to check security label of the child tables. So, we + * expand rte->relid into list of OIDs of inheritance hierarchy, then + * checker routine will be invoked for each relations. */ if (!rte->inh) tableIds = list_make1_oid(rte->relid); else tableIds = find_all_inheritors(rte->relid, NoLock, NULL); - foreach (li, tableIds) + foreach(li, tableIds) { Oid tableOid = lfirst_oid(li); Bitmapset *selectedCols; Bitmapset *modifiedCols; /* - * child table has different attribute numbers, so we need - * to fix up them. + * child table has different attribute numbers, so we need to fix + * up them. */ selectedCols = fixup_inherited_columns(rte->relid, tableOid, rte->selectedCols); diff --git a/contrib/sepgsql/hooks.c b/contrib/sepgsql/hooks.c index 5dc8a3ecaa..7797ccb199 100644 --- a/contrib/sepgsql/hooks.c +++ b/contrib/sepgsql/hooks.c @@ -29,17 +29,17 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; /* * Declarations */ -void _PG_init(void); +void _PG_init(void); /* * Saved hook entries (if stacked) */ -static object_access_hook_type next_object_access_hook = NULL; -static ClientAuthentication_hook_type next_client_auth_hook = NULL; -static ExecutorCheckPerms_hook_type next_exec_check_perms_hook = NULL; -static needs_fmgr_hook_type next_needs_fmgr_hook = NULL; -static fmgr_hook_type next_fmgr_hook = NULL; -static ProcessUtility_hook_type next_ProcessUtility_hook = NULL; +static object_access_hook_type next_object_access_hook = NULL; +static ClientAuthentication_hook_type next_client_auth_hook = NULL; +static ExecutorCheckPerms_hook_type next_exec_check_perms_hook = NULL; +static needs_fmgr_hook_type next_needs_fmgr_hook = NULL; +static fmgr_hook_type next_fmgr_hook = NULL; +static ProcessUtility_hook_type next_ProcessUtility_hook = NULL; /* * GUC: sepgsql.permissive = (on|off) @@ -73,14 +73,14 @@ sepgsql_get_debug_audit(void) static void sepgsql_client_auth(Port *port, int status) { - char *context; + char *context; if (next_client_auth_hook) - (*next_client_auth_hook)(port, status); + (*next_client_auth_hook) (port, status); /* - * In the case when authentication failed, the supplied socket - * shall be closed soon, so we don't need to do anything here. + * In the case when authentication failed, the supplied socket shall be + * closed soon, so we don't need to do anything here. */ if (status != STATUS_OK) return; @@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ sepgsql_client_auth(Port *port, int status) sepgsql_set_client_label(context); /* - * Switch the current performing mode from INTERNAL to either - * DEFAULT or PERMISSIVE. + * Switch the current performing mode from INTERNAL to either DEFAULT or + * PERMISSIVE. */ if (sepgsql_permissive) sepgsql_set_mode(SEPGSQL_MODE_PERMISSIVE); @@ -113,12 +113,12 @@ sepgsql_client_auth(Port *port, int status) */ static void sepgsql_object_access(ObjectAccessType access, - Oid classId, - Oid objectId, - int subId) + Oid classId, + Oid objectId, + int subId) { if (next_object_access_hook) - (*next_object_access_hook)(access, classId, objectId, subId); + (*next_object_access_hook) (access, classId, objectId, subId); switch (access) { @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ sepgsql_object_access(ObjectAccessType access, break; default: - elog(ERROR, "unexpected object access type: %d", (int)access); + elog(ERROR, "unexpected object access type: %d", (int) access); break; } } @@ -161,11 +161,11 @@ static bool sepgsql_exec_check_perms(List *rangeTabls, bool abort) { /* - * If security provider is stacking and one of them replied 'false' - * at least, we don't need to check any more. + * If security provider is stacking and one of them replied 'false' at + * least, we don't need to check any more. */ if (next_exec_check_perms_hook && - !(*next_exec_check_perms_hook)(rangeTabls, abort)) + !(*next_exec_check_perms_hook) (rangeTabls, abort)) return false; if (!sepgsql_dml_privileges(rangeTabls, abort)) @@ -184,20 +184,19 @@ sepgsql_exec_check_perms(List *rangeTabls, bool abort) static bool sepgsql_needs_fmgr_hook(Oid functionId) { - char *old_label; - char *new_label; - char *function_label; + char *old_label; + char *new_label; + char *function_label; if (next_needs_fmgr_hook && - (*next_needs_fmgr_hook)(functionId)) + (*next_needs_fmgr_hook) (functionId)) return true; /* - * SELinux needs the function to be called via security_definer - * wrapper, if this invocation will take a domain-transition. - * We call these functions as trusted-procedure, if the security - * policy has a rule that switches security label of the client - * on execution. + * SELinux needs the function to be called via security_definer wrapper, + * if this invocation will take a domain-transition. We call these + * functions as trusted-procedure, if the security policy has a rule that + * switches security label of the client on execution. */ old_label = sepgsql_get_client_label(); new_label = sepgsql_proc_get_domtrans(functionId); @@ -210,9 +209,9 @@ sepgsql_needs_fmgr_hook(Oid functionId) /* * Even if not a trusted-procedure, this function should not be inlined - * unless the client has db_procedure:{execute} permission. - * Please note that it shall be actually failed later because of same - * reason with ACL_EXECUTE. + * unless the client has db_procedure:{execute} permission. Please note + * that it shall be actually failed later because of same reason with + * ACL_EXECUTE. */ function_label = sepgsql_get_label(ProcedureRelationId, functionId, 0); if (sepgsql_check_perms(sepgsql_get_client_label(), @@ -238,20 +237,21 @@ static void sepgsql_fmgr_hook(FmgrHookEventType event, FmgrInfo *flinfo, Datum *private) { - struct { - char *old_label; - char *new_label; - Datum next_private; - } *stack; + struct + { + char *old_label; + char *new_label; + Datum next_private; + } *stack; switch (event) { case FHET_START: - stack = (void *)DatumGetPointer(*private); + stack = (void *) DatumGetPointer(*private); if (!stack) { - MemoryContext oldcxt; - const char *cur_label = sepgsql_get_client_label(); + MemoryContext oldcxt; + const char *cur_label = sepgsql_get_client_label(); oldcxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(flinfo->fn_mcxt); stack = palloc(sizeof(*stack)); @@ -265,8 +265,8 @@ sepgsql_fmgr_hook(FmgrHookEventType event, { /* * process:transition permission between old and new - * label, when user tries to switch security label of - * the client on execution of trusted procedure. + * label, when user tries to switch security label of the + * client on execution of trusted procedure. */ sepgsql_check_perms(cur_label, stack->new_label, SEPG_CLASS_PROCESS, @@ -280,22 +280,22 @@ sepgsql_fmgr_hook(FmgrHookEventType event, stack->old_label = sepgsql_set_client_label(stack->new_label); if (next_fmgr_hook) - (*next_fmgr_hook)(event, flinfo, &stack->next_private); + (*next_fmgr_hook) (event, flinfo, &stack->next_private); break; case FHET_END: case FHET_ABORT: - stack = (void *)DatumGetPointer(*private); + stack = (void *) DatumGetPointer(*private); if (next_fmgr_hook) - (*next_fmgr_hook)(event, flinfo, &stack->next_private); + (*next_fmgr_hook) (event, flinfo, &stack->next_private); sepgsql_set_client_label(stack->old_label); stack->old_label = NULL; break; default: - elog(ERROR, "unexpected event type: %d", (int)event); + elog(ERROR, "unexpected event type: %d", (int) event); break; } } @@ -315,8 +315,8 @@ sepgsql_utility_command(Node *parsetree, char *completionTag) { if (next_ProcessUtility_hook) - (*next_ProcessUtility_hook)(parsetree, queryString, params, - isTopLevel, dest, completionTag); + (*next_ProcessUtility_hook) (parsetree, queryString, params, + isTopLevel, dest, completionTag); /* * Check command tag to avoid nefarious operations @@ -324,6 +324,7 @@ sepgsql_utility_command(Node *parsetree, switch (nodeTag(parsetree)) { case T_LoadStmt: + /* * We reject LOAD command across the board on enforcing mode, * because a binary module can arbitrarily override hooks. @@ -336,11 +337,12 @@ sepgsql_utility_command(Node *parsetree, } break; default: + /* - * Right now we don't check any other utility commands, - * because it needs more detailed information to make - * access control decision here, but we don't want to - * have two parse and analyze routines individually. + * Right now we don't check any other utility commands, because it + * needs more detailed information to make access control decision + * here, but we don't want to have two parse and analyze routines + * individually. */ break; } @@ -358,7 +360,7 @@ sepgsql_utility_command(Node *parsetree, void _PG_init(void) { - char *context; + char *context; /* * We allow to load the SE-PostgreSQL module on single-user-mode or @@ -367,12 +369,12 @@ _PG_init(void) if (IsUnderPostmaster) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("sepgsql must be loaded via shared_preload_libraries"))); + errmsg("sepgsql must be loaded via shared_preload_libraries"))); /* - * Check availability of SELinux on the platform. - * If disabled, we cannot activate any SE-PostgreSQL features, - * and we have to skip rest of initialization. + * Check availability of SELinux on the platform. If disabled, we cannot + * activate any SE-PostgreSQL features, and we have to skip rest of + * initialization. */ if (is_selinux_enabled() < 1) { @@ -383,8 +385,8 @@ _PG_init(void) /* * sepgsql.permissive = (on|off) * - * This variable controls performing mode of SE-PostgreSQL - * on user's session. + * This variable controls performing mode of SE-PostgreSQL on user's + * session. */ DefineCustomBoolVariable("sepgsql.permissive", "Turn on/off permissive mode in SE-PostgreSQL", @@ -400,10 +402,9 @@ _PG_init(void) /* * sepgsql.debug_audit = (on|off) * - * This variable allows users to turn on/off audit logs on access - * control decisions, independent from auditallow/auditdeny setting - * in the security policy. - * We intend to use this option for debugging purpose. + * This variable allows users to turn on/off audit logs on access control + * decisions, independent from auditallow/auditdeny setting in the + * security policy. We intend to use this option for debugging purpose. */ DefineCustomBoolVariable("sepgsql.debug_audit", "Turn on/off debug audit messages", @@ -419,13 +420,12 @@ _PG_init(void) /* * Set up dummy client label. * - * XXX - note that PostgreSQL launches background worker process - * like autovacuum without authentication steps. So, we initialize - * sepgsql_mode with SEPGSQL_MODE_INTERNAL, and client_label with - * the security context of server process. - * Later, it also launches background of user session. In this case, - * the process is always hooked on post-authentication, and we can - * initialize the sepgsql_mode and client_label correctly. + * XXX - note that PostgreSQL launches background worker process like + * autovacuum without authentication steps. So, we initialize sepgsql_mode + * with SEPGSQL_MODE_INTERNAL, and client_label with the security context + * of server process. Later, it also launches background of user session. + * In this case, the process is always hooked on post-authentication, and + * we can initialize the sepgsql_mode and client_label correctly. */ if (getcon_raw(&context) < 0) ereport(ERROR, diff --git a/contrib/sepgsql/label.c b/contrib/sepgsql/label.c index 828512a961..669ee35ac3 100644 --- a/contrib/sepgsql/label.c +++ b/contrib/sepgsql/label.c @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ * * security label of the client process */ -static char *client_label = NULL; +static char *client_label = NULL; char * sepgsql_get_client_label(void) @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ sepgsql_get_client_label(void) char * sepgsql_set_client_label(char *new_label) { - char *old_label = client_label; + char *old_label = client_label; client_label = new_label; @@ -66,22 +66,22 @@ sepgsql_set_client_label(char *new_label) char * sepgsql_get_label(Oid classId, Oid objectId, int32 subId) { - ObjectAddress object; - char *label; + ObjectAddress object; + char *label; - object.classId = classId; - object.objectId = objectId; - object.objectSubId = subId; + object.classId = classId; + object.objectId = objectId; + object.objectSubId = subId; label = GetSecurityLabel(&object, SEPGSQL_LABEL_TAG); - if (!label || security_check_context_raw((security_context_t)label)) + if (!label || security_check_context_raw((security_context_t) label)) { - security_context_t unlabeled; + security_context_t unlabeled; if (security_get_initial_context_raw("unlabeled", &unlabeled) < 0) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INTERNAL_ERROR), - errmsg("SELinux: failed to get initial security label: %m"))); + errmsg("SELinux: failed to get initial security label: %m"))); PG_TRY(); { label = pstrdup(unlabeled); @@ -107,21 +107,22 @@ void sepgsql_object_relabel(const ObjectAddress *object, const char *seclabel) { /* - * validate format of the supplied security label, - * if it is security context of selinux. + * validate format of the supplied security label, if it is security + * context of selinux. */ if (seclabel && security_check_context_raw((security_context_t) seclabel) < 0) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_NAME), - errmsg("SELinux: invalid security label: \"%s\"", seclabel))); + errmsg("SELinux: invalid security label: \"%s\"", seclabel))); + /* * Do actual permission checks for each object classes */ switch (object->classId) { case NamespaceRelationId: - sepgsql_schema_relabel(object->objectId, seclabel); + sepgsql_schema_relabel(object->objectId, seclabel); break; case RelationRelationId: if (object->objectSubId == 0) @@ -151,7 +152,7 @@ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(sepgsql_getcon); Datum sepgsql_getcon(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - char *client_label; + char *client_label; if (!sepgsql_is_enabled()) PG_RETURN_NULL(); @@ -171,9 +172,9 @@ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(sepgsql_mcstrans_in); Datum sepgsql_mcstrans_in(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *label = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - char *raw_label; - char *result; + text *label = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + char *raw_label; + char *result; if (!sepgsql_is_enabled()) ereport(ERROR, @@ -211,9 +212,9 @@ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(sepgsql_mcstrans_out); Datum sepgsql_mcstrans_out(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *label = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - char *qual_label; - char *result; + text *label = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + char *qual_label; + char *result; if (!sepgsql_is_enabled()) ereport(ERROR, @@ -250,8 +251,8 @@ static char * quote_object_name(const char *src1, const char *src2, const char *src3, const char *src4) { - StringInfoData result; - const char *temp; + StringInfoData result; + const char *temp; initStringInfo(&result); @@ -260,28 +261,28 @@ quote_object_name(const char *src1, const char *src2, temp = quote_identifier(src1); appendStringInfo(&result, "%s", temp); if (src1 != temp) - pfree((void *)temp); + pfree((void *) temp); } if (src2) { temp = quote_identifier(src2); appendStringInfo(&result, ".%s", temp); if (src2 != temp) - pfree((void *)temp); + pfree((void *) temp); } if (src3) { temp = quote_identifier(src3); appendStringInfo(&result, ".%s", temp); if (src3 != temp) - pfree((void *)temp); + pfree((void *) temp); } if (src4) { temp = quote_identifier(src4); appendStringInfo(&result, ".%s", temp); if (src4 != temp) - pfree((void *)temp); + pfree((void *) temp); } return result.data; } @@ -294,19 +295,19 @@ quote_object_name(const char *src1, const char *src2, * catalog OID. */ static void -exec_object_restorecon(struct selabel_handle *sehnd, Oid catalogId) +exec_object_restorecon(struct selabel_handle * sehnd, Oid catalogId) { - Relation rel; - SysScanDesc sscan; - HeapTuple tuple; - char *database_name = get_database_name(MyDatabaseId); - char *namespace_name; - Oid namespace_id; - char *relation_name; + Relation rel; + SysScanDesc sscan; + HeapTuple tuple; + char *database_name = get_database_name(MyDatabaseId); + char *namespace_name; + Oid namespace_id; + char *relation_name; /* - * Open the target catalog. We don't want to allow writable - * accesses by other session during initial labeling. + * Open the target catalog. We don't want to allow writable accesses by + * other session during initial labeling. */ rel = heap_open(catalogId, AccessShareLock); @@ -314,18 +315,18 @@ exec_object_restorecon(struct selabel_handle *sehnd, Oid catalogId) SnapshotNow, 0, NULL); while (HeapTupleIsValid(tuple = systable_getnext(sscan))) { - Form_pg_namespace nspForm; - Form_pg_class relForm; - Form_pg_attribute attForm; - Form_pg_proc proForm; - char *objname; - int objtype = 1234; - ObjectAddress object; - security_context_t context; + Form_pg_namespace nspForm; + Form_pg_class relForm; + Form_pg_attribute attForm; + Form_pg_proc proForm; + char *objname; + int objtype = 1234; + ObjectAddress object; + security_context_t context; /* - * The way to determine object name depends on object classes. - * So, any branches set up `objtype', `objname' and `object' here. + * The way to determine object name depends on object classes. So, any + * branches set up `objtype', `objname' and `object' here. */ switch (catalogId) { @@ -409,7 +410,7 @@ exec_object_restorecon(struct selabel_handle *sehnd, Oid catalogId) default: elog(ERROR, "unexpected catalog id: %u", catalogId); - objname = NULL; /* for compiler quiet */ + objname = NULL; /* for compiler quiet */ break; } @@ -464,8 +465,8 @@ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(sepgsql_restorecon); Datum sepgsql_restorecon(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - struct selabel_handle *sehnd; - struct selinux_opt seopts; + struct selabel_handle *sehnd; + struct selinux_opt seopts; /* * SELinux has to be enabled on the running platform. @@ -474,19 +475,19 @@ sepgsql_restorecon(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), errmsg("sepgsql is not currently enabled"))); + /* - * Check DAC permission. Only superuser can set up initial - * security labels, like root-user in filesystems + * Check DAC permission. Only superuser can set up initial security + * labels, like root-user in filesystems */ if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("SELinux: must be superuser to restore initial contexts"))); + errmsg("SELinux: must be superuser to restore initial contexts"))); /* - * Open selabel_lookup(3) stuff. It provides a set of mapping - * between an initial security label and object class/name due - * to the system setting. + * Open selabel_lookup(3) stuff. It provides a set of mapping between an + * initial security label and object class/name due to the system setting. */ if (PG_ARGISNULL(0)) { @@ -502,12 +503,12 @@ sepgsql_restorecon(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!sehnd) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INTERNAL_ERROR), - errmsg("SELinux: failed to initialize labeling handle: %m"))); + errmsg("SELinux: failed to initialize labeling handle: %m"))); PG_TRY(); { /* - * Right now, we have no support labeling on the shared - * database objects, such as database, role, or tablespace. + * Right now, we have no support labeling on the shared database + * objects, such as database, role, or tablespace. */ exec_object_restorecon(sehnd, NamespaceRelationId); exec_object_restorecon(sehnd, RelationRelationId); @@ -519,7 +520,7 @@ sepgsql_restorecon(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) selabel_close(sehnd); PG_RE_THROW(); } - PG_END_TRY(); + PG_END_TRY(); selabel_close(sehnd); diff --git a/contrib/sepgsql/proc.c b/contrib/sepgsql/proc.c index 5a0c4947f7..3b8bf23ba3 100644 --- a/contrib/sepgsql/proc.c +++ b/contrib/sepgsql/proc.c @@ -33,15 +33,15 @@ void sepgsql_proc_post_create(Oid functionId) { - Relation rel; - ScanKeyData skey; - SysScanDesc sscan; - HeapTuple tuple; - Oid namespaceId; - ObjectAddress object; - char *scontext; - char *tcontext; - char *ncontext; + Relation rel; + ScanKeyData skey; + SysScanDesc sscan; + HeapTuple tuple; + Oid namespaceId; + ObjectAddress object; + char *scontext; + char *tcontext; + char *ncontext; /* * Fetch namespace of the new procedure. Because pg_proc entry is not @@ -67,8 +67,8 @@ sepgsql_proc_post_create(Oid functionId) heap_close(rel, AccessShareLock); /* - * Compute a default security label when we create a new procedure - * object under the specified namespace. + * Compute a default security label when we create a new procedure object + * under the specified namespace. */ scontext = sepgsql_get_client_label(); tcontext = sepgsql_get_label(NamespaceRelationId, namespaceId, 0); @@ -144,9 +144,9 @@ sepgsql_proc_relabel(Oid functionId, const char *seclabel) char * sepgsql_proc_get_domtrans(Oid functionId) { - char *scontext = sepgsql_get_client_label(); - char *tcontext; - char *ncontext; + char *scontext = sepgsql_get_client_label(); + char *tcontext; + char *ncontext; tcontext = sepgsql_get_label(ProcedureRelationId, functionId, 0); diff --git a/contrib/sepgsql/relation.c b/contrib/sepgsql/relation.c index ed5e3adc0e..963cfdf9f1 100644 --- a/contrib/sepgsql/relation.c +++ b/contrib/sepgsql/relation.c @@ -36,26 +36,27 @@ void sepgsql_attribute_post_create(Oid relOid, AttrNumber attnum) { - char *scontext = sepgsql_get_client_label(); - char *tcontext; - char *ncontext; - ObjectAddress object; + char *scontext = sepgsql_get_client_label(); + char *tcontext; + char *ncontext; + ObjectAddress object; /* - * Only attributes within regular relation have individual - * security labels. + * Only attributes within regular relation have individual security + * labels. */ if (get_rel_relkind(relOid) != RELKIND_RELATION) return; /* - * Compute a default security label when we create a new procedure - * object under the specified namespace. + * Compute a default security label when we create a new procedure object + * under the specified namespace. */ scontext = sepgsql_get_client_label(); tcontext = sepgsql_get_label(RelationRelationId, relOid, 0); ncontext = sepgsql_compute_create(scontext, tcontext, SEPG_CLASS_DB_COLUMN); + /* * Assign the default security label on a new procedure */ @@ -81,7 +82,7 @@ sepgsql_attribute_relabel(Oid relOid, AttrNumber attnum, char *scontext = sepgsql_get_client_label(); char *tcontext; char *audit_name; - ObjectAddress object; + ObjectAddress object; if (get_rel_relkind(relOid) != RELKIND_RELATION) ereport(ERROR, @@ -127,21 +128,21 @@ sepgsql_attribute_relabel(Oid relOid, AttrNumber attnum, void sepgsql_relation_post_create(Oid relOid) { - Relation rel; - ScanKeyData skey; - SysScanDesc sscan; - HeapTuple tuple; - Form_pg_class classForm; - ObjectAddress object; - uint16 tclass; - char *scontext; /* subject */ - char *tcontext; /* schema */ - char *rcontext; /* relation */ - char *ccontext; /* column */ + Relation rel; + ScanKeyData skey; + SysScanDesc sscan; + HeapTuple tuple; + Form_pg_class classForm; + ObjectAddress object; + uint16 tclass; + char *scontext; /* subject */ + char *tcontext; /* schema */ + char *rcontext; /* relation */ + char *ccontext; /* column */ /* - * Fetch catalog record of the new relation. Because pg_class entry is - * not visible right now, we need to scan the catalog using SnapshotSelf. + * Fetch catalog record of the new relation. Because pg_class entry is not + * visible right now, we need to scan the catalog using SnapshotSelf. */ rel = heap_open(RelationRelationId, AccessShareLock); @@ -166,11 +167,11 @@ sepgsql_relation_post_create(Oid relOid) else if (classForm->relkind == RELKIND_VIEW) tclass = SEPG_CLASS_DB_VIEW; else - goto out; /* No need to assign individual labels */ + goto out; /* No need to assign individual labels */ /* - * Compute a default security label when we create a new relation - * object under the specified namespace. + * Compute a default security label when we create a new relation object + * under the specified namespace. */ scontext = sepgsql_get_client_label(); tcontext = sepgsql_get_label(NamespaceRelationId, @@ -186,8 +187,8 @@ sepgsql_relation_post_create(Oid relOid) SetSecurityLabel(&object, SEPGSQL_LABEL_TAG, rcontext); /* - * We also assigns a default security label on columns of the new - * regular tables. + * We also assigns a default security label on columns of the new regular + * tables. */ if (classForm->relkind == RELKIND_RELATION) { diff --git a/contrib/sepgsql/schema.c b/contrib/sepgsql/schema.c index 8538d18ac9..0de89971fb 100644 --- a/contrib/sepgsql/schema.c +++ b/contrib/sepgsql/schema.c @@ -26,21 +26,21 @@ void sepgsql_schema_post_create(Oid namespaceId) { - char *scontext = sepgsql_get_client_label(); - char *tcontext; - char *ncontext; - ObjectAddress object; + char *scontext = sepgsql_get_client_label(); + char *tcontext; + char *ncontext; + ObjectAddress object; /* - * FIXME: Right now, we assume pg_database object has a fixed - * security label, because pg_seclabel does not support to store - * label of shared database objects. + * FIXME: Right now, we assume pg_database object has a fixed security + * label, because pg_seclabel does not support to store label of shared + * database objects. */ tcontext = "system_u:object_r:sepgsql_db_t:s0"; /* - * Compute a default security label when we create a new schema - * object under the working database. + * Compute a default security label when we create a new schema object + * under the working database. */ ncontext = sepgsql_compute_create(scontext, tcontext, SEPG_CLASS_DB_SCHEMA); diff --git a/contrib/sepgsql/selinux.c b/contrib/sepgsql/selinux.c index 03ba25cef0..1f5a97e878 100644 --- a/contrib/sepgsql/selinux.c +++ b/contrib/sepgsql/selinux.c @@ -29,255 +29,563 @@ */ static struct { - const char *class_name; - uint16 class_code; + const char *class_name; + uint16 class_code; struct { - const char *av_name; - uint32 av_code; - } av[32]; -} selinux_catalog[] = { + const char *av_name; + uint32 av_code; + } av[32]; +} selinux_catalog[] = + +{ { - "process", SEPG_CLASS_PROCESS, + "process", SEPG_CLASS_PROCESS, { - { "transition", SEPG_PROCESS__TRANSITION }, - { NULL, 0UL } + { + "transition", SEPG_PROCESS__TRANSITION + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + } } }, { - "file", SEPG_CLASS_FILE, + "file", SEPG_CLASS_FILE, { - { "read", SEPG_FILE__READ }, - { "write", SEPG_FILE__WRITE }, - { "create", SEPG_FILE__CREATE }, - { "getattr", SEPG_FILE__GETATTR }, - { "unlink", SEPG_FILE__UNLINK }, - { "rename", SEPG_FILE__RENAME }, - { "append", SEPG_FILE__APPEND }, - { NULL, 0UL } + { + "read", SEPG_FILE__READ + }, + { + "write", SEPG_FILE__WRITE + }, + { + "create", SEPG_FILE__CREATE + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_FILE__GETATTR + }, + { + "unlink", SEPG_FILE__UNLINK + }, + { + "rename", SEPG_FILE__RENAME + }, + { + "append", SEPG_FILE__APPEND + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + } } }, { - "dir", SEPG_CLASS_DIR, + "dir", SEPG_CLASS_DIR, { - { "read", SEPG_DIR__READ }, - { "write", SEPG_DIR__WRITE }, - { "create", SEPG_DIR__CREATE }, - { "getattr", SEPG_DIR__GETATTR }, - { "unlink", SEPG_DIR__UNLINK }, - { "rename", SEPG_DIR__RENAME }, - { "search", SEPG_DIR__SEARCH }, - { "add_name", SEPG_DIR__ADD_NAME }, - { "remove_name", SEPG_DIR__REMOVE_NAME }, - { "rmdir", SEPG_DIR__RMDIR }, - { "reparent", SEPG_DIR__REPARENT }, - { NULL, 0UL } + { + "read", SEPG_DIR__READ + }, + { + "write", SEPG_DIR__WRITE + }, + { + "create", SEPG_DIR__CREATE + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_DIR__GETATTR + }, + { + "unlink", SEPG_DIR__UNLINK + }, + { + "rename", SEPG_DIR__RENAME + }, + { + "search", SEPG_DIR__SEARCH + }, + { + "add_name", SEPG_DIR__ADD_NAME + }, + { + "remove_name", SEPG_DIR__REMOVE_NAME + }, + { + "rmdir", SEPG_DIR__RMDIR + }, + { + "reparent", SEPG_DIR__REPARENT + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + } } }, { - "lnk_file", SEPG_CLASS_LNK_FILE, + "lnk_file", SEPG_CLASS_LNK_FILE, { - { "read", SEPG_LNK_FILE__READ }, - { "write", SEPG_LNK_FILE__WRITE }, - { "create", SEPG_LNK_FILE__CREATE }, - { "getattr", SEPG_LNK_FILE__GETATTR }, - { "unlink", SEPG_LNK_FILE__UNLINK }, - { "rename", SEPG_LNK_FILE__RENAME }, - { NULL, 0UL } + { + "read", SEPG_LNK_FILE__READ + }, + { + "write", SEPG_LNK_FILE__WRITE + }, + { + "create", SEPG_LNK_FILE__CREATE + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_LNK_FILE__GETATTR + }, + { + "unlink", SEPG_LNK_FILE__UNLINK + }, + { + "rename", SEPG_LNK_FILE__RENAME + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + } } }, { - "chr_file", SEPG_CLASS_CHR_FILE, + "chr_file", SEPG_CLASS_CHR_FILE, { - { "read", SEPG_CHR_FILE__READ }, - { "write", SEPG_CHR_FILE__WRITE }, - { "create", SEPG_CHR_FILE__CREATE }, - { "getattr", SEPG_CHR_FILE__GETATTR }, - { "unlink", SEPG_CHR_FILE__UNLINK }, - { "rename", SEPG_CHR_FILE__RENAME }, - { NULL, 0UL } + { + "read", SEPG_CHR_FILE__READ + }, + { + "write", SEPG_CHR_FILE__WRITE + }, + { + "create", SEPG_CHR_FILE__CREATE + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_CHR_FILE__GETATTR + }, + { + "unlink", SEPG_CHR_FILE__UNLINK + }, + { + "rename", SEPG_CHR_FILE__RENAME + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + } } }, { - "blk_file", SEPG_CLASS_BLK_FILE, + "blk_file", SEPG_CLASS_BLK_FILE, { - { "read", SEPG_BLK_FILE__READ }, - { "write", SEPG_BLK_FILE__WRITE }, - { "create", SEPG_BLK_FILE__CREATE }, - { "getattr", SEPG_BLK_FILE__GETATTR }, - { "unlink", SEPG_BLK_FILE__UNLINK }, - { "rename", SEPG_BLK_FILE__RENAME }, - { NULL, 0UL } + { + "read", SEPG_BLK_FILE__READ + }, + { + "write", SEPG_BLK_FILE__WRITE + }, + { + "create", SEPG_BLK_FILE__CREATE + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_BLK_FILE__GETATTR + }, + { + "unlink", SEPG_BLK_FILE__UNLINK + }, + { + "rename", SEPG_BLK_FILE__RENAME + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + } } }, { - "sock_file", SEPG_CLASS_SOCK_FILE, + "sock_file", SEPG_CLASS_SOCK_FILE, { - { "read", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__READ }, - { "write", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__WRITE }, - { "create", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__CREATE }, - { "getattr", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__GETATTR }, - { "unlink", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__UNLINK }, - { "rename", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__RENAME }, - { NULL, 0UL } + { + "read", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__READ + }, + { + "write", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__WRITE + }, + { + "create", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__CREATE + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__GETATTR + }, + { + "unlink", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__UNLINK + }, + { + "rename", SEPG_SOCK_FILE__RENAME + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + } } }, { - "fifo_file", SEPG_CLASS_FIFO_FILE, + "fifo_file", SEPG_CLASS_FIFO_FILE, { - { "read", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__READ }, - { "write", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__WRITE }, - { "create", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__CREATE }, - { "getattr", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__GETATTR }, - { "unlink", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__UNLINK }, - { "rename", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__RENAME }, - { NULL, 0UL } + { + "read", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__READ + }, + { + "write", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__WRITE + }, + { + "create", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__CREATE + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__GETATTR + }, + { + "unlink", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__UNLINK + }, + { + "rename", SEPG_FIFO_FILE__RENAME + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + } } }, { - "db_database", SEPG_CLASS_DB_DATABASE, + "db_database", SEPG_CLASS_DB_DATABASE, { - { "create", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__CREATE }, - { "drop", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__DROP }, - { "getattr", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__GETATTR }, - { "setattr", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__SETATTR }, - { "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__RELABELFROM }, - { "relabelto", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__RELABELTO }, - { "access", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__ACCESS }, - { "load_module", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__LOAD_MODULE }, - { NULL, 0UL }, + { + "create", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__CREATE + }, + { + "drop", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__DROP + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__GETATTR + }, + { + "setattr", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__SETATTR + }, + { + "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__RELABELFROM + }, + { + "relabelto", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__RELABELTO + }, + { + "access", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__ACCESS + }, + { + "load_module", SEPG_DB_DATABASE__LOAD_MODULE + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + }, } }, { - "db_schema", SEPG_CLASS_DB_SCHEMA, + "db_schema", SEPG_CLASS_DB_SCHEMA, { - { "create", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__CREATE }, - { "drop", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__DROP }, - { "getattr", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__GETATTR }, - { "setattr", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__SETATTR }, - { "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__RELABELFROM }, - { "relabelto", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__RELABELTO }, - { "search", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__SEARCH }, - { "add_name", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__ADD_NAME }, - { "remove_name", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__REMOVE_NAME }, - { NULL, 0UL }, + { + "create", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__CREATE + }, + { + "drop", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__DROP + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__GETATTR + }, + { + "setattr", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__SETATTR + }, + { + "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__RELABELFROM + }, + { + "relabelto", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__RELABELTO + }, + { + "search", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__SEARCH + }, + { + "add_name", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__ADD_NAME + }, + { + "remove_name", SEPG_DB_SCHEMA__REMOVE_NAME + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + }, } }, { - "db_table", SEPG_CLASS_DB_TABLE, + "db_table", SEPG_CLASS_DB_TABLE, { - { "create", SEPG_DB_TABLE__CREATE }, - { "drop", SEPG_DB_TABLE__DROP }, - { "getattr", SEPG_DB_TABLE__GETATTR }, - { "setattr", SEPG_DB_TABLE__SETATTR }, - { "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_TABLE__RELABELFROM }, - { "relabelto", SEPG_DB_TABLE__RELABELTO }, - { "select", SEPG_DB_TABLE__SELECT }, - { "update", SEPG_DB_TABLE__UPDATE }, - { "insert", SEPG_DB_TABLE__INSERT }, - { "delete", SEPG_DB_TABLE__DELETE }, - { "lock", SEPG_DB_TABLE__LOCK }, - { NULL, 0UL }, + { + "create", SEPG_DB_TABLE__CREATE + }, + { + "drop", SEPG_DB_TABLE__DROP + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_DB_TABLE__GETATTR + }, + { + "setattr", SEPG_DB_TABLE__SETATTR + }, + { + "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_TABLE__RELABELFROM + }, + { + "relabelto", SEPG_DB_TABLE__RELABELTO + }, + { + "select", SEPG_DB_TABLE__SELECT + }, + { + "update", SEPG_DB_TABLE__UPDATE + }, + { + "insert", SEPG_DB_TABLE__INSERT + }, + { + "delete", SEPG_DB_TABLE__DELETE + }, + { + "lock", SEPG_DB_TABLE__LOCK + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + }, } }, { - "db_sequence", SEPG_CLASS_DB_SEQUENCE, + "db_sequence", SEPG_CLASS_DB_SEQUENCE, { - { "create", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__CREATE }, - { "drop", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__DROP }, - { "getattr", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__GETATTR }, - { "setattr", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__SETATTR }, - { "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__RELABELFROM }, - { "relabelto", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__RELABELTO }, - { "get_value", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__GET_VALUE }, - { "next_value", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__NEXT_VALUE }, - { "set_value", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__SET_VALUE }, - { NULL, 0UL }, + { + "create", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__CREATE + }, + { + "drop", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__DROP + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__GETATTR + }, + { + "setattr", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__SETATTR + }, + { + "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__RELABELFROM + }, + { + "relabelto", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__RELABELTO + }, + { + "get_value", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__GET_VALUE + }, + { + "next_value", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__NEXT_VALUE + }, + { + "set_value", SEPG_DB_SEQUENCE__SET_VALUE + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + }, } }, { - "db_procedure", SEPG_CLASS_DB_PROCEDURE, + "db_procedure", SEPG_CLASS_DB_PROCEDURE, { - { "create", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__CREATE }, - { "drop", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__DROP }, - { "getattr", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__GETATTR }, - { "setattr", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__SETATTR }, - { "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__RELABELFROM }, - { "relabelto", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__RELABELTO }, - { "execute", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__EXECUTE }, - { "entrypoint", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__ENTRYPOINT }, - { "install", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__INSTALL }, - { NULL, 0UL }, + { + "create", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__CREATE + }, + { + "drop", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__DROP + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__GETATTR + }, + { + "setattr", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__SETATTR + }, + { + "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__RELABELFROM + }, + { + "relabelto", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__RELABELTO + }, + { + "execute", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__EXECUTE + }, + { + "entrypoint", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__ENTRYPOINT + }, + { + "install", SEPG_DB_PROCEDURE__INSTALL + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + }, } }, { - "db_column", SEPG_CLASS_DB_COLUMN, + "db_column", SEPG_CLASS_DB_COLUMN, { - { "create", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__CREATE }, - { "drop", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__DROP }, - { "getattr", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__GETATTR }, - { "setattr", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__SETATTR }, - { "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__RELABELFROM }, - { "relabelto", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__RELABELTO }, - { "select", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__SELECT }, - { "update", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__UPDATE }, - { "insert", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__INSERT }, - { NULL, 0UL }, + { + "create", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__CREATE + }, + { + "drop", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__DROP + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__GETATTR + }, + { + "setattr", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__SETATTR + }, + { + "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__RELABELFROM + }, + { + "relabelto", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__RELABELTO + }, + { + "select", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__SELECT + }, + { + "update", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__UPDATE + }, + { + "insert", SEPG_DB_COLUMN__INSERT + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + }, } }, { - "db_tuple", SEPG_CLASS_DB_TUPLE, + "db_tuple", SEPG_CLASS_DB_TUPLE, { - { "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__RELABELFROM }, - { "relabelto", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__RELABELTO }, - { "select", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__SELECT }, - { "update", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__UPDATE }, - { "insert", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__INSERT }, - { "delete", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__DELETE }, - { NULL, 0UL }, + { + "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__RELABELFROM + }, + { + "relabelto", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__RELABELTO + }, + { + "select", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__SELECT + }, + { + "update", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__UPDATE + }, + { + "insert", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__INSERT + }, + { + "delete", SEPG_DB_TUPLE__DELETE + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + }, } }, { - "db_blob", SEPG_CLASS_DB_BLOB, + "db_blob", SEPG_CLASS_DB_BLOB, { - { "create", SEPG_DB_BLOB__CREATE }, - { "drop", SEPG_DB_BLOB__DROP }, - { "getattr", SEPG_DB_BLOB__GETATTR }, - { "setattr", SEPG_DB_BLOB__SETATTR }, - { "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_BLOB__RELABELFROM }, - { "relabelto", SEPG_DB_BLOB__RELABELTO }, - { "read", SEPG_DB_BLOB__READ }, - { "write", SEPG_DB_BLOB__WRITE }, - { "import", SEPG_DB_BLOB__IMPORT }, - { "export", SEPG_DB_BLOB__EXPORT }, - { NULL, 0UL }, + { + "create", SEPG_DB_BLOB__CREATE + }, + { + "drop", SEPG_DB_BLOB__DROP + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_DB_BLOB__GETATTR + }, + { + "setattr", SEPG_DB_BLOB__SETATTR + }, + { + "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_BLOB__RELABELFROM + }, + { + "relabelto", SEPG_DB_BLOB__RELABELTO + }, + { + "read", SEPG_DB_BLOB__READ + }, + { + "write", SEPG_DB_BLOB__WRITE + }, + { + "import", SEPG_DB_BLOB__IMPORT + }, + { + "export", SEPG_DB_BLOB__EXPORT + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + }, } }, { - "db_language", SEPG_CLASS_DB_LANGUAGE, + "db_language", SEPG_CLASS_DB_LANGUAGE, { - { "create", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__CREATE }, - { "drop", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__DROP }, - { "getattr", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__GETATTR }, - { "setattr", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__SETATTR }, - { "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__RELABELFROM }, - { "relabelto", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__RELABELTO }, - { "implement", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__IMPLEMENT }, - { "execute", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__EXECUTE }, - { NULL, 0UL }, + { + "create", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__CREATE + }, + { + "drop", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__DROP + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__GETATTR + }, + { + "setattr", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__SETATTR + }, + { + "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__RELABELFROM + }, + { + "relabelto", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__RELABELTO + }, + { + "implement", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__IMPLEMENT + }, + { + "execute", SEPG_DB_LANGUAGE__EXECUTE + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + }, } }, { - "db_view", SEPG_CLASS_DB_VIEW, + "db_view", SEPG_CLASS_DB_VIEW, { - { "create", SEPG_DB_VIEW__CREATE }, - { "drop", SEPG_DB_VIEW__DROP }, - { "getattr", SEPG_DB_VIEW__GETATTR }, - { "setattr", SEPG_DB_VIEW__SETATTR }, - { "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_VIEW__RELABELFROM }, - { "relabelto", SEPG_DB_VIEW__RELABELTO }, - { "expand", SEPG_DB_VIEW__EXPAND }, - { NULL, 0UL }, + { + "create", SEPG_DB_VIEW__CREATE + }, + { + "drop", SEPG_DB_VIEW__DROP + }, + { + "getattr", SEPG_DB_VIEW__GETATTR + }, + { + "setattr", SEPG_DB_VIEW__SETATTR + }, + { + "relabelfrom", SEPG_DB_VIEW__RELABELFROM + }, + { + "relabelto", SEPG_DB_VIEW__RELABELTO + }, + { + "expand", SEPG_DB_VIEW__EXPAND + }, + { + NULL, 0UL + }, } }, }; @@ -316,7 +624,7 @@ sepgsql_get_mode(void) int sepgsql_set_mode(int new_mode) { - int old_mode = sepgsql_mode; + int old_mode = sepgsql_mode; sepgsql_mode = new_mode; @@ -367,10 +675,10 @@ sepgsql_audit_log(bool denied, uint32 audited, const char *audit_name) { - StringInfoData buf; - const char *class_name; - const char *av_name; - int i; + StringInfoData buf; + const char *class_name; + const char *av_name; + int i; /* lookup name of the object class */ Assert(tclass < SEPG_CLASS_MAX); @@ -380,7 +688,7 @@ sepgsql_audit_log(bool denied, initStringInfo(&buf); appendStringInfo(&buf, "%s {", (denied ? "denied" : "allowed")); - for (i=0; selinux_catalog[tclass].av[i].av_name; i++) + for (i = 0; selinux_catalog[tclass].av[i].av_name; i++) { if (audited & (1UL << i)) { @@ -418,14 +726,15 @@ void sepgsql_compute_avd(const char *scontext, const char *tcontext, uint16 tclass, - struct av_decision *avd) + struct av_decision * avd) { - const char *tclass_name; - security_class_t tclass_ex; - struct av_decision avd_ex; - int i, deny_unknown = security_deny_unknown(); + const char *tclass_name; + security_class_t tclass_ex; + struct av_decision avd_ex; + int i, + deny_unknown = security_deny_unknown(); - /* Get external code of the object class*/ + /* Get external code of the object class */ Assert(tclass < SEPG_CLASS_MAX); Assert(tclass == selinux_catalog[tclass].class_code); @@ -436,14 +745,13 @@ sepgsql_compute_avd(const char *scontext, { /* * If the current security policy does not support permissions - * corresponding to database objects, we fill up them with dummy - * data. + * corresponding to database objects, we fill up them with dummy data. * If security_deny_unknown() returns positive value, undefined * permissions should be denied. Otherwise, allowed */ avd->allowed = (security_deny_unknown() > 0 ? 0 : ~0); avd->auditallow = 0U; - avd->auditdeny = ~0U; + avd->auditdeny = ~0U; avd->flags = 0; return; @@ -453,8 +761,8 @@ sepgsql_compute_avd(const char *scontext, * Ask SELinux what is allowed set of permissions on a pair of the * security contexts and the given object class. */ - if (security_compute_av_flags_raw((security_context_t)scontext, - (security_context_t)tcontext, + if (security_compute_av_flags_raw((security_context_t) scontext, + (security_context_t) tcontext, tclass_ex, 0, &avd_ex) < 0) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INTERNAL_ERROR), @@ -464,17 +772,17 @@ sepgsql_compute_avd(const char *scontext, /* * SELinux returns its access control decision as a set of permissions - * represented in external code which depends on run-time environment. - * So, we need to translate it to the internal representation before - * returning results for the caller. + * represented in external code which depends on run-time environment. So, + * we need to translate it to the internal representation before returning + * results for the caller. */ memset(avd, 0, sizeof(struct av_decision)); - for (i=0; selinux_catalog[tclass].av[i].av_name; i++) + for (i = 0; selinux_catalog[tclass].av[i].av_name; i++) { - access_vector_t av_code_ex; - const char *av_name = selinux_catalog[tclass].av[i].av_name; - uint32 av_code = selinux_catalog[tclass].av[i].av_code; + access_vector_t av_code_ex; + const char *av_name = selinux_catalog[tclass].av[i].av_name; + uint32 av_code = selinux_catalog[tclass].av[i].av_code; av_code_ex = string_to_av_perm(tclass_ex, av_name); if (av_code_ex == 0) @@ -524,23 +832,23 @@ sepgsql_compute_create(const char *scontext, const char *tcontext, uint16 tclass) { - security_context_t ncontext; - security_class_t tclass_ex; - const char *tclass_name; - char *result; + security_context_t ncontext; + security_class_t tclass_ex; + const char *tclass_name; + char *result; - /* Get external code of the object class*/ + /* Get external code of the object class */ Assert(tclass < SEPG_CLASS_MAX); tclass_name = selinux_catalog[tclass].class_name; tclass_ex = string_to_security_class(tclass_name); /* - * Ask SELinux what is the default context for the given object class - * on a pair of security contexts + * Ask SELinux what is the default context for the given object class on a + * pair of security contexts */ - if (security_compute_create_raw((security_context_t)scontext, - (security_context_t)tcontext, + if (security_compute_create_raw((security_context_t) scontext, + (security_context_t) tcontext, tclass_ex, &ncontext) < 0) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INTERNAL_ERROR), @@ -549,8 +857,8 @@ sepgsql_compute_create(const char *scontext, scontext, tcontext, tclass_name))); /* - * libselinux returns malloc()'ed string, so we need to copy it - * on the palloc()'ed region. + * libselinux returns malloc()'ed string, so we need to copy it on the + * palloc()'ed region. */ PG_TRY(); { @@ -589,7 +897,7 @@ sepgsql_check_perms(const char *scontext, const char *audit_name, bool abort) { - struct av_decision avd; + struct av_decision avd; uint32 denied; uint32 audited; bool result = true; @@ -602,7 +910,7 @@ sepgsql_check_perms(const char *scontext, audited = (denied ? denied : required); else audited = (denied ? (denied & avd.auditdeny) - : (required & avd.auditallow)); + : (required & avd.auditallow)); if (denied && sepgsql_getenforce() > 0 && @@ -610,8 +918,8 @@ sepgsql_check_perms(const char *scontext, result = false; /* - * It records a security audit for the request, if needed. - * But, when SE-PgSQL performs 'internal' mode, it needs to keep silent. + * It records a security audit for the request, if needed. But, when + * SE-PgSQL performs 'internal' mode, it needs to keep silent. */ if (audited && sepgsql_mode != SEPGSQL_MODE_INTERNAL) { diff --git a/contrib/sepgsql/sepgsql.h b/contrib/sepgsql/sepgsql.h index ba7b2d1597..71688ab784 100644 --- a/contrib/sepgsql/sepgsql.h +++ b/contrib/sepgsql/sepgsql.h @@ -218,33 +218,34 @@ extern bool sepgsql_get_debug_audit(void); /* * selinux.c */ -extern bool sepgsql_is_enabled(void); +extern bool sepgsql_is_enabled(void); extern int sepgsql_get_mode(void); extern int sepgsql_set_mode(int new_mode); extern bool sepgsql_getenforce(void); extern void sepgsql_audit_log(bool denied, - const char *scontext, - const char *tcontext, - uint16 tclass, - uint32 audited, - const char *audit_name); + const char *scontext, + const char *tcontext, + uint16 tclass, + uint32 audited, + const char *audit_name); extern void sepgsql_compute_avd(const char *scontext, - const char *tcontext, - uint16 tclass, - struct av_decision *avd); + const char *tcontext, + uint16 tclass, + struct av_decision * avd); extern char *sepgsql_compute_create(const char *scontext, - const char *tcontext, - uint16 tclass); + const char *tcontext, + uint16 tclass); extern bool sepgsql_check_perms(const char *scontext, - const char *tcontext, - uint16 tclass, - uint32 required, - const char *audit_name, - bool abort); + const char *tcontext, + uint16 tclass, + uint32 required, + const char *audit_name, + bool abort); + /* * label.c */ @@ -252,8 +253,8 @@ extern char *sepgsql_get_client_label(void); extern char *sepgsql_set_client_label(char *new_label); extern char *sepgsql_get_label(Oid relOid, Oid objOid, int32 subId); -extern void sepgsql_object_relabel(const ObjectAddress *object, - const char *seclabel); +extern void sepgsql_object_relabel(const ObjectAddress *object, + const char *seclabel); extern Datum sepgsql_getcon(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); extern Datum sepgsql_mcstrans_in(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); @@ -276,7 +277,7 @@ extern void sepgsql_schema_relabel(Oid namespaceId, const char *seclabel); */ extern void sepgsql_attribute_post_create(Oid relOid, AttrNumber attnum); extern void sepgsql_attribute_relabel(Oid relOid, AttrNumber attnum, - const char *seclabel); + const char *seclabel); extern void sepgsql_relation_post_create(Oid relOid); extern void sepgsql_relation_relabel(Oid relOid, const char *seclabel); @@ -287,4 +288,4 @@ extern void sepgsql_proc_post_create(Oid functionId); extern void sepgsql_proc_relabel(Oid functionId, const char *seclabel); extern char *sepgsql_proc_get_domtrans(Oid functionId); -#endif /* SEPGSQL_H */ +#endif /* SEPGSQL_H */ diff --git a/contrib/spi/moddatetime.c b/contrib/spi/moddatetime.c index f5a0d93ef5..d02560c298 100644 --- a/contrib/spi/moddatetime.c +++ b/contrib/spi/moddatetime.c @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ moddatetime(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * This is where we check to see if the field we are supposed to update - * even exists. The above function must return -1 if name not found? + * even exists. The above function must return -1 if name not found? */ if (attnum < 0) ereport(ERROR, diff --git a/contrib/xml2/xpath.c b/contrib/xml2/xpath.c index e92ab66491..44c600e134 100644 --- a/contrib/xml2/xpath.c +++ b/contrib/xml2/xpath.c @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ static text *pgxml_result_to_text(xmlXPathObjectPtr res, xmlChar *toptag, static xmlChar *pgxml_texttoxmlchar(text *textstring); static xmlXPathObjectPtr pgxml_xpath(text *document, xmlChar *xpath, - xpath_workspace *workspace); + xpath_workspace *workspace); static void cleanup_workspace(xpath_workspace *workspace); @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Datum xpath_nodeset(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { text *document = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - text *xpathsupp = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); /* XPath expression */ + text *xpathsupp = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); /* XPath expression */ xmlChar *toptag = pgxml_texttoxmlchar(PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(2)); xmlChar *septag = pgxml_texttoxmlchar(PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(3)); xmlChar *xpath; @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Datum xpath_list(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { text *document = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - text *xpathsupp = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); /* XPath expression */ + text *xpathsupp = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); /* XPath expression */ xmlChar *plainsep = pgxml_texttoxmlchar(PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(2)); xmlChar *xpath; text *xpres; @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Datum xpath_string(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { text *document = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - text *xpathsupp = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); /* XPath expression */ + text *xpathsupp = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); /* XPath expression */ xmlChar *xpath; int32 pathsize; text *xpres; @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Datum xpath_number(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { text *document = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - text *xpathsupp = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); /* XPath expression */ + text *xpathsupp = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); /* XPath expression */ xmlChar *xpath; float4 fRes; xmlXPathObjectPtr res; @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Datum xpath_bool(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { text *document = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - text *xpathsupp = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); /* XPath expression */ + text *xpathsupp = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); /* XPath expression */ xmlChar *xpath; int bRes; xmlXPathObjectPtr res; diff --git a/contrib/xml2/xslt_proc.c b/contrib/xml2/xslt_proc.c index a90104d17a..f8f7d7263f 100644 --- a/contrib/xml2/xslt_proc.c +++ b/contrib/xml2/xslt_proc.c @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ extern void pgxml_parser_init(void); /* local defs */ static const char **parse_params(text *paramstr); - #endif /* USE_LIBXSLT */ @@ -166,7 +165,7 @@ parse_params(text *paramstr) { max_params *= 2; params = (const char **) repalloc(params, - (max_params + 1) * sizeof(char *)); + (max_params + 1) * sizeof(char *)); } params[nparams++] = pos; pos = strstr(pos, nvsep); diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c index 6d608fed89..175e6ea2f2 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/heaptuple.c @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ nocachegetattr(HeapTuple tuple, * * check to see if any preceding bits are null... */ - int byte = attnum >> 3; + int byte = attnum >> 3; int finalbit = attnum & 0x07; /* check for nulls "before" final bit of last byte */ diff --git a/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c b/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c index 9ea87360f9..85c43199aa 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c +++ b/src/backend/access/common/indextuple.c @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ nocache_index_getattr(IndexTuple tup, * Now check to see if any preceding bits are null... */ { - int byte = attnum >> 3; + int byte = attnum >> 3; int finalbit = attnum & 0x07; /* check for nulls "before" final bit of last byte */ diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c index ce9abae6aa..2de58604ee 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginarrayproc.c @@ -82,7 +82,8 @@ ginqueryarrayextract(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ArrayType *array = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P_COPY(0); int32 *nkeys = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(2); - /* bool **pmatch = (bool **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(3); */ + + /* bool **pmatch = (bool **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(3); */ /* Pointer *extra_data = (Pointer *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4); */ bool **nullFlags = (bool **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(5); int32 *searchMode = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(6); @@ -112,7 +113,7 @@ ginqueryarrayextract(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) case GinContainsStrategy: if (nelems > 0) *searchMode = GIN_SEARCH_MODE_DEFAULT; - else /* everything contains the empty set */ + else /* everything contains the empty set */ *searchMode = GIN_SEARCH_MODE_ALL; break; case GinContainedStrategy: @@ -142,10 +143,13 @@ ginarrayconsistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(1); + /* ArrayType *query = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(2); */ int32 nkeys = PG_GETARG_INT32(3); + /* Pointer *extra_data = (Pointer *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4); */ bool *recheck = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(5); + /* Datum *queryKeys = (Datum *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(6); */ bool *nullFlags = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(7); bool res; @@ -190,10 +194,11 @@ ginarrayconsistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) case GinEqualStrategy: /* we will need recheck */ *recheck = true; + /* * Must have all elements in check[] true; no discrimination - * against nulls here. This is because array_contain_compare - * and array_eq handle nulls differently ... + * against nulls here. This is because array_contain_compare and + * array_eq handle nulls differently ... */ res = true; for (i = 0; i < nkeys; i++) diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginbulk.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginbulk.c index f0c8c8e37f..9e5bab194d 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginbulk.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginbulk.c @@ -80,8 +80,8 @@ ginAllocEntryAccumulator(void *arg) GinEntryAccumulator *ea; /* - * Allocate memory by rather big chunks to decrease overhead. We have - * no need to reclaim RBNodes individually, so this costs nothing. + * Allocate memory by rather big chunks to decrease overhead. We have no + * need to reclaim RBNodes individually, so this costs nothing. */ if (accum->entryallocator == NULL || accum->eas_used >= DEF_NENTRY) { @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ ginInitBA(BuildAccumulator *accum) cmpEntryAccumulator, ginCombineData, ginAllocEntryAccumulator, - NULL, /* no freefunc needed */ + NULL, /* no freefunc needed */ (void *) accum); } @@ -145,8 +145,8 @@ ginInsertBAEntry(BuildAccumulator *accum, bool isNew; /* - * For the moment, fill only the fields of eatmp that will be looked at - * by cmpEntryAccumulator or ginCombineData. + * For the moment, fill only the fields of eatmp that will be looked at by + * cmpEntryAccumulator or ginCombineData. */ eatmp.attnum = attnum; eatmp.key = key; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c b/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c index 4a1e754800..41dbe9fd11 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/gindatapage.c @@ -21,13 +21,13 @@ int ginCompareItemPointers(ItemPointer a, ItemPointer b) { - BlockNumber ba = GinItemPointerGetBlockNumber(a); - BlockNumber bb = GinItemPointerGetBlockNumber(b); + BlockNumber ba = GinItemPointerGetBlockNumber(a); + BlockNumber bb = GinItemPointerGetBlockNumber(b); if (ba == bb) { - OffsetNumber oa = GinItemPointerGetOffsetNumber(a); - OffsetNumber ob = GinItemPointerGetOffsetNumber(b); + OffsetNumber oa = GinItemPointerGetOffsetNumber(a); + OffsetNumber ob = GinItemPointerGetOffsetNumber(b); if (oa == ob) return 0; @@ -383,6 +383,7 @@ dataPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prda Page page = BufferGetPage(buf); int sizeofitem = GinSizeOfDataPageItem(page); int cnt = 0; + /* these must be static so they can be returned to caller */ static XLogRecData rdata[3]; static ginxlogInsert data; @@ -474,6 +475,7 @@ dataSplitPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer lbuf, Buffer rbuf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRe Size pageSize = PageGetPageSize(lpage); Size freeSpace; uint32 nCopied = 1; + /* these must be static so they can be returned to caller */ static ginxlogSplit data; static XLogRecData rdata[4]; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c index 9749a1be78..fa134f9fc3 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c @@ -98,11 +98,11 @@ GinFormTuple(GinState *ginstate, if (errorTooBig) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_PROGRAM_LIMIT_EXCEEDED), - errmsg("index row size %lu exceeds maximum %lu for index \"%s\"", - (unsigned long) newsize, - (unsigned long) Min(INDEX_SIZE_MASK, - GinMaxItemSize), - RelationGetRelationName(ginstate->index)))); + errmsg("index row size %lu exceeds maximum %lu for index \"%s\"", + (unsigned long) newsize, + (unsigned long) Min(INDEX_SIZE_MASK, + GinMaxItemSize), + RelationGetRelationName(ginstate->index)))); pfree(itup); return NULL; } @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ GinShortenTuple(IndexTuple itup, uint32 nipd) * Form a non-leaf entry tuple by copying the key data from the given tuple, * which can be either a leaf or non-leaf entry tuple. * - * Any posting list in the source tuple is not copied. The specified child + * Any posting list in the source tuple is not copied. The specified child * block number is inserted into t_tid. */ static IndexTuple @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ entryIsMoveRight(GinBtree btree, Page page) key = gintuple_get_key(btree->ginstate, itup, &category); if (ginCompareAttEntries(btree->ginstate, - btree->entryAttnum, btree->entryKey, btree->entryCategory, + btree->entryAttnum, btree->entryKey, btree->entryCategory, attnum, key, category) > 0) return TRUE; @@ -488,6 +488,7 @@ entryPlaceToPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber off, XLogRecData **prd Page page = BufferGetPage(buf); OffsetNumber placed; int cnt = 0; + /* these must be static so they can be returned to caller */ static XLogRecData rdata[3]; static ginxlogInsert data; @@ -561,6 +562,7 @@ entrySplitPage(GinBtree btree, Buffer lbuf, Buffer rbuf, OffsetNumber off, XLogR Page lpage = PageGetTempPageCopy(BufferGetPage(lbuf)); Page rpage = BufferGetPage(rbuf); Size pageSize = PageGetPageSize(lpage); + /* these must be static so they can be returned to caller */ static XLogRecData rdata[2]; static ginxlogSplit data; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginfast.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginfast.c index 9960c786c9..82419e37ac 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginfast.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginfast.c @@ -88,9 +88,9 @@ writeListPage(Relation index, Buffer buffer, GinPageGetOpaque(page)->rightlink = rightlink; /* - * tail page may contain only whole row(s) or final part of row placed - * on previous pages (a "row" here meaning all the index tuples generated - * for one heap tuple) + * tail page may contain only whole row(s) or final part of row placed on + * previous pages (a "row" here meaning all the index tuples generated for + * one heap tuple) */ if (rightlink == InvalidBlockNumber) { @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ ginHeapTupleFastInsert(GinState *ginstate, GinTupleCollector *collector) * Create temporary index tuples for a single indexable item (one index column * for the heap tuple specified by ht_ctid), and append them to the array * in *collector. They will subsequently be written out using - * ginHeapTupleFastInsert. Note that to guarantee consistent state, all + * ginHeapTupleFastInsert. Note that to guarantee consistent state, all * temp tuples for a given heap tuple must be written in one call to * ginHeapTupleFastInsert. */ @@ -475,8 +475,8 @@ ginHeapTupleFastCollect(GinState *ginstate, } /* - * Build an index tuple for each key value, and add to array. In - * pending tuples we just stick the heap TID into t_tid. + * Build an index tuple for each key value, and add to array. In pending + * tuples we just stick the heap TID into t_tid. */ for (i = 0; i < nentries; i++) { @@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ processPendingPage(BuildAccumulator *accum, KeyArray *ka, { IndexTuple itup = (IndexTuple) PageGetItem(page, PageGetItemId(page, i)); OffsetNumber curattnum; - Datum curkey; + Datum curkey; GinNullCategory curcategory; /* Check for change of heap TID or attnum */ @@ -830,7 +830,7 @@ ginInsertCleanup(GinState *ginstate, */ ginBeginBAScan(&accum); while ((list = ginGetBAEntry(&accum, - &attnum, &key, &category, &nlist)) != NULL) + &attnum, &key, &category, &nlist)) != NULL) { ginEntryInsert(ginstate, attnum, key, category, list, nlist, NULL); @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ ginInsertCleanup(GinState *ginstate, ginBeginBAScan(&accum); while ((list = ginGetBAEntry(&accum, - &attnum, &key, &category, &nlist)) != NULL) + &attnum, &key, &category, &nlist)) != NULL) ginEntryInsert(ginstate, attnum, key, category, list, nlist, NULL); } diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c index e07dc0a6ce..a4771654a6 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ static bool callConsistentFn(GinState *ginstate, GinScanKey key) { /* - * If we're dealing with a dummy EVERYTHING key, we don't want to call - * the consistentFn; just claim it matches. + * If we're dealing with a dummy EVERYTHING key, we don't want to call the + * consistentFn; just claim it matches. */ if (key->searchMode == GIN_SEARCH_MODE_EVERYTHING) { @@ -174,14 +174,14 @@ scanPostingTree(Relation index, GinScanEntry scanEntry, /* * Collects TIDs into scanEntry->matchBitmap for all heap tuples that - * match the search entry. This supports three different match modes: + * match the search entry. This supports three different match modes: * * 1. Partial-match support: scan from current point until the - * comparePartialFn says we're done. + * comparePartialFn says we're done. * 2. SEARCH_MODE_ALL: scan from current point (which should be first - * key for the current attnum) until we hit null items or end of attnum + * key for the current attnum) until we hit null items or end of attnum * 3. SEARCH_MODE_EVERYTHING: scan from current point (which should be first - * key for the current attnum) until we hit end of attnum + * key for the current attnum) until we hit end of attnum * * Returns true if done, false if it's necessary to restart scan from scratch */ @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ static bool collectMatchBitmap(GinBtreeData *btree, GinBtreeStack *stack, GinScanEntry scanEntry) { - OffsetNumber attnum; + OffsetNumber attnum; Form_pg_attribute attr; /* Initialize empty bitmap result */ @@ -253,8 +253,8 @@ collectMatchBitmap(GinBtreeData *btree, GinBtreeStack *stack, cmp = DatumGetInt32(FunctionCall4(&btree->ginstate->comparePartialFn[attnum - 1], scanEntry->queryKey, idatum, - UInt16GetDatum(scanEntry->strategy), - PointerGetDatum(scanEntry->extra_data))); + UInt16GetDatum(scanEntry->strategy), + PointerGetDatum(scanEntry->extra_data))); if (cmp > 0) return true; @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ collectMatchBitmap(GinBtreeData *btree, GinBtreeStack *stack, /* * In ALL mode, we are not interested in null items, so we can * stop if we get to a null-item placeholder (which will be the - * last entry for a given attnum). We do want to include NULL_KEY + * last entry for a given attnum). We do want to include NULL_KEY * and EMPTY_ITEM entries, though. */ if (icategory == GIN_CAT_NULL_ITEM) @@ -287,8 +287,8 @@ collectMatchBitmap(GinBtreeData *btree, GinBtreeStack *stack, * We should unlock current page (but not unpin) during tree scan * to prevent deadlock with vacuum processes. * - * We save current entry value (idatum) to be able to re-find - * our tuple after re-locking + * We save current entry value (idatum) to be able to re-find our + * tuple after re-locking */ if (icategory == GIN_CAT_NORM_KEY) idatum = datumCopy(idatum, attr->attbyval, attr->attlen); @@ -442,11 +442,11 @@ restartScanEntry: Page page; /* - * We should unlock entry page before touching posting tree - * to prevent deadlocks with vacuum processes. Because entry is - * never deleted from page and posting tree is never reduced to - * the posting list, we can unlock page after getting BlockNumber - * of root of posting tree. + * We should unlock entry page before touching posting tree to + * prevent deadlocks with vacuum processes. Because entry is never + * deleted from page and posting tree is never reduced to the + * posting list, we can unlock page after getting BlockNumber of + * root of posting tree. */ LockBuffer(stackEntry->buffer, GIN_UNLOCK); needUnlock = FALSE; @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ entryGetNextItem(GinState *ginstate, GinScanEntry entry) if (!ItemPointerIsValid(&entry->curItem) || ginCompareItemPointers(&entry->curItem, - entry->list + entry->offset - 1) == 0) + entry->list + entry->offset - 1) == 0) { /* * First pages are deleted or empty, or we found exact @@ -656,10 +656,10 @@ entryGetItem(GinState *ginstate, GinScanEntry entry) } /* - * Reset counter to the beginning of entry->matchResult. - * Note: entry->offset is still greater than - * matchResult->ntuples if matchResult is lossy. So, on next - * call we will get next result from TIDBitmap. + * Reset counter to the beginning of entry->matchResult. Note: + * entry->offset is still greater than matchResult->ntuples if + * matchResult is lossy. So, on next call we will get next + * result from TIDBitmap. */ entry->offset = 0; } @@ -745,10 +745,10 @@ keyGetItem(GinState *ginstate, MemoryContext tempCtx, GinScanKey key) /* * Find the minimum of the active entry curItems. * - * Note: a lossy-page entry is encoded by a ItemPointer with max value - * for offset (0xffff), so that it will sort after any exact entries - * for the same page. So we'll prefer to return exact pointers not - * lossy pointers, which is good. + * Note: a lossy-page entry is encoded by a ItemPointer with max value for + * offset (0xffff), so that it will sort after any exact entries for the + * same page. So we'll prefer to return exact pointers not lossy + * pointers, which is good. */ ItemPointerSetMax(&minItem); @@ -782,28 +782,27 @@ keyGetItem(GinState *ginstate, MemoryContext tempCtx, GinScanKey key) /* * Lossy-page entries pose a problem, since we don't know the correct - * entryRes state to pass to the consistentFn, and we also don't know - * what its combining logic will be (could be AND, OR, or even NOT). - * If the logic is OR then the consistentFn might succeed for all - * items in the lossy page even when none of the other entries match. + * entryRes state to pass to the consistentFn, and we also don't know what + * its combining logic will be (could be AND, OR, or even NOT). If the + * logic is OR then the consistentFn might succeed for all items in the + * lossy page even when none of the other entries match. * * If we have a single lossy-page entry then we check to see if the - * consistentFn will succeed with only that entry TRUE. If so, - * we return a lossy-page pointer to indicate that the whole heap - * page must be checked. (On subsequent calls, we'll do nothing until - * minItem is past the page altogether, thus ensuring that we never return - * both regular and lossy pointers for the same page.) + * consistentFn will succeed with only that entry TRUE. If so, we return + * a lossy-page pointer to indicate that the whole heap page must be + * checked. (On subsequent calls, we'll do nothing until minItem is past + * the page altogether, thus ensuring that we never return both regular + * and lossy pointers for the same page.) * - * This idea could be generalized to more than one lossy-page entry, - * but ideally lossy-page entries should be infrequent so it would - * seldom be the case that we have more than one at once. So it - * doesn't seem worth the extra complexity to optimize that case. - * If we do find more than one, we just punt and return a lossy-page - * pointer always. + * This idea could be generalized to more than one lossy-page entry, but + * ideally lossy-page entries should be infrequent so it would seldom be + * the case that we have more than one at once. So it doesn't seem worth + * the extra complexity to optimize that case. If we do find more than + * one, we just punt and return a lossy-page pointer always. * - * Note that only lossy-page entries pointing to the current item's - * page should trigger this processing; we might have future lossy - * pages in the entry array, but they aren't relevant yet. + * Note that only lossy-page entries pointing to the current item's page + * should trigger this processing; we might have future lossy pages in the + * entry array, but they aren't relevant yet. */ ItemPointerSetLossyPage(&curPageLossy, GinItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&key->curItem)); @@ -853,15 +852,14 @@ keyGetItem(GinState *ginstate, MemoryContext tempCtx, GinScanKey key) } /* - * At this point we know that we don't need to return a lossy - * whole-page pointer, but we might have matches for individual exact - * item pointers, possibly in combination with a lossy pointer. Our - * strategy if there's a lossy pointer is to try the consistentFn both - * ways and return a hit if it accepts either one (forcing the hit to - * be marked lossy so it will be rechecked). An exception is that - * we don't need to try it both ways if the lossy pointer is in a - * "hidden" entry, because the consistentFn's result can't depend on - * that. + * At this point we know that we don't need to return a lossy whole-page + * pointer, but we might have matches for individual exact item pointers, + * possibly in combination with a lossy pointer. Our strategy if there's + * a lossy pointer is to try the consistentFn both ways and return a hit + * if it accepts either one (forcing the hit to be marked lossy so it will + * be rechecked). An exception is that we don't need to try it both ways + * if the lossy pointer is in a "hidden" entry, because the consistentFn's + * result can't depend on that. * * Prepare entryRes array to be passed to consistentFn. */ @@ -960,7 +958,7 @@ scanGetItem(IndexScanDesc scan, ItemPointer advancePast, keyGetItem(&so->ginstate, so->tempCtx, key); if (key->isFinished) - return false; /* finished one of keys */ + return false; /* finished one of keys */ if (ginCompareItemPointers(&key->curItem, item) < 0) *item = key->curItem; @@ -975,7 +973,7 @@ scanGetItem(IndexScanDesc scan, ItemPointer advancePast, * that exact TID, or a lossy reference to the same page. * * This logic works only if a keyGetItem stream can never contain both - * exact and lossy pointers for the same page. Else we could have a + * exact and lossy pointers for the same page. Else we could have a * case like * * stream 1 stream 2 @@ -1011,8 +1009,8 @@ scanGetItem(IndexScanDesc scan, ItemPointer advancePast, break; /* - * No hit. Update myAdvancePast to this TID, so that on the next - * pass we'll move to the next possible entry. + * No hit. Update myAdvancePast to this TID, so that on the next pass + * we'll move to the next possible entry. */ myAdvancePast = *item; } @@ -1118,8 +1116,8 @@ scanGetCandidate(IndexScanDesc scan, pendingPosition *pos) /* * Now pos->firstOffset points to the first tuple of current heap - * row, pos->lastOffset points to the first tuple of next heap - * row (or to the end of page) + * row, pos->lastOffset points to the first tuple of next heap row + * (or to the end of page) */ break; } @@ -1181,7 +1179,7 @@ matchPartialInPendingList(GinState *ginstate, Page page, entry->queryKey, datum[off - 1], UInt16GetDatum(entry->strategy), - PointerGetDatum(entry->extra_data))); + PointerGetDatum(entry->extra_data))); if (cmp == 0) return true; else if (cmp > 0) @@ -1227,8 +1225,8 @@ collectMatchesForHeapRow(IndexScanDesc scan, pendingPosition *pos) memset(pos->hasMatchKey, FALSE, so->nkeys); /* - * Outer loop iterates over multiple pending-list pages when a single - * heap row has entries spanning those pages. + * Outer loop iterates over multiple pending-list pages when a single heap + * row has entries spanning those pages. */ for (;;) { @@ -1322,11 +1320,11 @@ collectMatchesForHeapRow(IndexScanDesc scan, pendingPosition *pos) if (res == 0) { /* - * Found exact match (there can be only one, except - * in EMPTY_QUERY mode). + * Found exact match (there can be only one, except in + * EMPTY_QUERY mode). * - * If doing partial match, scan forward from - * here to end of page to check for matches. + * If doing partial match, scan forward from here to + * end of page to check for matches. * * See comment above about tuple's ordering. */ @@ -1355,13 +1353,12 @@ collectMatchesForHeapRow(IndexScanDesc scan, pendingPosition *pos) if (StopLow >= StopHigh && entry->isPartialMatch) { /* - * No exact match on this page. If doing partial - * match, scan from the first tuple greater than - * target value to end of page. Note that since we - * don't remember whether the comparePartialFn told us - * to stop early on a previous page, we will uselessly - * apply comparePartialFn to the first tuple on each - * subsequent page. + * No exact match on this page. If doing partial match, + * scan from the first tuple greater than target value to + * end of page. Note that since we don't remember whether + * the comparePartialFn told us to stop early on a + * previous page, we will uselessly apply comparePartialFn + * to the first tuple on each subsequent page. */ key->entryRes[j] = matchPartialInPendingList(&so->ginstate, diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/gininsert.c b/src/backend/access/gin/gininsert.c index af5068906f..3e32af94a9 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/gininsert.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/gininsert.c @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ createPostingTree(Relation index, ItemPointerData *items, uint32 nitems) * Adds array of item pointers to tuple's posting list, or * creates posting tree and tuple pointing to tree in case * of not enough space. Max size of tuple is defined in - * GinFormTuple(). Returns a new, modified index tuple. + * GinFormTuple(). Returns a new, modified index tuple. * items[] must be in sorted order with no duplicates. */ static IndexTuple @@ -195,14 +195,14 @@ buildFreshLeafTuple(GinState *ginstate, BlockNumber postingRoot; /* - * Build posting-tree-only result tuple. We do this first so as - * to fail quickly if the key is too big. + * Build posting-tree-only result tuple. We do this first so as to + * fail quickly if the key is too big. */ res = GinFormTuple(ginstate, attnum, key, category, NULL, 0, true); /* - * Initialize posting tree with as many TIDs as will fit on the - * first page. + * Initialize posting tree with as many TIDs as will fit on the first + * page. */ postingRoot = createPostingTree(ginstate->index, items, @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ ginBuildCallback(Relation index, HeapTuple htup, Datum *values, ginBeginBAScan(&buildstate->accum); while ((list = ginGetBAEntry(&buildstate->accum, - &attnum, &key, &category, &nlist)) != NULL) + &attnum, &key, &category, &nlist)) != NULL) { /* there could be many entries, so be willing to abort here */ CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c index 25f60e15a0..37b08c0df6 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginscan.c @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ ginFillScanKey(GinScanOpaque so, OffsetNumber attnum, break; default: elog(ERROR, "unexpected searchMode: %d", searchMode); - queryCategory = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ + queryCategory = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ break; } isPartialMatch = false; @@ -294,8 +294,8 @@ ginNewScanKey(IndexScanDesc scan) int32 searchMode = GIN_SEARCH_MODE_DEFAULT; /* - * We assume that GIN-indexable operators are strict, so a null - * query argument means an unsatisfiable query. + * We assume that GIN-indexable operators are strict, so a null query + * argument means an unsatisfiable query. */ if (skey->sk_flags & SK_ISNULL) { @@ -315,8 +315,8 @@ ginNewScanKey(IndexScanDesc scan) PointerGetDatum(&searchMode))); /* - * If bogus searchMode is returned, treat as GIN_SEARCH_MODE_ALL; - * note in particular we don't allow extractQueryFn to select + * If bogus searchMode is returned, treat as GIN_SEARCH_MODE_ALL; note + * in particular we don't allow extractQueryFn to select * GIN_SEARCH_MODE_EVERYTHING. */ if (searchMode < GIN_SEARCH_MODE_DEFAULT || @@ -344,20 +344,20 @@ ginNewScanKey(IndexScanDesc scan) * If the extractQueryFn didn't create a nullFlags array, create one, * assuming that everything's non-null. Otherwise, run through the * array and make sure each value is exactly 0 or 1; this ensures - * binary compatibility with the GinNullCategory representation. - * While at it, detect whether any null keys are present. + * binary compatibility with the GinNullCategory representation. While + * at it, detect whether any null keys are present. */ if (nullFlags == NULL) nullFlags = (bool *) palloc0(nQueryValues * sizeof(bool)); else { - int32 j; + int32 j; for (j = 0; j < nQueryValues; j++) { if (nullFlags[j]) { - nullFlags[j] = true; /* not any other nonzero value */ + nullFlags[j] = true; /* not any other nonzero value */ hasNullQuery = true; } } @@ -387,11 +387,11 @@ ginNewScanKey(IndexScanDesc scan) /* * If the index is version 0, it may be missing null and placeholder * entries, which would render searches for nulls and full-index scans - * unreliable. Throw an error if so. + * unreliable. Throw an error if so. */ if (hasNullQuery && !so->isVoidRes) { - GinStatsData ginStats; + GinStatsData ginStats; ginGetStats(scan->indexRelation, &ginStats); if (ginStats.ginVersion < 1) @@ -410,6 +410,7 @@ ginrescan(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { IndexScanDesc scan = (IndexScanDesc) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); ScanKey scankey = (ScanKey) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + /* remaining arguments are ignored */ GinScanOpaque so = (GinScanOpaque) scan->opaque; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c index 392c12d47a..716cf3a734 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginutil.c @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ initGinState(GinState *state, Relation index) * However, we may have a collatable storage type for a noncollatable * indexed data type (for instance, hstore uses text index entries). * If there's no index collation then specify default collation in - * case the comparison function needs one. This is harmless if the + * case the comparison function needs one. This is harmless if the * comparison function doesn't care about collation, so we just do it * unconditionally. (We could alternatively call get_typcollation, * but that seems like expensive overkill --- there aren't going to be @@ -359,9 +359,9 @@ cmpEntries(const void *a, const void *b, void *arg) aa->datum, bb->datum)); /* - * Detect if we have any duplicates. If there are equal keys, qsort - * must compare them at some point, else it wouldn't know whether one - * should go before or after the other. + * Detect if we have any duplicates. If there are equal keys, qsort must + * compare them at some point, else it wouldn't know whether one should go + * before or after the other. */ if (res == 0) data->haveDups = true; @@ -422,9 +422,9 @@ ginExtractEntries(GinState *ginstate, OffsetNumber attnum, /* * If the extractValueFn didn't create a nullFlags array, create one, - * assuming that everything's non-null. Otherwise, run through the - * array and make sure each value is exactly 0 or 1; this ensures - * binary compatibility with the GinNullCategory representation. + * assuming that everything's non-null. Otherwise, run through the array + * and make sure each value is exactly 0 or 1; this ensures binary + * compatibility with the GinNullCategory representation. */ if (nullFlags == NULL) nullFlags = (bool *) palloc0(*nentries * sizeof(bool)); @@ -440,8 +440,8 @@ ginExtractEntries(GinState *ginstate, OffsetNumber attnum, * If there's more than one key, sort and unique-ify. * * XXX Using qsort here is notationally painful, and the overhead is - * pretty bad too. For small numbers of keys it'd likely be better to - * use a simple insertion sort. + * pretty bad too. For small numbers of keys it'd likely be better to use + * a simple insertion sort. */ if (*nentries > 1) { @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ ginExtractEntries(GinState *ginstate, OffsetNumber attnum, j = 1; for (i = 1; i < *nentries; i++) { - if (cmpEntries(&keydata[i-1], &keydata[i], &arg) != 0) + if (cmpEntries(&keydata[i - 1], &keydata[i], &arg) != 0) { entries[j] = keydata[i].datum; nullFlags[j] = keydata[i].isnull; @@ -533,9 +533,9 @@ ginoptions(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) void ginGetStats(Relation index, GinStatsData *stats) { - Buffer metabuffer; - Page metapage; - GinMetaPageData *metadata; + Buffer metabuffer; + Page metapage; + GinMetaPageData *metadata; metabuffer = ReadBuffer(index, GIN_METAPAGE_BLKNO); LockBuffer(metabuffer, GIN_SHARE); @@ -560,9 +560,9 @@ ginGetStats(Relation index, GinStatsData *stats) void ginUpdateStats(Relation index, const GinStatsData *stats) { - Buffer metabuffer; - Page metapage; - GinMetaPageData *metadata; + Buffer metabuffer; + Page metapage; + GinMetaPageData *metadata; metabuffer = ReadBuffer(index, GIN_METAPAGE_BLKNO); LockBuffer(metabuffer, GIN_EXCLUSIVE); @@ -580,9 +580,9 @@ ginUpdateStats(Relation index, const GinStatsData *stats) if (RelationNeedsWAL(index)) { - XLogRecPtr recptr; - ginxlogUpdateMeta data; - XLogRecData rdata; + XLogRecPtr recptr; + ginxlogUpdateMeta data; + XLogRecData rdata; data.node = index->rd_node; data.ntuples = 0; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c index 41ad382df0..79c54f16b8 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginvacuum.c @@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ ginvacuumcleanup(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { idxStat.nEntryPages++; - if ( GinPageIsLeaf(page) ) + if (GinPageIsLeaf(page)) idxStat.nEntries += PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page); } diff --git a/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c b/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c index e410959b85..c954bcb12f 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gin/ginxlog.c @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ ginRedoVacuumPage(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) else { OffsetNumber i, - *tod; + *tod; IndexTuple itup = (IndexTuple) (XLogRecGetData(record) + sizeof(ginxlogVacuumPage)); tod = (OffsetNumber *) palloc(sizeof(OffsetNumber) * PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page)); @@ -513,10 +513,10 @@ ginRedoUpdateMetapage(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) if (!XLByteLE(lsn, PageGetLSN(page))) { OffsetNumber l, - off = (PageIsEmpty(page)) ? FirstOffsetNumber : - OffsetNumberNext(PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page)); + off = (PageIsEmpty(page)) ? FirstOffsetNumber : + OffsetNumberNext(PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page)); int i, - tupsize; + tupsize; IndexTuple tuples = (IndexTuple) (XLogRecGetData(record) + sizeof(ginxlogUpdateMeta)); for (i = 0; i < data->ntuples; i++) diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c index 9529413e80..fae3464600 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gist.c @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ typedef struct /* A List of these is used represent a split-in-progress. */ typedef struct { - Buffer buf; /* the split page "half" */ - IndexTuple downlink; /* downlink for this half. */ + Buffer buf; /* the split page "half" */ + IndexTuple downlink; /* downlink for this half. */ } GISTPageSplitInfo; /* non-export function prototypes */ @@ -306,13 +306,13 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate, bool is_split; /* - * Refuse to modify a page that's incompletely split. This should - * not happen because we finish any incomplete splits while we walk - * down the tree. However, it's remotely possible that another - * concurrent inserter splits a parent page, and errors out before - * completing the split. We will just throw an error in that case, - * and leave any split we had in progress unfinished too. The next - * insert that comes along will clean up the mess. + * Refuse to modify a page that's incompletely split. This should not + * happen because we finish any incomplete splits while we walk down the + * tree. However, it's remotely possible that another concurrent inserter + * splits a parent page, and errors out before completing the split. We + * will just throw an error in that case, and leave any split we had in + * progress unfinished too. The next insert that comes along will clean up + * the mess. */ if (GistFollowRight(page)) elog(ERROR, "concurrent GiST page split was incomplete"); @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate, SplitedPageLayout *dist = NULL, *ptr; BlockNumber oldrlink = InvalidBlockNumber; - GistNSN oldnsn = { 0, 0 }; + GistNSN oldnsn = {0, 0}; SplitedPageLayout rootpg; BlockNumber blkno = BufferGetBlockNumber(buffer); bool is_rootsplit; @@ -364,8 +364,8 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate, /* * Set up pages to work with. Allocate new buffers for all but the - * leftmost page. The original page becomes the new leftmost page, - * and is just replaced with the new contents. + * leftmost page. The original page becomes the new leftmost page, and + * is just replaced with the new contents. * * For a root-split, allocate new buffers for all child pages, the * original page is overwritten with new root page containing @@ -414,8 +414,8 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate, if (is_rootsplit) { IndexTuple *downlinks; - int ndownlinks = 0; - int i; + int ndownlinks = 0; + int i; rootpg.buffer = buffer; rootpg.page = PageGetTempPageCopySpecial(BufferGetPage(rootpg.buffer)); @@ -443,6 +443,7 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate, for (ptr = dist; ptr; ptr = ptr->next) { GISTPageSplitInfo *si = palloc(sizeof(GISTPageSplitInfo)); + si->buf = ptr->buffer; si->downlink = ptr->itup; *splitinfo = lappend(*splitinfo, si); @@ -455,7 +456,8 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate, */ for (ptr = dist; ptr; ptr = ptr->next) { - char *data = (char *) (ptr->list); + char *data = (char *) (ptr->list); + for (i = 0; i < ptr->block.num; i++) { if (PageAddItem(ptr->page, (Item) data, IndexTupleSize((IndexTuple) data), i + FirstOffsetNumber, false, false) == InvalidOffsetNumber) @@ -495,8 +497,8 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate, MarkBufferDirty(leftchildbuf); /* - * The first page in the chain was a temporary working copy meant - * to replace the old page. Copy it over the old page. + * The first page in the chain was a temporary working copy meant to + * replace the old page. Copy it over the old page. */ PageRestoreTempPage(dist->page, BufferGetPage(dist->buffer)); dist->page = BufferGetPage(dist->buffer); @@ -518,8 +520,8 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate, * Return the new child buffers to the caller. * * If this was a root split, we've already inserted the downlink - * pointers, in the form of a new root page. Therefore we can - * release all the new buffers, and keep just the root page locked. + * pointers, in the form of a new root page. Therefore we can release + * all the new buffers, and keep just the root page locked. */ if (is_rootsplit) { @@ -572,20 +574,20 @@ gistplacetopage(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate, /* * If we inserted the downlink for a child page, set NSN and clear - * F_FOLLOW_RIGHT flag on the left child, so that concurrent scans know - * to follow the rightlink if and only if they looked at the parent page + * F_FOLLOW_RIGHT flag on the left child, so that concurrent scans know to + * follow the rightlink if and only if they looked at the parent page * before we inserted the downlink. * * Note that we do this *after* writing the WAL record. That means that - * the possible full page image in the WAL record does not include - * these changes, and they must be replayed even if the page is restored - * from the full page image. There's a chicken-and-egg problem: if we - * updated the child pages first, we wouldn't know the recptr of the WAL - * record we're about to write. + * the possible full page image in the WAL record does not include these + * changes, and they must be replayed even if the page is restored from + * the full page image. There's a chicken-and-egg problem: if we updated + * the child pages first, we wouldn't know the recptr of the WAL record + * we're about to write. */ if (BufferIsValid(leftchildbuf)) { - Page leftpg = BufferGetPage(leftchildbuf); + Page leftpg = BufferGetPage(leftchildbuf); GistPageGetOpaque(leftpg)->nsn = recptr; GistClearFollowRight(leftpg); @@ -636,8 +638,8 @@ gistdoinsert(Relation r, IndexTuple itup, Size freespace, GISTSTATE *giststate) stack->buffer = ReadBuffer(state.r, stack->blkno); /* - * Be optimistic and grab shared lock first. Swap it for an - * exclusive lock later if we need to update the page. + * Be optimistic and grab shared lock first. Swap it for an exclusive + * lock later if we need to update the page. */ if (!xlocked) { @@ -650,9 +652,9 @@ gistdoinsert(Relation r, IndexTuple itup, Size freespace, GISTSTATE *giststate) Assert(!RelationNeedsWAL(state.r) || !XLogRecPtrIsInvalid(stack->lsn)); /* - * If this page was split but the downlink was never inserted to - * the parent because the inserting backend crashed before doing - * that, fix that now. + * If this page was split but the downlink was never inserted to the + * parent because the inserting backend crashed before doing that, fix + * that now. */ if (GistFollowRight(stack->page)) { @@ -680,8 +682,8 @@ gistdoinsert(Relation r, IndexTuple itup, Size freespace, GISTSTATE *giststate) /* * Concurrent split detected. There's no guarantee that the * downlink for this page is consistent with the tuple we're - * inserting anymore, so go back to parent and rechoose the - * best child. + * inserting anymore, so go back to parent and rechoose the best + * child. */ UnlockReleaseBuffer(stack->buffer); xlocked = false; @@ -696,7 +698,7 @@ gistdoinsert(Relation r, IndexTuple itup, Size freespace, GISTSTATE *giststate) * Find the child node that has the minimum insertion penalty. */ BlockNumber childblkno; - IndexTuple newtup; + IndexTuple newtup; GISTInsertStack *item; stack->childoffnum = gistchoose(state.r, stack->page, itup, giststate); @@ -722,8 +724,8 @@ gistdoinsert(Relation r, IndexTuple itup, Size freespace, GISTSTATE *giststate) if (newtup) { /* - * Swap shared lock for an exclusive one. Beware, the page - * may change while we unlock/lock the page... + * Swap shared lock for an exclusive one. Beware, the page may + * change while we unlock/lock the page... */ if (!xlocked) { @@ -738,6 +740,7 @@ gistdoinsert(Relation r, IndexTuple itup, Size freespace, GISTSTATE *giststate) continue; } } + /* * Update the tuple. * @@ -752,8 +755,8 @@ gistdoinsert(Relation r, IndexTuple itup, Size freespace, GISTSTATE *giststate) stack->childoffnum, InvalidBuffer)) { /* - * If this was a root split, the root page continues to - * be the parent and the updated tuple went to one of the + * If this was a root split, the root page continues to be + * the parent and the updated tuple went to one of the * child pages, so we just need to retry from the root * page. */ @@ -779,13 +782,13 @@ gistdoinsert(Relation r, IndexTuple itup, Size freespace, GISTSTATE *giststate) { /* * Leaf page. Insert the new key. We've already updated all the - * parents on the way down, but we might have to split the page - * if it doesn't fit. gistinserthere() will take care of that. + * parents on the way down, but we might have to split the page if + * it doesn't fit. gistinserthere() will take care of that. */ /* - * Swap shared lock for an exclusive one. Be careful, the page - * may change while we unlock/lock the page... + * Swap shared lock for an exclusive one. Be careful, the page may + * change while we unlock/lock the page... */ if (!xlocked) { @@ -798,8 +801,8 @@ gistdoinsert(Relation r, IndexTuple itup, Size freespace, GISTSTATE *giststate) if (stack->blkno == GIST_ROOT_BLKNO) { /* - * the only page that can become inner instead of leaf - * is the root page, so for root we should recheck it + * the only page that can become inner instead of leaf is + * the root page, so for root we should recheck it */ if (!GistPageIsLeaf(stack->page)) { @@ -1059,21 +1062,23 @@ static IndexTuple gistformdownlink(Relation rel, Buffer buf, GISTSTATE *giststate, GISTInsertStack *stack) { - Page page = BufferGetPage(buf); + Page page = BufferGetPage(buf); OffsetNumber maxoff; OffsetNumber offset; - IndexTuple downlink = NULL; + IndexTuple downlink = NULL; maxoff = PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page); for (offset = FirstOffsetNumber; offset <= maxoff; offset = OffsetNumberNext(offset)) { IndexTuple ituple = (IndexTuple) - PageGetItem(page, PageGetItemId(page, offset)); + PageGetItem(page, PageGetItemId(page, offset)); + if (downlink == NULL) downlink = CopyIndexTuple(ituple); else { - IndexTuple newdownlink; + IndexTuple newdownlink; + newdownlink = gistgetadjusted(rel, downlink, ituple, giststate); if (newdownlink) @@ -1082,19 +1087,18 @@ gistformdownlink(Relation rel, Buffer buf, GISTSTATE *giststate, } /* - * If the page is completely empty, we can't form a meaningful - * downlink for it. But we have to insert a downlink for the page. - * Any key will do, as long as its consistent with the downlink of - * parent page, so that we can legally insert it to the parent. - * A minimal one that matches as few scans as possible would be best, - * to keep scans from doing useless work, but we don't know how to - * construct that. So we just use the downlink of the original page - * that was split - that's as far from optimal as it can get but will - * do.. + * If the page is completely empty, we can't form a meaningful downlink + * for it. But we have to insert a downlink for the page. Any key will do, + * as long as its consistent with the downlink of parent page, so that we + * can legally insert it to the parent. A minimal one that matches as few + * scans as possible would be best, to keep scans from doing useless work, + * but we don't know how to construct that. So we just use the downlink of + * the original page that was split - that's as far from optimal as it can + * get but will do.. */ if (!downlink) { - ItemId iid; + ItemId iid; LockBuffer(stack->parent->buffer, GIST_EXCLUSIVE); gistFindCorrectParent(rel, stack); @@ -1131,13 +1135,13 @@ gistfixsplit(GISTInsertState *state, GISTSTATE *giststate) buf = stack->buffer; /* - * Read the chain of split pages, following the rightlinks. Construct - * a downlink tuple for each page. + * Read the chain of split pages, following the rightlinks. Construct a + * downlink tuple for each page. */ for (;;) { GISTPageSplitInfo *si = palloc(sizeof(GISTPageSplitInfo)); - IndexTuple downlink; + IndexTuple downlink; page = BufferGetPage(buf); @@ -1182,8 +1186,8 @@ gistinserttuples(GISTInsertState *state, GISTInsertStack *stack, IndexTuple *tuples, int ntup, OffsetNumber oldoffnum, Buffer leftchild) { - List *splitinfo; - bool is_split; + List *splitinfo; + bool is_split; is_split = gistplacetopage(state, giststate, stack->buffer, tuples, ntup, oldoffnum, @@ -1204,21 +1208,21 @@ static void gistfinishsplit(GISTInsertState *state, GISTInsertStack *stack, GISTSTATE *giststate, List *splitinfo) { - ListCell *lc; - List *reversed; + ListCell *lc; + List *reversed; GISTPageSplitInfo *right; GISTPageSplitInfo *left; - IndexTuple tuples[2]; + IndexTuple tuples[2]; /* A split always contains at least two halves */ Assert(list_length(splitinfo) >= 2); /* - * We need to insert downlinks for each new page, and update the - * downlink for the original (leftmost) page in the split. Begin at - * the rightmost page, inserting one downlink at a time until there's - * only two pages left. Finally insert the downlink for the last new - * page and update the downlink for the original page as one operation. + * We need to insert downlinks for each new page, and update the downlink + * for the original (leftmost) page in the split. Begin at the rightmost + * page, inserting one downlink at a time until there's only two pages + * left. Finally insert the downlink for the last new page and update the + * downlink for the original page as one operation. */ /* for convenience, create a copy of the list in reverse order */ @@ -1231,7 +1235,7 @@ gistfinishsplit(GISTInsertState *state, GISTInsertStack *stack, LockBuffer(stack->parent->buffer, GIST_EXCLUSIVE); gistFindCorrectParent(state->r, stack); - while(list_length(reversed) > 2) + while (list_length(reversed) > 2) { right = (GISTPageSplitInfo *) linitial(reversed); left = (GISTPageSplitInfo *) lsecond(reversed); @@ -1386,7 +1390,7 @@ initGISTstate(GISTSTATE *giststate, Relation index) /* opclasses are not required to provide a Distance method */ if (OidIsValid(index_getprocid(index, i + 1, GIST_DISTANCE_PROC))) fmgr_info_copy(&(giststate->distanceFn[i]), - index_getprocinfo(index, i + 1, GIST_DISTANCE_PROC), + index_getprocinfo(index, i + 1, GIST_DISTANCE_PROC), CurrentMemoryContext); else giststate->distanceFn[i].fn_oid = InvalidOid; diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c index 8355081553..e4488a925d 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ * * On success return for a heap tuple, *recheck_p is set to indicate * whether recheck is needed. We recheck if any of the consistent() functions - * request it. recheck is not interesting when examining a non-leaf entry, + * request it. recheck is not interesting when examining a non-leaf entry, * since we must visit the lower index page if there's any doubt. * * If we are doing an ordered scan, so->distances[] is filled with distance @@ -62,15 +62,15 @@ gistindex_keytest(IndexScanDesc scan, *recheck_p = false; /* - * If it's a leftover invalid tuple from pre-9.1, treat it as a match - * with minimum possible distances. This means we'll always follow it - * to the referenced page. + * If it's a leftover invalid tuple from pre-9.1, treat it as a match with + * minimum possible distances. This means we'll always follow it to the + * referenced page. */ if (GistTupleIsInvalid(tuple)) { - int i; + int i; - if (GistPageIsLeaf(page)) /* shouldn't happen */ + if (GistPageIsLeaf(page)) /* shouldn't happen */ elog(ERROR, "invalid GIST tuple found on leaf page"); for (i = 0; i < scan->numberOfOrderBys; i++) so->distances[i] = -get_float8_infinity(); @@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ gistindex_keytest(IndexScanDesc scan, * always be zero, but might as well pass it for possible future * use.) * - * Note that Distance functions don't get a recheck argument. - * We can't tolerate lossy distance calculations on leaf tuples; + * Note that Distance functions don't get a recheck argument. We + * can't tolerate lossy distance calculations on leaf tuples; * there is no opportunity to re-sort the tuples afterwards. */ dist = FunctionCall4(&key->sk_func, @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ gistindex_keytest(IndexScanDesc scan, * ntids: if not NULL, gistgetbitmap's output tuple counter * * If tbm/ntids aren't NULL, we are doing an amgetbitmap scan, and heap - * tuples should be reported directly into the bitmap. If they are NULL, + * tuples should be reported directly into the bitmap. If they are NULL, * we're doing a plain or ordered indexscan. For a plain indexscan, heap * tuple TIDs are returned into so->pageData[]. For an ordered indexscan, * heap tuple TIDs are pushed into individual search queue items. @@ -525,8 +525,8 @@ gistgettuple(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * While scanning a leaf page, ItemPointers of matching heap * tuples are stored in so->pageData. If there are any on - * this page, we fall out of the inner "do" and loop around - * to return them. + * this page, we fall out of the inner "do" and loop around to + * return them. */ gistScanPage(scan, item, so->curTreeItem->distances, NULL, NULL); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c index 86a5d90f95..43c4b1251b 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c @@ -904,7 +904,7 @@ gist_point_compress(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) PG_RETURN_POINTER(entry); } -#define point_point_distance(p1,p2) \ +#define point_point_distance(p1,p2) \ DatumGetFloat8(DirectFunctionCall2(point_distance, \ PointPGetDatum(p1), PointPGetDatum(p2))) @@ -949,8 +949,8 @@ computeDistance(bool isLeaf, BOX *box, Point *point) else { /* closest point will be a vertex */ - Point p; - double subresult; + Point p; + double subresult; result = point_point_distance(point, &box->low); diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistscan.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistscan.c index 0a125e772d..67308ed37e 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistscan.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistscan.c @@ -57,9 +57,9 @@ GISTSearchTreeItemCombiner(RBNode *existing, const RBNode *newrb, void *arg) /* * If new item is heap tuple, it goes to front of chain; otherwise insert - * it before the first index-page item, so that index pages are visited - * in LIFO order, ensuring depth-first search of index pages. See - * comments in gist_private.h. + * it before the first index-page item, so that index pages are visited in + * LIFO order, ensuring depth-first search of index pages. See comments + * in gist_private.h. */ if (GISTSearchItemIsHeap(*newitem)) { @@ -136,6 +136,7 @@ gistrescan(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) IndexScanDesc scan = (IndexScanDesc) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); ScanKey key = (ScanKey) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); ScanKey orderbys = (ScanKey) PG_GETARG_POINTER(3); + /* nkeys and norderbys arguments are ignored */ GISTScanOpaque so = (GISTScanOpaque) scan->opaque; int i; @@ -164,8 +165,8 @@ gistrescan(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) scan->numberOfKeys * sizeof(ScanKeyData)); /* - * Modify the scan key so that the Consistent method is called for - * all comparisons. The original operator is passed to the Consistent + * Modify the scan key so that the Consistent method is called for all + * comparisons. The original operator is passed to the Consistent * function in the form of its strategy number, which is available * from the sk_strategy field, and its subtype from the sk_subtype * field. Also, preserve sk_func.fn_collation which is the input diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistutil.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistutil.c index 6736fd166c..e8bbd564c7 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistutil.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistutil.c @@ -503,11 +503,12 @@ gistFormTuple(GISTSTATE *giststate, Relation r, } res = index_form_tuple(giststate->tupdesc, compatt, isnull); + /* * The offset number on tuples on internal pages is unused. For historical * reasons, it is set 0xffff. */ - ItemPointerSetOffsetNumber( &(res->t_tid), 0xffff); + ItemPointerSetOffsetNumber(&(res->t_tid), 0xffff); return res; } diff --git a/src/backend/access/gist/gistxlog.c b/src/backend/access/gist/gistxlog.c index 0f406e16c4..51354c1c18 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/gist/gistxlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/gist/gistxlog.c @@ -41,12 +41,12 @@ static void gistRedoClearFollowRight(RelFileNode node, XLogRecPtr lsn, BlockNumber leftblkno) { - Buffer buffer; + Buffer buffer; buffer = XLogReadBuffer(node, leftblkno, false); if (BufferIsValid(buffer)) { - Page page = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); + Page page = (Page) BufferGetPage(buffer); /* * Note that we still update the page even if page LSN is equal to the @@ -103,6 +103,7 @@ gistRedoPageUpdateRecord(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) { int i; OffsetNumber *todelete = (OffsetNumber *) data; + data += sizeof(OffsetNumber) * xldata->ntodelete; for (i = 0; i < xldata->ntodelete; i++) @@ -115,12 +116,14 @@ gistRedoPageUpdateRecord(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) if (data - begin < record->xl_len) { OffsetNumber off = (PageIsEmpty(page)) ? FirstOffsetNumber : - OffsetNumberNext(PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page)); + OffsetNumberNext(PageGetMaxOffsetNumber(page)); + while (data - begin < record->xl_len) { - IndexTuple itup = (IndexTuple) data; + IndexTuple itup = (IndexTuple) data; Size sz = IndexTupleSize(itup); OffsetNumber l; + data += sz; l = PageAddItem(page, (Item) itup, sz, off, false, false); @@ -418,7 +421,7 @@ gistXLogSplit(RelFileNode node, BlockNumber blkno, bool page_is_leaf, SplitedPageLayout *ptr; int npage = 0, cur; - XLogRecPtr recptr; + XLogRecPtr recptr; for (ptr = dist; ptr; ptr = ptr->next) npage++; @@ -540,8 +543,8 @@ gistXLogUpdate(RelFileNode node, Buffer buffer, } /* - * Include a full page image of the child buf. (only necessary if - * a checkpoint happened since the child page was split) + * Include a full page image of the child buf. (only necessary if a + * checkpoint happened since the child page was split) */ if (BufferIsValid(leftchildbuf)) { diff --git a/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c b/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c index f19e5627f8..4cb29b2bb4 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c +++ b/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c @@ -413,6 +413,7 @@ hashrescan(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { IndexScanDesc scan = (IndexScanDesc) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); ScanKey scankey = (ScanKey) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + /* remaining arguments are ignored */ HashScanOpaque so = (HashScanOpaque) scan->opaque; Relation rel = scan->indexRelation; diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c b/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c index 89697f6ff5..1fbd8b39b4 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c @@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ relation_close(Relation relation, LOCKMODE lockmode) * This is essentially relation_open plus check that the relation * is not an index nor a composite type. (The caller should also * check that it's not a view or foreign table before assuming it has - * storage.) + * storage.) * ---------------- */ Relation @@ -1922,8 +1922,8 @@ heap_insert(Relation relation, HeapTuple tup, CommandId cid, /* * We're about to do the actual insert -- check for conflict at the - * relation or buffer level first, to avoid possibly having to roll - * back work we've just done. + * relation or buffer level first, to avoid possibly having to roll back + * work we've just done. */ CheckForSerializableConflictIn(relation, NULL, buffer); @@ -2228,8 +2228,8 @@ l1: } /* - * We're about to do the actual delete -- check for conflict first, - * to avoid possibly having to roll back work we've just done. + * We're about to do the actual delete -- check for conflict first, to + * avoid possibly having to roll back work we've just done. */ CheckForSerializableConflictIn(relation, &tp, buffer); @@ -2587,8 +2587,8 @@ l2: } /* - * We're about to do the actual update -- check for conflict first, - * to avoid possibly having to roll back work we've just done. + * We're about to do the actual update -- check for conflict first, to + * avoid possibly having to roll back work we've just done. */ CheckForSerializableConflictIn(relation, &oldtup, buffer); @@ -2737,8 +2737,8 @@ l2: } /* - * We're about to create the new tuple -- check for conflict first, - * to avoid possibly having to roll back work we've just done. + * We're about to create the new tuple -- check for conflict first, to + * avoid possibly having to roll back work we've just done. * * NOTE: For a tuple insert, we only need to check for table locks, since * predicate locking at the index level will cover ranges for anything @@ -3860,12 +3860,12 @@ HeapTupleHeaderAdvanceLatestRemovedXid(HeapTupleHeader tuple, } /* - * Ignore tuples inserted by an aborted transaction or - * if the tuple was updated/deleted by the inserting transaction. + * Ignore tuples inserted by an aborted transaction or if the tuple was + * updated/deleted by the inserting transaction. * * Look for a committed hint bit, or if no xmin bit is set, check clog. - * This needs to work on both master and standby, where it is used - * to assess btree delete records. + * This needs to work on both master and standby, where it is used to + * assess btree delete records. */ if ((tuple->t_infomask & HEAP_XMIN_COMMITTED) || (!(tuple->t_infomask & HEAP_XMIN_COMMITTED) && @@ -3874,7 +3874,7 @@ HeapTupleHeaderAdvanceLatestRemovedXid(HeapTupleHeader tuple, { if (xmax != xmin && TransactionIdFollows(xmax, *latestRemovedXid)) - *latestRemovedXid = xmax; + *latestRemovedXid = xmax; } /* *latestRemovedXid may still be invalid at end */ @@ -4158,8 +4158,8 @@ log_newpage(RelFileNode *rnode, ForkNumber forkNum, BlockNumber blkno, recptr = XLogInsert(RM_HEAP_ID, XLOG_HEAP_NEWPAGE, rdata); /* - * The page may be uninitialized. If so, we can't set the LSN - * and TLI because that would corrupt the page. + * The page may be uninitialized. If so, we can't set the LSN and TLI + * because that would corrupt the page. */ if (!PageIsNew(page)) { @@ -4352,8 +4352,8 @@ heap_xlog_newpage(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) memcpy(page, (char *) xlrec + SizeOfHeapNewpage, BLCKSZ); /* - * The page may be uninitialized. If so, we can't set the LSN - * and TLI because that would corrupt the page. + * The page may be uninitialized. If so, we can't set the LSN and TLI + * because that would corrupt the page. */ if (!PageIsNew(page)) { diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/hio.c b/src/backend/access/heap/hio.c index 2849992528..72a69e52b0 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/hio.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/hio.c @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ ReadBufferBI(Relation relation, BlockNumber targetBlock, Buffer RelationGetBufferForTuple(Relation relation, Size len, Buffer otherBuffer, int options, - struct BulkInsertStateData *bistate) + struct BulkInsertStateData * bistate) { bool use_fsm = !(options & HEAP_INSERT_SKIP_FSM); Buffer buffer = InvalidBuffer; diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c b/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c index c710f1d316..e56140950a 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ typedef struct RewriteStateData * them */ HTAB *rs_unresolved_tups; /* unmatched A tuples */ HTAB *rs_old_new_tid_map; /* unmatched B tuples */ -} RewriteStateData; +} RewriteStateData; /* * The lookup keys for the hash tables are tuple TID and xmin (we must check @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ end_heap_rewrite(RewriteState state) } /* - * If the rel is WAL-logged, must fsync before commit. We use heap_sync + * If the rel is WAL-logged, must fsync before commit. We use heap_sync * to ensure that the toast table gets fsync'd too. * * It's obvious that we must do this when not WAL-logging. It's less diff --git a/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c b/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c index 88f73e8241..66af2c37c5 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c +++ b/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c @@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ index_getprocinfo(Relation irel, procnum, attnum, RelationGetRelationName(irel)); fmgr_info_cxt(procId, locinfo, irel->rd_indexcxt); - fmgr_info_set_collation(irel->rd_indcollation[attnum-1], locinfo); + fmgr_info_set_collation(irel->rd_indcollation[attnum - 1], locinfo); } return locinfo; diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c index 0dd745f19a..219f94fd0d 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c @@ -179,8 +179,8 @@ top: * The only conflict predicate locking cares about for indexes is when * an index tuple insert conflicts with an existing lock. Since the * actual location of the insert is hard to predict because of the - * random search used to prevent O(N^2) performance when there are many - * duplicate entries, we can just use the "first valid" page. + * random search used to prevent O(N^2) performance when there are + * many duplicate entries, we can just use the "first valid" page. */ CheckForSerializableConflictIn(rel, NULL, buf); /* do the insertion */ @@ -915,13 +915,13 @@ _bt_split(Relation rel, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber firstright, /* * origpage is the original page to be split. leftpage is a temporary * buffer that receives the left-sibling data, which will be copied back - * into origpage on success. rightpage is the new page that receives - * the right-sibling data. If we fail before reaching the critical - * section, origpage hasn't been modified and leftpage is only workspace. - * In principle we shouldn't need to worry about rightpage either, - * because it hasn't been linked into the btree page structure; but to - * avoid leaving possibly-confusing junk behind, we are careful to rewrite - * rightpage as zeroes before throwing any error. + * into origpage on success. rightpage is the new page that receives the + * right-sibling data. If we fail before reaching the critical section, + * origpage hasn't been modified and leftpage is only workspace. In + * principle we shouldn't need to worry about rightpage either, because it + * hasn't been linked into the btree page structure; but to avoid leaving + * possibly-confusing junk behind, we are careful to rewrite rightpage as + * zeroes before throwing any error. */ origpage = BufferGetPage(buf); leftpage = PageGetTempPage(origpage); @@ -1118,7 +1118,7 @@ _bt_split(Relation rel, Buffer buf, OffsetNumber firstright, { memset(rightpage, 0, BufferGetPageSize(rbuf)); elog(ERROR, "right sibling's left-link doesn't match: " - "block %u links to %u instead of expected %u in index \"%s\"", + "block %u links to %u instead of expected %u in index \"%s\"", oopaque->btpo_next, sopaque->btpo_prev, origpagenumber, RelationGetRelationName(rel)); } diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c index 27964455f7..2477736281 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c @@ -1268,9 +1268,9 @@ _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack) /* * Check that the parent-page index items we're about to delete/overwrite - * contain what we expect. This can fail if the index has become - * corrupt for some reason. We want to throw any error before entering - * the critical section --- otherwise it'd be a PANIC. + * contain what we expect. This can fail if the index has become corrupt + * for some reason. We want to throw any error before entering the + * critical section --- otherwise it'd be a PANIC. * * The test on the target item is just an Assert because _bt_getstackbuf * should have guaranteed it has the expected contents. The test on the diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtree.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtree.c index 7a0e1a9c25..6a7ddd7db4 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtree.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtree.c @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ btbuildempty(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) metapage = (Page) palloc(BLCKSZ); _bt_initmetapage(metapage, P_NONE, 0); - /* Write the page. If archiving/streaming, XLOG it. */ + /* Write the page. If archiving/streaming, XLOG it. */ smgrwrite(index->rd_smgr, INIT_FORKNUM, BTREE_METAPAGE, (char *) metapage, true); if (XLogIsNeeded()) @@ -403,6 +403,7 @@ btrescan(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { IndexScanDesc scan = (IndexScanDesc) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0); ScanKey scankey = (ScanKey) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + /* remaining arguments are ignored */ BTScanOpaque so = (BTScanOpaque) scan->opaque; diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c index cb78a1bae1..91f8cadea5 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsearch.c @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ _bt_search(Relation rel, int keysz, ScanKey scankey, bool nextkey, /* If index is empty and access = BT_READ, no root page is created. */ if (!BufferIsValid(*bufP)) { - PredicateLockRelation(rel); /* Nothing finer to lock exists. */ + PredicateLockRelation(rel); /* Nothing finer to lock exists. */ return (BTStack) NULL; } @@ -1364,7 +1364,7 @@ _bt_get_endpoint(Relation rel, uint32 level, bool rightmost) if (!BufferIsValid(buf)) { /* empty index... */ - PredicateLockRelation(rel); /* Nothing finer to lock exists. */ + PredicateLockRelation(rel); /* Nothing finer to lock exists. */ return InvalidBuffer; } @@ -1444,7 +1444,7 @@ _bt_endpoint(IndexScanDesc scan, ScanDirection dir) if (!BufferIsValid(buf)) { /* empty index... */ - PredicateLockRelation(rel); /* Nothing finer to lock exists. */ + PredicateLockRelation(rel); /* Nothing finer to lock exists. */ so->currPos.buf = InvalidBuffer; return false; } diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsort.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsort.c index fd0e86a6aa..256a7f9f98 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsort.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsort.c @@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ _bt_load(BTWriteState *wstate, BTSpool *btspool, BTSpool *btspool2) /* * If the index is WAL-logged, we must fsync it down to disk before it's - * safe to commit the transaction. (For a non-WAL-logged index we don't + * safe to commit the transaction. (For a non-WAL-logged index we don't * care since the index will be uninteresting after a crash anyway.) * * It's obvious that we must do this when not WAL-logging the build. It's diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c index add932d942..d448ba6a50 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c @@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ _bt_mkscankey(Relation rel, IndexTuple itup) /* * We can use the cached (default) support procs since no cross-type - * comparison can be needed. The cached support proc entries have - * the right collation for the index, too. + * comparison can be needed. The cached support proc entries have the + * right collation for the index, too. */ procinfo = index_getprocinfo(rel, i + 1, BTORDER_PROC); arg = index_getattr(itup, i + 1, itupdesc, &null); @@ -120,8 +120,8 @@ _bt_mkscankey_nodata(Relation rel) /* * We can use the cached (default) support procs since no cross-type - * comparison can be needed. The cached support proc entries have - * the right collation for the index, too. + * comparison can be needed. The cached support proc entries have the + * right collation for the index, too. */ procinfo = index_getprocinfo(rel, i + 1, BTORDER_PROC); flags = SK_ISNULL | (indoption[i] << SK_BT_INDOPTION_SHIFT); diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c index 729c7b72e0..281268120e 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ typedef struct GlobalTransactionData TransactionId locking_xid; /* top-level XID of backend working on xact */ bool valid; /* TRUE if fully prepared */ char gid[GIDSIZE]; /* The GID assigned to the prepared xact */ -} GlobalTransactionData; +} GlobalTransactionData; /* * Two Phase Commit shared state. Access to this struct is protected @@ -1029,8 +1029,8 @@ EndPrepare(GlobalTransaction gxact) /* If we crash now, we have prepared: WAL replay will fix things */ /* - * Wake up all walsenders to send WAL up to the PREPARE record - * immediately if replication is enabled + * Wake up all walsenders to send WAL up to the PREPARE record immediately + * if replication is enabled */ if (max_wal_senders > 0) WalSndWakeup(); @@ -2043,8 +2043,8 @@ RecordTransactionCommitPrepared(TransactionId xid, /* * Wait for synchronous replication, if required. * - * Note that at this stage we have marked clog, but still show as - * running in the procarray and continue to hold locks. + * Note that at this stage we have marked clog, but still show as running + * in the procarray and continue to hold locks. */ SyncRepWaitForLSN(recptr); } @@ -2130,8 +2130,8 @@ RecordTransactionAbortPrepared(TransactionId xid, /* * Wait for synchronous replication, if required. * - * Note that at this stage we have marked clog, but still show as - * running in the procarray and continue to hold locks. + * Note that at this stage we have marked clog, but still show as running + * in the procarray and continue to hold locks. */ SyncRepWaitForLSN(recptr); } diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c b/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c index a828b3de48..500335bd6f 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c @@ -355,9 +355,9 @@ SetTransactionIdLimit(TransactionId oldest_datfrozenxid, Oid oldest_datoid) char *oldest_datname; /* - * We can be called when not inside a transaction, for example - * during StartupXLOG(). In such a case we cannot do database - * access, so we must just report the oldest DB's OID. + * We can be called when not inside a transaction, for example during + * StartupXLOG(). In such a case we cannot do database access, so we + * must just report the oldest DB's OID. * * Note: it's also possible that get_database_name fails and returns * NULL, for example because the database just got dropped. We'll diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c index 55aee87910..8a4c4eccd7 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c @@ -420,11 +420,11 @@ AssignTransactionId(TransactionState s) */ if (isSubXact && !TransactionIdIsValid(s->parent->transactionId)) { - TransactionState p = s->parent; - TransactionState *parents; - size_t parentOffset = 0; + TransactionState p = s->parent; + TransactionState *parents; + size_t parentOffset = 0; - parents = palloc(sizeof(TransactionState) * s->nestingLevel); + parents = palloc(sizeof(TransactionState) * s->nestingLevel); while (p != NULL && !TransactionIdIsValid(p->transactionId)) { parents[parentOffset++] = p; @@ -432,8 +432,8 @@ AssignTransactionId(TransactionState s) } /* - * This is technically a recursive call, but the recursion will - * never be more than one layer deep. + * This is technically a recursive call, but the recursion will never + * be more than one layer deep. */ while (parentOffset != 0) AssignTransactionId(parents[--parentOffset]); @@ -1037,16 +1037,17 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) /* * Check if we want to commit asynchronously. We can allow the XLOG flush * to happen asynchronously if synchronous_commit=off, or if the current - * transaction has not performed any WAL-logged operation. The latter case - * can arise if the current transaction wrote only to temporary and/or - * unlogged tables. In case of a crash, the loss of such a transaction - * will be irrelevant since temp tables will be lost anyway, and unlogged - * tables will be truncated. (Given the foregoing, you might think that it - * would be unnecessary to emit the XLOG record at all in this case, but we - * don't currently try to do that. It would certainly cause problems at - * least in Hot Standby mode, where the KnownAssignedXids machinery - * requires tracking every XID assignment. It might be OK to skip it only - * when wal_level < hot_standby, but for now we don't.) + * transaction has not performed any WAL-logged operation. The latter + * case can arise if the current transaction wrote only to temporary + * and/or unlogged tables. In case of a crash, the loss of such a + * transaction will be irrelevant since temp tables will be lost anyway, + * and unlogged tables will be truncated. (Given the foregoing, you might + * think that it would be unnecessary to emit the XLOG record at all in + * this case, but we don't currently try to do that. It would certainly + * cause problems at least in Hot Standby mode, where the + * KnownAssignedXids machinery requires tracking every XID assignment. It + * might be OK to skip it only when wal_level < hot_standby, but for now + * we don't.) * * However, if we're doing cleanup of any non-temp rels or committing any * command that wanted to force sync commit, then we must flush XLOG @@ -1130,8 +1131,8 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) /* * Wait for synchronous replication, if required. * - * Note that at this stage we have marked clog, but still show as - * running in the procarray and continue to hold locks. + * Note that at this stage we have marked clog, but still show as running + * in the procarray and continue to hold locks. */ SyncRepWaitForLSN(XactLastRecEnd); @@ -1785,10 +1786,10 @@ CommitTransaction(void) } /* - * The remaining actions cannot call any user-defined code, so it's - * safe to start shutting down within-transaction services. But note - * that most of this stuff could still throw an error, which would - * switch us into the transaction-abort path. + * The remaining actions cannot call any user-defined code, so it's safe + * to start shutting down within-transaction services. But note that most + * of this stuff could still throw an error, which would switch us into + * the transaction-abort path. */ /* Shut down the deferred-trigger manager */ @@ -1805,8 +1806,8 @@ CommitTransaction(void) /* * Mark serializable transaction as complete for predicate locking - * purposes. This should be done as late as we can put it and still - * allow errors to be raised for failure patterns found at commit. + * purposes. This should be done as late as we can put it and still allow + * errors to be raised for failure patterns found at commit. */ PreCommit_CheckForSerializationFailure(); @@ -1988,10 +1989,10 @@ PrepareTransaction(void) } /* - * The remaining actions cannot call any user-defined code, so it's - * safe to start shutting down within-transaction services. But note - * that most of this stuff could still throw an error, which would - * switch us into the transaction-abort path. + * The remaining actions cannot call any user-defined code, so it's safe + * to start shutting down within-transaction services. But note that most + * of this stuff could still throw an error, which would switch us into + * the transaction-abort path. */ /* Shut down the deferred-trigger manager */ @@ -2008,8 +2009,8 @@ PrepareTransaction(void) /* * Mark serializable transaction as complete for predicate locking - * purposes. This should be done as late as we can put it and still - * allow errors to be raised for failure patterns found at commit. + * purposes. This should be done as late as we can put it and still allow + * errors to be raised for failure patterns found at commit. */ PreCommit_CheckForSerializationFailure(); diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c index b31c79ebbd..9c45759661 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ /* File path names (all relative to $PGDATA) */ #define RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE "recovery.conf" #define RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE "recovery.done" -#define PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE "promote" +#define PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE "promote" /* User-settable parameters */ @@ -160,6 +160,7 @@ static XLogRecPtr LastRec; * known, need to check the shared state". */ static bool LocalRecoveryInProgress = true; + /* * Local copy of SharedHotStandbyActive variable. False actually means "not * known, need to check the shared state". @@ -355,10 +356,9 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlInsert /* * exclusiveBackup is true if a backup started with pg_start_backup() is * in progress, and nonExclusiveBackups is a counter indicating the number - * of streaming base backups currently in progress. forcePageWrites is - * set to true when either of these is non-zero. lastBackupStart is the - * latest checkpoint redo location used as a starting point for an online - * backup. + * of streaming base backups currently in progress. forcePageWrites is set + * to true when either of these is non-zero. lastBackupStart is the latest + * checkpoint redo location used as a starting point for an online backup. */ bool exclusiveBackup; int nonExclusiveBackups; @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlData XLogwrtResult LogwrtResult; uint32 ckptXidEpoch; /* nextXID & epoch of latest checkpoint */ TransactionId ckptXid; - XLogRecPtr asyncXactLSN; /* LSN of newest async commit/abort */ + XLogRecPtr asyncXactLSN; /* LSN of newest async commit/abort */ uint32 lastRemovedLog; /* latest removed/recycled XLOG segment */ uint32 lastRemovedSeg; @@ -425,9 +425,9 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlData bool SharedHotStandbyActive; /* - * recoveryWakeupLatch is used to wake up the startup process to - * continue WAL replay, if it is waiting for WAL to arrive or failover - * trigger file to appear. + * recoveryWakeupLatch is used to wake up the startup process to continue + * WAL replay, if it is waiting for WAL to arrive or failover trigger file + * to appear. */ Latch recoveryWakeupLatch; @@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ typedef struct xl_parameter_change /* logs restore point */ typedef struct xl_restore_point { - TimestampTz rp_time; + TimestampTz rp_time; char rp_name[MAXFNAMELEN]; } xl_restore_point; @@ -4272,27 +4272,29 @@ existsTimeLineHistory(TimeLineID probeTLI) static bool rescanLatestTimeLine(void) { - TimeLineID newtarget; + TimeLineID newtarget; + newtarget = findNewestTimeLine(recoveryTargetTLI); if (newtarget != recoveryTargetTLI) { /* * Determine the list of expected TLIs for the new TLI */ - List *newExpectedTLIs; + List *newExpectedTLIs; + newExpectedTLIs = readTimeLineHistory(newtarget); /* - * If the current timeline is not part of the history of the - * new timeline, we cannot proceed to it. + * If the current timeline is not part of the history of the new + * timeline, we cannot proceed to it. * * XXX This isn't foolproof: The new timeline might have forked from * the current one, but before the current recovery location. In that * case we will still switch to the new timeline and proceed replaying * from it even though the history doesn't match what we already * replayed. That's not good. We will likely notice at the next online - * checkpoint, as the TLI won't match what we expected, but it's - * not guaranteed. The admin needs to make sure that doesn't happen. + * checkpoint, as the TLI won't match what we expected, but it's not + * guaranteed. The admin needs to make sure that doesn't happen. */ if (!list_member_int(newExpectedTLIs, (int) recoveryTargetTLI)) @@ -4480,7 +4482,7 @@ writeTimeLineHistory(TimeLineID newTLI, TimeLineID parentTLI, timestamptz_to_str(recoveryStopTime)); else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME) snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), - "%s%u\t%s\tat restore point \"%s\"\n", + "%s%u\t%s\tat restore point \"%s\"\n", (srcfd < 0) ? "" : "\n", parentTLI, xlogfname, @@ -4921,7 +4923,7 @@ check_wal_buffers(int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source) { /* * If we haven't yet changed the boot_val default of -1, just let it - * be. We'll fix it when XLOGShmemSize is called. + * be. We'll fix it when XLOGShmemSize is called. */ if (XLOGbuffers == -1) return true; @@ -4954,8 +4956,8 @@ XLOGShmemSize(void) /* * If the value of wal_buffers is -1, use the preferred auto-tune value. * This isn't an amazingly clean place to do this, but we must wait till - * NBuffers has received its final value, and must do it before using - * the value of XLOGbuffers to do anything important. + * NBuffers has received its final value, and must do it before using the + * value of XLOGbuffers to do anything important. */ if (XLOGbuffers == -1) { @@ -5086,9 +5088,9 @@ BootStrapXLOG(void) /* * Set up information for the initial checkpoint record * - * The initial checkpoint record is written to the beginning of the - * WAL segment with logid=0 logseg=1. The very first WAL segment, 0/0, is - * not used, so that we can use 0/0 to mean "before any valid WAL segment". + * The initial checkpoint record is written to the beginning of the WAL + * segment with logid=0 logseg=1. The very first WAL segment, 0/0, is not + * used, so that we can use 0/0 to mean "before any valid WAL segment". */ checkPoint.redo.xlogid = 0; checkPoint.redo.xrecoff = XLogSegSize + SizeOfXLogLongPHD; @@ -5219,8 +5221,8 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void) TimeLineID rtli = 0; bool rtliGiven = false; ConfigVariable *item, - *head = NULL, - *tail = NULL; + *head = NULL, + *tail = NULL; fd = AllocateFile(RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, "r"); if (fd == NULL) @@ -5236,7 +5238,7 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void) /* * Since we're asking ParseConfigFp() to error out at FATAL, there's no * need to check the return value. - */ + */ ParseConfigFp(fd, RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, 0, FATAL, &head, &tail); for (item = head; item; item = item->next) @@ -5312,7 +5314,7 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void) * this overrides recovery_target_time */ if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID || - recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME) + recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME) continue; recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME; @@ -5321,7 +5323,7 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void) */ recoveryTargetTime = DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in, - CStringGetDatum(item->value), + CStringGetDatum(item->value), ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid), Int32GetDatum(-1))); ereport(DEBUG2, @@ -5610,8 +5612,8 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis) if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET) { /* - * Save timestamp of latest transaction commit/abort if this is - * a transaction record + * Save timestamp of latest transaction commit/abort if this is a + * transaction record */ if (record->xl_rmid == RM_XACT_ID) SetLatestXTime(recordXtime); @@ -5636,8 +5638,8 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis) else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME) { /* - * There can be many restore points that share the same name, so we stop - * at the first one + * There can be many restore points that share the same name, so we + * stop at the first one */ stopsHere = (strcmp(recordRPName, recoveryTargetName) == 0); @@ -5699,14 +5701,14 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis) strncpy(recoveryStopName, recordRPName, MAXFNAMELEN); ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("recovery stopping at restore point \"%s\", time %s", - recoveryStopName, - timestamptz_to_str(recoveryStopTime)))); + (errmsg("recovery stopping at restore point \"%s\", time %s", + recoveryStopName, + timestamptz_to_str(recoveryStopTime)))); } /* - * Note that if we use a RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME then we can stop - * at a restore point since they are timestamped, though the latest + * Note that if we use a RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME then we can stop at a + * restore point since they are timestamped, though the latest * transaction time is not updated. */ if (record->xl_rmid == RM_XACT_ID && recoveryStopAfter) @@ -5732,7 +5734,7 @@ recoveryPausesHere(void) while (RecoveryIsPaused()) { - pg_usleep(1000000L); /* 1000 ms */ + pg_usleep(1000000L); /* 1000 ms */ HandleStartupProcInterrupts(); } } @@ -5742,7 +5744,7 @@ RecoveryIsPaused(void) { /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile XLogCtlData *xlogctl = XLogCtl; - bool recoveryPause; + bool recoveryPause; SpinLockAcquire(&xlogctl->info_lck); recoveryPause = xlogctl->recoveryPause; @@ -5771,7 +5773,7 @@ pg_xlog_replay_pause(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - (errmsg("must be superuser to control recovery")))); + (errmsg("must be superuser to control recovery")))); if (!RecoveryInProgress()) ereport(ERROR, @@ -5793,7 +5795,7 @@ pg_xlog_replay_resume(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - (errmsg("must be superuser to control recovery")))); + (errmsg("must be superuser to control recovery")))); if (!RecoveryInProgress()) ereport(ERROR, @@ -5815,7 +5817,7 @@ pg_is_xlog_replay_paused(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - (errmsg("must be superuser to control recovery")))); + (errmsg("must be superuser to control recovery")))); if (!RecoveryInProgress()) ereport(ERROR, @@ -5870,7 +5872,7 @@ GetLatestXTime(void) Datum pg_last_xact_replay_timestamp(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - TimestampTz xtime; + TimestampTz xtime; xtime = GetLatestXTime(); if (xtime == 0) @@ -6132,10 +6134,10 @@ StartupXLOG(void) InRecovery = true; /* force recovery even if SHUTDOWNED */ /* - * Make sure that REDO location exists. This may not be - * the case if there was a crash during an online backup, - * which left a backup_label around that references a WAL - * segment that's already been archived. + * Make sure that REDO location exists. This may not be the case + * if there was a crash during an online backup, which left a + * backup_label around that references a WAL segment that's + * already been archived. */ if (XLByteLT(checkPoint.redo, checkPointLoc)) { @@ -6150,7 +6152,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void) ereport(FATAL, (errmsg("could not locate required checkpoint record"), errhint("If you are not restoring from a backup, try removing the file \"%s/backup_label\".", DataDir))); - wasShutdown = false; /* keep compiler quiet */ + wasShutdown = false; /* keep compiler quiet */ } /* set flag to delete it later */ haveBackupLabel = true; @@ -6330,9 +6332,9 @@ StartupXLOG(void) /* * We're in recovery, so unlogged relations relations may be trashed - * and must be reset. This should be done BEFORE allowing Hot - * Standby connections, so that read-only backends don't try to - * read whatever garbage is left over from before. + * and must be reset. This should be done BEFORE allowing Hot Standby + * connections, so that read-only backends don't try to read whatever + * garbage is left over from before. */ ResetUnloggedRelations(UNLOGGED_RELATION_CLEANUP); @@ -6517,7 +6519,8 @@ StartupXLOG(void) if (recoveryStopsHere(record, &recoveryApply)) { /* - * Pause only if users can connect to send a resume message + * Pause only if users can connect to send a resume + * message */ if (recoveryPauseAtTarget && standbyState == STANDBY_SNAPSHOT_READY) { @@ -7003,8 +7006,8 @@ HotStandbyActive(void) { /* * We check shared state each time only until Hot Standby is active. We - * can't de-activate Hot Standby, so there's no need to keep checking after - * the shared variable has once been seen true. + * can't de-activate Hot Standby, so there's no need to keep checking + * after the shared variable has once been seen true. */ if (LocalHotStandbyActive) return true; @@ -7429,14 +7432,14 @@ LogCheckpointEnd(bool restartpoint) */ longest_secs = (long) (CheckpointStats.ckpt_longest_sync / 1000000); longest_usecs = CheckpointStats.ckpt_longest_sync - - (uint64) longest_secs * 1000000; + (uint64) longest_secs *1000000; average_sync_time = 0; - if (CheckpointStats.ckpt_sync_rels > 0) + if (CheckpointStats.ckpt_sync_rels > 0) average_sync_time = CheckpointStats.ckpt_agg_sync_time / CheckpointStats.ckpt_sync_rels; average_secs = (long) (average_sync_time / 1000000); - average_usecs = average_sync_time - (uint64) average_secs * 1000000; + average_usecs = average_sync_time - (uint64) average_secs *1000000; if (restartpoint) elog(LOG, "restartpoint complete: wrote %d buffers (%.1f%%); " @@ -8241,9 +8244,9 @@ RequestXLogSwitch(void) XLogRecPtr XLogRestorePoint(const char *rpName) { - XLogRecPtr RecPtr; - XLogRecData rdata; - xl_restore_point xlrec; + XLogRecPtr RecPtr; + XLogRecData rdata; + xl_restore_point xlrec; xlrec.rp_time = GetCurrentTimestamp(); strncpy(xlrec.rp_name, rpName, MAXFNAMELEN); @@ -8257,7 +8260,7 @@ XLogRestorePoint(const char *rpName) ereport(LOG, (errmsg("restore point \"%s\" created at %X/%X", - rpName, RecPtr.xlogid, RecPtr.xrecoff))); + rpName, RecPtr.xlogid, RecPtr.xrecoff))); return RecPtr; } @@ -8643,7 +8646,7 @@ get_sync_bit(int method) /* * Optimize writes by bypassing kernel cache with O_DIRECT when using - * O_SYNC/O_FSYNC and O_DSYNC. But only if archiving and streaming are + * O_SYNC/O_FSYNC and O_DSYNC. But only if archiving and streaming are * disabled, otherwise the archive command or walsender process will read * the WAL soon after writing it, which is guaranteed to cause a physical * read if we bypassed the kernel cache. We also skip the @@ -8775,7 +8778,7 @@ pg_start_backup(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) text *backupid = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); bool fast = PG_GETARG_BOOL(1); char *backupidstr; - XLogRecPtr startpoint; + XLogRecPtr startpoint; char startxlogstr[MAXFNAMELEN]; backupidstr = text_to_cstring(backupid); @@ -8791,7 +8794,7 @@ pg_start_backup(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * do_pg_start_backup is the workhorse of the user-visible pg_start_backup() * function. It creates the necessary starting checkpoint and constructs the * backup label file. - * + * * There are two kind of backups: exclusive and non-exclusive. An exclusive * backup is started with pg_start_backup(), and there can be only one active * at a time. The backup label file of an exclusive backup is written to @@ -8826,7 +8829,7 @@ do_pg_start_backup(const char *backupidstr, bool fast, char **labelfile) if (!superuser() && !is_authenticated_user_replication_role()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser or replication role to run a backup"))); + errmsg("must be superuser or replication role to run a backup"))); if (RecoveryInProgress()) ereport(ERROR, @@ -8897,25 +8900,27 @@ do_pg_start_backup(const char *backupidstr, bool fast, char **labelfile) /* Ensure we release forcePageWrites if fail below */ PG_ENSURE_ERROR_CLEANUP(pg_start_backup_callback, (Datum) BoolGetDatum(exclusive)); { - bool gotUniqueStartpoint = false; + bool gotUniqueStartpoint = false; + do { /* * Force a CHECKPOINT. Aside from being necessary to prevent torn - * page problems, this guarantees that two successive backup runs will - * have different checkpoint positions and hence different history - * file names, even if nothing happened in between. + * page problems, this guarantees that two successive backup runs + * will have different checkpoint positions and hence different + * history file names, even if nothing happened in between. * - * We use CHECKPOINT_IMMEDIATE only if requested by user (via passing - * fast = true). Otherwise this can take awhile. + * We use CHECKPOINT_IMMEDIATE only if requested by user (via + * passing fast = true). Otherwise this can take awhile. */ RequestCheckpoint(CHECKPOINT_FORCE | CHECKPOINT_WAIT | (fast ? CHECKPOINT_IMMEDIATE : 0)); /* - * Now we need to fetch the checkpoint record location, and also its - * REDO pointer. The oldest point in WAL that would be needed to - * restore starting from the checkpoint is precisely the REDO pointer. + * Now we need to fetch the checkpoint record location, and also + * its REDO pointer. The oldest point in WAL that would be needed + * to restore starting from the checkpoint is precisely the REDO + * pointer. */ LWLockAcquire(ControlFileLock, LW_SHARED); checkpointloc = ControlFile->checkPoint; @@ -8923,16 +8928,15 @@ do_pg_start_backup(const char *backupidstr, bool fast, char **labelfile) LWLockRelease(ControlFileLock); /* - * If two base backups are started at the same time (in WAL - * sender processes), we need to make sure that they use - * different checkpoints as starting locations, because we use - * the starting WAL location as a unique identifier for the base - * backup in the end-of-backup WAL record and when we write the - * backup history file. Perhaps it would be better generate a - * separate unique ID for each backup instead of forcing another - * checkpoint, but taking a checkpoint right after another is - * not that expensive either because only few buffers have been - * dirtied yet. + * If two base backups are started at the same time (in WAL sender + * processes), we need to make sure that they use different + * checkpoints as starting locations, because we use the starting + * WAL location as a unique identifier for the base backup in the + * end-of-backup WAL record and when we write the backup history + * file. Perhaps it would be better generate a separate unique ID + * for each backup instead of forcing another checkpoint, but + * taking a checkpoint right after another is not that expensive + * either because only few buffers have been dirtied yet. */ LWLockAcquire(WALInsertLock, LW_SHARED); if (XLByteLT(XLogCtl->Insert.lastBackupStart, startpoint)) @@ -8941,13 +8945,13 @@ do_pg_start_backup(const char *backupidstr, bool fast, char **labelfile) gotUniqueStartpoint = true; } LWLockRelease(WALInsertLock); - } while(!gotUniqueStartpoint); + } while (!gotUniqueStartpoint); XLByteToSeg(startpoint, _logId, _logSeg); XLogFileName(xlogfilename, ThisTimeLineID, _logId, _logSeg); /* - * Construct backup label file + * Construct backup label file */ initStringInfo(&labelfbuf); @@ -8970,8 +8974,8 @@ do_pg_start_backup(const char *backupidstr, bool fast, char **labelfile) { /* * Check for existing backup label --- implies a backup is already - * running. (XXX given that we checked exclusiveBackup above, maybe - * it would be OK to just unlink any such label file?) + * running. (XXX given that we checked exclusiveBackup above, + * maybe it would be OK to just unlink any such label file?) */ if (stat(BACKUP_LABEL_FILE, &stat_buf) != 0) { @@ -9018,7 +9022,7 @@ do_pg_start_backup(const char *backupidstr, bool fast, char **labelfile) static void pg_start_backup_callback(int code, Datum arg) { - bool exclusive = DatumGetBool(arg); + bool exclusive = DatumGetBool(arg); /* Update backup counters and forcePageWrites on failure */ LWLockAcquire(WALInsertLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); @@ -9101,7 +9105,7 @@ do_pg_stop_backup(char *labelfile, bool waitforarchive) if (!superuser() && !is_authenticated_user_replication_role()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - (errmsg("must be superuser or replication role to run a backup")))); + (errmsg("must be superuser or replication role to run a backup")))); if (RecoveryInProgress()) ereport(ERROR, @@ -9145,8 +9149,8 @@ do_pg_stop_backup(char *labelfile, bool waitforarchive) /* * Read the existing label file into memory. */ - struct stat statbuf; - int r; + struct stat statbuf; + int r; if (stat(BACKUP_LABEL_FILE, &statbuf)) { @@ -9197,7 +9201,7 @@ do_pg_stop_backup(char *labelfile, bool waitforarchive) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), errmsg("invalid data in file \"%s\"", BACKUP_LABEL_FILE))); - remaining = strchr(labelfile, '\n') + 1; /* %n is not portable enough */ + remaining = strchr(labelfile, '\n') + 1; /* %n is not portable enough */ /* * Write the backup-end xlog record @@ -9388,8 +9392,8 @@ pg_switch_xlog(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum pg_create_restore_point(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *restore_name = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); - char *restore_name_str; + text *restore_name = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); + char *restore_name_str; XLogRecPtr restorepoint; char location[MAXFNAMELEN]; @@ -9407,7 +9411,7 @@ pg_create_restore_point(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!XLogIsNeeded()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("WAL level not sufficient for creating a restore point"), + errmsg("WAL level not sufficient for creating a restore point"), errhint("wal_level must be set to \"archive\" or \"hot_standby\" at server start."))); restore_name_str = text_to_cstring(restore_name); @@ -9423,7 +9427,7 @@ pg_create_restore_point(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * As a convenience, return the WAL location of the restore point record */ snprintf(location, sizeof(location), "%X/%X", - restorepoint.xlogid, restorepoint.xrecoff); + restorepoint.xlogid, restorepoint.xrecoff); PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(cstring_to_text(location)); } @@ -10177,8 +10181,8 @@ retry: } /* - * If it hasn't been long since last attempt, sleep - * to avoid busy-waiting. + * If it hasn't been long since last attempt, sleep to + * avoid busy-waiting. */ now = (pg_time_t) time(NULL); if ((now - last_fail_time) < 5) @@ -10404,7 +10408,7 @@ static bool CheckForStandbyTrigger(void) { struct stat stat_buf; - static bool triggered = false; + static bool triggered = false; if (triggered) return true; @@ -10446,8 +10450,8 @@ CheckPromoteSignal(void) if (stat(PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE, &stat_buf) == 0) { /* - * Since we are in a signal handler, it's not safe - * to elog. We silently ignore any error from unlink. + * Since we are in a signal handler, it's not safe to elog. We + * silently ignore any error from unlink. */ unlink(PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE); return true; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c b/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c index aa3d59d4c9..693b634398 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c @@ -1011,8 +1011,8 @@ SetDefaultACLsInSchemas(InternalDefaultACL *iacls, List *nspnames) /* * Note that we must do the permissions check against the target - * role not the calling user. We require CREATE privileges, - * since without CREATE you won't be able to do anything using the + * role not the calling user. We require CREATE privileges, since + * without CREATE you won't be able to do anything using the * default privs anyway. */ iacls->nspid = get_namespace_oid(nspname, false); @@ -1707,7 +1707,7 @@ ExecGrant_Relation(InternalGrant *istmt) pg_class_tuple->relkind != RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), - errmsg("\"%s\" is not a foreign table", + errmsg("\"%s\" is not a foreign table", NameStr(pg_class_tuple->relname)))); /* Adjust the default permissions based on object type */ @@ -1964,13 +1964,13 @@ ExecGrant_Relation(InternalGrant *istmt) this_privileges &= (AclMode) ACL_SELECT; } else if (pg_class_tuple->relkind == RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE && - this_privileges & ~((AclMode) ACL_SELECT)) + this_privileges & ~((AclMode) ACL_SELECT)) { /* Foreign tables have the same restriction as sequences. */ ereport(WARNING, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_GRANT_OPERATION), - errmsg("foreign table \"%s\" only supports SELECT column privileges", - NameStr(pg_class_tuple->relname)))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_GRANT_OPERATION), + errmsg("foreign table \"%s\" only supports SELECT column privileges", + NameStr(pg_class_tuple->relname)))); this_privileges &= (AclMode) ACL_SELECT; } @@ -4768,7 +4768,7 @@ pg_extension_ownercheck(Oid ext_oid, Oid roleid) * Note: roles do not have owners per se; instead we use this test in * places where an ownership-like permissions test is needed for a role. * Be sure to apply it to the role trying to do the operation, not the - * role being operated on! Also note that this generally should not be + * role being operated on! Also note that this generally should not be * considered enough privilege if the target role is a superuser. * (We don't handle that consideration here because we want to give a * separate error message for such cases, so the caller has to deal with it.) diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/catalog.c b/src/backend/catalog/catalog.c index 12935754bc..cbce0072de 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/catalog.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/catalog.c @@ -80,11 +80,11 @@ forkname_to_number(char *forkName) /* * forkname_chars - * We use this to figure out whether a filename could be a relation - * fork (as opposed to an oddly named stray file that somehow ended - * up in the database directory). If the passed string begins with - * a fork name (other than the main fork name), we return its length, - * and set *fork (if not NULL) to the fork number. If not, we return 0. + * We use this to figure out whether a filename could be a relation + * fork (as opposed to an oddly named stray file that somehow ended + * up in the database directory). If the passed string begins with + * a fork name (other than the main fork name), we return its length, + * and set *fork (if not NULL) to the fork number. If not, we return 0. * * Note that the present coding assumes that there are no fork names which * are prefixes of other fork names. @@ -96,7 +96,8 @@ forkname_chars(const char *str, ForkNumber *fork) for (forkNum = 1; forkNum <= MAX_FORKNUM; forkNum++) { - int len = strlen(forkNames[forkNum]); + int len = strlen(forkNames[forkNum]); + if (strncmp(forkNames[forkNum], str, len) == 0) { if (fork) @@ -150,7 +151,7 @@ relpathbackend(RelFileNode rnode, BackendId backend, ForkNumber forknum) { /* OIDCHARS will suffice for an integer, too */ pathlen = 5 + OIDCHARS + 2 + OIDCHARS + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 - + FORKNAMECHARS + 1; + + FORKNAMECHARS + 1; path = (char *) palloc(pathlen); if (forknum != MAIN_FORKNUM) snprintf(path, pathlen, "base/%u/t%d_%u_%s", @@ -167,8 +168,8 @@ relpathbackend(RelFileNode rnode, BackendId backend, ForkNumber forknum) if (backend == InvalidBackendId) { pathlen = 9 + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 - + strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY) + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 - + OIDCHARS + 1 + FORKNAMECHARS + 1; + + strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY) + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 + + OIDCHARS + 1 + FORKNAMECHARS + 1; path = (char *) palloc(pathlen); if (forknum != MAIN_FORKNUM) snprintf(path, pathlen, "pg_tblspc/%u/%s/%u/%u_%s", @@ -184,8 +185,8 @@ relpathbackend(RelFileNode rnode, BackendId backend, ForkNumber forknum) { /* OIDCHARS will suffice for an integer, too */ pathlen = 9 + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 - + strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY) + 1 + OIDCHARS + 2 - + OIDCHARS + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 + FORKNAMECHARS + 1; + + strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY) + 1 + OIDCHARS + 2 + + OIDCHARS + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 + FORKNAMECHARS + 1; path = (char *) palloc(pathlen); if (forknum != MAIN_FORKNUM) snprintf(path, pathlen, "pg_tblspc/%u/%s/%u/t%d_%u_%s", diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c b/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c index de24ef7a09..ec9bb48c63 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ static const Oid object_classes[MAX_OCLASS] = { ForeignServerRelationId, /* OCLASS_FOREIGN_SERVER */ UserMappingRelationId, /* OCLASS_USER_MAPPING */ DefaultAclRelationId, /* OCLASS_DEFACL */ - ExtensionRelationId /* OCLASS_EXTENSION */ + ExtensionRelationId /* OCLASS_EXTENSION */ }; @@ -1021,8 +1021,8 @@ deleteOneObject(const ObjectAddress *object, Relation depRel) /* * Delete any comments or security labels associated with this object. - * (This is a convenient place to do these things, rather than having every - * object type know to do it.) + * (This is a convenient place to do these things, rather than having + * every object type know to do it.) */ DeleteComments(object->objectId, object->classId, object->objectSubId); DeleteSecurityLabel(object); @@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ recordDependencyOnExpr(const ObjectAddress *depender, * whereas 'behavior' is used for everything else. * * NOTE: the caller should ensure that a whole-table dependency on the - * specified relation is created separately, if one is needed. In particular, + * specified relation is created separately, if one is needed. In particular, * a whole-row Var "relation.*" will not cause this routine to emit any * dependency item. This is appropriate behavior for subexpressions of an * ordinary query, so other cases need to cope as necessary. @@ -1383,7 +1383,7 @@ find_expr_references_walker(Node *node, /* * A whole-row Var references no specific columns, so adds no new - * dependency. (We assume that there is a whole-table dependency + * dependency. (We assume that there is a whole-table dependency * arising from each underlying rangetable entry. While we could * record such a dependency when finding a whole-row Var that * references a relation directly, it's quite unclear how to extend @@ -1431,8 +1431,8 @@ find_expr_references_walker(Node *node, /* * We must also depend on the constant's collation: it could be - * different from the datatype's, if a CollateExpr was const-folded - * to a simple constant. However we can save work in the most common + * different from the datatype's, if a CollateExpr was const-folded to + * a simple constant. However we can save work in the most common * case where the collation is "default", since we know that's pinned. */ if (OidIsValid(con->constcollid) && @@ -1695,7 +1695,7 @@ find_expr_references_walker(Node *node, } foreach(ct, rte->funccolcollations) { - Oid collid = lfirst_oid(ct); + Oid collid = lfirst_oid(ct); if (OidIsValid(collid) && collid != DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID) @@ -2224,12 +2224,12 @@ getObjectDescription(const ObjectAddress *object) HeapTuple collTup; collTup = SearchSysCache1(COLLOID, - ObjectIdGetDatum(object->objectId)); + ObjectIdGetDatum(object->objectId)); if (!HeapTupleIsValid(collTup)) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for collation %u", object->objectId); appendStringInfo(&buffer, _("collation %s"), - NameStr(((Form_pg_collation) GETSTRUCT(collTup))->collname)); + NameStr(((Form_pg_collation) GETSTRUCT(collTup))->collname)); ReleaseSysCache(collTup); break; } @@ -2796,7 +2796,7 @@ getObjectDescription(const ObjectAddress *object) char * getObjectDescriptionOids(Oid classid, Oid objid) { - ObjectAddress address; + ObjectAddress address; address.classId = classid; address.objectId = objid; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/heap.c b/src/backend/catalog/heap.c index 5d25ce9ec8..09b26a5c72 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/heap.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/heap.c @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ CheckAttributeNamesTypes(TupleDesc tupdesc, char relkind, CheckAttributeType(NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[i]->attname), tupdesc->attrs[i]->atttypid, tupdesc->attrs[i]->attcollation, - NIL, /* assume we're creating a new rowtype */ + NIL, /* assume we're creating a new rowtype */ allow_system_table_mods); } } @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ CheckAttributeType(const char *attname, int i; /* - * Check for self-containment. Eventually we might be able to allow + * Check for self-containment. Eventually we might be able to allow * this (just return without complaint, if so) but it's not clear how * many other places would require anti-recursion defenses before it * would be safe to allow tables to contain their own rowtype. @@ -505,8 +505,8 @@ CheckAttributeType(const char *attname, if (list_member_oid(containing_rowtypes, atttypid)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), - errmsg("composite type %s cannot be made a member of itself", - format_type_be(atttypid)))); + errmsg("composite type %s cannot be made a member of itself", + format_type_be(atttypid)))); containing_rowtypes = lcons_oid(atttypid, containing_rowtypes); @@ -541,15 +541,15 @@ CheckAttributeType(const char *attname, } /* - * This might not be strictly invalid per SQL standard, but it is - * pretty useless, and it cannot be dumped, so we must disallow it. + * This might not be strictly invalid per SQL standard, but it is pretty + * useless, and it cannot be dumped, so we must disallow it. */ if (!OidIsValid(attcollation) && type_is_collatable(atttypid)) - ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), - errmsg("no collation was derived for column \"%s\" with collatable type %s", - attname, format_type_be(atttypid)), - errhint("Use the COLLATE clause to set the collation explicitly."))); + ereport(ERROR, + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), + errmsg("no collation was derived for column \"%s\" with collatable type %s", + attname, format_type_be(atttypid)), + errhint("Use the COLLATE clause to set the collation explicitly."))); } /* @@ -921,7 +921,7 @@ AddNewRelationType(const char *typeName, -1, /* typmod */ 0, /* array dimensions for typBaseType */ false, /* Type NOT NULL */ - InvalidOid); /* typcollation */ + InvalidOid); /* typcollation */ } /* -------------------------------- @@ -992,9 +992,9 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, CheckAttributeNamesTypes(tupdesc, relkind, allow_system_table_mods); /* - * If the relation already exists, it's an error, unless the user specifies - * "IF NOT EXISTS". In that case, we just print a notice and do nothing - * further. + * If the relation already exists, it's an error, unless the user + * specifies "IF NOT EXISTS". In that case, we just print a notice and do + * nothing further. */ existing_relid = get_relname_relid(relname, relnamespace); if (existing_relid != InvalidOid) @@ -1004,7 +1004,7 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, ereport(NOTICE, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_TABLE), errmsg("relation \"%s\" already exists, skipping", - relname))); + relname))); heap_close(pg_class_desc, RowExclusiveLock); return InvalidOid; } @@ -1048,8 +1048,8 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, if (!OidIsValid(relid)) { /* - * Use binary-upgrade override for pg_class.oid/relfilenode, - * if supplied. + * Use binary-upgrade override for pg_class.oid/relfilenode, if + * supplied. */ if (OidIsValid(binary_upgrade_next_heap_pg_class_oid) && (relkind == RELKIND_RELATION || relkind == RELKIND_SEQUENCE || @@ -1183,7 +1183,7 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, -1, /* typmod */ 0, /* array dimensions for typBaseType */ false, /* Type NOT NULL */ - InvalidOid); /* typcollation */ + InvalidOid); /* typcollation */ pfree(relarrayname); } @@ -1285,12 +1285,12 @@ heap_create_with_catalog(const char *relname, register_on_commit_action(relid, oncommit); /* - * If this is an unlogged relation, it needs an init fork so that it - * can be correctly reinitialized on restart. Since we're going to - * do an immediate sync, we ony need to xlog this if archiving or - * streaming is enabled. And the immediate sync is required, because - * otherwise there's no guarantee that this will hit the disk before - * the next checkpoint moves the redo pointer. + * If this is an unlogged relation, it needs an init fork so that it can + * be correctly reinitialized on restart. Since we're going to do an + * immediate sync, we ony need to xlog this if archiving or streaming is + * enabled. And the immediate sync is required, because otherwise there's + * no guarantee that this will hit the disk before the next checkpoint + * moves the redo pointer. */ if (relpersistence == RELPERSISTENCE_UNLOGGED) { @@ -1654,8 +1654,8 @@ heap_drop_with_catalog(Oid relid) /* * There can no longer be anyone *else* touching the relation, but we - * might still have open queries or cursors, or pending trigger events, - * in our own session. + * might still have open queries or cursors, or pending trigger events, in + * our own session. */ CheckTableNotInUse(rel, "DROP TABLE"); @@ -1664,8 +1664,8 @@ heap_drop_with_catalog(Oid relid) */ if (rel->rd_rel->relkind == RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE) { - Relation rel; - HeapTuple tuple; + Relation rel; + HeapTuple tuple; rel = heap_open(ForeignTableRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1899,7 +1899,7 @@ StoreRelCheck(Relation rel, char *ccname, Node *expr, CONSTRAINT_CHECK, /* Constraint Type */ false, /* Is Deferrable */ false, /* Is Deferred */ - true, /* Is Validated */ + true, /* Is Validated */ RelationGetRelid(rel), /* relation */ attNos, /* attrs in the constraint */ keycount, /* # attrs in the constraint */ diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/index.c b/src/backend/catalog/index.c index 679255a199..1bf74b3d4f 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/index.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/index.c @@ -187,18 +187,18 @@ index_check_primary_key(Relation heapRel, int i; /* - * If ALTER TABLE, check that there isn't already a PRIMARY KEY. In - * CREATE TABLE, we have faith that the parser rejected multiple pkey - * clauses; and CREATE INDEX doesn't have a way to say PRIMARY KEY, so - * it's no problem either. + * If ALTER TABLE, check that there isn't already a PRIMARY KEY. In CREATE + * TABLE, we have faith that the parser rejected multiple pkey clauses; + * and CREATE INDEX doesn't have a way to say PRIMARY KEY, so it's no + * problem either. */ if (is_alter_table && relationHasPrimaryKey(heapRel)) { ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), - errmsg("multiple primary keys for table \"%s\" are not allowed", - RelationGetRelationName(heapRel)))); + errmsg("multiple primary keys for table \"%s\" are not allowed", + RelationGetRelationName(heapRel)))); } /* @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ index_check_primary_key(Relation heapRel, continue; atttuple = SearchSysCache2(ATTNUM, - ObjectIdGetDatum(RelationGetRelid(heapRel)), + ObjectIdGetDatum(RelationGetRelid(heapRel)), Int16GetDatum(attnum)); if (!HeapTupleIsValid(atttuple)) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for attribute %d of relation %u", @@ -243,15 +243,14 @@ index_check_primary_key(Relation heapRel, } /* - * XXX: Shouldn't the ALTER TABLE .. SET NOT NULL cascade to child - * tables? Currently, since the PRIMARY KEY itself doesn't cascade, - * we don't cascade the notnull constraint(s) either; but this is - * pretty debatable. + * XXX: Shouldn't the ALTER TABLE .. SET NOT NULL cascade to child tables? + * Currently, since the PRIMARY KEY itself doesn't cascade, we don't + * cascade the notnull constraint(s) either; but this is pretty debatable. * - * XXX: possible future improvement: when being called from ALTER - * TABLE, it would be more efficient to merge this with the outer - * ALTER TABLE, so as to avoid two scans. But that seems to - * complicate DefineIndex's API unduly. + * XXX: possible future improvement: when being called from ALTER TABLE, + * it would be more efficient to merge this with the outer ALTER TABLE, so + * as to avoid two scans. But that seems to complicate DefineIndex's API + * unduly. */ if (cmds) AlterTableInternal(RelationGetRelid(heapRel), cmds, false); @@ -788,8 +787,8 @@ index_create(Relation heapRelation, if (!OidIsValid(indexRelationId)) { /* - * Use binary-upgrade override for pg_class.oid/relfilenode, - * if supplied. + * Use binary-upgrade override for pg_class.oid/relfilenode, if + * supplied. */ if (OidIsValid(binary_upgrade_next_index_pg_class_oid)) { @@ -872,7 +871,7 @@ index_create(Relation heapRelation, * ---------------- */ UpdateIndexRelation(indexRelationId, heapRelationId, indexInfo, - collationObjectId, classObjectId, coloptions, isprimary, is_exclusion, + collationObjectId, classObjectId, coloptions, isprimary, is_exclusion, !deferrable, !concurrent); @@ -947,7 +946,7 @@ index_create(Relation heapRelation, /* * If there are no simply-referenced columns, give the index an - * auto dependency on the whole table. In most cases, this will + * auto dependency on the whole table. In most cases, this will * be redundant, but it might not be if the index expressions and * predicate contain no Vars or only whole-row Vars. */ @@ -1067,7 +1066,7 @@ index_create(Relation heapRelation, /* * Close the index; but we keep the lock that we acquired above until end - * of transaction. Closing the heap is caller's responsibility. + * of transaction. Closing the heap is caller's responsibility. */ index_close(indexRelation, NoLock); @@ -1176,8 +1175,8 @@ index_constraint_create(Relation heapRelation, /* * If the constraint is deferrable, create the deferred uniqueness - * checking trigger. (The trigger will be given an internal - * dependency on the constraint by CreateTrigger.) + * checking trigger. (The trigger will be given an internal dependency on + * the constraint by CreateTrigger.) */ if (deferrable) { @@ -1213,7 +1212,7 @@ index_constraint_create(Relation heapRelation, * have been so marked already, so no need to clear the flag in the other * case. * - * Note: this might better be done by callers. We do it here to avoid + * Note: this might better be done by callers. We do it here to avoid * exposing index_update_stats() globally, but that wouldn't be necessary * if relhaspkey went away. */ @@ -1235,10 +1234,10 @@ index_constraint_create(Relation heapRelation, */ if (update_pgindex && (mark_as_primary || deferrable)) { - Relation pg_index; - HeapTuple indexTuple; - Form_pg_index indexForm; - bool dirty = false; + Relation pg_index; + HeapTuple indexTuple; + Form_pg_index indexForm; + bool dirty = false; pg_index = heap_open(IndexRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1303,8 +1302,8 @@ index_drop(Oid indexId) userIndexRelation = index_open(indexId, AccessExclusiveLock); /* - * There can no longer be anyone *else* touching the index, but we - * might still have open queries using it in our own session. + * There can no longer be anyone *else* touching the index, but we might + * still have open queries using it in our own session. */ CheckTableNotInUse(userIndexRelation, "DROP INDEX"); @@ -1739,7 +1738,8 @@ index_build(Relation heapRelation, */ if (heapRelation->rd_rel->relpersistence == RELPERSISTENCE_UNLOGGED) { - RegProcedure ambuildempty = indexRelation->rd_am->ambuildempty; + RegProcedure ambuildempty = indexRelation->rd_am->ambuildempty; + RelationOpenSmgr(indexRelation); smgrcreate(indexRelation->rd_smgr, INIT_FORKNUM, false); OidFunctionCall1(ambuildempty, PointerGetDatum(indexRelation)); @@ -2410,7 +2410,7 @@ validate_index(Oid heapId, Oid indexId, Snapshot snapshot) ivinfo.strategy = NULL; state.tuplesort = tuplesort_begin_datum(TIDOID, - TIDLessOperator, InvalidOid, false, + TIDLessOperator, InvalidOid, false, maintenance_work_mem, false); state.htups = state.itups = state.tups_inserted = 0; @@ -2834,7 +2834,7 @@ reindex_index(Oid indexId, bool skip_constraint_checks) * use catalog indexes while collecting the list.) * * To avoid deadlocks, VACUUM FULL or CLUSTER on a system catalog must omit the - * REINDEX_CHECK_CONSTRAINTS flag. REINDEX should be used to rebuild an index + * REINDEX_CHECK_CONSTRAINTS flag. REINDEX should be used to rebuild an index * if constraint inconsistency is suspected. For optimal performance, other * callers should include the flag only after transforming the data in a manner * that risks a change in constraint validity. diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c b/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c index 734581e485..f8fd827693 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c @@ -2446,10 +2446,10 @@ CheckSetNamespace(Oid oldNspOid, Oid nspOid, Oid classid, Oid objid) if (oldNspOid == nspOid) ereport(ERROR, (classid == RelationRelationId ? - errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_TABLE) : + errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_TABLE) : classid == ProcedureRelationId ? - errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_FUNCTION) : - errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT), + errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_FUNCTION) : + errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT), errmsg("%s is already in schema \"%s\"", getObjectDescriptionOids(classid, objid), get_namespace_name(nspOid)))); @@ -2458,7 +2458,7 @@ CheckSetNamespace(Oid oldNspOid, Oid nspOid, Oid classid, Oid objid) if (isAnyTempNamespace(nspOid) || isAnyTempNamespace(oldNspOid)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("cannot move objects into or out of temporary schemas"))); + errmsg("cannot move objects into or out of temporary schemas"))); /* same for TOAST schema */ if (nspOid == PG_TOAST_NAMESPACE || oldNspOid == PG_TOAST_NAMESPACE) @@ -2525,7 +2525,7 @@ QualifiedNameGetCreationNamespace(List *names, char **objname_p) /* * get_namespace_oid - given a namespace name, look up the OID * - * If missing_ok is false, throw an error if namespace name not found. If + * If missing_ok is false, throw an error if namespace name not found. If * true, just return InvalidOid. */ Oid @@ -2535,9 +2535,9 @@ get_namespace_oid(const char *nspname, bool missing_ok) oid = GetSysCacheOid1(NAMESPACENAME, CStringGetDatum(nspname)); if (!OidIsValid(oid) && !missing_ok) - ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_SCHEMA), - errmsg("schema \"%s\" does not exist", nspname))); + ereport(ERROR, + (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_SCHEMA), + errmsg("schema \"%s\" does not exist", nspname))); return oid; } @@ -2727,7 +2727,7 @@ GetTempNamespaceBackendId(Oid namespaceId) /* See if the namespace name starts with "pg_temp_" or "pg_toast_temp_" */ nspname = get_namespace_name(namespaceId); if (!nspname) - return InvalidBackendId; /* no such namespace? */ + return InvalidBackendId; /* no such namespace? */ if (strncmp(nspname, "pg_temp_", 8) == 0) result = atoi(nspname + 8); else if (strncmp(nspname, "pg_toast_temp_", 14) == 0) @@ -2798,8 +2798,8 @@ GetOverrideSearchPath(MemoryContext context) * * It's possible that newpath->useTemp is set but there is no longer any * active temp namespace, if the path was saved during a transaction that - * created a temp namespace and was later rolled back. In that case we just - * ignore useTemp. A plausible alternative would be to create a new temp + * created a temp namespace and was later rolled back. In that case we just + * ignore useTemp. A plausible alternative would be to create a new temp * namespace, but for existing callers that's not necessary because an empty * temp namespace wouldn't affect their results anyway. * @@ -3522,7 +3522,7 @@ check_search_path(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source) if (source == PGC_S_TEST) ereport(NOTICE, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_SCHEMA), - errmsg("schema \"%s\" does not exist", curname))); + errmsg("schema \"%s\" does not exist", curname))); else { GUC_check_errdetail("schema \"%s\" does not exist", curname); diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/objectaddress.c b/src/backend/catalog/objectaddress.c index 0d21d310a6..bf25091582 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/objectaddress.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/objectaddress.c @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ static Relation get_relation_by_qualified_name(ObjectType objtype, static ObjectAddress get_object_address_relobject(ObjectType objtype, List *objname, Relation *relp); static ObjectAddress get_object_address_attribute(ObjectType objtype, - List *objname, Relation *relp, LOCKMODE lockmode); + List *objname, Relation *relp, LOCKMODE lockmode); static ObjectAddress get_object_address_opcf(ObjectType objtype, List *objname, List *objargs); static bool object_exists(ObjectAddress address); @@ -108,8 +108,8 @@ ObjectAddress get_object_address(ObjectType objtype, List *objname, List *objargs, Relation *relp, LOCKMODE lockmode) { - ObjectAddress address; - Relation relation = NULL; + ObjectAddress address; + Relation relation = NULL; /* Some kind of lock must be taken. */ Assert(lockmode != NoLock); @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ get_object_address(ObjectType objtype, List *objname, List *objargs, case OBJECT_COLUMN: address = get_object_address_attribute(objtype, objname, &relation, - lockmode); + lockmode); break; case OBJECT_RULE: case OBJECT_TRIGGER: @@ -201,10 +201,10 @@ get_object_address(ObjectType objtype, List *objname, List *objargs, break; case OBJECT_CAST: { - TypeName *sourcetype = (TypeName *) linitial(objname); - TypeName *targettype = (TypeName *) linitial(objargs); - Oid sourcetypeid = typenameTypeId(NULL, sourcetype); - Oid targettypeid = typenameTypeId(NULL, targettype); + TypeName *sourcetype = (TypeName *) linitial(objname); + TypeName *targettype = (TypeName *) linitial(objargs); + Oid sourcetypeid = typenameTypeId(NULL, sourcetype); + Oid targettypeid = typenameTypeId(NULL, targettype); address.classId = CastRelationId; address.objectId = @@ -242,8 +242,8 @@ get_object_address(ObjectType objtype, List *objname, List *objargs, /* * If we're dealing with a relation or attribute, then the relation is - * already locked. If we're dealing with any other type of object, we need - * to lock it and then verify that it still exists. + * already locked. If we're dealing with any other type of object, we + * need to lock it and then verify that it still exists. */ if (address.classId != RelationRelationId) { @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ get_object_address_unqualified(ObjectType objtype, List *qualname) break; default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized objtype: %d", (int) objtype); - msg = NULL; /* placate compiler */ + msg = NULL; /* placate compiler */ } ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ static Relation get_relation_by_qualified_name(ObjectType objtype, List *objname, LOCKMODE lockmode) { - Relation relation; + Relation relation; relation = relation_openrv(makeRangeVarFromNameList(objname), lockmode); switch (objtype) @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ get_object_address_relobject(ObjectType objtype, List *objname, Relation *relp) nnames = list_length(objname); if (nnames < 2) { - Oid reloid; + Oid reloid; /* * For compatibility with very old releases, we sometimes allow users @@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ static ObjectAddress get_object_address_attribute(ObjectType objtype, List *objname, Relation *relp, LOCKMODE lockmode) { - ObjectAddress address; + ObjectAddress address; List *relname; Oid reloid; Relation relation; @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ get_object_address_attribute(ObjectType objtype, List *objname, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_COLUMN), errmsg("column \"%s\" of relation \"%s\" does not exist", - attname, RelationGetRelationName(relation)))); + attname, RelationGetRelationName(relation)))); *relp = relation; return address; @@ -584,8 +584,8 @@ object_exists(ObjectAddress address) int cache = -1; Oid indexoid = InvalidOid; Relation rel; - ScanKeyData skey[1]; - SysScanDesc sd; + ScanKeyData skey[1]; + SysScanDesc sd; bool found; /* Sub-objects require special treatment. */ @@ -609,9 +609,9 @@ object_exists(ObjectAddress address) /* * For object types that have a relevant syscache, we use it; for - * everything else, we'll have to do an index-scan. This switch - * sets either the cache to be used for the syscache lookup, or the - * index to be used for the index scan. + * everything else, we'll have to do an index-scan. This switch sets + * either the cache to be used for the syscache lookup, or the index to be + * used for the index scan. */ switch (address.classId) { @@ -664,6 +664,7 @@ object_exists(ObjectAddress address) cache = OPFAMILYOID; break; case LargeObjectRelationId: + /* * Weird backward compatibility hack: ObjectAddress notation uses * LargeObjectRelationId for large objects, but since PostgreSQL @@ -816,15 +817,15 @@ check_object_ownership(Oid roleid, ObjectType objtype, ObjectAddress address, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), errmsg("must be owner of large object %u", - address.objectId))); + address.objectId))); break; case OBJECT_CAST: { /* We can only check permissions on the source/target types */ - TypeName *sourcetype = (TypeName *) linitial(objname); - TypeName *targettype = (TypeName *) linitial(objargs); - Oid sourcetypeid = typenameTypeId(NULL, sourcetype); - Oid targettypeid = typenameTypeId(NULL, targettype); + TypeName *sourcetype = (TypeName *) linitial(objname); + TypeName *targettype = (TypeName *) linitial(objargs); + Oid sourcetypeid = typenameTypeId(NULL, sourcetype); + Oid targettypeid = typenameTypeId(NULL, targettype); if (!pg_type_ownercheck(sourcetypeid, roleid) && !pg_type_ownercheck(targettypeid, roleid)) @@ -851,6 +852,7 @@ check_object_ownership(Oid roleid, ObjectType objtype, ObjectAddress address, NameListToString(objname)); break; case OBJECT_ROLE: + /* * We treat roles as being "owned" by those with CREATEROLE priv, * except that superusers are only owned by superusers. diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_collation.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_collation.c index 708078463b..5b92a4c0c2 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_collation.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_collation.c @@ -46,7 +46,9 @@ CollationCreate(const char *collname, Oid collnamespace, HeapTuple tup; Datum values[Natts_pg_collation]; bool nulls[Natts_pg_collation]; - NameData name_name, name_collate, name_ctype; + NameData name_name, + name_collate, + name_ctype; Oid oid; ObjectAddress myself, referenced; @@ -60,9 +62,9 @@ CollationCreate(const char *collname, Oid collnamespace, /* * Make sure there is no existing collation of same name & encoding. * - * This would be caught by the unique index anyway; we're just giving - * a friendlier error message. The unique index provides a backstop - * against race conditions. + * This would be caught by the unique index anyway; we're just giving a + * friendlier error message. The unique index provides a backstop against + * race conditions. */ if (SearchSysCacheExists3(COLLNAMEENCNSP, PointerGetDatum(collname), @@ -74,9 +76,9 @@ CollationCreate(const char *collname, Oid collnamespace, collname, pg_encoding_to_char(collencoding)))); /* - * Also forbid matching an any-encoding entry. This test of course is - * not backed up by the unique index, but it's not a problem since we - * don't support adding any-encoding entries after initdb. + * Also forbid matching an any-encoding entry. This test of course is not + * backed up by the unique index, but it's not a problem since we don't + * support adding any-encoding entries after initdb. */ if (SearchSysCacheExists3(COLLNAMEENCNSP, PointerGetDatum(collname), diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c index 6619eed431..69979942af 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c @@ -799,10 +799,10 @@ get_constraint_oid(Oid relid, const char *conname, bool missing_ok) * the rel of interest are Vars with the indicated varno/varlevelsup. * * Currently we only check to see if the rel has a primary key that is a - * subset of the grouping_columns. We could also use plain unique constraints + * subset of the grouping_columns. We could also use plain unique constraints * if all their columns are known not null, but there's a problem: we need * to be able to represent the not-null-ness as part of the constraints added - * to *constraintDeps. FIXME whenever not-null constraints get represented + * to *constraintDeps. FIXME whenever not-null constraints get represented * in pg_constraint. */ bool @@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ check_functional_grouping(Oid relid, if (isNull) elog(ERROR, "null conkey for constraint %u", HeapTupleGetOid(tuple)); - arr = DatumGetArrayTypeP(adatum); /* ensure not toasted */ + arr = DatumGetArrayTypeP(adatum); /* ensure not toasted */ numkeys = ARR_DIMS(arr)[0]; if (ARR_NDIM(arr) != 1 || numkeys < 0 || diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_depend.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_depend.c index 2bb7bb3d5f..67aad86d4e 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_depend.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_depend.c @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ recordMultipleDependencies(const ObjectAddress *depender, /* * If we are executing a CREATE EXTENSION operation, mark the given object - * as being a member of the extension. Otherwise, do nothing. + * as being a member of the extension. Otherwise, do nothing. * * This must be called during creation of any user-definable object type * that could be a member of an extension. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ recordDependencyOnCurrentExtension(const ObjectAddress *object) { if (creating_extension) { - ObjectAddress extension; + ObjectAddress extension; extension.classId = ExtensionRelationId; extension.objectId = CurrentExtensionObject; @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ recordDependencyOnCurrentExtension(const ObjectAddress *object) * (possibly with some differences from before). * * If skipExtensionDeps is true, we do not delete any dependencies that - * show that the given object is a member of an extension. This avoids + * show that the given object is a member of an extension. This avoids * needing a lot of extra logic to fetch and recreate that dependency. */ long @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ deleteDependencyRecordsFor(Oid classId, Oid objectId, while (HeapTupleIsValid(tup = systable_getnext(scan))) { if (skipExtensionDeps && - ((Form_pg_depend) GETSTRUCT(tup))->deptype == DEPENDENCY_EXTENSION) + ((Form_pg_depend) GETSTRUCT(tup))->deptype == DEPENDENCY_EXTENSION) continue; simple_heap_delete(depRel, &tup->t_self); diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c index e87a9311bd..08d8aa13f3 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ /* Potentially set by contrib/pg_upgrade_support functions */ -Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid = InvalidOid; +Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid = InvalidOid; static void RenumberEnumType(Relation pg_enum, HeapTuple *existing, int nelems); static int oid_cmp(const void *p1, const void *p2); @@ -58,9 +58,9 @@ EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals) num_elems = list_length(vals); /* - * We do not bother to check the list of values for duplicates --- if - * you have any, you'll get a less-than-friendly unique-index violation. - * It is probably not worth trying harder. + * We do not bother to check the list of values for duplicates --- if you + * have any, you'll get a less-than-friendly unique-index violation. It is + * probably not worth trying harder. */ pg_enum = heap_open(EnumRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -69,10 +69,9 @@ EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals) * Allocate OIDs for the enum's members. * * While this method does not absolutely guarantee that we generate no - * duplicate OIDs (since we haven't entered each oid into the table - * before allocating the next), trouble could only occur if the OID - * counter wraps all the way around before we finish. Which seems - * unlikely. + * duplicate OIDs (since we haven't entered each oid into the table before + * allocating the next), trouble could only occur if the OID counter wraps + * all the way around before we finish. Which seems unlikely. */ oids = (Oid *) palloc(num_elems * sizeof(Oid)); @@ -83,9 +82,10 @@ EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals) * tells the comparison functions the OIDs are in the correct sort * order and can be compared directly. */ - Oid new_oid; + Oid new_oid; - do { + do + { new_oid = GetNewOid(pg_enum); } while (new_oid & 1); oids[elemno] = new_oid; @@ -202,9 +202,9 @@ AddEnumLabel(Oid enumTypeOid, /* * Acquire a lock on the enum type, which we won't release until commit. * This ensures that two backends aren't concurrently modifying the same - * enum type. Without that, we couldn't be sure to get a consistent - * view of the enum members via the syscache. Note that this does not - * block other backends from inspecting the type; see comments for + * enum type. Without that, we couldn't be sure to get a consistent view + * of the enum members via the syscache. Note that this does not block + * other backends from inspecting the type; see comments for * RenumberEnumType. */ LockDatabaseObject(TypeRelationId, enumTypeOid, 0, ExclusiveLock); @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ restart: /* Get the list of existing members of the enum */ list = SearchSysCacheList1(ENUMTYPOIDNAME, ObjectIdGetDatum(enumTypeOid)); - nelems = list->n_members; + nelems = list->n_members; /* Sort the existing members by enumsortorder */ existing = (HeapTuple *) palloc(nelems * sizeof(HeapTuple)); @@ -229,8 +229,8 @@ restart: if (neighbor == NULL) { /* - * Put the new label at the end of the list. - * No change to existing tuples is required. + * Put the new label at the end of the list. No change to existing + * tuples is required. */ if (nelems > 0) { @@ -244,10 +244,10 @@ restart: else { /* BEFORE or AFTER was specified */ - int nbr_index; - int other_nbr_index; - Form_pg_enum nbr_en; - Form_pg_enum other_nbr_en; + int nbr_index; + int other_nbr_index; + Form_pg_enum nbr_en; + Form_pg_enum other_nbr_en; /* Locate the neighbor element */ for (nbr_index = 0; nbr_index < nelems; nbr_index++) @@ -265,14 +265,14 @@ restart: nbr_en = (Form_pg_enum) GETSTRUCT(existing[nbr_index]); /* - * Attempt to assign an appropriate enumsortorder value: one less - * than the smallest member, one more than the largest member, - * or halfway between two existing members. + * Attempt to assign an appropriate enumsortorder value: one less than + * the smallest member, one more than the largest member, or halfway + * between two existing members. * * In the "halfway" case, because of the finite precision of float4, - * we might compute a value that's actually equal to one or the - * other of its neighbors. In that case we renumber the existing - * members and try again. + * we might compute a value that's actually equal to one or the other + * of its neighbors. In that case we renumber the existing members + * and try again. */ if (newValIsAfter) other_nbr_index = nbr_index + 1; @@ -291,10 +291,10 @@ restart: /* * On some machines, newelemorder may be in a register that's - * wider than float4. We need to force it to be rounded to - * float4 precision before making the following comparisons, - * or we'll get wrong results. (Such behavior violates the C - * standard, but fixing the compilers is out of our reach.) + * wider than float4. We need to force it to be rounded to float4 + * precision before making the following comparisons, or we'll get + * wrong results. (Such behavior violates the C standard, but + * fixing the compilers is out of our reach.) */ newelemorder = DatumGetFloat4(Float4GetDatum(newelemorder)); @@ -314,9 +314,9 @@ restart: if (OidIsValid(binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid)) { /* - * Use binary-upgrade override for pg_enum.oid, if supplied. - * During binary upgrade, all pg_enum.oid's are set this way - * so they are guaranteed to be consistent. + * Use binary-upgrade override for pg_enum.oid, if supplied. During + * binary upgrade, all pg_enum.oid's are set this way so they are + * guaranteed to be consistent. */ if (neighbor != NULL) ereport(ERROR, @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ restart: */ for (;;) { - bool sorts_ok; + bool sorts_ok; /* Get a new OID (different from all existing pg_enum tuples) */ newOid = GetNewOid(pg_enum); @@ -345,8 +345,8 @@ restart: /* * Detect whether it sorts correctly relative to existing * even-numbered labels of the enum. We can ignore existing - * labels with odd Oids, since a comparison involving one of - * those will not take the fast path anyway. + * labels with odd Oids, since a comparison involving one of those + * will not take the fast path anyway. */ sorts_ok = true; for (i = 0; i < nelems; i++) @@ -385,9 +385,9 @@ restart: break; /* - * If it's odd, and sorts OK, loop back to get another OID - * and try again. Probably, the next available even OID - * will sort correctly too, so it's worth trying. + * If it's odd, and sorts OK, loop back to get another OID and + * try again. Probably, the next available even OID will sort + * correctly too, so it's worth trying. */ } else @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ restart: * We avoid doing this unless absolutely necessary; in most installations * it will never happen. The reason is that updating existing pg_enum * entries creates hazards for other backends that are concurrently reading - * pg_enum with SnapshotNow semantics. A concurrent SnapshotNow scan could + * pg_enum with SnapshotNow semantics. A concurrent SnapshotNow scan could * see both old and new versions of an updated row as valid, or neither of * them, if the commit happens between scanning the two versions. It's * also quite likely for a concurrent scan to see an inconsistent set of @@ -510,10 +510,10 @@ oid_cmp(const void *p1, const void *p2) static int sort_order_cmp(const void *p1, const void *p2) { - HeapTuple v1 = *((const HeapTuple *) p1); - HeapTuple v2 = *((const HeapTuple *) p2); - Form_pg_enum en1 = (Form_pg_enum) GETSTRUCT(v1); - Form_pg_enum en2 = (Form_pg_enum) GETSTRUCT(v2); + HeapTuple v1 = *((const HeapTuple *) p1); + HeapTuple v2 = *((const HeapTuple *) p2); + Form_pg_enum en1 = (Form_pg_enum) GETSTRUCT(v1); + Form_pg_enum en2 = (Form_pg_enum) GETSTRUCT(v2); if (en1->enumsortorder < en2->enumsortorder) return -1; diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c index 6138165cc3..47a8ff4d98 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c @@ -842,8 +842,8 @@ fmgr_sql_validator(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!haspolyarg) { /* - * OK to do full precheck: analyze and rewrite the queries, - * then verify the result type. + * OK to do full precheck: analyze and rewrite the queries, then + * verify the result type. */ SQLFunctionParseInfoPtr pinfo; @@ -858,7 +858,7 @@ fmgr_sql_validator(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) querytree_sublist = pg_analyze_and_rewrite_params(parsetree, prosrc, - (ParserSetupHook) sql_fn_parser_setup, + (ParserSetupHook) sql_fn_parser_setup, pinfo); querytree_list = list_concat(querytree_list, querytree_sublist); diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c index 06301c075b..9e35e73f9c 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ TypeShellMake(const char *typeName, Oid typeNamespace, Oid ownerId) values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid); /* typbasetype */ values[i++] = Int32GetDatum(-1); /* typtypmod */ values[i++] = Int32GetDatum(0); /* typndims */ - values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid); /* typcollation */ + values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid); /* typcollation */ nulls[i++] = true; /* typdefaultbin */ nulls[i++] = true; /* typdefault */ @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ TypeCreate(Oid newTypeOid, values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(baseType); /* typbasetype */ values[i++] = Int32GetDatum(typeMod); /* typtypmod */ values[i++] = Int32GetDatum(typNDims); /* typndims */ - values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(typeCollation); /* typcollation */ + values[i++] = ObjectIdGetDatum(typeCollation); /* typcollation */ /* * initialize the default binary value for this type. Check for nulls of diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/storage.c b/src/backend/catalog/storage.c index 221f9f5c12..57987be2c0 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/storage.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/storage.c @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ RelationCreateStorage(RelFileNode rnode, char relpersistence) break; default: elog(ERROR, "invalid relpersistence: %c", relpersistence); - return; /* placate compiler */ + return; /* placate compiler */ } srel = smgropen(rnode, backend); @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ smgrDoPendingDeletes(bool isCommit) * *ptr is set to point to a freshly-palloc'd array of RelFileNodes. * If there are no relations to be deleted, *ptr is set to NULL. * - * Only non-temporary relations are included in the returned list. This is OK + * Only non-temporary relations are included in the returned list. This is OK * because the list is used only in contexts where temporary relations don't * matter: we're either writing to the two-phase state file (and transactions * that have touched temp tables can't be prepared) or we're writing to xlog diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/toasting.c b/src/backend/catalog/toasting.c index 5d5496df98..452ca9bef0 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/toasting.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/toasting.c @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ create_toast_table(Relation rel, Oid toastOid, Oid toastIndexOid, Datum reloptio list_make2("chunk_id", "chunk_seq"), BTREE_AM_OID, rel->rd_rel->reltablespace, - collationObjectId, classObjectId, coloptions, (Datum) 0, + collationObjectId, classObjectId, coloptions, (Datum) 0, true, false, false, false, true, false, false); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/alter.c b/src/backend/commands/alter.c index 99fdd7dba3..215e21cae0 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/alter.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/alter.c @@ -282,26 +282,26 @@ AlterObjectNamespace_oid(Oid classId, Oid objid, Oid nspOid) switch (getObjectClass(&dep)) { case OCLASS_CLASS: - { - Relation rel; - Relation classRel; + { + Relation rel; + Relation classRel; - rel = relation_open(objid, AccessExclusiveLock); - oldNspOid = RelationGetNamespace(rel); + rel = relation_open(objid, AccessExclusiveLock); + oldNspOid = RelationGetNamespace(rel); - classRel = heap_open(RelationRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); + classRel = heap_open(RelationRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); - AlterRelationNamespaceInternal(classRel, - objid, - oldNspOid, - nspOid, - true); + AlterRelationNamespaceInternal(classRel, + objid, + oldNspOid, + nspOid, + true); - heap_close(classRel, RowExclusiveLock); + heap_close(classRel, RowExclusiveLock); - relation_close(rel, NoLock); - break; - } + relation_close(rel, NoLock); + break; + } case OCLASS_PROC: oldNspOid = AlterFunctionNamespace_oid(objid, nspOid); @@ -386,9 +386,11 @@ AlterObjectNamespace(Relation rel, int oidCacheId, int nameCacheId, { Oid classId = RelationGetRelid(rel); Oid oldNspOid; - Datum name, namespace; - bool isnull; - HeapTuple tup, newtup; + Datum name, + namespace; + bool isnull; + HeapTuple tup, + newtup; Datum *values; bool *nulls; bool *replaces; @@ -410,7 +412,7 @@ AlterObjectNamespace(Relation rel, int oidCacheId, int nameCacheId, /* Permission checks ... superusers can always do it */ if (!superuser()) { - Datum owner; + Datum owner; Oid ownerId; AclResult aclresult; diff --git a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c index 774bb04471..dde301b89a 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/analyze.c @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ static void compute_index_stats(Relation onerel, double totalrows, HeapTuple *rows, int numrows, MemoryContext col_context); static VacAttrStats *examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, - Node *index_expr); + Node *index_expr); static int acquire_sample_rows(Relation onerel, HeapTuple *rows, int targrows, double *totalrows, double *totaldeadrows); static double random_fract(void); @@ -160,8 +160,8 @@ analyze_rel(Oid relid, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, if (IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess() && Log_autovacuum_min_duration >= 0) ereport(LOG, (errcode(ERRCODE_LOCK_NOT_AVAILABLE), - errmsg("skipping analyze of \"%s\" --- lock not available", - vacstmt->relation->relname))); + errmsg("skipping analyze of \"%s\" --- lock not available", + vacstmt->relation->relname))); } if (!onerel) return; @@ -853,10 +853,10 @@ examine_attribute(Relation onerel, int attnum, Node *index_expr) /* * When analyzing an expression index, believe the expression tree's type * not the column datatype --- the latter might be the opckeytype storage - * type of the opclass, which is not interesting for our purposes. (Note: + * type of the opclass, which is not interesting for our purposes. (Note: * if we did anything with non-expression index columns, we'd need to * figure out where to get the correct type info from, but for now that's - * not a problem.) It's not clear whether anyone will care about the + * not a problem.) It's not clear whether anyone will care about the * typmod, but we store that too just in case. */ if (index_expr) diff --git a/src/backend/commands/cluster.c b/src/backend/commands/cluster.c index 4c4f356e79..2cc2aaa8f6 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/cluster.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/cluster.c @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex, TransactionId OldestXmin; TransactionId FreezeXid; RewriteState rwstate; - bool use_sort; + bool use_sort; Tuplesortstate *tuplesort; double num_tuples = 0, tups_vacuumed = 0, @@ -813,11 +813,11 @@ copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex, rwstate = begin_heap_rewrite(NewHeap, OldestXmin, FreezeXid, use_wal); /* - * Decide whether to use an indexscan or seqscan-and-optional-sort to - * scan the OldHeap. We know how to use a sort to duplicate the ordering - * of a btree index, and will use seqscan-and-sort for that case if the - * planner tells us it's cheaper. Otherwise, always indexscan if an - * index is provided, else plain seqscan. + * Decide whether to use an indexscan or seqscan-and-optional-sort to scan + * the OldHeap. We know how to use a sort to duplicate the ordering of a + * btree index, and will use seqscan-and-sort for that case if the planner + * tells us it's cheaper. Otherwise, always indexscan if an index is + * provided, else plain seqscan. */ if (OldIndex != NULL && OldIndex->rd_rel->relam == BTREE_AM_OID) use_sort = plan_cluster_use_sort(OIDOldHeap, OIDOldIndex); @@ -869,8 +869,8 @@ copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex, /* * Scan through the OldHeap, either in OldIndex order or sequentially; * copy each tuple into the NewHeap, or transiently to the tuplesort - * module. Note that we don't bother sorting dead tuples (they won't - * get to the new table anyway). + * module. Note that we don't bother sorting dead tuples (they won't get + * to the new table anyway). */ for (;;) { @@ -984,8 +984,8 @@ copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex, heap_endscan(heapScan); /* - * In scan-and-sort mode, complete the sort, then read out all live - * tuples from the tuplestore and write them to the new relation. + * In scan-and-sort mode, complete the sort, then read out all live tuples + * from the tuplestore and write them to the new relation. */ if (tuplesort != NULL) { @@ -1554,7 +1554,7 @@ reform_and_rewrite_tuple(HeapTuple tuple, bool newRelHasOids, RewriteState rwstate) { HeapTuple copiedTuple; - int i; + int i; heap_deform_tuple(tuple, oldTupDesc, values, isnull); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/collationcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/collationcmds.c index 2a6938fd04..7f8a108374 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/collationcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/collationcmds.c @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ #include "utils/syscache.h" static void AlterCollationOwner_internal(Relation rel, Oid collationOid, - Oid newOwnerId); + Oid newOwnerId); /* * CREATE COLLATION @@ -46,10 +46,10 @@ DefineCollation(List *names, List *parameters) Oid collNamespace; AclResult aclresult; ListCell *pl; - DefElem *fromEl = NULL; - DefElem *localeEl = NULL; - DefElem *lccollateEl = NULL; - DefElem *lcctypeEl = NULL; + DefElem *fromEl = NULL; + DefElem *localeEl = NULL; + DefElem *lccollateEl = NULL; + DefElem *lcctypeEl = NULL; char *collcollate = NULL; char *collctype = NULL; Oid newoid; @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ DefineCollation(List *names, List *parameters) foreach(pl, parameters) { - DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(pl); + DefElem *defel = (DefElem *) lfirst(pl); DefElem **defelp; if (pg_strcasecmp(defel->defname, "from") == 0) @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ DefineCollation(List *names, List *parameters) Oid collid; HeapTuple tp; - collid = get_collation_oid(defGetQualifiedName(fromEl), false); + collid = get_collation_oid(defGetQualifiedName(fromEl), false); tp = SearchSysCache1(COLLOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(collid)); if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tp)) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for collation %u", collid); @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ DefineCollation(List *names, List *parameters) if (!collcollate) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_OBJECT_DEFINITION), - errmsg("parameter \"lc_collate\" parameter must be specified"))); + errmsg("parameter \"lc_collate\" parameter must be specified"))); if (!collctype) ereport(ERROR, @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ AlterCollationNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) Oid AlterCollationNamespace_oid(Oid collOid, Oid newNspOid) { - Oid oldNspOid; + Oid oldNspOid; Relation rel; char *collation_name; diff --git a/src/backend/commands/comment.c b/src/backend/commands/comment.c index 3fbeefa018..d09bef0682 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/comment.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/comment.c @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ void CommentObject(CommentStmt *stmt) { - ObjectAddress address; - Relation relation; + ObjectAddress address; + Relation relation; /* * When loading a dump, we may see a COMMENT ON DATABASE for the old name @@ -46,12 +46,13 @@ CommentObject(CommentStmt *stmt) * (which is really pg_restore's fault, but for now we will work around * the problem here). Consensus is that the best fix is to treat wrong * database name as a WARNING not an ERROR; hence, the following special - * case. (If the length of stmt->objname is not 1, get_object_address will - * throw an error below; that's OK.) + * case. (If the length of stmt->objname is not 1, get_object_address + * will throw an error below; that's OK.) */ if (stmt->objtype == OBJECT_DATABASE && list_length(stmt->objname) == 1) { - char *database = strVal(linitial(stmt->objname)); + char *database = strVal(linitial(stmt->objname)); + if (!OidIsValid(get_database_oid(database, true))) { ereport(WARNING, @@ -62,10 +63,10 @@ CommentObject(CommentStmt *stmt) } /* - * Translate the parser representation that identifies this object into - * an ObjectAddress. get_object_address() will throw an error if the - * object does not exist, and will also acquire a lock on the target - * to guard against concurrent DROP operations. + * Translate the parser representation that identifies this object into an + * ObjectAddress. get_object_address() will throw an error if the object + * does not exist, and will also acquire a lock on the target to guard + * against concurrent DROP operations. */ address = get_object_address(stmt->objtype, stmt->objname, stmt->objargs, &relation, ShareUpdateExclusiveLock); @@ -78,6 +79,7 @@ CommentObject(CommentStmt *stmt) switch (stmt->objtype) { case OBJECT_COLUMN: + /* * Allow comments only on columns of tables, views, composite * types, and foreign tables (which are the only relkinds for diff --git a/src/backend/commands/conversioncmds.c b/src/backend/commands/conversioncmds.c index b5e4420ca8..2c1c6da900 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/conversioncmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/conversioncmds.c @@ -335,7 +335,8 @@ AlterConversionOwner_internal(Relation rel, Oid conversionOid, Oid newOwnerId) void AlterConversionNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) { - Oid convOid, nspOid; + Oid convOid, + nspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(ConversionRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -361,7 +362,7 @@ AlterConversionNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) Oid AlterConversionNamespace_oid(Oid convOid, Oid newNspOid) { - Oid oldNspOid; + Oid oldNspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(ConversionRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/copy.c b/src/backend/commands/copy.c index 3af0b09719..57429035e8 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/copy.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/copy.c @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ typedef struct CopyStateData char *quote; /* CSV quote char (must be 1 byte) */ char *escape; /* CSV escape char (must be 1 byte) */ List *force_quote; /* list of column names */ - bool force_quote_all; /* FORCE QUOTE *? */ + bool force_quote_all; /* FORCE QUOTE *? */ bool *force_quote_flags; /* per-column CSV FQ flags */ List *force_notnull; /* list of column names */ bool *force_notnull_flags; /* per-column CSV FNN flags */ @@ -161,8 +161,8 @@ typedef struct CopyStateData /* field raw data pointers found by COPY FROM */ - int max_fields; - char ** raw_fields; + int max_fields; + char **raw_fields; /* * Similarly, line_buf holds the whole input line being processed. The @@ -266,10 +266,10 @@ static const char BinarySignature[11] = "PGCOPY\n\377\r\n\0"; /* non-export function prototypes */ static CopyState BeginCopy(bool is_from, Relation rel, Node *raw_query, - const char *queryString, List *attnamelist, List *options); + const char *queryString, List *attnamelist, List *options); static void EndCopy(CopyState cstate); static CopyState BeginCopyTo(Relation rel, Node *query, const char *queryString, - const char *filename, List *attnamelist, List *options); + const char *filename, List *attnamelist, List *options); static void EndCopyTo(CopyState cstate); static uint64 DoCopyTo(CopyState cstate); static uint64 CopyTo(CopyState cstate); @@ -278,8 +278,8 @@ static void CopyOneRowTo(CopyState cstate, Oid tupleOid, static uint64 CopyFrom(CopyState cstate); static bool CopyReadLine(CopyState cstate); static bool CopyReadLineText(CopyState cstate); -static int CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate); -static int CopyReadAttributesCSV(CopyState cstate); +static int CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate); +static int CopyReadAttributesCSV(CopyState cstate); static Datum CopyReadBinaryAttribute(CopyState cstate, int column_no, FmgrInfo *flinfo, Oid typioparam, int32 typmod, @@ -748,17 +748,17 @@ DoCopy(const CopyStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) if (stmt->relation) { - TupleDesc tupDesc; - AclMode required_access = (is_from ? ACL_INSERT : ACL_SELECT); - RangeTblEntry *rte; - List *attnums; - ListCell *cur; + TupleDesc tupDesc; + AclMode required_access = (is_from ? ACL_INSERT : ACL_SELECT); + RangeTblEntry *rte; + List *attnums; + ListCell *cur; Assert(!stmt->query); /* Open and lock the relation, using the appropriate lock type. */ rel = heap_openrv(stmt->relation, - (is_from ? RowExclusiveLock : AccessShareLock)); + (is_from ? RowExclusiveLock : AccessShareLock)); rte = makeNode(RangeTblEntry); rte->rtekind = RTE_RELATION; @@ -770,8 +770,8 @@ DoCopy(const CopyStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) attnums = CopyGetAttnums(tupDesc, rel, stmt->attlist); foreach(cur, attnums) { - int attno = lfirst_int(cur) - - FirstLowInvalidHeapAttributeNumber; + int attno = lfirst_int(cur) - + FirstLowInvalidHeapAttributeNumber; if (is_from) rte->modifiedCols = bms_add_member(rte->modifiedCols, attno); @@ -1136,8 +1136,8 @@ BeginCopy(bool is_from, cstate = (CopyStateData *) palloc0(sizeof(CopyStateData)); /* - * We allocate everything used by a cstate in a new memory context. - * This avoids memory leaks during repeated use of COPY in a query. + * We allocate everything used by a cstate in a new memory context. This + * avoids memory leaks during repeated use of COPY in a query. */ cstate->copycontext = AllocSetContextCreate(CurrentMemoryContext, "COPY", @@ -1300,9 +1300,9 @@ BeginCopy(bool is_from, cstate->file_encoding = pg_get_client_encoding(); /* - * Set up encoding conversion info. Even if the file and server - * encodings are the same, we must apply pg_any_to_server() to validate - * data in multibyte encodings. + * Set up encoding conversion info. Even if the file and server encodings + * are the same, we must apply pg_any_to_server() to validate data in + * multibyte encodings. */ cstate->need_transcoding = (cstate->file_encoding != GetDatabaseEncoding() || @@ -1552,8 +1552,8 @@ CopyTo(CopyState cstate) */ if (cstate->need_transcoding) cstate->null_print_client = pg_server_to_any(cstate->null_print, - cstate->null_print_len, - cstate->file_encoding); + cstate->null_print_len, + cstate->file_encoding); /* if a header has been requested send the line */ if (cstate->header_line) @@ -2001,9 +2001,9 @@ CopyFrom(CopyState cstate) { slot = ExecBRInsertTriggers(estate, resultRelInfo, slot); - if (slot == NULL) /* "do nothing" */ + if (slot == NULL) /* "do nothing" */ skip_tuple = true; - else /* trigger might have changed tuple */ + else /* trigger might have changed tuple */ tuple = ExecMaterializeSlot(slot); } @@ -2159,7 +2159,7 @@ BeginCopyFrom(Relation rel, { /* Initialize expressions in copycontext. */ defexprs[num_defaults] = ExecInitExpr( - expression_planner((Expr *) defexpr), NULL); + expression_planner((Expr *) defexpr), NULL); defmap[num_defaults] = attnum - 1; num_defaults++; } @@ -2255,7 +2255,7 @@ BeginCopyFrom(Relation rel, if (!cstate->binary) { AttrNumber attr_count = list_length(cstate->attnumlist); - int nfields = cstate->file_has_oids ? (attr_count + 1) : attr_count; + int nfields = cstate->file_has_oids ? (attr_count + 1) : attr_count; cstate->max_fields = nfields; cstate->raw_fields = (char **) palloc(nfields * sizeof(char *)); @@ -2291,7 +2291,7 @@ NextCopyFromRawFields(CopyState cstate, char ***fields, int *nfields) { cstate->cur_lineno++; if (CopyReadLine(cstate)) - return false; /* done */ + return false; /* done */ } cstate->cur_lineno++; @@ -2300,9 +2300,9 @@ NextCopyFromRawFields(CopyState cstate, char ***fields, int *nfields) done = CopyReadLine(cstate); /* - * EOF at start of line means we're done. If we see EOF after - * some characters, we act as though it was newline followed by - * EOF, ie, process the line and then exit loop on next iteration. + * EOF at start of line means we're done. If we see EOF after some + * characters, we act as though it was newline followed by EOF, ie, + * process the line and then exit loop on next iteration. */ if (done && cstate->line_buf.len == 0) return false; @@ -2341,7 +2341,7 @@ NextCopyFrom(CopyState cstate, ExprContext *econtext, FmgrInfo *in_functions = cstate->in_functions; Oid *typioparams = cstate->typioparams; int i; - int nfields; + int nfields; bool isnull; bool file_has_oids = cstate->file_has_oids; int *defmap = cstate->defmap; @@ -2456,18 +2456,18 @@ NextCopyFrom(CopyState cstate, ExprContext *econtext, if (fld_count == -1) { /* - * Received EOF marker. In a V3-protocol copy, wait for - * the protocol-level EOF, and complain if it doesn't come - * immediately. This ensures that we correctly handle - * CopyFail, if client chooses to send that now. + * Received EOF marker. In a V3-protocol copy, wait for the + * protocol-level EOF, and complain if it doesn't come + * immediately. This ensures that we correctly handle CopyFail, + * if client chooses to send that now. * - * Note that we MUST NOT try to read more data in an - * old-protocol copy, since there is no protocol-level EOF - * marker then. We could go either way for copy from file, - * but choose to throw error if there's data after the EOF - * marker, for consistency with the new-protocol case. + * Note that we MUST NOT try to read more data in an old-protocol + * copy, since there is no protocol-level EOF marker then. We + * could go either way for copy from file, but choose to throw + * error if there's data after the EOF marker, for consistency + * with the new-protocol case. */ - char dummy; + char dummy; if (cstate->copy_dest != COPY_OLD_FE && CopyGetData(cstate, &dummy, 1, 1) > 0) @@ -2485,14 +2485,14 @@ NextCopyFrom(CopyState cstate, ExprContext *econtext, if (file_has_oids) { - Oid loaded_oid; + Oid loaded_oid; cstate->cur_attname = "oid"; loaded_oid = DatumGetObjectId(CopyReadBinaryAttribute(cstate, 0, - &cstate->oid_in_function, - cstate->oid_typioparam, + &cstate->oid_in_function, + cstate->oid_typioparam, -1, &isnull)); if (isnull || loaded_oid == InvalidOid) @@ -2524,8 +2524,8 @@ NextCopyFrom(CopyState cstate, ExprContext *econtext, /* * Now compute and insert any defaults available for the columns not - * provided by the input data. Anything not processed here or above - * will remain NULL. + * provided by the input data. Anything not processed here or above will + * remain NULL. */ for (i = 0; i < num_defaults; i++) { @@ -3023,12 +3023,12 @@ GetDecimalFromHex(char hex) * performing de-escaping as needed. * * The input is in line_buf. We use attribute_buf to hold the result - * strings. cstate->raw_fields[k] is set to point to the k'th attribute - * string, or NULL when the input matches the null marker string. + * strings. cstate->raw_fields[k] is set to point to the k'th attribute + * string, or NULL when the input matches the null marker string. * This array is expanded as necessary. * - * (Note that the caller cannot check for nulls since the returned - * string would be the post-de-escaping equivalent, which may look + * (Note that the caller cannot check for nulls since the returned + * string would be the post-de-escaping equivalent, which may look * the same as some valid data string.) * * delim is the column delimiter string (must be just one byte for now). @@ -3090,8 +3090,8 @@ CopyReadAttributesText(CopyState cstate) if (fieldno >= cstate->max_fields) { cstate->max_fields *= 2; - cstate->raw_fields = - repalloc(cstate->raw_fields, cstate->max_fields*sizeof(char *)); + cstate->raw_fields = + repalloc(cstate->raw_fields, cstate->max_fields * sizeof(char *)); } /* Remember start of field on both input and output sides */ @@ -3307,8 +3307,8 @@ CopyReadAttributesCSV(CopyState cstate) if (fieldno >= cstate->max_fields) { cstate->max_fields *= 2; - cstate->raw_fields = - repalloc(cstate->raw_fields, cstate->max_fields*sizeof(char *)); + cstate->raw_fields = + repalloc(cstate->raw_fields, cstate->max_fields * sizeof(char *)); } /* Remember start of field on both input and output sides */ diff --git a/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c b/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c index 87d9e545b4..f319eb539c 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c @@ -680,8 +680,8 @@ createdb(const CreatedbStmt *stmt) void check_encoding_locale_matches(int encoding, const char *collate, const char *ctype) { - int ctype_encoding = pg_get_encoding_from_locale(ctype, true); - int collate_encoding = pg_get_encoding_from_locale(collate, true); + int ctype_encoding = pg_get_encoding_from_locale(ctype, true); + int collate_encoding = pg_get_encoding_from_locale(collate, true); if (!(ctype_encoding == encoding || ctype_encoding == PG_SQL_ASCII || @@ -1849,10 +1849,10 @@ get_database_oid(const char *dbname, bool missing_ok) heap_close(pg_database, AccessShareLock); if (!OidIsValid(oid) && !missing_ok) - ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_DATABASE), - errmsg("database \"%s\" does not exist", - dbname))); + ereport(ERROR, + (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_DATABASE), + errmsg("database \"%s\" does not exist", + dbname))); return oid; } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/explain.c b/src/backend/commands/explain.c index 1d9586f07d..7a361585bd 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/explain.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/explain.c @@ -59,26 +59,26 @@ static void ExplainNode(PlanState *planstate, List *ancestors, const char *relationship, const char *plan_name, ExplainState *es); static void show_plan_tlist(PlanState *planstate, List *ancestors, - ExplainState *es); + ExplainState *es); static void show_expression(Node *node, const char *qlabel, PlanState *planstate, List *ancestors, bool useprefix, ExplainState *es); static void show_qual(List *qual, const char *qlabel, - PlanState *planstate, List *ancestors, - bool useprefix, ExplainState *es); + PlanState *planstate, List *ancestors, + bool useprefix, ExplainState *es); static void show_scan_qual(List *qual, const char *qlabel, - PlanState *planstate, List *ancestors, - ExplainState *es); + PlanState *planstate, List *ancestors, + ExplainState *es); static void show_upper_qual(List *qual, const char *qlabel, - PlanState *planstate, List *ancestors, - ExplainState *es); + PlanState *planstate, List *ancestors, + ExplainState *es); static void show_sort_keys(SortState *sortstate, List *ancestors, - ExplainState *es); + ExplainState *es); static void show_merge_append_keys(MergeAppendState *mstate, List *ancestors, - ExplainState *es); + ExplainState *es); static void show_sort_keys_common(PlanState *planstate, - int nkeys, AttrNumber *keycols, - List *ancestors, ExplainState *es); + int nkeys, AttrNumber *keycols, + List *ancestors, ExplainState *es); static void show_sort_info(SortState *sortstate, ExplainState *es); static void show_hash_info(HashState *hashstate, ExplainState *es); static void show_foreignscan_info(ForeignScanState *fsstate, ExplainState *es); @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ static void ExplainTargetRel(Plan *plan, Index rti, ExplainState *es); static void ExplainMemberNodes(List *plans, PlanState **planstates, List *ancestors, ExplainState *es); static void ExplainSubPlans(List *plans, List *ancestors, - const char *relationship, ExplainState *es); + const char *relationship, ExplainState *es); static void ExplainProperty(const char *qlabel, const char *value, bool numeric, ExplainState *es); static void ExplainOpenGroup(const char *objtype, const char *labelname, @@ -1358,7 +1358,7 @@ show_scan_qual(List *qual, const char *qlabel, { bool useprefix; - useprefix = (IsA(planstate->plan, SubqueryScan) || es->verbose); + useprefix = (IsA(planstate->plan, SubqueryScan) ||es->verbose); show_qual(qual, qlabel, planstate, ancestors, useprefix, es); } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/extension.c b/src/backend/commands/extension.c index 7c3e8107de..d848926ae5 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/extension.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/extension.c @@ -56,8 +56,8 @@ /* Globally visible state variables */ -bool creating_extension = false; -Oid CurrentExtensionObject = InvalidOid; +bool creating_extension = false; +Oid CurrentExtensionObject = InvalidOid; /* * Internal data structure to hold the results of parsing a control file @@ -66,8 +66,8 @@ typedef struct ExtensionControlFile { char *name; /* name of the extension */ char *directory; /* directory for script files */ - char *default_version; /* default install target version, if any */ - char *module_pathname; /* string to substitute for MODULE_PATHNAME */ + char *default_version; /* default install target version, if any */ + char *module_pathname; /* string to substitute for MODULE_PATHNAME */ char *comment; /* comment, if any */ char *schema; /* target schema (allowed if !relocatable) */ bool relocatable; /* is ALTER EXTENSION SET SCHEMA supported? */ @@ -85,9 +85,9 @@ typedef struct ExtensionVersionInfo List *reachable; /* List of ExtensionVersionInfo's */ bool installable; /* does this version have an install script? */ /* working state for Dijkstra's algorithm: */ - bool distance_known; /* is distance from start known yet? */ + bool distance_known; /* is distance from start known yet? */ int distance; /* current worst-case distance estimate */ - struct ExtensionVersionInfo *previous; /* current best predecessor */ + struct ExtensionVersionInfo *previous; /* current best predecessor */ } ExtensionVersionInfo; /* Local functions */ @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ static void ApplyExtensionUpdates(Oid extensionOid, /* * get_extension_oid - given an extension name, look up the OID * - * If missing_ok is false, throw an error if extension name not found. If + * If missing_ok is false, throw an error if extension name not found. If * true, just return InvalidOid. */ Oid @@ -142,10 +142,10 @@ get_extension_oid(const char *extname, bool missing_ok) heap_close(rel, AccessShareLock); if (!OidIsValid(result) && !missing_ok) - ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), - errmsg("extension \"%s\" does not exist", - extname))); + ereport(ERROR, + (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), + errmsg("extension \"%s\" does not exist", + extname))); return result; } @@ -237,8 +237,8 @@ check_valid_extension_name(const char *extensionname) int namelen = strlen(extensionname); /* - * Disallow empty names (the parser rejects empty identifiers anyway, - * but let's check). + * Disallow empty names (the parser rejects empty identifiers anyway, but + * let's check). */ if (namelen == 0) ereport(ERROR, @@ -256,16 +256,16 @@ check_valid_extension_name(const char *extensionname) errdetail("Extension names must not contain \"--\"."))); /* - * No leading or trailing dash either. (We could probably allow this, - * but it would require much care in filename parsing and would make - * filenames visually if not formally ambiguous. Since there's no - * real-world use case, let's just forbid it.) + * No leading or trailing dash either. (We could probably allow this, but + * it would require much care in filename parsing and would make filenames + * visually if not formally ambiguous. Since there's no real-world use + * case, let's just forbid it.) */ if (extensionname[0] == '-' || extensionname[namelen - 1] == '-') ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), errmsg("invalid extension name: \"%s\"", extensionname), - errdetail("Extension names must not begin or end with \"-\"."))); + errdetail("Extension names must not begin or end with \"-\"."))); /* * No directory separators either (this is sufficient to prevent ".." @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ check_valid_version_name(const char *versionname) if (namelen == 0) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("invalid extension version name: \"%s\"", versionname), + errmsg("invalid extension version name: \"%s\"", versionname), errdetail("Version names must not be empty."))); /* @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ check_valid_version_name(const char *versionname) if (strstr(versionname, "--")) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("invalid extension version name: \"%s\"", versionname), + errmsg("invalid extension version name: \"%s\"", versionname), errdetail("Version names must not contain \"--\"."))); /* @@ -308,8 +308,8 @@ check_valid_version_name(const char *versionname) if (versionname[0] == '-' || versionname[namelen - 1] == '-') ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("invalid extension version name: \"%s\"", versionname), - errdetail("Version names must not begin or end with \"-\"."))); + errmsg("invalid extension version name: \"%s\"", versionname), + errdetail("Version names must not begin or end with \"-\"."))); /* * No directory separators either (this is sufficient to prevent ".." @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ check_valid_version_name(const char *versionname) if (first_dir_separator(versionname) != NULL) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("invalid extension version name: \"%s\"", versionname), + errmsg("invalid extension version name: \"%s\"", versionname), errdetail("Version names must not contain directory separator characters."))); } @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ get_extension_script_directory(ExtensionControlFile *control) get_share_path(my_exec_path, sharepath); result = (char *) palloc(MAXPGPATH); - snprintf(result, MAXPGPATH, "%s/%s", sharepath, control->directory); + snprintf(result, MAXPGPATH, "%s/%s", sharepath, control->directory); return result; } @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ get_extension_script_filename(ExtensionControlFile *control, /* * Parse contents of primary or auxiliary control file, and fill in - * fields of *control. We parse primary file if version == NULL, + * fields of *control. We parse primary file if version == NULL, * else the optional auxiliary file for that version. * * Control files are supposed to be very short, half a dozen lines, @@ -448,8 +448,8 @@ parse_extension_control_file(ExtensionControlFile *control, char *filename; FILE *file; ConfigVariable *item, - *head = NULL, - *tail = NULL; + *head = NULL, + *tail = NULL; /* * Locate the file to read. Auxiliary files are optional. @@ -553,8 +553,8 @@ parse_extension_control_file(ExtensionControlFile *control, /* syntax error in name list */ ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("parameter \"%s\" must be a list of extension names", - item->name))); + errmsg("parameter \"%s\" must be a list of extension names", + item->name))); } } else @@ -632,12 +632,12 @@ static char * read_extension_script_file(const ExtensionControlFile *control, const char *filename) { - int src_encoding; - int dest_encoding = GetDatabaseEncoding(); - bytea *content; + int src_encoding; + int dest_encoding = GetDatabaseEncoding(); + bytea *content; char *src_str; - char *dest_str; - int len; + char *dest_str; + int len; content = read_binary_file(filename, 0, -1); @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ read_extension_script_file(const ExtensionControlFile *control, * filename is used only to report errors. * * Note: it's tempting to just use SPI to execute the string, but that does - * not work very well. The really serious problem is that SPI will parse, + * not work very well. The really serious problem is that SPI will parse, * analyze, and plan the whole string before executing any of it; of course * this fails if there are any plannable statements referring to objects * created earlier in the script. A lesser annoyance is that SPI insists @@ -774,7 +774,7 @@ execute_extension_script(Oid extensionOid, ExtensionControlFile *control, List *requiredSchemas, const char *schemaName, Oid schemaOid) { - char *filename; + char *filename; char *save_client_min_messages, *save_log_min_messages, *save_search_path; @@ -809,8 +809,8 @@ execute_extension_script(Oid extensionOid, ExtensionControlFile *control, * so that we won't spam the user with useless NOTICE messages from common * script actions like creating shell types. * - * We use the equivalent of SET LOCAL to ensure the setting is undone - * upon error. + * We use the equivalent of SET LOCAL to ensure the setting is undone upon + * error. */ save_client_min_messages = pstrdup(GetConfigOption("client_min_messages", false)); @@ -832,8 +832,8 @@ execute_extension_script(Oid extensionOid, ExtensionControlFile *control, * makes the target schema be the default creation target namespace. * * Note: it might look tempting to use PushOverrideSearchPath for this, - * but we cannot do that. We have to actually set the search_path GUC - * in case the extension script examines or changes it. + * but we cannot do that. We have to actually set the search_path GUC in + * case the extension script examines or changes it. */ save_search_path = pstrdup(GetConfigOption("search_path", false)); @@ -855,32 +855,32 @@ execute_extension_script(Oid extensionOid, ExtensionControlFile *control, /* * Set creating_extension and related variables so that * recordDependencyOnCurrentExtension and other functions do the right - * things. On failure, ensure we reset these variables. + * things. On failure, ensure we reset these variables. */ creating_extension = true; CurrentExtensionObject = extensionOid; PG_TRY(); { - char *sql = read_extension_script_file(control, filename); + char *sql = read_extension_script_file(control, filename); /* * If it's not relocatable, substitute the target schema name for * occcurrences of @extschema@. * - * For a relocatable extension, we just run the script as-is. - * There cannot be any need for @extschema@, else it wouldn't - * be relocatable. + * For a relocatable extension, we just run the script as-is. There + * cannot be any need for @extschema@, else it wouldn't be + * relocatable. */ if (!control->relocatable) { - const char *qSchemaName = quote_identifier(schemaName); + const char *qSchemaName = quote_identifier(schemaName); sql = text_to_cstring( - DatumGetTextPP( - DirectFunctionCall3(replace_text, - CStringGetTextDatum(sql), - CStringGetTextDatum("@extschema@"), - CStringGetTextDatum(qSchemaName)))); + DatumGetTextPP( + DirectFunctionCall3(replace_text, + CStringGetTextDatum(sql), + CStringGetTextDatum("@extschema@"), + CStringGetTextDatum(qSchemaName)))); } /* @@ -890,11 +890,11 @@ execute_extension_script(Oid extensionOid, ExtensionControlFile *control, if (control->module_pathname) { sql = text_to_cstring( - DatumGetTextPP( - DirectFunctionCall3(replace_text, - CStringGetTextDatum(sql), - CStringGetTextDatum("MODULE_PATHNAME"), - CStringGetTextDatum(control->module_pathname)))); + DatumGetTextPP( + DirectFunctionCall3(replace_text, + CStringGetTextDatum(sql), + CStringGetTextDatum("MODULE_PATHNAME"), + CStringGetTextDatum(control->module_pathname)))); } execute_sql_string(sql, filename); @@ -1004,7 +1004,7 @@ get_ext_ver_list(ExtensionControlFile *control) struct dirent *de; location = get_extension_script_directory(control); - dir = AllocateDir(location); + dir = AllocateDir(location); while ((de = ReadDir(dir, location)) != NULL) { char *vername; @@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ identify_update_path(ExtensionControlFile *control, * is still good. * * Result is a List of names of versions to transition through (the initial - * version is *not* included). Returns NIL if no such path. + * version is *not* included). Returns NIL if no such path. */ static List * find_update_path(List *evi_list, @@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ find_update_path(List *evi_list, foreach(lc, evi->reachable) { ExtensionVersionInfo *evi2 = (ExtensionVersionInfo *) lfirst(lc); - int newdist; + int newdist; newdist = evi->distance + 1; if (newdist < evi2->distance) @@ -1178,10 +1178,10 @@ CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt) DefElem *d_schema = NULL; DefElem *d_new_version = NULL; DefElem *d_old_version = NULL; - char *schemaName; + char *schemaName; Oid schemaOid; - char *versionName; - char *oldVersionName; + char *versionName; + char *oldVersionName; Oid extowner = GetUserId(); ExtensionControlFile *pcontrol; ExtensionControlFile *control; @@ -1195,10 +1195,10 @@ CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt) check_valid_extension_name(stmt->extname); /* - * Check for duplicate extension name. The unique index on + * Check for duplicate extension name. The unique index on * pg_extension.extname would catch this anyway, and serves as a backstop - * in case of race conditions; but this is a friendlier error message, - * and besides we need a check to support IF NOT EXISTS. + * in case of race conditions; but this is a friendlier error message, and + * besides we need a check to support IF NOT EXISTS. */ if (get_extension_oid(stmt->extname, true) != InvalidOid) { @@ -1218,8 +1218,8 @@ CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt) } /* - * We use global variables to track the extension being created, so we - * can create only one extension at the same time. + * We use global variables to track the extension being created, so we can + * create only one extension at the same time. */ if (creating_extension) ereport(ERROR, @@ -1306,8 +1306,8 @@ CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt) if (list_length(updateVersions) == 1) { /* - * Simple case where there's just one update script to run. - * We will not need any follow-on update steps. + * Simple case where there's just one update script to run. We + * will not need any follow-on update steps. */ Assert(strcmp((char *) linitial(updateVersions), versionName) == 0); updateVersions = NIL; @@ -1351,9 +1351,9 @@ CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt) strcmp(control->schema, schemaName) != 0) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("extension \"%s\" must be installed in schema \"%s\"", - control->name, - control->schema))); + errmsg("extension \"%s\" must be installed in schema \"%s\"", + control->name, + control->schema))); /* If the user is giving us the schema name, it must exist already */ schemaOid = get_namespace_oid(schemaName, false); @@ -1362,7 +1362,7 @@ CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt) { /* * The extension is not relocatable and the author gave us a schema - * for it. We create the schema here if it does not already exist. + * for it. We create the schema here if it does not already exist. */ schemaName = control->schema; schemaOid = get_namespace_oid(schemaName, true); @@ -1380,13 +1380,13 @@ CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt) * Else, use the current default creation namespace, which is the * first explicit entry in the search_path. */ - List *search_path = fetch_search_path(false); + List *search_path = fetch_search_path(false); - if (search_path == NIL) /* probably can't happen */ + if (search_path == NIL) /* probably can't happen */ elog(ERROR, "there is no default creation target"); schemaOid = linitial_oid(search_path); schemaName = get_namespace_name(schemaOid); - if (schemaName == NULL) /* recently-deleted namespace? */ + if (schemaName == NULL) /* recently-deleted namespace? */ elog(ERROR, "there is no default creation target"); list_free(search_path); @@ -1397,13 +1397,13 @@ CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt) * extension script actually creates any objects there, it will fail if * the user doesn't have such permissions. But there are cases such as * procedural languages where it's convenient to set schema = pg_catalog - * yet we don't want to restrict the command to users with ACL_CREATE - * for pg_catalog. + * yet we don't want to restrict the command to users with ACL_CREATE for + * pg_catalog. */ /* - * Look up the prerequisite extensions, and build lists of their OIDs - * and the OIDs of their target schemas. + * Look up the prerequisite extensions, and build lists of their OIDs and + * the OIDs of their target schemas. */ requiredExtensions = NIL; requiredSchemas = NIL; @@ -1453,8 +1453,8 @@ CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt) schemaName, schemaOid); /* - * If additional update scripts have to be executed, apply the updates - * as though a series of ALTER EXTENSION UPDATE commands were given + * If additional update scripts have to be executed, apply the updates as + * though a series of ALTER EXTENSION UPDATE commands were given */ ApplyExtensionUpdates(extensionOid, pcontrol, versionName, updateVersions); @@ -1653,7 +1653,7 @@ RemoveExtensionById(Oid extId) /* * This function lists the available extensions (one row per primary control - * file in the control directory). We parse each control file and report the + * file in the control directory). We parse each control file and report the * interesting fields. * * The system view pg_available_extensions provides a user interface to this @@ -1663,14 +1663,14 @@ RemoveExtensionById(Oid extId) Datum pg_available_extensions(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo; - TupleDesc tupdesc; - Tuplestorestate *tupstore; - MemoryContext per_query_ctx; - MemoryContext oldcontext; - char *location; - DIR *dir; - struct dirent *de; + ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo; + TupleDesc tupdesc; + Tuplestorestate *tupstore; + MemoryContext per_query_ctx; + MemoryContext oldcontext; + char *location; + DIR *dir; + struct dirent *de; /* check to see if caller supports us returning a tuplestore */ if (rsinfo == NULL || !IsA(rsinfo, ReturnSetInfo)) @@ -1699,11 +1699,11 @@ pg_available_extensions(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext); location = get_extension_control_directory(); - dir = AllocateDir(location); + dir = AllocateDir(location); /* - * If the control directory doesn't exist, we want to silently return - * an empty set. Any other error will be reported by ReadDir. + * If the control directory doesn't exist, we want to silently return an + * empty set. Any other error will be reported by ReadDir. */ if (dir == NULL && errno == ENOENT) { @@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ pg_available_extensions(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * This function lists the available extension versions (one row per - * extension installation script). For each version, we parse the related + * extension installation script). For each version, we parse the related * control file(s) and report the interesting fields. * * The system view pg_available_extension_versions provides a user interface @@ -1772,14 +1772,14 @@ pg_available_extensions(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum pg_available_extension_versions(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo; - TupleDesc tupdesc; - Tuplestorestate *tupstore; - MemoryContext per_query_ctx; - MemoryContext oldcontext; - char *location; - DIR *dir; - struct dirent *de; + ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo; + TupleDesc tupdesc; + Tuplestorestate *tupstore; + MemoryContext per_query_ctx; + MemoryContext oldcontext; + char *location; + DIR *dir; + struct dirent *de; /* check to see if caller supports us returning a tuplestore */ if (rsinfo == NULL || !IsA(rsinfo, ReturnSetInfo)) @@ -1808,11 +1808,11 @@ pg_available_extension_versions(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext); location = get_extension_control_directory(); - dir = AllocateDir(location); + dir = AllocateDir(location); /* - * If the control directory doesn't exist, we want to silently return - * an empty set. Any other error will be reported by ReadDir. + * If the control directory doesn't exist, we want to silently return an + * empty set. Any other error will be reported by ReadDir. */ if (dir == NULL && errno == ENOENT) { @@ -1867,7 +1867,7 @@ get_available_versions_for_extension(ExtensionControlFile *pcontrol, struct dirent *de; location = get_extension_script_directory(pcontrol); - dir = AllocateDir(location); + dir = AllocateDir(location); /* Note this will fail if script directory doesn't exist */ while ((de = ReadDir(dir, location)) != NULL) { @@ -1962,11 +1962,11 @@ Datum pg_extension_update_paths(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { Name extname = PG_GETARG_NAME(0); - ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo; - TupleDesc tupdesc; - Tuplestorestate *tupstore; - MemoryContext per_query_ctx; - MemoryContext oldcontext; + ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo; + TupleDesc tupdesc; + Tuplestorestate *tupstore; + MemoryContext per_query_ctx; + MemoryContext oldcontext; List *evi_list; ExtensionControlFile *control; ListCell *lc1; @@ -2079,8 +2079,8 @@ pg_extension_config_dump(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) text *wherecond = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(1); char *tablename; Relation extRel; - ScanKeyData key[1]; - SysScanDesc extScan; + ScanKeyData key[1]; + SysScanDesc extScan; HeapTuple extTup; Datum arrayDatum; Datum elementDatum; @@ -2092,8 +2092,8 @@ pg_extension_config_dump(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ArrayType *a; /* - * We only allow this to be called from an extension's SQL script. - * We shouldn't need any permissions check beyond that. + * We only allow this to be called from an extension's SQL script. We + * shouldn't need any permissions check beyond that. */ if (!creating_extension) ereport(ERROR, @@ -2103,8 +2103,8 @@ pg_extension_config_dump(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * Check that the table exists and is a member of the extension being - * created. This ensures that we don't need to register a dependency - * to protect the extconfig entry. + * created. This ensures that we don't need to register a dependency to + * protect the extconfig entry. */ tablename = get_rel_name(tableoid); if (tablename == NULL) @@ -2115,12 +2115,12 @@ pg_extension_config_dump(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) CurrentExtensionObject) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("table \"%s\" is not a member of the extension being created", - tablename))); + errmsg("table \"%s\" is not a member of the extension being created", + tablename))); /* - * Add the table OID and WHERE condition to the extension's extconfig - * and extcondition arrays. + * Add the table OID and WHERE condition to the extension's extconfig and + * extcondition arrays. */ /* Find the pg_extension tuple */ @@ -2136,7 +2136,7 @@ pg_extension_config_dump(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) extTup = systable_getnext(extScan); - if (!HeapTupleIsValid(extTup)) /* should not happen */ + if (!HeapTupleIsValid(extTup)) /* should not happen */ elog(ERROR, "extension with oid %u does not exist", CurrentExtensionObject); @@ -2162,7 +2162,7 @@ pg_extension_config_dump(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Assert(ARR_NDIM(a) == 1); Assert(ARR_LBOUND(a)[0] == 1); - arrayIndex = ARR_DIMS(a)[0] + 1; /* add after end */ + arrayIndex = ARR_DIMS(a)[0] + 1; /* add after end */ a = array_set(a, 1, &arrayIndex, elementDatum, @@ -2193,7 +2193,7 @@ pg_extension_config_dump(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Assert(ARR_NDIM(a) == 1); Assert(ARR_LBOUND(a)[0] == 1); - arrayIndex = ARR_DIMS(a)[0] + 1; /* add after end */ + arrayIndex = ARR_DIMS(a)[0] + 1; /* add after end */ a = array_set(a, 1, &arrayIndex, elementDatum, @@ -2231,12 +2231,12 @@ AlterExtensionNamespace(List *names, const char *newschema) Oid oldNspOid = InvalidOid; AclResult aclresult; Relation extRel; - ScanKeyData key[2]; - SysScanDesc extScan; + ScanKeyData key[2]; + SysScanDesc extScan; HeapTuple extTup; Form_pg_extension extForm; Relation depRel; - SysScanDesc depScan; + SysScanDesc depScan; HeapTuple depTup; if (list_length(names) != 1) @@ -2275,7 +2275,7 @@ AlterExtensionNamespace(List *names, const char *newschema) extTup = systable_getnext(extScan); - if (!HeapTupleIsValid(extTup)) /* should not happen */ + if (!HeapTupleIsValid(extTup)) /* should not happen */ elog(ERROR, "extension with oid %u does not exist", extensionOid); /* Copy tuple so we can modify it below */ @@ -2285,8 +2285,8 @@ AlterExtensionNamespace(List *names, const char *newschema) systable_endscan(extScan); /* - * If the extension is already in the target schema, just silently - * do nothing. + * If the extension is already in the target schema, just silently do + * nothing. */ if (extForm->extnamespace == nspOid) { @@ -2323,10 +2323,10 @@ AlterExtensionNamespace(List *names, const char *newschema) { Form_pg_depend pg_depend = (Form_pg_depend) GETSTRUCT(depTup); ObjectAddress dep; - Oid dep_oldNspOid; + Oid dep_oldNspOid; /* - * Ignore non-membership dependencies. (Currently, the only other + * Ignore non-membership dependencies. (Currently, the only other * case we could see here is a normal dependency from another * extension.) */ @@ -2388,13 +2388,13 @@ void ExecAlterExtensionStmt(AlterExtensionStmt *stmt) { DefElem *d_new_version = NULL; - char *versionName; - char *oldVersionName; + char *versionName; + char *oldVersionName; ExtensionControlFile *control; Oid extensionOid; Relation extRel; - ScanKeyData key[1]; - SysScanDesc extScan; + ScanKeyData key[1]; + SysScanDesc extScan; HeapTuple extTup; List *updateVersions; Datum datum; @@ -2402,8 +2402,8 @@ ExecAlterExtensionStmt(AlterExtensionStmt *stmt) ListCell *lc; /* - * We use global variables to track the extension being created, so we - * can create/update only one extension at the same time. + * We use global variables to track the extension being created, so we can + * create/update only one extension at the same time. */ if (creating_extension) ereport(ERROR, @@ -2426,10 +2426,10 @@ ExecAlterExtensionStmt(AlterExtensionStmt *stmt) extTup = systable_getnext(extScan); if (!HeapTupleIsValid(extTup)) - ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), - errmsg("extension \"%s\" does not exist", - stmt->extname))); + ereport(ERROR, + (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), + errmsg("extension \"%s\" does not exist", + stmt->extname))); extensionOid = HeapTupleGetOid(extTup); @@ -2499,8 +2499,8 @@ ExecAlterExtensionStmt(AlterExtensionStmt *stmt) if (strcmp(oldVersionName, versionName) == 0) { ereport(NOTICE, - (errmsg("version \"%s\" of extension \"%s\" is already installed", - versionName, stmt->extname))); + (errmsg("version \"%s\" of extension \"%s\" is already installed", + versionName, stmt->extname))); return; } @@ -2545,8 +2545,8 @@ ApplyExtensionUpdates(Oid extensionOid, List *requiredExtensions; List *requiredSchemas; Relation extRel; - ScanKeyData key[1]; - SysScanDesc extScan; + ScanKeyData key[1]; + SysScanDesc extScan; HeapTuple extTup; Form_pg_extension extForm; Datum values[Natts_pg_extension]; @@ -2573,7 +2573,7 @@ ApplyExtensionUpdates(Oid extensionOid, extTup = systable_getnext(extScan); - if (!HeapTupleIsValid(extTup)) /* should not happen */ + if (!HeapTupleIsValid(extTup)) /* should not happen */ elog(ERROR, "extension with oid %u does not exist", extensionOid); @@ -2668,9 +2668,9 @@ ApplyExtensionUpdates(Oid extensionOid, schemaName, schemaOid); /* - * Update prior-version name and loop around. Since execute_sql_string - * did a final CommandCounterIncrement, we can update the pg_extension - * row again. + * Update prior-version name and loop around. Since + * execute_sql_string did a final CommandCounterIncrement, we can + * update the pg_extension row again. */ oldVersionName = versionName; } @@ -2682,10 +2682,10 @@ ApplyExtensionUpdates(Oid extensionOid, void ExecAlterExtensionContentsStmt(AlterExtensionContentsStmt *stmt) { - ObjectAddress extension; - ObjectAddress object; - Relation relation; - Oid oldExtension; + ObjectAddress extension; + ObjectAddress object; + Relation relation; + Oid oldExtension; extension.classId = ExtensionRelationId; extension.objectId = get_extension_oid(stmt->extname, false); @@ -2697,10 +2697,10 @@ ExecAlterExtensionContentsStmt(AlterExtensionContentsStmt *stmt) stmt->extname); /* - * Translate the parser representation that identifies the object into - * an ObjectAddress. get_object_address() will throw an error if the - * object does not exist, and will also acquire a lock on the object to - * guard against concurrent DROP and ALTER EXTENSION ADD/DROP operations. + * Translate the parser representation that identifies the object into an + * ObjectAddress. get_object_address() will throw an error if the object + * does not exist, and will also acquire a lock on the object to guard + * against concurrent DROP and ALTER EXTENSION ADD/DROP operations. */ object = get_object_address(stmt->objtype, stmt->objname, stmt->objargs, &relation, ShareUpdateExclusiveLock); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/foreigncmds.c b/src/backend/commands/foreigncmds.c index 13d6d882f8..21d52e06ba 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/foreigncmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/foreigncmds.c @@ -586,8 +586,8 @@ AlterForeignDataWrapper(AlterFdwStmt *stmt) */ if (OidIsValid(fdwvalidator)) ereport(WARNING, - (errmsg("changing the foreign-data wrapper validator can cause " - "the options for dependent objects to become invalid"))); + (errmsg("changing the foreign-data wrapper validator can cause " + "the options for dependent objects to become invalid"))); } else { @@ -643,8 +643,8 @@ AlterForeignDataWrapper(AlterFdwStmt *stmt) ObjectAddress referenced; /* - * Flush all existing dependency records of this FDW on functions; - * we assume there can be none other than the ones we are fixing. + * Flush all existing dependency records of this FDW on functions; we + * assume there can be none other than the ones we are fixing. */ deleteDependencyRecordsForClass(ForeignDataWrapperRelationId, fdwId, diff --git a/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c b/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c index c8cbe035f0..03da168ff2 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c @@ -1665,7 +1665,7 @@ CreateCast(CreateCastStmt *stmt) * We also disallow creating binary-compatibility casts involving * domains. Casting from a domain to its base type is already * allowed, and casting the other way ought to go through domain - * coercion to permit constraint checking. Again, if you're intent on + * coercion to permit constraint checking. Again, if you're intent on * having your own semantics for that, create a no-op cast function. * * NOTE: if we were to relax this, the above checks for composites @@ -1830,7 +1830,7 @@ DropCast(DropCastStmt *stmt) Oid get_cast_oid(Oid sourcetypeid, Oid targettypeid, bool missing_ok) { - Oid oid; + Oid oid; oid = GetSysCacheOid2(CASTSOURCETARGET, ObjectIdGetDatum(sourcetypeid), diff --git a/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c index cfcce55967..05e8234a0f 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c @@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ DefineIndex(RangeVar *heapRelation, indexRelationId = index_create(rel, indexRelationName, indexRelationId, indexInfo, indexColNames, - accessMethodId, tablespaceId, collationObjectId, classObjectId, + accessMethodId, tablespaceId, collationObjectId, classObjectId, coloptions, reloptions, primary, isconstraint, deferrable, initdeferred, allowSystemTableMods, @@ -840,14 +840,14 @@ ComputeIndexAttrs(IndexInfo *indexInfo, else { /* Index expression */ - Node *expr = attribute->expr; + Node *expr = attribute->expr; Assert(expr != NULL); atttype = exprType(expr); attcollation = exprCollation(expr); /* - * Strip any top-level COLLATE clause. This ensures that we treat + * Strip any top-level COLLATE clause. This ensures that we treat * "x COLLATE y" and "(x COLLATE y)" alike. */ while (IsA(expr, CollateExpr)) @@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ ComputeIndexAttrs(IndexInfo *indexInfo, } else { - indexInfo->ii_KeyAttrNumbers[attn] = 0; /* marks expression */ + indexInfo->ii_KeyAttrNumbers[attn] = 0; /* marks expression */ indexInfo->ii_Expressions = lappend(indexInfo->ii_Expressions, expr); @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ ComputeIndexAttrs(IndexInfo *indexInfo, if (contain_subplans(expr)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("cannot use subquery in index expression"))); + errmsg("cannot use subquery in index expression"))); if (contain_agg_clause(expr)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_GROUPING_ERROR), @@ -904,8 +904,8 @@ ComputeIndexAttrs(IndexInfo *indexInfo, /* * Check we have a collation iff it's a collatable type. The only * expected failures here are (1) COLLATE applied to a noncollatable - * type, or (2) index expression had an unresolved collation. But - * we might as well code this to be a complete consistency check. + * type, or (2) index expression had an unresolved collation. But we + * might as well code this to be a complete consistency check. */ if (type_is_collatable(atttype)) { diff --git a/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c b/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c index 68072dd421..aff5ac6ec4 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ OpFamilyCacheLookup(Oid amID, List *opfamilyname, bool missing_ok) if (!HeapTupleIsValid(htup) && !missing_ok) { - HeapTuple amtup; + HeapTuple amtup; amtup = SearchSysCache1(AMOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(amID)); if (!HeapTupleIsValid(amtup)) @@ -134,8 +134,8 @@ OpFamilyCacheLookup(Oid amID, List *opfamilyname, bool missing_ok) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("operator family \"%s\" does not exist for access method \"%s\"", - NameListToString(opfamilyname), - NameStr(((Form_pg_am) GETSTRUCT(amtup))->amname)))); + NameListToString(opfamilyname), + NameStr(((Form_pg_am) GETSTRUCT(amtup))->amname)))); } return htup; @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ OpFamilyCacheLookup(Oid amID, List *opfamilyname, bool missing_ok) /* * get_opfamily_oid - * find an opfamily OID by possibly qualified name + * find an opfamily OID by possibly qualified name * * If not found, returns InvalidOid if missing_ok, else throws error. */ @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ OpClassCacheLookup(Oid amID, List *opclassname, bool missing_ok) if (!HeapTupleIsValid(htup) && !missing_ok) { - HeapTuple amtup; + HeapTuple amtup; amtup = SearchSysCache1(AMOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(amID)); if (!HeapTupleIsValid(amtup)) @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ OpClassCacheLookup(Oid amID, List *opclassname, bool missing_ok) /* * get_opclass_oid - * find an opclass OID by possibly qualified name + * find an opclass OID by possibly qualified name * * If not found, returns InvalidOid if missing_ok, else throws error. */ @@ -1088,11 +1088,11 @@ assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) if (OidIsValid(member->sortfamily)) { /* - * Ordering op, check index supports that. (We could perhaps also + * Ordering op, check index supports that. (We could perhaps also * check that the operator returns a type supported by the sortfamily, * but that seems more trouble than it's worth here. If it does not, - * the operator will never be matchable to any ORDER BY clause, but - * no worse consequences can ensue. Also, trying to check that would + * the operator will never be matchable to any ORDER BY clause, but no + * worse consequences can ensue. Also, trying to check that would * create an ordering hazard during dump/reload: it's possible that * the family has been created but not yet populated with the required * operators.) @@ -1108,8 +1108,8 @@ assignOperTypes(OpFamilyMember *member, Oid amoid, Oid typeoid) if (!pg_am->amcanorderbyop) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_OBJECT_DEFINITION), - errmsg("access method \"%s\" does not support ordering operators", - NameStr(pg_am->amname)))); + errmsg("access method \"%s\" does not support ordering operators", + NameStr(pg_am->amname)))); ReleaseSysCache(amtup); } @@ -1276,7 +1276,7 @@ storeOperators(List *opfamilyname, Oid amoid, foreach(l, operators) { OpFamilyMember *op = (OpFamilyMember *) lfirst(l); - char oppurpose; + char oppurpose; /* * If adding to an existing family, check for conflict with an @@ -1566,7 +1566,7 @@ RemoveOpClass(RemoveOpClassStmt *stmt) { ereport(NOTICE, (errmsg("operator class \"%s\" does not exist for access method \"%s\"", - NameListToString(stmt->opclassname), stmt->amname))); + NameListToString(stmt->opclassname), stmt->amname))); return; } @@ -1617,7 +1617,7 @@ RemoveOpFamily(RemoveOpFamilyStmt *stmt) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("operator family \"%s\" does not exist for access method \"%s\"", - NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); + NameListToString(stmt->opfamilyname), stmt->amname))); return; } @@ -2029,7 +2029,7 @@ AlterOpClassNamespace(List *name, char *access_method, const char *newschema) Oid AlterOpClassNamespace_oid(Oid opclassOid, Oid newNspOid) { - Oid oldNspOid; + Oid oldNspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(OperatorClassRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -2238,7 +2238,7 @@ AlterOpFamilyNamespace(List *name, char *access_method, const char *newschema) Oid AlterOpFamilyNamespace_oid(Oid opfamilyOid, Oid newNspOid) { - Oid oldNspOid; + Oid oldNspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(OperatorFamilyRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c index b4374a62f4..c99de4b240 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c @@ -464,7 +464,8 @@ AlterOperatorNamespace(List *names, List *argtypes, const char *newschema) List *operatorName = names; TypeName *typeName1 = (TypeName *) linitial(argtypes); TypeName *typeName2 = (TypeName *) lsecond(argtypes); - Oid operOid, nspOid; + Oid operOid, + nspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(OperatorRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -490,7 +491,7 @@ AlterOperatorNamespace(List *names, List *argtypes, const char *newschema) Oid AlterOperatorNamespace_oid(Oid operOid, Oid newNspOid) { - Oid oldNspOid; + Oid oldNspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(OperatorRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c index 60aca3ce8e..89086aa371 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/portalcmds.c @@ -255,10 +255,10 @@ PortalCleanup(Portal portal) if (queryDesc) { /* - * Reset the queryDesc before anything else. This prevents us - * from trying to shut down the executor twice, in case of an - * error below. The transaction abort mechanisms will take care - * of resource cleanup in such a case. + * Reset the queryDesc before anything else. This prevents us from + * trying to shut down the executor twice, in case of an error below. + * The transaction abort mechanisms will take care of resource cleanup + * in such a case. */ portal->queryDesc = NULL; diff --git a/src/backend/commands/prepare.c b/src/backend/commands/prepare.c index adbf5872f3..dfa2ab0026 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/prepare.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/prepare.c @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ EvaluateParams(PreparedStatement *pstmt, List *params, /* sizeof(ParamListInfoData) includes the first array element */ paramLI = (ParamListInfo) palloc(sizeof(ParamListInfoData) + - (num_params - 1) *sizeof(ParamExternData)); + (num_params - 1) * sizeof(ParamExternData)); /* we have static list of params, so no hooks needed */ paramLI->paramFetch = NULL; paramLI->paramFetchArg = NULL; diff --git a/src/backend/commands/seclabel.c b/src/backend/commands/seclabel.c index 1c96b005d7..7afb7139a6 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/seclabel.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/seclabel.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* ------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * seclabel.c - * routines to support security label feature. + * routines to support security label feature. * * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2011, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ typedef struct { const char *provider_name; - check_object_relabel_type hook; + check_object_relabel_type hook; } LabelProvider; static List *label_provider_list = NIL; @@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ void ExecSecLabelStmt(SecLabelStmt *stmt) { LabelProvider *provider = NULL; - ObjectAddress address; - Relation relation; - ListCell *lc; + ObjectAddress address; + Relation relation; + ListCell *lc; /* * Find the named label provider, or if none specified, check whether @@ -55,16 +55,16 @@ ExecSecLabelStmt(SecLabelStmt *stmt) if (label_provider_list == NIL) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("no security label providers have been loaded"))); + errmsg("no security label providers have been loaded"))); if (lnext(list_head(label_provider_list)) != NULL) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("must specify provider when multiple security label providers have been loaded"))); + errmsg("must specify provider when multiple security label providers have been loaded"))); provider = (LabelProvider *) linitial(label_provider_list); } else { - foreach (lc, label_provider_list) + foreach(lc, label_provider_list) { LabelProvider *lp = lfirst(lc); @@ -82,10 +82,10 @@ ExecSecLabelStmt(SecLabelStmt *stmt) } /* - * Translate the parser representation which identifies this object - * into an ObjectAddress. get_object_address() will throw an error if - * the object does not exist, and will also acquire a lock on the - * target to guard against concurrent modifications. + * Translate the parser representation which identifies this object into + * an ObjectAddress. get_object_address() will throw an error if the + * object does not exist, and will also acquire a lock on the target to + * guard against concurrent modifications. */ address = get_object_address(stmt->objtype, stmt->objname, stmt->objargs, &relation, ShareUpdateExclusiveLock); @@ -98,6 +98,7 @@ ExecSecLabelStmt(SecLabelStmt *stmt) switch (stmt->objtype) { case OBJECT_COLUMN: + /* * Allow security labels only on columns of tables, views, * composite types, and foreign tables (which are the only @@ -117,7 +118,7 @@ ExecSecLabelStmt(SecLabelStmt *stmt) } /* Provider gets control here, may throw ERROR to veto new label. */ - (*provider->hook)(&address, stmt->label); + (*provider->hook) (&address, stmt->label); /* Apply new label. */ SetSecurityLabel(&address, provider->provider_name, stmt->label); @@ -140,8 +141,8 @@ char * GetSecurityLabel(const ObjectAddress *object, const char *provider) { Relation pg_seclabel; - ScanKeyData keys[4]; - SysScanDesc scan; + ScanKeyData keys[4]; + SysScanDesc scan; HeapTuple tuple; Datum datum; bool isnull; @@ -196,8 +197,8 @@ SetSecurityLabel(const ObjectAddress *object, const char *provider, const char *label) { Relation pg_seclabel; - ScanKeyData keys[4]; - SysScanDesc scan; + ScanKeyData keys[4]; + SysScanDesc scan; HeapTuple oldtup; HeapTuple newtup = NULL; Datum values[Natts_pg_seclabel]; @@ -281,8 +282,8 @@ void DeleteSecurityLabel(const ObjectAddress *object) { Relation pg_seclabel; - ScanKeyData skey[3]; - SysScanDesc scan; + ScanKeyData skey[3]; + SysScanDesc scan; HeapTuple oldtup; int nkeys; @@ -323,8 +324,8 @@ DeleteSecurityLabel(const ObjectAddress *object) void register_label_provider(const char *provider_name, check_object_relabel_type hook) { - LabelProvider *provider; - MemoryContext oldcxt; + LabelProvider *provider; + MemoryContext oldcxt; oldcxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(TopMemoryContext); provider = palloc(sizeof(LabelProvider)); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/sequence.c b/src/backend/commands/sequence.c index bfa94a0c11..6a91a102dc 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/sequence.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/sequence.c @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ ResetSequence(Oid seq_relid) seq->log_cnt = 1; /* - * Create a new storage file for the sequence. We want to keep the + * Create a new storage file for the sequence. We want to keep the * sequence's relfrozenxid at 0, since it won't contain any unfrozen XIDs. */ RelationSetNewRelfilenode(seq_rel, InvalidTransactionId); @@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ init_sequence(Oid relid, SeqTable *p_elm, Relation *p_rel) /* * If the sequence has been transactionally replaced since we last saw it, - * discard any cached-but-unissued values. We do not touch the currval() + * discard any cached-but-unissued values. We do not touch the currval() * state, however. */ if (seqrel->rd_rel->relfilenode != elm->filenode) diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c b/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c index 886b656b43..790bc2a521 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c @@ -286,9 +286,9 @@ static void ATWrongRelkindError(Relation rel, int allowed_targets); static void ATSimpleRecursion(List **wqueue, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd, bool recurse, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATTypedTableRecursion(List **wqueue, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd, - LOCKMODE lockmode); + LOCKMODE lockmode); static List *find_typed_table_dependencies(Oid typeOid, const char *typeName, - DropBehavior behavior); + DropBehavior behavior); static void ATPrepAddColumn(List **wqueue, Relation rel, bool recurse, bool recursing, AlterTableCmd *cmd, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATExecAddColumn(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ static void ATExecSetOptions(Relation rel, const char *colName, static void ATExecSetStorage(Relation rel, const char *colName, Node *newValue, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATPrepDropColumn(List **wqueue, Relation rel, bool recurse, bool recursing, - AlterTableCmd *cmd, LOCKMODE lockmode); + AlterTableCmd *cmd, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATExecDropColumn(List **wqueue, Relation rel, const char *colName, DropBehavior behavior, bool recurse, bool recursing, @@ -320,9 +320,9 @@ static void ATExecAddIndex(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, IndexStmt *stmt, bool is_rebuild, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATExecAddConstraint(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, - Constraint *newConstraint, bool recurse, LOCKMODE lockmode); + Constraint *newConstraint, bool recurse, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATExecAddIndexConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, - IndexStmt *stmt, LOCKMODE lockmode); + IndexStmt *stmt, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATAddCheckConstraint(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, Constraint *constr, @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ static void ATPrepAlterColumnType(List **wqueue, AlterTableCmd *cmd, LOCKMODE lockmode); static bool ATColumnChangeRequiresRewrite(Node *expr, AttrNumber varattno); static void ATExecAlterColumnType(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, - AlterTableCmd *cmd, LOCKMODE lockmode); + AlterTableCmd *cmd, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATPostAlterTypeCleanup(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATPostAlterTypeParse(char *cmd, List **wqueue, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void change_owner_recurse_to_sequences(Oid relationOid, @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ static void ATPrepSetTableSpace(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, static void ATExecSetTableSpace(Oid tableOid, Oid newTableSpace, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATExecSetRelOptions(Relation rel, List *defList, bool isReset, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(Relation rel, char *trigname, - char fires_when, bool skip_system, LOCKMODE lockmode); + char fires_when, bool skip_system, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATExecEnableDisableRule(Relation rel, char *rulename, char fires_when, LOCKMODE lockmode); static void ATPrepAddInherit(Relation child_rel); @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ DefineRelation(CreateStmt *stmt, char relkind, Oid ownerId) /* * Check consistency of arguments */ - if (stmt->oncommit != ONCOMMIT_NOOP + if (stmt->oncommit != ONCOMMIT_NOOP && stmt->relation->relpersistence != RELPERSISTENCE_TEMP) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_TABLE_DEFINITION), @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ DefineRelation(CreateStmt *stmt, char relkind, Oid ownerId) if (relkind == RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), - errmsg("default values on foreign tables are not supported"))); + errmsg("default values on foreign tables are not supported"))); Assert(colDef->cooked_default == NULL); @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ DropErrorMsgWrongType(const char *relname, char wrongkind, char rightkind) /* * RemoveRelations * Implements DROP TABLE, DROP INDEX, DROP SEQUENCE, DROP VIEW, - * DROP FOREIGN TABLE + * DROP FOREIGN TABLE */ void RemoveRelations(DropStmt *drop) @@ -1454,11 +1454,11 @@ MergeAttributes(List *schema, List *supers, char relpersistence, if (defCollId != attribute->attcollation) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_COLLATION_MISMATCH), - errmsg("inherited column \"%s\" has a collation conflict", - attributeName), + errmsg("inherited column \"%s\" has a collation conflict", + attributeName), errdetail("\"%s\" versus \"%s\"", get_collation_name(defCollId), - get_collation_name(attribute->attcollation)))); + get_collation_name(attribute->attcollation)))); /* Copy storage parameter */ if (def->storage == 0) @@ -2061,8 +2061,8 @@ renameatt_internal(Oid myrelid, relkind != RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), - errmsg("\"%s\" is not a table, view, composite type, index or foreign table", - RelationGetRelationName(targetrelation)))); + errmsg("\"%s\" is not a table, view, composite type, index or foreign table", + RelationGetRelationName(targetrelation)))); /* * permissions checking. only the owner of a class can change its schema. @@ -2138,7 +2138,7 @@ renameatt_internal(Oid myrelid, ListCell *lo; child_oids = find_typed_table_dependencies(targetrelation->rd_rel->reltype, - RelationGetRelationName(targetrelation), + RelationGetRelationName(targetrelation), behavior); foreach(lo, child_oids) @@ -2211,11 +2211,11 @@ void renameatt(Oid myrelid, RenameStmt *stmt) { renameatt_internal(myrelid, - stmt->subname, /* old att name */ - stmt->newname, /* new att name */ - interpretInhOption(stmt->relation->inhOpt), /* recursive? */ - false, /* recursing? */ - 0, /* expected inhcount */ + stmt->subname, /* old att name */ + stmt->newname, /* new att name */ + interpretInhOption(stmt->relation->inhOpt), /* recursive? */ + false, /* recursing? */ + 0, /* expected inhcount */ stmt->behavior); } @@ -2460,7 +2460,7 @@ void AlterTable(AlterTableStmt *stmt) { Relation rel; - LOCKMODE lockmode = AlterTableGetLockLevel(stmt->cmds); + LOCKMODE lockmode = AlterTableGetLockLevel(stmt->cmds); /* * Acquire same level of lock as already acquired during parsing. @@ -2531,7 +2531,7 @@ AlterTable(AlterTableStmt *stmt) } ATController(rel, stmt->cmds, interpretInhOption(stmt->relation->inhOpt), - lockmode); + lockmode); } /* @@ -2549,7 +2549,7 @@ void AlterTableInternal(Oid relid, List *cmds, bool recurse) { Relation rel; - LOCKMODE lockmode = AlterTableGetLockLevel(cmds); + LOCKMODE lockmode = AlterTableGetLockLevel(cmds); rel = relation_open(relid, lockmode); @@ -2581,31 +2581,33 @@ LOCKMODE AlterTableGetLockLevel(List *cmds) { ListCell *lcmd; - LOCKMODE lockmode = ShareUpdateExclusiveLock; + LOCKMODE lockmode = ShareUpdateExclusiveLock; foreach(lcmd, cmds) { AlterTableCmd *cmd = (AlterTableCmd *) lfirst(lcmd); - LOCKMODE cmd_lockmode = AccessExclusiveLock; /* default for compiler */ + LOCKMODE cmd_lockmode = AccessExclusiveLock; /* default for compiler */ switch (cmd->subtype) { - /* - * Need AccessExclusiveLock for these subcommands because they - * affect or potentially affect both read and write operations. - * - * New subcommand types should be added here by default. - */ - case AT_AddColumn: /* may rewrite heap, in some cases and visible to SELECT */ - case AT_DropColumn: /* change visible to SELECT */ + /* + * Need AccessExclusiveLock for these subcommands because they + * affect or potentially affect both read and write + * operations. + * + * New subcommand types should be added here by default. + */ + case AT_AddColumn: /* may rewrite heap, in some cases and visible + * to SELECT */ + case AT_DropColumn: /* change visible to SELECT */ case AT_AddColumnToView: /* CREATE VIEW */ case AT_AlterColumnType: /* must rewrite heap */ case AT_DropConstraint: /* as DROP INDEX */ - case AT_AddOids: /* must rewrite heap */ - case AT_DropOids: /* calls AT_DropColumn */ + case AT_AddOids: /* must rewrite heap */ + case AT_DropOids: /* calls AT_DropColumn */ case AT_EnableAlwaysRule: /* may change SELECT rules */ case AT_EnableReplicaRule: /* may change SELECT rules */ - case AT_EnableRule: /* may change SELECT rules */ + case AT_EnableRule: /* may change SELECT rules */ case AT_DisableRule: /* may change SELECT rules */ case AT_ChangeOwner: /* change visible to SELECT */ case AT_SetTableSpace: /* must rewrite heap */ @@ -2615,12 +2617,12 @@ AlterTableGetLockLevel(List *cmds) cmd_lockmode = AccessExclusiveLock; break; - /* - * These subcommands affect write operations only. - */ + /* + * These subcommands affect write operations only. + */ case AT_ColumnDefault: - case AT_ProcessedConstraint: /* becomes AT_AddConstraint */ - case AT_AddConstraintRecurse: /* becomes AT_AddConstraint */ + case AT_ProcessedConstraint: /* becomes AT_AddConstraint */ + case AT_AddConstraintRecurse: /* becomes AT_AddConstraint */ case AT_EnableTrig: case AT_EnableAlwaysTrig: case AT_EnableReplicaTrig: @@ -2629,7 +2631,7 @@ AlterTableGetLockLevel(List *cmds) case AT_DisableTrig: case AT_DisableTrigAll: case AT_DisableTrigUser: - case AT_AddIndex: /* from ADD CONSTRAINT */ + case AT_AddIndex: /* from ADD CONSTRAINT */ case AT_AddIndexConstraint: cmd_lockmode = ShareRowExclusiveLock; break; @@ -2644,14 +2646,17 @@ AlterTableGetLockLevel(List *cmds) case CONSTR_EXCLUSION: case CONSTR_PRIMARY: case CONSTR_UNIQUE: + /* * Cases essentially the same as CREATE INDEX. We - * could reduce the lock strength to ShareLock if we - * can work out how to allow concurrent catalog updates. + * could reduce the lock strength to ShareLock if + * we can work out how to allow concurrent catalog + * updates. */ cmd_lockmode = ShareRowExclusiveLock; break; case CONSTR_FOREIGN: + /* * We add triggers to both tables when we add a * Foreign Key, so the lock level must be at least @@ -2666,26 +2671,29 @@ AlterTableGetLockLevel(List *cmds) } break; - /* - * These subcommands affect inheritance behaviour. Queries started before us - * will continue to see the old inheritance behaviour, while queries started - * after we commit will see new behaviour. No need to prevent reads or writes - * to the subtable while we hook it up though. In both cases the parent table - * is locked with AccessShareLock. - */ + /* + * These subcommands affect inheritance behaviour. Queries + * started before us will continue to see the old inheritance + * behaviour, while queries started after we commit will see + * new behaviour. No need to prevent reads or writes to the + * subtable while we hook it up though. In both cases the + * parent table is locked with AccessShareLock. + */ case AT_AddInherit: case AT_DropInherit: cmd_lockmode = ShareUpdateExclusiveLock; break; - /* - * These subcommands affect general strategies for performance and maintenance, - * though don't change the semantic results from normal data reads and writes. - * Delaying an ALTER TABLE behind currently active writes only delays the point - * where the new strategy begins to take effect, so there is no benefit in waiting. - * In this case the minimum restriction applies: we don't currently allow - * concurrent catalog updates. - */ + /* + * These subcommands affect general strategies for performance + * and maintenance, though don't change the semantic results + * from normal data reads and writes. Delaying an ALTER TABLE + * behind currently active writes only delays the point where + * the new strategy begins to take effect, so there is no + * benefit in waiting. In this case the minimum restriction + * applies: we don't currently allow concurrent catalog + * updates. + */ case AT_SetStatistics: case AT_ClusterOn: case AT_DropCluster: @@ -2698,7 +2706,7 @@ AlterTableGetLockLevel(List *cmds) cmd_lockmode = ShareUpdateExclusiveLock; break; - default: /* oops */ + default: /* oops */ elog(ERROR, "unrecognized alter table type: %d", (int) cmd->subtype); break; @@ -2773,7 +2781,7 @@ ATPrepCmd(List **wqueue, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd, { case AT_AddColumn: /* ADD COLUMN */ ATSimplePermissions(rel, - ATT_TABLE|ATT_COMPOSITE_TYPE|ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE); + ATT_TABLE | ATT_COMPOSITE_TYPE | ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE); ATPrepAddColumn(wqueue, rel, recurse, recursing, cmd, lockmode); /* Recursion occurs during execution phase */ pass = AT_PASS_ADD_COL; @@ -2793,19 +2801,19 @@ ATPrepCmd(List **wqueue, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd, * substitutes default values into INSERTs before it expands * rules. */ - ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE|ATT_VIEW); + ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE | ATT_VIEW); ATSimpleRecursion(wqueue, rel, cmd, recurse, lockmode); /* No command-specific prep needed */ pass = cmd->def ? AT_PASS_ADD_CONSTR : AT_PASS_DROP; break; case AT_DropNotNull: /* ALTER COLUMN DROP NOT NULL */ - ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE|ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE); + ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE | ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE); ATSimpleRecursion(wqueue, rel, cmd, recurse, lockmode); /* No command-specific prep needed */ pass = AT_PASS_DROP; break; case AT_SetNotNull: /* ALTER COLUMN SET NOT NULL */ - ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE|ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE); + ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE | ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE); ATSimpleRecursion(wqueue, rel, cmd, recurse, lockmode); /* No command-specific prep needed */ pass = AT_PASS_ADD_CONSTR; @@ -2818,7 +2826,7 @@ ATPrepCmd(List **wqueue, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd, break; case AT_SetOptions: /* ALTER COLUMN SET ( options ) */ case AT_ResetOptions: /* ALTER COLUMN RESET ( options ) */ - ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE|ATT_INDEX); + ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE | ATT_INDEX); /* This command never recurses */ pass = AT_PASS_MISC; break; @@ -2830,7 +2838,7 @@ ATPrepCmd(List **wqueue, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd, break; case AT_DropColumn: /* DROP COLUMN */ ATSimplePermissions(rel, - ATT_TABLE|ATT_COMPOSITE_TYPE|ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE); + ATT_TABLE | ATT_COMPOSITE_TYPE | ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE); ATPrepDropColumn(wqueue, rel, recurse, recursing, cmd, lockmode); /* Recursion occurs during execution phase */ pass = AT_PASS_DROP; @@ -2849,7 +2857,7 @@ ATPrepCmd(List **wqueue, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd, cmd->subtype = AT_AddConstraintRecurse; pass = AT_PASS_ADD_CONSTR; break; - case AT_AddIndexConstraint: /* ADD CONSTRAINT USING INDEX */ + case AT_AddIndexConstraint: /* ADD CONSTRAINT USING INDEX */ ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE); /* This command never recurses */ /* No command-specific prep needed */ @@ -2865,7 +2873,7 @@ ATPrepCmd(List **wqueue, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd, break; case AT_AlterColumnType: /* ALTER COLUMN TYPE */ ATSimplePermissions(rel, - ATT_TABLE|ATT_COMPOSITE_TYPE|ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE); + ATT_TABLE | ATT_COMPOSITE_TYPE | ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE); /* Performs own recursion */ ATPrepAlterColumnType(wqueue, tab, rel, recurse, recursing, cmd, lockmode); pass = AT_PASS_ALTER_TYPE; @@ -2904,14 +2912,14 @@ ATPrepCmd(List **wqueue, Relation rel, AlterTableCmd *cmd, pass = AT_PASS_DROP; break; case AT_SetTableSpace: /* SET TABLESPACE */ - ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE|ATT_INDEX); + ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE | ATT_INDEX); /* This command never recurses */ ATPrepSetTableSpace(tab, rel, cmd->name, lockmode); pass = AT_PASS_MISC; /* doesn't actually matter */ break; case AT_SetRelOptions: /* SET (...) */ case AT_ResetRelOptions: /* RESET (...) */ - ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE|ATT_INDEX); + ATSimplePermissions(rel, ATT_TABLE | ATT_INDEX); /* This command never recurses */ /* No command-specific prep needed */ pass = AT_PASS_MISC; @@ -3072,11 +3080,11 @@ ATExecCmd(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, break; case AT_DropColumn: /* DROP COLUMN */ ATExecDropColumn(wqueue, rel, cmd->name, - cmd->behavior, false, false, cmd->missing_ok, lockmode); + cmd->behavior, false, false, cmd->missing_ok, lockmode); break; case AT_DropColumnRecurse: /* DROP COLUMN with recursion */ ATExecDropColumn(wqueue, rel, cmd->name, - cmd->behavior, true, false, cmd->missing_ok, lockmode); + cmd->behavior, true, false, cmd->missing_ok, lockmode); break; case AT_AddIndex: /* ADD INDEX */ ATExecAddIndex(tab, rel, (IndexStmt *) cmd->def, false, lockmode); @@ -3092,7 +3100,7 @@ ATExecCmd(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, ATExecAddConstraint(wqueue, tab, rel, (Constraint *) cmd->def, true, lockmode); break; - case AT_AddIndexConstraint: /* ADD CONSTRAINT USING INDEX */ + case AT_AddIndexConstraint: /* ADD CONSTRAINT USING INDEX */ ATExecAddIndexConstraint(tab, rel, (IndexStmt *) cmd->def, lockmode); break; case AT_ValidateConstraint: @@ -3156,7 +3164,7 @@ ATExecCmd(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, case AT_EnableTrig: /* ENABLE TRIGGER name */ ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false, lockmode); + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false, lockmode); break; case AT_EnableAlwaysTrig: /* ENABLE ALWAYS TRIGGER name */ ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, @@ -3164,7 +3172,7 @@ ATExecCmd(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, break; case AT_EnableReplicaTrig: /* ENABLE REPLICA TRIGGER name */ ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_REPLICA, false, lockmode); + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_REPLICA, false, lockmode); break; case AT_DisableTrig: /* DISABLE TRIGGER name */ ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, cmd->name, @@ -3172,7 +3180,7 @@ ATExecCmd(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, break; case AT_EnableTrigAll: /* ENABLE TRIGGER ALL */ ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false, lockmode); + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, false, lockmode); break; case AT_DisableTrigAll: /* DISABLE TRIGGER ALL */ ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, @@ -3180,7 +3188,7 @@ ATExecCmd(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, break; case AT_EnableTrigUser: /* ENABLE TRIGGER USER */ ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, - TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, true, lockmode); + TRIGGER_FIRES_ON_ORIGIN, true, lockmode); break; case AT_DisableTrigUser: /* DISABLE TRIGGER USER */ ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(rel, NULL, @@ -3254,8 +3262,8 @@ ATRewriteTables(List **wqueue, LOCKMODE lockmode) * (Eventually we'll probably need to check for composite type * dependencies even when we're just scanning the table without a * rewrite, but at the moment a composite type does not enforce any - * constraints, so it's not necessary/appropriate to enforce them - * just during ALTER.) + * constraints, so it's not necessary/appropriate to enforce them just + * during ALTER.) */ if (tab->newvals != NIL || tab->rewrite) { @@ -3386,8 +3394,8 @@ ATRewriteTables(List **wqueue, LOCKMODE lockmode) con->conid); /* - * No need to mark the constraint row as validated, - * we did that when we inserted the row earlier. + * No need to mark the constraint row as validated, we did + * that when we inserted the row earlier. */ heap_close(refrel, NoLock); @@ -3723,7 +3731,7 @@ ATGetQueueEntry(List **wqueue, Relation rel) static void ATSimplePermissions(Relation rel, int allowed_targets) { - int actual_target; + int actual_target; switch (rel->rd_rel->relkind) { @@ -3779,16 +3787,16 @@ ATWrongRelkindError(Relation rel, int allowed_targets) case ATT_TABLE: msg = _("\"%s\" is not a table"); break; - case ATT_TABLE|ATT_INDEX: + case ATT_TABLE | ATT_INDEX: msg = _("\"%s\" is not a table or index"); break; - case ATT_TABLE|ATT_VIEW: + case ATT_TABLE | ATT_VIEW: msg = _("\"%s\" is not a table or view"); break; - case ATT_TABLE|ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE: + case ATT_TABLE | ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE: msg = _("\"%s\" is not a table or foreign table"); break; - case ATT_TABLE|ATT_COMPOSITE_TYPE|ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE: + case ATT_TABLE | ATT_COMPOSITE_TYPE | ATT_FOREIGN_TABLE: msg = _("\"%s\" is not a table, composite type, or foreign table"); break; case ATT_VIEW: @@ -4032,7 +4040,7 @@ find_typed_table_dependencies(Oid typeOid, const char *typeName, DropBehavior be (errcode(ERRCODE_DEPENDENT_OBJECTS_STILL_EXIST), errmsg("cannot alter type \"%s\" because it is the type of a typed table", typeName), - errhint("Use ALTER ... CASCADE to alter the typed tables too."))); + errhint("Use ALTER ... CASCADE to alter the typed tables too."))); else result = lappend_oid(result, HeapTupleGetOid(tuple)); } @@ -4103,9 +4111,9 @@ ATExecAddColumn(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, /* * Are we adding the column to a recursion child? If so, check whether to - * merge with an existing definition for the column. If we do merge, - * we must not recurse. Children will already have the column, and - * recursing into them would mess up attinhcount. + * merge with an existing definition for the column. If we do merge, we + * must not recurse. Children will already have the column, and recursing + * into them would mess up attinhcount. */ if (colDef->inhcount > 0) { @@ -4133,10 +4141,10 @@ ATExecAddColumn(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_COLLATION_MISMATCH), errmsg("child table \"%s\" has different collation for column \"%s\"", - RelationGetRelationName(rel), colDef->colname), + RelationGetRelationName(rel), colDef->colname), errdetail("\"%s\" versus \"%s\"", get_collation_name(ccollid), - get_collation_name(childatt->attcollation)))); + get_collation_name(childatt->attcollation)))); /* If it's OID, child column must actually be OID */ if (isOid && childatt->attnum != ObjectIdAttributeNumber) @@ -4265,7 +4273,7 @@ ATExecAddColumn(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, if (relkind == RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), - errmsg("default values on foreign tables are not supported"))); + errmsg("default values on foreign tables are not supported"))); rawEnt = (RawColumnDefault *) palloc(sizeof(RawColumnDefault)); rawEnt->attnum = attribute.attnum; @@ -5170,10 +5178,11 @@ ATExecAddIndexConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, elog(ERROR, "index \"%s\" is not unique", indexName); /* - * Determine name to assign to constraint. We require a constraint to + * Determine name to assign to constraint. We require a constraint to * have the same name as the underlying index; therefore, use the index's - * existing name as the default constraint name, and if the user explicitly - * gives some other name for the constraint, rename the index to match. + * existing name as the default constraint name, and if the user + * explicitly gives some other name for the constraint, rename the index + * to match. */ constraintName = stmt->idxname; if (constraintName == NULL) @@ -5216,7 +5225,7 @@ ATExecAddIndexConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, */ static void ATExecAddConstraint(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, - Constraint *newConstraint, bool recurse, LOCKMODE lockmode) + Constraint *newConstraint, bool recurse, LOCKMODE lockmode) { Assert(IsA(newConstraint, Constraint)); @@ -5337,9 +5346,9 @@ ATAddCheckConstraint(List **wqueue, AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, /* * If the constraint got merged with an existing constraint, we're done. - * We mustn't recurse to child tables in this case, because they've already - * got the constraint, and visiting them again would lead to an incorrect - * value for coninhcount. + * We mustn't recurse to child tables in this case, because they've + * already got the constraint, and visiting them again would lead to an + * incorrect value for coninhcount. */ if (newcons == NIL) return; @@ -5655,8 +5664,8 @@ ATAddForeignKeyConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, /* * Tell Phase 3 to check that the constraint is satisfied by existing rows - * We can skip this during table creation or if requested explicitly - * by specifying NOT VALID on an alter table statement. + * We can skip this during table creation or if requested explicitly by + * specifying NOT VALID on an alter table statement. */ if (!fkconstraint->skip_validation) { @@ -5718,8 +5727,8 @@ ATExecValidateConstraint(Relation rel, const char *constrName) if (!found) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), - errmsg("foreign key constraint \"%s\" of relation \"%s\" does not exist", - constrName, RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); + errmsg("foreign key constraint \"%s\" of relation \"%s\" does not exist", + constrName, RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); if (!con->convalidated) { @@ -5729,17 +5738,16 @@ ATExecValidateConstraint(Relation rel, const char *constrName) Relation refrel; /* - * Triggers are already in place on both tables, so a - * concurrent write that alters the result here is not - * possible. Normally we can run a query here to do the - * validation, which would only require AccessShareLock. - * In some cases, it is possible that we might need to - * fire triggers to perform the check, so we take a lock - * at RowShareLock level just in case. + * Triggers are already in place on both tables, so a concurrent write + * that alters the result here is not possible. Normally we can run a + * query here to do the validation, which would only require + * AccessShareLock. In some cases, it is possible that we might need + * to fire triggers to perform the check, so we take a lock at + * RowShareLock level just in case. */ refrel = heap_open(con->confrelid, RowShareLock); - validateForeignKeyConstraint((char *)constrName, rel, refrel, + validateForeignKeyConstraint((char *) constrName, rel, refrel, con->conindid, conid); @@ -6571,12 +6579,12 @@ ATPrepAlterColumnType(List **wqueue, if (tab->relkind == RELKIND_RELATION) { /* - * Set up an expression to transform the old data value to the new type. - * If a USING option was given, transform and use that expression, else - * just take the old value and try to coerce it. We do this first so that - * type incompatibility can be detected before we waste effort, and - * because we need the expression to be parsed against the original table - * rowtype. + * Set up an expression to transform the old data value to the new + * type. If a USING option was given, transform and use that + * expression, else just take the old value and try to coerce it. We + * do this first so that type incompatibility can be detected before + * we waste effort, and because we need the expression to be parsed + * against the original table rowtype. */ if (transform) { @@ -6596,13 +6604,13 @@ ATPrepAlterColumnType(List **wqueue, if (expression_returns_set(transform)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), - errmsg("transform expression must not return a set"))); + errmsg("transform expression must not return a set"))); /* No subplans or aggregates, either... */ if (pstate->p_hasSubLinks) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("cannot use subquery in transform expression"))); + errmsg("cannot use subquery in transform expression"))); if (pstate->p_hasAggs) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_GROUPING_ERROR), @@ -6615,7 +6623,7 @@ ATPrepAlterColumnType(List **wqueue, else { transform = (Node *) makeVar(1, attnum, - attTup->atttypid, attTup->atttypmod, attTup->attcollation, + attTup->atttypid, attTup->atttypmod, attTup->attcollation, 0); } @@ -6649,14 +6657,14 @@ ATPrepAlterColumnType(List **wqueue, else if (transform) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), - errmsg("ALTER TYPE USING is only supported on plain tables"))); + errmsg("ALTER TYPE USING is only supported on plain tables"))); if (tab->relkind == RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE || tab->relkind == RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE) { /* - * For composite types, do this check now. Tables will check - * it later when the table is being rewritten. + * For composite types, do this check now. Tables will check it later + * when the table is being rewritten. */ find_composite_type_dependencies(rel->rd_rel->reltype, rel, NULL); } @@ -6699,7 +6707,7 @@ ATColumnChangeRequiresRewrite(Node *expr, AttrNumber varattno) for (;;) { /* only one varno, so no need to check that */ - if (IsA(expr, Var) && ((Var *) expr)->varattno == varattno) + if (IsA(expr, Var) &&((Var *) expr)->varattno == varattno) return false; else if (IsA(expr, RelabelType)) expr = (Node *) ((RelabelType *) expr)->arg; @@ -6924,13 +6932,14 @@ ATExecAlterColumnType(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel, break; case OCLASS_TRIGGER: + /* * A trigger can depend on a column because the column is * specified as an update target, or because the column is * used in the trigger's WHEN condition. The first case would * not require any extra work, but the second case would * require updating the WHEN expression, which will take a - * significant amount of new code. Since we can't easily tell + * significant amount of new code. Since we can't easily tell * which case applies, we punt for both. FIXME someday. */ ereport(ERROR, @@ -7940,7 +7949,7 @@ copy_relation_data(SMgrRelation src, SMgrRelation dst, */ static void ATExecEnableDisableTrigger(Relation rel, char *trigname, - char fires_when, bool skip_system, LOCKMODE lockmode) + char fires_when, bool skip_system, LOCKMODE lockmode) { EnableDisableTrigger(rel, trigname, fires_when, skip_system); } @@ -8558,18 +8567,18 @@ ATExecDropInherit(Relation rel, RangeVar *parent, LOCKMODE lockmode) static void ATExecGenericOptions(Relation rel, List *options) { - Relation ftrel; - ForeignServer *server; + Relation ftrel; + ForeignServer *server; ForeignDataWrapper *fdw; - HeapTuple tuple; - bool isnull; - Datum repl_val[Natts_pg_foreign_table]; - bool repl_null[Natts_pg_foreign_table]; - bool repl_repl[Natts_pg_foreign_table]; - Datum datum; - Form_pg_foreign_table tableform; - - if (options == NIL) + HeapTuple tuple; + bool isnull; + Datum repl_val[Natts_pg_foreign_table]; + bool repl_null[Natts_pg_foreign_table]; + bool repl_repl[Natts_pg_foreign_table]; + Datum datum; + Form_pg_foreign_table tableform; + + if (options == NIL) return; ftrel = heap_open(ForeignTableRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -8579,7 +8588,7 @@ ATExecGenericOptions(Relation rel, List *options) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("foreign table \"%s\" does not exist", - RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); + RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); tableform = (Form_pg_foreign_table) GETSTRUCT(tuple); server = GetForeignServer(tableform->ftserver); fdw = GetForeignDataWrapper(server->fdwid); @@ -8718,8 +8727,8 @@ AlterTableNamespace(RangeVar *relation, const char *newschema, default: ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), - errmsg("\"%s\" is not a table, view, sequence, or foreign table", - RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); + errmsg("\"%s\" is not a table, view, sequence, or foreign table", + RelationGetRelationName(rel)))); } /* get schema OID and check its permissions */ @@ -8836,7 +8845,7 @@ AlterIndexNamespaces(Relation classRel, Relation rel, */ static void AlterSeqNamespaces(Relation classRel, Relation rel, - Oid oldNspOid, Oid newNspOid, const char *newNspName, LOCKMODE lockmode) + Oid oldNspOid, Oid newNspOid, const char *newNspName, LOCKMODE lockmode) { Relation depRel; SysScanDesc scan; diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c b/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c index 42a704beb1..3024dc4b64 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c @@ -559,7 +559,7 @@ create_tablespace_directories(const char *location, const Oid tablespaceoid) (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_FILE), errmsg("directory \"%s\" does not exist", location), InRecovery ? errhint("Create this directory for the tablespace before " - "restarting the server."): 0)); + "restarting the server.") : 0)); else ereport(ERROR, (errcode_for_file_access(), @@ -573,8 +573,8 @@ create_tablespace_directories(const char *location, const Oid tablespaceoid) /* * Our theory for replaying a CREATE is to forcibly drop the target - * subdirectory if present, and then recreate it. This may be - * more work than needed, but it is simple to implement. + * subdirectory if present, and then recreate it. This may be more + * work than needed, but it is simple to implement. */ if (stat(location_with_version_dir, &st) == 0 && S_ISDIR(st.st_mode)) { @@ -1353,10 +1353,10 @@ get_tablespace_oid(const char *tablespacename, bool missing_ok) heap_close(rel, AccessShareLock); if (!OidIsValid(result) && !missing_ok) - ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), - errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" does not exist", - tablespacename))); + ereport(ERROR, + (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), + errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" does not exist", + tablespacename))); return result; } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/trigger.c b/src/backend/commands/trigger.c index 329d4d95f1..6b1ade8990 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/trigger.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/trigger.c @@ -144,11 +144,11 @@ CreateTrigger(CreateTrigStmt *stmt, const char *queryString, referenced; /* - * ShareRowExclusiveLock is sufficient to prevent concurrent write activity - * to the relation, and thus to lock out any operations that might want to - * fire triggers on the relation. If we had ON SELECT triggers we would - * need to take an AccessExclusiveLock to add one of those, just as we do - * with ON SELECT rules. + * ShareRowExclusiveLock is sufficient to prevent concurrent write + * activity to the relation, and thus to lock out any operations that + * might want to fire triggers on the relation. If we had ON SELECT + * triggers we would need to take an AccessExclusiveLock to add one of + * those, just as we do with ON SELECT rules. */ rel = heap_openrv(stmt->relation, ShareRowExclusiveLock); @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ CreateTrigger(CreateTrigStmt *stmt, const char *queryString, if (stmt->whenClause) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("INSTEAD OF triggers cannot have WHEN conditions"))); + errmsg("INSTEAD OF triggers cannot have WHEN conditions"))); if (stmt->columns != NIL) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), @@ -480,8 +480,8 @@ CreateTrigger(CreateTrigStmt *stmt, const char *queryString, * can skip this for internally generated triggers, since the name * modification above should be sufficient. * - * NOTE that this is cool only because we have ShareRowExclusiveLock on the - * relation, so the trigger set won't be changing underneath us. + * NOTE that this is cool only because we have ShareRowExclusiveLock on + * the relation, so the trigger set won't be changing underneath us. */ if (!isInternal) { @@ -1036,8 +1036,8 @@ DropTrigger(Oid relid, const char *trigname, DropBehavior behavior, if (!OidIsValid(object.objectId)) { ereport(NOTICE, - (errmsg("trigger \"%s\" for table \"%s\" does not exist, skipping", - trigname, get_rel_name(relid)))); + (errmsg("trigger \"%s\" for table \"%s\" does not exist, skipping", + trigname, get_rel_name(relid)))); return; } @@ -1083,9 +1083,9 @@ RemoveTriggerById(Oid trigOid) /* * Open and lock the relation the trigger belongs to. As in - * CreateTrigger, this is sufficient to lock out all operations that - * could fire or add triggers; but it would need to be revisited if - * we had ON SELECT triggers. + * CreateTrigger, this is sufficient to lock out all operations that could + * fire or add triggers; but it would need to be revisited if we had ON + * SELECT triggers. */ relid = ((Form_pg_trigger) GETSTRUCT(tup))->tgrelid; @@ -1960,7 +1960,7 @@ ExecBRInsertTriggers(EState *estate, ResultRelInfo *relinfo, if (newtuple != slottuple) { /* - * Return the modified tuple using the es_trig_tuple_slot. We assume + * Return the modified tuple using the es_trig_tuple_slot. We assume * the tuple was allocated in per-tuple memory context, and therefore * will go away by itself. The tuple table slot should not try to * clear it. @@ -2035,7 +2035,7 @@ ExecIRInsertTriggers(EState *estate, ResultRelInfo *relinfo, if (newtuple != slottuple) { /* - * Return the modified tuple using the es_trig_tuple_slot. We assume + * Return the modified tuple using the es_trig_tuple_slot. We assume * the tuple was allocated in per-tuple memory context, and therefore * will go away by itself. The tuple table slot should not try to * clear it. @@ -2378,7 +2378,7 @@ ExecBRUpdateTriggers(EState *estate, EPQState *epqstate, if (newtuple != slottuple) { /* - * Return the modified tuple using the es_trig_tuple_slot. We assume + * Return the modified tuple using the es_trig_tuple_slot. We assume * the tuple was allocated in per-tuple memory context, and therefore * will go away by itself. The tuple table slot should not try to * clear it. @@ -2461,7 +2461,7 @@ ExecIRUpdateTriggers(EState *estate, ResultRelInfo *relinfo, if (newtuple != slottuple) { /* - * Return the modified tuple using the es_trig_tuple_slot. We assume + * Return the modified tuple using the es_trig_tuple_slot. We assume * the tuple was allocated in per-tuple memory context, and therefore * will go away by itself. The tuple table slot should not try to * clear it. @@ -2891,7 +2891,7 @@ typedef struct AfterTriggerEventDataOneCtid { TriggerFlags ate_flags; /* status bits and offset to shared data */ ItemPointerData ate_ctid1; /* inserted, deleted, or old updated tuple */ -} AfterTriggerEventDataOneCtid; +} AfterTriggerEventDataOneCtid; #define SizeofTriggerEvent(evt) \ (((evt)->ate_flags & AFTER_TRIGGER_2CTIDS) ? \ diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c index 81f129dff6..80a30e180d 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tsearchcmds.c @@ -407,7 +407,8 @@ RenameTSParser(List *oldname, const char *newname) void AlterTSParserNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) { - Oid prsId, nspOid; + Oid prsId, + nspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(TSParserRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -429,7 +430,7 @@ AlterTSParserNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) Oid AlterTSParserNamespace_oid(Oid prsId, Oid newNspOid) { - Oid oldNspOid; + Oid oldNspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(TSParserRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -685,7 +686,8 @@ RenameTSDictionary(List *oldname, const char *newname) void AlterTSDictionaryNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) { - Oid dictId, nspOid; + Oid dictId, + nspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(TSDictionaryRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -708,7 +710,7 @@ AlterTSDictionaryNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) Oid AlterTSDictionaryNamespace_oid(Oid dictId, Oid newNspOid) { - Oid oldNspOid; + Oid oldNspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(TSDictionaryRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1218,7 +1220,8 @@ RenameTSTemplate(List *oldname, const char *newname) void AlterTSTemplateNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) { - Oid tmplId, nspOid; + Oid tmplId, + nspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(TSTemplateRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1240,7 +1243,7 @@ AlterTSTemplateNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) Oid AlterTSTemplateNamespace_oid(Oid tmplId, Oid newNspOid) { - Oid oldNspOid; + Oid oldNspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(TSTemplateRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1668,7 +1671,8 @@ RenameTSConfiguration(List *oldname, const char *newname) void AlterTSConfigurationNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) { - Oid cfgId, nspOid; + Oid cfgId, + nspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(TSConfigRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -1691,7 +1695,7 @@ AlterTSConfigurationNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema) Oid AlterTSConfigurationNamespace_oid(Oid cfgId, Oid newNspOid) { - Oid oldNspOid; + Oid oldNspOid; Relation rel; rel = heap_open(TSConfigRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c b/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c index 4c06d898a8..1a20b0d91b 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) DefElem *byValueEl = NULL; DefElem *alignmentEl = NULL; DefElem *storageEl = NULL; - DefElem *collatableEl = NULL; + DefElem *collatableEl = NULL; Oid inputOid; Oid outputOid; Oid receiveOid = InvalidOid; @@ -537,7 +537,7 @@ DefineType(List *names, List *parameters) * now have TypeCreate do all the real work. * * Note: the pg_type.oid is stored in user tables as array elements (base - * types) in ArrayType and in composite types in DatumTupleFields. This + * types) in ArrayType and in composite types in DatumTupleFields. This * oid must be preserved by binary upgrades. */ typoid = @@ -1179,7 +1179,7 @@ DefineEnum(CreateEnumStmt *stmt) -1, /* typMod (Domains only) */ 0, /* Array dimensions of typbasetype */ false, /* Type NOT NULL */ - InvalidOid); /* typcollation */ + InvalidOid); /* typcollation */ /* Enter the enum's values into pg_enum */ EnumValuesCreate(enumTypeOid, stmt->vals); @@ -2416,7 +2416,7 @@ domainAddConstraint(Oid domainOid, Oid domainNamespace, Oid baseTypeOid, CONSTRAINT_CHECK, /* Constraint Type */ false, /* Is Deferrable */ false, /* Is Deferred */ - true, /* Is Validated */ + true, /* Is Validated */ InvalidOid, /* not a relation constraint */ NULL, 0, diff --git a/src/backend/commands/user.c b/src/backend/commands/user.c index f13eb2891e..9c9164d3bc 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/user.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/user.c @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ CreateRole(CreateRoleStmt *stmt) bool createrole = false; /* Can this user create roles? */ bool createdb = false; /* Can the user create databases? */ bool canlogin = false; /* Can this user login? */ - bool isreplication = false; /* Is this a replication role? */ + bool isreplication = false; /* Is this a replication role? */ int connlimit = -1; /* maximum connections allowed */ List *addroleto = NIL; /* roles to make this a member of */ List *rolemembers = NIL; /* roles to be members of this role */ @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ CreateRole(CreateRoleStmt *stmt) DefElem *dcreaterole = NULL; DefElem *dcreatedb = NULL; DefElem *dcanlogin = NULL; - DefElem *disreplication = NULL; + DefElem *disreplication = NULL; DefElem *dconnlimit = NULL; DefElem *daddroleto = NULL; DefElem *drolemembers = NULL; @@ -240,9 +240,10 @@ CreateRole(CreateRoleStmt *stmt) if (dissuper) { issuper = intVal(dissuper->arg) != 0; + /* - * Superusers get replication by default, but only if - * NOREPLICATION wasn't explicitly mentioned + * Superusers get replication by default, but only if NOREPLICATION + * wasn't explicitly mentioned */ if (!(disreplication && intVal(disreplication->arg) == 0)) isreplication = 1; @@ -287,7 +288,7 @@ CreateRole(CreateRoleStmt *stmt) if (!superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser to create replication users"))); + errmsg("must be superuser to create replication users"))); } else { @@ -384,8 +385,8 @@ CreateRole(CreateRoleStmt *stmt) tuple = heap_form_tuple(pg_authid_dsc, new_record, new_record_nulls); /* - * pg_largeobject_metadata contains pg_authid.oid's, so we - * use the binary-upgrade override, if specified. + * pg_largeobject_metadata contains pg_authid.oid's, so we use the + * binary-upgrade override, if specified. */ if (OidIsValid(binary_upgrade_next_pg_authid_oid)) { @@ -467,7 +468,7 @@ AlterRole(AlterRoleStmt *stmt) int createrole = -1; /* Can this user create roles? */ int createdb = -1; /* Can the user create databases? */ int canlogin = -1; /* Can this user login? */ - int isreplication = -1; /* Is this a replication role? */ + int isreplication = -1; /* Is this a replication role? */ int connlimit = -1; /* maximum connections allowed */ List *rolemembers = NIL; /* roles to be added/removed */ char *validUntil = NULL; /* time the login is valid until */ @@ -479,7 +480,7 @@ AlterRole(AlterRoleStmt *stmt) DefElem *dcreaterole = NULL; DefElem *dcreatedb = NULL; DefElem *dcanlogin = NULL; - DefElem *disreplication = NULL; + DefElem *disreplication = NULL; DefElem *dconnlimit = NULL; DefElem *drolemembers = NULL; DefElem *dvalidUntil = NULL; diff --git a/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c b/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c index 1651aa94dc..90c413a988 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ vac_update_relstats(Relation relation, /* * If we have discovered that there are no indexes, then there's no - * primary key either. This could be done more thoroughly... + * primary key either. This could be done more thoroughly... */ if (pgcform->relhaspkey && !hasindex) { @@ -839,8 +839,8 @@ vacuum_rel(Oid relid, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, bool do_toast, bool for_wraparound, * There's a race condition here: the rel may have gone away since the * last time we saw it. If so, we don't need to vacuum it. * - * If we've been asked not to wait for the relation lock, acquire it - * first in non-blocking mode, before calling try_relation_open(). + * If we've been asked not to wait for the relation lock, acquire it first + * in non-blocking mode, before calling try_relation_open(). */ if (!(vacstmt->options & VACOPT_NOWAIT)) onerel = try_relation_open(relid, lmode); @@ -852,8 +852,8 @@ vacuum_rel(Oid relid, VacuumStmt *vacstmt, bool do_toast, bool for_wraparound, if (IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess() && Log_autovacuum_min_duration >= 0) ereport(LOG, (errcode(ERRCODE_LOCK_NOT_AVAILABLE), - errmsg("skipping vacuum of \"%s\" --- lock not available", - vacstmt->relation->relname))); + errmsg("skipping vacuum of \"%s\" --- lock not available", + vacstmt->relation->relname))); } if (!onerel) diff --git a/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c b/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c index a5c024cc19..9393fa0727 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c @@ -705,15 +705,16 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, PageSetAllVisible(page); SetBufferCommitInfoNeedsSave(buf); } + /* * It's possible for the value returned by GetOldestXmin() to move * backwards, so it's not wrong for us to see tuples that appear to * not be visible to everyone yet, while PD_ALL_VISIBLE is already * set. The real safe xmin value never moves backwards, but * GetOldestXmin() is conservative and sometimes returns a value - * that's unnecessarily small, so if we see that contradiction it - * just means that the tuples that we think are not visible to - * everyone yet actually are, and the PD_ALL_VISIBLE flag is correct. + * that's unnecessarily small, so if we see that contradiction it just + * means that the tuples that we think are not visible to everyone yet + * actually are, and the PD_ALL_VISIBLE flag is correct. * * There should never be dead tuples on a page with PD_ALL_VISIBLE * set, however. diff --git a/src/backend/commands/variable.c b/src/backend/commands/variable.c index 2cec713089..5d0fbdfb40 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/variable.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/variable.c @@ -132,8 +132,8 @@ check_datestyle(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source) * We can't simply "return check_datestyle(...)" because we need * to handle constructs like "DEFAULT, ISO". */ - char *subval; - void *subextra = NULL; + char *subval; + void *subextra = NULL; subval = strdup(GetConfigOptionResetString("datestyle")); if (!subval) @@ -262,9 +262,9 @@ check_timezone(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source) { /* * The boot_val given for TimeZone in guc.c is NULL. When we see this - * we just do nothing. If this isn't overridden from the config file + * we just do nothing. If this isn't overridden from the config file * then pg_timezone_initialize() will eventually select a default - * value from the environment. This hack has two purposes: to avoid + * value from the environment. This hack has two purposes: to avoid * wasting cycles loading values that might soon be overridden from * the config file, and to avoid trying to read the timezone files * during InitializeGUCOptions(). The latter doesn't work in an @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ check_timezone(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source) if (pg_strncasecmp(*newval, "interval", 8) == 0) { /* - * Support INTERVAL 'foo'. This is for SQL spec compliance, not + * Support INTERVAL 'foo'. This is for SQL spec compliance, not * because it has any actual real-world usefulness. */ const char *valueptr = *newval; @@ -391,13 +391,13 @@ check_timezone(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source) * * Note: the result string should be something that we'd accept as input. * We use the numeric format for interval cases, because it's simpler to - * reload. In the named-timezone case, *newval is already OK and need not + * reload. In the named-timezone case, *newval is already OK and need not * be changed; it might not have the canonical casing, but that's taken * care of by show_timezone. */ if (myextra.HasCTZSet) { - char *result = (char *) malloc(64); + char *result = (char *) malloc(64); if (!result) return false; @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ show_log_timezone(void) * We allow idempotent changes (r/w -> r/w and r/o -> r/o) at any time, and * we also always allow changes from read-write to read-only. However, * read-only may be changed to read-write only when in a top-level transaction - * that has not yet taken an initial snapshot. Can't do it in a hot standby + * that has not yet taken an initial snapshot. Can't do it in a hot standby * slave, either. */ bool @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ check_transaction_deferrable(bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source) * * We can't roll back the random sequence on error, and we don't want * config file reloads to affect it, so we only want interactive SET SEED - * commands to set it. We use the "extra" storage to ensure that rollbacks + * commands to set it. We use the "extra" storage to ensure that rollbacks * don't try to do the operation again. */ @@ -851,8 +851,8 @@ check_session_authorization(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source) { /* * Can't do catalog lookups, so fail. The result of this is that - * session_authorization cannot be set in postgresql.conf, which - * seems like a good thing anyway, so we don't work hard to avoid it. + * session_authorization cannot be set in postgresql.conf, which seems + * like a good thing anyway, so we don't work hard to avoid it. */ return false; } @@ -977,7 +977,7 @@ const char * show_role(void) { /* - * Check whether SET ROLE is active; if not return "none". This is a + * Check whether SET ROLE is active; if not return "none". This is a * kluge to deal with the fact that SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION logically * resets SET ROLE to NONE, but we cannot set the GUC role variable from * assign_session_authorization (because we haven't got enough info to diff --git a/src/backend/commands/view.c b/src/backend/commands/view.c index 508fb23c9a..be681e3fd4 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/view.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/view.c @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ DefineVirtualRelation(const RangeVar *relation, List *tlist, bool replace) def->colname = pstrdup(tle->resname); def->typeName = makeTypeNameFromOid(exprType((Node *) tle->expr), - exprTypmod((Node *) tle->expr)); + exprTypmod((Node *) tle->expr)); def->inhcount = 0; def->is_local = true; def->is_not_null = false; @@ -130,6 +130,7 @@ DefineVirtualRelation(const RangeVar *relation, List *tlist, bool replace) def->cooked_default = NULL; def->collClause = NULL; def->collOid = exprCollation((Node *) tle->expr); + /* * It's possible that the column is of a collatable type but the * collation could not be resolved, so double-check. @@ -240,7 +241,7 @@ DefineVirtualRelation(const RangeVar *relation, List *tlist, bool replace) } else { - Oid relid; + Oid relid; /* * now set the parameters for keys/inheritance etc. All of these are @@ -437,8 +438,8 @@ DefineView(ViewStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) /* * Check for unsupported cases. These tests are redundant with ones in - * DefineQueryRewrite(), but that function will complain about a bogus - * ON SELECT rule, and we'd rather the message complain about a view. + * DefineQueryRewrite(), but that function will complain about a bogus ON + * SELECT rule, and we'd rather the message complain about a view. */ if (viewParse->intoClause != NULL) ereport(ERROR, @@ -447,7 +448,7 @@ DefineView(ViewStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) if (viewParse->hasModifyingCTE) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("views must not contain data-modifying statements in WITH"))); + errmsg("views must not contain data-modifying statements in WITH"))); /* * If a list of column names was given, run through and insert these into @@ -500,7 +501,7 @@ DefineView(ViewStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) if (view->relpersistence == RELPERSISTENCE_UNLOGGED) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), - errmsg("views cannot be unlogged because they do not have storage"))); + errmsg("views cannot be unlogged because they do not have storage"))); /* * Create the view relation diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execMain.c b/src/backend/executor/execMain.c index caa9faea87..86ec987019 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execMain.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execMain.c @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ * ExecutorRun accepts direction and count arguments that specify whether * the plan is to be executed forwards, backwards, and for how many tuples. * In some cases ExecutorRun may be called multiple times to process all - * the tuples for a plan. It is also acceptable to stop short of executing + * the tuples for a plan. It is also acceptable to stop short of executing * the whole plan (but only if it is a SELECT). * * ExecutorFinish must be called after the final ExecutorRun call and @@ -168,6 +168,7 @@ standard_ExecutorStart(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) switch (queryDesc->operation) { case CMD_SELECT: + /* * SELECT INTO, SELECT FOR UPDATE/SHARE and modifying CTEs need to * mark tuples @@ -332,12 +333,12 @@ standard_ExecutorRun(QueryDesc *queryDesc, * ExecutorFinish * * This routine must be called after the last ExecutorRun call. - * It performs cleanup such as firing AFTER triggers. It is + * It performs cleanup such as firing AFTER triggers. It is * separate from ExecutorEnd because EXPLAIN ANALYZE needs to * include these actions in the total runtime. * * We provide a function hook variable that lets loadable plugins - * get control when ExecutorFinish is called. Such a plugin would + * get control when ExecutorFinish is called. Such a plugin would * normally call standard_ExecutorFinish(). * * ---------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -425,9 +426,9 @@ standard_ExecutorEnd(QueryDesc *queryDesc) Assert(estate != NULL); /* - * Check that ExecutorFinish was called, unless in EXPLAIN-only mode. - * This Assert is needed because ExecutorFinish is new as of 9.1, and - * callers might forget to call it. + * Check that ExecutorFinish was called, unless in EXPLAIN-only mode. This + * Assert is needed because ExecutorFinish is new as of 9.1, and callers + * might forget to call it. */ Assert(estate->es_finished || (estate->es_top_eflags & EXEC_FLAG_EXPLAIN_ONLY)); @@ -519,7 +520,7 @@ ExecCheckRTPerms(List *rangeTable, bool ereport_on_violation) foreach(l, rangeTable) { - RangeTblEntry *rte = (RangeTblEntry *) lfirst(l); + RangeTblEntry *rte = (RangeTblEntry *) lfirst(l); result = ExecCheckRTEPerms(rte); if (!result) @@ -533,8 +534,8 @@ ExecCheckRTPerms(List *rangeTable, bool ereport_on_violation) } if (ExecutorCheckPerms_hook) - result = (*ExecutorCheckPerms_hook)(rangeTable, - ereport_on_violation); + result = (*ExecutorCheckPerms_hook) (rangeTable, + ereport_on_violation); return result; } @@ -980,7 +981,7 @@ InitPlan(QueryDesc *queryDesc, int eflags) void CheckValidResultRel(Relation resultRel, CmdType operation) { - TriggerDesc *trigDesc = resultRel->trigdesc; + TriggerDesc *trigDesc = resultRel->trigdesc; switch (resultRel->rd_rel->relkind) { @@ -1005,26 +1006,26 @@ CheckValidResultRel(Relation resultRel, CmdType operation) case CMD_INSERT: if (!trigDesc || !trigDesc->trig_insert_instead_row) ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("cannot insert into view \"%s\"", - RelationGetRelationName(resultRel)), - errhint("You need an unconditional ON INSERT DO INSTEAD rule or an INSTEAD OF INSERT trigger."))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), + errmsg("cannot insert into view \"%s\"", + RelationGetRelationName(resultRel)), + errhint("You need an unconditional ON INSERT DO INSTEAD rule or an INSTEAD OF INSERT trigger."))); break; case CMD_UPDATE: if (!trigDesc || !trigDesc->trig_update_instead_row) ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("cannot update view \"%s\"", - RelationGetRelationName(resultRel)), - errhint("You need an unconditional ON UPDATE DO INSTEAD rule or an INSTEAD OF UPDATE trigger."))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), + errmsg("cannot update view \"%s\"", + RelationGetRelationName(resultRel)), + errhint("You need an unconditional ON UPDATE DO INSTEAD rule or an INSTEAD OF UPDATE trigger."))); break; case CMD_DELETE: if (!trigDesc || !trigDesc->trig_delete_instead_row) ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("cannot delete from view \"%s\"", - RelationGetRelationName(resultRel)), - errhint("You need an unconditional ON DELETE DO INSTEAD rule or an INSTEAD OF DELETE trigger."))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), + errmsg("cannot delete from view \"%s\"", + RelationGetRelationName(resultRel)), + errhint("You need an unconditional ON DELETE DO INSTEAD rule or an INSTEAD OF DELETE trigger."))); break; default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized CmdType: %d", (int) operation); @@ -1137,8 +1138,8 @@ ExecGetTriggerResultRel(EState *estate, Oid relid) /* * Open the target relation's relcache entry. We assume that an * appropriate lock is still held by the backend from whenever the trigger - * event got queued, so we need take no new lock here. Also, we need - * not recheck the relkind, so no need for CheckValidResultRel. + * event got queued, so we need take no new lock here. Also, we need not + * recheck the relkind, so no need for CheckValidResultRel. */ rel = heap_open(relid, NoLock); @@ -1238,12 +1239,12 @@ ExecPostprocessPlan(EState *estate) /* * Run any secondary ModifyTable nodes to completion, in case the main - * query did not fetch all rows from them. (We do this to ensure that + * query did not fetch all rows from them. (We do this to ensure that * such nodes have predictable results.) */ foreach(lc, estate->es_auxmodifytables) { - PlanState *ps = (PlanState *) lfirst(lc); + PlanState *ps = (PlanState *) lfirst(lc); for (;;) { @@ -2220,9 +2221,9 @@ EvalPlanQualStart(EPQState *epqstate, EState *parentestate, Plan *planTree) * ExecInitSubPlan expects to be able to find these entries. Some of the * SubPlans might not be used in the part of the plan tree we intend to * run, but since it's not easy to tell which, we just initialize them - * all. (However, if the subplan is headed by a ModifyTable node, then - * it must be a data-modifying CTE, which we will certainly not need to - * re-run, so we can skip initializing it. This is just an efficiency + * all. (However, if the subplan is headed by a ModifyTable node, then it + * must be a data-modifying CTE, which we will certainly not need to + * re-run, so we can skip initializing it. This is just an efficiency * hack; it won't skip data-modifying CTEs for which the ModifyTable node * is not at the top.) */ diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execQual.c b/src/backend/executor/execQual.c index c153ca00db..5f0b58f43b 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execQual.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execQual.c @@ -79,9 +79,9 @@ static Datum ExecEvalWholeRowSlow(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, static Datum ExecEvalConst(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalParamExec(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static Datum ExecEvalParamExtern(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, - bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); + bool *isNull, ExprDoneCond *isDone); static void init_fcache(Oid foid, Oid input_collation, FuncExprState *fcache, MemoryContext fcacheCxt, bool needDescForSets); static void ShutdownFuncExpr(Datum arg); @@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ ExecEvalParamExtern(ExprState *exprstate, ExprContext *econtext, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), errmsg("no value found for parameter %d", thisParamId))); - return (Datum) 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ + return (Datum) 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ } diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c b/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c index 7e84ccdd9c..0cbbe04d3b 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c @@ -1319,9 +1319,9 @@ retry: /* * Ordinarily, at this point the search should have found the originally * inserted tuple, unless we exited the loop early because of conflict. - * However, it is possible to define exclusion constraints for which - * that wouldn't be true --- for instance, if the operator is <>. - * So we no longer complain if found_self is still false. + * However, it is possible to define exclusion constraints for which that + * wouldn't be true --- for instance, if the operator is <>. So we no + * longer complain if found_self is still false. */ econtext->ecxt_scantuple = save_scantuple; diff --git a/src/backend/executor/functions.c b/src/backend/executor/functions.c index 70d126c521..9c867bbae2 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/functions.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/functions.c @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ typedef struct char *fname; /* function name (for error msgs) */ char *src; /* function body text (for error msgs) */ - SQLFunctionParseInfoPtr pinfo; /* data for parser callback hooks */ + SQLFunctionParseInfoPtr pinfo; /* data for parser callback hooks */ Oid rettype; /* actual return type */ int16 typlen; /* length of the return type */ @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ typedef struct SQLFunctionParseInfo Oid *argtypes; /* resolved types of input arguments */ int nargs; /* number of input arguments */ Oid collation; /* function's input collation, if known */ -} SQLFunctionParseInfo; +} SQLFunctionParseInfo; /* non-export function prototypes */ @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ sql_fn_param_ref(ParseState *pstate, ParamRef *pref) * Set up the per-query execution_state records for a SQL function. * * The input is a List of Lists of parsed and rewritten, but not planned, - * querytrees. The sublist structure denotes the original query boundaries. + * querytrees. The sublist structure denotes the original query boundaries. */ static List * init_execution_state(List *queryTree_list, @@ -299,8 +299,8 @@ init_execution_state(List *queryTree_list, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), /* translator: %s is a SQL statement name */ - errmsg("%s is not allowed in a non-volatile function", - CreateCommandTag(stmt)))); + errmsg("%s is not allowed in a non-volatile function", + CreateCommandTag(stmt)))); /* OK, build the execution_state for this query */ newes = (execution_state *) palloc(sizeof(execution_state)); @@ -311,8 +311,8 @@ init_execution_state(List *queryTree_list, newes->next = NULL; newes->status = F_EXEC_START; - newes->setsResult = false; /* might change below */ - newes->lazyEval = false; /* might change below */ + newes->setsResult = false; /* might change below */ + newes->lazyEval = false; /* might change below */ newes->stmt = stmt; newes->qd = NULL; @@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ init_sql_fcache(FmgrInfo *finfo, bool lazyEvalOK) fcache->src = TextDatumGetCString(tmp); /* - * Parse and rewrite the queries in the function text. Use sublists to + * Parse and rewrite the queries in the function text. Use sublists to * keep track of the original query boundaries. But we also build a * "flat" list of the rewritten queries to pass to check_sql_fn_retval. * This is because the last canSetTag query determines the result type @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ init_sql_fcache(FmgrInfo *finfo, bool lazyEvalOK) queryTree_sublist = pg_analyze_and_rewrite_params(parsetree, fcache->src, - (ParserSetupHook) sql_fn_parser_setup, + (ParserSetupHook) sql_fn_parser_setup, fcache->pinfo); queryTree_list = lappend(queryTree_list, queryTree_sublist); flat_query_list = list_concat(flat_query_list, @@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ postquel_sub_params(SQLFunctionCachePtr fcache, { /* sizeof(ParamListInfoData) includes the first array element */ paramLI = (ParamListInfo) palloc(sizeof(ParamListInfoData) + - (nargs - 1) *sizeof(ParamExternData)); + (nargs - 1) * sizeof(ParamExternData)); /* we have static list of params, so no hooks needed */ paramLI->paramFetch = NULL; paramLI->paramFetchArg = NULL; @@ -748,8 +748,8 @@ fmgr_sql(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) execution_state *es; TupleTableSlot *slot; Datum result; - List *eslist; - ListCell *eslc; + List *eslist; + ListCell *eslc; /* * Switch to context in which the fcache lives. This ensures that @@ -847,10 +847,10 @@ fmgr_sql(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * * In a non-read-only function, we rely on the fact that we'll never * suspend execution between queries of the function: the only reason to - * suspend execution before completion is if we are returning a row from - * a lazily-evaluated SELECT. So, when first entering this loop, we'll + * suspend execution before completion is if we are returning a row from a + * lazily-evaluated SELECT. So, when first entering this loop, we'll * either start a new query (and push a fresh snapshot) or re-establish - * the active snapshot from the existing query descriptor. If we need to + * the active snapshot from the existing query descriptor. If we need to * start a new query in a subsequent execution of the loop, either we need * a fresh snapshot (and pushed_snapshot is false) or the existing * snapshot is on the active stack and we can just bump its command ID. @@ -927,10 +927,10 @@ fmgr_sql(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) es = (execution_state *) lfirst(eslc); /* - * Flush the current snapshot so that we will take a new one - * for the new query list. This ensures that new snaps are - * taken at original-query boundaries, matching the behavior - * of interactive execution. + * Flush the current snapshot so that we will take a new one for + * the new query list. This ensures that new snaps are taken at + * original-query boundaries, matching the behavior of interactive + * execution. */ if (pushed_snapshot) { @@ -1183,7 +1183,7 @@ ShutdownSQLFunction(Datum arg) { SQLFunctionCachePtr fcache = (SQLFunctionCachePtr) DatumGetPointer(arg); execution_state *es; - ListCell *lc; + ListCell *lc; foreach(lc, fcache->func_state) { @@ -1415,7 +1415,7 @@ check_sql_fn_retval(Oid func_id, Oid rettype, List *queryTreeList, * the function that's calling it. * * XXX Note that if rettype is RECORD, the IsBinaryCoercible check - * will succeed for any composite restype. For the moment we rely on + * will succeed for any composite restype. For the moment we rely on * runtime type checking to catch any discrepancy, but it'd be nice to * do better at parse time. */ @@ -1432,7 +1432,7 @@ check_sql_fn_retval(Oid func_id, Oid rettype, List *queryTreeList, tle->expr = (Expr *) makeRelabelType(tle->expr, rettype, -1, - get_typcollation(rettype), + get_typcollation(rettype), COERCE_DONTCARE); /* Relabel is dangerous if sort/group or setop column */ if (tle->ressortgroupref != 0 || parse->setOperations) @@ -1536,7 +1536,7 @@ check_sql_fn_retval(Oid func_id, Oid rettype, List *queryTreeList, tle->expr = (Expr *) makeRelabelType(tle->expr, atttype, -1, - get_typcollation(atttype), + get_typcollation(atttype), COERCE_DONTCARE); /* Relabel is dangerous if sort/group or setop column */ if (tle->ressortgroupref != 0 || parse->setOperations) diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c index 51b1228c26..47555bab55 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ typedef struct AggStatePerAggData */ Tuplesortstate *sortstate; /* sort object, if DISTINCT or ORDER BY */ -} AggStatePerAggData; +} AggStatePerAggData; /* * AggStatePerGroupData - per-aggregate-per-group working state @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ typedef struct AggHashEntryData TupleHashEntryData shared; /* common header for hash table entries */ /* per-aggregate transition status array - must be last! */ AggStatePerGroupData pergroup[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */ -} AggHashEntryData; /* VARIABLE LENGTH STRUCT */ +} AggHashEntryData; /* VARIABLE LENGTH STRUCT */ static void initialize_aggregates(AggState *aggstate, @@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ build_hash_table(AggState *aggstate) Assert(node->numGroups > 0); entrysize = sizeof(AggHashEntryData) + - (aggstate->numaggs - 1) *sizeof(AggStatePerGroupData); + (aggstate->numaggs - 1) * sizeof(AggStatePerGroupData); aggstate->hashtable = BuildTupleHashTable(node->numCols, node->grpColIdx, @@ -899,7 +899,7 @@ hash_agg_entry_size(int numAggs) /* This must match build_hash_table */ entrysize = sizeof(AggHashEntryData) + - (numAggs - 1) *sizeof(AggStatePerGroupData); + (numAggs - 1) * sizeof(AggStatePerGroupData); entrysize = MAXALIGN(entrysize); /* Account for hashtable overhead (assuming fill factor = 1) */ entrysize += 3 * sizeof(void *); diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapIndexscan.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapIndexscan.c index 90ff0403ab..4de54ea55f 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapIndexscan.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeBitmapIndexscan.c @@ -307,8 +307,8 @@ ExecInitBitmapIndexScan(BitmapIndexScan *node, EState *estate, int eflags) indexstate->biss_NumScanKeys); /* - * If no run-time keys to calculate, go ahead and pass the scankeys to - * the index AM. + * If no run-time keys to calculate, go ahead and pass the scankeys to the + * index AM. */ if (indexstate->biss_NumRuntimeKeys == 0 && indexstate->biss_NumArrayKeys == 0) diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeForeignscan.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeForeignscan.c index c4309a981e..d50489c7f4 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeForeignscan.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeForeignscan.c @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ static TupleTableSlot * ForeignNext(ForeignScanState *node) { TupleTableSlot *slot; - ForeignScan *plan = (ForeignScan *) node->ss.ps.plan; + ForeignScan *plan = (ForeignScan *) node->ss.ps.plan; ExprContext *econtext = node->ss.ps.ps_ExprContext; MemoryContext oldcontext; diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c index 295563011f..1af98c81a6 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c @@ -960,13 +960,11 @@ void ExecPrepHashTableForUnmatched(HashJoinState *hjstate) { /* - *---------- - * During this scan we use the HashJoinState fields as follows: + * ---------- During this scan we use the HashJoinState fields as follows: * - * hj_CurBucketNo: next regular bucket to scan - * hj_CurSkewBucketNo: next skew bucket (an index into skewBucketNums) - * hj_CurTuple: last tuple returned, or NULL to start next bucket - *---------- + * hj_CurBucketNo: next regular bucket to scan hj_CurSkewBucketNo: next + * skew bucket (an index into skewBucketNums) hj_CurTuple: last tuple + * returned, or NULL to start next bucket ---------- */ hjstate->hj_CurBucketNo = 0; hjstate->hj_CurSkewBucketNo = 0; @@ -1003,7 +1001,7 @@ ExecScanHashTableForUnmatched(HashJoinState *hjstate, ExprContext *econtext) } else if (hjstate->hj_CurSkewBucketNo < hashtable->nSkewBuckets) { - int j = hashtable->skewBucketNums[hjstate->hj_CurSkewBucketNo]; + int j = hashtable->skewBucketNums[hjstate->hj_CurSkewBucketNo]; hashTuple = hashtable->skewBucket[j]->tuples; hjstate->hj_CurSkewBucketNo++; @@ -1020,7 +1018,7 @@ ExecScanHashTableForUnmatched(HashJoinState *hjstate, ExprContext *econtext) /* insert hashtable's tuple into exec slot */ inntuple = ExecStoreMinimalTuple(HJTUPLE_MINTUPLE(hashTuple), hjstate->hj_HashTupleSlot, - false); /* do not pfree */ + false); /* do not pfree */ econtext->ecxt_innertuple = inntuple; /* @@ -1091,7 +1089,7 @@ ExecHashTableResetMatchFlags(HashJoinTable hashtable) /* ... and the same for the skew buckets, if any */ for (i = 0; i < hashtable->nSkewBuckets; i++) { - int j = hashtable->skewBucketNums[i]; + int j = hashtable->skewBucketNums[i]; HashSkewBucket *skewBucket = hashtable->skewBucket[j]; for (tuple = skewBucket->tuples; tuple != NULL; tuple = tuple->next) diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeHashjoin.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeHashjoin.c index a6847c956f..7c02db94ad 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeHashjoin.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeHashjoin.c @@ -113,6 +113,7 @@ ExecHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) switch (node->hj_JoinState) { case HJ_BUILD_HASHTABLE: + /* * First time through: build hash table for inner relation. */ @@ -123,12 +124,12 @@ ExecHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) * right/full join, we can quit without building the hash * table. However, for an inner join it is only a win to * check this when the outer relation's startup cost is less - * than the projected cost of building the hash - * table. Otherwise it's best to build the hash table first - * and see if the inner relation is empty. (When it's a left - * join, we should always make this check, since we aren't - * going to be able to skip the join on the strength of an - * empty inner relation anyway.) + * than the projected cost of building the hash table. + * Otherwise it's best to build the hash table first and see + * if the inner relation is empty. (When it's a left join, we + * should always make this check, since we aren't going to be + * able to skip the join on the strength of an empty inner + * relation anyway.) * * If we are rescanning the join, we make use of information * gained on the previous scan: don't bother to try the @@ -185,8 +186,8 @@ ExecHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) return NULL; /* - * need to remember whether nbatch has increased since we began - * scanning the outer relation + * need to remember whether nbatch has increased since we + * began scanning the outer relation */ hashtable->nbatch_outstart = hashtable->nbatch; @@ -202,6 +203,7 @@ ExecHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) /* FALL THRU */ case HJ_NEED_NEW_OUTER: + /* * We don't have an outer tuple, try to get the next one */ @@ -250,7 +252,7 @@ ExecHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) Assert(batchno > hashtable->curbatch); ExecHashJoinSaveTuple(ExecFetchSlotMinimalTuple(outerTupleSlot), hashvalue, - &hashtable->outerBatchFile[batchno]); + &hashtable->outerBatchFile[batchno]); /* Loop around, staying in HJ_NEED_NEW_OUTER state */ continue; } @@ -261,6 +263,7 @@ ExecHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) /* FALL THRU */ case HJ_SCAN_BUCKET: + /* * Scan the selected hash bucket for matches to current outer */ @@ -296,8 +299,8 @@ ExecHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) } /* - * In a semijoin, we'll consider returning the first match, - * but after that we're done with this outer tuple. + * In a semijoin, we'll consider returning the first + * match, but after that we're done with this outer tuple. */ if (node->js.jointype == JOIN_SEMI) node->hj_JoinState = HJ_NEED_NEW_OUTER; @@ -320,10 +323,11 @@ ExecHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) break; case HJ_FILL_OUTER_TUPLE: + /* * The current outer tuple has run out of matches, so check - * whether to emit a dummy outer-join tuple. Whether we - * emit one or not, the next state is NEED_NEW_OUTER. + * whether to emit a dummy outer-join tuple. Whether we emit + * one or not, the next state is NEED_NEW_OUTER. */ node->hj_JoinState = HJ_NEED_NEW_OUTER; @@ -354,6 +358,7 @@ ExecHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) break; case HJ_FILL_INNER_TUPLES: + /* * We have finished a batch, but we are doing right/full join, * so any unmatched inner tuples in the hashtable have to be @@ -389,11 +394,12 @@ ExecHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) break; case HJ_NEED_NEW_BATCH: + /* * Try to advance to next batch. Done if there are no more. */ if (!ExecHashJoinNewBatch(node)) - return NULL; /* end of join */ + return NULL; /* end of join */ node->hj_JoinState = HJ_NEED_NEW_OUTER; break; @@ -783,7 +789,7 @@ ExecHashJoinNewBatch(HashJoinState *hjstate) } if (curbatch >= nbatch) - return false; /* no more batches */ + return false; /* no more batches */ hashtable->curbatch = curbatch; @@ -829,7 +835,7 @@ ExecHashJoinNewBatch(HashJoinState *hjstate) if (BufFileSeek(hashtable->outerBatchFile[curbatch], 0, 0L, SEEK_SET)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode_for_file_access(), - errmsg("could not rewind hash-join temporary file: %m"))); + errmsg("could not rewind hash-join temporary file: %m"))); } return true; @@ -944,14 +950,13 @@ ExecReScanHashJoin(HashJoinState *node) ExecHashTableResetMatchFlags(node->hj_HashTable); /* - * Also, we need to reset our state about the emptiness of - * the outer relation, so that the new scan of the outer will - * update it correctly if it turns out to be empty this time. - * (There's no harm in clearing it now because ExecHashJoin won't - * need the info. In the other cases, where the hash table - * doesn't exist or we are destroying it, we leave this state - * alone because ExecHashJoin will need it the first time - * through.) + * Also, we need to reset our state about the emptiness of the + * outer relation, so that the new scan of the outer will update + * it correctly if it turns out to be empty this time. (There's no + * harm in clearing it now because ExecHashJoin won't need the + * info. In the other cases, where the hash table doesn't exist + * or we are destroying it, we leave this state alone because + * ExecHashJoin will need it the first time through.) */ node->hj_OuterNotEmpty = false; diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c index 3b8741fc21..d8e59ca39e 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ ExecIndexEvalRuntimeKeys(ExprContext *econtext, /* * For each run-time key, extract the run-time expression and evaluate - * it with respect to the current context. We then stick the result + * it with respect to the current context. We then stick the result * into the proper scan key. * * Note: the result of the eval could be a pass-by-ref value that's @@ -605,16 +605,16 @@ ExecInitIndexScan(IndexScan *node, EState *estate, int eflags) indexstate->iss_RelationDesc, estate->es_snapshot, indexstate->iss_NumScanKeys, - indexstate->iss_NumOrderByKeys); + indexstate->iss_NumOrderByKeys); /* - * If no run-time keys to calculate, go ahead and pass the scankeys to - * the index AM. + * If no run-time keys to calculate, go ahead and pass the scankeys to the + * index AM. */ if (indexstate->iss_NumRuntimeKeys == 0) index_rescan(indexstate->iss_ScanDesc, indexstate->iss_ScanKeys, indexstate->iss_NumScanKeys, - indexstate->iss_OrderByKeys, indexstate->iss_NumOrderByKeys); + indexstate->iss_OrderByKeys, indexstate->iss_NumOrderByKeys); /* * all done. @@ -703,11 +703,11 @@ ExecIndexBuildScanKeys(PlanState *planstate, Relation index, Index scanrelid, scan_keys = (ScanKey) palloc(n_scan_keys * sizeof(ScanKeyData)); /* - * runtime_keys array is dynamically resized as needed. We handle it - * this way so that the same runtime keys array can be shared between - * indexquals and indexorderbys, which will be processed in separate - * calls of this function. Caller must be sure to pass in NULL/0 for - * first call. + * runtime_keys array is dynamically resized as needed. We handle it this + * way so that the same runtime keys array can be shared between + * indexquals and indexorderbys, which will be processed in separate calls + * of this function. Caller must be sure to pass in NULL/0 for first + * call. */ runtime_keys = *runtimeKeys; n_runtime_keys = max_runtime_keys = *numRuntimeKeys; diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeLimit.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeLimit.c index edbe0558b7..85d1a6e27f 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeLimit.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeLimit.c @@ -346,14 +346,14 @@ pass_down_bound(LimitState *node, PlanState *child_node) else if (IsA(child_node, ResultState)) { /* - * An extra consideration here is that if the Result is projecting - * a targetlist that contains any SRFs, we can't assume that every - * input tuple generates an output tuple, so a Sort underneath - * might need to return more than N tuples to satisfy LIMIT N. - * So we cannot use bounded sort. + * An extra consideration here is that if the Result is projecting a + * targetlist that contains any SRFs, we can't assume that every input + * tuple generates an output tuple, so a Sort underneath might need to + * return more than N tuples to satisfy LIMIT N. So we cannot use + * bounded sort. * - * If Result supported qual checking, we'd have to punt on seeing - * a qual, too. Note that having a resconstantqual is not a + * If Result supported qual checking, we'd have to punt on seeing a + * qual, too. Note that having a resconstantqual is not a * showstopper: if that fails we're not getting any rows at all. */ if (outerPlanState(child_node) && diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeLockRows.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeLockRows.c index 2e08008807..d71278ebd7 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeLockRows.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeLockRows.c @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ ExecInitLockRows(LockRows *node, EState *estate, int eflags) /* * Locate the ExecRowMark(s) that this node is responsible for, and - * construct ExecAuxRowMarks for them. (InitPlan should already have + * construct ExecAuxRowMarks for them. (InitPlan should already have * built the global list of ExecRowMarks.) */ lrstate->lr_arowMarks = NIL; diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeMergeAppend.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeMergeAppend.c index 73920f21c8..4ebe0cbe03 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeMergeAppend.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeMergeAppend.c @@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ * contains integers which index into the slots array. These typedefs try to * clear it up, but they're only documentation. */ -typedef int SlotNumber; -typedef int HeapPosition; +typedef int SlotNumber; +typedef int HeapPosition; static void heap_insert_slot(MergeAppendState *node, SlotNumber new_slot); static void heap_siftup_slot(MergeAppendState *node); @@ -128,13 +128,13 @@ ExecInitMergeAppend(MergeAppend *node, EState *estate, int eflags) * initialize sort-key information */ mergestate->ms_nkeys = node->numCols; - mergestate->ms_scankeys = palloc0(sizeof(ScanKeyData) * node->numCols); + mergestate->ms_scankeys = palloc0(sizeof(ScanKeyData) * node->numCols); for (i = 0; i < node->numCols; i++) { - Oid sortFunction; - bool reverse; - int flags; + Oid sortFunction; + bool reverse; + int flags; if (!get_compare_function_for_ordering_op(node->sortOperators[i], &sortFunction, &reverse)) @@ -187,8 +187,8 @@ ExecMergeAppend(MergeAppendState *node) if (!node->ms_initialized) { /* - * First time through: pull the first tuple from each subplan, - * and set up the heap. + * First time through: pull the first tuple from each subplan, and set + * up the heap. */ for (i = 0; i < node->ms_nplans; i++) { @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ heap_insert_slot(MergeAppendState *node, SlotNumber new_slot) j = node->ms_heap_size++; /* j is where the "hole" is */ while (j > 0) { - int i = (j-1)/2; + int i = (j - 1) / 2; if (heap_compare_slots(node, new_slot, node->ms_heap[i]) >= 0) break; @@ -269,11 +269,11 @@ heap_siftup_slot(MergeAppendState *node) i = 0; /* i is where the "hole" is */ for (;;) { - int j = 2 * i + 1; + int j = 2 * i + 1; if (j >= n) break; - if (j+1 < n && heap_compare_slots(node, heap[j], heap[j+1]) > 0) + if (j + 1 < n && heap_compare_slots(node, heap[j], heap[j + 1]) > 0) j++; if (heap_compare_slots(node, heap[n], heap[j]) <= 0) break; @@ -298,13 +298,13 @@ heap_compare_slots(MergeAppendState *node, SlotNumber slot1, SlotNumber slot2) for (nkey = 0; nkey < node->ms_nkeys; nkey++) { - ScanKey scankey = node->ms_scankeys + nkey; - AttrNumber attno = scankey->sk_attno; - Datum datum1, - datum2; - bool isNull1, - isNull2; - int32 compare; + ScanKey scankey = node->ms_scankeys + nkey; + AttrNumber attno = scankey->sk_attno; + Datum datum1, + datum2; + bool isNull1, + isNull2; + int32 compare; datum1 = slot_getattr(s1, attno, &isNull1); datum2 = slot_getattr(s2, attno, &isNull2); diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c index 75c3a64535..ce5462e961 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ typedef struct MergeJoinClauseData bool reverse; /* if true, negate the cmpfn's output */ bool nulls_first; /* if true, nulls sort low */ FmgrInfo cmpfinfo; -} MergeJoinClauseData; +} MergeJoinClauseData; /* Result type for MJEvalOuterValues and MJEvalInnerValues */ typedef enum diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeModifyTable.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeModifyTable.c index f10f70a17d..c0eab4bf0d 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeModifyTable.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeModifyTable.c @@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ ExecUpdate(ItemPointer tupleid, * * If we generate a new candidate tuple after EvalPlanQual testing, we * must loop back here and recheck constraints. (We don't need to - * redo triggers, however. If there are any BEFORE triggers then + * redo triggers, however. If there are any BEFORE triggers then * trigger.c will have done heap_lock_tuple to lock the correct tuple, * so there's no need to do them again.) */ @@ -608,11 +608,10 @@ lreplace:; /* * Note: instead of having to update the old index tuples associated - * with the heap tuple, all we do is form and insert new index - * tuples. This is because UPDATEs are actually DELETEs and INSERTs, - * and index tuple deletion is done later by VACUUM (see notes in - * ExecDelete). All we do here is insert new index tuples. -cim - * 9/27/89 + * with the heap tuple, all we do is form and insert new index tuples. + * This is because UPDATEs are actually DELETEs and INSERTs, and index + * tuple deletion is done later by VACUUM (see notes in ExecDelete). + * All we do here is insert new index tuples. -cim 9/27/89 */ /* @@ -713,7 +712,7 @@ ExecModifyTable(ModifyTableState *node) TupleTableSlot *planSlot; ItemPointer tupleid = NULL; ItemPointerData tuple_ctid; - HeapTupleHeader oldtuple = NULL; + HeapTupleHeader oldtuple = NULL; /* * If we've already completed processing, don't try to do more. We need @@ -740,7 +739,7 @@ ExecModifyTable(ModifyTableState *node) /* * es_result_relation_info must point to the currently active result - * relation while we are within this ModifyTable node. Even though + * relation while we are within this ModifyTable node. Even though * ModifyTable nodes can't be nested statically, they can be nested * dynamically (since our subplan could include a reference to a modifying * CTE). So we have to save and restore the caller's value. @@ -756,7 +755,7 @@ ExecModifyTable(ModifyTableState *node) for (;;) { /* - * Reset the per-output-tuple exprcontext. This is needed because + * Reset the per-output-tuple exprcontext. This is needed because * triggers expect to use that context as workspace. It's a bit ugly * to do this below the top level of the plan, however. We might need * to rethink this later. @@ -806,7 +805,8 @@ ExecModifyTable(ModifyTableState *node) elog(ERROR, "ctid is NULL"); tupleid = (ItemPointer) DatumGetPointer(datum); - tuple_ctid = *tupleid; /* be sure we don't free ctid!! */ + tuple_ctid = *tupleid; /* be sure we don't free + * ctid!! */ tupleid = &tuple_ctid; } else @@ -836,11 +836,11 @@ ExecModifyTable(ModifyTableState *node) break; case CMD_UPDATE: slot = ExecUpdate(tupleid, oldtuple, slot, planSlot, - &node->mt_epqstate, estate, node->canSetTag); + &node->mt_epqstate, estate, node->canSetTag); break; case CMD_DELETE: slot = ExecDelete(tupleid, oldtuple, planSlot, - &node->mt_epqstate, estate, node->canSetTag); + &node->mt_epqstate, estate, node->canSetTag); break; default: elog(ERROR, "unknown operation"); @@ -922,9 +922,9 @@ ExecInitModifyTable(ModifyTable *node, EState *estate, int eflags) /* * call ExecInitNode on each of the plans to be executed and save the - * results into the array "mt_plans". This is also a convenient place - * to verify that the proposed target relations are valid and open their - * indexes for insertion of new index entries. Note we *must* set + * results into the array "mt_plans". This is also a convenient place to + * verify that the proposed target relations are valid and open their + * indexes for insertion of new index entries. Note we *must* set * estate->es_result_relation_info correctly while we initialize each * sub-plan; ExecContextForcesOids depends on that! */ @@ -944,7 +944,7 @@ ExecInitModifyTable(ModifyTable *node, EState *estate, int eflags) /* * If there are indices on the result relation, open them and save * descriptors in the result relation info, so that we can add new - * index entries for the tuples we add/update. We need not do this + * index entries for the tuples we add/update. We need not do this * for a DELETE, however, since deletion doesn't affect indexes. */ if (resultRelInfo->ri_RelationDesc->rd_rel->relhasindex && @@ -1147,10 +1147,10 @@ ExecInitModifyTable(ModifyTable *node, EState *estate, int eflags) * Lastly, if this is not the primary (canSetTag) ModifyTable node, add it * to estate->es_auxmodifytables so that it will be run to completion by * ExecPostprocessPlan. (It'd actually work fine to add the primary - * ModifyTable node too, but there's no need.) Note the use of lcons - * not lappend: we need later-initialized ModifyTable nodes to be shut - * down before earlier ones. This ensures that we don't throw away - * RETURNING rows that need to be seen by a later CTE subplan. + * ModifyTable node too, but there's no need.) Note the use of lcons not + * lappend: we need later-initialized ModifyTable nodes to be shut down + * before earlier ones. This ensures that we don't throw away RETURNING + * rows that need to be seen by a later CTE subplan. */ if (!mtstate->canSetTag) estate->es_auxmodifytables = lcons(mtstate, diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeNestloop.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeNestloop.c index 4893a6ea6d..e98bc0f5a3 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeNestloop.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeNestloop.c @@ -137,9 +137,8 @@ ExecNestLoop(NestLoopState *node) node->nl_MatchedOuter = false; /* - * fetch the values of any outer Vars that must be passed to - * the inner scan, and store them in the appropriate PARAM_EXEC - * slots. + * fetch the values of any outer Vars that must be passed to the + * inner scan, and store them in the appropriate PARAM_EXEC slots. */ foreach(lc, nl->nestParams) { @@ -330,9 +329,9 @@ ExecInitNestLoop(NestLoop *node, EState *estate, int eflags) * * If we have no parameters to pass into the inner rel from the outer, * tell the inner child that cheap rescans would be good. If we do have - * such parameters, then there is no point in REWIND support at all in - * the inner child, because it will always be rescanned with fresh - * parameter values. + * such parameters, then there is no point in REWIND support at all in the + * inner child, because it will always be rescanned with fresh parameter + * values. */ outerPlanState(nlstate) = ExecInitNode(outerPlan(node), estate, eflags); if (node->nestParams == NIL) diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeRecursiveunion.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeRecursiveunion.c index 84c051854b..12e1b9a585 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeRecursiveunion.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeRecursiveunion.c @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ typedef struct RUHashEntryData *RUHashEntry; typedef struct RUHashEntryData { TupleHashEntryData shared; /* common header for hash table entries */ -} RUHashEntryData; +} RUHashEntryData; /* diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeSetOp.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeSetOp.c index aa352d7822..9106f14873 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeSetOp.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeSetOp.c @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ typedef struct SetOpHashEntryData { TupleHashEntryData shared; /* common header for hash table entries */ SetOpStatePerGroupData pergroup; -} SetOpHashEntryData; +} SetOpHashEntryData; static TupleTableSlot *setop_retrieve_direct(SetOpState *setopstate); diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeWindowAgg.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeWindowAgg.c index 5680efeb69..25d9298cef 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeWindowAgg.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeWindowAgg.c @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ typedef struct WindowStatePerFuncData int aggno; /* if so, index of its PerAggData */ WindowObject winobj; /* object used in window function API */ -} WindowStatePerFuncData; +} WindowStatePerFuncData; /* * For plain aggregate window functions, we also have one of these. diff --git a/src/backend/executor/spi.c b/src/backend/executor/spi.c index a717a0deea..6e723ca092 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/spi.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/spi.c @@ -1787,8 +1787,8 @@ _SPI_execute_plan(SPIPlanPtr plan, ParamListInfo paramLI, * snapshot != InvalidSnapshot, read_only = true: use exactly the given * snapshot. * - * snapshot != InvalidSnapshot, read_only = false: use the given - * snapshot, modified by advancing its command ID before each querytree. + * snapshot != InvalidSnapshot, read_only = false: use the given snapshot, + * modified by advancing its command ID before each querytree. * * snapshot == InvalidSnapshot, read_only = true: use the entry-time * ActiveSnapshot, if any (if there isn't one, we run with no snapshot). @@ -1797,8 +1797,8 @@ _SPI_execute_plan(SPIPlanPtr plan, ParamListInfo paramLI, * snapshot for each user command, and advance its command ID before each * querytree within the command. * - * In the first two cases, we can just push the snap onto the stack - * once for the whole plan list. + * In the first two cases, we can just push the snap onto the stack once + * for the whole plan list. */ if (snapshot != InvalidSnapshot) { @@ -2028,7 +2028,7 @@ _SPI_convert_params(int nargs, Oid *argtypes, /* sizeof(ParamListInfoData) includes the first array element */ paramLI = (ParamListInfo) palloc(sizeof(ParamListInfoData) + - (nargs - 1) *sizeof(ParamExternData)); + (nargs - 1) * sizeof(ParamExternData)); /* we have static list of params, so no hooks needed */ paramLI->paramFetch = NULL; paramLI->paramFetchArg = NULL; diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/auth.c b/src/backend/libpq/auth.c index 151ec5613b..d003b1206a 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/auth.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/auth.c @@ -61,6 +61,7 @@ static int recv_and_check_password_packet(Port *port); #define IDENT_PORT 113 static int ident_inet(hbaPort *port); + #ifdef HAVE_UNIX_SOCKETS static int auth_peer(hbaPort *port); #endif @@ -182,7 +183,7 @@ static int pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port); *---------------------------------------------------------------- */ #ifdef ENABLE_SSPI -typedef SECURITY_STATUS +typedef SECURITY_STATUS (WINAPI * QUERY_SECURITY_CONTEXT_TOKEN_FN) ( PCtxtHandle, void **); static int pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port); @@ -543,7 +544,7 @@ ClientAuthentication(Port *port) } #endif status = auth_peer(port); -#else /* HAVE_UNIX_SOCKETS */ +#else /* HAVE_UNIX_SOCKETS */ Assert(false); #endif break; @@ -598,7 +599,7 @@ ClientAuthentication(Port *port) } if (ClientAuthentication_hook) - (*ClientAuthentication_hook)(port, status); + (*ClientAuthentication_hook) (port, status); if (status == STATUS_OK) sendAuthRequest(port, AUTH_REQ_OK); @@ -844,7 +845,7 @@ pg_krb5_recvauth(Port *port) return ret; retval = krb5_recvauth(pg_krb5_context, &auth_context, - (krb5_pointer) & port->sock, pg_krb_srvnam, + (krb5_pointer) &port->sock, pg_krb_srvnam, pg_krb5_server, 0, pg_krb5_keytab, &ticket); if (retval) { @@ -1814,7 +1815,6 @@ auth_peer(hbaPort *port) } strlcpy(ident_user, pass->pw_name, IDENT_USERNAME_MAX + 1); - #elif defined(SO_PEERCRED) /* Linux style: use getsockopt(SO_PEERCRED) */ struct ucred peercred; @@ -1843,7 +1843,6 @@ auth_peer(hbaPort *port) } strlcpy(ident_user, pass->pw_name, IDENT_USERNAME_MAX + 1); - #elif defined(HAVE_GETPEERUCRED) /* Solaris > 10 */ uid_t uid; @@ -1879,7 +1878,6 @@ auth_peer(hbaPort *port) } strlcpy(ident_user, pass->pw_name, IDENT_USERNAME_MAX + 1); - #elif defined(HAVE_STRUCT_CMSGCRED) || defined(HAVE_STRUCT_FCRED) || (defined(HAVE_STRUCT_SOCKCRED) && defined(LOCAL_CREDS)) struct msghdr msg; @@ -1947,7 +1945,6 @@ auth_peer(hbaPort *port) } strlcpy(ident_user, pw->pw_name, IDENT_USERNAME_MAX + 1); - #else ereport(LOG, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), @@ -2768,10 +2765,10 @@ CheckRADIUSAuth(Port *port) pg_freeaddrinfo_all(hint.ai_family, serveraddrs); /* - * Figure out at what time we should time out. We can't just use - * a single call to select() with a timeout, since somebody can - * be sending invalid packets to our port thus causing us to - * retry in a loop and never time out. + * Figure out at what time we should time out. We can't just use a single + * call to select() with a timeout, since somebody can be sending invalid + * packets to our port thus causing us to retry in a loop and never time + * out. */ gettimeofday(&endtime, NULL); endtime.tv_sec += RADIUS_TIMEOUT; @@ -2780,7 +2777,7 @@ CheckRADIUSAuth(Port *port) { struct timeval timeout; struct timeval now; - int64 timeoutval; + int64 timeoutval; gettimeofday(&now, NULL); timeoutval = (endtime.tv_sec * 1000000 + endtime.tv_usec) - (now.tv_sec * 1000000 + now.tv_usec); @@ -2820,12 +2817,12 @@ CheckRADIUSAuth(Port *port) /* * Attempt to read the response packet, and verify the contents. * - * Any packet that's not actually a RADIUS packet, or otherwise - * does not validate as an explicit reject, is just ignored and - * we retry for another packet (until we reach the timeout). This - * is to avoid the possibility to denial-of-service the login by - * flooding the server with invalid packets on the port that - * we're expecting the RADIUS response on. + * Any packet that's not actually a RADIUS packet, or otherwise does + * not validate as an explicit reject, is just ignored and we retry + * for another packet (until we reach the timeout). This is to avoid + * the possibility to denial-of-service the login by flooding the + * server with invalid packets on the port that we're expecting the + * RADIUS response on. */ addrsize = sizeof(remoteaddr); @@ -2846,12 +2843,12 @@ CheckRADIUSAuth(Port *port) { #ifdef HAVE_IPV6 ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("RADIUS response was sent from incorrect port: %i", - ntohs(remoteaddr.sin6_port)))); + (errmsg("RADIUS response was sent from incorrect port: %i", + ntohs(remoteaddr.sin6_port)))); #else ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("RADIUS response was sent from incorrect port: %i", - ntohs(remoteaddr.sin_port)))); + (errmsg("RADIUS response was sent from incorrect port: %i", + ntohs(remoteaddr.sin_port)))); #endif continue; } @@ -2885,12 +2882,12 @@ CheckRADIUSAuth(Port *port) */ cryptvector = palloc(packetlength + strlen(port->hba->radiussecret)); - memcpy(cryptvector, receivepacket, 4); /* code+id+length */ - memcpy(cryptvector + 4, packet->vector, RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH); /* request - * authenticator, from - * original packet */ - if (packetlength > RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH) /* there may be no attributes - * at all */ + memcpy(cryptvector, receivepacket, 4); /* code+id+length */ + memcpy(cryptvector + 4, packet->vector, RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH); /* request + * authenticator, from + * original packet */ + if (packetlength > RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH) /* there may be no + * attributes at all */ memcpy(cryptvector + RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH, receive_buffer + RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH, packetlength - RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH); memcpy(cryptvector + packetlength, port->hba->radiussecret, strlen(port->hba->radiussecret)); @@ -2899,7 +2896,7 @@ CheckRADIUSAuth(Port *port) encryptedpassword)) { ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("could not perform MD5 encryption of received packet"))); + (errmsg("could not perform MD5 encryption of received packet"))); pfree(cryptvector); continue; } @@ -2925,9 +2922,9 @@ CheckRADIUSAuth(Port *port) else { ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("RADIUS response has invalid code (%i) for user \"%s\"", - receivepacket->code, port->user_name))); + (errmsg("RADIUS response has invalid code (%i) for user \"%s\"", + receivepacket->code, port->user_name))); continue; } - } /* while (true) */ + } /* while (true) */ } diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/hba.c b/src/backend/libpq/hba.c index 2def6cea89..fdc29aaa72 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/hba.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/hba.c @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ check_db(const char *dbname, const char *role, Oid roleid, char *param_str) } static bool -ipv4eq(struct sockaddr_in *a, struct sockaddr_in *b) +ipv4eq(struct sockaddr_in * a, struct sockaddr_in * b) { return (a->sin_addr.s_addr == b->sin_addr.s_addr); } @@ -551,9 +551,9 @@ ipv4eq(struct sockaddr_in *a, struct sockaddr_in *b) #ifdef HAVE_IPV6 static bool -ipv6eq(struct sockaddr_in6 *a, struct sockaddr_in6 *b) +ipv6eq(struct sockaddr_in6 * a, struct sockaddr_in6 * b) { - int i; + int i; for (i = 0; i < 16; i++) if (a->sin6_addr.s6_addr[i] != b->sin6_addr.s6_addr[i]) @@ -561,8 +561,7 @@ ipv6eq(struct sockaddr_in6 *a, struct sockaddr_in6 *b) return true; } - -#endif /* HAVE_IPV6 */ +#endif /* HAVE_IPV6 */ /* * Check whether host name matches pattern. @@ -572,8 +571,8 @@ hostname_match(const char *pattern, const char *actual_hostname) { if (pattern[0] == '.') /* suffix match */ { - size_t plen = strlen(pattern); - size_t hlen = strlen(actual_hostname); + size_t plen = strlen(pattern); + size_t hlen = strlen(actual_hostname); if (hlen < plen) return false; @@ -590,7 +589,8 @@ hostname_match(const char *pattern, const char *actual_hostname) static bool check_hostname(hbaPort *port, const char *hostname) { - struct addrinfo *gai_result, *gai; + struct addrinfo *gai_result, + *gai; int ret; bool found; @@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ check_hostname(hbaPort *port, const char *hostname) if (gai->ai_addr->sa_family == AF_INET) { if (ipv4eq((struct sockaddr_in *) gai->ai_addr, - (struct sockaddr_in *) &port->raddr.addr)) + (struct sockaddr_in *) & port->raddr.addr)) { found = true; break; @@ -642,7 +642,7 @@ check_hostname(hbaPort *port, const char *hostname) else if (gai->ai_addr->sa_family == AF_INET6) { if (ipv6eq((struct sockaddr_in6 *) gai->ai_addr, - (struct sockaddr_in6 *) &port->raddr.addr)) + (struct sockaddr_in6 *) & port->raddr.addr)) { found = true; break; @@ -974,8 +974,8 @@ parse_hba_line(List *line, int line_num, HbaLine *parsedline) (errcode(ERRCODE_CONFIG_FILE_ERROR), errmsg("specifying both host name and CIDR mask is invalid: \"%s\"", token), - errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"", - line_num, HbaFileName))); + errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"", + line_num, HbaFileName))); pfree(token); return false; } diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c b/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c index 3232e64d4a..b83a2efb69 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ #ifdef HAVE_UTIME_H #include <utime.h> #endif -#ifdef WIN32_ONLY_COMPILER /* mstcpip.h is missing on mingw */ +#ifdef WIN32_ONLY_COMPILER /* mstcpip.h is missing on mingw */ #include <mstcpip.h> #endif @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ TouchSocketFile(void) */ /* -------------------------------- - * pq_set_nonblocking - set socket blocking/non-blocking + * pq_set_nonblocking - set socket blocking/non-blocking * * Sets the socket non-blocking if nonblocking is TRUE, or sets it * blocking otherwise. @@ -760,16 +760,17 @@ pq_set_nonblocking(bool nonblocking) #ifdef WIN32 pgwin32_noblock = nonblocking ? 1 : 0; #else + /* - * Use COMMERROR on failure, because ERROR would try to send the error - * to the client, which might require changing the mode again, leading - * to infinite recursion. + * Use COMMERROR on failure, because ERROR would try to send the error to + * the client, which might require changing the mode again, leading to + * infinite recursion. */ if (nonblocking) { if (!pg_set_noblock(MyProcPort->sock)) ereport(COMMERROR, - (errmsg("could not set socket to non-blocking mode: %m"))); + (errmsg("could not set socket to non-blocking mode: %m"))); } else { @@ -903,18 +904,17 @@ pq_getbyte_if_available(unsigned char *c) { /* * Ok if no data available without blocking or interrupted (though - * EINTR really shouldn't happen with a non-blocking socket). - * Report other errors. + * EINTR really shouldn't happen with a non-blocking socket). Report + * other errors. */ if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK || errno == EINTR) r = 0; else { /* - * Careful: an ereport() that tries to write to the client - * would cause recursion to here, leading to stack overflow - * and core dump! This message must go *only* to the - * postmaster log. + * Careful: an ereport() that tries to write to the client would + * cause recursion to here, leading to stack overflow and core + * dump! This message must go *only* to the postmaster log. */ ereport(COMMERROR, (errcode_for_socket_access(), @@ -1219,8 +1219,8 @@ internal_flush(void) continue; /* Ok if we were interrupted */ /* - * Ok if no data writable without blocking, and the socket - * is in non-blocking mode. + * Ok if no data writable without blocking, and the socket is in + * non-blocking mode. */ if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK) @@ -1369,8 +1369,8 @@ fail: void pq_putmessage_noblock(char msgtype, const char *s, size_t len) { - int res; - int required; + int res; + int required; /* * Ensure we have enough space in the output buffer for the message header @@ -1383,7 +1383,8 @@ pq_putmessage_noblock(char msgtype, const char *s, size_t len) PqSendBufferSize = required; } res = pq_putmessage(msgtype, s, len); - Assert(res == 0); /* should not fail when the message fits in buffer */ + Assert(res == 0); /* should not fail when the message fits in + * buffer */ } @@ -1434,13 +1435,13 @@ pq_endcopyout(bool errorAbort) static int pq_setkeepaliveswin32(Port *port, int idle, int interval) { - struct tcp_keepalive ka; - DWORD retsize; + struct tcp_keepalive ka; + DWORD retsize; if (idle <= 0) - idle = 2 * 60 * 60; /* default = 2 hours */ + idle = 2 * 60 * 60; /* default = 2 hours */ if (interval <= 0) - interval = 1; /* default = 1 second */ + interval = 1; /* default = 1 second */ ka.onoff = 1; ka.keepalivetime = idle * 1000; @@ -1500,11 +1501,11 @@ pq_getkeepalivesidle(Port *port) elog(LOG, "getsockopt(TCP_KEEPALIVE) failed: %m"); port->default_keepalives_idle = -1; /* don't know */ } -#endif /* TCP_KEEPIDLE */ -#else /* WIN32 */ +#endif /* TCP_KEEPIDLE */ +#else /* WIN32 */ /* We can't get the defaults on Windows, so return "don't know" */ port->default_keepalives_idle = -1; -#endif /* WIN32 */ +#endif /* WIN32 */ } return port->default_keepalives_idle; @@ -1555,10 +1556,10 @@ pq_setkeepalivesidle(int idle, Port *port) #endif port->keepalives_idle = idle; -#else /* WIN32 */ +#else /* WIN32 */ return pq_setkeepaliveswin32(port, idle, port->keepalives_interval); #endif -#else /* TCP_KEEPIDLE || SIO_KEEPALIVE_VALS */ +#else /* TCP_KEEPIDLE || SIO_KEEPALIVE_VALS */ if (idle != 0) { elog(LOG, "setting the keepalive idle time is not supported"); @@ -1593,7 +1594,7 @@ pq_getkeepalivesinterval(Port *port) #else /* We can't get the defaults on Windows, so return "don't know" */ port->default_keepalives_interval = -1; -#endif /* WIN32 */ +#endif /* WIN32 */ } return port->default_keepalives_interval; @@ -1635,7 +1636,7 @@ pq_setkeepalivesinterval(int interval, Port *port) } port->keepalives_interval = interval; -#else /* WIN32 */ +#else /* WIN32 */ return pq_setkeepaliveswin32(port, port->keepalives_idle, interval); #endif #else diff --git a/src/backend/main/main.c b/src/backend/main/main.c index 43d182b4db..c4ef56dc6c 100644 --- a/src/backend/main/main.c +++ b/src/backend/main/main.c @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) /* * Place platform-specific startup hacks here. This is the right * place to put code that must be executed early in the launch of any new - * server process. Note that this code will NOT be executed when a backend + * server process. Note that this code will NOT be executed when a backend * or sub-bootstrap process is forked, unless we are in a fork/exec * environment (ie EXEC_BACKEND is defined). * @@ -218,8 +218,8 @@ startup_hacks(const char *progname) /* * On some platforms, unaligned memory accesses result in a kernel trap; * the default kernel behavior is to emulate the memory access, but this - * results in a significant performance penalty. We want PG never to - * make such unaligned memory accesses, so this code disables the kernel + * results in a significant performance penalty. We want PG never to make + * such unaligned memory accesses, so this code disables the kernel * emulation: unaligned accesses will result in SIGBUS instead. */ #ifdef NOFIXADE @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ startup_hacks(const char *progname) #if defined(__alpha) /* no __alpha__ ? */ { - int buffer[] = {SSIN_UACPROC, UAC_SIGBUS | UAC_NOPRINT}; + int buffer[] = {SSIN_UACPROC, UAC_SIGBUS | UAC_NOPRINT}; if (setsysinfo(SSI_NVPAIRS, buffer, 1, (caddr_t) NULL, (unsigned long) NULL) < 0) @@ -238,7 +238,6 @@ startup_hacks(const char *progname) progname, strerror(errno)); } #endif /* __alpha */ - #endif /* NOFIXADE */ /* diff --git a/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c b/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c index 0eac9826a4..c0d2294317 100644 --- a/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ _copyForeignScan(ForeignScan *from) static FdwPlan * _copyFdwPlan(FdwPlan *from) { - FdwPlan *newnode = makeNode(FdwPlan); + FdwPlan *newnode = makeNode(FdwPlan); COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(startup_cost); COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(total_cost); @@ -1468,7 +1468,7 @@ _copyConvertRowtypeExpr(ConvertRowtypeExpr *from) static CollateExpr * _copyCollateExpr(CollateExpr *from) { - CollateExpr *newnode = makeNode(CollateExpr); + CollateExpr *newnode = makeNode(CollateExpr); COPY_NODE_FIELD(arg); COPY_SCALAR_FIELD(collOid); @@ -2269,7 +2269,7 @@ _copyTypeCast(TypeCast *from) static CollateClause * _copyCollateClause(CollateClause *from) { - CollateClause *newnode = makeNode(CollateClause); + CollateClause *newnode = makeNode(CollateClause); COPY_NODE_FIELD(arg); COPY_NODE_FIELD(collname); diff --git a/src/backend/nodes/nodeFuncs.c b/src/backend/nodes/nodeFuncs.c index af1ccb7efe..0e57f6c6d7 100644 --- a/src/backend/nodes/nodeFuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/nodes/nodeFuncs.c @@ -675,10 +675,10 @@ exprCollation(Node *expr) coll = ((NullIfExpr *) expr)->opcollid; break; case T_ScalarArrayOpExpr: - coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ + coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_BoolExpr: - coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ + coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_SubLink: { @@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ exprCollation(Node *expr) coll = ((FieldSelect *) expr)->resultcollid; break; case T_FieldStore: - coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always composite */ + coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always composite */ break; case T_RelabelType: coll = ((RelabelType *) expr)->resultcollid; @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ exprCollation(Node *expr) coll = ((ArrayCoerceExpr *) expr)->resultcollid; break; case T_ConvertRowtypeExpr: - coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always composite */ + coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always composite */ break; case T_CollateExpr: coll = ((CollateExpr *) expr)->collOid; @@ -763,10 +763,10 @@ exprCollation(Node *expr) coll = ((ArrayExpr *) expr)->array_collid; break; case T_RowExpr: - coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always composite */ + coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always composite */ break; case T_RowCompareExpr: - coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ + coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_CoalesceExpr: coll = ((CoalesceExpr *) expr)->coalescecollid; @@ -775,10 +775,11 @@ exprCollation(Node *expr) coll = ((MinMaxExpr *) expr)->minmaxcollid; break; case T_XmlExpr: + /* * XMLSERIALIZE returns text from non-collatable inputs, so its - * collation is always default. The other cases return boolean - * or XML, which are non-collatable. + * collation is always default. The other cases return boolean or + * XML, which are non-collatable. */ if (((XmlExpr *) expr)->op == IS_XMLSERIALIZE) coll = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; @@ -786,10 +787,10 @@ exprCollation(Node *expr) coll = InvalidOid; break; case T_NullTest: - coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ + coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_BooleanTest: - coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ + coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_CoerceToDomain: coll = ((CoerceToDomain *) expr)->resultcollid; @@ -801,7 +802,7 @@ exprCollation(Node *expr) coll = ((SetToDefault *) expr)->collation; break; case T_CurrentOfExpr: - coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ + coll = InvalidOid; /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_PlaceHolderVar: coll = exprCollation((Node *) ((PlaceHolderVar *) expr)->phexpr); @@ -907,10 +908,10 @@ exprSetCollation(Node *expr, Oid collation) ((NullIfExpr *) expr)->opcollid = collation; break; case T_ScalarArrayOpExpr: - Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ + Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_BoolExpr: - Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ + Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_SubLink: #ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING @@ -937,13 +938,13 @@ exprSetCollation(Node *expr, Oid collation) Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); } } -#endif /* USE_ASSERT_CHECKING */ +#endif /* USE_ASSERT_CHECKING */ break; case T_FieldSelect: ((FieldSelect *) expr)->resultcollid = collation; break; case T_FieldStore: - Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always composite */ + Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always composite */ break; case T_RelabelType: ((RelabelType *) expr)->resultcollid = collation; @@ -955,7 +956,7 @@ exprSetCollation(Node *expr, Oid collation) ((ArrayCoerceExpr *) expr)->resultcollid = collation; break; case T_ConvertRowtypeExpr: - Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always composite */ + Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always composite */ break; case T_CaseExpr: ((CaseExpr *) expr)->casecollid = collation; @@ -964,10 +965,10 @@ exprSetCollation(Node *expr, Oid collation) ((ArrayExpr *) expr)->array_collid = collation; break; case T_RowExpr: - Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always composite */ + Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always composite */ break; case T_RowCompareExpr: - Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ + Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_CoalesceExpr: ((CoalesceExpr *) expr)->coalescecollid = collation; @@ -981,10 +982,10 @@ exprSetCollation(Node *expr, Oid collation) (collation == InvalidOid)); break; case T_NullTest: - Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ + Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_BooleanTest: - Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ + Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ break; case T_CoerceToDomain: ((CoerceToDomain *) expr)->resultcollid = collation; @@ -996,7 +997,7 @@ exprSetCollation(Node *expr, Oid collation) ((SetToDefault *) expr)->collation = collation; break; case T_CurrentOfExpr: - Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ + Assert(!OidIsValid(collation)); /* result is always boolean */ break; default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized node type: %d", (int) nodeTag(expr)); diff --git a/src/backend/nodes/params.c b/src/backend/nodes/params.c index d6e6e6a2bd..62d766a282 100644 --- a/src/backend/nodes/params.c +++ b/src/backend/nodes/params.c @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ copyParamList(ParamListInfo from) /* sizeof(ParamListInfoData) includes the first array element */ size = sizeof(ParamListInfoData) + - (from->numParams - 1) *sizeof(ParamExternData); + (from->numParams - 1) * sizeof(ParamExternData); retval = (ParamListInfo) palloc(size); retval->paramFetch = NULL; diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c index dc2a23bb27..47ab08e502 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ static void set_cte_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, static void set_worktable_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, RangeTblEntry *rte); static void set_foreign_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, - RangeTblEntry *rte); + RangeTblEntry *rte); static RelOptInfo *make_rel_from_joinlist(PlannerInfo *root, List *joinlist); static bool subquery_is_pushdown_safe(Query *subquery, Query *topquery, bool *differentTypes); @@ -413,11 +413,11 @@ set_append_rel_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, /* * We have to make child entries in the EquivalenceClass data - * structures as well. This is needed either if the parent - * participates in some eclass joins (because we will want to - * consider inner-indexscan joins on the individual children) - * or if the parent has useful pathkeys (because we should try - * to build MergeAppend paths that produce those sort orderings). + * structures as well. This is needed either if the parent + * participates in some eclass joins (because we will want to consider + * inner-indexscan joins on the individual children) or if the parent + * has useful pathkeys (because we should try to build MergeAppend + * paths that produce those sort orderings). */ if (rel->has_eclass_joins || has_useful_pathkeys(root, rel)) add_child_rel_equivalences(root, appinfo, rel, childrel); @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ set_append_rel_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, /* Have we already seen this ordering? */ foreach(lpk, all_child_pathkeys) { - List *existing_pathkeys = (List *) lfirst(lpk); + List *existing_pathkeys = (List *) lfirst(lpk); if (compare_pathkeys(existing_pathkeys, childkeys) == PATHKEYS_EQUAL) @@ -540,18 +540,18 @@ set_append_rel_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, /* * Next, build MergeAppend paths based on the collected list of child - * pathkeys. We consider both cheapest-startup and cheapest-total - * cases, ie, for each interesting ordering, collect all the cheapest - * startup subpaths and all the cheapest total paths, and build a - * MergeAppend path for each list. + * pathkeys. We consider both cheapest-startup and cheapest-total cases, + * ie, for each interesting ordering, collect all the cheapest startup + * subpaths and all the cheapest total paths, and build a MergeAppend path + * for each list. */ foreach(l, all_child_pathkeys) { - List *pathkeys = (List *) lfirst(l); - List *startup_subpaths = NIL; - List *total_subpaths = NIL; - bool startup_neq_total = false; - ListCell *lcr; + List *pathkeys = (List *) lfirst(l); + List *startup_subpaths = NIL; + List *total_subpaths = NIL; + bool startup_neq_total = false; + ListCell *lcr; /* Select the child paths for this ordering... */ foreach(lcr, live_childrels) @@ -581,8 +581,8 @@ set_append_rel_pathlist(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, /* * Notice whether we actually have different paths for the - * "cheapest" and "total" cases; frequently there will be no - * point in two create_merge_append_path() calls. + * "cheapest" and "total" cases; frequently there will be no point + * in two create_merge_append_path() calls. */ if (cheapest_startup != cheapest_total) startup_neq_total = true; @@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ accumulate_append_subpath(List *subpaths, Path *path) { if (IsA(path, AppendPath)) { - AppendPath *apath = (AppendPath *) path; + AppendPath *apath = (AppendPath *) path; /* list_copy is important here to avoid sharing list substructure */ return list_concat(subpaths, list_copy(apath->subpaths)); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c index 8f763b4369..e200dcf472 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ cost_recursive_union(Plan *runion, Plan *nrterm, Plan *rterm) * accesses (XXX can't we refine that guess?) * * By default, we charge two operator evals per tuple comparison, which should - * be in the right ballpark in most cases. The caller can tweak this by + * be in the right ballpark in most cases. The caller can tweak this by * specifying nonzero comparison_cost; typically that's used for any extra * work that has to be done to prepare the inputs to the comparison operators. * @@ -1218,7 +1218,7 @@ cost_sort(Path *path, PlannerInfo *root, * Determines and returns the cost of a MergeAppend node. * * MergeAppend merges several pre-sorted input streams, using a heap that - * at any given instant holds the next tuple from each stream. If there + * at any given instant holds the next tuple from each stream. If there * are N streams, we need about N*log2(N) tuple comparisons to construct * the heap at startup, and then for each output tuple, about log2(N) * comparisons to delete the top heap entry and another log2(N) comparisons @@ -2909,7 +2909,7 @@ adjust_semi_join(PlannerInfo *root, JoinPath *path, SpecialJoinInfo *sjinfo, List *nrclauses; nrclauses = select_nonredundant_join_clauses(root, - path->joinrestrictinfo, + path->joinrestrictinfo, path->innerjoinpath); *indexed_join_quals = (nrclauses == NIL); } @@ -3185,7 +3185,7 @@ set_subquery_size_estimates(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, /* * Compute per-output-column width estimates by examining the subquery's - * targetlist. For any output that is a plain Var, get the width estimate + * targetlist. For any output that is a plain Var, get the width estimate * that was made while planning the subquery. Otherwise, fall back on a * datatype-based estimate. */ @@ -3210,7 +3210,7 @@ set_subquery_size_estimates(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, if (IsA(texpr, Var) && subroot->parse->setOperations == NULL) { - Var *var = (Var *) texpr; + Var *var = (Var *) texpr; RelOptInfo *subrel = find_base_rel(subroot, var->varno); item_width = subrel->attr_widths[var->varattno - subrel->min_attr]; @@ -3332,7 +3332,7 @@ set_cte_size_estimates(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, Plan *cteplan) * of estimating baserestrictcost, so we set that, and we also set up width * using what will be purely datatype-driven estimates from the targetlist. * There is no way to do anything sane with the rows value, so we just put - * a default estimate and hope that the wrapper can improve on it. The + * a default estimate and hope that the wrapper can improve on it. The * wrapper's PlanForeignScan function will be called momentarily. * * The rel's targetlist and restrictinfo list must have been constructed @@ -3396,8 +3396,8 @@ set_rel_width(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel) ndx = var->varattno - rel->min_attr; /* - * If it's a whole-row Var, we'll deal with it below after we - * have already cached as many attr widths as possible. + * If it's a whole-row Var, we'll deal with it below after we have + * already cached as many attr widths as possible. */ if (var->varattno == 0) { @@ -3406,8 +3406,8 @@ set_rel_width(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel) } /* - * The width may have been cached already (especially if it's - * a subquery), so don't duplicate effort. + * The width may have been cached already (especially if it's a + * subquery), so don't duplicate effort. */ if (rel->attr_widths[ndx] > 0) { @@ -3464,13 +3464,13 @@ set_rel_width(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel) */ if (have_wholerow_var) { - int32 wholerow_width = sizeof(HeapTupleHeaderData); + int32 wholerow_width = sizeof(HeapTupleHeaderData); if (reloid != InvalidOid) { /* Real relation, so estimate true tuple width */ wholerow_width += get_relation_data_width(reloid, - rel->attr_widths - rel->min_attr); + rel->attr_widths - rel->min_attr); } else { @@ -3484,8 +3484,8 @@ set_rel_width(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel) rel->attr_widths[0 - rel->min_attr] = wholerow_width; /* - * Include the whole-row Var as part of the output tuple. Yes, - * that really is what happens at runtime. + * Include the whole-row Var as part of the output tuple. Yes, that + * really is what happens at runtime. */ tuple_width += wholerow_width; } diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c index 9a32e16940..a365beecd8 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ process_equivalence(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *restrictinfo, * Also, the expression's exposed collation must match the EC's collation. * This is important because in comparisons like "foo < bar COLLATE baz", * only one of the expressions has the correct exposed collation as we receive - * it from the parser. Forcing both of them to have it ensures that all + * it from the parser. Forcing both of them to have it ensures that all * variant spellings of such a construct behave the same. Again, we can * stick on a RelabelType to force the right exposed collation. (It might * work to not label the collation at all in EC members, but this is risky @@ -414,13 +414,13 @@ canonicalize_ec_expression(Expr *expr, Oid req_type, Oid req_collation) exprCollation((Node *) expr) != req_collation) { /* - * Strip any existing RelabelType, then add a new one if needed. - * This is to preserve the invariant of no redundant RelabelTypes. + * Strip any existing RelabelType, then add a new one if needed. This + * is to preserve the invariant of no redundant RelabelTypes. * * If we have to change the exposed type of the stripped expression, * set typmod to -1 (since the new type may not have the same typmod - * interpretation). If we only have to change collation, preserve - * the exposed typmod. + * interpretation). If we only have to change collation, preserve the + * exposed typmod. */ while (expr && IsA(expr, RelabelType)) expr = (Expr *) ((RelabelType *) expr)->arg; @@ -1784,8 +1784,8 @@ add_child_rel_equivalences(PlannerInfo *root, ListCell *lc2; /* - * If this EC contains a constant, then it's not useful for sorting - * or driving an inner index-scan, so we skip generating child EMs. + * If this EC contains a constant, then it's not useful for sorting or + * driving an inner index-scan, so we skip generating child EMs. * * If this EC contains a volatile expression, then generating child * EMs would be downright dangerous. We rely on a volatile EC having diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c index 76f842631f..ef65cf2224 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ static bool match_special_index_operator(Expr *clause, static Expr *expand_boolean_index_clause(Node *clause, int indexcol, IndexOptInfo *index); static List *expand_indexqual_opclause(RestrictInfo *rinfo, - Oid opfamily, Oid idxcollation); + Oid opfamily, Oid idxcollation); static RestrictInfo *expand_indexqual_rowcompare(RestrictInfo *rinfo, IndexOptInfo *index, int indexcol); @@ -1159,8 +1159,8 @@ group_clauses_by_indexkey(IndexOptInfo *index, * (2) must contain an operator which is in the same family as the index * operator for this column, or is a "special" operator as recognized * by match_special_index_operator(); - * and - * (3) must match the collation of the index, if collation is relevant. + * and + * (3) must match the collation of the index, if collation is relevant. * * Our definition of "const" is pretty liberal: we allow Vars belonging * to the caller-specified outer_relids relations (which had better not @@ -1312,7 +1312,7 @@ match_clause_to_indexcol(IndexOptInfo *index, * is a "special" indexable operator. */ if (plain_op && - match_special_index_operator(clause, opfamily, idxcollation, true)) + match_special_index_operator(clause, opfamily, idxcollation, true)) return true; return false; } @@ -1438,7 +1438,7 @@ match_rowcompare_to_indexcol(IndexOptInfo *index, /**************************************************************************** - * ---- ROUTINES TO CHECK ORDERING OPERATORS ---- + * ---- ROUTINES TO CHECK ORDERING OPERATORS ---- ****************************************************************************/ /* @@ -1461,7 +1461,7 @@ match_index_to_pathkeys(IndexOptInfo *index, List *pathkeys) foreach(lc1, pathkeys) { - PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(lc1); + PathKey *pathkey = (PathKey *) lfirst(lc1); bool found = false; ListCell *lc2; @@ -1483,7 +1483,7 @@ match_index_to_pathkeys(IndexOptInfo *index, List *pathkeys) foreach(lc2, pathkey->pk_eclass->ec_members) { EquivalenceMember *member = (EquivalenceMember *) lfirst(lc2); - int indexcol; + int indexcol; /* No possibility of match if it references other relations */ if (!bms_equal(member->em_relids, index->rel->relids)) @@ -1491,7 +1491,7 @@ match_index_to_pathkeys(IndexOptInfo *index, List *pathkeys) for (indexcol = 0; indexcol < index->ncolumns; indexcol++) { - Expr *expr; + Expr *expr; expr = match_clause_to_ordering_op(index, indexcol, @@ -1535,7 +1535,7 @@ match_index_to_pathkeys(IndexOptInfo *index, List *pathkeys) * Note that we currently do not consider the collation of the ordering * operator's result. In practical cases the result type will be numeric * and thus have no collation, and it's not very clear what to match to - * if it did have a collation. The index's collation should match the + * if it did have a collation. The index's collation should match the * ordering operator's input collation, not its result. * * If successful, return 'clause' as-is if the indexkey is on the left, @@ -1598,8 +1598,8 @@ match_clause_to_ordering_op(IndexOptInfo *index, return NULL; /* - * Is the (commuted) operator an ordering operator for the opfamily? - * And if so, does it yield the right sorting semantics? + * Is the (commuted) operator an ordering operator for the opfamily? And + * if so, does it yield the right sorting semantics? */ sortfamily = get_op_opfamily_sortfamily(expr_op, opfamily); if (sortfamily != pk_opfamily) @@ -2198,9 +2198,9 @@ relation_has_unique_index_for(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, continue; /* - * XXX at some point we may need to check collations here - * too. For the moment we assume all collations reduce to - * the same notion of equality. + * XXX at some point we may need to check collations here too. + * For the moment we assume all collations reduce to the same + * notion of equality. */ /* OK, see if the condition operand matches the index key */ @@ -2544,10 +2544,10 @@ match_special_index_operator(Expr *clause, Oid opfamily, Oid idxcollation, * * The non-pattern opclasses will not sort the way we need in most non-C * locales. We can use such an index anyway for an exact match (simple - * equality), but not for prefix-match cases. Note that we are looking - * at the index's collation, not the expression's collation -- this test - * is not dependent on the LIKE/regex operator's collation (which would - * only affect case folding behavior of ILIKE, anyway). + * equality), but not for prefix-match cases. Note that we are looking at + * the index's collation, not the expression's collation -- this test is + * not dependent on the LIKE/regex operator's collation (which would only + * affect case folding behavior of ILIKE, anyway). */ switch (expr_op) { @@ -2657,7 +2657,7 @@ expand_indexqual_conditions(IndexOptInfo *index, List *clausegroups) resultquals = list_concat(resultquals, expand_indexqual_opclause(rinfo, curFamily, - curCollation)); + curCollation)); } else if (IsA(clause, ScalarArrayOpExpr)) { @@ -3254,7 +3254,7 @@ network_prefix_quals(Node *leftop, Oid expr_op, Oid opfamily, Datum rightop) expr = make_opclause(opr1oid, BOOLOID, false, (Expr *) leftop, (Expr *) makeConst(datatype, -1, - InvalidOid, /* not collatable */ + InvalidOid, /* not collatable */ -1, opr1right, false, false), InvalidOid, InvalidOid); @@ -3272,7 +3272,7 @@ network_prefix_quals(Node *leftop, Oid expr_op, Oid opfamily, Datum rightop) expr = make_opclause(opr2oid, BOOLOID, false, (Expr *) leftop, (Expr *) makeConst(datatype, -1, - InvalidOid, /* not collatable */ + InvalidOid, /* not collatable */ -1, opr2right, false, false), InvalidOid, InvalidOid); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c index 740dc32dc7..7d3cf425da 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c @@ -97,11 +97,11 @@ add_paths_to_joinrel(PlannerInfo *root, /* * 1. Consider mergejoin paths where both relations must be explicitly - * sorted. Skip this if we can't mergejoin. + * sorted. Skip this if we can't mergejoin. */ if (mergejoin_allowed) sort_inner_and_outer(root, joinrel, outerrel, innerrel, - restrictlist, mergeclause_list, jointype, sjinfo); + restrictlist, mergeclause_list, jointype, sjinfo); /* * 2. Consider paths where the outer relation need not be explicitly @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ add_paths_to_joinrel(PlannerInfo *root, */ if (mergejoin_allowed) match_unsorted_outer(root, joinrel, outerrel, innerrel, - restrictlist, mergeclause_list, jointype, sjinfo); + restrictlist, mergeclause_list, jointype, sjinfo); #ifdef NOT_USED @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ add_paths_to_joinrel(PlannerInfo *root, */ if (mergejoin_allowed) match_unsorted_inner(root, joinrel, outerrel, innerrel, - restrictlist, mergeclause_list, jointype, sjinfo); + restrictlist, mergeclause_list, jointype, sjinfo); #endif /* diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c index 42618649fb..bbb79c582d 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ static bool has_legal_joinclause(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel); static bool is_dummy_rel(RelOptInfo *rel); static void mark_dummy_rel(RelOptInfo *rel); static bool restriction_is_constant_false(List *restrictlist, - bool only_pushed_down); + bool only_pushed_down); /* @@ -604,10 +604,10 @@ make_join_rel(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel1, RelOptInfo *rel2) * * Also, a provably constant-false join restriction typically means that * we can skip evaluating one or both sides of the join. We do this by - * marking the appropriate rel as dummy. For outer joins, a constant-false - * restriction that is pushed down still means the whole join is dummy, - * while a non-pushed-down one means that no inner rows will join so we - * can treat the inner rel as dummy. + * marking the appropriate rel as dummy. For outer joins, a + * constant-false restriction that is pushed down still means the whole + * join is dummy, while a non-pushed-down one means that no inner rows + * will join so we can treat the inner rel as dummy. * * We need only consider the jointypes that appear in join_info_list, plus * JOIN_INNER. diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c index 47597a5d35..e5228a81c6 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ make_pathkey_from_sortinfo(PlannerInfo *root, /* * EquivalenceClasses need to contain opfamily lists based on the family * membership of mergejoinable equality operators, which could belong to - * more than one opfamily. So we have to look up the opfamily's equality + * more than one opfamily. So we have to look up the opfamily's equality * operator and get its membership. */ equality_op = get_opfamily_member(opfamily, @@ -558,9 +558,9 @@ build_index_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, true); /* - * If the sort key isn't already present in any EquivalenceClass, - * then it's not an interesting sort order for this query. So - * we can stop now --- lower-order sort keys aren't useful either. + * If the sort key isn't already present in any EquivalenceClass, then + * it's not an interesting sort order for this query. So we can stop + * now --- lower-order sort keys aren't useful either. */ if (!cpathkey) break; @@ -747,8 +747,8 @@ convert_subquery_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, continue; /* - * Build a representation of this targetlist entry as - * an outer Var. + * Build a representation of this targetlist entry as an + * outer Var. */ outer_expr = (Expr *) makeVarFromTargetEntry(rel->relid, tle); @@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ make_pathkeys_for_sortclauses(PlannerInfo *root, * right sides. * * Note this is called before EC merging is complete, so the links won't - * necessarily point to canonical ECs. Before they are actually used for + * necessarily point to canonical ECs. Before they are actually used for * anything, update_mergeclause_eclasses must be called to ensure that * they've been updated to point to canonical ECs. */ diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/analyzejoins.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/analyzejoins.c index 80d42f3be6..1784ac2fc5 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/analyzejoins.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/analyzejoins.c @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ /* local functions */ static bool join_is_removable(PlannerInfo *root, SpecialJoinInfo *sjinfo); static void remove_rel_from_query(PlannerInfo *root, int relid, - Relids joinrelids); + Relids joinrelids); static List *remove_rel_from_joinlist(List *joinlist, int relid, int *nremoved); @@ -238,10 +238,10 @@ join_is_removable(PlannerInfo *root, SpecialJoinInfo *sjinfo) !bms_equal(restrictinfo->required_relids, joinrelids)) { /* - * If such a clause actually references the inner rel then - * join removal has to be disallowed. We have to check this - * despite the previous attr_needed checks because of the - * possibility of pushed-down clauses referencing the rel. + * If such a clause actually references the inner rel then join + * removal has to be disallowed. We have to check this despite + * the previous attr_needed checks because of the possibility of + * pushed-down clauses referencing the rel. */ if (bms_is_member(innerrelid, restrictinfo->clause_relids)) return false; @@ -365,8 +365,8 @@ remove_rel_from_query(PlannerInfo *root, int relid, Relids joinrelids) * Likewise remove references from SpecialJoinInfo data structures. * * This is relevant in case the outer join we're deleting is nested inside - * other outer joins: the upper joins' relid sets have to be adjusted. - * The RHS of the target outer join will be made empty here, but that's OK + * other outer joins: the upper joins' relid sets have to be adjusted. The + * RHS of the target outer join will be made empty here, but that's OK * since caller will delete that SpecialJoinInfo entirely. */ foreach(l, root->join_info_list) @@ -426,6 +426,7 @@ remove_rel_from_query(PlannerInfo *root, int relid, Relids joinrelids) { /* Recheck that qual doesn't actually reference the target rel */ Assert(!bms_is_member(relid, rinfo->clause_relids)); + /* * The required_relids probably aren't shared with anything else, * but let's copy them just to be sure. diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c index f130881251..1a9540ce06 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ static TidScan *make_tidscan(List *qptlist, List *qpqual, Index scanrelid, List *tidquals); static FunctionScan *make_functionscan(List *qptlist, List *qpqual, Index scanrelid, Node *funcexpr, List *funccolnames, - List *funccoltypes, List *funccoltypmods, List *funccolcollations); + List *funccoltypes, List *funccoltypmods, List *funccolcollations); static ValuesScan *make_valuesscan(List *qptlist, List *qpqual, Index scanrelid, List *values_lists); static CteScan *make_ctescan(List *qptlist, List *qpqual, @@ -143,24 +143,25 @@ static MergeJoin *make_mergejoin(List *tlist, bool *mergenullsfirst, Plan *lefttree, Plan *righttree, JoinType jointype); -static Sort *make_sort(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *lefttree, int numCols, - AttrNumber *sortColIdx, Oid *sortOperators, Oid *collations, bool *nullsFirst, +static Sort * +make_sort(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *lefttree, int numCols, +AttrNumber *sortColIdx, Oid *sortOperators, Oid *collations, bool *nullsFirst, double limit_tuples); static Plan *prepare_sort_from_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, - Plan *lefttree, List *pathkeys, - bool adjust_tlist_in_place, - int *p_numsortkeys, - AttrNumber **p_sortColIdx, - Oid **p_sortOperators, - Oid **p_collations, - bool **p_nullsFirst); + Plan *lefttree, List *pathkeys, + bool adjust_tlist_in_place, + int *p_numsortkeys, + AttrNumber **p_sortColIdx, + Oid **p_sortOperators, + Oid **p_collations, + bool **p_nullsFirst); static Material *make_material(Plan *lefttree); /* * create_plan * Creates the access plan for a query by recursively processing the - * desired tree of pathnodes, starting at the node 'best_path'. For + * desired tree of pathnodes, starting at the node 'best_path'. For * every pathnode found, we create a corresponding plan node containing * appropriate id, target list, and qualification information. * @@ -737,7 +738,7 @@ create_merge_append_plan(PlannerInfo *root, MergeAppendPath *best_path) /* Now, insert a Sort node if subplan isn't sufficiently ordered */ if (!pathkeys_contained_in(pathkeys, subpath->pathkeys)) subplan = (Plan *) make_sort(root, subplan, numsortkeys, - sortColIdx, sortOperators, collations, nullsFirst, + sortColIdx, sortOperators, collations, nullsFirst, best_path->limit_tuples); subplans = lappend(subplans, subplan); @@ -983,7 +984,7 @@ create_unique_plan(PlannerInfo *root, UniquePath *best_path) sortcl->eqop = eqop; sortcl->sortop = sortop; sortcl->nulls_first = false; - sortcl->hashable = false; /* no need to make this accurate */ + sortcl->hashable = false; /* no need to make this accurate */ sortList = lappend(sortList, sortcl); groupColPos++; } @@ -1153,8 +1154,8 @@ create_indexscan_plan(PlannerInfo *root, qpqual = extract_actual_clauses(qpqual, false); /* - * We have to replace any outer-relation variables with nestloop params - * in the indexqualorig, qpqual, and indexorderbyorig expressions. A bit + * We have to replace any outer-relation variables with nestloop params in + * the indexqualorig, qpqual, and indexorderbyorig expressions. A bit * annoying to have to do this separately from the processing in * fix_indexqual_references --- rethink this when generalizing the inner * indexscan support. But note we can't really do this earlier because @@ -1465,6 +1466,7 @@ create_bitmap_subplan(PlannerInfo *root, Path *bitmapqual, *indexqual = lappend(*indexqual, pred); } } + /* * Replace outer-relation variables with nestloop params, but only * after doing the above comparisons to index predicates. @@ -2330,10 +2332,10 @@ replace_nestloop_params_mutator(Node *node, PlannerInfo *root) return NULL; if (IsA(node, Var)) { - Var *var = (Var *) node; - Param *param; + Var *var = (Var *) node; + Param *param; NestLoopParam *nlp; - ListCell *lc; + ListCell *lc; /* Upper-level Vars should be long gone at this point */ Assert(var->varlevelsup == 0); @@ -2493,7 +2495,7 @@ fix_indexqual_references(PlannerInfo *root, IndexPath *index_path, * * This is a simplified version of fix_indexqual_references. The input does * not have RestrictInfo nodes, and we assume that indxqual.c already - * commuted the clauses to put the index keys on the left. Also, we don't + * commuted the clauses to put the index keys on the left. Also, we don't * bother to support any cases except simple OpExprs, since nothing else * is allowed for ordering operators. */ @@ -3082,8 +3084,8 @@ make_append(List *appendplans, List *tlist) * If you change this, see also create_append_path(). Also, the size * calculations should match set_append_rel_pathlist(). It'd be better * not to duplicate all this logic, but some callers of this function - * aren't working from an appendrel or AppendPath, so there's noplace - * to copy the data from. + * aren't working from an appendrel or AppendPath, so there's noplace to + * copy the data from. */ plan->startup_cost = 0; plan->total_cost = 0; @@ -3320,7 +3322,7 @@ make_mergejoin(List *tlist, */ static Sort * make_sort(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *lefttree, int numCols, - AttrNumber *sortColIdx, Oid *sortOperators, Oid *collations, bool *nullsFirst, +AttrNumber *sortColIdx, Oid *sortOperators, Oid *collations, bool *nullsFirst, double limit_tuples) { Sort *node = makeNode(Sort); @@ -3398,7 +3400,7 @@ add_sort_column(AttrNumber colIdx, Oid sortOp, Oid coll, bool nulls_first, * prepare_sort_from_pathkeys * Prepare to sort according to given pathkeys * - * This is used to set up for both Sort and MergeAppend nodes. It calculates + * This is used to set up for both Sort and MergeAppend nodes. It calculates * the executor's representation of the sort key information, and adjusts the * plan targetlist if needed to add resjunk sort columns. * @@ -3608,7 +3610,7 @@ prepare_sort_from_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *lefttree, List *pathkeys, pathkey->pk_eclass->ec_collation, pathkey->pk_nulls_first, numsortkeys, - sortColIdx, sortOperators, collations, nullsFirst); + sortColIdx, sortOperators, collations, nullsFirst); } Assert(numsortkeys > 0); @@ -3653,7 +3655,7 @@ make_sort_from_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *lefttree, List *pathkeys, /* Now build the Sort node */ return make_sort(root, lefttree, numsortkeys, - sortColIdx, sortOperators, collations, nullsFirst, limit_tuples); + sortColIdx, sortOperators, collations, nullsFirst, limit_tuples); } /* @@ -3699,7 +3701,7 @@ make_sort_from_sortclauses(PlannerInfo *root, List *sortcls, Plan *lefttree) exprCollation((Node *) tle->expr), sortcl->nulls_first, numsortkeys, - sortColIdx, sortOperators, collations, nullsFirst); + sortColIdx, sortOperators, collations, nullsFirst); } Assert(numsortkeys > 0); @@ -3761,7 +3763,7 @@ make_sort_from_groupcols(PlannerInfo *root, exprCollation((Node *) tle->expr), grpcl->nulls_first, numsortkeys, - sortColIdx, sortOperators, collations, nullsFirst); + sortColIdx, sortOperators, collations, nullsFirst); grpno++; } diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c index 0e00df6433..333ede218e 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c @@ -188,10 +188,11 @@ add_vars_to_targetlist(PlannerInfo *root, List *vars, Relids where_needed) phinfo->ph_needed = bms_add_members(phinfo->ph_needed, where_needed); + /* - * Update ph_may_need too. This is currently only necessary - * when being called from build_base_rel_tlists, but we may as - * well do it always. + * Update ph_may_need too. This is currently only necessary when + * being called from build_base_rel_tlists, but we may as well do + * it always. */ phinfo->ph_may_need = bms_add_members(phinfo->ph_may_need, where_needed); @@ -704,8 +705,8 @@ make_outerjoininfo(PlannerInfo *root, * this join's nullable side, and it may get used above this join, then * ensure that min_righthand contains the full eval_at set of the PHV. * This ensures that the PHV actually can be evaluated within the RHS. - * Note that this works only because we should already have determined - * the final eval_at level for any PHV syntactically within this join. + * Note that this works only because we should already have determined the + * final eval_at level for any PHV syntactically within this join. */ foreach(l, root->placeholder_list) { @@ -1070,7 +1071,7 @@ distribute_qual_to_rels(PlannerInfo *root, Node *clause, * * In all cases, it's important to initialize the left_ec and right_ec * fields of a mergejoinable clause, so that all possibly mergejoinable - * expressions have representations in EquivalenceClasses. If + * expressions have representations in EquivalenceClasses. If * process_equivalence is successful, it will take care of that; * otherwise, we have to call initialize_mergeclause_eclasses to do it. */ diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c index f2ddf2a844..7fce92c2f1 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c @@ -10,9 +10,9 @@ * ORDER BY col ASC/DESC * LIMIT 1) * Given a suitable index on tab.col, this can be much faster than the - * generic scan-all-the-rows aggregation plan. We can handle multiple + * generic scan-all-the-rows aggregation plan. We can handle multiple * MIN/MAX aggregates by generating multiple subqueries, and their - * orderings can be different. However, if the query contains any + * orderings can be different. However, if the query contains any * non-optimizable aggregates, there's no point since we'll have to * scan all the rows anyway. * @@ -87,10 +87,10 @@ preprocess_minmax_aggregates(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist) * * We don't handle GROUP BY or windowing, because our current * implementations of grouping require looking at all the rows anyway, and - * so there's not much point in optimizing MIN/MAX. (Note: relaxing - * this would likely require some restructuring in grouping_planner(), - * since it performs assorted processing related to these features between - * calling preprocess_minmax_aggregates and optimize_minmax_aggregates.) + * so there's not much point in optimizing MIN/MAX. (Note: relaxing this + * would likely require some restructuring in grouping_planner(), since it + * performs assorted processing related to these features between calling + * preprocess_minmax_aggregates and optimize_minmax_aggregates.) */ if (parse->groupClause || parse->hasWindowFuncs) return; @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ preprocess_minmax_aggregates(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist) /* * Scan the tlist and HAVING qual to find all the aggregates and verify - * all are MIN/MAX aggregates. Stop as soon as we find one that isn't. + * all are MIN/MAX aggregates. Stop as soon as we find one that isn't. */ aggs_list = NIL; if (find_minmax_aggs_walker((Node *) tlist, &aggs_list)) @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ preprocess_minmax_aggregates(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist) * ordering operator. */ eqop = get_equality_op_for_ordering_op(mminfo->aggsortop, &reverse); - if (!OidIsValid(eqop)) /* shouldn't happen */ + if (!OidIsValid(eqop)) /* shouldn't happen */ elog(ERROR, "could not find equality operator for ordering operator %u", mminfo->aggsortop); @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ preprocess_minmax_aggregates(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist) * We can use either an ordering that gives NULLS FIRST or one that * gives NULLS LAST; furthermore there's unlikely to be much * performance difference between them, so it doesn't seem worth - * costing out both ways if we get a hit on the first one. NULLS + * costing out both ways if we get a hit on the first one. NULLS * FIRST is more likely to be available if the operator is a * reverse-sort operator, so try that first if reverse. */ @@ -169,8 +169,8 @@ preprocess_minmax_aggregates(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist) /* * We're done until path generation is complete. Save info for later. - * (Setting root->minmax_aggs non-NIL signals we succeeded in making - * index access paths for all the aggregates.) + * (Setting root->minmax_aggs non-NIL signals we succeeded in making index + * access paths for all the aggregates.) */ root->minmax_aggs = aggs_list; } @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ find_minmax_aggs_walker(Node *node, List **context) mminfo->aggfnoid = aggref->aggfnoid; mminfo->aggsortop = aggsortop; mminfo->target = curTarget->expr; - mminfo->subroot = NULL; /* don't compute path yet */ + mminfo->subroot = NULL; /* don't compute path yet */ mminfo->path = NULL; mminfo->pathcost = 0; mminfo->param = NULL; @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ build_minmax_path(PlannerInfo *root, MinMaxAggInfo *mminfo, sortcl->eqop = eqop; sortcl->sortop = sortop; sortcl->nulls_first = nulls_first; - sortcl->hashable = false; /* no need to make this accurate */ + sortcl->hashable = false; /* no need to make this accurate */ parse->sortClause = list_make1(sortcl); /* set up expressions for LIMIT 1 */ @@ -450,8 +450,8 @@ build_minmax_path(PlannerInfo *root, MinMaxAggInfo *mminfo, subroot->query_pathkeys = subroot->sort_pathkeys; /* - * Generate the best paths for this query, telling query_planner that - * we have LIMIT 1. + * Generate the best paths for this query, telling query_planner that we + * have LIMIT 1. */ query_planner(subroot, parse->targetList, 1.0, 1.0, &cheapest_path, &sorted_path, &dNumGroups); @@ -527,11 +527,11 @@ make_agg_subplan(PlannerInfo *root, MinMaxAggInfo *mminfo) exprCollation((Node *) mminfo->target)); /* - * Make sure the initplan gets into the outer PlannerInfo, along with - * any other initplans generated by the sub-planning run. We had to - * include the outer PlannerInfo's pre-existing initplans into the - * inner one's init_plans list earlier, so make sure we don't put back - * any duplicate entries. + * Make sure the initplan gets into the outer PlannerInfo, along with any + * other initplans generated by the sub-planning run. We had to include + * the outer PlannerInfo's pre-existing initplans into the inner one's + * init_plans list earlier, so make sure we don't put back any duplicate + * entries. */ root->init_plans = list_concat_unique_ptr(root->init_plans, subroot->init_plans); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c index 3dc23662e7..ff39d5754d 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c @@ -179,12 +179,12 @@ query_planner(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist, /* * Examine the targetlist and join tree, adding entries to baserel * targetlists for all referenced Vars, and generating PlaceHolderInfo - * entries for all referenced PlaceHolderVars. Restrict and join clauses - * are added to appropriate lists belonging to the mentioned relations. - * We also build EquivalenceClasses for provably equivalent expressions. - * The SpecialJoinInfo list is also built to hold information about join - * order restrictions. Finally, we form a target joinlist for - * make_one_rel() to work from. + * entries for all referenced PlaceHolderVars. Restrict and join clauses + * are added to appropriate lists belonging to the mentioned relations. We + * also build EquivalenceClasses for provably equivalent expressions. The + * SpecialJoinInfo list is also built to hold information about join order + * restrictions. Finally, we form a target joinlist for make_one_rel() to + * work from. */ build_base_rel_tlists(root, tlist); @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ query_planner(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist, /* * Examine any "placeholder" expressions generated during subquery pullup. * Make sure that the Vars they need are marked as needed at the relevant - * join level. This must be done before join removal because it might + * join level. This must be done before join removal because it might * cause Vars or placeholders to be needed above a join when they weren't * so marked before. */ diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c index 56d25abc6d..58a5bf8ece 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c @@ -345,16 +345,16 @@ subquery_planner(PlannerGlobal *glob, Query *parse, inline_set_returning_functions(root); /* - * Check to see if any subqueries in the jointree can be merged into - * this query. + * Check to see if any subqueries in the jointree can be merged into this + * query. */ parse->jointree = (FromExpr *) pull_up_subqueries(root, (Node *) parse->jointree, NULL, NULL); /* - * If this is a simple UNION ALL query, flatten it into an appendrel. - * We do this now because it requires applying pull_up_subqueries to the - * leaf queries of the UNION ALL, which weren't touched above because they + * If this is a simple UNION ALL query, flatten it into an appendrel. We + * do this now because it requires applying pull_up_subqueries to the leaf + * queries of the UNION ALL, which weren't touched above because they * weren't referenced by the jointree (they will be after we do this). */ if (parse->setOperations) @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ subquery_planner(PlannerGlobal *glob, Query *parse, plan = (Plan *) make_modifytable(parse->commandType, parse->canSetTag, - list_make1_int(parse->resultRelation), + list_make1_int(parse->resultRelation), list_make1(plan), returningLists, rowMarks, @@ -3116,9 +3116,9 @@ plan_cluster_use_sort(Oid tableOid, Oid indexOid) /* * Determine eval cost of the index expressions, if any. We need to - * charge twice that amount for each tuple comparison that happens - * during the sort, since tuplesort.c will have to re-evaluate the - * index expressions each time. (XXX that's pretty inefficient...) + * charge twice that amount for each tuple comparison that happens during + * the sort, since tuplesort.c will have to re-evaluate the index + * expressions each time. (XXX that's pretty inefficient...) */ cost_qual_eval(&indexExprCost, indexInfo->indexprs, root); comparisonCost = 2.0 * (indexExprCost.startup + indexExprCost.per_tuple); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c index bd678ac7ed..a40f116bf9 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c @@ -1429,7 +1429,7 @@ pullup_replace_vars_callback(Var *var, * * If a query's setOperations tree consists entirely of simple UNION ALL * operations, flatten it into an append relation, which we can process more - * intelligently than the general setops case. Otherwise, do nothing. + * intelligently than the general setops case. Otherwise, do nothing. * * In most cases, this can succeed only for a top-level query, because for a * subquery in FROM, the parent query's invocation of pull_up_subqueries would @@ -1478,10 +1478,10 @@ flatten_simple_union_all(PlannerInfo *root) /* * Make a copy of the leftmost RTE and add it to the rtable. This copy - * will represent the leftmost leaf query in its capacity as a member - * of the appendrel. The original will represent the appendrel as a - * whole. (We must do things this way because the upper query's Vars - * have to be seen as referring to the whole appendrel.) + * will represent the leftmost leaf query in its capacity as a member of + * the appendrel. The original will represent the appendrel as a whole. + * (We must do things this way because the upper query's Vars have to be + * seen as referring to the whole appendrel.) */ childRTE = copyObject(leftmostRTE); parse->rtable = lappend(parse->rtable, childRTE); @@ -1503,8 +1503,8 @@ flatten_simple_union_all(PlannerInfo *root) parse->jointree->fromlist = list_make1(rtr); /* - * Now pretend the query has no setops. We must do this before trying - * to do subquery pullup, because of Assert in pull_up_simple_subquery. + * Now pretend the query has no setops. We must do this before trying to + * do subquery pullup, because of Assert in pull_up_simple_subquery. */ parse->setOperations = NULL; @@ -1842,9 +1842,9 @@ reduce_outer_joins_pass2(Node *jtnode, * never both, to the children of an outer join. * * Note that a SEMI join works like an inner join here: it's okay - * to pass down both local and upper constraints. (There can't - * be any upper constraints affecting its inner side, but it's - * not worth having a separate code path to avoid passing them.) + * to pass down both local and upper constraints. (There can't be + * any upper constraints affecting its inner side, but it's not + * worth having a separate code path to avoid passing them.) * * At a FULL join we just punt and pass nothing down --- is it * possible to be smarter? @@ -1882,7 +1882,7 @@ reduce_outer_joins_pass2(Node *jtnode, pass_nonnullable_vars = local_nonnullable_vars; pass_forced_null_vars = local_forced_null_vars; } - else if (jointype != JOIN_FULL) /* ie, LEFT or ANTI */ + else if (jointype != JOIN_FULL) /* ie, LEFT or ANTI */ { /* can't pass local constraints to non-nullable side */ pass_nonnullable_rels = nonnullable_rels; diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepqual.c b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepqual.c index 10e00d90dd..f6f00c4ee9 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepqual.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepqual.c @@ -54,12 +54,12 @@ static Expr *process_duplicate_ors(List *orlist); * Although this can be invoked on its own, it's mainly intended as a helper * for eval_const_expressions(), and that context drives several design * decisions. In particular, if the input is already AND/OR flat, we must - * preserve that property. We also don't bother to recurse in situations + * preserve that property. We also don't bother to recurse in situations * where we can assume that lower-level executions of eval_const_expressions * would already have simplified sub-clauses of the input. * * The difference between this and a simple make_notclause() is that this - * tries to get rid of the NOT node by logical simplification. It's clearly + * tries to get rid of the NOT node by logical simplification. It's clearly * always a win if the NOT node can be eliminated altogether. However, our * use of DeMorgan's laws could result in having more NOT nodes rather than * fewer. We do that unconditionally anyway, because in WHERE clauses it's @@ -141,21 +141,21 @@ negate_clause(Node *node) switch (expr->boolop) { - /*-------------------- - * Apply DeMorgan's Laws: - * (NOT (AND A B)) => (OR (NOT A) (NOT B)) - * (NOT (OR A B)) => (AND (NOT A) (NOT B)) - * i.e., swap AND for OR and negate each subclause. - * - * If the input is already AND/OR flat and has no NOT - * directly above AND or OR, this transformation preserves - * those properties. For example, if no direct child of - * the given AND clause is an AND or a NOT-above-OR, then - * the recursive calls of negate_clause() can't return any - * OR clauses. So we needn't call pull_ors() before - * building a new OR clause. Similarly for the OR case. - *-------------------- - */ + /*-------------------- + * Apply DeMorgan's Laws: + * (NOT (AND A B)) => (OR (NOT A) (NOT B)) + * (NOT (OR A B)) => (AND (NOT A) (NOT B)) + * i.e., swap AND for OR and negate each subclause. + * + * If the input is already AND/OR flat and has no NOT + * directly above AND or OR, this transformation preserves + * those properties. For example, if no direct child of + * the given AND clause is an AND or a NOT-above-OR, then + * the recursive calls of negate_clause() can't return any + * OR clauses. So we needn't call pull_ors() before + * building a new OR clause. Similarly for the OR case. + *-------------------- + */ case AND_EXPR: { List *nargs = NIL; @@ -183,6 +183,7 @@ negate_clause(Node *node) } break; case NOT_EXPR: + /* * NOT underneath NOT: they cancel. We assume the * input is already simplified, so no need to recurse. @@ -218,8 +219,8 @@ negate_clause(Node *node) break; case T_BooleanTest: { - BooleanTest *expr = (BooleanTest *) node; - BooleanTest *newexpr = makeNode(BooleanTest); + BooleanTest *expr = (BooleanTest *) node; + BooleanTest *newexpr = makeNode(BooleanTest); newexpr->arg = expr->arg; switch (expr->booltesttype) diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/preptlist.c b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/preptlist.c index 4ba8921528..c97150c6f7 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/preptlist.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/preptlist.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * Routines to preprocess the parse tree target list * * For INSERT and UPDATE queries, the targetlist must contain an entry for - * each attribute of the target relation in the correct order. For all query + * each attribute of the target relation in the correct order. For all query * types, we may need to add junk tlist entries for Vars used in the RETURNING * list and row ID information needed for EvalPlanQual checking. * @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ preprocess_targetlist(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist) /* * Add necessary junk columns for rowmarked rels. These values are needed * for locking of rels selected FOR UPDATE/SHARE, and to do EvalPlanQual - * rechecking. See comments for PlanRowMark in plannodes.h. + * rechecking. See comments for PlanRowMark in plannodes.h. */ foreach(lc, root->rowMarks) { diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c index e15a862042..0ed9535d94 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c @@ -938,7 +938,7 @@ generate_setop_tlist(List *colTypes, int flag, * The Vars are always generated with varno 0. */ static List * -generate_append_tlist(List *colTypes, List*colCollations, bool flag, +generate_append_tlist(List *colTypes, List *colCollations, bool flag, List *input_plans, List *refnames_tlist) { diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c index b1069259f9..b3c2aec97b 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c @@ -2042,7 +2042,7 @@ rowtype_field_matches(Oid rowtypeid, int fieldnum, * * Whenever a function is eliminated from the expression by means of * constant-expression evaluation or inlining, we add the function to - * root->glob->invalItems. This ensures the plan is known to depend on + * root->glob->invalItems. This ensures the plan is known to depend on * such functions, even though they aren't referenced anymore. * * We assume that the tree has already been type-checked and contains @@ -2437,8 +2437,8 @@ eval_const_expressions_mutator(Node *node, context); /* - * Use negate_clause() to see if we can simplify away - * the NOT. + * Use negate_clause() to see if we can simplify away the + * NOT. */ return negate_clause(arg); } @@ -2548,9 +2548,9 @@ eval_const_expressions_mutator(Node *node, makeConst(OIDOID, -1, InvalidOid, sizeof(Oid), ObjectIdGetDatum(intypioparam), false, true), - makeConst(INT4OID, -1, InvalidOid, sizeof(int32), - Int32GetDatum(-1), - false, true)); + makeConst(INT4OID, -1, InvalidOid, sizeof(int32), + Int32GetDatum(-1), + false, true)); simple = simplify_function(infunc, expr->resulttype, -1, @@ -2618,9 +2618,9 @@ eval_const_expressions_mutator(Node *node, /* * If we can simplify the input to a constant, then we don't need the * CollateExpr node at all: just change the constcollid field of the - * Const node. Otherwise, replace the CollateExpr with a RelabelType. - * (We do that so as to improve uniformity of expression representation - * and thus simplify comparison of expressions.) + * Const node. Otherwise, replace the CollateExpr with a RelabelType. + * (We do that so as to improve uniformity of expression + * representation and thus simplify comparison of expressions.) */ CollateExpr *collate = (CollateExpr *) node; Node *arg; @@ -2675,7 +2675,7 @@ eval_const_expressions_mutator(Node *node, * placeholder nodes, so that we have the opportunity to reduce * constant test conditions. For example this allows * CASE 0 WHEN 0 THEN 1 ELSE 1/0 END - * to reduce to 1 rather than drawing a divide-by-0 error. Note + * to reduce to 1 rather than drawing a divide-by-0 error. Note * that when the test expression is constant, we don't have to * include it in the resulting CASE; for example * CASE 0 WHEN x THEN y ELSE z END @@ -2855,9 +2855,9 @@ eval_const_expressions_mutator(Node *node, /* * We can remove null constants from the list. For a non-null * constant, if it has not been preceded by any other - * non-null-constant expressions then it is the result. Otherwise, - * it's the next argument, but we can drop following arguments - * since they will never be reached. + * non-null-constant expressions then it is the result. + * Otherwise, it's the next argument, but we can drop following + * arguments since they will never be reached. */ if (IsA(e, Const)) { @@ -3353,12 +3353,12 @@ simplify_boolean_equality(Oid opno, List *args) if (DatumGetBool(((Const *) leftop)->constvalue)) return rightop; /* true = foo */ else - return negate_clause(rightop); /* false = foo */ + return negate_clause(rightop); /* false = foo */ } else { if (DatumGetBool(((Const *) leftop)->constvalue)) - return negate_clause(rightop); /* true <> foo */ + return negate_clause(rightop); /* true <> foo */ else return rightop; /* false <> foo */ } @@ -3902,7 +3902,7 @@ inline_function(Oid funcid, Oid result_type, Oid result_collid, fexpr->funcresulttype = result_type; fexpr->funcretset = false; fexpr->funcformat = COERCE_DONTCARE; /* doesn't matter */ - fexpr->funccollid = result_collid; /* doesn't matter */ + fexpr->funccollid = result_collid; /* doesn't matter */ fexpr->inputcollid = input_collid; fexpr->args = args; fexpr->location = -1; @@ -4060,18 +4060,18 @@ inline_function(Oid funcid, Oid result_type, Oid result_collid, MemoryContextDelete(mycxt); /* - * If the result is of a collatable type, force the result to expose - * the correct collation. In most cases this does not matter, but - * it's possible that the function result is used directly as a sort key - * or in other places where we expect exprCollation() to tell the truth. + * If the result is of a collatable type, force the result to expose the + * correct collation. In most cases this does not matter, but it's + * possible that the function result is used directly as a sort key or in + * other places where we expect exprCollation() to tell the truth. */ if (OidIsValid(result_collid)) { - Oid exprcoll = exprCollation(newexpr); + Oid exprcoll = exprCollation(newexpr); if (OidIsValid(exprcoll) && exprcoll != result_collid) { - CollateExpr *newnode = makeNode(CollateExpr); + CollateExpr *newnode = makeNode(CollateExpr); newnode->arg = (Expr *) newexpr; newnode->collOid = result_collid; @@ -4370,11 +4370,11 @@ inline_set_returning_function(PlannerInfo *root, RangeTblEntry *rte) oldcxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(mycxt); /* - * When we call eval_const_expressions below, it might try to add items - * to root->glob->invalItems. Since it is running in the temp context, - * those items will be in that context, and will need to be copied out - * if we're successful. Temporarily reset the list so that we can keep - * those items separate from the pre-existing list contents. + * When we call eval_const_expressions below, it might try to add items to + * root->glob->invalItems. Since it is running in the temp context, those + * items will be in that context, and will need to be copied out if we're + * successful. Temporarily reset the list so that we can keep those items + * separate from the pre-existing list contents. */ saveInvalItems = root->glob->invalItems; root->glob->invalItems = NIL; @@ -4419,8 +4419,8 @@ inline_set_returning_function(PlannerInfo *root, RangeTblEntry *rte) goto fail; /* - * Set up to handle parameters while parsing the function body. We - * can use the FuncExpr just created as the input for + * Set up to handle parameters while parsing the function body. We can + * use the FuncExpr just created as the input for * prepare_sql_fn_parse_info. */ pinfo = prepare_sql_fn_parse_info(func_tuple, @@ -4438,7 +4438,7 @@ inline_set_returning_function(PlannerInfo *root, RangeTblEntry *rte) querytree_list = pg_analyze_and_rewrite_params(linitial(raw_parsetree_list), src, - (ParserSetupHook) sql_fn_parser_setup, + (ParserSetupHook) sql_fn_parser_setup, pinfo); if (list_length(querytree_list) != 1) goto fail; @@ -4513,8 +4513,8 @@ inline_set_returning_function(PlannerInfo *root, RangeTblEntry *rte) ReleaseSysCache(func_tuple); /* - * We don't have to fix collations here because the upper query is - * already parsed, ie, the collations in the RTE are what count. + * We don't have to fix collations here because the upper query is already + * parsed, ie, the collations in the RTE are what count. */ /* diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c index b60c88d925..55218b5869 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ create_merge_append_path(PlannerInfo *root, else { /* We'll need to insert a Sort node, so include cost for that */ - Path sort_path; /* dummy for result of cost_sort */ + Path sort_path; /* dummy for result of cost_sort */ cost_sort(&sort_path, root, @@ -1432,11 +1432,11 @@ create_foreignscan_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel) ForeignPath *pathnode = makeNode(ForeignPath); RangeTblEntry *rte; FdwRoutine *fdwroutine; - FdwPlan *fdwplan; + FdwPlan *fdwplan; pathnode->path.pathtype = T_ForeignScan; pathnode->path.parent = rel; - pathnode->path.pathkeys = NIL; /* result is always unordered */ + pathnode->path.pathkeys = NIL; /* result is always unordered */ /* Get FDW's callback info */ rte = planner_rt_fetch(rel->relid, root); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/placeholder.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/placeholder.c index 61edd4991c..9796fbf9b6 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/placeholder.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/placeholder.c @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ /* Local functions */ static Relids find_placeholders_recurse(PlannerInfo *root, Node *jtnode); static void find_placeholders_in_qual(PlannerInfo *root, Node *qual, - Relids relids); + Relids relids); /* @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ find_placeholders_recurse(PlannerInfo *root, Node *jtnode) { elog(ERROR, "unrecognized node type: %d", (int) nodeTag(jtnode)); - jtrelids = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ + jtrelids = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ } return jtrelids; } diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c index 72fd3e4ca7..a7e83729b1 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c @@ -1696,7 +1696,7 @@ get_btree_test_op(Oid pred_op, Oid clause_op, bool refute_it) else if (OidIsValid(clause_op_negator)) { clause_tuple = SearchSysCache3(AMOPOPID, - ObjectIdGetDatum(clause_op_negator), + ObjectIdGetDatum(clause_op_negator), CharGetDatum(AMOP_SEARCH), ObjectIdGetDatum(opfamily_id)); if (HeapTupleIsValid(clause_tuple)) diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/var.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/var.c index 944db23800..edf507c405 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/var.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/var.c @@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ pull_var_clause_walker(Node *node, pull_var_clause_context *context) * entries might now be arbitrary expressions, not just Vars. This affects * this function in one important way: we might find ourselves inserting * SubLink expressions into subqueries, and we must make sure that their - * Query.hasSubLinks fields get set to TRUE if so. If there are any + * Query.hasSubLinks fields get set to TRUE if so. If there are any * SubLinks in the join alias lists, the outer Query should already have * hasSubLinks = TRUE, so this is only relevant to un-flattened subqueries. * diff --git a/src/backend/parser/analyze.c b/src/backend/parser/analyze.c index 315f067b17..e4e83a6716 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/analyze.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/analyze.c @@ -759,8 +759,8 @@ transformInsertRow(ParseState *pstate, List *exprlist, * columns. Add a suitable hint if that seems to be the problem, * because the main error message is quite misleading for this case. * (If there's no stmtcols, you'll get something about data type - * mismatch, which is less misleading so we don't worry about giving - * a hint in that case.) + * mismatch, which is less misleading so we don't worry about giving a + * hint in that case.) */ ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR), @@ -809,7 +809,7 @@ transformInsertRow(ParseState *pstate, List *exprlist, * return -1 if expression isn't a RowExpr or a Var referencing one. * * This is currently used only for hint purposes, so we aren't terribly - * tense about recognizing all possible cases. The Var case is interesting + * tense about recognizing all possible cases. The Var case is interesting * because that's what we'll get in the INSERT ... SELECT (...) case. */ static int @@ -1100,8 +1100,8 @@ transformValuesClause(ParseState *pstate, SelectStmt *stmt) /* * We must assign collations now because assign_query_collations * doesn't process rangetable entries. We just assign all the - * collations independently in each row, and don't worry about - * whether they are consistent vertically either. + * collations independently in each row, and don't worry about whether + * they are consistent vertically either. */ assign_list_collations(pstate, newsublist); @@ -1452,7 +1452,7 @@ transformSetOperationStmt(ParseState *pstate, SelectStmt *stmt) * Recursively transform leaves and internal nodes of a set-op tree * * In addition to returning the transformed node, if targetlist isn't NULL - * then we return a list of its non-resjunk TargetEntry nodes. For a leaf + * then we return a list of its non-resjunk TargetEntry nodes. For a leaf * set-op node these are the actual targetlist entries; otherwise they are * dummy entries created to carry the type, typmod, collation, and location * (for error messages) of each output column of the set-op node. This info @@ -1672,7 +1672,7 @@ transformSetOperationTree(ParseState *pstate, SelectStmt *stmt, * child query's semantics. * * If a child expression is an UNKNOWN-type Const or Param, we - * want to replace it with the coerced expression. This can only + * want to replace it with the coerced expression. This can only * happen when the child is a leaf set-op node. It's safe to * replace the expression because if the child query's semantics * depended on the type of this output column, it'd have already @@ -1721,8 +1721,8 @@ transformSetOperationTree(ParseState *pstate, SelectStmt *stmt, * collation.) */ rescolcoll = select_common_collation(pstate, - list_make2(lcolnode, rcolnode), - (op->op == SETOP_UNION && op->all)); + list_make2(lcolnode, rcolnode), + (op->op == SETOP_UNION && op->all)); /* emit results */ op->colTypes = lappend_oid(op->colTypes, rescoltype); @@ -1778,7 +1778,7 @@ transformSetOperationTree(ParseState *pstate, SelectStmt *stmt, rescolnode->collation = rescolcoll; rescolnode->location = bestlocation; restle = makeTargetEntry((Expr *) rescolnode, - 0, /* no need to set resno */ + 0, /* no need to set resno */ NULL, false); *targetlist = lappend(*targetlist, restle); @@ -2331,10 +2331,10 @@ transformLockingClause(ParseState *pstate, Query *qry, LockingClause *lc, case RTE_RELATION: if (rte->relkind == RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE) ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("SELECT FOR UPDATE/SHARE cannot be used with foreign table \"%s\"", - rte->eref->aliasname), - parser_errposition(pstate, thisrel->location))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), + errmsg("SELECT FOR UPDATE/SHARE cannot be used with foreign table \"%s\"", + rte->eref->aliasname), + parser_errposition(pstate, thisrel->location))); applyLockingClause(qry, i, lc->forUpdate, lc->noWait, pushedDown); diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_agg.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_agg.c index 523d6e6989..8356133796 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_agg.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_agg.c @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ check_ungrouped_columns_walker(Node *node, /* * Check whether the Var is known functionally dependent on the GROUP - * BY columns. If so, we can allow the Var to be used, because the + * BY columns. If so, we can allow the Var to be used, because the * grouping is really a no-op for this table. However, this deduction * depends on one or more constraints of the table, so we have to add * those constraints to the query's constraintDeps list, because it's @@ -642,11 +642,11 @@ check_ungrouped_columns_walker(Node *node, * Because this is a pretty expensive check, and will have the same * outcome for all columns of a table, we remember which RTEs we've * already proven functional dependency for in the func_grouped_rels - * list. This test also prevents us from adding duplicate entries - * to the constraintDeps list. + * list. This test also prevents us from adding duplicate entries to + * the constraintDeps list. */ if (list_member_int(*context->func_grouped_rels, var->varno)) - return false; /* previously proven acceptable */ + return false; /* previously proven acceptable */ Assert(var->varno > 0 && (int) var->varno <= list_length(context->pstate->p_rtable)); @@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ check_ungrouped_columns_walker(Node *node, { *context->func_grouped_rels = lappend_int(*context->func_grouped_rels, var->varno); - return false; /* acceptable */ + return false; /* acceptable */ } } diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c index 6c0a78474c..c5fe6b6a3f 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c @@ -1078,7 +1078,7 @@ buildMergedJoinVar(ParseState *pstate, JoinType jointype, else if (l_colvar->vartypmod != outcoltypmod) l_node = (Node *) makeRelabelType((Expr *) l_colvar, outcoltype, outcoltypmod, - InvalidOid, /* fixed below */ + InvalidOid, /* fixed below */ COERCE_IMPLICIT_CAST); else l_node = (Node *) l_colvar; @@ -1090,7 +1090,7 @@ buildMergedJoinVar(ParseState *pstate, JoinType jointype, else if (r_colvar->vartypmod != outcoltypmod) r_node = (Node *) makeRelabelType((Expr *) r_colvar, outcoltype, outcoltypmod, - InvalidOid, /* fixed below */ + InvalidOid, /* fixed below */ COERCE_IMPLICIT_CAST); else r_node = (Node *) r_colvar; @@ -1143,8 +1143,8 @@ buildMergedJoinVar(ParseState *pstate, JoinType jointype, /* * Apply assign_expr_collations to fix up the collation info in the - * coercion and CoalesceExpr nodes, if we made any. This must be done - * now so that the join node's alias vars show correct collation info. + * coercion and CoalesceExpr nodes, if we made any. This must be done now + * so that the join node's alias vars show correct collation info. */ assign_expr_collations(pstate, res_node); diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c index 895c3ad985..0418972517 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ coerce_type(ParseState *pstate, Node *node, { /* * If we have a COLLATE clause, we have to push the coercion - * underneath the COLLATE. This is really ugly, but there is little + * underneath the COLLATE. This is really ugly, but there is little * choice because the above hacks on Consts and Params wouldn't happen * otherwise. */ @@ -1959,7 +1959,7 @@ find_coercion_pathway(Oid targetTypeId, Oid sourceTypeId, Oid sourceElem; if ((targetElem = get_element_type(targetTypeId)) != InvalidOid && - (sourceElem = get_base_element_type(sourceTypeId)) != InvalidOid) + (sourceElem = get_base_element_type(sourceTypeId)) != InvalidOid) { CoercionPathType elempathtype; Oid elemfuncid; @@ -2091,8 +2091,8 @@ is_complex_array(Oid typid) static bool typeIsOfTypedTable(Oid reltypeId, Oid reloftypeId) { - Oid relid = typeidTypeRelid(reltypeId); - bool result = false; + Oid relid = typeidTypeRelid(reltypeId); + bool result = false; if (relid) { diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_collate.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_collate.c index 3e557db266..f0cd3f88d2 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_collate.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_collate.c @@ -14,19 +14,19 @@ * 1. The output collation of each expression node, or InvalidOid if it * returns a noncollatable data type. This can also be InvalidOid if the * result type is collatable but the collation is indeterminate. - * 2. The collation to be used in executing each function. InvalidOid means + * 2. The collation to be used in executing each function. InvalidOid means * that there are no collatable inputs or their collation is indeterminate. * This value is only stored in node types that might call collation-using * functions. * * You might think we could get away with storing only one collation per - * node, but the two concepts really need to be kept distinct. Otherwise + * node, but the two concepts really need to be kept distinct. Otherwise * it's too confusing when a function produces a collatable output type but * has no collatable inputs or produces noncollatable output from collatable * inputs. * * Cases with indeterminate collation might result in an error being thrown - * at runtime. If we knew exactly which functions require collation + * at runtime. If we knew exactly which functions require collation * information, we could throw those errors at parse time instead. * * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2011, PostgreSQL Global Development Group @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ typedef struct static bool assign_query_collations_walker(Node *node, ParseState *pstate); static bool assign_collations_walker(Node *node, - assign_collations_context *context); + assign_collations_context *context); /* @@ -116,8 +116,8 @@ assign_query_collations_walker(Node *node, ParseState *pstate) return false; /* - * We don't want to recurse into a set-operations tree; it's already - * been fully processed in transformSetOperationStmt. + * We don't want to recurse into a set-operations tree; it's already been + * fully processed in transformSetOperationStmt. */ if (IsA(node, SetOperationStmt)) return false; @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ assign_list_collations(ParseState *pstate, List *exprs) foreach(lc, exprs) { - Node *node = (Node *) lfirst(lc); + Node *node = (Node *) lfirst(lc); assign_expr_collations(pstate, node); } @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ select_common_collation(ParseState *pstate, List *exprs, bool none_ok) * Recursive guts of collation processing. * * Nodes with no children (eg, Vars, Consts, Params) must have been marked - * when built. All upper-level nodes are marked here. + * when built. All upper-level nodes are marked here. * * Note: if this is invoked directly on a List, it will attempt to infer a * common collation for all the list members. In particular, it will throw @@ -250,9 +250,9 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) return false; /* - * Prepare for recursion. For most node types, though not all, the - * first thing we do is recurse to process all nodes below this one. - * Each level of the tree has its own local context. + * Prepare for recursion. For most node types, though not all, the first + * thing we do is recurse to process all nodes below this one. Each level + * of the tree has its own local context. */ loccontext.pstate = context->pstate; loccontext.collation = InvalidOid; @@ -323,11 +323,11 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) { /* * CaseExpr is a special case because we do not want to - * recurse into the test expression (if any). It was - * already marked with collations during transformCaseExpr, - * and furthermore its collation is not relevant to the - * result of the CASE --- only the output expressions are. - * So we can't use expression_tree_walker here. + * recurse into the test expression (if any). It was already + * marked with collations during transformCaseExpr, and + * furthermore its collation is not relevant to the result of + * the CASE --- only the output expressions are. So we can't + * use expression_tree_walker here. */ CaseExpr *expr = (CaseExpr *) node; Oid typcollation; @@ -338,6 +338,7 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) CaseWhen *when = (CaseWhen *) lfirst(lc); Assert(IsA(when, CaseWhen)); + /* * The condition expressions mustn't affect the CASE's * result collation either; but since they are known to @@ -401,11 +402,11 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) case T_RowExpr: { /* - * RowExpr is a special case because the subexpressions - * are independent: we don't want to complain if some of - * them have incompatible explicit collations. + * RowExpr is a special case because the subexpressions are + * independent: we don't want to complain if some of them have + * incompatible explicit collations. */ - RowExpr *expr = (RowExpr *) node; + RowExpr *expr = (RowExpr *) node; assign_list_collations(context->pstate, expr->args); @@ -414,7 +415,7 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) * has a collation, we can just stop here: this node has no * impact on the collation of its parent. */ - return false; /* done */ + return false; /* done */ } case T_RowCompareExpr: { @@ -431,9 +432,9 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) forboth(l, expr->largs, r, expr->rargs) { - Node *le = (Node *) lfirst(l); - Node *re = (Node *) lfirst(r); - Oid coll; + Node *le = (Node *) lfirst(l); + Node *re = (Node *) lfirst(r); + Oid coll; coll = select_common_collation(context->pstate, list_make2(le, re), @@ -443,11 +444,11 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) expr->inputcollids = colls; /* - * Since the result is always boolean and therefore never - * has a collation, we can just stop here: this node has no - * impact on the collation of its parent. + * Since the result is always boolean and therefore never has + * a collation, we can just stop here: this node has no impact + * on the collation of its parent. */ - return false; /* done */ + return false; /* done */ } case T_CoerceToDomain: { @@ -455,12 +456,12 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) * If the domain declaration included a non-default COLLATE * spec, then use that collation as the output collation of * the coercion. Otherwise allow the input collation to - * bubble up. (The input should be of the domain's base - * type, therefore we don't need to worry about it not being + * bubble up. (The input should be of the domain's base type, + * therefore we don't need to worry about it not being * collatable when the domain is.) */ CoerceToDomain *expr = (CoerceToDomain *) node; - Oid typcollation = get_typcollation(expr->resulttype); + Oid typcollation = get_typcollation(expr->resulttype); /* ... but first, recurse */ (void) expression_tree_walker(node, @@ -510,7 +511,7 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) /* * TargetEntry can have only one child, and should bubble that - * state up to its parent. We can't use the general-case code + * state up to its parent. We can't use the general-case code * below because exprType and friends don't work on TargetEntry. */ collation = loccontext.collation; @@ -525,9 +526,9 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) * There are some cases where there might not be a failure, for * example if the planner chooses to use hash aggregation instead * of sorting for grouping; but it seems better to predictably - * throw an error. (Compare transformSetOperationTree, which will - * throw error for indeterminate collation of set-op columns, - * even though the planner might be able to implement the set-op + * throw an error. (Compare transformSetOperationTree, which will + * throw error for indeterminate collation of set-op columns, even + * though the planner might be able to implement the set-op * without sorting.) */ if (strength == COLLATE_CONFLICT && @@ -548,6 +549,7 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) (void) expression_tree_walker(node, assign_collations_walker, (void *) &loccontext); + /* * When we're invoked on a query's jointree, we don't need to do * anything with join nodes except recurse through them to process @@ -599,6 +601,7 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) case T_CaseTestExpr: case T_SetToDefault: case T_CurrentOfExpr: + /* * General case for childless expression nodes. These should * already have a collation assigned; it is not this function's @@ -610,10 +613,10 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) /* * Note: in most cases, there will be an assigned collation * whenever type_is_collatable(exprType(node)); but an exception - * occurs for a Var referencing a subquery output column for - * which a unique collation was not determinable. That may lead - * to a runtime failure if a collation-sensitive function is - * applied to the Var. + * occurs for a Var referencing a subquery output column for which + * a unique collation was not determinable. That may lead to a + * runtime failure if a collation-sensitive function is applied to + * the Var. */ if (OidIsValid(collation)) @@ -626,10 +629,10 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) default: { /* - * General case for most expression nodes with children. - * First recurse, then figure out what to assign here. + * General case for most expression nodes with children. First + * recurse, then figure out what to assign here. */ - Oid typcollation; + Oid typcollation; (void) expression_tree_walker(node, assign_collations_walker, @@ -668,9 +671,9 @@ assign_collations_walker(Node *node, assign_collations_context *context) } /* - * Save the result collation into the expression node. - * If the state is COLLATE_CONFLICT, we'll set the collation - * to InvalidOid, which might result in an error at runtime. + * Save the result collation into the expression node. If the + * state is COLLATE_CONFLICT, we'll set the collation to + * InvalidOid, which might result in an error at runtime. */ if (strength == COLLATE_CONFLICT) exprSetCollation(node, InvalidOid); diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_cte.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_cte.c index c527f7589e..41097263b4 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_cte.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_cte.c @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ analyzeCTE(ParseState *pstate, CommonTableExpr *cte) cte->ctequery = (Node *) query; /* - * Check that we got something reasonable. These first two cases should + * Check that we got something reasonable. These first two cases should * be prevented by the grammar. */ if (!IsA(query, Query)) @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ analyzeCTE(ParseState *pstate, CommonTableExpr *cte) continue; varattno++; Assert(varattno == te->resno); - if (lctyp == NULL || lctypmod == NULL || lccoll == NULL) /* shouldn't happen */ + if (lctyp == NULL || lctypmod == NULL || lccoll == NULL) /* shouldn't happen */ elog(ERROR, "wrong number of output columns in WITH"); texpr = (Node *) te->expr; if (exprType(texpr) != lfirst_oid(lctyp) || @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ analyzeCTE(ParseState *pstate, CommonTableExpr *cte) lctypmod = lnext(lctypmod); lccoll = lnext(lccoll); } - if (lctyp != NULL || lctypmod != NULL || lccoll != NULL) /* shouldn't happen */ + if (lctyp != NULL || lctypmod != NULL || lccoll != NULL) /* shouldn't happen */ elog(ERROR, "wrong number of output columns in WITH"); } } @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ checkWellFormedRecursion(CteState *cstate) CommonTableExpr *cte = cstate->items[i].cte; SelectStmt *stmt = (SelectStmt *) cte->ctequery; - Assert(!IsA(stmt, Query)); /* not analyzed yet */ + Assert(!IsA(stmt, Query)); /* not analyzed yet */ /* Ignore items that weren't found to be recursive */ if (!cte->cterecursive) diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c index 4986e0e5fa..08f0439e7e 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c @@ -163,6 +163,7 @@ transformExpr(ParseState *pstate, Node *expr) typenameTypeIdAndMod(pstate, tc->typeName, &targetType, &targetTypmod); + /* * If target is a domain over array, work with the base * array type here. transformTypeCast below will cast the @@ -1283,9 +1284,9 @@ transformCaseExpr(ParseState *pstate, CaseExpr *c) /* * Run collation assignment on the test expression so that we know - * what collation to mark the placeholder with. In principle we - * could leave it to parse_collate.c to do that later, but propagating - * the result to the CaseTestExpr would be unnecessarily complicated. + * what collation to mark the placeholder with. In principle we could + * leave it to parse_collate.c to do that later, but propagating the + * result to the CaseTestExpr would be unnecessarily complicated. */ assign_expr_collations(pstate, arg); @@ -2122,15 +2123,16 @@ static Node * transformCollateClause(ParseState *pstate, CollateClause *c) { CollateExpr *newc; - Oid argtype; + Oid argtype; newc = makeNode(CollateExpr); newc->arg = (Expr *) transformExpr(pstate, c->arg); argtype = exprType((Node *) newc->arg); + /* - * The unknown type is not collatable, but coerce_type() takes - * care of it separately, so we'll let it go here. + * The unknown type is not collatable, but coerce_type() takes care of it + * separately, so we'll let it go here. */ if (!type_is_collatable(argtype) && argtype != UNKNOWNOID) ereport(ERROR, @@ -2351,7 +2353,7 @@ make_row_comparison_op(ParseState *pstate, List *opname, rcexpr->rctype = rctype; rcexpr->opnos = opnos; rcexpr->opfamilies = opfamilies; - rcexpr->inputcollids = NIL; /* assign_expr_collations will fix this */ + rcexpr->inputcollids = NIL; /* assign_expr_collations will fix this */ rcexpr->largs = largs; rcexpr->rargs = rargs; diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c index ba699e9a1e..75f1e20475 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c @@ -288,9 +288,9 @@ ParseFuncOrColumn(ParseState *pstate, List *funcname, List *fargs, errmsg("function %s does not exist", func_signature_string(funcname, nargs, argnames, actual_arg_types)), - errhint("No aggregate function matches the given name and argument types. " - "Perhaps you misplaced ORDER BY; ORDER BY must appear " - "after all regular arguments of the aggregate."), + errhint("No aggregate function matches the given name and argument types. " + "Perhaps you misplaced ORDER BY; ORDER BY must appear " + "after all regular arguments of the aggregate."), parser_errposition(pstate, location))); } else @@ -1034,7 +1034,7 @@ func_get_detail(List *funcname, case COERCION_PATH_COERCEVIAIO: if ((sourceType == RECORDOID || ISCOMPLEX(sourceType)) && - TypeCategory(targetType) == TYPCATEGORY_STRING) + TypeCategory(targetType) == TYPCATEGORY_STRING) iscoercion = false; else iscoercion = true; diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_node.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_node.c index 07257accc8..7b5c040cb4 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_node.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_node.c @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ transformArrayType(Oid *arrayType, int32 *arrayTypmod) * If the input is a domain, smash to base type, and extract the actual * typmod to be applied to the base type. Subscripting a domain is an * operation that necessarily works on the base array type, not the domain - * itself. (Note that we provide no method whereby the creator of a + * itself. (Note that we provide no method whereby the creator of a * domain over an array type could hide its ability to be subscripted.) */ *arrayType = getBaseTypeAndTypmod(*arrayType, arrayTypmod); @@ -290,8 +290,8 @@ transformArraySubscripts(ParseState *pstate, /* * Caller may or may not have bothered to determine elementType. Note - * that if the caller did do so, arrayType/arrayTypMod must be as - * modified by transformArrayType, ie, smash domain to base type. + * that if the caller did do so, arrayType/arrayTypMod must be as modified + * by transformArrayType, ie, smash domain to base type. */ if (!OidIsValid(elementType)) elementType = transformArrayType(&arrayType, &arrayTypMod); @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ make_const(ParseState *pstate, Value *value, int location) con = makeConst(typeid, -1, /* typmod -1 is OK for all cases */ - InvalidOid, /* all cases are uncollatable types */ + InvalidOid, /* all cases are uncollatable types */ typelen, val, false, diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c index 822e0a0a62..15a3bb3a01 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c @@ -214,9 +214,9 @@ get_sort_group_operators(Oid argtype, /* * If the datatype is an array, then we can use array_lt and friends ... * but only if there are suitable operators for the element type. - * Likewise, array types are only hashable if the element type is. - * Testing all three operator IDs here should be redundant, but let's do - * it anyway. + * Likewise, array types are only hashable if the element type is. Testing + * all three operator IDs here should be redundant, but let's do it + * anyway. */ if (lt_opr == ARRAY_LT_OP || eq_opr == ARRAY_EQ_OP || diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_param.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_param.c index 1895f92d7c..3b8a67619e 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_param.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_param.c @@ -233,8 +233,8 @@ variable_coerce_param_hook(ParseState *pstate, Param *param, /* * This module always sets a Param's collation to be the default for - * its datatype. If that's not what you want, you should be using - * the more general parser substitution hooks. + * its datatype. If that's not what you want, you should be using the + * more general parser substitution hooks. */ param->paramcollid = get_typcollation(param->paramtype); diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_relation.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_relation.c index 1af3f2f3b5..d603ce2f42 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_relation.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_relation.c @@ -1393,14 +1393,14 @@ addRangeTableEntryForCTE(ParseState *pstate, */ if (IsA(cte->ctequery, Query)) { - Query *ctequery = (Query *) cte->ctequery; + Query *ctequery = (Query *) cte->ctequery; if (ctequery->commandType != CMD_SELECT && ctequery->returningList == NIL) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("WITH query \"%s\" does not have a RETURNING clause", - cte->ctename), + errmsg("WITH query \"%s\" does not have a RETURNING clause", + cte->ctename), parser_errposition(pstate, rv->location))); } @@ -1871,7 +1871,7 @@ expandTupleDesc(TupleDesc tupdesc, Alias *eref, * what type the Const claims to be. */ *colvars = lappend(*colvars, - makeNullConst(INT4OID, -1, InvalidOid)); + makeNullConst(INT4OID, -1, InvalidOid)); } } continue; @@ -1893,7 +1893,7 @@ expandTupleDesc(TupleDesc tupdesc, Alias *eref, Var *varnode; varnode = makeVar(rtindex, attr->attnum, - attr->atttypid, attr->atttypmod, attr->attcollation, + attr->atttypid, attr->atttypmod, attr->attcollation, sublevels_up); varnode->location = location; diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c index 52c6db2eb5..3f630147b0 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c @@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ transformAssignmentIndirection(ParseState *pstate, parser_errposition(pstate, location))); get_atttypetypmodcoll(typrelid, attnum, - &fieldTypeId, &fieldTypMod, &fieldCollation); + &fieldTypeId, &fieldTypMod, &fieldCollation); /* recurse to create appropriate RHS for field assign */ rhs = transformAssignmentIndirection(pstate, @@ -783,8 +783,8 @@ transformAssignmentSubscripts(ParseState *pstate, /* * Array normally has same collation as elements, but there's an - * exception: we might be subscripting a domain over an array type. - * In that case use collation of the base type. + * exception: we might be subscripting a domain over an array type. In + * that case use collation of the base type. */ if (arrayType == targetTypeId) collationNeeded = targetCollation; diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c index b65f5f991c..22411f1608 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ static void transformFKConstraints(CreateStmtContext *cxt, bool skipValidation, bool isAddConstraint); static void transformConstraintAttrs(CreateStmtContext *cxt, - List *constraintList); + List *constraintList); static void transformColumnType(CreateStmtContext *cxt, ColumnDef *column); static void setSchemaName(char *context_schema, char **stmt_schema_name); @@ -368,8 +368,8 @@ transformColumnDefinition(CreateStmtContext *cxt, ColumnDef *column) * If this is ALTER ADD COLUMN, make sure the sequence will be owned * by the table's owner. The current user might be someone else * (perhaps a superuser, or someone who's only a member of the owning - * role), but the SEQUENCE OWNED BY mechanisms will bleat unless - * table and sequence have exactly the same owning role. + * role), but the SEQUENCE OWNED BY mechanisms will bleat unless table + * and sequence have exactly the same owning role. */ if (cxt->rel) seqstmt->ownerId = cxt->rel->rd_rel->relowner; @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ transformInhRelation(CreateStmtContext *cxt, InhRelation *inhRelation) /* Copy comment on constraint */ if ((inhRelation->options & CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_COMMENTS) && (comment = GetComment(get_constraint_oid(RelationGetRelid(relation), - n->conname, false), + n->conname, false), ConstraintRelationId, 0)) != NULL) { @@ -1390,8 +1390,8 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) /* * If it's ALTER TABLE ADD CONSTRAINT USING INDEX, look up the index and * verify it's usable, then extract the implied column name list. (We - * will not actually need the column name list at runtime, but we need - * it now to check for duplicate column entries below.) + * will not actually need the column name list at runtime, but we need it + * now to check for duplicate column entries below.) */ if (constraint->indexname != NULL) { @@ -1436,8 +1436,8 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) if (OidIsValid(get_index_constraint(index_oid))) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("index \"%s\" is already associated with a constraint", - index_name), + errmsg("index \"%s\" is already associated with a constraint", + index_name), parser_errposition(cxt->pstate, constraint->location))); /* Perform validity checks on the index */ @@ -1482,8 +1482,8 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) parser_errposition(cxt->pstate, constraint->location))); /* - * It's probably unsafe to change a deferred index to non-deferred. - * (A non-constraint index couldn't be deferred anyway, so this case + * It's probably unsafe to change a deferred index to non-deferred. (A + * non-constraint index couldn't be deferred anyway, so this case * should never occur; no need to sweat, but let's check it.) */ if (!index_form->indimmediate && !constraint->deferrable) @@ -1494,7 +1494,7 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) parser_errposition(cxt->pstate, constraint->location))); /* - * Insist on it being a btree. That's the only kind that supports + * Insist on it being a btree. That's the only kind that supports * uniqueness at the moment anyway; but we must have an index that * exactly matches what you'd get from plain ADD CONSTRAINT syntax, * else dump and reload will produce a different index (breaking @@ -1514,15 +1514,15 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) for (i = 0; i < index_form->indnatts; i++) { - int2 attnum = index_form->indkey.values[i]; + int2 attnum = index_form->indkey.values[i]; Form_pg_attribute attform; - char *attname; - Oid defopclass; + char *attname; + Oid defopclass; /* * We shouldn't see attnum == 0 here, since we already rejected - * expression indexes. If we do, SystemAttributeDefinition - * will throw an error. + * expression indexes. If we do, SystemAttributeDefinition will + * throw an error. */ if (attnum > 0) { @@ -1531,11 +1531,11 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) } else attform = SystemAttributeDefinition(attnum, - heap_rel->rd_rel->relhasoids); + heap_rel->rd_rel->relhasoids); attname = pstrdup(NameStr(attform->attname)); /* - * Insist on default opclass and sort options. While the index + * Insist on default opclass and sort options. While the index * would still work as a constraint with non-default settings, it * might not provide exactly the same uniqueness semantics as * you'd get from a normally-created constraint; and there's also @@ -1549,7 +1549,7 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), errmsg("index \"%s\" does not have default sorting behavior", index_name), errdetail("Cannot create a PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE constraint using such an index."), - parser_errposition(cxt->pstate, constraint->location))); + parser_errposition(cxt->pstate, constraint->location))); constraint->keys = lappend(constraint->keys, makeString(attname)); } @@ -1694,13 +1694,13 @@ transformIndexConstraint(Constraint *constraint, CreateStmtContext *cxt) (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_COLUMN), errmsg("column \"%s\" appears twice in primary key constraint", key), - parser_errposition(cxt->pstate, constraint->location))); + parser_errposition(cxt->pstate, constraint->location))); else ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_COLUMN), errmsg("column \"%s\" appears twice in unique constraint", key), - parser_errposition(cxt->pstate, constraint->location))); + parser_errposition(cxt->pstate, constraint->location))); } } @@ -1743,7 +1743,7 @@ transformFKConstraints(CreateStmtContext *cxt, Constraint *constraint = (Constraint *) lfirst(fkclist); constraint->skip_validation = true; - constraint->initially_valid = true; + constraint->initially_valid = true; } } @@ -2120,18 +2120,18 @@ transformRuleStmt(RuleStmt *stmt, const char *queryString, * However, they were already in the outer rangetable when we * analyzed the query, so we have to check. * - * Note that in the INSERT...SELECT case, we need to examine - * the CTE lists of both top_subqry and sub_qry. + * Note that in the INSERT...SELECT case, we need to examine the + * CTE lists of both top_subqry and sub_qry. * - * Note that we aren't digging into the body of the query - * looking for WITHs in nested sub-SELECTs. A WITH down there - * can legitimately refer to OLD/NEW, because it'd be an + * Note that we aren't digging into the body of the query looking + * for WITHs in nested sub-SELECTs. A WITH down there can + * legitimately refer to OLD/NEW, because it'd be an * indirect-correlated outer reference. */ if (rangeTableEntry_used((Node *) top_subqry->cteList, PRS2_OLD_VARNO, 0) || rangeTableEntry_used((Node *) sub_qry->cteList, - PRS2_OLD_VARNO, 0)) + PRS2_OLD_VARNO, 0)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), errmsg("cannot refer to OLD within WITH query"))); @@ -2226,12 +2226,13 @@ transformAlterTableStmt(AlterTableStmt *stmt, const char *queryString) lockmode = AlterTableGetLockLevel(stmt->cmds); /* - * Acquire appropriate lock on the target relation, which will be held until - * end of transaction. This ensures any decisions we make here based on - * the state of the relation will still be good at execution. We must get - * lock now because execution will later require it; taking a lower grade lock - * now and trying to upgrade later risks deadlock. Any new commands we add - * after this must not upgrade the lock level requested here. + * Acquire appropriate lock on the target relation, which will be held + * until end of transaction. This ensures any decisions we make here + * based on the state of the relation will still be good at execution. We + * must get lock now because execution will later require it; taking a + * lower grade lock now and trying to upgrade later risks deadlock. Any + * new commands we add after this must not upgrade the lock level + * requested here. */ rel = relation_openrv(stmt->relation, lockmode); @@ -2522,7 +2523,7 @@ transformColumnType(CreateStmtContext *cxt, ColumnDef *column) if (column->collClause) { Form_pg_type typtup = (Form_pg_type) GETSTRUCT(ctype); - Oid collOid; + Oid collOid; collOid = LookupCollation(cxt->pstate, column->collClause->collname, diff --git a/src/backend/port/dynloader/freebsd.c b/src/backend/port/dynloader/freebsd.c index 373d6aaec8..bc40079178 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/dynloader/freebsd.c +++ b/src/backend/port/dynloader/freebsd.c @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ BSD44_derived_dlsym(void *handle, const char *name) snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "_%s", name); name = buf; } -#endif /* !__ELF__ */ +#endif /* !__ELF__ */ if ((vp = dlsym(handle, (char *) name)) == NULL) snprintf(error_message, sizeof(error_message), "dlsym (%s) failed", name); diff --git a/src/backend/port/dynloader/netbsd.c b/src/backend/port/dynloader/netbsd.c index d120656141..1bac83784a 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/dynloader/netbsd.c +++ b/src/backend/port/dynloader/netbsd.c @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ BSD44_derived_dlsym(void *handle, const char *name) snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "_%s", name); name = buf; } -#endif /* !__ELF__ */ +#endif /* !__ELF__ */ if ((vp = dlsym(handle, (char *) name)) == NULL) snprintf(error_message, sizeof(error_message), "dlsym (%s) failed", name); diff --git a/src/backend/port/dynloader/openbsd.c b/src/backend/port/dynloader/openbsd.c index 2d061efb1e..4556a2dfeb 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/dynloader/openbsd.c +++ b/src/backend/port/dynloader/openbsd.c @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ BSD44_derived_dlsym(void *handle, const char *name) snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "_%s", name); name = buf; } -#endif /* !__ELF__ */ +#endif /* !__ELF__ */ if ((vp = dlsym(handle, (char *) name)) == NULL) snprintf(error_message, sizeof(error_message), "dlsym (%s) failed", name); diff --git a/src/backend/port/pipe.c b/src/backend/port/pipe.c index eeed3fc2e1..b86a53ad34 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/pipe.c +++ b/src/backend/port/pipe.c @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ pgpipe(int handles[2]) serv_addr.sin_family = AF_INET; serv_addr.sin_port = htons(0); serv_addr.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(INADDR_LOOPBACK); - if (bind(s, (SOCKADDR *) & serv_addr, len) == SOCKET_ERROR) + if (bind(s, (SOCKADDR *) &serv_addr, len) == SOCKET_ERROR) { ereport(LOG, (errmsg_internal("pgpipe failed to bind: %ui", WSAGetLastError()))); closesocket(s); @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ pgpipe(int handles[2]) closesocket(s); return -1; } - if (getsockname(s, (SOCKADDR *) & serv_addr, &len) == SOCKET_ERROR) + if (getsockname(s, (SOCKADDR *) &serv_addr, &len) == SOCKET_ERROR) { ereport(LOG, (errmsg_internal("pgpipe failed to getsockname: %ui", WSAGetLastError()))); closesocket(s); @@ -62,13 +62,13 @@ pgpipe(int handles[2]) return -1; } - if (connect(handles[1], (SOCKADDR *) & serv_addr, len) == SOCKET_ERROR) + if (connect(handles[1], (SOCKADDR *) &serv_addr, len) == SOCKET_ERROR) { ereport(LOG, (errmsg_internal("pgpipe failed to connect socket: %ui", WSAGetLastError()))); closesocket(s); return -1; } - if ((handles[0] = accept(s, (SOCKADDR *) & serv_addr, &len)) == INVALID_SOCKET) + if ((handles[0] = accept(s, (SOCKADDR *) &serv_addr, &len)) == INVALID_SOCKET) { ereport(LOG, (errmsg_internal("pgpipe failed to accept socket: %ui", WSAGetLastError()))); closesocket(handles[1]); diff --git a/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c b/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c index 102a28ed04..754d2ac7e0 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c +++ b/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ InternalIpcMemoryCreate(IpcMemoryKey memKey, Size size) "segment exceeded your kernel's SHMMAX parameter. You can either " "reduce the request size or reconfigure the kernel with larger SHMMAX. " "To reduce the request size (currently %lu bytes), reduce " - "PostgreSQL's shared memory usage, perhaps by reducing shared_buffers " + "PostgreSQL's shared memory usage, perhaps by reducing shared_buffers " "or max_connections.\n" "If the request size is already small, it's possible that it is less than " "your kernel's SHMMIN parameter, in which case raising the request size or " @@ -164,10 +164,10 @@ InternalIpcMemoryCreate(IpcMemoryKey memKey, Size size) (errno == ENOMEM) ? errhint("This error usually means that PostgreSQL's request for a shared " "memory segment exceeded available memory or swap space, " - "or exceeded your kernel's SHMALL parameter. You can either " + "or exceeded your kernel's SHMALL parameter. You can either " "reduce the request size or reconfigure the kernel with larger SHMALL. " "To reduce the request size (currently %lu bytes), reduce " - "PostgreSQL's shared memory usage, perhaps by reducing shared_buffers " + "PostgreSQL's shared memory usage, perhaps by reducing shared_buffers " "or max_connections.\n" "The PostgreSQL documentation contains more information about shared " "memory configuration.", @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ InternalIpcMemoryCreate(IpcMemoryKey memKey, Size size) * hurt, but might confuse humans). */ { - char line[64]; + char line[64]; sprintf(line, "%9lu %9lu", (unsigned long) memKey, (unsigned long) shmid); diff --git a/src/backend/port/unix_latch.c b/src/backend/port/unix_latch.c index 32d0cb5e3f..6dae7c94c0 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/unix_latch.c +++ b/src/backend/port/unix_latch.c @@ -37,11 +37,11 @@ * * for (;;) * { - * ResetLatch(); - * if (work to do) - * Do Stuff(); + * ResetLatch(); + * if (work to do) + * Do Stuff(); * - * WaitLatch(); + * WaitLatch(); * } * * It's important to reset the latch *before* checking if there's work to @@ -100,8 +100,8 @@ static volatile sig_atomic_t waiting = false; /* Read and write end of the self-pipe */ -static int selfpipe_readfd = -1; -static int selfpipe_writefd = -1; +static int selfpipe_readfd = -1; +static int selfpipe_writefd = -1; /* private function prototypes */ static void initSelfPipe(void); @@ -205,7 +205,8 @@ int WaitLatchOrSocket(volatile Latch *latch, pgsocket sock, bool forRead, bool forWrite, long timeout) { - struct timeval tv, *tvp = NULL; + struct timeval tv, + *tvp = NULL; fd_set input_mask; fd_set output_mask; int rc; @@ -225,13 +226,13 @@ WaitLatchOrSocket(volatile Latch *latch, pgsocket sock, bool forRead, waiting = true; for (;;) { - int hifd; + int hifd; /* * Clear the pipe, and check if the latch is set already. If someone - * sets the latch between this and the select() below, the setter - * will write a byte to the pipe (or signal us and the signal handler - * will do that), and the select() will return immediately. + * sets the latch between this and the select() below, the setter will + * write a byte to the pipe (or signal us and the signal handler will + * do that), and the select() will return immediately. */ drainSelfPipe(); if (latch->is_set) @@ -278,7 +279,7 @@ WaitLatchOrSocket(volatile Latch *latch, pgsocket sock, bool forRead, (forWrite && FD_ISSET(sock, &output_mask)))) { result = 2; - break; /* data available in socket */ + break; /* data available in socket */ } } waiting = false; @@ -293,7 +294,7 @@ WaitLatchOrSocket(volatile Latch *latch, pgsocket sock, bool forRead, void SetLatch(volatile Latch *latch) { - pid_t owner_pid; + pid_t owner_pid; /* Quick exit if already set */ if (latch->is_set) @@ -302,17 +303,17 @@ SetLatch(volatile Latch *latch) latch->is_set = true; /* - * See if anyone's waiting for the latch. It can be the current process - * if we're in a signal handler. We use the self-pipe to wake up the - * select() in that case. If it's another process, send a signal. + * See if anyone's waiting for the latch. It can be the current process if + * we're in a signal handler. We use the self-pipe to wake up the select() + * in that case. If it's another process, send a signal. * - * Fetch owner_pid only once, in case the owner simultaneously disowns - * the latch and clears owner_pid. XXX: This assumes that pid_t is - * atomic, which isn't guaranteed to be true! In practice, the effective - * range of pid_t fits in a 32 bit integer, and so should be atomic. In - * the worst case, we might end up signaling wrong process if the right - * one disowns the latch just as we fetch owner_pid. Even then, you're - * very unlucky if a process with that bogus pid exists. + * Fetch owner_pid only once, in case the owner simultaneously disowns the + * latch and clears owner_pid. XXX: This assumes that pid_t is atomic, + * which isn't guaranteed to be true! In practice, the effective range of + * pid_t fits in a 32 bit integer, and so should be atomic. In the worst + * case, we might end up signaling wrong process if the right one disowns + * the latch just as we fetch owner_pid. Even then, you're very unlucky if + * a process with that bogus pid exists. */ owner_pid = latch->owner_pid; if (owner_pid == 0) @@ -351,15 +352,14 @@ latch_sigusr1_handler(void) static void initSelfPipe(void) { - int pipefd[2]; + int pipefd[2]; /* * Set up the self-pipe that allows a signal handler to wake up the * select() in WaitLatch. Make the write-end non-blocking, so that * SetLatch won't block if the event has already been set many times - * filling the kernel buffer. Make the read-end non-blocking too, so - * that we can easily clear the pipe by reading until EAGAIN or - * EWOULDBLOCK. + * filling the kernel buffer. Make the read-end non-blocking too, so that + * we can easily clear the pipe by reading until EAGAIN or EWOULDBLOCK. */ if (pipe(pipefd) < 0) elog(FATAL, "pipe() failed: %m"); @@ -376,8 +376,8 @@ initSelfPipe(void) static void sendSelfPipeByte(void) { - int rc; - char dummy = 0; + int rc; + char dummy = 0; retry: rc = write(selfpipe_writefd, &dummy, 1); @@ -388,16 +388,16 @@ retry: goto retry; /* - * If the pipe is full, we don't need to retry, the data that's - * there already is enough to wake up WaitLatch. + * If the pipe is full, we don't need to retry, the data that's there + * already is enough to wake up WaitLatch. */ if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK) return; /* - * Oops, the write() failed for some other reason. We might be in - * a signal handler, so it's not safe to elog(). We have no choice - * but silently ignore the error. + * Oops, the write() failed for some other reason. We might be in a + * signal handler, so it's not safe to elog(). We have no choice but + * silently ignore the error. */ return; } @@ -408,11 +408,11 @@ static void drainSelfPipe(void) { /* - * There shouldn't normally be more than one byte in the pipe, or maybe - * a few more if multiple processes run SetLatch at the same instant. + * There shouldn't normally be more than one byte in the pipe, or maybe a + * few more if multiple processes run SetLatch at the same instant. */ - char buf[16]; - int rc; + char buf[16]; + int rc; for (;;) { @@ -420,9 +420,9 @@ drainSelfPipe(void) if (rc < 0) { if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK) - break; /* the pipe is empty */ + break; /* the pipe is empty */ else if (errno == EINTR) - continue; /* retry */ + continue; /* retry */ else elog(ERROR, "read() on self-pipe failed: %m"); } diff --git a/src/backend/port/win32/crashdump.c b/src/backend/port/win32/crashdump.c index b58b181ed9..98bde14804 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/win32/crashdump.c +++ b/src/backend/port/win32/crashdump.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /*------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * win32_crashdump.c - * Automatic crash dump creation for PostgreSQL on Windows + * Automatic crash dump creation for PostgreSQL on Windows * * The crashdump feature traps unhandled win32 exceptions produced by the * backend, and tries to produce a Windows MiniDump crash @@ -57,11 +57,11 @@ * http://www.debuginfo.com/articles/effminidumps.html */ -typedef BOOL (WINAPI *MINIDUMPWRITEDUMP)(HANDLE hProcess, DWORD dwPid, HANDLE hFile, MINIDUMP_TYPE DumpType, - CONST PMINIDUMP_EXCEPTION_INFORMATION ExceptionParam, - CONST PMINIDUMP_USER_STREAM_INFORMATION UserStreamParam, - CONST PMINIDUMP_CALLBACK_INFORMATION CallbackParam - ); +typedef BOOL (WINAPI * MINIDUMPWRITEDUMP) (HANDLE hProcess, DWORD dwPid, HANDLE hFile, MINIDUMP_TYPE DumpType, + CONST PMINIDUMP_EXCEPTION_INFORMATION ExceptionParam, + CONST PMINIDUMP_USER_STREAM_INFORMATION UserStreamParam, + CONST PMINIDUMP_CALLBACK_INFORMATION CallbackParam +); /* @@ -76,24 +76,25 @@ typedef BOOL (WINAPI *MINIDUMPWRITEDUMP)(HANDLE hProcess, DWORD dwPid, HANDLE hF * any PostgreSQL functions. */ static LONG WINAPI -crashDumpHandler(struct _EXCEPTION_POINTERS *pExceptionInfo) +crashDumpHandler(struct _EXCEPTION_POINTERS * pExceptionInfo) { /* - * We only write crash dumps if the "crashdumps" directory within - * the postgres data directory exists. + * We only write crash dumps if the "crashdumps" directory within the + * postgres data directory exists. */ - DWORD attribs = GetFileAttributesA("crashdumps"); - if (attribs != INVALID_FILE_ATTRIBUTES && (attribs & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_DIRECTORY) ) + DWORD attribs = GetFileAttributesA("crashdumps"); + + if (attribs != INVALID_FILE_ATTRIBUTES && (attribs & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_DIRECTORY)) { /* 'crashdumps' exists and is a directory. Try to write a dump' */ - HMODULE hDll = NULL; + HMODULE hDll = NULL; MINIDUMPWRITEDUMP pDump = NULL; MINIDUMP_TYPE dumpType; - char dumpPath[_MAX_PATH]; - HANDLE selfProcHandle = GetCurrentProcess(); - DWORD selfPid = GetProcessId(selfProcHandle); - HANDLE dumpFile; - DWORD systemTicks; + char dumpPath[_MAX_PATH]; + HANDLE selfProcHandle = GetCurrentProcess(); + DWORD selfPid = GetProcessId(selfProcHandle); + HANDLE dumpFile; + DWORD systemTicks; struct _MINIDUMP_EXCEPTION_INFORMATION ExInfo; ExInfo.ThreadId = GetCurrentThreadId(); @@ -108,19 +109,18 @@ crashDumpHandler(struct _EXCEPTION_POINTERS *pExceptionInfo) return EXCEPTION_CONTINUE_SEARCH; } - pDump = (MINIDUMPWRITEDUMP)GetProcAddress(hDll, "MiniDumpWriteDump"); + pDump = (MINIDUMPWRITEDUMP) GetProcAddress(hDll, "MiniDumpWriteDump"); - if (pDump==NULL) + if (pDump == NULL) { write_stderr("could not load required functions in dbghelp.dll, cannot write crashdump\n"); return EXCEPTION_CONTINUE_SEARCH; } /* - * Dump as much as we can, except shared memory, code segments, - * and memory mapped files. - * Exactly what we can dump depends on the version of dbghelp.dll, - * see: + * Dump as much as we can, except shared memory, code segments, and + * memory mapped files. Exactly what we can dump depends on the + * version of dbghelp.dll, see: * http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms680519(v=VS.85).aspx */ dumpType = MiniDumpNormal | MiniDumpWithHandleData | @@ -135,25 +135,25 @@ crashDumpHandler(struct _EXCEPTION_POINTERS *pExceptionInfo) systemTicks = GetTickCount(); snprintf(dumpPath, _MAX_PATH, - "crashdumps\\postgres-pid%0i-%0i.mdmp", selfPid, systemTicks); - dumpPath[_MAX_PATH-1] = '\0'; + "crashdumps\\postgres-pid%0i-%0i.mdmp", selfPid, systemTicks); + dumpPath[_MAX_PATH - 1] = '\0'; dumpFile = CreateFile(dumpPath, GENERIC_WRITE, FILE_SHARE_WRITE, NULL, CREATE_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL); - if (dumpFile==INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) + if (dumpFile == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) { write_stderr("could not open crash dump file %s for writing: error code %d\n", - dumpPath, GetLastError()); + dumpPath, GetLastError()); return EXCEPTION_CONTINUE_SEARCH; } - if ((*pDump)(selfProcHandle, selfPid, dumpFile, dumpType, &ExInfo, - NULL, NULL)) + if ((*pDump) (selfProcHandle, selfPid, dumpFile, dumpType, &ExInfo, + NULL, NULL)) write_stderr("wrote crash dump to %s\n", dumpPath); else write_stderr("could not write crash dump to %s: error code %08x\n", - dumpPath, GetLastError()); + dumpPath, GetLastError()); CloseHandle(dumpFile); } diff --git a/src/backend/port/win32/timer.c b/src/backend/port/win32/timer.c index 1eb6de9bdb..e118d96a4b 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/win32/timer.c +++ b/src/backend/port/win32/timer.c @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ typedef struct timerCA struct itimerval value; HANDLE event; CRITICAL_SECTION crit_sec; -} timerCA; +} timerCA; static timerCA timerCommArea; static HANDLE timerThreadHandle = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; diff --git a/src/backend/port/win32_latch.c b/src/backend/port/win32_latch.c index f42cfef40e..b158300d57 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/win32_latch.c +++ b/src/backend/port/win32_latch.c @@ -50,8 +50,7 @@ InitSharedLatch(volatile Latch *latch) latch->is_shared = true; /* - * Set up security attributes to specify that the events are - * inherited. + * Set up security attributes to specify that the events are inherited. */ ZeroMemory(&sa, sizeof(sa)); sa.nLength = sizeof(sa); @@ -106,7 +105,7 @@ WaitLatchOrSocket(volatile Latch *latch, SOCKET sock, bool forRead, numevents = 2; if (sock != PGINVALID_SOCKET && (forRead || forWrite)) { - int flags = 0; + int flags = 0; if (forRead) flags |= FD_READ; @@ -135,7 +134,7 @@ WaitLatchOrSocket(volatile Latch *latch, SOCKET sock, bool forRead, } rc = WaitForMultipleObjects(numevents, events, FALSE, - (timeout >= 0) ? (timeout / 1000) : INFINITE); + (timeout >= 0) ? (timeout / 1000) : INFINITE); if (rc == WAIT_FAILED) elog(ERROR, "WaitForMultipleObjects() failed: error code %d", (int) GetLastError()); else if (rc == WAIT_TIMEOUT) @@ -178,7 +177,7 @@ WaitLatchOrSocket(volatile Latch *latch, SOCKET sock, bool forRead, void SetLatch(volatile Latch *latch) { - HANDLE handle; + HANDLE handle; /* Quick exit if already set */ if (latch->is_set) @@ -187,21 +186,22 @@ SetLatch(volatile Latch *latch) latch->is_set = true; /* - * See if anyone's waiting for the latch. It can be the current process - * if we're in a signal handler. Use a local variable here in case the - * latch is just disowned between the test and the SetEvent call, and - * event field set to NULL. + * See if anyone's waiting for the latch. It can be the current process if + * we're in a signal handler. Use a local variable here in case the latch + * is just disowned between the test and the SetEvent call, and event + * field set to NULL. * - * Fetch handle field only once, in case the owner simultaneously - * disowns the latch and clears handle. This assumes that HANDLE is - * atomic, which isn't guaranteed to be true! In practice, it should be, - * and in the worst case we end up calling SetEvent with a bogus handle, - * and SetEvent will return an error with no harm done. + * Fetch handle field only once, in case the owner simultaneously disowns + * the latch and clears handle. This assumes that HANDLE is atomic, which + * isn't guaranteed to be true! In practice, it should be, and in the + * worst case we end up calling SetEvent with a bogus handle, and SetEvent + * will return an error with no harm done. */ handle = latch->event; if (handle) { SetEvent(handle); + /* * Note that we silently ignore any errors. We might be in a signal * handler or other critical path where it's not safe to call elog(). diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c b/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c index 619facc752..9fa63a4e6e 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ typedef struct WorkerInfoData int wi_cost_delay; int wi_cost_limit; int wi_cost_limit_base; -} WorkerInfoData; +} WorkerInfoData; typedef struct WorkerInfoData *WorkerInfo; @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ typedef enum AutoVacForkFailed, /* failed trying to start a worker */ AutoVacRebalance, /* rebalance the cost limits */ AutoVacNumSignals /* must be last */ -} AutoVacuumSignal; +} AutoVacuumSignal; /*------------- * The main autovacuum shmem struct. On shared memory we store this main @@ -1527,9 +1527,9 @@ AutoVacWorkerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) SetConfigOption("statement_timeout", "0", PGC_SUSET, PGC_S_OVERRIDE); /* - * Force synchronous replication off to allow regular maintenance even - * if we are waiting for standbys to connect. This is important to - * ensure we aren't blocked from performing anti-wraparound tasks. + * Force synchronous replication off to allow regular maintenance even if + * we are waiting for standbys to connect. This is important to ensure we + * aren't blocked from performing anti-wraparound tasks. */ if (synchronous_commit > SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_LOCAL_FLUSH) SetConfigOption("synchronous_commit", "local", PGC_SUSET, PGC_S_OVERRIDE); @@ -1690,8 +1690,8 @@ autovac_balance_cost(void) { /* * The idea here is that we ration out I/O equally. The amount of I/O - * that a worker can consume is determined by cost_limit/cost_delay, so - * we try to equalize those ratios rather than the raw limit settings. + * that a worker can consume is determined by cost_limit/cost_delay, so we + * try to equalize those ratios rather than the raw limit settings. * * note: in cost_limit, zero also means use value from elsewhere, because * zero is not a valid value. @@ -1746,7 +1746,7 @@ autovac_balance_cost(void) /* * We put a lower bound of 1 on the cost_limit, to avoid division- - * by-zero in the vacuum code. Also, in case of roundoff trouble + * by-zero in the vacuum code. Also, in case of roundoff trouble * in these calculations, let's be sure we don't ever set * cost_limit to more than the base value. */ @@ -1785,7 +1785,7 @@ get_database_list(void) Relation rel; HeapScanDesc scan; HeapTuple tup; - MemoryContext resultcxt; + MemoryContext resultcxt; /* This is the context that we will allocate our output data in */ resultcxt = CurrentMemoryContext; @@ -1807,13 +1807,13 @@ get_database_list(void) { Form_pg_database pgdatabase = (Form_pg_database) GETSTRUCT(tup); avw_dbase *avdb; - MemoryContext oldcxt; + MemoryContext oldcxt; /* - * Allocate our results in the caller's context, not the transaction's. - * We do this inside the loop, and restore the original context at the - * end, so that leaky things like heap_getnext() are not called in a - * potentially long-lived context. + * Allocate our results in the caller's context, not the + * transaction's. We do this inside the loop, and restore the original + * context at the end, so that leaky things like heap_getnext() are + * not called in a potentially long-lived context. */ oldcxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(resultcxt); @@ -2217,9 +2217,9 @@ do_autovacuum(void) LWLockRelease(AutovacuumScheduleLock); /* - * Remember the prevailing values of the vacuum cost GUCs. We have - * to restore these at the bottom of the loop, else we'll compute - * wrong values in the next iteration of autovac_balance_cost(). + * Remember the prevailing values of the vacuum cost GUCs. We have to + * restore these at the bottom of the loop, else we'll compute wrong + * values in the next iteration of autovac_balance_cost(). */ stdVacuumCostDelay = VacuumCostDelay; stdVacuumCostLimit = VacuumCostLimit; diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/bgwriter.c b/src/backend/postmaster/bgwriter.c index 1b450a802b..1f4ac93d8d 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/bgwriter.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/bgwriter.c @@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ RequestCheckpoint(int flags) * to the requests[] queue without checking for duplicates. The bgwriter * will have to eliminate dups internally anyway. However, if we discover * that the queue is full, we make a pass over the entire queue to compact - * it. This is somewhat expensive, but the alternative is for the backend + * it. This is somewhat expensive, but the alternative is for the backend * to perform its own fsync, which is far more expensive in practice. It * is theoretically possible a backend fsync might still be necessary, if * the queue is full and contains no duplicate entries. In that case, we @@ -1102,13 +1102,13 @@ ForwardFsyncRequest(RelFileNodeBackend rnode, ForkNumber forknum, /* * If the background writer isn't running or the request queue is full, - * the backend will have to perform its own fsync request. But before + * the backend will have to perform its own fsync request. But before * forcing that to happen, we can try to compact the background writer * request queue. */ if (BgWriterShmem->bgwriter_pid == 0 || (BgWriterShmem->num_requests >= BgWriterShmem->max_requests - && !CompactBgwriterRequestQueue())) + && !CompactBgwriterRequestQueue())) { /* * Count the subset of writes where backends have to do their own @@ -1128,12 +1128,12 @@ ForwardFsyncRequest(RelFileNodeBackend rnode, ForkNumber forknum, /* * CompactBgwriterRequestQueue - * Remove duplicates from the request queue to avoid backend fsyncs. + * Remove duplicates from the request queue to avoid backend fsyncs. * * Although a full fsync request queue is not common, it can lead to severe * performance problems when it does happen. So far, this situation has * only been observed to occur when the system is under heavy write load, - * and especially during the "sync" phase of a checkpoint. Without this + * and especially during the "sync" phase of a checkpoint. Without this * logic, each backend begins doing an fsync for every block written, which * gets very expensive and can slow down the whole system. * @@ -1144,9 +1144,10 @@ ForwardFsyncRequest(RelFileNodeBackend rnode, ForkNumber forknum, static bool CompactBgwriterRequestQueue() { - struct BgWriterSlotMapping { - BgWriterRequest request; - int slot; + struct BgWriterSlotMapping + { + BgWriterRequest request; + int slot; }; int n, @@ -1172,7 +1173,7 @@ CompactBgwriterRequestQueue() /* Initialize skip_slot array */ skip_slot = palloc0(sizeof(bool) * BgWriterShmem->num_requests); - /* + /* * The basic idea here is that a request can be skipped if it's followed * by a later, identical request. It might seem more sensible to work * backwards from the end of the queue and check whether a request is @@ -1189,7 +1190,7 @@ CompactBgwriterRequestQueue() { BgWriterRequest *request; struct BgWriterSlotMapping *slotmap; - bool found; + bool found; request = &BgWriterShmem->requests[n]; slotmap = hash_search(htab, request, HASH_ENTER, &found); @@ -1219,8 +1220,8 @@ CompactBgwriterRequestQueue() BgWriterShmem->requests[preserve_count++] = BgWriterShmem->requests[n]; } ereport(DEBUG1, - (errmsg("compacted fsync request queue from %d entries to %d entries", - BgWriterShmem->num_requests, preserve_count))); + (errmsg("compacted fsync request queue from %d entries to %d entries", + BgWriterShmem->num_requests, preserve_count))); BgWriterShmem->num_requests = preserve_count; /* Cleanup. */ diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c b/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c index 5f0db513d2..5ed6e8337c 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c @@ -1319,7 +1319,7 @@ pgstat_report_analyze(Relation rel, bool adopt_counts, /* -------- * pgstat_report_recovery_conflict() - * - * Tell the collector about a Hot Standby recovery conflict. + * Tell the collector about a Hot Standby recovery conflict. * -------- */ void @@ -4075,7 +4075,7 @@ pgstat_recv_resetcounter(PgStat_MsgResetcounter *msg, int len) dbentry->functions = NULL; /* - * Reset database-level stats too. This should match the initialization + * Reset database-level stats too. This should match the initialization * code in pgstat_get_db_entry(). */ dbentry->n_xact_commit = 0; @@ -4280,22 +4280,23 @@ pgstat_recv_bgwriter(PgStat_MsgBgWriter *msg, int len) /* ---------- * pgstat_recv_recoveryconflict() - * - * Process as RECOVERYCONFLICT message. + * Process as RECOVERYCONFLICT message. * ---------- */ static void pgstat_recv_recoveryconflict(PgStat_MsgRecoveryConflict *msg, int len) { PgStat_StatDBEntry *dbentry; + dbentry = pgstat_get_db_entry(msg->m_databaseid, true); switch (msg->m_reason) { case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_DATABASE: + /* - * Since we drop the information about the database as soon - * as it replicates, there is no point in counting these - * conflicts. + * Since we drop the information about the database as soon as it + * replicates, there is no point in counting these conflicts. */ break; case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_TABLESPACE: diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c b/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c index 93e59258cc..6e7f66472f 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ typedef struct HANDLE waitHandle; HANDLE procHandle; DWORD procId; -} win32_deadchild_waitinfo; +} win32_deadchild_waitinfo; HANDLE PostmasterHandle; #endif @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ typedef struct SOCKET origsocket; /* Original socket value, or PGINVALID_SOCKET * if not a socket */ WSAPROTOCOL_INFO wsainfo; -} InheritableSocket; +} InheritableSocket; #else typedef int InheritableSocket; #endif @@ -447,15 +447,15 @@ typedef struct char my_exec_path[MAXPGPATH]; char pkglib_path[MAXPGPATH]; char ExtraOptions[MAXPGPATH]; -} BackendParameters; +} BackendParameters; static void read_backend_variables(char *id, Port *port); -static void restore_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port); +static void restore_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port); #ifndef WIN32 -static bool save_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port); +static bool save_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port); #else -static bool save_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port, +static bool save_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port, HANDLE childProcess, pid_t childPid); #endif @@ -1936,9 +1936,9 @@ canAcceptConnections(void) * * In state PM_WAIT_BACKUP only superusers can connect (this must be * allowed so that a superuser can end online backup mode); we return - * CAC_WAITBACKUP code to indicate that this must be checked later. - * Note that neither CAC_OK nor CAC_WAITBACKUP can safely be returned - * until we have checked for too many children. + * CAC_WAITBACKUP code to indicate that this must be checked later. Note + * that neither CAC_OK nor CAC_WAITBACKUP can safely be returned until we + * have checked for too many children. */ if (pmState != PM_RUN) { @@ -1949,10 +1949,10 @@ canAcceptConnections(void) else if (!FatalError && (pmState == PM_STARTUP || pmState == PM_RECOVERY)) - return CAC_STARTUP; /* normal startup */ + return CAC_STARTUP; /* normal startup */ else if (!FatalError && pmState == PM_HOT_STANDBY) - result = CAC_OK; /* connection OK during hot standby */ + result = CAC_OK; /* connection OK during hot standby */ else return CAC_RECOVERY; /* else must be crash recovery */ } @@ -2004,10 +2004,10 @@ ConnCreate(int serverFd) /* * Precompute password salt values to use for this connection. It's - * slightly annoying to do this long in advance of knowing whether - * we'll need 'em or not, but we must do the random() calls before we - * fork, not after. Else the postmaster's random sequence won't get - * advanced, and all backends would end up using the same salt... + * slightly annoying to do this long in advance of knowing whether we'll + * need 'em or not, but we must do the random() calls before we fork, not + * after. Else the postmaster's random sequence won't get advanced, and + * all backends would end up using the same salt... */ RandomSalt(port->md5Salt); @@ -2611,12 +2611,13 @@ CleanupBackend(int pid, * the active backend list. */ #ifdef WIN32 + /* - * On win32, also treat ERROR_WAIT_NO_CHILDREN (128) as nonfatal - * case, since that sometimes happens under load when the process fails - * to start properly (long before it starts using shared memory). - * Microsoft reports it is related to mutex failure: - * http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2010-09/msg00790.php + * On win32, also treat ERROR_WAIT_NO_CHILDREN (128) as nonfatal case, + * since that sometimes happens under load when the process fails to start + * properly (long before it starts using shared memory). Microsoft reports + * it is related to mutex failure: + * http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2010-09/msg00790.php */ if (exitstatus == ERROR_WAIT_NO_CHILDREN) { @@ -3086,11 +3087,11 @@ PostmasterStateMachine(void) } /* - * If recovery failed, or the user does not want an automatic restart after - * backend crashes, wait for all non-syslogger children to exit, and then - * exit postmaster. We don't try to reinitialize when recovery fails, - * because more than likely it will just fail again and we will keep trying - * forever. + * If recovery failed, or the user does not want an automatic restart + * after backend crashes, wait for all non-syslogger children to exit, and + * then exit postmaster. We don't try to reinitialize when recovery fails, + * because more than likely it will just fail again and we will keep + * trying forever. */ if (pmState == PM_NO_CHILDREN && (RecoveryError || !restart_after_crash)) ExitPostmaster(1); @@ -3169,9 +3170,8 @@ SignalSomeChildren(int signal, int target) continue; /* - * Since target == BACKEND_TYPE_ALL is the most common case, - * we test it first and avoid touching shared memory for - * every child. + * Since target == BACKEND_TYPE_ALL is the most common case, we test + * it first and avoid touching shared memory for every child. */ if (target != BACKEND_TYPE_ALL) { @@ -4409,9 +4409,8 @@ CountChildren(int target) continue; /* - * Since target == BACKEND_TYPE_ALL is the most common case, - * we test it first and avoid touching shared memory for - * every child. + * Since target == BACKEND_TYPE_ALL is the most common case, we test + * it first and avoid touching shared memory for every child. */ if (target != BACKEND_TYPE_ALL) { @@ -4686,19 +4685,19 @@ extern pgsocket pgStatSock; #define read_inheritable_socket(dest, src) (*(dest) = *(src)) #else static bool write_duplicated_handle(HANDLE *dest, HANDLE src, HANDLE child); -static bool write_inheritable_socket(InheritableSocket * dest, SOCKET src, +static bool write_inheritable_socket(InheritableSocket *dest, SOCKET src, pid_t childPid); -static void read_inheritable_socket(SOCKET * dest, InheritableSocket * src); +static void read_inheritable_socket(SOCKET *dest, InheritableSocket *src); #endif /* Save critical backend variables into the BackendParameters struct */ #ifndef WIN32 static bool -save_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port) +save_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port) #else static bool -save_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port, +save_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port, HANDLE childProcess, pid_t childPid) #endif { @@ -4790,7 +4789,7 @@ write_duplicated_handle(HANDLE *dest, HANDLE src, HANDLE childProcess) * straight socket inheritance. */ static bool -write_inheritable_socket(InheritableSocket * dest, SOCKET src, pid_t childpid) +write_inheritable_socket(InheritableSocket *dest, SOCKET src, pid_t childpid) { dest->origsocket = src; if (src != 0 && src != PGINVALID_SOCKET) @@ -4811,7 +4810,7 @@ write_inheritable_socket(InheritableSocket * dest, SOCKET src, pid_t childpid) * Read a duplicate socket structure back, and get the socket descriptor. */ static void -read_inheritable_socket(SOCKET * dest, InheritableSocket * src) +read_inheritable_socket(SOCKET *dest, InheritableSocket *src) { SOCKET s; @@ -4920,7 +4919,7 @@ read_backend_variables(char *id, Port *port) /* Restore critical backend variables from the BackendParameters struct */ static void -restore_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port) +restore_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port) { memcpy(port, ¶m->port, sizeof(Port)); read_inheritable_socket(&port->sock, ¶m->portsocket); diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c b/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c index f2eb0ad02b..a00b70f934 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ static void process_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer); static void flush_pipe_input(char *logbuffer, int *bytes_in_logbuffer); static void open_csvlogfile(void); static FILE *logfile_open(const char *filename, const char *mode, - bool allow_errors); + bool allow_errors); #ifdef WIN32 static unsigned int __stdcall pipeThread(void *arg); @@ -1017,8 +1017,8 @@ logfile_open(const char *filename, const char *mode, bool allow_errors) mode_t oumask; /* - * Note we do not let Log_file_mode disable IWUSR, since we certainly - * want to be able to write the files ourselves. + * Note we do not let Log_file_mode disable IWUSR, since we certainly want + * to be able to write the files ourselves. */ oumask = umask((mode_t) ((~(Log_file_mode | S_IWUSR)) & (S_IRWXU | S_IRWXG | S_IRWXO))); fh = fopen(filename, mode); @@ -1035,7 +1035,7 @@ logfile_open(const char *filename, const char *mode, bool allow_errors) } else { - int save_errno = errno; + int save_errno = errno; ereport(allow_errors ? LOG : FATAL, (errcode_for_file_access(), diff --git a/src/backend/regex/regcomp.c b/src/backend/regex/regcomp.c index a93e99011d..6ed466a9d9 100644 --- a/src/backend/regex/regcomp.c +++ b/src/backend/regex/regcomp.c @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ struct vars #define NOERR() {if (ISERR()) return;} /* if error seen, return */ #define NOERRN() {if (ISERR()) return NULL;} /* NOERR with retval */ #define NOERRZ() {if (ISERR()) return 0;} /* NOERR with retval */ -#define INSIST(c, e) do { if (!(c)) ERR(e); } while (0) /* error if c false */ +#define INSIST(c, e) do { if (!(c)) ERR(e); } while (0) /* error if c false */ #define NOTE(b) (v->re->re_info |= (b)) /* note visible condition */ #define EMPTYARC(x, y) newarc(v->nfa, EMPTY, 0, x, y) diff --git a/src/backend/replication/basebackup.c b/src/backend/replication/basebackup.c index d21568cb21..030a283e81 100644 --- a/src/backend/replication/basebackup.c +++ b/src/backend/replication/basebackup.c @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ typedef struct bool fastcheckpoint; bool nowait; bool includewal; -} basebackup_options; +} basebackup_options; static int64 sendDir(char *path, int basepathlen, bool sizeonly); @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ typedef struct char *oid; char *path; int64 size; -} tablespaceinfo; +} tablespaceinfo; /* @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ perform_base_backup(basebackup_options *opt, DIR *tblspcdir) if (readlink(fullpath, linkpath, sizeof(linkpath) - 1) == -1) { ereport(WARNING, - (errmsg("unable to read symbolic link %s: %m", fullpath))); + (errmsg("unable to read symbolic link %s: %m", fullpath))); continue; } @@ -219,10 +219,11 @@ perform_base_backup(basebackup_options *opt, DIR *tblspcdir) ptr.xrecoff = logseg * XLogSegSize + TAR_SEND_SIZE * i; /* - * Some old compilers, e.g. gcc 2.95.3/x86, think that passing - * a struct in the same function as a longjump might clobber - * a variable. bjm 2011-02-04 - * http://lists.apple.com/archives/xcode-users/2003/Dec//msg00051.html + * Some old compilers, e.g. gcc 2.95.3/x86, think that passing + * a struct in the same function as a longjump might clobber a + * variable. bjm 2011-02-04 + * http://lists.apple.com/archives/xcode-users/2003/Dec//msg000 + * 51.html */ XLogRead(buf, ptr, TAR_SEND_SIZE); if (pq_putmessage('d', buf, TAR_SEND_SIZE)) @@ -494,13 +495,14 @@ static void sendFileWithContent(const char *filename, const char *content) { struct stat statbuf; - int pad, len; + int pad, + len; len = strlen(content); /* - * Construct a stat struct for the backup_label file we're injecting - * in the tar. + * Construct a stat struct for the backup_label file we're injecting in + * the tar. */ /* Windows doesn't have the concept of uid and gid */ #ifdef WIN32 @@ -522,7 +524,8 @@ sendFileWithContent(const char *filename, const char *content) pad = ((len + 511) & ~511) - len; if (pad > 0) { - char buf[512]; + char buf[512]; + MemSet(buf, 0, pad); pq_putmessage('d', buf, pad); } @@ -564,13 +567,13 @@ sendDir(char *path, int basepathlen, bool sizeonly) continue; /* - * Check if the postmaster has signaled us to exit, and abort - * with an error in that case. The error handler further up - * will call do_pg_abort_backup() for us. + * Check if the postmaster has signaled us to exit, and abort with an + * error in that case. The error handler further up will call + * do_pg_abort_backup() for us. */ if (walsender_shutdown_requested || walsender_ready_to_stop) ereport(ERROR, - (errmsg("shutdown requested, aborting active base backup"))); + (errmsg("shutdown requested, aborting active base backup"))); snprintf(pathbuf, MAXPGPATH, "%s/%s", path, de->d_name); @@ -707,7 +710,7 @@ _tarChecksum(char *header) /* Given the member, write the TAR header & send the file */ static void -sendFile(char *readfilename, char *tarfilename, struct stat *statbuf) +sendFile(char *readfilename, char *tarfilename, struct stat * statbuf) { FILE *fp; char buf[TAR_SEND_SIZE]; @@ -737,7 +740,7 @@ sendFile(char *readfilename, char *tarfilename, struct stat *statbuf) /* Send the chunk as a CopyData message */ if (pq_putmessage('d', buf, cnt)) ereport(ERROR, - (errmsg("base backup could not send data, aborting backup"))); + (errmsg("base backup could not send data, aborting backup"))); len += cnt; diff --git a/src/backend/replication/syncrep.c b/src/backend/replication/syncrep.c index 192aac9aea..1d4df8a448 100644 --- a/src/backend/replication/syncrep.c +++ b/src/backend/replication/syncrep.c @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ #include "utils/ps_status.h" /* User-settable parameters for sync rep */ -char *SyncRepStandbyNames; +char *SyncRepStandbyNames; #define SyncStandbysDefined() \ (SyncRepStandbyNames != NULL && SyncRepStandbyNames[0] != '\0') @@ -73,7 +73,8 @@ static bool announce_next_takeover = true; static void SyncRepQueueInsert(void); static void SyncRepCancelWait(void); -static int SyncRepGetStandbyPriority(void); +static int SyncRepGetStandbyPriority(void); + #ifdef USE_ASSERT_CHECKING static bool SyncRepQueueIsOrderedByLSN(void); #endif @@ -96,13 +97,13 @@ static bool SyncRepQueueIsOrderedByLSN(void); void SyncRepWaitForLSN(XLogRecPtr XactCommitLSN) { - char *new_status = NULL; + char *new_status = NULL; const char *old_status; /* - * Fast exit if user has not requested sync replication, or - * there are no sync replication standby names defined. - * Note that those standbys don't need to be connected. + * Fast exit if user has not requested sync replication, or there are no + * sync replication standby names defined. Note that those standbys don't + * need to be connected. */ if (!SyncRepRequested() || !SyncStandbysDefined()) return; @@ -117,12 +118,12 @@ SyncRepWaitForLSN(XLogRecPtr XactCommitLSN) Assert(MyProc->syncRepState == SYNC_REP_NOT_WAITING); /* - * We don't wait for sync rep if WalSndCtl->sync_standbys_defined is - * not set. See SyncRepUpdateSyncStandbysDefined. + * We don't wait for sync rep if WalSndCtl->sync_standbys_defined is not + * set. See SyncRepUpdateSyncStandbysDefined. * - * Also check that the standby hasn't already replied. Unlikely - * race condition but we'll be fetching that cache line anyway - * so its likely to be a low cost check. + * Also check that the standby hasn't already replied. Unlikely race + * condition but we'll be fetching that cache line anyway so its likely to + * be a low cost check. */ if (!WalSndCtl->sync_standbys_defined || XLByteLE(XactCommitLSN, WalSndCtl->lsn)) @@ -163,12 +164,12 @@ SyncRepWaitForLSN(XLogRecPtr XactCommitLSN) */ for (;;) { - int syncRepState; + int syncRepState; /* - * Wait on latch for up to 60 seconds. This allows us to - * check for postmaster death regularly while waiting. - * Note that timeout here does not necessarily release from loop. + * Wait on latch for up to 60 seconds. This allows us to check for + * postmaster death regularly while waiting. Note that timeout here + * does not necessarily release from loop. */ WaitLatch(&MyProc->waitLatch, 60000000L); @@ -176,12 +177,13 @@ SyncRepWaitForLSN(XLogRecPtr XactCommitLSN) ResetLatch(&MyProc->waitLatch); /* - * Try checking the state without the lock first. There's no guarantee - * that we'll read the most up-to-date value, so if it looks like we're - * still waiting, recheck while holding the lock. But if it looks like - * we're done, we must really be done, because once walsender changes - * the state to SYNC_REP_WAIT_COMPLETE, it will never update it again, - * so we can't be seeing a stale value in that case. + * Try checking the state without the lock first. There's no + * guarantee that we'll read the most up-to-date value, so if it looks + * like we're still waiting, recheck while holding the lock. But if + * it looks like we're done, we must really be done, because once + * walsender changes the state to SYNC_REP_WAIT_COMPLETE, it will + * never update it again, so we can't be seeing a stale value in that + * case. */ syncRepState = MyProc->syncRepState; if (syncRepState == SYNC_REP_WAITING) @@ -195,16 +197,15 @@ SyncRepWaitForLSN(XLogRecPtr XactCommitLSN) /* * If a wait for synchronous replication is pending, we can neither - * acknowledge the commit nor raise ERROR or FATAL. The latter - * would lead the client to believe that that the transaction - * aborted, which is not true: it's already committed locally. - * The former is no good either: the client has requested - * synchronous replication, and is entitled to assume that an - * acknowledged commit is also replicated, which may not be true. - * So in this case we issue a WARNING (which some clients may - * be able to interpret) and shut off further output. We do NOT - * reset ProcDiePending, so that the process will die after the - * commit is cleaned up. + * acknowledge the commit nor raise ERROR or FATAL. The latter would + * lead the client to believe that that the transaction aborted, which + * is not true: it's already committed locally. The former is no good + * either: the client has requested synchronous replication, and is + * entitled to assume that an acknowledged commit is also replicated, + * which may not be true. So in this case we issue a WARNING (which + * some clients may be able to interpret) and shut off further output. + * We do NOT reset ProcDiePending, so that the process will die after + * the commit is cleaned up. */ if (ProcDiePending) { @@ -220,8 +221,8 @@ SyncRepWaitForLSN(XLogRecPtr XactCommitLSN) /* * It's unclear what to do if a query cancel interrupt arrives. We * can't actually abort at this point, but ignoring the interrupt - * altogether is not helpful, so we just terminate the wait with - * a suitable warning. + * altogether is not helpful, so we just terminate the wait with a + * suitable warning. */ if (QueryCancelPending) { @@ -234,8 +235,9 @@ SyncRepWaitForLSN(XLogRecPtr XactCommitLSN) } /* - * If the postmaster dies, we'll probably never get an acknowledgement, - * because all the wal sender processes will exit. So just bail out. + * If the postmaster dies, we'll probably never get an + * acknowledgement, because all the wal sender processes will exit. + * So just bail out. */ if (!PostmasterIsAlive(true)) { @@ -274,7 +276,7 @@ SyncRepWaitForLSN(XLogRecPtr XactCommitLSN) static void SyncRepQueueInsert(void) { - PGPROC *proc; + PGPROC *proc; proc = (PGPROC *) SHMQueuePrev(&(WalSndCtl->SyncRepQueue), &(WalSndCtl->SyncRepQueue), @@ -283,8 +285,8 @@ SyncRepQueueInsert(void) while (proc) { /* - * Stop at the queue element that we should after to - * ensure the queue is ordered by LSN. + * Stop at the queue element that we should after to ensure the queue + * is ordered by LSN. */ if (XLByteLT(proc->waitLSN, MyProc->waitLSN)) break; @@ -339,7 +341,7 @@ SyncRepCleanupAtProcExit(int code, Datum arg) void SyncRepInitConfig(void) { - int priority; + int priority; /* * Determine if we are a potential sync standby and remember the result @@ -352,8 +354,8 @@ SyncRepInitConfig(void) MyWalSnd->sync_standby_priority = priority; LWLockRelease(SyncRepLock); ereport(DEBUG1, - (errmsg("standby \"%s\" now has synchronous standby priority %u", - application_name, priority))); + (errmsg("standby \"%s\" now has synchronous standby priority %u", + application_name, priority))); } } @@ -369,24 +371,24 @@ SyncRepReleaseWaiters(void) { volatile WalSndCtlData *walsndctl = WalSndCtl; volatile WalSnd *syncWalSnd = NULL; - int numprocs = 0; + int numprocs = 0; int priority = 0; int i; /* * If this WALSender is serving a standby that is not on the list of - * potential standbys then we have nothing to do. If we are still - * starting up or still running base backup, then leave quickly also. + * potential standbys then we have nothing to do. If we are still starting + * up or still running base backup, then leave quickly also. */ if (MyWalSnd->sync_standby_priority == 0 || MyWalSnd->state < WALSNDSTATE_STREAMING) return; /* - * We're a potential sync standby. Release waiters if we are the - * highest priority standby. If there are multiple standbys with - * same priorities then we use the first mentioned standby. - * If you change this, also change pg_stat_get_wal_senders(). + * We're a potential sync standby. Release waiters if we are the highest + * priority standby. If there are multiple standbys with same priorities + * then we use the first mentioned standby. If you change this, also + * change pg_stat_get_wal_senders(). */ LWLockAcquire(SyncRepLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); @@ -400,8 +402,8 @@ SyncRepReleaseWaiters(void) (priority == 0 || priority > walsnd->sync_standby_priority)) { - priority = walsnd->sync_standby_priority; - syncWalSnd = walsnd; + priority = walsnd->sync_standby_priority; + syncWalSnd = walsnd; } } @@ -423,8 +425,8 @@ SyncRepReleaseWaiters(void) if (XLByteLT(walsndctl->lsn, MyWalSnd->flush)) { /* - * Set the lsn first so that when we wake backends they will - * release up to this location. + * Set the lsn first so that when we wake backends they will release + * up to this location. */ walsndctl->lsn = MyWalSnd->flush; numprocs = SyncRepWakeQueue(false); @@ -433,9 +435,9 @@ SyncRepReleaseWaiters(void) LWLockRelease(SyncRepLock); elog(DEBUG3, "released %d procs up to %X/%X", - numprocs, - MyWalSnd->flush.xlogid, - MyWalSnd->flush.xrecoff); + numprocs, + MyWalSnd->flush.xlogid, + MyWalSnd->flush.xrecoff); /* * If we are managing the highest priority standby, though we weren't @@ -502,7 +504,7 @@ SyncRepGetStandbyPriority(void) /* * Walk queue from head. Set the state of any backends that need to be woken, - * remove them from the queue, and then wake them. Pass all = true to wake + * remove them from the queue, and then wake them. Pass all = true to wake * whole queue; otherwise, just wake up to the walsender's LSN. * * Must hold SyncRepLock. @@ -511,9 +513,9 @@ int SyncRepWakeQueue(bool all) { volatile WalSndCtlData *walsndctl = WalSndCtl; - PGPROC *proc = NULL; - PGPROC *thisproc = NULL; - int numprocs = 0; + PGPROC *proc = NULL; + PGPROC *thisproc = NULL; + int numprocs = 0; Assert(SyncRepQueueIsOrderedByLSN()); @@ -539,8 +541,8 @@ SyncRepWakeQueue(bool all) offsetof(PGPROC, syncRepLinks)); /* - * Set state to complete; see SyncRepWaitForLSN() for discussion - * of the various states. + * Set state to complete; see SyncRepWaitForLSN() for discussion of + * the various states. */ thisproc->syncRepState = SYNC_REP_WAIT_COMPLETE; @@ -603,8 +605,8 @@ SyncRepUpdateSyncStandbysDefined(void) static bool SyncRepQueueIsOrderedByLSN(void) { - PGPROC *proc = NULL; - XLogRecPtr lastLSN; + PGPROC *proc = NULL; + XLogRecPtr lastLSN; lastLSN.xlogid = 0; lastLSN.xrecoff = 0; @@ -616,8 +618,8 @@ SyncRepQueueIsOrderedByLSN(void) while (proc) { /* - * Check the queue is ordered by LSN and that multiple - * procs don't have matching LSNs + * Check the queue is ordered by LSN and that multiple procs don't + * have matching LSNs */ if (XLByteLE(proc->waitLSN, lastLSN)) return false; @@ -662,8 +664,8 @@ check_synchronous_standby_names(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source) * Any additional validation of standby names should go here. * * Don't attempt to set WALSender priority because this is executed by - * postmaster at startup, not WALSender, so the application_name is - * not yet correctly set. + * postmaster at startup, not WALSender, so the application_name is not + * yet correctly set. */ pfree(rawstring); diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c index f6259e4e30..471c844ab2 100644 --- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c +++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c @@ -94,8 +94,8 @@ static struct XLogRecPtr Flush; /* last byte + 1 flushed in the standby */ } LogstreamResult; -static StandbyReplyMessage reply_message; -static StandbyHSFeedbackMessage feedback_message; +static StandbyReplyMessage reply_message; +static StandbyHSFeedbackMessage feedback_message; /* * About SIGTERM handling: @@ -329,8 +329,8 @@ WalReceiverMain(void) else { /* - * We didn't receive anything new, but send a status update to - * the master anyway, to report any progress in applying WAL. + * We didn't receive anything new, but send a status update to the + * master anyway, to report any progress in applying WAL. */ XLogWalRcvSendReply(); XLogWalRcvSendHSFeedback(); @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ static void XLogWalRcvSendReply(void) { char buf[sizeof(StandbyReplyMessage) + 1]; - TimestampTz now; + TimestampTz now; /* * If the user doesn't want status to be reported to the master, be sure @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ XLogWalRcvSendReply(void) if (XLByteEQ(reply_message.write, LogstreamResult.Write) && XLByteEQ(reply_message.flush, LogstreamResult.Flush) && !TimestampDifferenceExceeds(reply_message.sendTime, now, - wal_receiver_status_interval * 1000)) + wal_receiver_status_interval * 1000)) return; /* Construct a new message */ @@ -629,9 +629,9 @@ XLogWalRcvSendReply(void) reply_message.sendTime = now; elog(DEBUG2, "sending write %X/%X flush %X/%X apply %X/%X", - reply_message.write.xlogid, reply_message.write.xrecoff, - reply_message.flush.xlogid, reply_message.flush.xrecoff, - reply_message.apply.xlogid, reply_message.apply.xrecoff); + reply_message.write.xlogid, reply_message.write.xrecoff, + reply_message.flush.xlogid, reply_message.flush.xrecoff, + reply_message.apply.xlogid, reply_message.apply.xrecoff); /* Prepend with the message type and send it. */ buf[0] = 'r'; @@ -646,11 +646,11 @@ XLogWalRcvSendReply(void) static void XLogWalRcvSendHSFeedback(void) { - char buf[sizeof(StandbyHSFeedbackMessage) + 1]; - TimestampTz now; - TransactionId nextXid; - uint32 nextEpoch; - TransactionId xmin; + char buf[sizeof(StandbyHSFeedbackMessage) + 1]; + TimestampTz now; + TransactionId nextXid; + uint32 nextEpoch; + TransactionId xmin; /* * If the user doesn't want status to be reported to the master, be sure @@ -666,26 +666,25 @@ XLogWalRcvSendHSFeedback(void) * Send feedback at most once per wal_receiver_status_interval. */ if (!TimestampDifferenceExceeds(feedback_message.sendTime, now, - wal_receiver_status_interval * 1000)) + wal_receiver_status_interval * 1000)) return; /* - * If Hot Standby is not yet active there is nothing to send. - * Check this after the interval has expired to reduce number of - * calls. + * If Hot Standby is not yet active there is nothing to send. Check this + * after the interval has expired to reduce number of calls. */ if (!HotStandbyActive()) return; /* - * Make the expensive call to get the oldest xmin once we are - * certain everything else has been checked. + * Make the expensive call to get the oldest xmin once we are certain + * everything else has been checked. */ xmin = GetOldestXmin(true, false); /* - * Get epoch and adjust if nextXid and oldestXmin are different - * sides of the epoch boundary. + * Get epoch and adjust if nextXid and oldestXmin are different sides of + * the epoch boundary. */ GetNextXidAndEpoch(&nextXid, &nextEpoch); if (nextXid < xmin) @@ -699,8 +698,8 @@ XLogWalRcvSendHSFeedback(void) feedback_message.epoch = nextEpoch; elog(DEBUG2, "sending hot standby feedback xmin %u epoch %u", - feedback_message.xmin, - feedback_message.epoch); + feedback_message.xmin, + feedback_message.epoch); /* Prepend with the message type and send it. */ buf[0] = 'h'; diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c index 48ab503d89..587949bfdb 100644 --- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c @@ -200,8 +200,8 @@ RequestXLogStreaming(XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo) walrcv->startTime = now; /* - * If this is the first startup of walreceiver, we initialize - * receivedUpto and latestChunkStart to receiveStart. + * If this is the first startup of walreceiver, we initialize receivedUpto + * and latestChunkStart to receiveStart. */ if (walrcv->receiveStart.xlogid == 0 && walrcv->receiveStart.xrecoff == 0) diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walsender.c b/src/backend/replication/walsender.c index 1c11e7ff7a..af3c95a78b 100644 --- a/src/backend/replication/walsender.c +++ b/src/backend/replication/walsender.c @@ -66,15 +66,16 @@ WalSndCtlData *WalSndCtl = NULL; /* My slot in the shared memory array */ -WalSnd *MyWalSnd = NULL; +WalSnd *MyWalSnd = NULL; /* Global state */ bool am_walsender = false; /* Am I a walsender process ? */ /* User-settable parameters for walsender */ int max_wal_senders = 0; /* the maximum number of concurrent walsenders */ -int WalSndDelay = 1000; /* max sleep time between some actions */ -int replication_timeout = 60 * 1000; /* maximum time to send one WAL data message */ +int WalSndDelay = 1000; /* max sleep time between some actions */ +int replication_timeout = 60 * 1000; /* maximum time to send one + * WAL data message */ /* * These variables are used similarly to openLogFile/Id/Seg/Off, @@ -121,7 +122,7 @@ static void WalSndHandshake(void); static void WalSndKill(int code, Datum arg); static void XLogSend(char *msgbuf, bool *caughtup); static void IdentifySystem(void); -static void StartReplication(StartReplicationCmd * cmd); +static void StartReplication(StartReplicationCmd *cmd); static void ProcessStandbyMessage(void); static void ProcessStandbyReplyMessage(void); static void ProcessStandbyHSFeedbackMessage(void); @@ -281,8 +282,8 @@ IdentifySystem(void) XLogRecPtr logptr; /* - * Reply with a result set with one row, three columns. First col is system - * ID, second is timeline ID, and third is current xlog location. + * Reply with a result set with one row, three columns. First col is + * system ID, second is timeline ID, and third is current xlog location. */ snprintf(sysid, sizeof(sysid), UINT64_FORMAT, @@ -348,17 +349,16 @@ IdentifySystem(void) * START_REPLICATION */ static void -StartReplication(StartReplicationCmd * cmd) +StartReplication(StartReplicationCmd *cmd) { StringInfoData buf; /* - * Let postmaster know that we're streaming. Once we've declared us as - * a WAL sender process, postmaster will let us outlive the bgwriter and - * kill us last in the shutdown sequence, so we get a chance to stream - * all remaining WAL at shutdown, including the shutdown checkpoint. - * Note that there's no going back, and we mustn't write any WAL records - * after this. + * Let postmaster know that we're streaming. Once we've declared us as a + * WAL sender process, postmaster will let us outlive the bgwriter and + * kill us last in the shutdown sequence, so we get a chance to stream all + * remaining WAL at shutdown, including the shutdown checkpoint. Note that + * there's no going back, and we mustn't write any WAL records after this. */ MarkPostmasterChildWalSender(); SendPostmasterSignal(PMSIGNAL_ADVANCE_STATE_MACHINE); @@ -383,8 +383,8 @@ StartReplication(StartReplicationCmd * cmd) * For some applications, for example, synchronous replication, it is * important to have a clear state for this initial catchup mode, so we * can trigger actions when we change streaming state later. We may stay - * in this state for a long time, which is exactly why we want to be - * able to monitor whether or not we are still here. + * in this state for a long time, which is exactly why we want to be able + * to monitor whether or not we are still here. */ WalSndSetState(WALSNDSTATE_CATCHUP); @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ ProcessRepliesIfAny(void) { unsigned char firstchar; int r; - int received = false; + int received = false; for (;;) { @@ -519,9 +519,9 @@ ProcessRepliesIfAny(void) firstchar))); } } + /* - * Save the last reply timestamp if we've received at least - * one reply. + * Save the last reply timestamp if we've received at least one reply. */ if (received) last_reply_timestamp = GetCurrentTimestamp(); @@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ ProcessRepliesIfAny(void) static void ProcessStandbyMessage(void) { - char msgtype; + char msgtype; resetStringInfo(&reply_message); @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ ProcessStandbyMessage(void) static void ProcessStandbyReplyMessage(void) { - StandbyReplyMessage reply; + StandbyReplyMessage reply; pq_copymsgbytes(&reply_message, (char *) &reply, sizeof(StandbyReplyMessage)); @@ -587,8 +587,8 @@ ProcessStandbyReplyMessage(void) reply.apply.xlogid, reply.apply.xrecoff); /* - * Update shared state for this WalSender process - * based on reply data from standby. + * Update shared state for this WalSender process based on reply data from + * standby. */ { /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ ProcessStandbyReplyMessage(void) static void ProcessStandbyHSFeedbackMessage(void) { - StandbyHSFeedbackMessage reply; + StandbyHSFeedbackMessage reply; TransactionId newxmin = InvalidTransactionId; pq_copymsgbytes(&reply_message, (char *) &reply, sizeof(StandbyHSFeedbackMessage)); @@ -620,22 +620,21 @@ ProcessStandbyHSFeedbackMessage(void) reply.epoch); /* - * Update the WalSender's proc xmin to allow it to be visible - * to snapshots. This will hold back the removal of dead rows - * and thereby prevent the generation of cleanup conflicts - * on the standby server. + * Update the WalSender's proc xmin to allow it to be visible to + * snapshots. This will hold back the removal of dead rows and thereby + * prevent the generation of cleanup conflicts on the standby server. */ if (TransactionIdIsValid(reply.xmin)) { - TransactionId nextXid; - uint32 nextEpoch; - bool epochOK = false; + TransactionId nextXid; + uint32 nextEpoch; + bool epochOK = false; GetNextXidAndEpoch(&nextXid, &nextEpoch); /* - * Epoch of oldestXmin should be same as standby or - * if the counter has wrapped, then one less than reply. + * Epoch of oldestXmin should be same as standby or if the counter has + * wrapped, then one less than reply. */ if (reply.xmin <= nextXid) { @@ -657,6 +656,7 @@ ProcessStandbyHSFeedbackMessage(void) if (!TransactionIdIsValid(MyProc->xmin)) { TransactionId oldestXmin = GetOldestXmin(true, true); + if (TransactionIdPrecedes(oldestXmin, reply.xmin)) newxmin = reply.xmin; else @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ ProcessStandbyHSFeedbackMessage(void) if (TransactionIdPrecedes(MyProc->xmin, reply.xmin)) newxmin = reply.xmin; else - newxmin = MyProc->xmin; /* stay the same */ + newxmin = MyProc->xmin; /* stay the same */ } } } @@ -735,8 +735,8 @@ WalSndLoop(void) } /* - * If we don't have any pending data in the output buffer, try to - * send some more. + * If we don't have any pending data in the output buffer, try to send + * some more. */ if (!pq_is_send_pending()) { @@ -746,8 +746,8 @@ WalSndLoop(void) * Even if we wrote all the WAL that was available when we started * sending, more might have arrived while we were sending this * batch. We had the latch set while sending, so we have not - * received any signals from that time. Let's arm the latch - * again, and after that check that we're still up-to-date. + * received any signals from that time. Let's arm the latch again, + * and after that check that we're still up-to-date. */ if (caughtup && !pq_is_send_pending()) { @@ -777,17 +777,17 @@ WalSndLoop(void) !got_SIGHUP && !walsender_shutdown_requested) { - TimestampTz finish_time = 0; + TimestampTz finish_time = 0; long sleeptime; /* Reschedule replication timeout */ if (replication_timeout > 0) { long secs; - int usecs; + int usecs; finish_time = TimestampTzPlusMilliseconds(last_reply_timestamp, - replication_timeout); + replication_timeout); TimestampDifference(GetCurrentTimestamp(), finish_time, &secs, &usecs); sleeptime = secs * 1000 + usecs / 1000; @@ -815,8 +815,8 @@ WalSndLoop(void) { /* * Since typically expiration of replication timeout means - * communication problem, we don't send the error message - * to the standby. + * communication problem, we don't send the error message to + * the standby. */ ereport(COMMERROR, (errmsg("terminating walsender process due to replication timeout"))); @@ -829,14 +829,14 @@ WalSndLoop(void) * This is an important state change for users, since before this * point data loss might occur if the primary dies and we need to * failover to the standby. The state change is also important for - * synchronous replication, since commits that started to wait at - * that point might wait for some time. + * synchronous replication, since commits that started to wait at that + * point might wait for some time. */ if (MyWalSnd->state == WALSNDSTATE_CATCHUP && caughtup) { ereport(DEBUG1, (errmsg("standby \"%s\" has now caught up with primary", - application_name))); + application_name))); WalSndSetState(WALSNDSTATE_STREAMING); } @@ -1317,7 +1317,7 @@ WalSndShmemInit(void) void WalSndWakeup(void) { - int i; + int i; for (i = 0; i < max_wal_senders; i++) SetLatch(&WalSndCtl->walsnds[i].latch); @@ -1369,16 +1369,16 @@ WalSndGetStateString(WalSndState state) Datum pg_stat_get_wal_senders(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { -#define PG_STAT_GET_WAL_SENDERS_COLS 8 - ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo; - TupleDesc tupdesc; - Tuplestorestate *tupstore; - MemoryContext per_query_ctx; - MemoryContext oldcontext; - int *sync_priority; - int priority = 0; - int sync_standby = -1; - int i; +#define PG_STAT_GET_WAL_SENDERS_COLS 8 + ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo; + TupleDesc tupdesc; + Tuplestorestate *tupstore; + MemoryContext per_query_ctx; + MemoryContext oldcontext; + int *sync_priority; + int priority = 0; + int sync_standby = -1; + int i; /* check to see if caller supports us returning a tuplestore */ if (rsinfo == NULL || !IsA(rsinfo, ReturnSetInfo)) @@ -1406,9 +1406,9 @@ pg_stat_get_wal_senders(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext); /* - * Get the priorities of sync standbys all in one go, to minimise - * lock acquisitions and to allow us to evaluate who is the current - * sync standby. This code must match the code in SyncRepReleaseWaiters(). + * Get the priorities of sync standbys all in one go, to minimise lock + * acquisitions and to allow us to evaluate who is the current sync + * standby. This code must match the code in SyncRepReleaseWaiters(). */ sync_priority = palloc(sizeof(int) * max_wal_senders); LWLockAcquire(SyncRepLock, LW_SHARED); @@ -1442,7 +1442,7 @@ pg_stat_get_wal_senders(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) XLogRecPtr write; XLogRecPtr flush; XLogRecPtr apply; - WalSndState state; + WalSndState state; Datum values[PG_STAT_GET_WAL_SENDERS_COLS]; bool nulls[PG_STAT_GET_WAL_SENDERS_COLS]; @@ -1463,8 +1463,8 @@ pg_stat_get_wal_senders(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!superuser()) { /* - * Only superusers can see details. Other users only get - * the pid value to know it's a walsender, but no details. + * Only superusers can see details. Other users only get the pid + * value to know it's a walsender, but no details. */ MemSet(&nulls[1], true, PG_STAT_GET_WAL_SENDERS_COLS - 1); } @@ -1485,7 +1485,7 @@ pg_stat_get_wal_senders(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (flush.xlogid == 0 && flush.xrecoff == 0) nulls[4] = true; snprintf(location, sizeof(location), "%X/%X", - flush.xlogid, flush.xrecoff); + flush.xlogid, flush.xrecoff); values[4] = CStringGetTextDatum(location); if (apply.xlogid == 0 && apply.xrecoff == 0) @@ -1497,8 +1497,8 @@ pg_stat_get_wal_senders(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) values[6] = Int32GetDatum(sync_priority[i]); /* - * More easily understood version of standby state. - * This is purely informational, not different from priority. + * More easily understood version of standby state. This is purely + * informational, not different from priority. */ if (sync_priority[i] == 0) values[7] = CStringGetTextDatum("ASYNC"); diff --git a/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteDefine.c b/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteDefine.c index a405dbfe8e..c1b97d141e 100644 --- a/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteDefine.c +++ b/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteDefine.c @@ -241,9 +241,9 @@ DefineQueryRewrite(char *rulename, /* * If we are installing an ON SELECT rule, we had better grab * AccessExclusiveLock to ensure no SELECTs are currently running on the - * event relation. For other types of rules, it is sufficient to - * grab ShareRowExclusiveLock to lock out insert/update/delete actions - * and to ensure that we lock out current CREATE RULE statements. + * event relation. For other types of rules, it is sufficient to grab + * ShareRowExclusiveLock to lock out insert/update/delete actions and to + * ensure that we lock out current CREATE RULE statements. */ if (event_type == CMD_SELECT) event_relation = heap_open(event_relid, AccessExclusiveLock); diff --git a/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteHandler.c b/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteHandler.c index a695b01239..bfc8fd7ee0 100644 --- a/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteHandler.c +++ b/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteHandler.c @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ static Node *get_assignment_input(Node *node); static void rewriteValuesRTE(RangeTblEntry *rte, Relation target_relation, List *attrnos); static void rewriteTargetListUD(Query *parsetree, RangeTblEntry *target_rte, - Relation target_relation); + Relation target_relation); static void markQueryForLocking(Query *qry, Node *jtnode, bool forUpdate, bool noWait, bool pushedDown); static List *matchLocks(CmdType event, RuleLock *rulelocks, @@ -743,8 +743,8 @@ rewriteTargetListIU(Query *parsetree, Relation target_relation, } /* - * For an UPDATE on a view, provide a dummy entry whenever there is - * no explicit assignment. + * For an UPDATE on a view, provide a dummy entry whenever there is no + * explicit assignment. */ if (new_tle == NULL && commandType == CMD_UPDATE && target_relation->rd_rel->relkind == RELKIND_VIEW) @@ -1112,7 +1112,7 @@ rewriteValuesRTE(RangeTblEntry *rte, Relation target_relation, List *attrnos) * rewriteTargetListUD - rewrite UPDATE/DELETE targetlist as needed * * This function adds a "junk" TLE that is needed to allow the executor to - * find the original row for the update or delete. When the target relation + * find the original row for the update or delete. When the target relation * is a regular table, the junk TLE emits the ctid attribute of the original * row. When the target relation is a view, there is no ctid, so we instead * emit a whole-row Var that will contain the "old" values of the view row. @@ -1145,8 +1145,8 @@ rewriteTargetListUD(Query *parsetree, RangeTblEntry *target_rte, else { /* - * Emit whole-row Var so that executor will have the "old" view row - * to pass to the INSTEAD OF trigger. + * Emit whole-row Var so that executor will have the "old" view row to + * pass to the INSTEAD OF trigger. */ var = makeWholeRowVar(target_rte, parsetree->resultRelation, @@ -1267,11 +1267,11 @@ ApplyRetrieveRule(Query *parsetree, * fine as the result relation. * * For UPDATE/DELETE, we need to expand the view so as to have source - * data for the operation. But we also need an unmodified RTE to + * data for the operation. But we also need an unmodified RTE to * serve as the target. So, copy the RTE and add the copy to the - * rangetable. Note that the copy does not get added to the jointree. - * Also note that there's a hack in fireRIRrules to avoid calling - * this function again when it arrives at the copied RTE. + * rangetable. Note that the copy does not get added to the jointree. + * Also note that there's a hack in fireRIRrules to avoid calling this + * function again when it arrives at the copied RTE. */ if (parsetree->commandType == CMD_INSERT) return parsetree; @@ -1286,9 +1286,9 @@ ApplyRetrieveRule(Query *parsetree, parsetree->resultRelation = list_length(parsetree->rtable); /* - * There's no need to do permissions checks twice, so wipe out - * the permissions info for the original RTE (we prefer to keep - * the bits set on the result RTE). + * There's no need to do permissions checks twice, so wipe out the + * permissions info for the original RTE (we prefer to keep the + * bits set on the result RTE). */ rte->requiredPerms = 0; rte->checkAsUser = InvalidOid; @@ -1988,9 +1988,9 @@ RewriteQuery(Query *parsetree, List *rewrite_events) */ foreach(lc1, parsetree->cteList) { - CommonTableExpr *cte = (CommonTableExpr *) lfirst(lc1); - Query *ctequery = (Query *) cte->ctequery; - List *newstuff; + CommonTableExpr *cte = (CommonTableExpr *) lfirst(lc1); + Query *ctequery = (Query *) cte->ctequery; + List *newstuff; Assert(IsA(ctequery, Query)); @@ -2021,12 +2021,12 @@ RewriteQuery(Query *parsetree, List *rewrite_events) } else { - ListCell *lc2; + ListCell *lc2; /* examine queries to determine which error message to issue */ foreach(lc2, newstuff) { - Query *q = (Query *) lfirst(lc2); + Query *q = (Query *) lfirst(lc2); if (q->querySource == QSRC_QUAL_INSTEAD_RULE) ereport(ERROR, diff --git a/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteSupport.c b/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteSupport.c index 9feed7345e..7770d032b1 100644 --- a/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteSupport.c +++ b/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteSupport.c @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ get_rewrite_oid(Oid relid, const char *rulename, bool missing_ok) * Find rule oid, given only a rule name but no rel OID. * * If there's more than one, it's an error. If there aren't any, that's an - * error, too. In general, this should be avoided - it is provided to support + * error, too. In general, this should be avoided - it is provided to support * syntax that is compatible with pre-7.3 versions of PG, where rule names * were unique across the entire database. */ diff --git a/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c b/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c index 1f89e52705..f96685db50 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c @@ -644,17 +644,17 @@ BufferAlloc(SMgrRelation smgr, char relpersistence, ForkNumber forkNum, /* OK, do the I/O */ TRACE_POSTGRESQL_BUFFER_WRITE_DIRTY_START(forkNum, blockNum, - smgr->smgr_rnode.node.spcNode, - smgr->smgr_rnode.node.dbNode, - smgr->smgr_rnode.node.relNode); + smgr->smgr_rnode.node.spcNode, + smgr->smgr_rnode.node.dbNode, + smgr->smgr_rnode.node.relNode); FlushBuffer(buf, NULL); LWLockRelease(buf->content_lock); TRACE_POSTGRESQL_BUFFER_WRITE_DIRTY_DONE(forkNum, blockNum, - smgr->smgr_rnode.node.spcNode, - smgr->smgr_rnode.node.dbNode, - smgr->smgr_rnode.node.relNode); + smgr->smgr_rnode.node.spcNode, + smgr->smgr_rnode.node.dbNode, + smgr->smgr_rnode.node.relNode); } else { @@ -2029,7 +2029,7 @@ PrintBufferDescs(void) "[%02d] (freeNext=%d, rel=%s, " "blockNum=%u, flags=0x%x, refcount=%u %d)", i, buf->freeNext, - relpathbackend(buf->tag.rnode, InvalidBackendId, buf->tag.forkNum), + relpathbackend(buf->tag.rnode, InvalidBackendId, buf->tag.forkNum), buf->tag.blockNum, buf->flags, buf->refcount, PrivateRefCount[i]); } @@ -2765,7 +2765,7 @@ local_buffer_write_error_callback(void *arg) if (bufHdr != NULL) { char *path = relpathbackend(bufHdr->tag.rnode, MyBackendId, - bufHdr->tag.forkNum); + bufHdr->tag.forkNum); errcontext("writing block %u of relation %s", bufHdr->tag.blockNum, path); diff --git a/src/backend/storage/buffer/freelist.c b/src/backend/storage/buffer/freelist.c index 72968db026..bf9903b9f3 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/buffer/freelist.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/buffer/freelist.c @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ typedef struct BufferAccessStrategyData * struct. */ Buffer buffers[1]; /* VARIABLE SIZE ARRAY */ -} BufferAccessStrategyData; +} BufferAccessStrategyData; /* Prototypes for internal functions */ diff --git a/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c b/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c index 0a01ed544e..8816a5dfab 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/buffer/localbuf.c @@ -150,8 +150,8 @@ LocalBufferAlloc(SMgrRelation smgr, ForkNumber forkNum, BlockNumber blockNum, #ifdef LBDEBUG fprintf(stderr, "LB ALLOC (%u,%d,%d) %d\n", - smgr->smgr_rnode.node.relNode, forkNum, blockNum, - -nextFreeLocalBuf - 1); + smgr->smgr_rnode.node.relNode, forkNum, blockNum, + -nextFreeLocalBuf - 1); #endif /* @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ DropRelFileNodeLocalBuffers(RelFileNode rnode, ForkNumber forkNum, elog(ERROR, "block %u of %s is still referenced (local %u)", bufHdr->tag.blockNum, relpathbackend(bufHdr->tag.rnode, MyBackendId, - bufHdr->tag.forkNum), + bufHdr->tag.forkNum), LocalRefCount[i]); /* Remove entry from hashtable */ hresult = (LocalBufferLookupEnt *) @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ GetLocalBufferStorage(void) /* * We allocate local buffers in a context of their own, so that the * space eaten for them is easily recognizable in MemoryContextStats - * output. Create the context on first use. + * output. Create the context on first use. */ if (LocalBufferContext == NULL) LocalBufferContext = diff --git a/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c b/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c index bdb97b2ad1..11bab38280 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c @@ -1063,15 +1063,15 @@ FileClose(File file) * If we get an error, as could happen within the ereport/elog calls, * we'll come right back here during transaction abort. Reset the * flag to ensure that we can't get into an infinite loop. This code - * is arranged to ensure that the worst-case consequence is failing - * to emit log message(s), not failing to attempt the unlink. + * is arranged to ensure that the worst-case consequence is failing to + * emit log message(s), not failing to attempt the unlink. */ vfdP->fdstate &= ~FD_TEMPORARY; if (log_temp_files >= 0) { struct stat filestats; - int stat_errno; + int stat_errno; /* first try the stat() */ if (stat(vfdP->fileName, &filestats)) @@ -1900,7 +1900,7 @@ RemovePgTempFiles(void) RemovePgTempFilesInDir(temp_path); snprintf(temp_path, sizeof(temp_path), "pg_tblspc/%s/%s", - spc_de->d_name, TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY); + spc_de->d_name, TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY); RemovePgTempRelationFiles(temp_path); } @@ -1977,7 +1977,7 @@ RemovePgTempRelationFiles(const char *tsdirname) while ((de = ReadDir(ts_dir, tsdirname)) != NULL) { - int i = 0; + int i = 0; /* * We're only interested in the per-database directories, which have @@ -2023,7 +2023,7 @@ RemovePgTempRelationFilesInDbspace(const char *dbspacedirname) snprintf(rm_path, sizeof(rm_path), "%s/%s", dbspacedirname, de->d_name); - unlink(rm_path); /* note we ignore any error */ + unlink(rm_path); /* note we ignore any error */ } FreeDir(dbspace_dir); @@ -2055,15 +2055,17 @@ looks_like_temp_rel_name(const char *name) /* We might have _forkname or .segment or both. */ if (name[pos] == '_') { - int forkchar = forkname_chars(&name[pos+1], NULL); + int forkchar = forkname_chars(&name[pos + 1], NULL); + if (forkchar <= 0) return false; pos += forkchar + 1; } if (name[pos] == '.') { - int segchar; - for (segchar = 1; isdigit((unsigned char) name[pos+segchar]); ++segchar) + int segchar; + + for (segchar = 1; isdigit((unsigned char) name[pos + segchar]); ++segchar) ; if (segchar <= 1) return false; diff --git a/src/backend/storage/file/reinit.c b/src/backend/storage/file/reinit.c index 54fde73de8..837ab90c8d 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/file/reinit.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/file/reinit.c @@ -24,14 +24,15 @@ #include "utils/memutils.h" static void ResetUnloggedRelationsInTablespaceDir(const char *tsdirname, - int op); + int op); static void ResetUnloggedRelationsInDbspaceDir(const char *dbspacedirname, int op); static bool parse_filename_for_nontemp_relation(const char *name, int *oidchars, ForkNumber *fork); -typedef struct { - char oid[OIDCHARS+1]; +typedef struct +{ + char oid[OIDCHARS + 1]; } unlogged_relation_entry; /* @@ -49,13 +50,14 @@ ResetUnloggedRelations(int op) char temp_path[MAXPGPATH]; DIR *spc_dir; struct dirent *spc_de; - MemoryContext tmpctx, oldctx; + MemoryContext tmpctx, + oldctx; /* Log it. */ ereport(DEBUG1, (errmsg("resetting unlogged relations: cleanup %d init %d", - (op & UNLOGGED_RELATION_CLEANUP) != 0, - (op & UNLOGGED_RELATION_INIT) != 0))); + (op & UNLOGGED_RELATION_CLEANUP) != 0, + (op & UNLOGGED_RELATION_INIT) != 0))); /* * Just to be sure we don't leak any memory, let's create a temporary @@ -85,7 +87,7 @@ ResetUnloggedRelations(int op) continue; snprintf(temp_path, sizeof(temp_path), "pg_tblspc/%s/%s", - spc_de->d_name, TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY); + spc_de->d_name, TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY); ResetUnloggedRelationsInTablespaceDir(temp_path, op); } @@ -119,7 +121,7 @@ ResetUnloggedRelationsInTablespaceDir(const char *tsdirname, int op) while ((de = ReadDir(ts_dir, tsdirname)) != NULL) { - int i = 0; + int i = 0; /* * We're only interested in the per-database directories, which have @@ -184,8 +186,8 @@ ResetUnloggedRelationsInDbspaceDir(const char *dbspacedirname, int op) /* Scan the directory. */ while ((de = ReadDir(dbspace_dir, dbspacedirname)) != NULL) { - ForkNumber forkNum; - int oidchars; + ForkNumber forkNum; + int oidchars; unlogged_relation_entry ent; /* Skip anything that doesn't look like a relation data file. */ @@ -198,8 +200,8 @@ ResetUnloggedRelationsInDbspaceDir(const char *dbspacedirname, int op) continue; /* - * Put the OID portion of the name into the hash table, if it isn't - * already. + * Put the OID portion of the name into the hash table, if it + * isn't already. */ memset(ent.oid, 0, sizeof(ent.oid)); memcpy(ent.oid, de->d_name, oidchars); @@ -236,9 +238,9 @@ ResetUnloggedRelationsInDbspaceDir(const char *dbspacedirname, int op) /* Scan the directory. */ while ((de = ReadDir(dbspace_dir, dbspacedirname)) != NULL) { - ForkNumber forkNum; - int oidchars; - bool found; + ForkNumber forkNum; + int oidchars; + bool found; unlogged_relation_entry ent; /* Skip anything that doesn't look like a relation data file. */ @@ -262,7 +264,8 @@ ResetUnloggedRelationsInDbspaceDir(const char *dbspacedirname, int op) if (found) { snprintf(rm_path, sizeof(rm_path), "%s/%s", - dbspacedirname, de->d_name); + dbspacedirname, de->d_name); + /* * It's tempting to actually throw an error here, but since * this code gets run during database startup, that could @@ -284,9 +287,9 @@ ResetUnloggedRelationsInDbspaceDir(const char *dbspacedirname, int op) /* * Initialization happens after cleanup is complete: we copy each init * fork file to the corresponding main fork file. Note that if we are - * asked to do both cleanup and init, we may never get here: if the cleanup - * code determines that there are no init forks in this dbspace, it will - * return before we get to this point. + * asked to do both cleanup and init, we may never get here: if the + * cleanup code determines that there are no init forks in this dbspace, + * it will return before we get to this point. */ if ((op & UNLOGGED_RELATION_INIT) != 0) { @@ -304,11 +307,11 @@ ResetUnloggedRelationsInDbspaceDir(const char *dbspacedirname, int op) /* Scan the directory. */ while ((de = ReadDir(dbspace_dir, dbspacedirname)) != NULL) { - ForkNumber forkNum; - int oidchars; - char oidbuf[OIDCHARS+1]; - char srcpath[MAXPGPATH]; - char dstpath[MAXPGPATH]; + ForkNumber forkNum; + int oidchars; + char oidbuf[OIDCHARS + 1]; + char srcpath[MAXPGPATH]; + char dstpath[MAXPGPATH]; /* Skip anything that doesn't look like a relation data file. */ if (!parse_filename_for_nontemp_relation(de->d_name, &oidchars, @@ -370,9 +373,9 @@ parse_filename_for_nontemp_relation(const char *name, int *oidchars, *fork = MAIN_FORKNUM; else { - int forkchar; + int forkchar; - forkchar = forkname_chars(&name[pos+1], fork); + forkchar = forkname_chars(&name[pos + 1], fork); if (forkchar <= 0) return false; pos += forkchar + 1; @@ -381,8 +384,9 @@ parse_filename_for_nontemp_relation(const char *name, int *oidchars, /* Check for a segment number. */ if (name[pos] == '.') { - int segchar; - for (segchar = 1; isdigit((unsigned char) name[pos+segchar]); ++segchar) + int segchar; + + for (segchar = 1; isdigit((unsigned char) name[pos + segchar]); ++segchar) ; if (segchar <= 1) return false; diff --git a/src/backend/storage/ipc/pmsignal.c b/src/backend/storage/ipc/pmsignal.c index 391d6a6ea0..306e3f9a21 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/ipc/pmsignal.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/ipc/pmsignal.c @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ PostmasterIsAlive(bool amDirectChild) #ifndef WIN32 if (amDirectChild) { - pid_t ppid = getppid(); + pid_t ppid = getppid(); /* If the postmaster is still our parent, it must be alive. */ if (ppid == PostmasterPid) @@ -297,10 +297,10 @@ PostmasterIsAlive(bool amDirectChild) } /* - * Use kill() to see if the postmaster is still alive. This can - * sometimes give a false positive result, since the postmaster's PID - * may get recycled, but it is good enough for existing uses by - * indirect children and in debugging environments. + * Use kill() to see if the postmaster is still alive. This can sometimes + * give a false positive result, since the postmaster's PID may get + * recycled, but it is good enough for existing uses by indirect children + * and in debugging environments. */ return (kill(PostmasterPid, 0) == 0); #else /* WIN32 */ diff --git a/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c b/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c index 65fca7171a..e7593fa2eb 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c @@ -475,10 +475,10 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) return; /* - * If our initial RunningTransactionsData had an overflowed snapshot then we knew - * we were missing some subxids from our snapshot. We can use this data as - * an initial snapshot, but we cannot yet mark it valid. We know that the - * missing subxids are equal to or earlier than nextXid. After we + * If our initial RunningTransactionsData had an overflowed snapshot then + * we knew we were missing some subxids from our snapshot. We can use this + * data as an initial snapshot, but we cannot yet mark it valid. We know + * that the missing subxids are equal to or earlier than nextXid. After we * initialise we continue to apply changes during recovery, so once the * oldestRunningXid is later than the nextXid from the initial snapshot we * know that we no longer have missing information and can mark the @@ -510,8 +510,8 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) */ /* - * Release any locks belonging to old transactions that are not - * running according to the running-xacts record. + * Release any locks belonging to old transactions that are not running + * according to the running-xacts record. */ StandbyReleaseOldLocks(running->nextXid); @@ -582,9 +582,8 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) * Now we've got the running xids we need to set the global values that * are used to track snapshots as they evolve further. * - * - latestCompletedXid which will be the xmax for snapshots - * - lastOverflowedXid which shows whether snapshots overflow - * - nextXid + * - latestCompletedXid which will be the xmax for snapshots - + * lastOverflowedXid which shows whether snapshots overflow - nextXid * * If the snapshot overflowed, then we still initialise with what we know, * but the recovery snapshot isn't fully valid yet because we know there @@ -611,9 +610,8 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) /* * If a transaction wrote a commit record in the gap between taking and - * logging the snapshot then latestCompletedXid may already be higher - * than the value from the snapshot, so check before we use the incoming - * value. + * logging the snapshot then latestCompletedXid may already be higher than + * the value from the snapshot, so check before we use the incoming value. */ if (TransactionIdPrecedes(ShmemVariableCache->latestCompletedXid, running->latestCompletedXid)) @@ -1048,7 +1046,7 @@ GetOldestXmin(bool allDbs, bool ignoreVacuum) if (allDbs || proc->databaseId == MyDatabaseId || - proc->databaseId == 0) /* include WalSender */ + proc->databaseId == 0) /* include WalSender */ { /* Fetch xid just once - see GetNewTransactionId */ TransactionId xid = proc->xid; @@ -1075,8 +1073,8 @@ GetOldestXmin(bool allDbs, bool ignoreVacuum) if (RecoveryInProgress()) { /* - * Check to see whether KnownAssignedXids contains an xid value - * older than the main procarray. + * Check to see whether KnownAssignedXids contains an xid value older + * than the main procarray. */ TransactionId kaxmin = KnownAssignedXidsGetOldestXmin(); @@ -1084,7 +1082,7 @@ GetOldestXmin(bool allDbs, bool ignoreVacuum) if (TransactionIdIsNormal(kaxmin) && TransactionIdPrecedes(kaxmin, result)) - result = kaxmin; + result = kaxmin; } else { @@ -1100,9 +1098,9 @@ GetOldestXmin(bool allDbs, bool ignoreVacuum) * vacuum_defer_cleanup_age provides some additional "slop" for the * benefit of hot standby queries on slave servers. This is quick and * dirty, and perhaps not all that useful unless the master has a - * predictable transaction rate, but it's what we've got. Note that we - * are assuming vacuum_defer_cleanup_age isn't large enough to cause - * wraparound --- so guc.c should limit it to no more than the + * predictable transaction rate, but it's what we've got. Note that + * we are assuming vacuum_defer_cleanup_age isn't large enough to + * cause wraparound --- so guc.c should limit it to no more than the * xidStopLimit threshold in varsup.c. */ result -= vacuum_defer_cleanup_age; @@ -1483,9 +1481,9 @@ GetRunningTransactionData(void) suboverflowed = true; /* - * Top-level XID of a transaction is always less than any of - * its subxids, so we don't need to check if any of the subxids - * are smaller than oldestRunningXid + * Top-level XID of a transaction is always less than any of its + * subxids, so we don't need to check if any of the subxids are + * smaller than oldestRunningXid */ } } diff --git a/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c b/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c index 2e71484126..3fdb5184a9 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ ResolveRecoveryConflictWithVirtualXIDs(VirtualTransactionId *waitlist, return; waitStart = GetCurrentTimestamp(); - new_status = NULL; /* we haven't changed the ps display */ + new_status = NULL; /* we haven't changed the ps display */ while (VirtualTransactionIdIsValid(*waitlist)) { @@ -963,14 +963,14 @@ void LogAccessExclusiveLockPrepare(void) { /* - * Ensure that a TransactionId has been assigned to this transaction, - * for two reasons, both related to lock release on the standby. - * First, we must assign an xid so that RecordTransactionCommit() and + * Ensure that a TransactionId has been assigned to this transaction, for + * two reasons, both related to lock release on the standby. First, we + * must assign an xid so that RecordTransactionCommit() and * RecordTransactionAbort() do not optimise away the transaction - * completion record which recovery relies upon to release locks. It's - * a hack, but for a corner case not worth adding code for into the - * main commit path. Second, must must assign an xid before the lock - * is recorded in shared memory, otherwise a concurrently executing + * completion record which recovery relies upon to release locks. It's a + * hack, but for a corner case not worth adding code for into the main + * commit path. Second, must must assign an xid before the lock is + * recorded in shared memory, otherwise a concurrently executing * GetRunningTransactionLocks() might see a lock associated with an * InvalidTransactionId which we later assert cannot happen. */ diff --git a/src/backend/storage/large_object/inv_api.c b/src/backend/storage/large_object/inv_api.c index 01e3492cb8..e0441f5bf1 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/large_object/inv_api.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/large_object/inv_api.c @@ -844,8 +844,8 @@ inv_truncate(LargeObjectDesc *obj_desc, int len) { /* * If the first page we found was after the truncation point, we're in - * a hole that we'll fill, but we need to delete the later page because - * the loop below won't visit it again. + * a hole that we'll fill, but we need to delete the later page + * because the loop below won't visit it again. */ if (olddata != NULL) { diff --git a/src/backend/storage/lmgr/lock.c b/src/backend/storage/lmgr/lock.c index ed0ea1205f..3fbe14a409 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/lmgr/lock.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/lmgr/lock.c @@ -586,7 +586,8 @@ LockAcquireExtended(const LOCKTAG *locktag, * standby server. Only AccessExclusiveLocks can conflict with lock types * that read-only transactions can acquire in a standby server. * - * Make sure this definition matches the one in GetRunningTransactionLocks(). + * Make sure this definition matches the one in + * GetRunningTransactionLocks(). * * First we prepare to log, then after lock acquired we issue log record. */ diff --git a/src/backend/storage/lmgr/predicate.c b/src/backend/storage/lmgr/predicate.c index 7978bef996..72385c2f3e 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/lmgr/predicate.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/lmgr/predicate.c @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ typedef struct OldSerXidControlData TransactionId headXid; /* newest valid Xid in the SLRU */ TransactionId tailXid; /* oldest xmin we might be interested in */ bool warningIssued; -} OldSerXidControlData; +} OldSerXidControlData; typedef struct OldSerXidControlData *OldSerXidControl; @@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ ReleasePredXact(SERIALIZABLEXACT *sxact) ptle = (PredXactListElement) (((char *) sxact) - offsetof(PredXactListElementData, sxact) - +offsetof(PredXactListElementData, link)); + + offsetof(PredXactListElementData, link)); SHMQueueDelete(&ptle->link); SHMQueueInsertBefore(&PredXact->availableList, &ptle->link); } @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ NextPredXact(SERIALIZABLEXACT *sxact) ptle = (PredXactListElement) (((char *) sxact) - offsetof(PredXactListElementData, sxact) - +offsetof(PredXactListElementData, link)); + + offsetof(PredXactListElementData, link)); ptle = (PredXactListElement) SHMQueueNext(&PredXact->activeList, &ptle->link, @@ -746,10 +746,10 @@ OldSerXidAdd(TransactionId xid, SerCommitSeqNo minConflictCommitSeqNo) Assert(TransactionIdIsValid(tailXid)); /* - * If the SLRU is currently unused, zero out the whole active region - * from tailXid to headXid before taking it into use. Otherwise zero - * out only any new pages that enter the tailXid-headXid range as we - * advance headXid. + * If the SLRU is currently unused, zero out the whole active region from + * tailXid to headXid before taking it into use. Otherwise zero out only + * any new pages that enter the tailXid-headXid range as we advance + * headXid. */ if (oldSerXidControl->headPage < 0) { @@ -855,8 +855,8 @@ OldSerXidSetActiveSerXmin(TransactionId xid) /* * When no sxacts are active, nothing overlaps, set the xid values to * invalid to show that there are no valid entries. Don't clear headPage, - * though. A new xmin might still land on that page, and we don't want - * to repeatedly zero out the same page. + * though. A new xmin might still land on that page, and we don't want to + * repeatedly zero out the same page. */ if (!TransactionIdIsValid(xid)) { @@ -901,7 +901,7 @@ OldSerXidSetActiveSerXmin(TransactionId xid) void CheckPointPredicate(void) { - int tailPage; + int tailPage; LWLockAcquire(OldSerXidLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE); @@ -921,16 +921,15 @@ CheckPointPredicate(void) { /* * The SLRU is no longer needed. Truncate everything. If we try to - * leave the head page around to avoid re-zeroing it, we might not - * use the SLRU again until we're past the wrap-around point, which - * makes SLRU unhappy. + * leave the head page around to avoid re-zeroing it, we might not use + * the SLRU again until we're past the wrap-around point, which makes + * SLRU unhappy. * * While the API asks you to specify truncation by page, it silently - * ignores the request unless the specified page is in a segment - * past some allocated portion of the SLRU. We don't care which - * page in a later segment we hit, so just add the number of pages - * per segment to the head page to land us *somewhere* in the next - * segment. + * ignores the request unless the specified page is in a segment past + * some allocated portion of the SLRU. We don't care which page in a + * later segment we hit, so just add the number of pages per segment + * to the head page to land us *somewhere* in the next segment. */ tailPage = oldSerXidControl->headPage + SLRU_PAGES_PER_SEGMENT; oldSerXidControl->headPage = -1; @@ -1329,12 +1328,12 @@ SummarizeOldestCommittedSxact(void) /* * This function is only called if there are no sxact slots available. * Some of them must belong to old, already-finished transactions, so - * there should be something in FinishedSerializableTransactions list - * that we can summarize. However, there's a race condition: while we - * were not holding any locks, a transaction might have ended and cleaned - * up all the finished sxact entries already, freeing up their sxact - * slots. In that case, we have nothing to do here. The caller will find - * one of the slots released by the other backend when it retries. + * there should be something in FinishedSerializableTransactions list that + * we can summarize. However, there's a race condition: while we were not + * holding any locks, a transaction might have ended and cleaned up all + * the finished sxact entries already, freeing up their sxact slots. In + * that case, we have nothing to do here. The caller will find one of the + * slots released by the other backend when it retries. */ if (SHMQueueEmpty(FinishedSerializableTransactions)) { @@ -2213,7 +2212,7 @@ PredicateLockTuple(const Relation relation, const HeapTuple tuple) */ if (relation->rd_index == NULL) { - TransactionId myxid; + TransactionId myxid; targetxmin = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple->t_data); @@ -2223,6 +2222,7 @@ PredicateLockTuple(const Relation relation, const HeapTuple tuple) if (TransactionIdFollowsOrEquals(targetxmin, TransactionXmin)) { TransactionId xid = SubTransGetTopmostTransaction(targetxmin); + if (TransactionIdEquals(xid, myxid)) { /* We wrote it; we already have a write lock. */ @@ -2272,7 +2272,7 @@ PredicateLockTupleRowVersionLink(const Relation relation, PREDICATELOCKTARGETTAG oldtupletag; PREDICATELOCKTARGETTAG oldpagetag; PREDICATELOCKTARGETTAG newtupletag; - BlockNumber oldblk, + BlockNumber oldblk, newblk; OffsetNumber oldoff, newoff; @@ -2308,10 +2308,10 @@ PredicateLockTupleRowVersionLink(const Relation relation, /* * A page-level lock on the page containing the old tuple counts too. - * Anyone holding a lock on the page is logically holding a lock on - * the old tuple, so we need to acquire a lock on his behalf on the - * new tuple too. However, if the new tuple is on the same page as the - * old one, the old page-level lock already covers the new tuple. + * Anyone holding a lock on the page is logically holding a lock on the + * old tuple, so we need to acquire a lock on his behalf on the new tuple + * too. However, if the new tuple is on the same page as the old one, the + * old page-level lock already covers the new tuple. * * A relation-level lock always covers both tuple versions, so we don't * need to worry about those here. @@ -2668,10 +2668,10 @@ PredicateLockPageSplit(const Relation relation, const BlockNumber oldblkno, /* * Move the locks to the parent. This shouldn't fail. * - * Note that here we are removing locks held by other - * backends, leading to a possible inconsistency in their - * local lock hash table. This is OK because we're replacing - * it with a lock that covers the old one. + * Note that here we are removing locks held by other backends, + * leading to a possible inconsistency in their local lock hash table. + * This is OK because we're replacing it with a lock that covers the + * old one. */ success = TransferPredicateLocksToNewTarget(oldtargettag, newtargettag, @@ -2696,16 +2696,15 @@ PredicateLockPageCombine(const Relation relation, const BlockNumber oldblkno, const BlockNumber newblkno) { /* - * Page combines differ from page splits in that we ought to be - * able to remove the locks on the old page after transferring - * them to the new page, instead of duplicating them. However, - * because we can't edit other backends' local lock tables, - * removing the old lock would leave them with an entry in their - * LocalPredicateLockHash for a lock they're not holding, which - * isn't acceptable. So we wind up having to do the same work as a - * page split, acquiring a lock on the new page and keeping the old - * page locked too. That can lead to some false positives, but - * should be rare in practice. + * Page combines differ from page splits in that we ought to be able to + * remove the locks on the old page after transferring them to the new + * page, instead of duplicating them. However, because we can't edit other + * backends' local lock tables, removing the old lock would leave them + * with an entry in their LocalPredicateLockHash for a lock they're not + * holding, which isn't acceptable. So we wind up having to do the same + * work as a page split, acquiring a lock on the new page and keeping the + * old page locked too. That can lead to some false positives, but should + * be rare in practice. */ PredicateLockPageSplit(relation, oldblkno, newblkno); } @@ -3652,15 +3651,15 @@ CheckTargetForConflictsIn(PREDICATELOCKTARGETTAG *targettag) /* * If we're getting a write lock on the tuple and we're not in a * subtransaction, we don't need a predicate (SIREAD) lock. We - * can't use this optimization within a subtransaction because - * the subtransaction could be rolled back, and we would be left + * can't use this optimization within a subtransaction because the + * subtransaction could be rolled back, and we would be left * without any lock at the top level. - * + * * At this point our transaction already has an ExclusiveRowLock - * on the relation, so we are OK to drop the predicate lock on - * the tuple, if found, without fearing that another write - * against the tuple will occur before the MVCC information - * makes it to the buffer. + * on the relation, so we are OK to drop the predicate lock on the + * tuple, if found, without fearing that another write against the + * tuple will occur before the MVCC information makes it to the + * buffer. */ if (!IsSubTransaction() && GET_PREDICATELOCKTARGETTAG_OFFSET(*targettag)) @@ -3722,8 +3721,8 @@ CheckTargetForConflictsIn(PREDICATELOCKTARGETTAG *targettag) /* * Remove entry in local lock table if it exists and has * no children. It's OK if it doesn't exist; that means - * the lock was transferred to a new target by a - * different backend. + * the lock was transferred to a new target by a different + * backend. */ if (locallock != NULL) { @@ -3733,8 +3732,8 @@ CheckTargetForConflictsIn(PREDICATELOCKTARGETTAG *targettag) { rmlocallock = (LOCALPREDICATELOCK *) hash_search_with_hash_value(LocalPredicateLockHash, - targettag, targettaghash, - HASH_REMOVE, NULL); + targettag, targettaghash, + HASH_REMOVE, NULL); Assert(rmlocallock == locallock); } } @@ -3772,9 +3771,9 @@ CheckTargetForConflictsIn(PREDICATELOCKTARGETTAG *targettag) LWLockAcquire(partitionLock, LW_SHARED); /* - * The list may have been altered by another process - * while we weren't holding the partition lock. Start - * over at the front. + * The list may have been altered by another process while + * we weren't holding the partition lock. Start over at + * the front. */ nextpredlock = (PREDICATELOCK *) SHMQueueNext(&(target->predicateLocks), @@ -3862,8 +3861,8 @@ CheckForSerializableConflictIn(const Relation relation, const HeapTuple tuple, relation->rd_node.dbNode, relation->rd_id, ItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(tuple->t_data->t_ctid)), - ItemPointerGetOffsetNumber(&(tuple->t_data->t_ctid)), - HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple->t_data)); + ItemPointerGetOffsetNumber(&(tuple->t_data->t_ctid)), + HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple->t_data)); CheckTargetForConflictsIn(&targettag); } diff --git a/src/backend/storage/smgr/md.c b/src/backend/storage/smgr/md.c index 9d585b6fea..6f8866836d 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/smgr/md.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/smgr/md.c @@ -938,7 +938,7 @@ mdsync(void) int processed = 0; instr_time sync_start, sync_end, - sync_diff; + sync_diff; uint64 elapsed; uint64 longest = 0; uint64 total_elapsed = 0; @@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ mdsync(void) if (seg != NULL && FileSync(seg->mdfd_vfd) >= 0) { - if (log_checkpoints && (! INSTR_TIME_IS_ZERO(sync_start))) + if (log_checkpoints && (!INSTR_TIME_IS_ZERO(sync_start))) { INSTR_TIME_SET_CURRENT(sync_end); sync_diff = sync_end; @@ -1104,8 +1104,8 @@ mdsync(void) longest = elapsed; total_elapsed += elapsed; processed++; - elog(DEBUG1, "checkpoint sync: number=%d file=%s time=%.3f msec", - processed, FilePathName(seg->mdfd_vfd), (double) elapsed / 1000); + elog(DEBUG1, "checkpoint sync: number=%d file=%s time=%.3f msec", + processed, FilePathName(seg->mdfd_vfd), (double) elapsed / 1000); } break; /* success; break out of retry loop */ @@ -1268,7 +1268,7 @@ register_dirty_segment(SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forknum, MdfdVec *seg) return; /* passed it off successfully */ ereport(DEBUG1, - (errmsg("could not forward fsync request because request queue is full"))); + (errmsg("could not forward fsync request because request queue is full"))); if (FileSync(seg->mdfd_vfd) < 0) ereport(ERROR, diff --git a/src/backend/storage/smgr/smgr.c b/src/backend/storage/smgr/smgr.c index 82bf232645..a6610bf4f8 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/smgr/smgr.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/smgr/smgr.c @@ -48,16 +48,16 @@ typedef struct f_smgr void (*smgr_unlink) (RelFileNodeBackend rnode, ForkNumber forknum, bool isRedo); void (*smgr_extend) (SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forknum, - BlockNumber blocknum, char *buffer, bool skipFsync); + BlockNumber blocknum, char *buffer, bool skipFsync); void (*smgr_prefetch) (SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forknum, BlockNumber blocknum); void (*smgr_read) (SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forknum, BlockNumber blocknum, char *buffer); void (*smgr_write) (SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forknum, - BlockNumber blocknum, char *buffer, bool skipFsync); + BlockNumber blocknum, char *buffer, bool skipFsync); BlockNumber (*smgr_nblocks) (SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forknum); void (*smgr_truncate) (SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forknum, - BlockNumber nblocks); + BlockNumber nblocks); void (*smgr_immedsync) (SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forknum); void (*smgr_pre_ckpt) (void); /* may be NULL */ void (*smgr_sync) (void); /* may be NULL */ diff --git a/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c b/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c index cc7945aeb6..805514b07b 100644 --- a/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c +++ b/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c @@ -1555,7 +1555,7 @@ exec_bind_message(StringInfo input_message) /* sizeof(ParamListInfoData) includes the first array element */ params = (ParamListInfo) palloc(sizeof(ParamListInfoData) + - (numParams - 1) *sizeof(ParamExternData)); + (numParams - 1) * sizeof(ParamExternData)); /* we have static list of params, so no hooks needed */ params->paramFetch = NULL; params->paramFetchArg = NULL; @@ -2982,17 +2982,16 @@ ia64_get_bsp(void) #ifndef __INTEL_COMPILER /* the ;; is a "stop", seems to be required before fetching BSP */ - __asm__ __volatile__( - ";;\n" - " mov %0=ar.bsp \n" -: "=r"(ret)); + __asm__ __volatile__( + ";;\n" + " mov %0=ar.bsp \n" + : "=r"(ret)); #else - ret = (char *) __getReg(_IA64_REG_AR_BSP); + ret = (char *) __getReg(_IA64_REG_AR_BSP); #endif - return ret; + return ret; } - -#endif /* IA64 */ +#endif /* IA64 */ /* @@ -3035,7 +3034,7 @@ check_stack_depth(void) (errcode(ERRCODE_STATEMENT_TOO_COMPLEX), errmsg("stack depth limit exceeded"), errhint("Increase the configuration parameter \"max_stack_depth\" (currently %dkB), " - "after ensuring the platform's stack depth limit is adequate.", + "after ensuring the platform's stack depth limit is adequate.", max_stack_depth))); } @@ -3057,10 +3056,10 @@ check_stack_depth(void) (errcode(ERRCODE_STATEMENT_TOO_COMPLEX), errmsg("stack depth limit exceeded"), errhint("Increase the configuration parameter \"max_stack_depth\" (currently %dkB), " - "after ensuring the platform's stack depth limit is adequate.", + "after ensuring the platform's stack depth limit is adequate.", max_stack_depth))); } -#endif /* IA64 */ +#endif /* IA64 */ } /* GUC check hook for max_stack_depth */ diff --git a/src/backend/tcop/pquery.c b/src/backend/tcop/pquery.c index 1286edee72..b7649c68fc 100644 --- a/src/backend/tcop/pquery.c +++ b/src/backend/tcop/pquery.c @@ -248,8 +248,8 @@ ChoosePortalStrategy(List *stmts) /* * PORTAL_ONE_SELECT and PORTAL_UTIL_SELECT need only consider the * single-statement case, since there are no rewrite rules that can add - * auxiliary queries to a SELECT or a utility command. - * PORTAL_ONE_MOD_WITH likewise allows only one top-level statement. + * auxiliary queries to a SELECT or a utility command. PORTAL_ONE_MOD_WITH + * likewise allows only one top-level statement. */ if (list_length(stmts) == 1) { @@ -1158,7 +1158,7 @@ PortalRunUtility(Portal portal, Node *utilityStmt, bool isTopLevel, * list. Transaction control, LOCK, and SET must *not* set a snapshot * since they need to be executable at the start of a transaction-snapshot * mode transaction without freezing a snapshot. By extension we allow - * SHOW not to set a snapshot. The other stmts listed are just efficiency + * SHOW not to set a snapshot. The other stmts listed are just efficiency * hacks. Beware of listing anything that can modify the database --- if, * say, it has to update an index with expressions that invoke * user-defined functions, then it had better have a snapshot. diff --git a/src/backend/tcop/utility.c b/src/backend/tcop/utility.c index 8e13096246..b1fd5ec04f 100644 --- a/src/backend/tcop/utility.c +++ b/src/backend/tcop/utility.c @@ -562,12 +562,12 @@ standard_ProcessUtility(Node *parsetree, /* * Unless "IF NOT EXISTS" was specified and the - * relation already exists, create the pg_foreign_table - * entry. + * relation already exists, create the + * pg_foreign_table entry. */ if (relOid != InvalidOid) CreateForeignTable((CreateForeignTableStmt *) stmt, - relOid); + relOid); } else { @@ -916,6 +916,7 @@ standard_ProcessUtility(Node *parsetree, break; case T_AlterEnumStmt: /* ALTER TYPE (enum) */ + /* * We disallow this in transaction blocks, because we can't cope * with enum OID values getting into indexes and then having their diff --git a/src/backend/tsearch/spell.c b/src/backend/tsearch/spell.c index d4ddcba631..ecc880f54d 100644 --- a/src/backend/tsearch/spell.c +++ b/src/backend/tsearch/spell.c @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ NIFinishBuild(IspellDict *Conf) * doesn't need that. The cpalloc and cpalloc0 macros are just documentation * to indicate which allocations actually require zeroing. */ -#define COMPACT_ALLOC_CHUNK 8192 /* must be > aset.c's allocChunkLimit */ +#define COMPACT_ALLOC_CHUNK 8192 /* must be > aset.c's allocChunkLimit */ #define COMPACT_MAX_REQ 1024 /* must be < COMPACT_ALLOC_CHUNK */ static void * diff --git a/src/backend/tsearch/ts_locale.c b/src/backend/tsearch/ts_locale.c index c66f4aa8bf..b8ae0fe65e 100644 --- a/src/backend/tsearch/ts_locale.c +++ b/src/backend/tsearch/ts_locale.c @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ t_isdigit(const char *ptr) { int clen = pg_mblen(ptr); wchar_t character[2]; - Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /*TODO*/ + Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /* TODO */ if (clen == 1 || lc_ctype_is_c(collation)) return isdigit(TOUCHAR(ptr)); @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ t_isspace(const char *ptr) { int clen = pg_mblen(ptr); wchar_t character[2]; - Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /*TODO*/ + Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /* TODO */ if (clen == 1 || lc_ctype_is_c(collation)) return isspace(TOUCHAR(ptr)); @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ t_isalpha(const char *ptr) { int clen = pg_mblen(ptr); wchar_t character[2]; - Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /*TODO*/ + Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /* TODO */ if (clen == 1 || lc_ctype_is_c(collation)) return isalpha(TOUCHAR(ptr)); @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ t_isprint(const char *ptr) { int clen = pg_mblen(ptr); wchar_t character[2]; - Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /*TODO*/ + Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /* TODO */ if (clen == 1 || lc_ctype_is_c(collation)) return isprint(TOUCHAR(ptr)); @@ -243,8 +243,9 @@ char * lowerstr_with_len(const char *str, int len) { char *out; + #ifdef USE_WIDE_UPPER_LOWER - Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /*TODO*/ + Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /* TODO */ #endif if (len == 0) diff --git a/src/backend/tsearch/ts_selfuncs.c b/src/backend/tsearch/ts_selfuncs.c index 7f33c16a24..366fa2ebf4 100644 --- a/src/backend/tsearch/ts_selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/tsearch/ts_selfuncs.c @@ -304,9 +304,9 @@ tsquery_opr_selec(QueryItem *item, char *operand, /* * Our strategy is to scan through the MCV list and add up the - * frequencies of the ones that match the prefix, thereby - * assuming that the MCVs are representative of the whole lexeme - * population in this respect. Compare histogram_selectivity(). + * frequencies of the ones that match the prefix, thereby assuming + * that the MCVs are representative of the whole lexeme population + * in this respect. Compare histogram_selectivity(). * * This is only a good plan if we have a pretty fair number of * MCVs available; we set the threshold at 100. If no stats or @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ tsquery_opr_selec(QueryItem *item, char *operand, default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized operator: %d", item->qoperator.oper); - selec = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ + selec = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ break; } } diff --git a/src/backend/tsearch/wparser_def.c b/src/backend/tsearch/wparser_def.c index 3981a50589..47d777a3e6 100644 --- a/src/backend/tsearch/wparser_def.c +++ b/src/backend/tsearch/wparser_def.c @@ -299,16 +299,16 @@ TParserInit(char *str, int len) */ if (prs->charmaxlen > 1) { - Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /*TODO*/ - + Oid collation = DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID; /* TODO */ + prs->usewide = true; - if ( lc_ctype_is_c(collation) ) + if (lc_ctype_is_c(collation)) { /* - * char2wchar doesn't work for C-locale and - * sizeof(pg_wchar) could be not equal to sizeof(wchar_t) + * char2wchar doesn't work for C-locale and sizeof(pg_wchar) could + * be not equal to sizeof(wchar_t) */ - prs->pgwstr = (pg_wchar*) palloc(sizeof(pg_wchar) * (prs->lenstr + 1)); + prs->pgwstr = (pg_wchar *) palloc(sizeof(pg_wchar) * (prs->lenstr + 1)); pg_mb2wchar_with_len(prs->str, prs->pgwstr, prs->lenstr); } else @@ -325,10 +325,11 @@ TParserInit(char *str, int len) prs->state->state = TPS_Base; #ifdef WPARSER_TRACE + /* - * Use of %.*s here is a bit risky since it can misbehave if the data - * is not in what libc thinks is the prevailing encoding. However, - * since this is just a debugging aid, we choose to live with that. + * Use of %.*s here is a bit risky since it can misbehave if the data is + * not in what libc thinks is the prevailing encoding. However, since + * this is just a debugging aid, we choose to live with that. */ fprintf(stderr, "parsing \"%.*s\"\n", len, str); #endif @@ -425,11 +426,11 @@ TParserCopyClose(TParser *prs) /* * Character-type support functions, equivalent to is* macros, but * working with any possible encodings and locales. Notes: - * - with multibyte encoding and C-locale isw* function may fail - * or give wrong result. - * - multibyte encoding and C-locale often are used for - * Asian languages. - * - if locale is C the we use pgwstr instead of wstr + * - with multibyte encoding and C-locale isw* function may fail + * or give wrong result. + * - multibyte encoding and C-locale often are used for + * Asian languages. + * - if locale is C the we use pgwstr instead of wstr */ #ifdef USE_WIDE_UPPER_LOWER @@ -447,7 +448,7 @@ p_is##type(TParser *prs) { \ } \ \ return is##type( *(unsigned char*)( prs->str + prs->state->posbyte ) ); \ -} \ +} \ \ static int \ p_isnot##type(TParser *prs) { \ @@ -719,7 +720,7 @@ p_isignore(TParser *prs) static int p_ishost(TParser *prs) { - TParser *tmpprs = TParserCopyInit(prs); + TParser *tmpprs = TParserCopyInit(prs); int res = 0; tmpprs->wanthost = true; @@ -741,7 +742,7 @@ p_ishost(TParser *prs) static int p_isURLPath(TParser *prs) { - TParser *tmpprs = TParserCopyInit(prs); + TParser *tmpprs = TParserCopyInit(prs); int res = 0; tmpprs->state = newTParserPosition(tmpprs->state); @@ -773,269 +774,269 @@ p_isspecial(TParser *prs) /* * pg_dsplen could return -1 which means error or control character */ - if ( pg_dsplen(prs->str + prs->state->posbyte) == 0 ) + if (pg_dsplen(prs->str + prs->state->posbyte) == 0) return 1; #ifdef USE_WIDE_UPPER_LOWER + /* - * Unicode Characters in the 'Mark, Spacing Combining' Category - * That characters are not alpha although they are not breakers - * of word too. - * Check that only in utf encoding, because other encodings - * aren't supported by postgres or even exists. + * Unicode Characters in the 'Mark, Spacing Combining' Category That + * characters are not alpha although they are not breakers of word too. + * Check that only in utf encoding, because other encodings aren't + * supported by postgres or even exists. */ - if ( GetDatabaseEncoding() == PG_UTF8 && prs->usewide ) + if (GetDatabaseEncoding() == PG_UTF8 && prs->usewide) { - static pg_wchar strange_letter[] = { - /* - * use binary search, so elements - * should be ordered - */ - 0x0903, /* DEVANAGARI SIGN VISARGA */ - 0x093E, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x093F, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN I */ - 0x0940, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN II */ - 0x0949, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN CANDRA O */ - 0x094A, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN SHORT O */ - 0x094B, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0x094C, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN AU */ - 0x0982, /* BENGALI SIGN ANUSVARA */ - 0x0983, /* BENGALI SIGN VISARGA */ - 0x09BE, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x09BF, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN I */ - 0x09C0, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN II */ - 0x09C7, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN E */ - 0x09C8, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN AI */ - 0x09CB, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0x09CC, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN AU */ - 0x09D7, /* BENGALI AU LENGTH MARK */ - 0x0A03, /* GURMUKHI SIGN VISARGA */ - 0x0A3E, /* GURMUKHI VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x0A3F, /* GURMUKHI VOWEL SIGN I */ - 0x0A40, /* GURMUKHI VOWEL SIGN II */ - 0x0A83, /* GUJARATI SIGN VISARGA */ - 0x0ABE, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x0ABF, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN I */ - 0x0AC0, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN II */ - 0x0AC9, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN CANDRA O */ - 0x0ACB, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0x0ACC, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN AU */ - 0x0B02, /* ORIYA SIGN ANUSVARA */ - 0x0B03, /* ORIYA SIGN VISARGA */ - 0x0B3E, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x0B40, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN II */ - 0x0B47, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN E */ - 0x0B48, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN AI */ - 0x0B4B, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0x0B4C, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN AU */ - 0x0B57, /* ORIYA AU LENGTH MARK */ - 0x0BBE, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x0BBF, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN I */ - 0x0BC1, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN U */ - 0x0BC2, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN UU */ - 0x0BC6, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN E */ - 0x0BC7, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN EE */ - 0x0BC8, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN AI */ - 0x0BCA, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0x0BCB, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN OO */ - 0x0BCC, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN AU */ - 0x0BD7, /* TAMIL AU LENGTH MARK */ - 0x0C01, /* TELUGU SIGN CANDRABINDU */ - 0x0C02, /* TELUGU SIGN ANUSVARA */ - 0x0C03, /* TELUGU SIGN VISARGA */ - 0x0C41, /* TELUGU VOWEL SIGN U */ - 0x0C42, /* TELUGU VOWEL SIGN UU */ - 0x0C43, /* TELUGU VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC R */ - 0x0C44, /* TELUGU VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC RR */ - 0x0C82, /* KANNADA SIGN ANUSVARA */ - 0x0C83, /* KANNADA SIGN VISARGA */ - 0x0CBE, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x0CC0, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN II */ - 0x0CC1, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN U */ - 0x0CC2, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN UU */ - 0x0CC3, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC R */ - 0x0CC4, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC RR */ - 0x0CC7, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN EE */ - 0x0CC8, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN AI */ - 0x0CCA, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0x0CCB, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN OO */ - 0x0CD5, /* KANNADA LENGTH MARK */ - 0x0CD6, /* KANNADA AI LENGTH MARK */ - 0x0D02, /* MALAYALAM SIGN ANUSVARA */ - 0x0D03, /* MALAYALAM SIGN VISARGA */ - 0x0D3E, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x0D3F, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN I */ - 0x0D40, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN II */ - 0x0D46, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN E */ - 0x0D47, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN EE */ - 0x0D48, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN AI */ - 0x0D4A, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0x0D4B, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN OO */ - 0x0D4C, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN AU */ - 0x0D57, /* MALAYALAM AU LENGTH MARK */ - 0x0D82, /* SINHALA SIGN ANUSVARAYA */ - 0x0D83, /* SINHALA SIGN VISARGAYA */ - 0x0DCF, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN AELA-PILLA */ - 0x0DD0, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KETTI AEDA-PILLA */ - 0x0DD1, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA AEDA-PILLA */ - 0x0DD8, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN GAETTA-PILLA */ - 0x0DD9, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA */ - 0x0DDA, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA KOMBUVA */ - 0x0DDB, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBU DEKA */ - 0x0DDC, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA HAA AELA-PILLA */ - 0x0DDD, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA HAA DIGA AELA-PILLA */ - 0x0DDE, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA HAA GAYANUKITTA */ - 0x0DDF, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN GAYANUKITTA */ - 0x0DF2, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA GAETTA-PILLA */ - 0x0DF3, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA GAYANUKITTA */ - 0x0F3E, /* TIBETAN SIGN YAR TSHES */ - 0x0F3F, /* TIBETAN SIGN MAR TSHES */ - 0x0F7F, /* TIBETAN SIGN RNAM BCAD */ - 0x102B, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN TALL AA */ - 0x102C, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x1031, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN E */ - 0x1038, /* MYANMAR SIGN VISARGA */ - 0x103B, /* MYANMAR CONSONANT SIGN MEDIAL YA */ - 0x103C, /* MYANMAR CONSONANT SIGN MEDIAL RA */ - 0x1056, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC R */ - 0x1057, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC RR */ - 0x1062, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN SGAW KAREN EU */ - 0x1063, /* MYANMAR TONE MARK SGAW KAREN HATHI */ - 0x1064, /* MYANMAR TONE MARK SGAW KAREN KE PHO */ - 0x1067, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN EU */ - 0x1068, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN UE */ - 0x1069, /* MYANMAR SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN TONE-1 */ - 0x106A, /* MYANMAR SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN TONE-2 */ - 0x106B, /* MYANMAR SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN TONE-3 */ - 0x106C, /* MYANMAR SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN TONE-4 */ - 0x106D, /* MYANMAR SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN TONE-5 */ - 0x1083, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN SHAN AA */ - 0x1084, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN SHAN E */ - 0x1087, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN TONE-2 */ - 0x1088, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN TONE-3 */ - 0x1089, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN TONE-5 */ - 0x108A, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN TONE-6 */ - 0x108B, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN COUNCIL TONE-2 */ - 0x108C, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN COUNCIL TONE-3 */ - 0x108F, /* MYANMAR SIGN RUMAI PALAUNG TONE-5 */ - 0x17B6, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x17BE, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN OE */ - 0x17BF, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN YA */ - 0x17C0, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN IE */ - 0x17C1, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN E */ - 0x17C2, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN AE */ - 0x17C3, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN AI */ - 0x17C4, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN OO */ - 0x17C5, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN AU */ - 0x17C7, /* KHMER SIGN REAHMUK */ - 0x17C8, /* KHMER SIGN YUUKALEAPINTU */ - 0x1923, /* LIMBU VOWEL SIGN EE */ - 0x1924, /* LIMBU VOWEL SIGN AI */ - 0x1925, /* LIMBU VOWEL SIGN OO */ - 0x1926, /* LIMBU VOWEL SIGN AU */ - 0x1929, /* LIMBU SUBJOINED LETTER YA */ - 0x192A, /* LIMBU SUBJOINED LETTER RA */ - 0x192B, /* LIMBU SUBJOINED LETTER WA */ - 0x1930, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER KA */ - 0x1931, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER NGA */ - 0x1933, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER TA */ - 0x1934, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER NA */ - 0x1935, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER PA */ - 0x1936, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER MA */ - 0x1937, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER RA */ - 0x1938, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER LA */ - 0x19B0, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN VOWEL SHORTENER */ - 0x19B1, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x19B2, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN II */ - 0x19B3, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN U */ - 0x19B4, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN UU */ - 0x19B5, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN E */ - 0x19B6, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN AE */ - 0x19B7, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0x19B8, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN OA */ - 0x19B9, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN UE */ - 0x19BA, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN AY */ - 0x19BB, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN AAY */ - 0x19BC, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN UY */ - 0x19BD, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN OY */ - 0x19BE, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN OAY */ - 0x19BF, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN UEY */ - 0x19C0, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN IY */ - 0x19C8, /* NEW TAI LUE TONE MARK-1 */ - 0x19C9, /* NEW TAI LUE TONE MARK-2 */ - 0x1A19, /* BUGINESE VOWEL SIGN E */ - 0x1A1A, /* BUGINESE VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0x1A1B, /* BUGINESE VOWEL SIGN AE */ - 0x1B04, /* BALINESE SIGN BISAH */ - 0x1B35, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN TEDUNG */ - 0x1B3B, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN RA REPA TEDUNG */ - 0x1B3D, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN LA LENGA TEDUNG */ - 0x1B3E, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN TALING */ - 0x1B3F, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN TALING REPA */ - 0x1B40, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN TALING TEDUNG */ - 0x1B41, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN TALING REPA TEDUNG */ - 0x1B43, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN PEPET TEDUNG */ - 0x1B44, /* BALINESE ADEG ADEG */ - 0x1B82, /* SUNDANESE SIGN PANGWISAD */ - 0x1BA1, /* SUNDANESE CONSONANT SIGN PAMINGKAL */ - 0x1BA6, /* SUNDANESE VOWEL SIGN PANAELAENG */ - 0x1BA7, /* SUNDANESE VOWEL SIGN PANOLONG */ - 0x1BAA, /* SUNDANESE SIGN PAMAAEH */ - 0x1C24, /* LEPCHA SUBJOINED LETTER YA */ - 0x1C25, /* LEPCHA SUBJOINED LETTER RA */ - 0x1C26, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0x1C27, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN I */ - 0x1C28, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0x1C29, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN OO */ - 0x1C2A, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN U */ - 0x1C2B, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN UU */ - 0x1C34, /* LEPCHA CONSONANT SIGN NYIN-DO */ - 0x1C35, /* LEPCHA CONSONANT SIGN KANG */ - 0xA823, /* SYLOTI NAGRI VOWEL SIGN A */ - 0xA824, /* SYLOTI NAGRI VOWEL SIGN I */ - 0xA827, /* SYLOTI NAGRI VOWEL SIGN OO */ - 0xA880, /* SAURASHTRA SIGN ANUSVARA */ - 0xA881, /* SAURASHTRA SIGN VISARGA */ - 0xA8B4, /* SAURASHTRA CONSONANT SIGN HAARU */ - 0xA8B5, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN AA */ - 0xA8B6, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN I */ - 0xA8B7, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN II */ - 0xA8B8, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN U */ - 0xA8B9, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN UU */ - 0xA8BA, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC R */ - 0xA8BB, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC RR */ - 0xA8BC, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC L */ - 0xA8BD, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC LL */ - 0xA8BE, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN E */ - 0xA8BF, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN EE */ - 0xA8C0, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN AI */ - 0xA8C1, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0xA8C2, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN OO */ - 0xA8C3, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN AU */ - 0xA952, /* REJANG CONSONANT SIGN H */ - 0xA953, /* REJANG VIRAMA */ - 0xAA2F, /* CHAM VOWEL SIGN O */ - 0xAA30, /* CHAM VOWEL SIGN AI */ - 0xAA33, /* CHAM CONSONANT SIGN YA */ - 0xAA34, /* CHAM CONSONANT SIGN RA */ - 0xAA4D /* CHAM CONSONANT SIGN FINAL H */ - }; - pg_wchar *StopLow = strange_letter, - *StopHigh = strange_letter + lengthof(strange_letter), - *StopMiddle; + static pg_wchar strange_letter[] = { + /* + * use binary search, so elements should be ordered + */ + 0x0903, /* DEVANAGARI SIGN VISARGA */ + 0x093E, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x093F, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN I */ + 0x0940, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN II */ + 0x0949, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN CANDRA O */ + 0x094A, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN SHORT O */ + 0x094B, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0x094C, /* DEVANAGARI VOWEL SIGN AU */ + 0x0982, /* BENGALI SIGN ANUSVARA */ + 0x0983, /* BENGALI SIGN VISARGA */ + 0x09BE, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x09BF, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN I */ + 0x09C0, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN II */ + 0x09C7, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN E */ + 0x09C8, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN AI */ + 0x09CB, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0x09CC, /* BENGALI VOWEL SIGN AU */ + 0x09D7, /* BENGALI AU LENGTH MARK */ + 0x0A03, /* GURMUKHI SIGN VISARGA */ + 0x0A3E, /* GURMUKHI VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x0A3F, /* GURMUKHI VOWEL SIGN I */ + 0x0A40, /* GURMUKHI VOWEL SIGN II */ + 0x0A83, /* GUJARATI SIGN VISARGA */ + 0x0ABE, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x0ABF, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN I */ + 0x0AC0, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN II */ + 0x0AC9, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN CANDRA O */ + 0x0ACB, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0x0ACC, /* GUJARATI VOWEL SIGN AU */ + 0x0B02, /* ORIYA SIGN ANUSVARA */ + 0x0B03, /* ORIYA SIGN VISARGA */ + 0x0B3E, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x0B40, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN II */ + 0x0B47, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN E */ + 0x0B48, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN AI */ + 0x0B4B, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0x0B4C, /* ORIYA VOWEL SIGN AU */ + 0x0B57, /* ORIYA AU LENGTH MARK */ + 0x0BBE, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x0BBF, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN I */ + 0x0BC1, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN U */ + 0x0BC2, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN UU */ + 0x0BC6, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN E */ + 0x0BC7, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN EE */ + 0x0BC8, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN AI */ + 0x0BCA, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0x0BCB, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN OO */ + 0x0BCC, /* TAMIL VOWEL SIGN AU */ + 0x0BD7, /* TAMIL AU LENGTH MARK */ + 0x0C01, /* TELUGU SIGN CANDRABINDU */ + 0x0C02, /* TELUGU SIGN ANUSVARA */ + 0x0C03, /* TELUGU SIGN VISARGA */ + 0x0C41, /* TELUGU VOWEL SIGN U */ + 0x0C42, /* TELUGU VOWEL SIGN UU */ + 0x0C43, /* TELUGU VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC R */ + 0x0C44, /* TELUGU VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC RR */ + 0x0C82, /* KANNADA SIGN ANUSVARA */ + 0x0C83, /* KANNADA SIGN VISARGA */ + 0x0CBE, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x0CC0, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN II */ + 0x0CC1, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN U */ + 0x0CC2, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN UU */ + 0x0CC3, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC R */ + 0x0CC4, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC RR */ + 0x0CC7, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN EE */ + 0x0CC8, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN AI */ + 0x0CCA, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0x0CCB, /* KANNADA VOWEL SIGN OO */ + 0x0CD5, /* KANNADA LENGTH MARK */ + 0x0CD6, /* KANNADA AI LENGTH MARK */ + 0x0D02, /* MALAYALAM SIGN ANUSVARA */ + 0x0D03, /* MALAYALAM SIGN VISARGA */ + 0x0D3E, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x0D3F, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN I */ + 0x0D40, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN II */ + 0x0D46, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN E */ + 0x0D47, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN EE */ + 0x0D48, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN AI */ + 0x0D4A, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0x0D4B, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN OO */ + 0x0D4C, /* MALAYALAM VOWEL SIGN AU */ + 0x0D57, /* MALAYALAM AU LENGTH MARK */ + 0x0D82, /* SINHALA SIGN ANUSVARAYA */ + 0x0D83, /* SINHALA SIGN VISARGAYA */ + 0x0DCF, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN AELA-PILLA */ + 0x0DD0, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KETTI AEDA-PILLA */ + 0x0DD1, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA AEDA-PILLA */ + 0x0DD8, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN GAETTA-PILLA */ + 0x0DD9, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA */ + 0x0DDA, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA KOMBUVA */ + 0x0DDB, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBU DEKA */ + 0x0DDC, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA HAA AELA-PILLA */ + 0x0DDD, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA HAA DIGA + * AELA-PILLA */ + 0x0DDE, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN KOMBUVA HAA GAYANUKITTA */ + 0x0DDF, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN GAYANUKITTA */ + 0x0DF2, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA GAETTA-PILLA */ + 0x0DF3, /* SINHALA VOWEL SIGN DIGA GAYANUKITTA */ + 0x0F3E, /* TIBETAN SIGN YAR TSHES */ + 0x0F3F, /* TIBETAN SIGN MAR TSHES */ + 0x0F7F, /* TIBETAN SIGN RNAM BCAD */ + 0x102B, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN TALL AA */ + 0x102C, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x1031, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN E */ + 0x1038, /* MYANMAR SIGN VISARGA */ + 0x103B, /* MYANMAR CONSONANT SIGN MEDIAL YA */ + 0x103C, /* MYANMAR CONSONANT SIGN MEDIAL RA */ + 0x1056, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC R */ + 0x1057, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC RR */ + 0x1062, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN SGAW KAREN EU */ + 0x1063, /* MYANMAR TONE MARK SGAW KAREN HATHI */ + 0x1064, /* MYANMAR TONE MARK SGAW KAREN KE PHO */ + 0x1067, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN EU */ + 0x1068, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN UE */ + 0x1069, /* MYANMAR SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN TONE-1 */ + 0x106A, /* MYANMAR SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN TONE-2 */ + 0x106B, /* MYANMAR SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN TONE-3 */ + 0x106C, /* MYANMAR SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN TONE-4 */ + 0x106D, /* MYANMAR SIGN WESTERN PWO KAREN TONE-5 */ + 0x1083, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN SHAN AA */ + 0x1084, /* MYANMAR VOWEL SIGN SHAN E */ + 0x1087, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN TONE-2 */ + 0x1088, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN TONE-3 */ + 0x1089, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN TONE-5 */ + 0x108A, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN TONE-6 */ + 0x108B, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN COUNCIL TONE-2 */ + 0x108C, /* MYANMAR SIGN SHAN COUNCIL TONE-3 */ + 0x108F, /* MYANMAR SIGN RUMAI PALAUNG TONE-5 */ + 0x17B6, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x17BE, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN OE */ + 0x17BF, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN YA */ + 0x17C0, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN IE */ + 0x17C1, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN E */ + 0x17C2, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN AE */ + 0x17C3, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN AI */ + 0x17C4, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN OO */ + 0x17C5, /* KHMER VOWEL SIGN AU */ + 0x17C7, /* KHMER SIGN REAHMUK */ + 0x17C8, /* KHMER SIGN YUUKALEAPINTU */ + 0x1923, /* LIMBU VOWEL SIGN EE */ + 0x1924, /* LIMBU VOWEL SIGN AI */ + 0x1925, /* LIMBU VOWEL SIGN OO */ + 0x1926, /* LIMBU VOWEL SIGN AU */ + 0x1929, /* LIMBU SUBJOINED LETTER YA */ + 0x192A, /* LIMBU SUBJOINED LETTER RA */ + 0x192B, /* LIMBU SUBJOINED LETTER WA */ + 0x1930, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER KA */ + 0x1931, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER NGA */ + 0x1933, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER TA */ + 0x1934, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER NA */ + 0x1935, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER PA */ + 0x1936, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER MA */ + 0x1937, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER RA */ + 0x1938, /* LIMBU SMALL LETTER LA */ + 0x19B0, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN VOWEL SHORTENER */ + 0x19B1, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x19B2, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN II */ + 0x19B3, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN U */ + 0x19B4, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN UU */ + 0x19B5, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN E */ + 0x19B6, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN AE */ + 0x19B7, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0x19B8, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN OA */ + 0x19B9, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN UE */ + 0x19BA, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN AY */ + 0x19BB, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN AAY */ + 0x19BC, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN UY */ + 0x19BD, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN OY */ + 0x19BE, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN OAY */ + 0x19BF, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN UEY */ + 0x19C0, /* NEW TAI LUE VOWEL SIGN IY */ + 0x19C8, /* NEW TAI LUE TONE MARK-1 */ + 0x19C9, /* NEW TAI LUE TONE MARK-2 */ + 0x1A19, /* BUGINESE VOWEL SIGN E */ + 0x1A1A, /* BUGINESE VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0x1A1B, /* BUGINESE VOWEL SIGN AE */ + 0x1B04, /* BALINESE SIGN BISAH */ + 0x1B35, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN TEDUNG */ + 0x1B3B, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN RA REPA TEDUNG */ + 0x1B3D, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN LA LENGA TEDUNG */ + 0x1B3E, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN TALING */ + 0x1B3F, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN TALING REPA */ + 0x1B40, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN TALING TEDUNG */ + 0x1B41, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN TALING REPA TEDUNG */ + 0x1B43, /* BALINESE VOWEL SIGN PEPET TEDUNG */ + 0x1B44, /* BALINESE ADEG ADEG */ + 0x1B82, /* SUNDANESE SIGN PANGWISAD */ + 0x1BA1, /* SUNDANESE CONSONANT SIGN PAMINGKAL */ + 0x1BA6, /* SUNDANESE VOWEL SIGN PANAELAENG */ + 0x1BA7, /* SUNDANESE VOWEL SIGN PANOLONG */ + 0x1BAA, /* SUNDANESE SIGN PAMAAEH */ + 0x1C24, /* LEPCHA SUBJOINED LETTER YA */ + 0x1C25, /* LEPCHA SUBJOINED LETTER RA */ + 0x1C26, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0x1C27, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN I */ + 0x1C28, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0x1C29, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN OO */ + 0x1C2A, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN U */ + 0x1C2B, /* LEPCHA VOWEL SIGN UU */ + 0x1C34, /* LEPCHA CONSONANT SIGN NYIN-DO */ + 0x1C35, /* LEPCHA CONSONANT SIGN KANG */ + 0xA823, /* SYLOTI NAGRI VOWEL SIGN A */ + 0xA824, /* SYLOTI NAGRI VOWEL SIGN I */ + 0xA827, /* SYLOTI NAGRI VOWEL SIGN OO */ + 0xA880, /* SAURASHTRA SIGN ANUSVARA */ + 0xA881, /* SAURASHTRA SIGN VISARGA */ + 0xA8B4, /* SAURASHTRA CONSONANT SIGN HAARU */ + 0xA8B5, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN AA */ + 0xA8B6, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN I */ + 0xA8B7, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN II */ + 0xA8B8, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN U */ + 0xA8B9, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN UU */ + 0xA8BA, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC R */ + 0xA8BB, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC RR */ + 0xA8BC, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC L */ + 0xA8BD, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN VOCALIC LL */ + 0xA8BE, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN E */ + 0xA8BF, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN EE */ + 0xA8C0, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN AI */ + 0xA8C1, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0xA8C2, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN OO */ + 0xA8C3, /* SAURASHTRA VOWEL SIGN AU */ + 0xA952, /* REJANG CONSONANT SIGN H */ + 0xA953, /* REJANG VIRAMA */ + 0xAA2F, /* CHAM VOWEL SIGN O */ + 0xAA30, /* CHAM VOWEL SIGN AI */ + 0xAA33, /* CHAM CONSONANT SIGN YA */ + 0xAA34, /* CHAM CONSONANT SIGN RA */ + 0xAA4D /* CHAM CONSONANT SIGN FINAL H */ + }; + pg_wchar *StopLow = strange_letter, + *StopHigh = strange_letter + lengthof(strange_letter), + *StopMiddle; pg_wchar c; - if ( prs->pgwstr ) + if (prs->pgwstr) c = *(prs->pgwstr + prs->state->poschar); else c = (pg_wchar) *(prs->wstr + prs->state->poschar); - while( StopLow < StopHigh ) + while (StopLow < StopHigh) { StopMiddle = StopLow + ((StopHigh - StopLow) >> 1); - if ( *StopMiddle == c ) + if (*StopMiddle == c) return 1; - else if ( *StopMiddle < c ) + else if (*StopMiddle < c) StopLow = StopMiddle + 1; else StopHigh = StopMiddle; @@ -1288,7 +1289,7 @@ static const TParserStateActionItem actionTPS_InTagFirst[] = { static const TParserStateActionItem actionTPS_InXMLBegin[] = { {p_isEOF, 0, A_POP, TPS_Null, 0, NULL}, /* <?xml ... */ - /* XXX do we wants states for the m and l ? Right now this accepts <?xZ */ + /* XXX do we wants states for the m and l ? Right now this accepts <?xZ */ {p_iseqC, 'x', A_NEXT, TPS_InTag, 0, NULL}, {NULL, 0, A_POP, TPS_Null, 0, NULL} }; @@ -2004,10 +2005,10 @@ prsd_end(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) #define COMPLEXTOKEN(x) ( (x)==URL_T || (x)==NUMHWORD || (x)==ASCIIHWORD || (x)==HWORD ) #define ENDPUNCTOKEN(x) ( (x)==SPACE ) -#define TS_IDIGNORE(x) ( (x)==TAG_T || (x)==PROTOCOL || (x)==SPACE || (x)==XMLENTITY ) -#define HLIDREPLACE(x) ( (x)==TAG_T ) -#define HLIDSKIP(x) ( (x)==URL_T || (x)==NUMHWORD || (x)==ASCIIHWORD || (x)==HWORD ) -#define XMLHLIDSKIP(x) ( (x)==URL_T || (x)==NUMHWORD || (x)==ASCIIHWORD || (x)==HWORD ) +#define TS_IDIGNORE(x) ( (x)==TAG_T || (x)==PROTOCOL || (x)==SPACE || (x)==XMLENTITY ) +#define HLIDREPLACE(x) ( (x)==TAG_T ) +#define HLIDSKIP(x) ( (x)==URL_T || (x)==NUMHWORD || (x)==ASCIIHWORD || (x)==HWORD ) +#define XMLHLIDSKIP(x) ( (x)==URL_T || (x)==NUMHWORD || (x)==ASCIIHWORD || (x)==HWORD ) #define NONWORDTOKEN(x) ( (x)==SPACE || HLIDREPLACE(x) || HLIDSKIP(x) ) #define NOENDTOKEN(x) ( NONWORDTOKEN(x) || (x)==SCIENTIFIC || (x)==VERSIONNUMBER || (x)==DECIMAL_T || (x)==SIGNEDINT || (x)==UNSIGNEDINT || TS_IDIGNORE(x) ) @@ -2105,7 +2106,7 @@ hlCover(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int *p, int *q) static void mark_fragment(HeadlineParsedText *prs, int highlight, int startpos, int endpos) { - int i; + int i; for (i = startpos; i <= endpos; i++) { @@ -2115,7 +2116,7 @@ mark_fragment(HeadlineParsedText *prs, int highlight, int startpos, int endpos) { if (HLIDREPLACE(prs->words[i].type)) prs->words[i].replace = 1; - else if ( HLIDSKIP(prs->words[i].type) ) + else if (HLIDSKIP(prs->words[i].type)) prs->words[i].skip = 1; } else @@ -2130,27 +2131,29 @@ mark_fragment(HeadlineParsedText *prs, int highlight, int startpos, int endpos) typedef struct { - int4 startpos; - int4 endpos; - int4 poslen; - int4 curlen; - int2 in; - int2 excluded; + int4 startpos; + int4 endpos; + int4 poslen; + int4 curlen; + int2 in; + int2 excluded; } CoverPos; static void get_next_fragment(HeadlineParsedText *prs, int *startpos, int *endpos, - int *curlen, int *poslen, int max_words) + int *curlen, int *poslen, int max_words) { - int i; - /* Objective: Generate a fragment of words between startpos and endpos - * such that it has at most max_words and both ends has query words. - * If the startpos and endpos are the endpoints of the cover and the - * cover has fewer words than max_words, then this function should - * just return the cover + int i; + + /* + * Objective: Generate a fragment of words between startpos and endpos + * such that it has at most max_words and both ends has query words. If + * the startpos and endpos are the endpoints of the cover and the cover + * has fewer words than max_words, then this function should just return + * the cover */ /* first move startpos to an item */ - for(i = *startpos; i <= *endpos; i++) + for (i = *startpos; i <= *endpos; i++) { *startpos = i; if (prs->words[i].item && !prs->words[i].repeated) @@ -2159,7 +2162,7 @@ get_next_fragment(HeadlineParsedText *prs, int *startpos, int *endpos, /* cut endpos to have only max_words */ *curlen = 0; *poslen = 0; - for(i = *startpos; i <= *endpos && *curlen < max_words; i++) + for (i = *startpos; i <= *endpos && *curlen < max_words; i++) { if (!NONWORDTOKEN(prs->words[i].type)) *curlen += 1; @@ -2170,7 +2173,7 @@ get_next_fragment(HeadlineParsedText *prs, int *startpos, int *endpos, if (*endpos > i) { *endpos = i; - for(i = *endpos; i >= *startpos; i --) + for (i = *endpos; i >= *startpos; i--) { *endpos = i; if (prs->words[i].item && !prs->words[i].repeated) @@ -2183,22 +2186,30 @@ get_next_fragment(HeadlineParsedText *prs, int *startpos, int *endpos, static void mark_hl_fragments(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, - int shortword, int min_words, - int max_words, int max_fragments) + int shortword, int min_words, + int max_words, int max_fragments) { - int4 poslen, curlen, i, f, num_f = 0; - int4 stretch, maxstretch, posmarker; - - int4 startpos = 0, - endpos = 0, - p = 0, - q = 0; + int4 poslen, + curlen, + i, + f, + num_f = 0; + int4 stretch, + maxstretch, + posmarker; + + int4 startpos = 0, + endpos = 0, + p = 0, + q = 0; int4 numcovers = 0, - maxcovers = 32; + maxcovers = 32; - int4 minI, minwords, maxitems; - CoverPos *covers; + int4 minI, + minwords, + maxitems; + CoverPos *covers; covers = palloc(maxcovers * sizeof(CoverPos)); @@ -2206,12 +2217,13 @@ mark_hl_fragments(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, while (hlCover(prs, query, &p, &q)) { startpos = p; - endpos = q; + endpos = q; - /* Break the cover into smaller fragments such that each fragment - * has at most max_words. Also ensure that each end of the fragment - * is a query word. This will allow us to stretch the fragment in - * either direction + /* + * Break the cover into smaller fragments such that each fragment has + * at most max_words. Also ensure that each end of the fragment is a + * query word. This will allow us to stretch the fragment in either + * direction */ while (startpos <= endpos) @@ -2220,17 +2232,17 @@ mark_hl_fragments(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, if (numcovers >= maxcovers) { maxcovers *= 2; - covers = repalloc(covers, sizeof(CoverPos) * maxcovers); + covers = repalloc(covers, sizeof(CoverPos) * maxcovers); } covers[numcovers].startpos = startpos; - covers[numcovers].endpos = endpos; - covers[numcovers].curlen = curlen; - covers[numcovers].poslen = poslen; - covers[numcovers].in = 0; + covers[numcovers].endpos = endpos; + covers[numcovers].curlen = curlen; + covers[numcovers].poslen = poslen; + covers[numcovers].in = 0; covers[numcovers].excluded = 0; - numcovers ++; + numcovers++; startpos = endpos + 1; - endpos = q; + endpos = q; } /* move p to generate the next cover */ p++; @@ -2242,19 +2254,20 @@ mark_hl_fragments(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, maxitems = 0; minwords = 0x7fffffff; minI = -1; - /* Choose the cover that contains max items. - * In case of tie choose the one with smaller - * number of words. + + /* + * Choose the cover that contains max items. In case of tie choose the + * one with smaller number of words. */ - for (i = 0; i < numcovers; i ++) + for (i = 0; i < numcovers; i++) { - if (!covers[i].in && !covers[i].excluded && + if (!covers[i].in && !covers[i].excluded && (maxitems < covers[i].poslen || (maxitems == covers[i].poslen - && minwords > covers[i].curlen))) + && minwords > covers[i].curlen))) { maxitems = covers[i].poslen; minwords = covers[i].curlen; - minI = i; + minI = i; } } /* if a cover was found mark it */ @@ -2263,27 +2276,27 @@ mark_hl_fragments(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, covers[minI].in = 1; /* adjust the size of cover */ startpos = covers[minI].startpos; - endpos = covers[minI].endpos; - curlen = covers[minI].curlen; + endpos = covers[minI].endpos; + curlen = covers[minI].curlen; /* stretch the cover if cover size is lower than max_words */ if (curlen < max_words) { /* divide the stretch on both sides of cover */ - maxstretch = (max_words - curlen)/2; - /* first stretch the startpos - * stop stretching if - * 1. we hit the beginning of document - * 2. exceed maxstretch - * 3. we hit an already marked fragment + maxstretch = (max_words - curlen) / 2; + + /* + * first stretch the startpos stop stretching if 1. we hit the + * beginning of document 2. exceed maxstretch 3. we hit an + * already marked fragment */ - stretch = 0; + stretch = 0; posmarker = startpos; for (i = startpos - 1; i >= 0 && stretch < maxstretch && !prs->words[i].in; i--) { if (!NONWORDTOKEN(prs->words[i].type)) { - curlen ++; - stretch ++; + curlen++; + stretch++; } posmarker = i; } @@ -2291,35 +2304,35 @@ mark_hl_fragments(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, for (i = posmarker; i < startpos && (NOENDTOKEN(prs->words[i].type) || prs->words[i].len <= shortword); i++) { if (!NONWORDTOKEN(prs->words[i].type)) - curlen --; + curlen--; } startpos = i; - /* now stretch the endpos as much as possible*/ + /* now stretch the endpos as much as possible */ posmarker = endpos; for (i = endpos + 1; i < prs->curwords && curlen < max_words && !prs->words[i].in; i++) { if (!NONWORDTOKEN(prs->words[i].type)) - curlen ++; + curlen++; posmarker = i; } /* cut back endpos till we find a non-short token */ - for ( i = posmarker; i > endpos && (NOENDTOKEN(prs->words[i].type) || prs->words[i].len <= shortword); i--) + for (i = posmarker; i > endpos && (NOENDTOKEN(prs->words[i].type) || prs->words[i].len <= shortword); i--) { if (!NONWORDTOKEN(prs->words[i].type)) - curlen --; + curlen--; } endpos = i; } covers[minI].startpos = startpos; - covers[minI].endpos = endpos; - covers[minI].curlen = curlen; + covers[minI].endpos = endpos; + covers[minI].curlen = curlen; /* Mark the chosen fragments (covers) */ mark_fragment(prs, highlight, startpos, endpos); - num_f ++; + num_f++; /* exclude overlapping covers */ - for (i = 0; i < numcovers; i ++) + for (i = 0; i < numcovers; i++) { - if (i != minI && ( (covers[i].startpos >= covers[minI].startpos && covers[i].startpos <= covers[minI].endpos) || (covers[i].endpos >= covers[minI].startpos && covers[i].endpos <= covers[minI].endpos))) + if (i != minI && ((covers[i].startpos >= covers[minI].startpos && covers[i].startpos <= covers[minI].endpos) || (covers[i].endpos >= covers[minI].startpos && covers[i].endpos <= covers[minI].endpos))) covers[i].excluded = 1; } } @@ -2327,7 +2340,7 @@ mark_hl_fragments(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, break; } - /* show at least min_words we have not marked anything*/ + /* show at least min_words we have not marked anything */ if (num_f <= 0) { startpos = endpos = curlen = 0; @@ -2344,7 +2357,7 @@ mark_hl_fragments(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, static void mark_hl_words(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, - int shortword, int min_words, int max_words) + int shortword, int min_words, int max_words) { int p = 0, q = 0; @@ -2408,7 +2421,7 @@ mark_hl_words(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, curlen++; if (prs->words[i].item && !prs->words[i].repeated) poslen++; - if ( curlen >= max_words ) + if (curlen >= max_words) break; if (NOENDTOKEN(prs->words[i].type) || prs->words[i].len <= shortword) continue; @@ -2472,7 +2485,7 @@ mark_hl_words(HeadlineParsedText *prs, TSQuery query, int highlight, { if (HLIDREPLACE(prs->words[i].type)) prs->words[i].replace = 1; - else if ( HLIDSKIP(prs->words[i].type) ) + else if (HLIDSKIP(prs->words[i].type)) prs->words[i].skip = 1; } else @@ -2494,11 +2507,11 @@ prsd_headline(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) TSQuery query = PG_GETARG_TSQUERY(2); /* from opt + start and and tag */ - int min_words = 15; - int max_words = 35; - int shortword = 3; + int min_words = 15; + int max_words = 35; + int shortword = 3; int max_fragments = 0; - int highlight = 0; + int highlight = 0; ListCell *l; /* config */ diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/acl.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/acl.c index 2f27018b25..dc75ad86ce 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/acl.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/acl.c @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ static AclMode convert_role_priv_string(text *priv_type_text); static AclResult pg_role_aclcheck(Oid role_oid, Oid roleid, AclMode mode); static void RoleMembershipCacheCallback(Datum arg, int cacheid, ItemPointer tuplePtr); -static Oid get_role_oid_or_public(const char *rolname); +static Oid get_role_oid_or_public(const char *rolname); /* @@ -4829,7 +4829,7 @@ get_role_oid(const char *rolname, bool missing_ok) /* * get_role_oid_or_public - As above, but return ACL_ID_PUBLIC if the - * role name is "public". + * role name is "public". */ static Oid get_role_oid_or_public(const char *rolname) diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/arrayfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/arrayfuncs.c index e023b2458e..0869de66ce 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/arrayfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/arrayfuncs.c @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ typedef struct ArrayIteratorData /* current position information, updated on each iteration */ char *data_ptr; /* our current position in the array */ int current_item; /* the item # we're at in the array */ -} ArrayIteratorData; +} ArrayIteratorData; static bool array_isspace(char ch); static int ArrayCount(const char *str, int *dim, char typdelim); @@ -1268,7 +1268,8 @@ array_recv(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) */ if (dim[i] != 0) { - int ub = lBound[i] + dim[i] - 1; + int ub = lBound[i] + dim[i] - 1; + if (lBound[i] > ub) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_NUMERIC_VALUE_OUT_OF_RANGE), diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/cash.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/cash.c index 4c3279759d..faef6f8381 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/cash.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/cash.c @@ -945,11 +945,11 @@ numeric_cash(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum int4_cash(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - int32 amount = PG_GETARG_INT32(0); - Cash result; - int fpoint; - int64 scale; - int i; + int32 amount = PG_GETARG_INT32(0); + Cash result; + int fpoint; + int64 scale; + int i; struct lconv *lconvert = PGLC_localeconv(); /* see comments about frac_digits in cash_in() */ @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ int4_cash(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* compute amount * scale, checking for overflow */ result = DatumGetInt64(DirectFunctionCall2(int8mul, Int64GetDatum(amount), - Int64GetDatum(scale))); + Int64GetDatum(scale))); PG_RETURN_CASH(result); } @@ -975,11 +975,11 @@ int4_cash(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum int8_cash(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - int64 amount = PG_GETARG_INT64(0); - Cash result; - int fpoint; - int64 scale; - int i; + int64 amount = PG_GETARG_INT64(0); + Cash result; + int fpoint; + int64 scale; + int i; struct lconv *lconvert = PGLC_localeconv(); /* see comments about frac_digits in cash_in() */ @@ -994,7 +994,7 @@ int8_cash(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* compute amount * scale, checking for overflow */ result = DatumGetInt64(DirectFunctionCall2(int8mul, Int64GetDatum(amount), - Int64GetDatum(scale))); + Int64GetDatum(scale))); PG_RETURN_CASH(result); } diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/date.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/date.c index f96fa6cb72..e737e720f5 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/date.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/date.c @@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ date2timestamptz(DateADT dateVal) double date2timestamp_no_overflow(DateADT dateVal) { - double result; + double result; if (DATE_IS_NOBEGIN(dateVal)) result = -DBL_MAX; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/datetime.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/datetime.c index 0410b8384e..db0a6487ac 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/datetime.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/datetime.c @@ -2397,7 +2397,7 @@ DecodeTime(char *str, int fmask, int range, /* do a sanity check */ #ifdef HAVE_INT64_TIMESTAMP - if (tm->tm_hour < 0 || tm->tm_min < 0 || tm->tm_min > MINS_PER_HOUR -1 || + if (tm->tm_hour < 0 || tm->tm_min < 0 || tm->tm_min > MINS_PER_HOUR - 1 || tm->tm_sec < 0 || tm->tm_sec > SECS_PER_MINUTE || *fsec < INT64CONST(0) || *fsec > USECS_PER_SEC) diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/dbsize.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/dbsize.c index 543a244bf9..73a6ad3280 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/dbsize.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/dbsize.c @@ -634,7 +634,7 @@ pg_relation_filepath(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) break; default: elog(ERROR, "invalid relpersistence: %c", relform->relpersistence); - backend = InvalidBackendId; /* placate compiler */ + backend = InvalidBackendId; /* placate compiler */ break; } diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/enum.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/enum.c index be4f984ed6..8f65c84d30 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/enum.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/enum.c @@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ enum_range_internal(Oid enumtypoid, Oid lower, Oid upper) Datum *elems; int max, cnt; - bool left_found; + bool left_found; /* * Scan the enum members in order using pg_enum_typid_sortorder_index. @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ enum_range_internal(Oid enumtypoid, Oid lower, Oid upper) while (HeapTupleIsValid(enum_tuple = systable_getnext_ordered(enum_scan, ForwardScanDirection))) { - Oid enum_oid = HeapTupleGetOid(enum_tuple); + Oid enum_oid = HeapTupleGetOid(enum_tuple); if (!left_found && lower == enum_oid) left_found = true; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c index 45e36f92e5..f895bbbb8b 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ typedef enum /* last */ _DCH_last_ -} DCH_poz; +} DCH_poz; typedef enum { @@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ typedef enum /* last */ _NUM_last_ -} NUM_poz; +} NUM_poz; /* ---------- * KeyWords for DATE-TIME version @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ str_tolower(const char *buff, size_t nbytes, Oid collid) #ifdef USE_WIDE_UPPER_LOWER else if (pg_database_encoding_max_length() > 1) { - pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; + pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; wchar_t *workspace; size_t curr_char; size_t result_size; @@ -1549,7 +1549,7 @@ str_tolower(const char *buff, size_t nbytes, Oid collid) #endif /* USE_WIDE_UPPER_LOWER */ else { - pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; + pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; char *p; if (collid != DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID) @@ -1618,7 +1618,7 @@ str_toupper(const char *buff, size_t nbytes, Oid collid) #ifdef USE_WIDE_UPPER_LOWER else if (pg_database_encoding_max_length() > 1) { - pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; + pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; wchar_t *workspace; size_t curr_char; size_t result_size; @@ -1670,7 +1670,7 @@ str_toupper(const char *buff, size_t nbytes, Oid collid) #endif /* USE_WIDE_UPPER_LOWER */ else { - pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; + pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; char *p; if (collid != DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID) @@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ str_initcap(const char *buff, size_t nbytes, Oid collid) for (p = result; *p; p++) { - char c; + char c; if (wasalnum) *p = c = pg_ascii_tolower((unsigned char) *p); @@ -1751,7 +1751,7 @@ str_initcap(const char *buff, size_t nbytes, Oid collid) #ifdef USE_WIDE_UPPER_LOWER else if (pg_database_encoding_max_length() > 1) { - pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; + pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; wchar_t *workspace; size_t curr_char; size_t result_size; @@ -1815,7 +1815,7 @@ str_initcap(const char *buff, size_t nbytes, Oid collid) #endif /* USE_WIDE_UPPER_LOWER */ else { - pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; + pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; char *p; if (collid != DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID) @@ -1838,7 +1838,7 @@ str_initcap(const char *buff, size_t nbytes, Oid collid) /* * Note: we assume that toupper_l()/tolower_l() will not be so broken - * as to need guard tests. When using the default collation, we apply + * as to need guard tests. When using the default collation, we apply * the traditional Postgres behavior that forces ASCII-style treatment * of I/i, but in non-default collations you get exactly what the * collation says. @@ -2318,7 +2318,7 @@ DCH_to_char(FormatNode *node, bool is_interval, TmToChar *in, char *out, Oid col * intervals */ sprintf(s, "%0*d", S_FM(n->suffix) ? 0 : 2, - tm->tm_hour % (HOURS_PER_DAY / 2) == 0 ? HOURS_PER_DAY / 2 : + tm->tm_hour % (HOURS_PER_DAY / 2) == 0 ? HOURS_PER_DAY / 2 : tm->tm_hour % (HOURS_PER_DAY / 2)); if (S_THth(n->suffix)) str_numth(s, s, S_TH_TYPE(n->suffix)); @@ -2423,7 +2423,7 @@ DCH_to_char(FormatNode *node, bool is_interval, TmToChar *in, char *out, Oid col strcpy(s, str_toupper_z(localized_full_months[tm->tm_mon - 1], collid)); else sprintf(s, "%*s", S_FM(n->suffix) ? 0 : -9, - str_toupper_z(months_full[tm->tm_mon - 1], collid)); + str_toupper_z(months_full[tm->tm_mon - 1], collid)); s += strlen(s); break; case DCH_Month: diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/genfile.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/genfile.c index 7c59e9a20e..6b3f77fec1 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/genfile.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/genfile.c @@ -56,18 +56,19 @@ convert_and_check_filename(text *arg) /* Disallow '/a/b/data/..' */ if (path_contains_parent_reference(filename)) ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - (errmsg("reference to parent directory (\"..\") not allowed")))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), + (errmsg("reference to parent directory (\"..\") not allowed")))); + /* - * Allow absolute paths if within DataDir or Log_directory, even - * though Log_directory might be outside DataDir. + * Allow absolute paths if within DataDir or Log_directory, even + * though Log_directory might be outside DataDir. */ if (!path_is_prefix_of_path(DataDir, filename) && (!is_absolute_path(Log_directory) || !path_is_prefix_of_path(Log_directory, filename))) ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - (errmsg("absolute path not allowed")))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), + (errmsg("absolute path not allowed")))); } else if (!path_is_relative_and_below_cwd(filename)) ereport(ERROR, diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/like.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/like.c index b060faa6a9..0934c69ebe 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/like.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/like.c @@ -30,19 +30,19 @@ #define LIKE_ABORT (-1) -static int SB_MatchText(char *t, int tlen, char *p, int plen, - pg_locale_t locale, bool locale_is_c); +static int SB_MatchText(char *t, int tlen, char *p, int plen, + pg_locale_t locale, bool locale_is_c); static text *SB_do_like_escape(text *, text *); -static int MB_MatchText(char *t, int tlen, char *p, int plen, - pg_locale_t locale, bool locale_is_c); +static int MB_MatchText(char *t, int tlen, char *p, int plen, + pg_locale_t locale, bool locale_is_c); static text *MB_do_like_escape(text *, text *); -static int UTF8_MatchText(char *t, int tlen, char *p, int plen, - pg_locale_t locale, bool locale_is_c); +static int UTF8_MatchText(char *t, int tlen, char *p, int plen, + pg_locale_t locale, bool locale_is_c); -static int SB_IMatchText(char *t, int tlen, char *p, int plen, - pg_locale_t locale, bool locale_is_c); +static int SB_IMatchText(char *t, int tlen, char *p, int plen, + pg_locale_t locale, bool locale_is_c); static int GenericMatchText(char *s, int slen, char *p, int plen); static int Generic_Text_IC_like(text *str, text *pat, Oid collation); @@ -188,11 +188,11 @@ Generic_Text_IC_like(text *str, text *pat, Oid collation) else { /* - * Here we need to prepare locale information for SB_lower_char. - * This should match the methods used in str_tolower(). + * Here we need to prepare locale information for SB_lower_char. This + * should match the methods used in str_tolower(). */ - pg_locale_t locale = 0; - bool locale_is_c = false; + pg_locale_t locale = 0; + bool locale_is_c = false; if (lc_ctype_is_c(collation)) locale_is_c = true; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/nabstime.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/nabstime.c index 4b61b21cbe..6771e78af8 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/nabstime.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/nabstime.c @@ -182,8 +182,8 @@ tm2abstime(struct pg_tm * tm, int tz) tm->tm_mon < 1 || tm->tm_mon > MONTHS_PER_YEAR || tm->tm_mday < 1 || tm->tm_mday > 31 || tm->tm_hour < 0 || - tm->tm_hour > HOURS_PER_DAY || /* test for > 24:00:00 */ - (tm->tm_hour == HOURS_PER_DAY && (tm->tm_min > 0 || tm->tm_sec > 0)) || + tm->tm_hour > HOURS_PER_DAY || /* test for > 24:00:00 */ + (tm->tm_hour == HOURS_PER_DAY && (tm->tm_min > 0 || tm->tm_sec > 0)) || tm->tm_min < 0 || tm->tm_min > MINS_PER_HOUR - 1 || tm->tm_sec < 0 || tm->tm_sec > SECS_PER_MINUTE) return INVALID_ABSTIME; @@ -1163,7 +1163,7 @@ tintervalsame(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * 1. The interval length computations overflow at 2^31 seconds, causing * intervals longer than that to sort oddly compared to those shorter. * 2. infinity and minus infinity (NOEND_ABSTIME and NOSTART_ABSTIME) are - * just ordinary integers. Since this code doesn't handle them specially, + * just ordinary integers. Since this code doesn't handle them specially, * it's possible for [a b] to be considered longer than [c infinity] for * finite abstimes a, b, c. In combination with the previous point, the * interval [-infinity infinity] is treated as being shorter than many finite diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/network.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/network.c index 8cac11134c..80e5915b3e 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/network.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/network.c @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ inet_to_cidr(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) inet *src = PG_GETARG_INET_P(0); inet *dst; int bits; - int byte; + int byte; int nbits; int maxbytes; @@ -340,15 +340,15 @@ inet_to_cidr(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* clear the first byte, this might be a partial byte */ if (nbits != 0) { - ip_addr(dst)[byte] &=~(0xFF >> nbits); - byte ++; + ip_addr(dst)[byte] &= ~(0xFF >> nbits); + byte++; } /* clear remaining bytes */ maxbytes = ip_addrsize(dst); - while (byte <maxbytes) + while (byte < maxbytes) { ip_addr(dst)[byte] = 0; - byte ++; + byte++; } PG_RETURN_INET_P(dst); @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ cidr_set_masklen(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) inet *src = PG_GETARG_INET_P(0); int bits = PG_GETARG_INT32(1); inet *dst; - int byte; + int byte; int nbits; int maxbytes; @@ -409,15 +409,15 @@ cidr_set_masklen(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* clear the first byte, this might be a partial byte */ if (nbits != 0) { - ip_addr(dst)[byte] &=~(0xFF >> nbits); - byte ++; + ip_addr(dst)[byte] &= ~(0xFF >> nbits); + byte++; } /* clear remaining bytes */ maxbytes = ip_addrsize(dst); - while (byte <maxbytes) + while (byte < maxbytes) { ip_addr(dst)[byte] = 0; - byte ++; + byte++; } PG_RETURN_INET_P(dst); @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ network_broadcast(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { inet *ip = PG_GETARG_INET_P(0); inet *dst; - int byte; + int byte; int bits; int maxbytes; unsigned char mask; @@ -735,7 +735,7 @@ network_broadcast(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) a = ip_addr(ip); b = ip_addr(dst); - for (byte = 0; byte <maxbytes; byte ++) + for (byte = 0; byte < maxbytes; byte++) { if (bits >= 8) { @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ network_broadcast(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) bits = 0; } - b[byte] = a[byte] |mask; + b[byte] = a[byte] | mask; } ip_family(dst) = ip_family(ip); @@ -765,7 +765,7 @@ network_network(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { inet *ip = PG_GETARG_INET_P(0); inet *dst; - int byte; + int byte; int bits; unsigned char mask; unsigned char *a, @@ -793,8 +793,8 @@ network_network(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) bits = 0; } - b[byte] = a[byte] &mask; - byte ++; + b[byte] = a[byte] & mask; + byte++; } ip_family(dst) = ip_family(ip); @@ -809,7 +809,7 @@ network_netmask(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { inet *ip = PG_GETARG_INET_P(0); inet *dst; - int byte; + int byte; int bits; unsigned char mask; unsigned char *b; @@ -836,7 +836,7 @@ network_netmask(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } b[byte] = mask; - byte ++; + byte++; } ip_family(dst) = ip_family(ip); @@ -851,7 +851,7 @@ network_hostmask(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { inet *ip = PG_GETARG_INET_P(0); inet *dst; - int byte; + int byte; int bits; int maxbytes; unsigned char mask; @@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ network_hostmask(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } b[byte] = mask; - byte --; + byte--; } ip_family(dst) = ip_family(ip); @@ -994,7 +994,7 @@ bitncmp(void *l, void *r, int n) static bool addressOK(unsigned char *a, int bits, int family) { - int byte; + int byte; int nbits; int maxbits; int maxbytes; @@ -1022,12 +1022,12 @@ addressOK(unsigned char *a, int bits, int family) if (bits != 0) mask >>= nbits; - while (byte <maxbytes) + while (byte < maxbytes) { - if ((a[byte] &mask) != 0) + if ((a[byte] & mask) != 0) return false; mask = 0xff; - byte ++; + byte++; } return true; @@ -1396,7 +1396,7 @@ inetmi(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * two's complement, too bad. */ int nb = ip_addrsize(ip); - int byte = 0; + int byte = 0; unsigned char *pip = ip_addr(ip); unsigned char *pip2 = ip_addr(ip2); int carry = 1; @@ -1407,9 +1407,9 @@ inetmi(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) carry = pip[nb] + (~pip2[nb] & 0xFF) + carry; lobyte = carry & 0xFF; - if (byte <sizeof(int64)) + if (byte < sizeof(int64)) { - res |= ((int64) lobyte) << (byte *8); + res |= ((int64) lobyte) << (byte * 8); } else { @@ -1424,15 +1424,15 @@ inetmi(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) errmsg("result is out of range"))); } carry >>= 8; - byte ++; + byte++; } /* * If input is narrower than int64, overflow is not possible, but we * have to do proper sign extension. */ - if (carry == 0 && byte <sizeof(int64)) - res |= ((int64) -1) << (byte *8); + if (carry == 0 && byte < sizeof(int64)) + res |= ((int64) -1) << (byte * 8); } PG_RETURN_INT64(res); diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/numeric.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/numeric.c index eec89aa54f..6b60a5c1c7 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/numeric.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/numeric.c @@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ typedef int16 NumericDigit; * If the high bits of the first word of a NumericChoice (n_header, or * n_short.n_header, or n_long.n_sign_dscale) are NUMERIC_SHORT, then the * numeric follows the NumericShort format; if they are NUMERIC_POS or - * NUMERIC_NEG, it follows the NumericLong format. If they are NUMERIC_NAN, + * NUMERIC_NEG, it follows the NumericLong format. If they are NUMERIC_NAN, * it is a NaN. We currently always store a NaN using just two bytes (i.e. * only n_header), but previous releases used only the NumericLong format, * so we might find 4-byte NaNs on disk if a database has been migrated using - * pg_upgrade. In either case, when the high bits indicate a NaN, the + * pg_upgrade. In either case, when the high bits indicate a NaN, the * remaining bits are never examined. Currently, we always initialize these * to zero, but it might be possible to use them for some other purpose in * the future. @@ -134,14 +134,14 @@ struct NumericLong union NumericChoice { uint16 n_header; /* Header word */ - struct NumericLong n_long; /* Long form (4-byte header) */ - struct NumericShort n_short; /* Short form (2-byte header) */ + struct NumericLong n_long; /* Long form (4-byte header) */ + struct NumericShort n_short; /* Short form (2-byte header) */ }; struct NumericData { int32 vl_len_; /* varlena header (do not touch directly!) */ - union NumericChoice choice; /* choice of format */ + union NumericChoice choice; /* choice of format */ }; @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ struct NumericData #define NUMERIC_IS_SHORT(n) (NUMERIC_FLAGBITS(n) == NUMERIC_SHORT) #define NUMERIC_HDRSZ (VARHDRSZ + sizeof(uint16) + sizeof(int16)) -#define NUMERIC_HDRSZ_SHORT (VARHDRSZ + sizeof(uint16)) +#define NUMERIC_HDRSZ_SHORT (VARHDRSZ + sizeof(uint16)) /* * If the flag bits are NUMERIC_SHORT or NUMERIC_NAN, we want the short header; @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ struct NumericData * Extract sign, display scale, weight. */ -#define NUMERIC_DSCALE_MASK 0x3FFF +#define NUMERIC_DSCALE_MASK 0x3FFF #define NUMERIC_SIGN(n) \ (NUMERIC_IS_SHORT(n) ? \ @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ numeric_out(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * numeric_is_nan() - * - * Is Numeric value a NaN? + * Is Numeric value a NaN? */ bool numeric_is_nan(Numeric num) @@ -562,13 +562,13 @@ numeric_is_nan(Numeric num) /* * numeric_maximum_size() - * - * Maximum size of a numeric with given typmod, or -1 if unlimited/unknown. + * Maximum size of a numeric with given typmod, or -1 if unlimited/unknown. */ int32 numeric_maximum_size(int32 typmod) { - int precision; - int numeric_digits; + int precision; + int numeric_digits; if (typmod < (int32) (VARHDRSZ)) return -1; @@ -577,23 +577,23 @@ numeric_maximum_size(int32 typmod) precision = ((typmod - VARHDRSZ) >> 16) & 0xffff; /* - * This formula computes the maximum number of NumericDigits we could - * need in order to store the specified number of decimal digits. - * Because the weight is stored as a number of NumericDigits rather - * than a number of decimal digits, it's possible that the first - * NumericDigit will contain only a single decimal digit. Thus, the - * first two decimal digits can require two NumericDigits to store, - * but it isn't until we reach DEC_DIGITS + 2 decimal digits that we - * potentially need a third NumericDigit. + * This formula computes the maximum number of NumericDigits we could need + * in order to store the specified number of decimal digits. Because the + * weight is stored as a number of NumericDigits rather than a number of + * decimal digits, it's possible that the first NumericDigit will contain + * only a single decimal digit. Thus, the first two decimal digits can + * require two NumericDigits to store, but it isn't until we reach + * DEC_DIGITS + 2 decimal digits that we potentially need a third + * NumericDigit. */ numeric_digits = (precision + 2 * (DEC_DIGITS - 1)) / DEC_DIGITS; /* * In most cases, the size of a numeric will be smaller than the value * computed below, because the varlena header will typically get toasted - * down to a single byte before being stored on disk, and it may also - * be possible to use a short numeric header. But our job here is to - * compute the worst case. + * down to a single byte before being stored on disk, and it may also be + * possible to use a short numeric header. But our job here is to compute + * the worst case. */ return NUMERIC_HDRSZ + (numeric_digits * sizeof(NumericDigit)); } @@ -761,12 +761,13 @@ numeric (PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * If the number is certainly in bounds and due to the target scale no * rounding could be necessary, just make a copy of the input and modify * its scale fields, unless the larger scale forces us to abandon the - * short representation. (Note we assume the existing dscale is honest...) + * short representation. (Note we assume the existing dscale is + * honest...) */ ddigits = (NUMERIC_WEIGHT(num) + 1) * DEC_DIGITS; if (ddigits <= maxdigits && scale >= NUMERIC_DSCALE(num) && (NUMERIC_CAN_BE_SHORT(scale, NUMERIC_WEIGHT(num)) - || !NUMERIC_IS_SHORT(num))) + || !NUMERIC_IS_SHORT(num))) { new = (Numeric) palloc(VARSIZE(num)); memcpy(new, num, VARSIZE(num)); @@ -1427,7 +1428,7 @@ hash_numeric(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) int end_offset; int i; int hash_len; - NumericDigit *digits; + NumericDigit *digits; /* If it's NaN, don't try to hash the rest of the fields */ if (NUMERIC_IS_NAN(key)) @@ -3727,7 +3728,7 @@ make_result(NumericVar *var) SET_VARSIZE(result, len); result->choice.n_short.n_header = (sign == NUMERIC_NEG ? (NUMERIC_SHORT | NUMERIC_SHORT_SIGN_MASK) - : NUMERIC_SHORT) + : NUMERIC_SHORT) | (var->dscale << NUMERIC_SHORT_DSCALE_SHIFT) | (weight < 0 ? NUMERIC_SHORT_WEIGHT_SIGN_MASK : 0) | (weight & NUMERIC_SHORT_WEIGHT_MASK); diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/numutils.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/numutils.c index 38ce38821e..37d208994c 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/numutils.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/numutils.c @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ pg_ltoa(int32 value, char *a) * Avoid problems with the most negative integer not being representable * as a positive integer. */ - if (value == (-2147483647-1)) + if (value == (-2147483647 - 1)) { memcpy(a, "-2147483648", 12); return; @@ -150,8 +150,8 @@ pg_ltoa(int32 value, char *a) /* Compute the result string backwards. */ do { - int32 remainder; - int32 oldval = value; + int32 remainder; + int32 oldval = value; value /= 10; remainder = oldval - value * 10; @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ pg_ltoa(int32 value, char *a) /* Reverse string. */ while (start < a) { - char swap = *start; + char swap = *start; *start++ = *a; *a-- = swap; @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ pg_lltoa(int64 value, char *a) * Avoid problems with the most negative integer not being representable * as a positive integer. */ - if (value == (-INT64CONST(0x7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF)-1)) + if (value == (-INT64CONST(0x7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF) - 1)) { memcpy(a, "-9223372036854775808", 21); return; @@ -204,8 +204,8 @@ pg_lltoa(int64 value, char *a) /* Compute the result string backwards. */ do { - int64 remainder; - int64 oldval = value; + int64 remainder; + int64 oldval = value; value /= 10; remainder = oldval - value * 10; @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ pg_lltoa(int64 value, char *a) /* Reverse string. */ while (start < a) { - char swap = *start; + char swap = *start; *start++ = *a; *a-- = swap; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/pg_locale.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/pg_locale.c index 09ff926cba..0e6723d469 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/pg_locale.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/pg_locale.c @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ typedef struct bool collate_is_c; /* is collation's LC_COLLATE C? */ bool ctype_is_c; /* is collation's LC_CTYPE C? */ bool flags_valid; /* true if above flags are valid */ - pg_locale_t locale; /* locale_t struct, or 0 if not valid */ + pg_locale_t locale; /* locale_t struct, or 0 if not valid */ } collation_cache_entry; static HTAB *collation_cache = NULL; @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ check_locale(int category, const char *value) * * For most locale categories, the assign hook doesn't actually set the locale * permanently, just reset flags so that the next use will cache the - * appropriate values. (See explanation at the top of this file.) + * appropriate values. (See explanation at the top of this file.) * * Note: we accept value = "" as selecting the postmaster's environment * value, whatever it was (so long as the environment setting is legal). @@ -728,7 +728,6 @@ IsoLocaleName(const char *winlocname) return NULL; /* Not supported on this version of msvc/mingw */ #endif /* _MSC_VER >= 1400 */ } - #endif /* WIN32 && LC_MESSAGES */ @@ -750,7 +749,7 @@ IsoLocaleName(const char *winlocname) * could fail if the locale is C, so str_tolower() shouldn't call it * in that case. * - * Note that we currently lack any way to flush the cache. Since we don't + * Note that we currently lack any way to flush the cache. Since we don't * support ALTER COLLATION, this is OK. The worst case is that someone * drops a collation, and a useless cache entry hangs around in existing * backends. @@ -826,15 +825,15 @@ bool lc_collate_is_c(Oid collation) { /* - * If we're asked about "collation 0", return false, so that the code - * will go into the non-C path and report that the collation is bogus. + * If we're asked about "collation 0", return false, so that the code will + * go into the non-C path and report that the collation is bogus. */ if (!OidIsValid(collation)) return false; /* - * If we're asked about the default collation, we have to inquire of - * the C library. Cache the result so we only have to compute it once. + * If we're asked about the default collation, we have to inquire of the C + * library. Cache the result so we only have to compute it once. */ if (collation == DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID) { @@ -876,15 +875,15 @@ bool lc_ctype_is_c(Oid collation) { /* - * If we're asked about "collation 0", return false, so that the code - * will go into the non-C path and report that the collation is bogus. + * If we're asked about "collation 0", return false, so that the code will + * go into the non-C path and report that the collation is bogus. */ if (!OidIsValid(collation)) return false; /* - * If we're asked about the default collation, we have to inquire of - * the C library. Cache the result so we only have to compute it once. + * If we're asked about the default collation, we have to inquire of the C + * library. Cache the result so we only have to compute it once. */ if (collation == DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID) { @@ -921,7 +920,7 @@ lc_ctype_is_c(Oid collation) /* - * Create a locale_t from a collation OID. Results are cached for the + * Create a locale_t from a collation OID. Results are cached for the * lifetime of the backend. Thus, do not free the result with freelocale(). * * As a special optimization, the default/database collation returns 0. @@ -987,7 +986,7 @@ pg_newlocale_from_collation(Oid collid) { #ifndef WIN32 /* We need two newlocale() steps */ - locale_t loc1; + locale_t loc1; loc1 = newlocale(LC_COLLATE_MASK, collcollate, NULL); if (!loc1) @@ -1002,10 +1001,11 @@ pg_newlocale_from_collation(Oid collid) errmsg("could not create locale \"%s\": %m", collctype))); #else + /* - * XXX The _create_locale() API doesn't appear to support - * this. Could perhaps be worked around by changing - * pg_locale_t to contain two separate fields. + * XXX The _create_locale() API doesn't appear to support this. + * Could perhaps be worked around by changing pg_locale_t to + * contain two separate fields. */ ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), @@ -1016,8 +1016,7 @@ pg_newlocale_from_collation(Oid collid) cache_entry->locale = result; ReleaseSysCache(tp); - -#else /* not HAVE_LOCALE_T */ +#else /* not HAVE_LOCALE_T */ /* * For platforms that don't support locale_t, we can't do anything @@ -1025,8 +1024,8 @@ pg_newlocale_from_collation(Oid collid) */ ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("nondefault collations are not supported on this platform"))); -#endif /* not HAVE_LOCALE_T */ + errmsg("nondefault collations are not supported on this platform"))); +#endif /* not HAVE_LOCALE_T */ } return cache_entry->locale; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/pgstatfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/pgstatfuncs.c index 137c811bc3..f811245cea 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/pgstatfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/pgstatfuncs.c @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ pg_stat_get_vacuum_count(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { Oid relid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); int64 result; - PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry; + PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry; if ((tabentry = pgstat_fetch_stat_tabentry(relid)) == NULL) result = 0; @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ pg_stat_get_autovacuum_count(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { Oid relid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); int64 result; - PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry; + PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry; if ((tabentry = pgstat_fetch_stat_tabentry(relid)) == NULL) result = 0; @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ pg_stat_get_analyze_count(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { Oid relid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); int64 result; - PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry; + PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry; if ((tabentry = pgstat_fetch_stat_tabentry(relid)) == NULL) result = 0; @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ pg_stat_get_autoanalyze_count(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { Oid relid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); int64 result; - PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry; + PgStat_StatTabEntry *tabentry; if ((tabentry = pgstat_fetch_stat_tabentry(relid)) == NULL) result = 0; @@ -1263,11 +1263,11 @@ pg_stat_get_db_conflict_all(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) result = 0; else result = (int64) ( - dbentry->n_conflict_tablespace + - dbentry->n_conflict_lock + - dbentry->n_conflict_snapshot + - dbentry->n_conflict_bufferpin + - dbentry->n_conflict_startup_deadlock); + dbentry->n_conflict_tablespace + + dbentry->n_conflict_lock + + dbentry->n_conflict_snapshot + + dbentry->n_conflict_bufferpin + + dbentry->n_conflict_startup_deadlock); PG_RETURN_INT64(result); } diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/ri_triggers.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/ri_triggers.c index 591d2eb16b..84797191ef 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/ri_triggers.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/ri_triggers.c @@ -2608,7 +2608,7 @@ RI_FKey_keyequal_upd_fk(Trigger *trigger, Relation fk_rel, * This is not a trigger procedure, but is called during ALTER TABLE * ADD FOREIGN KEY to validate the initial table contents. * - * We expect that the caller has made provision to prevent any problems + * We expect that the caller has made provision to prevent any problems * caused by concurrent actions. This could be either by locking rel and * pkrel at ShareRowExclusiveLock or higher, or by otherwise ensuring * that triggers implementing the checks are already active. @@ -2629,8 +2629,8 @@ RI_Initial_Check(Trigger *trigger, Relation fk_rel, Relation pk_rel) char fkrelname[MAX_QUOTED_REL_NAME_LEN]; char pkattname[MAX_QUOTED_NAME_LEN + 3]; char fkattname[MAX_QUOTED_NAME_LEN + 3]; - RangeTblEntry *pkrte; - RangeTblEntry *fkrte; + RangeTblEntry *pkrte; + RangeTblEntry *fkrte; const char *sep; int i; int old_work_mem; @@ -2662,7 +2662,7 @@ RI_Initial_Check(Trigger *trigger, Relation fk_rel, Relation pk_rel) for (i = 0; i < riinfo.nkeys; i++) { - int attno; + int attno; attno = riinfo.pk_attnums[i] - FirstLowInvalidHeapAttributeNumber; pkrte->selectedCols = bms_add_member(pkrte->selectedCols, attno); @@ -2789,10 +2789,10 @@ RI_Initial_Check(Trigger *trigger, Relation fk_rel, Relation pk_rel) /* * Run the plan. For safety we force a current snapshot to be used. (In - * transaction-snapshot mode, this arguably violates transaction - * isolation rules, but we really haven't got much choice.) - * We don't need to register the snapshot, because SPI_execute_snapshot - * will see to it. We need at most one tuple returned, so pass limit = 1. + * transaction-snapshot mode, this arguably violates transaction isolation + * rules, but we really haven't got much choice.) We don't need to + * register the snapshot, because SPI_execute_snapshot will see to it. We + * need at most one tuple returned, so pass limit = 1. */ spi_result = SPI_execute_snapshot(qplan, NULL, NULL, @@ -3337,8 +3337,8 @@ ri_PerformCheck(RI_QueryKey *qkey, SPIPlanPtr qplan, /* * In READ COMMITTED mode, we just need to use an up-to-date regular * snapshot, and we will see all rows that could be interesting. But in - * transaction-snapshot mode, we can't change the transaction snapshot. - * If the caller passes detectNewRows == false then it's okay to do the query + * transaction-snapshot mode, we can't change the transaction snapshot. If + * the caller passes detectNewRows == false then it's okay to do the query * with the transaction snapshot; otherwise we use a current snapshot, and * tell the executor to error out if it finds any rows under the current * snapshot that wouldn't be visible per the transaction snapshot. Note diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/ruleutils.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/ruleutils.c index 326079a75b..e436a1ee59 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/ruleutils.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/ruleutils.c @@ -169,11 +169,11 @@ static void set_deparse_planstate(deparse_namespace *dpns, PlanState *ps); static void push_child_plan(deparse_namespace *dpns, PlanState *ps, deparse_namespace *save_dpns); static void pop_child_plan(deparse_namespace *dpns, - deparse_namespace *save_dpns); + deparse_namespace *save_dpns); static void push_ancestor_plan(deparse_namespace *dpns, ListCell *ancestor_cell, deparse_namespace *save_dpns); static void pop_ancestor_plan(deparse_namespace *dpns, - deparse_namespace *save_dpns); + deparse_namespace *save_dpns); static void make_ruledef(StringInfo buf, HeapTuple ruletup, TupleDesc rulettc, int prettyFlags); static void make_viewdef(StringInfo buf, HeapTuple ruletup, TupleDesc rulettc, @@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ pg_get_indexdef_worker(Oid indexrelid, int colno, if (!attrsOnly && (!colno || colno == keyno + 1)) { - Oid indcoll; + Oid indcoll; /* Add collation, if not default for column */ indcoll = indcollation->values[keyno]; @@ -2207,7 +2207,7 @@ set_deparse_planstate(deparse_namespace *dpns, PlanState *ps) * We special-case Append and MergeAppend to pretend that the first child * plan is the OUTER referent; we have to interpret OUTER Vars in their * tlists according to one of the children, and the first one is the most - * natural choice. Likewise special-case ModifyTable to pretend that the + * natural choice. Likewise special-case ModifyTable to pretend that the * first child plan is the OUTER referent; this is to support RETURNING * lists containing references to non-target relations. */ @@ -2263,8 +2263,8 @@ push_child_plan(deparse_namespace *dpns, PlanState *ps, /* * Currently we don't bother to adjust the ancestors list, because an - * OUTER or INNER reference really shouldn't contain any Params that - * would be set by the parent node itself. If we did want to adjust it, + * OUTER or INNER reference really shouldn't contain any Params that would + * be set by the parent node itself. If we did want to adjust it, * lcons'ing dpns->planstate onto dpns->ancestors would be the appropriate * thing --- and pop_child_plan would need to undo the change to the list. */ @@ -3780,8 +3780,8 @@ get_variable(Var *var, int levelsup, bool showstar, deparse_context *context) * subquery's alias, that's not possible for resjunk items since they have * no alias. So in that case, drill down to the subplan and print the * contents of the referenced tlist item. This works because in a plan - * tree, such Vars can only occur in a SubqueryScan or CteScan node, - * and we'll have set dpns->inner_plan to reference the child plan node. + * tree, such Vars can only occur in a SubqueryScan or CteScan node, and + * we'll have set dpns->inner_plan to reference the child plan node. */ if ((rte->rtekind == RTE_SUBQUERY || rte->rtekind == RTE_CTE) && attnum > list_length(rte->eref->colnames) && @@ -4145,7 +4145,7 @@ get_name_for_var_field(Var *var, int fieldno, if (lc != NULL) { Query *ctequery = (Query *) cte->ctequery; - TargetEntry *ste = get_tle_by_resno(GetCTETargetList(cte), + TargetEntry *ste = get_tle_by_resno(GetCTETargetList(cte), attnum); if (ste == NULL || ste->resjunk) @@ -4279,11 +4279,11 @@ static void get_parameter(Param *param, deparse_context *context) { /* - * If it's a PARAM_EXEC parameter, try to locate the expression from - * which the parameter was computed. This will necessarily be in some - * ancestor of the current expression's PlanState. Note that failing - * to find a referent isn't an error, since the Param might well be a - * subplan output rather than an input. + * If it's a PARAM_EXEC parameter, try to locate the expression from which + * the parameter was computed. This will necessarily be in some ancestor + * of the current expression's PlanState. Note that failing to find a + * referent isn't an error, since the Param might well be a subplan output + * rather than an input. */ if (param->paramkind == PARAM_EXEC) { @@ -4302,9 +4302,9 @@ get_parameter(Param *param, deparse_context *context) ListCell *lc2; /* - * NestLoops transmit params to their inner child only; also, - * once we've crawled up out of a subplan, this couldn't - * possibly be the right match. + * NestLoops transmit params to their inner child only; also, once + * we've crawled up out of a subplan, this couldn't possibly be + * the right match. */ if (IsA(ps, NestLoopState) && child_ps == innerPlanState(ps) && @@ -4314,7 +4314,7 @@ get_parameter(Param *param, deparse_context *context) foreach(lc2, nl->nestParams) { - NestLoopParam *nlp = (NestLoopParam *) lfirst(lc2); + NestLoopParam *nlp = (NestLoopParam *) lfirst(lc2); if (nlp->paramno == param->paramid) { @@ -4342,8 +4342,8 @@ get_parameter(Param *param, deparse_context *context) /* Matched subplan, so check its arguments */ forboth(lc3, subplan->parParam, lc4, subplan->args) { - int paramid = lfirst_int(lc3); - Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(lc4); + int paramid = lfirst_int(lc3); + Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(lc4); if (paramid == param->paramid) { @@ -4898,7 +4898,7 @@ get_rule_expr(Node *node, deparse_context *context, appendStringInfo(buf, " %s %s (", generate_operator_name(expr->opno, exprType(arg1), - get_base_element_type(exprType(arg2))), + get_base_element_type(exprType(arg2))), expr->useOr ? "ANY" : "ALL"); get_rule_expr_paren(arg2, context, true, node); appendStringInfoChar(buf, ')'); @@ -6126,7 +6126,7 @@ get_const_collation(Const *constval, deparse_context *context) if (OidIsValid(constval->constcollid)) { - Oid typcollation = get_typcollation(constval->consttype); + Oid typcollation = get_typcollation(constval->consttype); if (constval->constcollid != typcollation) { @@ -6384,7 +6384,7 @@ get_from_clause_item(Node *jtnode, Query *query, deparse_context *context) gavealias = true; } else if (rte->rtekind == RTE_RELATION && - strcmp(rte->eref->aliasname, get_relation_name(rte->relid)) != 0) + strcmp(rte->eref->aliasname, get_relation_name(rte->relid)) != 0) { /* * Apparently the rel has been renamed since the rule was made. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c index 092dc15a02..41c5202146 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c @@ -6329,28 +6329,28 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Cost *indexTotalCost = (Cost *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(6); Selectivity *indexSelectivity = (Selectivity *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(7); double *indexCorrelation = (double *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(8); - ListCell *l; - List *selectivityQuals; - double numPages = index->pages, - numTuples = index->tuples; - double numEntryPages, - numDataPages, - numPendingPages, - numEntries; - bool haveFullScan = false; - double partialEntriesInQuals = 0.0; - double searchEntriesInQuals = 0.0; - double exactEntriesInQuals = 0.0; - double entryPagesFetched, - dataPagesFetched, - dataPagesFetchedBySel; - double qual_op_cost, - qual_arg_cost, - spc_random_page_cost, - num_scans; - QualCost index_qual_cost; - Relation indexRel; - GinStatsData ginStats; + ListCell *l; + List *selectivityQuals; + double numPages = index->pages, + numTuples = index->tuples; + double numEntryPages, + numDataPages, + numPendingPages, + numEntries; + bool haveFullScan = false; + double partialEntriesInQuals = 0.0; + double searchEntriesInQuals = 0.0; + double exactEntriesInQuals = 0.0; + double entryPagesFetched, + dataPagesFetched, + dataPagesFetchedBySel; + double qual_op_cost, + qual_arg_cost, + spc_random_page_cost, + num_scans; + QualCost index_qual_cost; + Relation indexRel; + GinStatsData ginStats; /* * Obtain statistic information from the meta page @@ -6366,7 +6366,7 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * nPendingPages can be trusted, but the other fields are as of the last - * VACUUM. Scale them by the ratio numPages / nTotalPages to account for + * VACUUM. Scale them by the ratio numPages / nTotalPages to account for * growth since then. If the fields are zero (implying no VACUUM at all, * and an index created pre-9.1), assume all pages are entry pages. */ @@ -6374,11 +6374,11 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { numEntryPages = numPages; numDataPages = 0; - numEntries = numTuples; /* bogus, but no other info available */ + numEntries = numTuples; /* bogus, but no other info available */ } else { - double scale = numPages / ginStats.nTotalPages; + double scale = numPages / ginStats.nTotalPages; numEntryPages = ceil(numEntryPages * scale); numDataPages = ceil(numDataPages * scale); @@ -6389,7 +6389,8 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } /* - * Include predicate in selectivityQuals (should match genericcostestimate) + * Include predicate in selectivityQuals (should match + * genericcostestimate) */ if (index->indpred != NIL) { @@ -6411,12 +6412,12 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* Estimate the fraction of main-table tuples that will be visited */ *indexSelectivity = clauselist_selectivity(root, selectivityQuals, - index->rel->relid, - JOIN_INNER, - NULL); + index->rel->relid, + JOIN_INNER, + NULL); /* fetch estimated page cost for schema containing index */ - get_tablespace_page_costs(index->reltablespace, + get_tablespace_page_costs(index->reltablespace, &spc_random_page_cost, NULL); @@ -6430,22 +6431,22 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) */ foreach(l, indexQuals) { - RestrictInfo *rinfo = (RestrictInfo *) lfirst(l); - Expr *clause; - Node *leftop, - *rightop, - *operand; - Oid extractProcOid; - Oid clause_op; - int strategy_op; - Oid lefttype, - righttype; - int32 nentries = 0; - bool *partial_matches = NULL; - Pointer *extra_data = NULL; - bool *nullFlags = NULL; - int32 searchMode = GIN_SEARCH_MODE_DEFAULT; - int indexcol; + RestrictInfo *rinfo = (RestrictInfo *) lfirst(l); + Expr *clause; + Node *leftop, + *rightop, + *operand; + Oid extractProcOid; + Oid clause_op; + int strategy_op; + Oid lefttype, + righttype; + int32 nentries = 0; + bool *partial_matches = NULL; + Pointer *extra_data = NULL; + bool *nullFlags = NULL; + int32 searchMode = GIN_SEARCH_MODE_DEFAULT; + int indexcol; Assert(IsA(rinfo, RestrictInfo)); clause = rinfo->clause; @@ -6466,16 +6467,16 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) else { elog(ERROR, "could not match index to operand"); - operand = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ + operand = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ } if (IsA(operand, RelabelType)) operand = (Node *) ((RelabelType *) operand)->arg; /* - * It's impossible to call extractQuery method for unknown operand. - * So unless operand is a Const we can't do much; just assume there - * will be one ordinary search entry from the operand at runtime. + * It's impossible to call extractQuery method for unknown operand. So + * unless operand is a Const we can't do much; just assume there will + * be one ordinary search entry from the operand at runtime. */ if (!IsA(operand, Const)) { @@ -6484,7 +6485,7 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } /* If Const is null, there can be no matches */ - if (((Const*) operand)->constisnull) + if (((Const *) operand)->constisnull) { *indexStartupCost = 0; *indexTotalCost = 0; @@ -6494,9 +6495,9 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * Get the operator's strategy number and declared input data types - * within the index opfamily. (We don't need the latter, but we - * use get_op_opfamily_properties because it will throw error if - * it fails to find a matching pg_amop entry.) + * within the index opfamily. (We don't need the latter, but we use + * get_op_opfamily_properties because it will throw error if it fails + * to find a matching pg_amop entry.) */ get_op_opfamily_properties(clause_op, index->opfamily[indexcol], false, &strategy_op, &lefttype, &righttype); @@ -6515,12 +6516,12 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { /* should not happen; throw same error as index_getprocinfo */ elog(ERROR, "missing support function %d for attribute %d of index \"%s\"", - GIN_EXTRACTQUERY_PROC, indexcol+1, + GIN_EXTRACTQUERY_PROC, indexcol + 1, get_rel_name(index->indexoid)); } OidFunctionCall7(extractProcOid, - ((Const*) operand)->constvalue, + ((Const *) operand)->constvalue, PointerGetDatum(&nentries), UInt16GetDatum(strategy_op), PointerGetDatum(&partial_matches), @@ -6538,9 +6539,9 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } else { - int32 i; + int32 i; - for (i=0; i<nentries; i++) + for (i = 0; i < nentries; i++) { /* * For partial match we haven't any information to estimate @@ -6585,32 +6586,30 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) num_scans = 1; /* - * cost to begin scan, first of all, pay attention to - * pending list. + * cost to begin scan, first of all, pay attention to pending list. */ entryPagesFetched = numPendingPages; /* * Estimate number of entry pages read. We need to do * searchEntriesInQuals searches. Use a power function as it should be, - * but tuples on leaf pages usually is much greater. - * Here we include all searches in entry tree, including - * search of first entry in partial match algorithm + * but tuples on leaf pages usually is much greater. Here we include all + * searches in entry tree, including search of first entry in partial + * match algorithm */ entryPagesFetched += ceil(searchEntriesInQuals * rint(pow(numEntryPages, 0.15))); /* - * Add an estimate of entry pages read by partial match algorithm. - * It's a scan over leaf pages in entry tree. We haven't any useful stats - * here, so estimate it as proportion. + * Add an estimate of entry pages read by partial match algorithm. It's a + * scan over leaf pages in entry tree. We haven't any useful stats here, + * so estimate it as proportion. */ entryPagesFetched += ceil(numEntryPages * partialEntriesInQuals / numEntries); /* - * Partial match algorithm reads all data pages before - * doing actual scan, so it's a startup cost. Again, - * we havn't any useful stats here, so, estimate it as - * proportion + * Partial match algorithm reads all data pages before doing actual scan, + * so it's a startup cost. Again, we havn't any useful stats here, so, + * estimate it as proportion */ dataPagesFetched = ceil(numDataPages * partialEntriesInQuals / numEntries); @@ -6626,8 +6625,8 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } /* - * Here we use random page cost because logically-close pages could be - * far apart on disk. + * Here we use random page cost because logically-close pages could be far + * apart on disk. */ *indexStartupCost = (entryPagesFetched + dataPagesFetched) * spc_random_page_cost; @@ -6639,16 +6638,16 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * capacity of data page. */ dataPagesFetchedBySel = ceil(*indexSelectivity * - (numTuples / (BLCKSZ/SizeOfIptrData))); + (numTuples / (BLCKSZ / SizeOfIptrData))); if (dataPagesFetchedBySel > dataPagesFetched) { /* - * At least one of entries is very frequent and, unfortunately, - * we couldn't get statistic about entries (only tsvector has - * such statistics). So, we obviously have too small estimation of - * pages fetched from data tree. Re-estimate it from known - * capacity of data pages + * At least one of entries is very frequent and, unfortunately, we + * couldn't get statistic about entries (only tsvector has such + * statistics). So, we obviously have too small estimation of pages + * fetched from data tree. Re-estimate it from known capacity of data + * pages */ dataPagesFetched = dataPagesFetchedBySel; } @@ -6670,7 +6669,7 @@ gincostestimate(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) qual_op_cost = cpu_operator_cost * (list_length(indexQuals) + list_length(indexOrderBys)); qual_arg_cost -= qual_op_cost; - if (qual_arg_cost < 0) /* just in case... */ + if (qual_arg_cost < 0) /* just in case... */ qual_arg_cost = 0; *indexStartupCost += qual_arg_cost; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/tsginidx.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/tsginidx.c index 41700bfcf1..4cb961146b 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/tsginidx.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/tsginidx.c @@ -95,10 +95,12 @@ gin_extract_tsquery(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { TSQuery query = PG_GETARG_TSQUERY(0); int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1); + /* StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(2); */ bool **ptr_partialmatch = (bool **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(3); Pointer **extra_data = (Pointer **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4); - /* bool **nullFlags = (bool **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(5); */ + + /* bool **nullFlags = (bool **) PG_GETARG_POINTER(5); */ int32 *searchMode = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(6); Datum *entries = NULL; @@ -114,8 +116,8 @@ gin_extract_tsquery(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * If the query doesn't have any required positive matches (for - * instance, it's something like '! foo'), we have to do a full - * index scan. + * instance, it's something like '! foo'), we have to do a full index + * scan. */ if (tsquery_requires_match(item)) *searchMode = GIN_SEARCH_MODE_DEFAULT; @@ -235,7 +237,7 @@ gin_tsquery_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * Formerly, gin_extract_tsvector had only two arguments. Now it has three, * but we still need a pg_proc entry with two args to support reloading * pre-9.1 contrib/tsearch2 opclass declarations. This compatibility - * function should go away eventually. (Note: you might say "hey, but the + * function should go away eventually. (Note: you might say "hey, but the * code above is only *using* two args, so let's just declare it that way". * If you try that you'll find the opr_sanity regression test complains.) */ diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/tsvector_op.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/tsvector_op.c index b7a822d354..66674917f0 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/tsvector_op.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/tsvector_op.c @@ -711,6 +711,7 @@ tsquery_requires_match(QueryItem *curitem) switch (curitem->qoperator.oper) { case OP_NOT: + /* * Assume there are no required matches underneath a NOT. For * some cases with nested NOTs, we could prove there's a required diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/varbit.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/varbit.c index 0eb6071e12..3fa81175fd 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/varbit.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/varbit.c @@ -237,6 +237,7 @@ bit_out(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* same as varbit output */ return varbit_out(fcinfo); #else + /* * This is how one would print a hex string, in case someone wants to * write a formatting function. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/varlena.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/varlena.c index 7a54521475..9d96013d57 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/varlena.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/varlena.c @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ void text_format_string_conversion(StringInfo buf, char conversion, static Datum text_to_array_internal(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); static text *array_to_text_internal(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, ArrayType *v, - char *fldsep, char *null_string); + char *fldsep, char *null_string); /***************************************************************************** @@ -1299,7 +1299,7 @@ varstr_cmp(char *arg1, int len1, char *arg2, int len2, Oid collid) char a2buf[STACKBUFLEN]; char *a1p, *a2p; - pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; + pg_locale_t mylocale = 0; if (collid != DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID) { @@ -1379,7 +1379,7 @@ varstr_cmp(char *arg1, int len1, char *arg2, int len2, Oid collid) result = wcscoll_l((LPWSTR) a1p, (LPWSTR) a2p, mylocale); else #endif - result = wcscoll((LPWSTR) a1p, (LPWSTR) a2p); + result = wcscoll((LPWSTR) a1p, (LPWSTR) a2p); if (result == 2147483647) /* _NLSCMPERROR; missing from mingw * headers */ ereport(ERROR, @@ -1426,7 +1426,7 @@ varstr_cmp(char *arg1, int len1, char *arg2, int len2, Oid collid) result = strcoll_l(a1p, a2p, mylocale); else #endif - result = strcoll(a1p, a2p); + result = strcoll(a1p, a2p); /* * In some locales strcoll() can claim that nonidentical strings are @@ -1487,10 +1487,10 @@ texteq(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * Since we only care about equality or not-equality, we can avoid all the - * expense of strcoll() here, and just do bitwise comparison. In fact, - * we don't even have to do a bitwise comparison if we can show the - * lengths of the strings are unequal; which might save us from having - * to detoast one or both values. + * expense of strcoll() here, and just do bitwise comparison. In fact, we + * don't even have to do a bitwise comparison if we can show the lengths + * of the strings are unequal; which might save us from having to detoast + * one or both values. */ len1 = toast_raw_datum_size(arg1); len2 = toast_raw_datum_size(arg2); @@ -2031,7 +2031,7 @@ byteaGetByte(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) bytea *v = PG_GETARG_BYTEA_PP(0); int32 n = PG_GETARG_INT32(1); int len; - int byte; + int byte; len = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(v); @@ -2062,7 +2062,7 @@ byteaGetBit(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) int byteNo, bitNo; int len; - int byte; + int byte; len = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(v); @@ -2077,7 +2077,7 @@ byteaGetBit(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) byte = ((unsigned char *) VARDATA_ANY(v))[byteNo]; - if (byte &(1 << bitNo)) + if (byte & (1 << bitNo)) PG_RETURN_INT32(1); else PG_RETURN_INT32(0); @@ -3144,7 +3144,7 @@ text_to_array_internal(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* single element can be a NULL too */ is_null = null_string ? text_isequal(inputstring, null_string) : false; PG_RETURN_ARRAYTYPE_P(create_singleton_array(fcinfo, TEXTOID, - PointerGetDatum(inputstring), + PointerGetDatum(inputstring), is_null, 1)); } @@ -3152,7 +3152,7 @@ text_to_array_internal(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* start_ptr points to the start_posn'th character of inputstring */ start_ptr = VARDATA_ANY(inputstring); - for (fldnum = 1;; fldnum++) /* field number is 1 based */ + for (fldnum = 1;; fldnum++) /* field number is 1 based */ { CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); @@ -3197,8 +3197,8 @@ text_to_array_internal(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { /* * When fldsep is NULL, each character in the inputstring becomes an - * element in the result array. The separator is effectively the space - * between characters. + * element in the result array. The separator is effectively the + * space between characters. */ inputstring_len = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(inputstring); @@ -3210,7 +3210,7 @@ text_to_array_internal(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) while (inputstring_len > 0) { - int chunk_len = pg_mblen(start_ptr); + int chunk_len = pg_mblen(start_ptr); CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); @@ -3625,9 +3625,9 @@ string_agg_finalfn(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) static text * concat_internal(const char *sepstr, int seplen, int argidx, FunctionCallInfo fcinfo) { - StringInfoData str; - text *result; - int i; + StringInfoData str; + text *result; + int i; initStringInfo(&str); @@ -3635,10 +3635,10 @@ concat_internal(const char *sepstr, int seplen, int argidx, FunctionCallInfo fci { if (!PG_ARGISNULL(i)) { - Oid valtype; - Datum value; - Oid typOutput; - bool typIsVarlena; + Oid valtype; + Datum value; + Oid typOutput; + bool typIsVarlena; if (i > argidx) appendBinaryStringInfo(&str, sepstr, seplen); @@ -3648,7 +3648,7 @@ concat_internal(const char *sepstr, int seplen, int argidx, FunctionCallInfo fci valtype = get_fn_expr_argtype(fcinfo->flinfo, i); getTypeOutputInfo(valtype, &typOutput, &typIsVarlena); appendStringInfoString(&str, - OidOutputFunctionCall(typOutput, value)); + OidOutputFunctionCall(typOutput, value)); } } @@ -3674,7 +3674,7 @@ text_concat(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum text_concat_ws(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *sep; + text *sep; /* return NULL when separator is NULL */ if (PG_ARGISNULL(0)) @@ -3683,7 +3683,7 @@ text_concat_ws(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) sep = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(0); PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(concat_internal( - VARDATA_ANY(sep), VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(sep), 1, fcinfo)); + VARDATA_ANY(sep), VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(sep), 1, fcinfo)); } /* @@ -3734,15 +3734,15 @@ text_right(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) Datum text_reverse(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { - text *str = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(0); - const char *p = VARDATA_ANY(str); - int len = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(str); - const char *endp = p + len; - text *result; - char *dst; + text *str = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(0); + const char *p = VARDATA_ANY(str); + int len = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(str); + const char *endp = p + len; + text *result; + char *dst; result = palloc(len + VARHDRSZ); - dst = (char*) VARDATA(result) + len; + dst = (char *) VARDATA(result) + len; SET_VARSIZE(result, len + VARHDRSZ); if (pg_database_encoding_max_length() > 1) @@ -3750,7 +3750,7 @@ text_reverse(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* multibyte version */ while (p < endp) { - int sz; + int sz; sz = pg_mblen(p); dst -= sz; @@ -3775,7 +3775,7 @@ Datum text_format(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { text *fmt; - StringInfoData str; + StringInfoData str; const char *cp; const char *start_ptr; const char *end_ptr; @@ -3795,9 +3795,9 @@ text_format(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* Scan format string, looking for conversion specifiers. */ for (cp = start_ptr; cp < end_ptr; cp++) { - Datum value; - bool isNull; - Oid typid; + Datum value; + bool isNull; + Oid typid; /* * If it's not the start of a conversion specifier, just copy it to @@ -3830,11 +3830,12 @@ text_format(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ++arg; else { - bool unterminated = false; + bool unterminated = false; /* Parse digit string. */ arg = 0; - do { + do + { /* Treat overflowing arg position as unterminated. */ if (arg > INT_MAX / 10) break; @@ -3863,8 +3864,8 @@ text_format(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* There's no argument 0. */ if (arg == 0) ereport(ERROR, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), - errmsg("conversion specifies argument 0, but arguments are numbered from 1"))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), + errmsg("conversion specifies argument 0, but arguments are numbered from 1"))); } /* Not enough arguments? Deduct 1 to avoid counting format string. */ @@ -3874,9 +3875,9 @@ text_format(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) errmsg("too few arguments for format conversion"))); /* - * At this point, we should see the main conversion specifier. - * Whether or not an argument position was present, it's known - * that at least one character remains in the string at this point. + * At this point, we should see the main conversion specifier. Whether + * or not an argument position was present, it's known that at least + * one character remains in the string at this point. */ value = PG_GETARG_DATUM(arg); isNull = PG_ARGISNULL(arg); @@ -3893,7 +3894,7 @@ text_format(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE), errmsg("unrecognized conversion specifier: %c", - *cp))); + *cp))); } } @@ -3907,11 +3908,11 @@ text_format(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* Format a %s, %I, or %L conversion. */ void text_format_string_conversion(StringInfo buf, char conversion, - Oid typid, Datum value, bool isNull) + Oid typid, Datum value, bool isNull) { - Oid typOutput; - bool typIsVarlena; - char *str; + Oid typOutput; + bool typIsVarlena; + char *str; /* Handle NULL arguments before trying to stringify the value. */ if (isNull) @@ -3919,7 +3920,7 @@ text_format_string_conversion(StringInfo buf, char conversion, if (conversion == 'L') appendStringInfoString(buf, "NULL"); else if (conversion == 'I') - ereport(ERROR, + ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_NULL_VALUE_NOT_ALLOWED), errmsg("NULL cannot be escaped as an SQL identifier"))); return; @@ -3937,7 +3938,8 @@ text_format_string_conversion(StringInfo buf, char conversion, } else if (conversion == 'L') { - char *qstr = quote_literal_cstr(str); + char *qstr = quote_literal_cstr(str); + appendStringInfoString(buf, qstr); /* quote_literal_cstr() always allocates a new string */ pfree(qstr); @@ -3951,7 +3953,7 @@ text_format_string_conversion(StringInfo buf, char conversion, /* * text_format_nv - nonvariadic wrapper for text_format function. - * + * * note: this wrapper is necessary to be sanity_checks test ok */ Datum diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/xml.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/xml.c index c175e4f4ca..ee82d4616c 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/xml.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/xml.c @@ -1200,9 +1200,10 @@ xml_parse(text *data, XmlOptionType xmloption_arg, bool preserve_whitespace, { /* * Note, that here we try to apply DTD defaults - * (XML_PARSE_DTDATTR) according to SQL/XML:2008 GR 10.16.7.d: 'Default - * values defined by internal DTD are applied'. As for external - * DTDs, we try to support them too, (see SQL/XML:2008 GR 10.16.7.e) + * (XML_PARSE_DTDATTR) according to SQL/XML:2008 GR 10.16.7.d: + * 'Default values defined by internal DTD are applied'. As for + * external DTDs, we try to support them too, (see SQL/XML:2008 GR + * 10.16.7.e) */ doc = xmlCtxtReadDoc(ctxt, utf8string, NULL, @@ -3435,10 +3436,10 @@ xpath_internal(text *xpath_expr_text, xmltype *data, ArrayType *namespaces, /* * Version 2.6.27 introduces a function named - * xmlXPathCompiledEvalToBoolean, which would be enough for - * xmlexists, but we can derive the existence by whether any - * nodes are returned, thereby preventing a library version - * upgrade and keeping the code the same. + * xmlXPathCompiledEvalToBoolean, which would be enough for xmlexists, + * but we can derive the existence by whether any nodes are returned, + * thereby preventing a library version upgrade and keeping the code + * the same. */ xpathobj = xmlXPathCompiledEval(xpathcomp, xpathctx); if (xpathobj == NULL) /* TODO: reason? */ @@ -3488,7 +3489,7 @@ xpath_internal(text *xpath_expr_text, xmltype *data, ArrayType *namespaces, xmlFreeDoc(doc); xmlFreeParserCtxt(ctxt); } -#endif /* USE_LIBXML */ +#endif /* USE_LIBXML */ /* * Evaluate XPath expression and return array of XML values. @@ -3524,7 +3525,8 @@ xpath(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * Determines if the node specified by the supplied XPath exists * in a given XML document, returning a boolean. */ -Datum xmlexists(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) +Datum +xmlexists(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { #ifdef USE_LIBXML text *xpath_expr_text = PG_GETARG_TEXT_P(0); diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/inval.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/inval.c index fe89b71df2..ebc83440de 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/inval.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/inval.c @@ -514,7 +514,8 @@ LocalExecuteInvalidationMessage(SharedInvalidationMessage *msg) * We could have smgr entries for relations of other databases, so no * short-circuit test is possible here. */ - RelFileNodeBackend rnode; + RelFileNodeBackend rnode; + rnode.node = msg->sm.rnode; rnode.backend = (msg->sm.backend_hi << 16) | (int) msg->sm.backend_lo; smgrclosenode(rnode); diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/lsyscache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/lsyscache.c index 877e50d873..d3b2a5a557 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/lsyscache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/lsyscache.c @@ -1122,7 +1122,7 @@ op_input_types(Oid opno, Oid *lefttype, Oid *righttype) * * In some cases (currently only array_eq), mergejoinability depends on the * specific input data type the operator is invoked for, so that must be - * passed as well. We currently assume that only one input's type is needed + * passed as well. We currently assume that only one input's type is needed * to check this --- by convention, pass the left input's data type. */ bool @@ -1172,7 +1172,7 @@ op_mergejoinable(Oid opno, Oid inputtype) * * In some cases (currently only array_eq), hashjoinability depends on the * specific input data type the operator is invoked for, so that must be - * passed as well. We currently assume that only one input's type is needed + * passed as well. We currently assume that only one input's type is needed * to check this --- by convention, pass the left input's data type. */ bool @@ -2709,9 +2709,9 @@ get_attstatsslot(HeapTuple statstuple, /* * Need to get info about the array element type. We look at the * actual element type embedded in the array, which might be only - * binary-compatible with the passed-in atttype. The info we - * extract here should be the same either way, but deconstruct_array - * is picky about having an exact type OID match. + * binary-compatible with the passed-in atttype. The info we extract + * here should be the same either way, but deconstruct_array is picky + * about having an exact type OID match. */ arrayelemtype = ARR_ELEMTYPE(statarray); typeTuple = SearchSysCache1(TYPEOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(arrayelemtype)); diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/plancache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/plancache.c index 949608001e..08ddfa9bcb 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/plancache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/plancache.c @@ -512,8 +512,8 @@ RevalidateCachedPlan(CachedPlanSource *plansource, bool useResOwner) TupleDesc resultDesc; /* - * Restore the search_path that was in use when the plan was made. - * See comments for PushOverrideSearchPath about limitations of this. + * Restore the search_path that was in use when the plan was made. See + * comments for PushOverrideSearchPath about limitations of this. * * (XXX is there anything else we really need to restore?) */ diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c index 274b48c895..d7e94ffc12 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c @@ -1070,9 +1070,9 @@ RelationInitIndexAccessInfo(Relation relation) MemoryContextAllocZero(indexcxt, natts * sizeof(int16)); /* - * indcollation cannot be referenced directly through the C struct, because it - * comes after the variable-width indkey field. Must extract the datum - * the hard way... + * indcollation cannot be referenced directly through the C struct, + * because it comes after the variable-width indkey field. Must extract + * the datum the hard way... */ indcollDatum = fastgetattr(relation->rd_indextuple, Anum_pg_index_indcollation, @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ RelationInitIndexAccessInfo(Relation relation) /* * Fill the support procedure OID array, as well as the info about - * opfamilies and opclass input types. (aminfo and supportinfo are left + * opfamilies and opclass input types. (aminfo and supportinfo are left * as zeroes, and are filled on-the-fly when used) */ IndexSupportInitialize(indclass, relation->rd_support, diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/syscache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/syscache.c index 715341f842..2b5e37e2f0 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/syscache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/syscache.c @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ static const struct cachedesc cacheinfo[] = { }, 32 }, - {ForeignTableRelationId, /* FOREIGNTABLEREL */ + {ForeignTableRelationId, /* FOREIGNTABLEREL */ ForeignTableRelidIndexId, 1, { diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/ts_cache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/ts_cache.c index fc93551d06..a8c4d76565 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/ts_cache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/ts_cache.c @@ -582,7 +582,7 @@ getTSCurrentConfig(bool emitError) /* Look up the config */ TSCurrentConfigCache = get_ts_config_oid(stringToQualifiedNameList(TSCurrentConfig), - !emitError); + !emitError); return TSCurrentConfigCache; } diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/typcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/typcache.c index 54e1942c31..2769a30acd 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/typcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/typcache.c @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ typedef struct TypeCacheEnumData Oid bitmap_base; /* OID corresponding to bit 0 of bitmapset */ Bitmapset *sorted_values; /* Set of OIDs known to be in order */ int num_values; /* total number of values in enum */ - EnumItem enum_values[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */ + EnumItem enum_values[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */ } TypeCacheEnumData; /* @@ -227,10 +227,10 @@ lookup_type_cache(Oid type_id, int flags) { /* * In case we find a btree opclass where previously we only found - * a hash opclass, reset eq_opr and derived information so that - * we can fetch the btree equality operator instead of the hash - * equality operator. (They're probably the same operator, but - * we don't assume that here.) + * a hash opclass, reset eq_opr and derived information so that we + * can fetch the btree equality operator instead of the hash + * equality operator. (They're probably the same operator, but we + * don't assume that here.) */ typentry->eq_opr = InvalidOid; typentry->eq_opr_finfo.fn_oid = InvalidOid; @@ -612,7 +612,8 @@ TypeCacheRelCallback(Datum arg, Oid relid) while ((typentry = (TypeCacheEntry *) hash_seq_search(&status)) != NULL) { if (typentry->tupDesc == NULL) - continue; /* not composite, or tupdesc hasn't been requested */ + continue; /* not composite, or tupdesc hasn't been + * requested */ /* Delete if match, or if we're zapping all composite types */ if (relid == typentry->typrelid || relid == InvalidOid) @@ -671,8 +672,8 @@ compare_values_of_enum(TypeCacheEntry *tcache, Oid arg1, Oid arg2) EnumItem *item2; /* - * Equal OIDs are certainly equal --- this case was probably handled - * by our caller, but we may as well check. + * Equal OIDs are certainly equal --- this case was probably handled by + * our caller, but we may as well check. */ if (arg1 == arg2) return 0; @@ -704,8 +705,8 @@ compare_values_of_enum(TypeCacheEntry *tcache, Oid arg1, Oid arg2) { /* * We couldn't find one or both values. That means the enum has - * changed under us, so re-initialize the cache and try again. - * We don't bother retrying the known-sorted case in this path. + * changed under us, so re-initialize the cache and try again. We + * don't bother retrying the known-sorted case in this path. */ load_enum_cache_data(tcache); enumdata = tcache->enumData; @@ -714,8 +715,8 @@ compare_values_of_enum(TypeCacheEntry *tcache, Oid arg1, Oid arg2) item2 = find_enumitem(enumdata, arg2); /* - * If we still can't find the values, complain: we must have - * corrupt data. + * If we still can't find the values, complain: we must have corrupt + * data. */ if (item1 == NULL) elog(ERROR, "enum value %u not found in cache for enum %s", @@ -761,21 +762,21 @@ load_enum_cache_data(TypeCacheEntry *tcache) format_type_be(tcache->type_id)))); /* - * Read all the information for members of the enum type. We collect - * the info in working memory in the caller's context, and then transfer - * it to permanent memory in CacheMemoryContext. This minimizes the risk - * of leaking memory from CacheMemoryContext in the event of an error - * partway through. + * Read all the information for members of the enum type. We collect the + * info in working memory in the caller's context, and then transfer it to + * permanent memory in CacheMemoryContext. This minimizes the risk of + * leaking memory from CacheMemoryContext in the event of an error partway + * through. */ maxitems = 64; items = (EnumItem *) palloc(sizeof(EnumItem) * maxitems); numitems = 0; /* - * Scan pg_enum for the members of the target enum type. We use a - * current MVCC snapshot, *not* SnapshotNow, so that we see a consistent - * set of rows even if someone commits a renumbering of the enum meanwhile. - * See comments for RenumberEnumType in catalog/pg_enum.c for more info. + * Scan pg_enum for the members of the target enum type. We use a current + * MVCC snapshot, *not* SnapshotNow, so that we see a consistent set of + * rows even if someone commits a renumbering of the enum meanwhile. See + * comments for RenumberEnumType in catalog/pg_enum.c for more info. */ ScanKeyInit(&skey, Anum_pg_enum_enumtypid, @@ -817,8 +818,8 @@ load_enum_cache_data(TypeCacheEntry *tcache) * and we'd rather not do binary searches unnecessarily. * * This is somewhat heuristic, and might identify a subset of OIDs that - * isn't exactly what the type started with. That's okay as long as - * the subset is correctly sorted. + * isn't exactly what the type started with. That's okay as long as the + * subset is correctly sorted. */ bitmap_base = InvalidOid; bitmap = NULL; @@ -829,15 +830,15 @@ load_enum_cache_data(TypeCacheEntry *tcache) /* * Identify longest sorted subsequence starting at start_pos */ - Bitmapset *this_bitmap = bms_make_singleton(0); - int this_bm_size = 1; - Oid start_oid = items[start_pos].enum_oid; - float4 prev_order = items[start_pos].sort_order; - int i; + Bitmapset *this_bitmap = bms_make_singleton(0); + int this_bm_size = 1; + Oid start_oid = items[start_pos].enum_oid; + float4 prev_order = items[start_pos].sort_order; + int i; for (i = start_pos + 1; i < numitems; i++) { - Oid offset; + Oid offset; offset = items[i].enum_oid - start_oid; /* quit if bitmap would be too large; cutoff is arbitrary */ @@ -864,10 +865,10 @@ load_enum_cache_data(TypeCacheEntry *tcache) bms_free(this_bitmap); /* - * Done if it's not possible to find a longer sequence in the rest - * of the list. In typical cases this will happen on the first - * iteration, which is why we create the bitmaps on the fly instead - * of doing a second pass over the list. + * Done if it's not possible to find a longer sequence in the rest of + * the list. In typical cases this will happen on the first + * iteration, which is why we create the bitmaps on the fly instead of + * doing a second pass over the list. */ if (bm_size >= (numitems - start_pos - 1)) break; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/error/elog.c b/src/backend/utils/error/elog.c index 9e58735aee..337b875fe2 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/error/elog.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/error/elog.c @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ * * Because of the extremely high rate at which log messages can be generated, * we need to be mindful of the performance cost of obtaining any information - * that may be logged. Also, it's important to keep in mind that this code may + * that may be logged. Also, it's important to keep in mind that this code may * get called from within an aborted transaction, in which case operations * such as syscache lookups are unsafe. * @@ -1175,7 +1175,7 @@ elog_finish(int elevel, const char *fmt,...) * The result of format_elog_string() is stored in ErrorContext, and will * therefore survive until FlushErrorState() is called. */ -static int save_format_errnumber; +static int save_format_errnumber; static const char *save_format_domain; void @@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ pre_format_elog_string(int errnumber, const char *domain) } char * -format_elog_string(const char *fmt, ...) +format_elog_string(const char *fmt,...) { ErrorData errdata; ErrorData *edata; @@ -1725,8 +1725,9 @@ write_console(const char *line, int len) * WriteConsoleW() will fail of stdout is redirected, so just fall through * to writing unconverted to the logfile in this case. * - * Since we palloc the structure required for conversion, also fall through - * to writing unconverted if we have not yet set up CurrentMemoryContext. + * Since we palloc the structure required for conversion, also fall + * through to writing unconverted if we have not yet set up + * CurrentMemoryContext. */ if (GetDatabaseEncoding() != GetPlatformEncoding() && !in_error_recursion_trouble() && diff --git a/src/backend/utils/fmgr/fmgr.c b/src/backend/utils/fmgr/fmgr.c index e193e560ea..0288fbab4b 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/fmgr/fmgr.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/fmgr/fmgr.c @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ * Hooks for function calls */ PGDLLIMPORT needs_fmgr_hook_type needs_fmgr_hook = NULL; -PGDLLIMPORT fmgr_hook_type fmgr_hook = NULL; +PGDLLIMPORT fmgr_hook_type fmgr_hook = NULL; /* * Declaration for old-style function pointer type. This is now used only @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ fmgr_info_cxt_security(Oid functionId, FmgrInfo *finfo, MemoryContext mcxt, * elogs. */ finfo->fn_oid = InvalidOid; - finfo->fn_collation = InvalidOid; /* caller may set this later */ + finfo->fn_collation = InvalidOid; /* caller may set this later */ finfo->fn_extra = NULL; finfo->fn_mcxt = mcxt; finfo->fn_expr = NULL; /* caller may set this later */ @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ fmgr_security_definer(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* function manager hook */ if (fmgr_hook) - (*fmgr_hook)(FHET_START, &fcache->flinfo, &fcache->arg); + (*fmgr_hook) (FHET_START, &fcache->flinfo, &fcache->arg); /* * We don't need to restore GUC or userid settings on error, because the @@ -982,7 +982,7 @@ fmgr_security_definer(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { fcinfo->flinfo = save_flinfo; if (fmgr_hook) - (*fmgr_hook)(FHET_ABORT, &fcache->flinfo, &fcache->arg); + (*fmgr_hook) (FHET_ABORT, &fcache->flinfo, &fcache->arg); PG_RE_THROW(); } PG_END_TRY(); @@ -994,7 +994,7 @@ fmgr_security_definer(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (OidIsValid(fcache->userid)) SetUserIdAndSecContext(save_userid, save_sec_context); if (fmgr_hook) - (*fmgr_hook)(FHET_END, &fcache->flinfo, &fcache->arg); + (*fmgr_hook) (FHET_END, &fcache->flinfo, &fcache->arg); return result; } @@ -1278,7 +1278,7 @@ DirectFunctionCall9(PGFunction func, Datum arg1, Datum arg2, /* * These are the same as DirectFunctionCallN except that a nonzero - * collation can be specified. No other fields of FmgrInfo are made valid. + * collation can be specified. No other fields of FmgrInfo are made valid. */ Datum DirectFunctionCall1WithCollation(PGFunction func, Oid collation, Datum arg1) diff --git a/src/backend/utils/fmgr/funcapi.c b/src/backend/utils/fmgr/funcapi.c index cad4a371b7..aa249fabfe 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/fmgr/funcapi.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/fmgr/funcapi.c @@ -489,8 +489,8 @@ resolve_polymorphic_tupdesc(TupleDesc tupdesc, oidvector *declared_args, return false; /* - * Identify the collation to use for polymorphic OUT parameters. - * (It'll necessarily be the same for both anyelement and anyarray.) + * Identify the collation to use for polymorphic OUT parameters. (It'll + * necessarily be the same for both anyelement and anyarray.) */ anycollation = get_typcollation(OidIsValid(anyelement_type) ? anyelement_type : anyarray_type); if (OidIsValid(anycollation)) @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ resolve_polymorphic_tupdesc(TupleDesc tupdesc, oidvector *declared_args, * collation. We do so if we can identify the input collation used * for the function. */ - Oid inputcollation = exprInputCollation(call_expr); + Oid inputcollation = exprInputCollation(call_expr); if (OidIsValid(inputcollation)) anycollation = inputcollation; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/init/miscinit.c b/src/backend/utils/init/miscinit.c index ef6422e75c..347a777da9 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/init/miscinit.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/init/miscinit.c @@ -394,8 +394,8 @@ SetUserIdAndContext(Oid userid, bool sec_def_context) bool is_authenticated_user_replication_role(void) { - bool result = false; - HeapTuple utup; + bool result = false; + HeapTuple utup; utup = SearchSysCache1(AUTHOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(AuthenticatedUserId)); if (HeapTupleIsValid(utup)) @@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ CreateLockFile(const char *filename, bool amPostmaster, "(key %lu, ID %lu) is still in use", id1, id2), errhint("If you're sure there are no old " - "server processes still running, remove " + "server processes still running, remove " "the shared memory block " "or just delete the file \"%s\".", filename))); @@ -889,8 +889,8 @@ CreateLockFile(const char *filename, bool amPostmaster, } /* - * Successfully created the file, now fill it. See comment in miscadmin.h - * about the contents. Note that we write the same info into both datadir + * Successfully created the file, now fill it. See comment in miscadmin.h + * about the contents. Note that we write the same info into both datadir * and socket lockfiles; although more stuff may get added to the datadir * lockfile later. */ @@ -904,7 +904,7 @@ CreateLockFile(const char *filename, bool amPostmaster, #else "" #endif - ); + ); errno = 0; if (write(fd, buffer, strlen(buffer)) != strlen(buffer)) diff --git a/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c b/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c index f3ca5a5cd6..a4c5d4c69a 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c @@ -222,8 +222,8 @@ PerformAuthentication(Port *port) { if (am_walsender) ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("replication connection authorized: user=%s", - port->user_name))); + (errmsg("replication connection authorized: user=%s", + port->user_name))); else ereport(LOG, (errmsg("connection authorized: user=%s database=%s", @@ -639,9 +639,9 @@ InitPostgres(const char *in_dbname, Oid dboid, const char *username, errmsg("remaining connection slots are reserved for non-replication superuser connections"))); /* - * If walsender, we don't want to connect to any particular database. - * Just finish the backend startup by processing any options from the - * startup packet, and we're done. + * If walsender, we don't want to connect to any particular database. Just + * finish the backend startup by processing any options from the startup + * packet, and we're done. */ if (am_walsender) { diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c b/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c index b128177803..234bb0cf6e 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ static int cliplen(const char *str, int len, int limit); /* - * Prepare for a future call to SetClientEncoding. Success should mean + * Prepare for a future call to SetClientEncoding. Success should mean * that SetClientEncoding is guaranteed to succeed for this encoding request. * * (But note that success before backend_startup_complete does not guarantee @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ PrepareClientEncoding(int encoding) /* * We cannot yet remove any older entry for the same encoding pair, - * since it could still be in use. SetClientEncoding will clean up. + * since it could still be in use. SetClientEncoding will clean up. */ return 0; /* success */ @@ -218,8 +218,8 @@ SetClientEncoding(int encoding) /* * Search the cache for the entry previously prepared by * PrepareClientEncoding; if there isn't one, we lose. While at it, - * release any duplicate entries so that repeated Prepare/Set cycles - * don't leak memory. + * release any duplicate entries so that repeated Prepare/Set cycles don't + * leak memory. */ found = false; foreach(lc, ConvProcList) @@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ pg_any_to_server(const char *s, int len, int encoding) return perform_default_encoding_conversion(s, len, true); else return (char *) pg_do_encoding_conversion( - (unsigned char *) s, len, encoding, DatabaseEncoding->encoding); + (unsigned char *) s, len, encoding, DatabaseEncoding->encoding); } /* @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ pg_server_to_any(const char *s, int len, int encoding) return perform_default_encoding_conversion(s, len, false); else return (char *) pg_do_encoding_conversion( - (unsigned char *) s, len, DatabaseEncoding->encoding, encoding); + (unsigned char *) s, len, DatabaseEncoding->encoding, encoding); } /* diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c index 5e4904aeb7..738e2152ba 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c @@ -146,23 +146,23 @@ extern bool optimize_bounded_sort; static int GUC_check_errcode_value; /* global variables for check hook support */ -char *GUC_check_errmsg_string; -char *GUC_check_errdetail_string; -char *GUC_check_errhint_string; +char *GUC_check_errmsg_string; +char *GUC_check_errdetail_string; +char *GUC_check_errhint_string; static void set_config_sourcefile(const char *name, char *sourcefile, int sourceline); -static bool call_bool_check_hook(struct config_bool *conf, bool *newval, - void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel); -static bool call_int_check_hook(struct config_int *conf, int *newval, - void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel); -static bool call_real_check_hook(struct config_real *conf, double *newval, - void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel); -static bool call_string_check_hook(struct config_string *conf, char **newval, - void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel); -static bool call_enum_check_hook(struct config_enum *conf, int *newval, - void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel); +static bool call_bool_check_hook(struct config_bool * conf, bool *newval, + void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel); +static bool call_int_check_hook(struct config_int * conf, int *newval, + void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel); +static bool call_real_check_hook(struct config_real * conf, double *newval, + void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel); +static bool call_string_check_hook(struct config_string * conf, char **newval, + void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel); +static bool call_enum_check_hook(struct config_enum * conf, int *newval, + void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel); static bool check_log_destination(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source); static void assign_log_destination(const char *newval, void *extra); @@ -1571,7 +1571,7 @@ static struct config_int ConfigureNamesInt[] = GUC_UNIT_S }, &wal_receiver_status_interval, - 10, 0, INT_MAX/1000, + 10, 0, INT_MAX / 1000, NULL, NULL, NULL }, @@ -1878,7 +1878,7 @@ static struct config_int ConfigureNamesInt[] = {"max_pred_locks_per_transaction", PGC_POSTMASTER, LOCK_MANAGEMENT, gettext_noop("Sets the maximum number of predicate locks per transaction."), gettext_noop("The shared predicate lock table is sized on the assumption that " - "at most max_pred_locks_per_transaction * max_connections distinct " + "at most max_pred_locks_per_transaction * max_connections distinct " "objects will need to be locked at any one time.") }, &max_predicate_locks_per_xact, @@ -3165,9 +3165,10 @@ static struct config_enum ConfigureNamesEnum[] = " the level, the fewer messages are sent.") }, &trace_recovery_messages, + /* - * client_message_level_options allows too many values, really, - * but it's not worth having a separate options array for this. + * client_message_level_options allows too many values, really, but + * it's not worth having a separate options array for this. */ LOG, client_message_level_options, NULL, NULL, NULL @@ -5100,8 +5101,8 @@ set_config_option(const char *name, const char *value, { /* * Historically we've just silently ignored attempts to set - * PGC_INTERNAL variables from the config file. Maybe it'd - * be better to use the prohibitValueChange logic for this? + * PGC_INTERNAL variables from the config file. Maybe it'd be + * better to use the prohibitValueChange logic for this? */ return true; } @@ -5559,8 +5560,8 @@ set_config_option(const char *name, const char *value, if (value) { /* - * The value passed by the caller could be transient, - * so we always strdup it. + * The value passed by the caller could be transient, so + * we always strdup it. */ newval = guc_strdup(elevel, value); if (newval == NULL) @@ -7922,7 +7923,7 @@ validate_option_array_item(const char *name, const char *value, * ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE SQLSTATE for check hook failures. * * Note that GUC_check_errmsg() etc are just macros that result in a direct - * assignment to the associated variables. That is ugly, but forced by the + * assignment to the associated variables. That is ugly, but forced by the * limitations of C's macro mechanisms. */ void @@ -7939,7 +7940,7 @@ GUC_check_errcode(int sqlerrcode) */ static bool -call_bool_check_hook(struct config_bool *conf, bool *newval, void **extra, +call_bool_check_hook(struct config_bool * conf, bool *newval, void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel) { /* Quick success if no hook */ @@ -7973,7 +7974,7 @@ call_bool_check_hook(struct config_bool *conf, bool *newval, void **extra, } static bool -call_int_check_hook(struct config_int *conf, int *newval, void **extra, +call_int_check_hook(struct config_int * conf, int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel) { /* Quick success if no hook */ @@ -8007,7 +8008,7 @@ call_int_check_hook(struct config_int *conf, int *newval, void **extra, } static bool -call_real_check_hook(struct config_real *conf, double *newval, void **extra, +call_real_check_hook(struct config_real * conf, double *newval, void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel) { /* Quick success if no hook */ @@ -8041,7 +8042,7 @@ call_real_check_hook(struct config_real *conf, double *newval, void **extra, } static bool -call_string_check_hook(struct config_string *conf, char **newval, void **extra, +call_string_check_hook(struct config_string * conf, char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel) { /* Quick success if no hook */ @@ -8075,7 +8076,7 @@ call_string_check_hook(struct config_string *conf, char **newval, void **extra, } static bool -call_enum_check_hook(struct config_enum *conf, int *newval, void **extra, +call_enum_check_hook(struct config_enum * conf, int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source, int elevel) { /* Quick success if no hook */ @@ -8365,9 +8366,9 @@ static bool check_canonical_path(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source) { /* - * Since canonicalize_path never enlarges the string, we can just - * modify newval in-place. But watch out for NULL, which is the - * default value for external_pid_file. + * Since canonicalize_path never enlarges the string, we can just modify + * newval in-place. But watch out for NULL, which is the default value + * for external_pid_file. */ if (*newval) canonicalize_path(*newval); @@ -8378,12 +8379,12 @@ static bool check_timezone_abbreviations(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source) { /* - * The boot_val given above for timezone_abbreviations is NULL. - * When we see this we just do nothing. If this value isn't overridden - * from the config file then pg_timezone_abbrev_initialize() will - * eventually replace it with "Default". This hack has two purposes: to - * avoid wasting cycles loading values that might soon be overridden from - * the config file, and to avoid trying to read the timezone abbrev files + * The boot_val given above for timezone_abbreviations is NULL. When we + * see this we just do nothing. If this value isn't overridden from the + * config file then pg_timezone_abbrev_initialize() will eventually + * replace it with "Default". This hack has two purposes: to avoid + * wasting cycles loading values that might soon be overridden from the + * config file, and to avoid trying to read the timezone abbrev files * during InitializeGUCOptions(). The latter doesn't work in an * EXEC_BACKEND subprocess because my_exec_path hasn't been set yet and so * we can't locate PGSHAREDIR. @@ -8443,15 +8444,15 @@ static void assign_tcp_keepalives_idle(int newval, void *extra) { /* - * The kernel API provides no way to test a value without setting it; - * and once we set it we might fail to unset it. So there seems little - * point in fully implementing the check-then-assign GUC API for these + * The kernel API provides no way to test a value without setting it; and + * once we set it we might fail to unset it. So there seems little point + * in fully implementing the check-then-assign GUC API for these * variables. Instead we just do the assignment on demand. pqcomm.c * reports any problems via elog(LOG). * - * This approach means that the GUC value might have little to do with - * the actual kernel value, so we use a show_hook that retrieves the - * kernel value rather than trusting GUC's copy. + * This approach means that the GUC value might have little to do with the + * actual kernel value, so we use a show_hook that retrieves the kernel + * value rather than trusting GUC's copy. */ (void) pq_setkeepalivesidle(newval, MyProcPort); } @@ -8574,7 +8575,7 @@ check_effective_io_concurrency(int *newval, void **extra, GucSource source) /* This range check shouldn't fail, but let's be paranoid */ if (new_prefetch_pages >= 0.0 && new_prefetch_pages < (double) INT_MAX) { - int *myextra = (int *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(int)); + int *myextra = (int *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(int)); *myextra = (int) rint(new_prefetch_pages); *extra = (void *) myextra; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/rbtree.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/rbtree.c index 7a8ddf0a17..f8143724d0 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/rbtree.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/rbtree.c @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ struct RBTree */ #define RBNIL (&sentinel) -static RBNode sentinel = {InitialState, RBBLACK, RBNIL, RBNIL, NULL}; +static RBNode sentinel = {InitialState, RBBLACK, RBNIL, RBNIL, NULL}; /* @@ -99,10 +99,10 @@ static RBNode sentinel = {InitialState, RBBLACK, RBNIL, RBNIL, NULL}; * * The freefunc should just be pfree or equivalent; it should NOT attempt * to free any subsidiary data, because the node passed to it may not contain - * valid data! freefunc can be NULL if caller doesn't require retail + * valid data! freefunc can be NULL if caller doesn't require retail * space reclamation. * - * The RBTree node is palloc'd in the caller's memory context. Note that + * The RBTree node is palloc'd in the caller's memory context. Note that * all contents of the tree are actually allocated by the caller, not here. * * Since tree contents are managed by the caller, there is currently not @@ -130,6 +130,7 @@ rb_create(Size node_size, tree->combiner = combiner; tree->allocfunc = allocfunc; tree->freefunc = freefunc; + tree->arg = arg; return tree; @@ -161,7 +162,7 @@ rb_find(RBTree *rb, const RBNode *data) while (node != RBNIL) { - int cmp = rb->comparator(data, node, rb->arg); + int cmp = rb->comparator(data, node, rb->arg); if (cmp == 0) return node; @@ -434,10 +435,11 @@ rb_insert(RBTree *rb, const RBNode *data, bool *isNew) */ *isNew = true; - x = rb->allocfunc(rb->arg); + x = rb->allocfunc (rb->arg); x->iteratorState = InitialState; x->color = RBRED; + x->left = RBNIL; x->right = RBNIL; x->parent = parent; @@ -629,7 +631,7 @@ rb_delete_node(RBTree *rb, RBNode *z) /* Now we can recycle the y node */ if (rb->freefunc) - rb->freefunc(y, rb->arg); + rb->freefunc (y, rb->arg); } /* diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/tzparser.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/tzparser.c index b2f6dd3a2b..b52942db72 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/tzparser.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/tzparser.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * Functions for parsing timezone offset files * * Note: this code is invoked from the check_hook for the GUC variable - * timezone_abbreviations. Therefore, it should report problems using + * timezone_abbreviations. Therefore, it should report problems using * GUC_check_errmsg() and related functions, and try to avoid throwing * elog(ERROR). This is not completely bulletproof at present --- in * particular out-of-memory will throw an error. Could probably fix with diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/aset.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/aset.c index b28dc47420..e95dcb6b7c 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/aset.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/aset.c @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ typedef struct AllocBlockData AllocBlock next; /* next block in aset's blocks list */ char *freeptr; /* start of free space in this block */ char *endptr; /* end of space in this block */ -} AllocBlockData; +} AllocBlockData; /* * AllocChunk @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ typedef struct AllocChunkData /* this is zero in a free chunk */ Size requested_size; #endif -} AllocChunkData; +} AllocChunkData; /* * AllocPointerIsValid diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c index 7fa66b4221..186548dcba 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c @@ -413,8 +413,8 @@ MarkPortalDone(Portal portal) portal->status = PORTAL_DONE; /* - * Allow portalcmds.c to clean up the state it knows about. We might - * as well do that now, since the portal can't be executed any more. + * Allow portalcmds.c to clean up the state it knows about. We might as + * well do that now, since the portal can't be executed any more. * * In some cases involving execution of a ROLLBACK command in an already * aborted transaction, this prevents an assertion failure from reaching @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ PortalDrop(Portal portal, bool isTopCommit) /* * Allow portalcmds.c to clean up the state it knows about, in particular - * shutting down the executor if still active. This step potentially runs + * shutting down the executor if still active. This step potentially runs * user-defined code so failure has to be expected. It's the cleanup * hook's responsibility to not try to do that more than once, in the case * that failure occurs and then we come back to drop the portal again @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ PortalHashTableDeleteAll(void) * Holdable cursors created in this transaction need to be converted to * materialized form, since we are going to close down the executor and * release locks. Non-holdable portals created in this transaction are - * simply removed. Portals remaining from prior transactions should be + * simply removed. Portals remaining from prior transactions should be * left untouched. * * Returns TRUE if any portals changed state (possibly causing user-defined @@ -678,9 +678,9 @@ PreCommit_Portals(bool isPrepare) } /* - * After either freezing or dropping a portal, we have to restart - * the iteration, because we could have invoked user-defined code - * that caused a drop of the next portal in the hash chain. + * After either freezing or dropping a portal, we have to restart the + * iteration, because we could have invoked user-defined code that + * caused a drop of the next portal in the hash chain. */ hash_seq_term(&status); hash_seq_init(&status, PortalHashTable); diff --git a/src/backend/utils/resowner/resowner.c b/src/backend/utils/resowner/resowner.c index c1ba5ad8e6..e5461e660e 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/resowner/resowner.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/resowner/resowner.c @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ typedef struct ResourceOwnerData int nfiles; /* number of owned temporary files */ File *files; /* dynamically allocated array */ int maxfiles; /* currently allocated array size */ -} ResourceOwnerData; +} ResourceOwnerData; /***************************************************************************** diff --git a/src/backend/utils/sort/tuplesort.c b/src/backend/utils/sort/tuplesort.c index a1850b83c5..bd5b4b0a7d 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/sort/tuplesort.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/sort/tuplesort.c @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ struct Tuplesortstate * indexScanKey. */ IndexInfo *indexInfo; /* info about index being used for reference */ - EState *estate; /* for evaluating index expressions */ + EState *estate; /* for evaluating index expressions */ /* * These variables are specific to the IndexTuple case; they are set by @@ -469,12 +469,12 @@ static void readtup_heap(Tuplesortstate *state, SortTuple *stup, int tapenum, unsigned int len); static void reversedirection_heap(Tuplesortstate *state); static int comparetup_cluster(const SortTuple *a, const SortTuple *b, - Tuplesortstate *state); + Tuplesortstate *state); static void copytup_cluster(Tuplesortstate *state, SortTuple *stup, void *tup); static void writetup_cluster(Tuplesortstate *state, int tapenum, - SortTuple *stup); + SortTuple *stup); static void readtup_cluster(Tuplesortstate *state, SortTuple *stup, - int tapenum, unsigned int len); + int tapenum, unsigned int len); static int comparetup_index_btree(const SortTuple *a, const SortTuple *b, Tuplesortstate *state); static int comparetup_index_hash(const SortTuple *a, const SortTuple *b, @@ -582,7 +582,7 @@ tuplesort_begin_common(int workMem, bool randomAccess) Tuplesortstate * tuplesort_begin_heap(TupleDesc tupDesc, int nkeys, AttrNumber *attNums, - Oid *sortOperators, Oid *collations, bool *nullsFirstFlags, + Oid *sortOperators, Oid *collations, bool *nullsFirstFlags, int workMem, bool randomAccess) { Tuplesortstate *state = tuplesort_begin_common(workMem, randomAccess); @@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ tuplesort_begin_cluster(TupleDesc tupDesc, if (state->indexInfo->ii_Expressions != NULL) { TupleTableSlot *slot; - ExprContext *econtext; + ExprContext *econtext; /* * We will need to use FormIndexDatum to evaluate the index @@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ tuplesort_begin_index_hash(Relation indexRel, Tuplesortstate * tuplesort_begin_datum(Oid datumType, - Oid sortOperator, Oid sortCollation, bool nullsFirstFlag, + Oid sortOperator, Oid sortCollation, bool nullsFirstFlag, int workMem, bool randomAccess) { Tuplesortstate *state = tuplesort_begin_common(workMem, randomAccess); @@ -945,7 +945,7 @@ tuplesort_end(Tuplesortstate *state) /* Free any execution state created for CLUSTER case */ if (state->estate != NULL) { - ExprContext *econtext = GetPerTupleExprContext(state->estate); + ExprContext *econtext = GetPerTupleExprContext(state->estate); ExecDropSingleTupleTableSlot(econtext->ecxt_scantuple); FreeExecutorState(state->estate); @@ -1546,7 +1546,7 @@ tuplesort_gettupleslot(Tuplesortstate *state, bool forward, /* * Fetch the next tuple in either forward or back direction. - * Returns NULL if no more tuples. If *should_free is set, the + * Returns NULL if no more tuples. If *should_free is set, the * caller must pfree the returned tuple when done with it. */ HeapTuple diff --git a/src/backend/utils/time/snapmgr.c b/src/backend/utils/time/snapmgr.c index 9100c818f8..ef66466baf 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/time/snapmgr.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/time/snapmgr.c @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ * CurrentSnapshot points to the only snapshot taken in transaction-snapshot * mode, and to the latest one taken in a read-committed transaction. * SecondarySnapshot is a snapshot that's always up-to-date as of the current - * instant, even in transaction-snapshot mode. It should only be used for + * instant, even in transaction-snapshot mode. It should only be used for * special-purpose code (say, RI checking.) * * These SnapshotData structs are static to simplify memory allocation @@ -533,8 +533,8 @@ void AtEarlyCommit_Snapshot(void) { /* - * In transaction-snapshot mode we must unregister our private refcount - * to the transaction-snapshot. + * In transaction-snapshot mode we must unregister our private refcount to + * the transaction-snapshot. */ if (registered_xact_snapshot) UnregisterSnapshotFromOwner(CurrentSnapshot, diff --git a/src/bin/initdb/initdb.c b/src/bin/initdb/initdb.c index e87edb88a9..fd1f20ee86 100644 --- a/src/bin/initdb/initdb.c +++ b/src/bin/initdb/initdb.c @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ do { \ #define PG_CMD_PRINTF3(fmt, arg1, arg2, arg3) \ do { \ - if (fprintf(cmdfd, fmt, arg1, arg2, arg3) < 0 || fflush(cmdfd) < 0) \ + if (fprintf(cmdfd, fmt, arg1, arg2, arg3) < 0 || fflush(cmdfd) < 0) \ output_failed = true, output_errno = errno; \ } while (0) @@ -1503,7 +1503,7 @@ setup_description(void) /* Create default descriptions for operator implementation functions */ PG_CMD_PUTS("WITH funcdescs AS ( " "SELECT p.oid as p_oid, oprname, " - "coalesce(obj_description(o.oid, 'pg_operator'),'') as opdesc " + "coalesce(obj_description(o.oid, 'pg_operator'),'') as opdesc " "FROM pg_proc p JOIN pg_operator o ON oprcode = p.oid ) " "INSERT INTO pg_description " " SELECT p_oid, 'pg_proc'::regclass, 0, " @@ -1511,7 +1511,7 @@ setup_description(void) " FROM funcdescs " " WHERE opdesc NOT LIKE 'deprecated%' AND " " NOT EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_description " - " WHERE objoid = p_oid AND classoid = 'pg_proc'::regclass);\n"); + " WHERE objoid = p_oid AND classoid = 'pg_proc'::regclass);\n"); PG_CMD_CLOSE; @@ -1528,9 +1528,9 @@ setup_description(void) static bool normalize_locale_name(char *new, const char *old) { - char *n = new; + char *n = new; const char *o = old; - bool changed = false; + bool changed = false; while (*o) { @@ -1552,7 +1552,7 @@ normalize_locale_name(char *new, const char *old) return changed; } -#endif /* HAVE_LOCALE_T */ +#endif /* HAVE_LOCALE_T */ /* * populate pg_collation @@ -1561,10 +1561,11 @@ static void setup_collation(void) { #ifdef HAVE_LOCALE_T - int i; - FILE *locale_a_handle; - char localebuf[NAMEDATALEN]; - int count = 0; + int i; + FILE *locale_a_handle; + char localebuf[NAMEDATALEN]; + int count = 0; + PG_CMD_DECL; #endif @@ -1590,10 +1591,10 @@ setup_collation(void) while (fgets(localebuf, sizeof(localebuf), locale_a_handle)) { - size_t len; - int enc; - bool skip; - char alias[NAMEDATALEN]; + size_t len; + int enc; + bool skip; + char alias[NAMEDATALEN]; len = strlen(localebuf); @@ -1607,11 +1608,11 @@ setup_collation(void) localebuf[len - 1] = '\0'; /* - * Some systems have locale names that don't consist entirely - * of ASCII letters (such as "bokmål" or - * "français"). This is pretty silly, since we need - * the locale itself to interpret the non-ASCII characters. - * We can't do much with those, so we filter them out. + * Some systems have locale names that don't consist entirely of ASCII + * letters (such as "bokmål" or "français"). This is + * pretty silly, since we need the locale itself to interpret the + * non-ASCII characters. We can't do much with those, so we filter + * them out. */ skip = false; for (i = 0; i < len; i++) @@ -1647,30 +1648,28 @@ setup_collation(void) escape_quotes(localebuf), enc); /* - * Generate aliases such as "en_US" in addition to - * "en_US.utf8" for ease of use. Note that collation names - * are unique per encoding only, so this doesn't clash with - * "en_US" for LATIN1, say. + * Generate aliases such as "en_US" in addition to "en_US.utf8" for + * ease of use. Note that collation names are unique per encoding + * only, so this doesn't clash with "en_US" for LATIN1, say. */ if (normalize_locale_name(alias, localebuf)) PG_CMD_PRINTF3("INSERT INTO tmp_pg_collation (collname, locale, encoding) VALUES ('%s', '%s', %d);\n", - escape_quotes(alias), escape_quotes(localebuf), enc); + escape_quotes(alias), escape_quotes(localebuf), enc); } /* Add an SQL-standard name */ PG_CMD_PRINTF1("INSERT INTO tmp_pg_collation (collname, locale, encoding) VALUES ('ucs_basic', 'C', %d);\n", PG_UTF8); /* - * When copying collations to the final location, eliminate - * aliases that conflict with an existing locale name for the same - * encoding. For example, "br_FR.iso88591" is normalized to - * "br_FR", both for encoding LATIN1. But the unnormalized locale - * "br_FR" already exists for LATIN1. Prefer the collation that - * matches the OS locale name, else the first name by sort order - * (arbitrary choice to be deterministic). + * When copying collations to the final location, eliminate aliases that + * conflict with an existing locale name for the same encoding. For + * example, "br_FR.iso88591" is normalized to "br_FR", both for encoding + * LATIN1. But the unnormalized locale "br_FR" already exists for LATIN1. + * Prefer the collation that matches the OS locale name, else the first + * name by sort order (arbitrary choice to be deterministic). */ PG_CMD_PUTS("INSERT INTO pg_collation (collname, collnamespace, collowner, collencoding, collcollate, collctype) " - " SELECT DISTINCT ON (final_collname, collnamespace, encoding)" + " SELECT DISTINCT ON (final_collname, collnamespace, encoding)" " COALESCE(collname, locale) AS final_collname, " " (SELECT oid FROM pg_namespace WHERE nspname = 'pg_catalog') AS collnamespace, " " (SELECT relowner FROM pg_class WHERE relname = 'pg_collation') AS collowner, " @@ -1687,10 +1686,10 @@ setup_collation(void) printf(_("No usable system locales were found.\n")); printf(_("Use the option \"--debug\" to see details.\n")); } -#else /* not HAVE_LOCALE_T */ +#else /* not HAVE_LOCALE_T */ printf(_("not supported on this platform\n")); fflush(stdout); -#endif /* not HAVE_LOCALE_T */ +#endif /* not HAVE_LOCALE_T */ } /* diff --git a/src/bin/pg_basebackup/pg_basebackup.c b/src/bin/pg_basebackup/pg_basebackup.c index 9f926bd242..aeec8136c4 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_basebackup/pg_basebackup.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_basebackup/pg_basebackup.c @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ usage(void) printf(_(" -Z, --compress=0-9 compress tar output\n")); printf(_("\nGeneral options:\n")); printf(_(" -c, --checkpoint=fast|spread\n" - " set fast or spread checkpointing\n")); + " set fast or spread checkpointing\n")); printf(_(" -l, --label=label set backup label\n")); printf(_(" -P, --progress show progress information\n")); printf(_(" -v, --verbose output verbose messages\n")); @@ -202,7 +202,8 @@ verify_dir_is_empty_or_create(char *dirname) static void progress_report(int tablespacenum, char *fn) { - int percent = (int) ((totaldone / 1024) * 100 / totalsize); + int percent = (int) ((totaldone / 1024) * 100 / totalsize); + if (percent > 100) percent = 100; @@ -502,7 +503,7 @@ ReceiveAndUnpackTarFile(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res, int rownum) if (file == NULL) { - int filemode; + int filemode; /* * No current file, so this must be the header for a new file @@ -795,7 +796,7 @@ BaseBackup(void) showprogress ? "PROGRESS" : "", includewal ? "WAL" : "", fastcheckpoint ? "FAST" : "", - includewal ? "NOWAIT" : ""); + includewal ? "NOWAIT" : ""); if (PQsendQuery(conn, current_path) == 0) { @@ -896,7 +897,7 @@ BaseBackup(void) if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_TUPLES_OK) { fprintf(stderr, _("%s: could not get end xlog position from server.\n"), - progname); + progname); disconnect_and_exit(1); } if (PQntuples(res) != 1) diff --git a/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c b/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c index e553c9b9d4..4e8d0b1d39 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ test_postmaster_connection(bool do_checkpoint) int i; connstr[0] = '\0'; - + for (i = 0; i < wait_seconds; i++) { /* Do we need a connection string? */ @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ test_postmaster_connection(bool do_checkpoint) * 6 9.1+ server, shared memory not created * 7 9.1+ server, shared memory created * - * This code does not support pre-9.1 servers. On Unix machines + * This code does not support pre-9.1 servers. On Unix machines * we could consider extracting the port number from the shmem * key, but that (a) is not robust, and (b) doesn't help with * finding out the socket directory. And it wouldn't work anyway @@ -462,11 +462,11 @@ test_postmaster_connection(bool do_checkpoint) optlines[5] != NULL) { /* File is complete enough for us, parse it */ - time_t pmstart; - int portnum; - char *sockdir; - char *hostaddr; - char host_str[MAXPGPATH]; + time_t pmstart; + int portnum; + char *sockdir; + char *hostaddr; + char host_str[MAXPGPATH]; /* * Easy cross-check that we are looking at the right data @@ -483,8 +483,8 @@ test_postmaster_connection(bool do_checkpoint) } /* - * OK, extract port number and host string to use. - * Prefer using Unix socket if available. + * OK, extract port number and host string to use. Prefer + * using Unix socket if available. */ portnum = atoi(optlines[LOCK_FILE_LINE_PORT - 1]); @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ test_postmaster_connection(bool do_checkpoint) * first. */ snprintf(connstr, sizeof(connstr), - "dbname=postgres port=%d host='%s' connect_timeout=5", + "dbname=postgres port=%d host='%s' connect_timeout=5", portnum, host_str); } } @@ -543,11 +543,10 @@ test_postmaster_connection(bool do_checkpoint) if (do_checkpoint) { /* - * Increment the wait hint by 6 secs (connection timeout + - * sleep) We must do this to indicate to the SCM that our - * startup time is changing, otherwise it'll usually send a - * stop signal after 20 seconds, despite incrementing the - * checkpoint counter. + * Increment the wait hint by 6 secs (connection timeout + sleep) + * We must do this to indicate to the SCM that our startup time is + * changing, otherwise it'll usually send a stop signal after 20 + * seconds, despite incrementing the checkpoint counter. */ status.dwWaitHint += 6000; status.dwCheckPoint++; @@ -557,7 +556,7 @@ test_postmaster_connection(bool do_checkpoint) #endif print_msg("."); - pg_usleep(1000000); /* 1 sec */ + pg_usleep(1000000); /* 1 sec */ } /* return result of last call to PQping */ @@ -834,8 +833,8 @@ do_stop(void) else { /* - * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the - * user that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if + * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the user + * that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if * recovery.conf is also present, we're recovering from an online * backup instead of performing one. */ @@ -867,7 +866,7 @@ do_stop(void) write_stderr(_("%s: server does not shut down\n"), progname); if (shutdown_mode == SMART_MODE) write_stderr(_("HINT: The \"-m fast\" option immediately disconnects sessions rather than\n" - "waiting for session-initiated disconnection.\n")); + "waiting for session-initiated disconnection.\n")); exit(1); } print_msg(_(" done\n")); @@ -922,8 +921,8 @@ do_restart(void) } /* - * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the - * user that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if + * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the user + * that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if * recovery.conf is also present, we're recovering from an online * backup instead of performing one. */ @@ -957,7 +956,7 @@ do_restart(void) write_stderr(_("%s: server does not shut down\n"), progname); if (shutdown_mode == SMART_MODE) write_stderr(_("HINT: The \"-m fast\" option immediately disconnects sessions rather than\n" - "waiting for session-initiated disconnection.\n")); + "waiting for session-initiated disconnection.\n")); exit(1); } @@ -1259,7 +1258,7 @@ pgwin32_doRegister(void) } if ((hService = CreateService(hSCM, register_servicename, register_servicename, - SERVICE_ALL_ACCESS, SERVICE_WIN32_OWN_PROCESS, + SERVICE_ALL_ACCESS, SERVICE_WIN32_OWN_PROCESS, pgctl_start_type, SERVICE_ERROR_NORMAL, pgwin32_CommandLine(true), NULL, NULL, "RPCSS\0", register_username, register_password)) == NULL) @@ -1700,7 +1699,7 @@ do_help(void) printf(_(" %s kill SIGNALNAME PID\n"), progname); #if defined(WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) printf(_(" %s register [-N SERVICENAME] [-U USERNAME] [-P PASSWORD] [-D DATADIR]\n" - " [-S START-TYPE] [-w] [-t SECS] [-o \"OPTIONS\"]\n"), progname); + " [-S START-TYPE] [-w] [-t SECS] [-o \"OPTIONS\"]\n"), progname); printf(_(" %s unregister [-N SERVICENAME]\n"), progname); #endif diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.c index fb280ab672..66d2419725 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.c @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ /*------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * compress_io.c - * Routines for archivers to write an uncompressed or compressed data - * stream. + * Routines for archivers to write an uncompressed or compressed data + * stream. * * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2011, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California @@ -18,36 +18,36 @@ * Compressor API * -------------- * - * The interface for writing to an archive consists of three functions: - * AllocateCompressor, WriteDataToArchive and EndCompressor. First you call - * AllocateCompressor, then write all the data by calling WriteDataToArchive - * as many times as needed, and finally EndCompressor. WriteDataToArchive - * and EndCompressor will call the WriteFunc that was provided to - * AllocateCompressor for each chunk of compressed data. + * The interface for writing to an archive consists of three functions: + * AllocateCompressor, WriteDataToArchive and EndCompressor. First you call + * AllocateCompressor, then write all the data by calling WriteDataToArchive + * as many times as needed, and finally EndCompressor. WriteDataToArchive + * and EndCompressor will call the WriteFunc that was provided to + * AllocateCompressor for each chunk of compressed data. * - * The interface for reading an archive consists of just one function: - * ReadDataFromArchive. ReadDataFromArchive reads the whole compressed input - * stream, by repeatedly calling the given ReadFunc. ReadFunc returns the - * compressed data chunk at a time, and ReadDataFromArchive decompresses it - * and passes the decompressed data to ahwrite(), until ReadFunc returns 0 - * to signal EOF. + * The interface for reading an archive consists of just one function: + * ReadDataFromArchive. ReadDataFromArchive reads the whole compressed input + * stream, by repeatedly calling the given ReadFunc. ReadFunc returns the + * compressed data chunk at a time, and ReadDataFromArchive decompresses it + * and passes the decompressed data to ahwrite(), until ReadFunc returns 0 + * to signal EOF. * - * The interface is the same for compressed and uncompressed streams. + * The interface is the same for compressed and uncompressed streams. * * Compressed stream API * ---------------------- * - * The compressed stream API is a wrapper around the C standard fopen() and - * libz's gzopen() APIs. It allows you to use the same functions for - * compressed and uncompressed streams. cfopen_read() first tries to open - * the file with given name, and if it fails, it tries to open the same - * file with the .gz suffix. cfopen_write() opens a file for writing, an - * extra argument specifies if the file should be compressed, and adds the - * .gz suffix to the filename if so. This allows you to easily handle both - * compressed and uncompressed files. + * The compressed stream API is a wrapper around the C standard fopen() and + * libz's gzopen() APIs. It allows you to use the same functions for + * compressed and uncompressed streams. cfopen_read() first tries to open + * the file with given name, and if it fails, it tries to open the same + * file with the .gz suffix. cfopen_write() opens a file for writing, an + * extra argument specifies if the file should be compressed, and adds the + * .gz suffix to the filename if so. This allows you to easily handle both + * compressed and uncompressed files. * * IDENTIFICATION - * src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.c + * src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.c * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -63,36 +63,35 @@ struct CompressorState { CompressionAlgorithm comprAlg; - WriteFunc writeF; + WriteFunc writeF; #ifdef HAVE_LIBZ - z_streamp zp; - char *zlibOut; - size_t zlibOutSize; + z_streamp zp; + char *zlibOut; + size_t zlibOutSize; #endif }; static const char *modulename = gettext_noop("compress_io"); static void ParseCompressionOption(int compression, CompressionAlgorithm *alg, - int *level); + int *level); /* Routines that support zlib compressed data I/O */ #ifdef HAVE_LIBZ static void InitCompressorZlib(CompressorState *cs, int level); static void DeflateCompressorZlib(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs, - bool flush); + bool flush); static void ReadDataFromArchiveZlib(ArchiveHandle *AH, ReadFunc readF); static size_t WriteDataToArchiveZlib(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs, - const char *data, size_t dLen); + const char *data, size_t dLen); static void EndCompressorZlib(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs); - #endif /* Routines that support uncompressed data I/O */ static void ReadDataFromArchiveNone(ArchiveHandle *AH, ReadFunc readF); static size_t WriteDataToArchiveNone(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs, - const char *data, size_t dLen); + const char *data, size_t dLen); /* * Interprets a numeric 'compression' value. The algorithm implied by the @@ -127,7 +126,7 @@ AllocateCompressor(int compression, WriteFunc writeF) { CompressorState *cs; CompressionAlgorithm alg; - int level; + int level; ParseCompressionOption(compression, &alg, &level); @@ -183,7 +182,7 @@ size_t WriteDataToArchive(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs, const void *data, size_t dLen) { - switch(cs->comprAlg) + switch (cs->comprAlg) { case COMPR_ALG_LIBZ: #ifdef HAVE_LIBZ @@ -194,7 +193,7 @@ WriteDataToArchive(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs, case COMPR_ALG_NONE: return WriteDataToArchiveNone(AH, cs, data, dLen); } - return 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ + return 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ } /* @@ -220,7 +219,7 @@ EndCompressor(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs) static void InitCompressorZlib(CompressorState *cs, int level) { - z_streamp zp; + z_streamp zp; zp = cs->zp = (z_streamp) malloc(sizeof(z_stream)); if (cs->zp == NULL) @@ -230,9 +229,9 @@ InitCompressorZlib(CompressorState *cs, int level) zp->opaque = Z_NULL; /* - * zlibOutSize is the buffer size we tell zlib it can output - * to. We actually allocate one extra byte because some routines - * want to append a trailing zero byte to the zlib output. + * zlibOutSize is the buffer size we tell zlib it can output to. We + * actually allocate one extra byte because some routines want to append a + * trailing zero byte to the zlib output. */ cs->zlibOut = (char *) malloc(ZLIB_OUT_SIZE + 1); cs->zlibOutSize = ZLIB_OUT_SIZE; @@ -253,7 +252,7 @@ InitCompressorZlib(CompressorState *cs, int level) static void EndCompressorZlib(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs) { - z_streamp zp = cs->zp; + z_streamp zp = cs->zp; zp->next_in = NULL; zp->avail_in = 0; @@ -295,10 +294,11 @@ DeflateCompressorZlib(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs, bool flush) if (zp->avail_out < cs->zlibOutSize) { /* - * Any write function shoud do its own error checking but - * to make sure we do a check here as well... + * Any write function shoud do its own error checking but to + * make sure we do a check here as well... */ - size_t len = cs->zlibOutSize - zp->avail_out; + size_t len = cs->zlibOutSize - zp->avail_out; + if (cs->writeF(AH, out, len) != len) die_horribly(AH, modulename, "could not write to output file: %s\n", @@ -320,8 +320,11 @@ WriteDataToArchiveZlib(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs, cs->zp->next_in = (void *) data; cs->zp->avail_in = dLen; DeflateCompressorZlib(AH, cs, false); - /* we have either succeeded in writing dLen bytes or we have called - * die_horribly() */ + + /* + * we have either succeeded in writing dLen bytes or we have called + * die_horribly() + */ return dLen; } @@ -400,8 +403,7 @@ ReadDataFromArchiveZlib(ArchiveHandle *AH, ReadFunc readF) free(out); free(zp); } - -#endif /* HAVE_LIBZ */ +#endif /* HAVE_LIBZ */ /* @@ -433,8 +435,8 @@ WriteDataToArchiveNone(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs, const char *data, size_t dLen) { /* - * Any write function should do its own error checking but to make - * sure we do a check here as well... + * Any write function should do its own error checking but to make sure we + * do a check here as well... */ if (cs->writeF(AH, data, dLen) != dLen) die_horribly(AH, modulename, @@ -455,9 +457,9 @@ WriteDataToArchiveNone(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs, */ struct cfp { - FILE *uncompressedfp; + FILE *uncompressedfp; #ifdef HAVE_LIBZ - gzFile compressedfp; + gzFile compressedfp; #endif }; @@ -476,7 +478,7 @@ static int hasSuffix(const char *filename, const char *suffix); cfp * cfopen_read(const char *path, const char *mode) { - cfp *fp; + cfp *fp; #ifdef HAVE_LIBZ if (hasSuffix(path, ".gz")) @@ -488,8 +490,9 @@ cfopen_read(const char *path, const char *mode) #ifdef HAVE_LIBZ if (fp == NULL) { - int fnamelen = strlen(path) + 4; - char *fname = malloc(fnamelen); + int fnamelen = strlen(path) + 4; + char *fname = malloc(fnamelen); + if (fname == NULL) die_horribly(NULL, modulename, "Out of memory\n"); @@ -514,15 +517,16 @@ cfopen_read(const char *path, const char *mode) cfp * cfopen_write(const char *path, const char *mode, int compression) { - cfp *fp; + cfp *fp; if (compression == 0) fp = cfopen(path, mode, 0); else { #ifdef HAVE_LIBZ - int fnamelen = strlen(path) + 4; - char *fname = malloc(fnamelen); + int fnamelen = strlen(path) + 4; + char *fname = malloc(fnamelen); + if (fname == NULL) die_horribly(NULL, modulename, "Out of memory\n"); @@ -543,7 +547,8 @@ cfopen_write(const char *path, const char *mode, int compression) cfp * cfopen(const char *path, const char *mode, int compression) { - cfp *fp = malloc(sizeof(cfp)); + cfp *fp = malloc(sizeof(cfp)); + if (fp == NULL) die_horribly(NULL, modulename, "Out of memory\n"); @@ -625,7 +630,7 @@ cfgets(cfp *fp, char *buf, int len) int cfclose(cfp *fp) { - int result; + int result; if (fp == NULL) { @@ -664,14 +669,15 @@ cfeof(cfp *fp) static int hasSuffix(const char *filename, const char *suffix) { - int filenamelen = strlen(filename); - int suffixlen = strlen(suffix); + int filenamelen = strlen(filename); + int suffixlen = strlen(suffix); if (filenamelen < suffixlen) return 0; return memcmp(&filename[filenamelen - suffixlen], - suffix, - suffixlen) == 0; + suffix, + suffixlen) == 0; } + #endif diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.h b/src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.h index 9963cef9fc..f5908c0d7a 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.h +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.h @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ /*------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * compress_io.h - * Interface to compress_io.c routines + * Interface to compress_io.c routines * * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2011, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.h + * src/bin/pg_dump/compress_io.h * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ typedef enum } CompressionAlgorithm; /* Prototype for callback function to WriteDataToArchive() */ -typedef size_t (*WriteFunc)(ArchiveHandle *AH, const char *buf, size_t len); +typedef size_t (*WriteFunc) (ArchiveHandle *AH, const char *buf, size_t len); /* * Prototype for callback function to ReadDataFromArchive() @@ -42,16 +42,16 @@ typedef size_t (*WriteFunc)(ArchiveHandle *AH, const char *buf, size_t len); * * Returns the number of bytes read into *buf, or 0 on EOF. */ -typedef size_t (*ReadFunc)(ArchiveHandle *AH, char **buf, size_t *buflen); +typedef size_t (*ReadFunc) (ArchiveHandle *AH, char **buf, size_t *buflen); /* struct definition appears in compress_io.c */ typedef struct CompressorState CompressorState; extern CompressorState *AllocateCompressor(int compression, WriteFunc writeF); extern void ReadDataFromArchive(ArchiveHandle *AH, int compression, - ReadFunc readF); + ReadFunc readF); extern size_t WriteDataToArchive(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs, - const void *data, size_t dLen); + const void *data, size_t dLen); extern void EndCompressor(ArchiveHandle *AH, CompressorState *cs); @@ -60,11 +60,11 @@ typedef struct cfp cfp; extern cfp *cfopen(const char *path, const char *mode, int compression); extern cfp *cfopen_read(const char *path, const char *mode); extern cfp *cfopen_write(const char *path, const char *mode, int compression); -extern int cfread(void *ptr, int size, cfp *fp); -extern int cfwrite(const void *ptr, int size, cfp *fp); -extern int cfgetc(cfp *fp); +extern int cfread(void *ptr, int size, cfp *fp); +extern int cfwrite(const void *ptr, int size, cfp *fp); +extern int cfgetc(cfp *fp); extern char *cfgets(cfp *fp, char *buf, int len); -extern int cfclose(cfp *fp); -extern int cfeof(cfp *fp); +extern int cfclose(cfp *fp); +extern int cfeof(cfp *fp); #endif diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.c index 0f814f142f..6e5e625e6d 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.c @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ #include "parser/keywords.h" -int quote_all_identifiers = 0; +int quote_all_identifiers = 0; #define supports_grant_options(version) ((version) >= 70400) diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.h b/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.h index 556883b229..44d90669b6 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.h +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.h @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ #include "libpq-fe.h" #include "pqexpbuffer.h" -extern int quote_all_identifiers; +extern int quote_all_identifiers; extern void init_parallel_dump_utils(void); extern const char *fmtId(const char *identifier); diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c index 7af3db5d64..7e1ce20745 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c @@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ const char *progname; static const char *modulename = gettext_noop("archiver"); /* index array created by fix_dependencies -- only used in parallel restore */ -static TocEntry **tocsByDumpId; /* index by dumpId - 1 */ -static DumpId maxDumpId; /* length of above array */ +static TocEntry **tocsByDumpId; /* index by dumpId - 1 */ +static DumpId maxDumpId; /* length of above array */ static ArchiveHandle *_allocAH(const char *FileSpec, const ArchiveFormat fmt, @@ -1529,7 +1529,6 @@ _moveAfter(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *pos, TocEntry *te) pos->next->prev = te; pos->next = te; } - #endif static void @@ -1771,7 +1770,7 @@ _discoverArchiveFormat(ArchiveHandle *AH) if (AH->fSpec) { - struct stat st; + struct stat st; wantClose = 1; @@ -1782,6 +1781,7 @@ _discoverArchiveFormat(ArchiveHandle *AH) if (stat(AH->fSpec, &st) == 0 && S_ISDIR(st.st_mode)) { char buf[MAXPGPATH]; + if (snprintf(buf, MAXPGPATH, "%s/toc.dat", AH->fSpec) >= MAXPGPATH) die_horribly(AH, modulename, "directory name too long: \"%s\"\n", AH->fSpec); @@ -1803,7 +1803,7 @@ _discoverArchiveFormat(ArchiveHandle *AH) #endif die_horribly(AH, modulename, "directory \"%s\" does not appear to be a valid archive (\"toc.dat\" does not exist)\n", AH->fSpec); - fh = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ + fh = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */ } else { @@ -3238,7 +3238,7 @@ dumpTimestamp(ArchiveHandle *AH, const char *msg, time_t tim) * * Work is done in three phases. * First we process all SECTION_PRE_DATA tocEntries, in a single connection, - * just as for a standard restore. Second we process the remaining non-ACL + * just as for a standard restore. Second we process the remaining non-ACL * steps in parallel worker children (threads on Windows, processes on Unix), * each of which connects separately to the database. Finally we process all * the ACL entries in a single connection (that happens back in @@ -3278,9 +3278,9 @@ restore_toc_entries_parallel(ArchiveHandle *AH) * Do all the early stuff in a single connection in the parent. There's no * great point in running it in parallel, in fact it will actually run * faster in a single connection because we avoid all the connection and - * setup overhead. Also, pg_dump is not currently very good about - * showing all the dependencies of SECTION_PRE_DATA items, so we do not - * risk trying to process them out-of-order. + * setup overhead. Also, pg_dump is not currently very good about showing + * all the dependencies of SECTION_PRE_DATA items, so we do not risk + * trying to process them out-of-order. */ skipped_some = false; for (next_work_item = AH->toc->next; next_work_item != AH->toc; next_work_item = next_work_item->next) @@ -3967,8 +3967,8 @@ fix_dependencies(ArchiveHandle *AH) /* * Count the incoming dependencies for each item. Also, it is possible - * that the dependencies list items that are not in the archive at - * all. Subtract such items from the depCounts. + * that the dependencies list items that are not in the archive at all. + * Subtract such items from the depCounts. */ for (te = AH->toc->next; te != AH->toc; te = te->next) { @@ -3984,8 +3984,8 @@ fix_dependencies(ArchiveHandle *AH) } /* - * Allocate space for revDeps[] arrays, and reset nRevDeps so we can - * use it as a counter below. + * Allocate space for revDeps[] arrays, and reset nRevDeps so we can use + * it as a counter below. */ for (te = AH->toc->next; te != AH->toc; te = te->next) { @@ -3995,8 +3995,8 @@ fix_dependencies(ArchiveHandle *AH) } /* - * Build the revDeps[] arrays of incoming-dependency dumpIds. This - * had better agree with the loops above. + * Build the revDeps[] arrays of incoming-dependency dumpIds. This had + * better agree with the loops above. */ for (te = AH->toc->next; te != AH->toc; te = te->next) { diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.h b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.h index 8d3bbe012c..fd0b174b78 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.h +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.h @@ -261,11 +261,10 @@ typedef struct _archiveHandle DumpId maxDumpId; /* largest DumpId among all TOC entries */ struct _tocEntry *currToc; /* Used when dumping data */ - int compression; /* Compression requested on open - * Possible values for compression: - * -1 Z_DEFAULT_COMPRESSION - * 0 COMPRESSION_NONE - * 1-9 levels for gzip compression */ + int compression; /* Compression requested on open Possible + * values for compression: -1 + * Z_DEFAULT_COMPRESSION 0 COMPRESSION_NONE + * 1-9 levels for gzip compression */ ArchiveMode mode; /* File mode - r or w */ void *formatData; /* Header data specific to file format */ diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_custom.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_custom.c index 87c6fb6ec2..a28c15ab3e 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_custom.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_custom.c @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ static size_t _WriteData(ArchiveHandle *AH, const void *data, size_t dLen) { lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; - CompressorState *cs = ctx->cs; + CompressorState *cs = ctx->cs; if (dLen == 0) return 0; @@ -793,6 +793,7 @@ static void _DeClone(ArchiveHandle *AH) { lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; + free(ctx); } @@ -911,7 +912,7 @@ _CustomReadFunc(ArchiveHandle *AH, char **buf, size_t *buflen) "could not read from input file: end of file\n"); else die_horribly(AH, modulename, - "could not read from input file: %s\n", strerror(errno)); + "could not read from input file: %s\n", strerror(errno)); } return cnt; } diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_directory.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_directory.c index 540ca5405a..111c3e822a 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_directory.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_directory.c @@ -45,11 +45,11 @@ typedef struct * Our archive location. This is basically what the user specified as his * backup file but of course here it is a directory. */ - char *directory; + char *directory; - cfp *dataFH; /* currently open data file */ + cfp *dataFH; /* currently open data file */ - cfp *blobsTocFH; /* file handle for blobs.toc */ + cfp *blobsTocFH; /* file handle for blobs.toc */ } lclContext; typedef struct @@ -168,9 +168,10 @@ InitArchiveFmt_Directory(ArchiveHandle *AH) fname, strerror(errno)); ctx->dataFH = tocFH; + /* - * The TOC of a directory format dump shares the format code of - * the tar format. + * The TOC of a directory format dump shares the format code of the + * tar format. */ AH->format = archTar; ReadHead(AH); @@ -193,8 +194,8 @@ InitArchiveFmt_Directory(ArchiveHandle *AH) static void _ArchiveEntry(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te) { - lclTocEntry *tctx; - char fn[MAXPGPATH]; + lclTocEntry *tctx; + char fn[MAXPGPATH]; tctx = (lclTocEntry *) calloc(1, sizeof(lclTocEntry)); if (!tctx) @@ -286,9 +287,9 @@ _PrintExtraToc(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te) static void _StartData(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te) { - lclTocEntry *tctx = (lclTocEntry *) te->formatData; - lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; - char *fname; + lclTocEntry *tctx = (lclTocEntry *) te->formatData; + lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; + char *fname; fname = prependDirectory(AH, tctx->filename); @@ -310,7 +311,7 @@ _StartData(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te) static size_t _WriteData(ArchiveHandle *AH, const void *data, size_t dLen) { - lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; + lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; if (dLen == 0) return 0; @@ -327,7 +328,7 @@ _WriteData(ArchiveHandle *AH, const void *data, size_t dLen) static void _EndData(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te) { - lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; + lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; /* Close the file */ cfclose(ctx->dataFH); @@ -349,7 +350,8 @@ _PrintFileData(ArchiveHandle *AH, char *filename, RestoreOptions *ropt) if (!filename) return; - cfp = cfopen_read(filename, PG_BINARY_R); + cfp = cfopen_read(filename, PG_BINARY_R); + if (!cfp) die_horribly(AH, modulename, "could not open input file \"%s\": %s\n", filename, strerror(errno)); @@ -380,7 +382,8 @@ _PrintTocData(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te, RestoreOptions *ropt) _LoadBlobs(AH, ropt); else { - char *fname = prependDirectory(AH, tctx->filename); + char *fname = prependDirectory(AH, tctx->filename); + _PrintFileData(AH, fname, ropt); } } @@ -388,10 +391,10 @@ _PrintTocData(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te, RestoreOptions *ropt) static void _LoadBlobs(ArchiveHandle *AH, RestoreOptions *ropt) { - Oid oid; - lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; - char *fname; - char line[MAXPGPATH]; + Oid oid; + lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; + char *fname; + char line[MAXPGPATH]; StartRestoreBlobs(AH); @@ -518,10 +521,11 @@ static void _CloseArchive(ArchiveHandle *AH) { lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; + if (AH->mode == archModeWrite) { - cfp *tocFH; - char *fname = prependDirectory(AH, "toc.dat"); + cfp *tocFH; + char *fname = prependDirectory(AH, "toc.dat"); /* The TOC is always created uncompressed */ tocFH = cfopen_write(fname, PG_BINARY_W, 0); @@ -529,6 +533,7 @@ _CloseArchive(ArchiveHandle *AH) die_horribly(AH, modulename, "could not open output file \"%s\": %s\n", fname, strerror(errno)); ctx->dataFH = tocFH; + /* * Write 'tar' in the format field of the toc.dat file. The directory * is compatible with 'tar', so there's no point having a different @@ -555,14 +560,14 @@ _CloseArchive(ArchiveHandle *AH) * Called by the archiver when starting to save all BLOB DATA (not schema). * It is called just prior to the dumper's DataDumper routine. * - * We open the large object TOC file here, so that we can append a line to + * We open the large object TOC file here, so that we can append a line to * it for each blob. */ static void _StartBlobs(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te) { - lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; - char *fname; + lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; + char *fname; fname = prependDirectory(AH, "blobs.toc"); @@ -581,8 +586,8 @@ _StartBlobs(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te) static void _StartBlob(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te, Oid oid) { - lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; - char fname[MAXPGPATH]; + lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; + char fname[MAXPGPATH]; snprintf(fname, MAXPGPATH, "%s/blob_%u.dat", ctx->directory, oid); @@ -601,9 +606,9 @@ _StartBlob(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te, Oid oid) static void _EndBlob(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te, Oid oid) { - lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; - char buf[50]; - int len; + lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; + char buf[50]; + int len; /* Close the BLOB data file itself */ cfclose(ctx->dataFH); @@ -612,7 +617,7 @@ _EndBlob(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te, Oid oid) /* register the blob in blobs.toc */ len = snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%u blob_%u.dat\n", oid, oid); if (cfwrite(buf, len, ctx->blobsTocFH) != len) - die_horribly(AH, modulename, "could not write to blobs TOC file\n"); + die_horribly(AH, modulename, "could not write to blobs TOC file\n"); } /* @@ -632,7 +637,7 @@ _EndBlobs(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te) static void createDirectory(const char *dir) { - struct stat st; + struct stat st; /* the directory must not exist yet. */ if (stat(dir, &st) == 0) @@ -661,14 +666,14 @@ createDirectory(const char *dir) static char * prependDirectory(ArchiveHandle *AH, const char *relativeFilename) { - lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; - static char buf[MAXPGPATH]; - char *dname; + lclContext *ctx = (lclContext *) AH->formatData; + static char buf[MAXPGPATH]; + char *dname; dname = ctx->directory; if (strlen(dname) + 1 + strlen(relativeFilename) + 1 > MAXPGPATH) - die_horribly(AH, modulename, "path name too long: %s", dname); + die_horribly(AH, modulename, "path name too long: %s", dname); strcpy(buf, dname); strcat(buf, "/"); diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_tar.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_tar.c index d0f6a589b3..041f9f9cbb 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_tar.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_tar.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * * This file is copied from the 'files' format file, but dumps data into * one temp file then sends it to the output TAR archive. - * + * * NOTE: If you untar the created 'tar' file, the resulting files are * compatible with the 'directory' format. Please keep the two formats in * sync. diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c index 1ccdb4dab9..afda7950d1 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c @@ -155,11 +155,11 @@ static void dumpComment(Archive *fout, const char *target, static int findComments(Archive *fout, Oid classoid, Oid objoid, CommentItem **items); static int collectComments(Archive *fout, CommentItem **items); -static void dumpSecLabel(Archive *fout, const char *target, - const char *namespace, const char *owner, - CatalogId catalogId, int subid, DumpId dumpId); -static int findSecLabels(Archive *fout, Oid classoid, Oid objoid, - SecLabelItem **items); +static void dumpSecLabel(Archive *fout, const char *target, + const char *namespace, const char *owner, + CatalogId catalogId, int subid, DumpId dumpId); +static int findSecLabels(Archive *fout, Oid classoid, Oid objoid, + SecLabelItem **items); static int collectSecLabels(Archive *fout, SecLabelItem **items); static void dumpDumpableObject(Archive *fout, DumpableObject *dobj); static void dumpNamespace(Archive *fout, NamespaceInfo *nspinfo); @@ -236,10 +236,10 @@ static void binary_upgrade_set_type_oids_by_type_oid( static bool binary_upgrade_set_type_oids_by_rel_oid( PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, Oid pg_rel_oid); static void binary_upgrade_set_pg_class_oids(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, - Oid pg_class_oid, bool is_index); + Oid pg_class_oid, bool is_index); static void binary_upgrade_extension_member(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, - DumpableObject *dobj, - const char *objlabel); + DumpableObject *dobj, + const char *objlabel); static const char *getAttrName(int attrnum, TableInfo *tblInfo); static const char *fmtCopyColumnList(const TableInfo *ti); static void do_sql_command(PGconn *conn, const char *query); @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) int optindex; RestoreOptions *ropt; ArchiveFormat archiveFormat = archUnknown; - ArchiveMode archiveMode; + ArchiveMode archiveMode; static int disable_triggers = 0; static int outputNoTablespaces = 0; @@ -911,6 +911,7 @@ parseArchiveFormat(const char *format, ArchiveMode *mode) else if (pg_strcasecmp(format, "directory") == 0) archiveFormat = archDirectory; else if (pg_strcasecmp(format, "f") == 0 || pg_strcasecmp(format, "file") == 0) + /* * Dump files into the current directory; for demonstration only, not * documented. @@ -1588,7 +1589,7 @@ makeTableDataInfo(TableInfo *tbinfo, bool oids) tdinfo->dobj.namespace = tbinfo->dobj.namespace; tdinfo->tdtable = tbinfo; tdinfo->oids = oids; - tdinfo->filtercond = NULL; /* might get set later */ + tdinfo->filtercond = NULL; /* might get set later */ addObjectDependency(&tdinfo->dobj, tbinfo->dobj.dumpId); tbinfo->dataObj = tdinfo; @@ -1932,7 +1933,7 @@ dumpDatabase(Archive *AH) int i_relfrozenxid; /* - * pg_largeobject + * pg_largeobject */ appendPQExpBuffer(loFrozenQry, "SELECT relfrozenxid\n" "FROM pg_catalog.pg_class\n" @@ -1966,29 +1967,29 @@ dumpDatabase(Archive *AH) PQclear(lo_res); /* - * pg_largeobject_metadata + * pg_largeobject_metadata */ if (g_fout->remoteVersion >= 90000) { resetPQExpBuffer(loFrozenQry); resetPQExpBuffer(loOutQry); - + appendPQExpBuffer(loFrozenQry, "SELECT relfrozenxid\n" "FROM pg_catalog.pg_class\n" "WHERE oid = %u;\n", LargeObjectMetadataRelationId); - + lo_res = PQexec(g_conn, loFrozenQry->data); check_sql_result(lo_res, g_conn, loFrozenQry->data, PGRES_TUPLES_OK); - + if (PQntuples(lo_res) != 1) { write_msg(NULL, "dumpDatabase(): could not find pg_largeobject_metadata.relfrozenxid\n"); exit_nicely(); } - + i_relfrozenxid = PQfnumber(lo_res, "relfrozenxid"); - + appendPQExpBuffer(loOutQry, "\n-- For binary upgrade, set pg_largeobject_metadata.relfrozenxid\n"); appendPQExpBuffer(loOutQry, "UPDATE pg_catalog.pg_class\n" "SET relfrozenxid = '%u'\n" @@ -2001,7 +2002,7 @@ dumpDatabase(Archive *AH) loOutQry->data, "", NULL, NULL, 0, NULL, NULL); - + PQclear(lo_res); } @@ -2437,7 +2438,7 @@ binary_upgrade_set_type_oids_by_rel_oid(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, static void binary_upgrade_set_pg_class_oids(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, Oid pg_class_oid, - bool is_index) + bool is_index) { PQExpBuffer upgrade_query = createPQExpBuffer(); int ntups; @@ -2446,7 +2447,7 @@ binary_upgrade_set_pg_class_oids(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, Oid pg_class_oid, Oid pg_class_reltoastidxid; appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_query, - "SELECT c.reltoastrelid, t.reltoastidxid " + "SELECT c.reltoastrelid, t.reltoastidxid " "FROM pg_catalog.pg_class c LEFT JOIN " "pg_catalog.pg_class t ON (c.reltoastrelid = t.oid) " "WHERE c.oid = '%u'::pg_catalog.oid;", @@ -2470,7 +2471,7 @@ binary_upgrade_set_pg_class_oids(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, Oid pg_class_oid, pg_class_reltoastidxid = atooid(PQgetvalue(upgrade_res, 0, PQfnumber(upgrade_res, "reltoastidxid"))); appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer, - "\n-- For binary upgrade, must preserve pg_class oids\n"); + "\n-- For binary upgrade, must preserve pg_class oids\n"); if (!is_index) { @@ -2485,14 +2486,14 @@ binary_upgrade_set_pg_class_oids(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, Oid pg_class_oid, * the creation of a TOAST table, and the TOAST table might have * been created long after table creation, when the table was * loaded with wide data. By setting the TOAST oid we force - * creation of the TOAST heap and TOAST index by the backend - * so we can cleanly copy the files during binary upgrade. + * creation of the TOAST heap and TOAST index by the backend so we + * can cleanly copy the files during binary upgrade. */ - + appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer, "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_toast_pg_class_oid('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n", pg_class_reltoastrelid); - + /* every toast table has an index */ appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer, "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_index_pg_class_oid('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n", @@ -2526,10 +2527,10 @@ binary_upgrade_extension_member(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, return; /* - * Find the parent extension. We could avoid this search if we wanted - * to add a link field to DumpableObject, but the space costs of that - * would be considerable. We assume that member objects could only have - * a direct dependency on their own extension, not any others. + * Find the parent extension. We could avoid this search if we wanted to + * add a link field to DumpableObject, but the space costs of that would + * be considerable. We assume that member objects could only have a + * direct dependency on their own extension, not any others. */ for (i = 0; i < dobj->nDeps; i++) { @@ -2545,7 +2546,7 @@ binary_upgrade_extension_member(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, } appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer, - "\n-- For binary upgrade, handle extension membership the hard way\n"); + "\n-- For binary upgrade, handle extension membership the hard way\n"); appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer, "ALTER EXTENSION %s ADD %s;\n", fmtId(extobj->name), objlabel); @@ -3664,10 +3665,10 @@ getFuncs(int *numFuncs) selectSourceSchema("pg_catalog"); /* - * Find all user-defined functions. Normally we can exclude functions - * in pg_catalog, which is worth doing since there are several thousand - * of 'em. However, there are some extensions that create functions in - * pg_catalog. In normal dumps we can still ignore those --- but in + * Find all user-defined functions. Normally we can exclude functions in + * pg_catalog, which is worth doing since there are several thousand of + * 'em. However, there are some extensions that create functions in + * pg_catalog. In normal dumps we can still ignore those --- but in * binary-upgrade mode, we must dump the member objects of the extension, * so be sure to fetch any such functions. */ @@ -5594,19 +5595,19 @@ getTableAttrs(TableInfo *tblinfo, int numTables) if (g_fout->remoteVersion >= 90100) { /* - * attcollation is new in 9.1. Since we only want to dump - * COLLATE clauses for attributes whose collation is different - * from their type's default, we use a CASE here to suppress - * uninteresting attcollations cheaply. + * attcollation is new in 9.1. Since we only want to dump COLLATE + * clauses for attributes whose collation is different from their + * type's default, we use a CASE here to suppress uninteresting + * attcollations cheaply. */ appendPQExpBuffer(q, "SELECT a.attnum, a.attname, a.atttypmod, " "a.attstattarget, a.attstorage, t.typstorage, " "a.attnotnull, a.atthasdef, a.attisdropped, " "a.attlen, a.attalign, a.attislocal, " "pg_catalog.format_type(t.oid,a.atttypmod) AS atttypname, " - "array_to_string(a.attoptions, ', ') AS attoptions, " + "array_to_string(a.attoptions, ', ') AS attoptions, " "CASE WHEN a.attcollation <> t.typcollation " - "THEN a.attcollation ELSE 0 END AS attcollation " + "THEN a.attcollation ELSE 0 END AS attcollation " "FROM pg_catalog.pg_attribute a LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_type t " "ON a.atttypid = t.oid " "WHERE a.attrelid = '%u'::pg_catalog.oid " @@ -5622,7 +5623,7 @@ getTableAttrs(TableInfo *tblinfo, int numTables) "a.attnotnull, a.atthasdef, a.attisdropped, " "a.attlen, a.attalign, a.attislocal, " "pg_catalog.format_type(t.oid,a.atttypmod) AS atttypname, " - "array_to_string(a.attoptions, ', ') AS attoptions, " + "array_to_string(a.attoptions, ', ') AS attoptions, " "0 AS attcollation " "FROM pg_catalog.pg_attribute a LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_type t " "ON a.atttypid = t.oid " @@ -7151,8 +7152,8 @@ dumpExtension(Archive *fout, ExtensionInfo *extinfo) } else { - int i; - int n; + int i; + int n; appendPQExpBuffer(q, "-- For binary upgrade, create an empty extension and insert objects into it\n"); appendPQExpBuffer(q, @@ -7164,10 +7165,11 @@ dumpExtension(Archive *fout, ExtensionInfo *extinfo) appendPQExpBuffer(q, "%s, ", extinfo->relocatable ? "true" : "false"); appendStringLiteralAH(q, extinfo->extversion, fout); appendPQExpBuffer(q, ", "); + /* * Note that we're pushing extconfig (an OID array) back into - * pg_extension exactly as-is. This is OK because pg_class OIDs - * are preserved in binary upgrade. + * pg_extension exactly as-is. This is OK because pg_class OIDs are + * preserved in binary upgrade. */ if (strlen(extinfo->extconfig) > 2) appendStringLiteralAH(q, extinfo->extconfig, fout); @@ -7810,13 +7812,13 @@ dumpDomain(Archive *fout, TypeInfo *tyinfo) { /* typcollation is new in 9.1 */ appendPQExpBuffer(query, "SELECT t.typnotnull, " - "pg_catalog.format_type(t.typbasetype, t.typtypmod) AS typdefn, " + "pg_catalog.format_type(t.typbasetype, t.typtypmod) AS typdefn, " "pg_catalog.pg_get_expr(t.typdefaultbin, 'pg_catalog.pg_type'::pg_catalog.regclass) AS typdefaultbin, " "t.typdefault, " "CASE WHEN t.typcollation <> u.typcollation " "THEN t.typcollation ELSE 0 END AS typcollation " "FROM pg_catalog.pg_type t " - "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_type u ON (t.typbasetype = u.oid) " + "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_type u ON (t.typbasetype = u.oid) " "WHERE t.oid = '%u'::pg_catalog.oid", tyinfo->dobj.catId.oid); } @@ -7824,7 +7826,7 @@ dumpDomain(Archive *fout, TypeInfo *tyinfo) { /* We assume here that remoteVersion must be at least 70300 */ appendPQExpBuffer(query, "SELECT typnotnull, " - "pg_catalog.format_type(typbasetype, typtypmod) AS typdefn, " + "pg_catalog.format_type(typbasetype, typtypmod) AS typdefn, " "pg_catalog.pg_get_expr(typdefaultbin, 'pg_catalog.pg_type'::pg_catalog.regclass) AS typdefaultbin, " "typdefault, 0 AS typcollation " "FROM pg_catalog.pg_type " @@ -7870,7 +7872,7 @@ dumpDomain(Archive *fout, TypeInfo *tyinfo) /* Print collation only if different from base type's collation */ if (OidIsValid(typcollation)) { - CollInfo *coll; + CollInfo *coll; coll = findCollationByOid(typcollation); if (coll) @@ -9677,11 +9679,11 @@ dumpOpclass(Archive *fout, OpclassInfo *opcinfo) * Print only those opfamily members that are tied to the opclass by * pg_depend entries. * - * XXX RECHECK is gone as of 8.4, but we'll still print it if dumping - * an older server's opclass in which it is used. This is to avoid + * XXX RECHECK is gone as of 8.4, but we'll still print it if dumping an + * older server's opclass in which it is used. This is to avoid * hard-to-detect breakage if a newer pg_dump is used to dump from an - * older server and then reload into that old version. This can go - * away once 8.3 is so old as to not be of interest to anyone. + * older server and then reload into that old version. This can go away + * once 8.3 is so old as to not be of interest to anyone. */ resetPQExpBuffer(query); @@ -9691,11 +9693,11 @@ dumpOpclass(Archive *fout, OpclassInfo *opcinfo) "amopopr::pg_catalog.regoperator, " "opfname AS sortfamily, " "nspname AS sortfamilynsp " - "FROM pg_catalog.pg_amop ao JOIN pg_catalog.pg_depend ON " + "FROM pg_catalog.pg_amop ao JOIN pg_catalog.pg_depend ON " "(classid = 'pg_catalog.pg_amop'::pg_catalog.regclass AND objid = ao.oid) " - "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_opfamily f ON f.oid = amopsortfamily " - "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = opfnamespace " - "WHERE refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_opclass'::pg_catalog.regclass " + "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_opfamily f ON f.oid = amopsortfamily " + "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = opfnamespace " + "WHERE refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_opclass'::pg_catalog.regclass " "AND refobjid = '%u'::pg_catalog.oid " "AND amopfamily = '%s'::pg_catalog.oid " "ORDER BY amopstrategy", @@ -9733,8 +9735,8 @@ dumpOpclass(Archive *fout, OpclassInfo *opcinfo) else { /* - * Here, we print all entries since there are no opfamilies and - * hence no loose operators to worry about. + * Here, we print all entries since there are no opfamilies and hence + * no loose operators to worry about. */ appendPQExpBuffer(query, "SELECT amopstrategy, amopreqcheck, " "amopopr::pg_catalog.regoperator, " @@ -9939,11 +9941,11 @@ dumpOpfamily(Archive *fout, OpfamilyInfo *opfinfo) * Fetch only those opfamily members that are tied directly to the * opfamily by pg_depend entries. * - * XXX RECHECK is gone as of 8.4, but we'll still print it if dumping - * an older server's opclass in which it is used. This is to avoid + * XXX RECHECK is gone as of 8.4, but we'll still print it if dumping an + * older server's opclass in which it is used. This is to avoid * hard-to-detect breakage if a newer pg_dump is used to dump from an - * older server and then reload into that old version. This can go - * away once 8.3 is so old as to not be of interest to anyone. + * older server and then reload into that old version. This can go away + * once 8.3 is so old as to not be of interest to anyone. */ if (g_fout->remoteVersion >= 90100) { @@ -9951,11 +9953,11 @@ dumpOpfamily(Archive *fout, OpfamilyInfo *opfinfo) "amopopr::pg_catalog.regoperator, " "opfname AS sortfamily, " "nspname AS sortfamilynsp " - "FROM pg_catalog.pg_amop ao JOIN pg_catalog.pg_depend ON " + "FROM pg_catalog.pg_amop ao JOIN pg_catalog.pg_depend ON " "(classid = 'pg_catalog.pg_amop'::pg_catalog.regclass AND objid = ao.oid) " - "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_opfamily f ON f.oid = amopsortfamily " - "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = opfnamespace " - "WHERE refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_opfamily'::pg_catalog.regclass " + "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_opfamily f ON f.oid = amopsortfamily " + "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = opfnamespace " + "WHERE refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_opfamily'::pg_catalog.regclass " "AND refobjid = '%u'::pg_catalog.oid " "AND amopfamily = '%u'::pg_catalog.oid " "ORDER BY amopstrategy", @@ -11288,7 +11290,7 @@ dumpUserMappings(Archive *fout, * to fail if run by a non-superuser. Note that the view will show * umoptions as null if the user hasn't got privileges for the associated * server; this means that pg_dump will dump such a mapping, but with no - * OPTIONS clause. A possible alternative is to skip such mappings + * OPTIONS clause. A possible alternative is to skip such mappings * altogether, but it's not clear that that's an improvement. */ selectSourceSchema("pg_catalog"); @@ -11495,10 +11497,10 @@ dumpSecLabel(Archive *fout, const char *target, const char *namespace, const char *owner, CatalogId catalogId, int subid, DumpId dumpId) { - SecLabelItem *labels; - int nlabels; - int i; - PQExpBuffer query; + SecLabelItem *labels; + int nlabels; + int i; + PQExpBuffer query; /* do nothing, if --no-security-label is supplied */ if (no_security_label) @@ -11557,11 +11559,11 @@ dumpSecLabel(Archive *fout, const char *target, static void dumpTableSecLabel(Archive *fout, TableInfo *tbinfo, const char *reltypename) { - SecLabelItem *labels; - int nlabels; - int i; - PQExpBuffer query; - PQExpBuffer target; + SecLabelItem *labels; + int nlabels; + int i; + PQExpBuffer query; + PQExpBuffer target; /* do nothing, if --no-security-label is supplied */ if (no_security_label) @@ -11587,9 +11589,9 @@ dumpTableSecLabel(Archive *fout, TableInfo *tbinfo, const char *reltypename) for (i = 0; i < nlabels; i++) { const char *colname; - const char *provider = labels[i].provider; - const char *label = labels[i].label; - int objsubid = labels[i].objsubid; + const char *provider = labels[i].provider; + const char *label = labels[i].label; + int objsubid = labels[i].objsubid; resetPQExpBuffer(target); if (objsubid == 0) @@ -11639,12 +11641,12 @@ findSecLabels(Archive *fout, Oid classoid, Oid objoid, SecLabelItem **items) { /* static storage for table of security labels */ static SecLabelItem *labels = NULL; - static int nlabels = -1; + static int nlabels = -1; - SecLabelItem *middle = NULL; - SecLabelItem *low; - SecLabelItem *high; - int nmatch; + SecLabelItem *middle = NULL; + SecLabelItem *low; + SecLabelItem *high; + int nmatch; /* Get security labels if we didn't already */ if (nlabels < 0) @@ -11668,10 +11670,10 @@ findSecLabels(Archive *fout, Oid classoid, Oid objoid, SecLabelItem **items) else if (objoid > middle->objoid) low = middle + 1; else - break; /* found a match */ + break; /* found a match */ } - if (low > high) /* no matches */ + if (low > high) /* no matches */ { *items = NULL; return 0; @@ -11718,16 +11720,16 @@ findSecLabels(Archive *fout, Oid classoid, Oid objoid, SecLabelItem **items) static int collectSecLabels(Archive *fout, SecLabelItem **items) { - PGresult *res; - PQExpBuffer query; - int i_label; - int i_provider; - int i_classoid; - int i_objoid; - int i_objsubid; - int ntups; - int i; - SecLabelItem *labels; + PGresult *res; + PQExpBuffer query; + int i_label; + int i_provider; + int i_classoid; + int i_objoid; + int i_objsubid; + int ntups; + int i; + SecLabelItem *labels; query = createPQExpBuffer(); @@ -11740,11 +11742,11 @@ collectSecLabels(Archive *fout, SecLabelItem **items) check_sql_result(res, g_conn, query->data, PGRES_TUPLES_OK); /* Construct lookup table containing OIDs in numeric form */ - i_label = PQfnumber(res, "label"); - i_provider = PQfnumber(res, "provider"); - i_classoid = PQfnumber(res, "classoid"); - i_objoid = PQfnumber(res, "objoid"); - i_objsubid = PQfnumber(res, "objsubid"); + i_label = PQfnumber(res, "label"); + i_provider = PQfnumber(res, "provider"); + i_classoid = PQfnumber(res, "classoid"); + i_objoid = PQfnumber(res, "objoid"); + i_objsubid = PQfnumber(res, "objsubid"); ntups = PQntuples(res); @@ -11752,15 +11754,15 @@ collectSecLabels(Archive *fout, SecLabelItem **items) for (i = 0; i < ntups; i++) { - labels[i].label = PQgetvalue(res, i, i_label); - labels[i].provider = PQgetvalue(res, i, i_provider); + labels[i].label = PQgetvalue(res, i, i_label); + labels[i].provider = PQgetvalue(res, i, i_provider); labels[i].classoid = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_classoid)); labels[i].objoid = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_objoid)); labels[i].objsubid = atoi(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_objsubid)); } /* Do NOT free the PGresult since we are keeping pointers into it */ - destroyPQExpBuffer(query); + destroyPQExpBuffer(query); *items = labels; return ntups; @@ -11937,19 +11939,19 @@ dumpTableSchema(Archive *fout, TableInfo *tbinfo) { if (tbinfo->relkind == RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE) { - int i_srvname; - int i_ftoptions; + int i_srvname; + int i_ftoptions; reltypename = "FOREIGN TABLE"; - /* retrieve name of foreign server and generic options */ + /* retrieve name of foreign server and generic options */ appendPQExpBuffer(query, - "SELECT fs.srvname, array_to_string(ARRAY(" + "SELECT fs.srvname, array_to_string(ARRAY(" " SELECT option_name || ' ' || quote_literal(option_value)" - " FROM pg_options_to_table(ftoptions)), ', ') AS ftoptions " - "FROM pg_foreign_table ft JOIN pg_foreign_server fs " - " ON (fs.oid = ft.ftserver) " - "WHERE ft.ftrelid = %u", tbinfo->dobj.catId.oid); + " FROM pg_options_to_table(ftoptions)), ', ') AS ftoptions " + "FROM pg_foreign_table ft JOIN pg_foreign_server fs " + " ON (fs.oid = ft.ftserver) " + "WHERE ft.ftrelid = %u", tbinfo->dobj.catId.oid); res = PQexec(g_conn, query->data); check_sql_result(res, g_conn, query->data, PGRES_TUPLES_OK); i_srvname = PQfnumber(res, "srvname"); @@ -11984,7 +11986,7 @@ dumpTableSchema(Archive *fout, TableInfo *tbinfo) appendPQExpBuffer(q, "CREATE %s%s %s", tbinfo->relpersistence == RELPERSISTENCE_UNLOGGED ? - "UNLOGGED " : "", + "UNLOGGED " : "", reltypename, fmtId(tbinfo->dobj.name)); if (tbinfo->reloftype) @@ -12063,14 +12065,14 @@ dumpTableSchema(Archive *fout, TableInfo *tbinfo) /* Add collation if not default for the type */ if (OidIsValid(tbinfo->attcollation[j])) { - CollInfo *coll; + CollInfo *coll; coll = findCollationByOid(tbinfo->attcollation[j]); if (coll) { /* always schema-qualify, don't try to be smart */ appendPQExpBuffer(q, " COLLATE %s.", - fmtId(coll->dobj.namespace->dobj.name)); + fmtId(coll->dobj.namespace->dobj.name)); appendPQExpBuffer(q, "%s", fmtId(coll->dobj.name)); } @@ -13546,9 +13548,9 @@ getExtensionMembership(ExtensionInfo extinfo[], int numExtensions) /* * Normally, mark the member object as not to be dumped. But in - * binary upgrades, we still dump the members individually, since - * the idea is to exactly reproduce the database contents rather - * than replace the extension contents with something different. + * binary upgrades, we still dump the members individually, since the + * idea is to exactly reproduce the database contents rather than + * replace the extension contents with something different. */ if (!binary_upgrade) dobj->dump = false; @@ -13563,29 +13565,29 @@ getExtensionMembership(ExtensionInfo extinfo[], int numExtensions) * objects for them, ensuring their data will be dumped even though the * tables themselves won't be. * - * Note that we create TableDataInfo objects even in schemaOnly mode, - * ie, user data in a configuration table is treated like schema data. - * This seems appropriate since system data in a config table would - * get reloaded by CREATE EXTENSION. + * Note that we create TableDataInfo objects even in schemaOnly mode, ie, + * user data in a configuration table is treated like schema data. This + * seems appropriate since system data in a config table would get + * reloaded by CREATE EXTENSION. */ for (i = 0; i < numExtensions; i++) { - char *extconfig = extinfo[i].extconfig; - char *extcondition = extinfo[i].extcondition; - char **extconfigarray = NULL; - char **extconditionarray = NULL; - int nconfigitems; - int nconditionitems; + char *extconfig = extinfo[i].extconfig; + char *extcondition = extinfo[i].extcondition; + char **extconfigarray = NULL; + char **extconditionarray = NULL; + int nconfigitems; + int nconditionitems; if (parsePGArray(extconfig, &extconfigarray, &nconfigitems) && - parsePGArray(extcondition, &extconditionarray, &nconditionitems) && + parsePGArray(extcondition, &extconditionarray, &nconditionitems) && nconfigitems == nconditionitems) { - int j; + int j; for (j = 0; j < nconfigitems; j++) { - TableInfo *configtbl; + TableInfo *configtbl; configtbl = findTableByOid(atooid(extconfigarray[j])); if (configtbl && configtbl->dataObj == NULL) diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.h b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.h index 6559e23df1..c95614b16f 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.h +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.h @@ -145,11 +145,11 @@ typedef struct _namespaceInfo typedef struct _extensionInfo { DumpableObject dobj; - char *namespace; /* schema containing extension's objects */ + char *namespace; /* schema containing extension's objects */ bool relocatable; char *extversion; - char *extconfig; /* info about configuration tables */ - char *extcondition; + char *extconfig; /* info about configuration tables */ + char *extcondition; } ExtensionInfo; typedef struct _typeInfo @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ typedef struct _tableInfo char *rolname; /* name of owner, or empty string */ char *relacl; char relkind; - char relpersistence; /* relation persistence */ + char relpersistence; /* relation persistence */ char *reltablespace; /* relation tablespace */ char *reloptions; /* options specified by WITH (...) */ char *toast_reloptions; /* ditto, for the TOAST table */ @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ typedef struct _tableInfo bool hasoids; /* does it have OIDs? */ uint32 frozenxid; /* for restore frozen xid */ Oid toast_oid; /* for restore toast frozen xid */ - uint32 toast_frozenxid;/* for restore toast frozen xid */ + uint32 toast_frozenxid; /* for restore toast frozen xid */ int ncheck; /* # of CHECK expressions */ char *reloftype; /* underlying type for typed table */ /* these two are set only if table is a sequence owned by a column: */ diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dumpall.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dumpall.c index 9082653552..0843ffe09f 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dumpall.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dumpall.c @@ -735,7 +735,7 @@ dumpRoles(PGconn *conn) appendPQExpBuffer(buf, "\n-- For binary upgrade, must preserve pg_authid.oid\n"); appendPQExpBuffer(buf, - "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_pg_authid_oid('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n\n", + "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_pg_authid_oid('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n\n", auth_oid); } diff --git a/src/bin/psql/command.c b/src/bin/psql/command.c index d7cdcf6434..31a9ab909c 100644 --- a/src/bin/psql/command.c +++ b/src/bin/psql/command.c @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ exec_command(const char *cmd, break; } break; - case 'x': /* Extensions */ + case 'x': /* Extensions */ if (show_verbose) success = listExtensionContents(pattern); else @@ -1103,7 +1103,7 @@ exec_command(const char *cmd, else if (strcmp(cmd, "sf") == 0 || strcmp(cmd, "sf+") == 0) { bool show_linenumbers = (strcmp(cmd, "sf+") == 0); - PQExpBuffer func_buf; + PQExpBuffer func_buf; char *func; Oid foid = InvalidOid; @@ -1127,8 +1127,8 @@ exec_command(const char *cmd, } else { - FILE *output; - bool is_pager; + FILE *output; + bool is_pager; /* Select output stream: stdout, pager, or file */ if (pset.queryFout == stdout) @@ -1174,7 +1174,7 @@ exec_command(const char *cmd, */ while (*lines != '\0') { - char *eol; + char *eol; if (in_header && strncmp(lines, "AS ", 3) == 0) in_header = false; @@ -1573,7 +1573,7 @@ do_connect(char *dbname, char *user, char *host, char *port) if (param_is_newly_set(PQhost(o_conn), PQhost(pset.db)) || param_is_newly_set(PQport(o_conn), PQport(pset.db))) { - char *host = PQhost(pset.db); + char *host = PQhost(pset.db); if (host == NULL) host = DEFAULT_PGSOCKET_DIR; @@ -1778,7 +1778,7 @@ editFile(const char *fname, int lineno) /* Allocate sufficient memory for command line. */ if (lineno > 0) sys = pg_malloc(strlen(editorName) - + strlen(editor_lineno_switch) + 10 /* for integer */ + + strlen(editor_lineno_switch) + 10 /* for integer */ + 1 + strlen(fname) + 10 + 1); else sys = pg_malloc(strlen(editorName) + strlen(fname) + 10 + 1); @@ -2473,8 +2473,8 @@ strip_lineno_from_funcdesc(char *func) * multibyte environment: there is no reason to believe that we are * looking at the first byte of a character, nor are we necessarily * working in a "safe" encoding. Fortunately the bitpatterns we are - * looking for are unlikely to occur as non-first bytes, but beware - * of trying to expand the set of cases that can be recognized. We must + * looking for are unlikely to occur as non-first bytes, but beware of + * trying to expand the set of cases that can be recognized. We must * guard the <ctype.h> macros by using isascii() first, too. */ diff --git a/src/bin/psql/describe.c b/src/bin/psql/describe.c index a30eaeb10f..bab67174a2 100644 --- a/src/bin/psql/describe.c +++ b/src/bin/psql/describe.c @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ permissionsList(const char *pattern) gettext_noop("Schema"), gettext_noop("Name"), gettext_noop("table"), gettext_noop("view"), gettext_noop("sequence"), - gettext_noop("foreign table"), + gettext_noop("foreign table"), gettext_noop("Type")); printACLColumn(&buf, "c.relacl"); @@ -1745,7 +1745,7 @@ describeOneTableDetails(const char *schemaname, { printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, "SELECT conname,\n" - " pg_catalog.pg_get_constraintdef(r.oid, true) as condef\n"); + " pg_catalog.pg_get_constraintdef(r.oid, true) as condef\n"); if (pset.sversion >= 90100) appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, " ,convalidated\n"); appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "FROM pg_catalog.pg_constraint r\n" @@ -1909,119 +1909,118 @@ describeOneTableDetails(const char *schemaname, */ if (tableinfo.hastriggers) { - PGresult *result; - int tuples; + PGresult *result; + int tuples; - printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, - "SELECT t.tgname, " - "pg_catalog.pg_get_triggerdef(t.oid%s), " - "t.tgenabled\n" - "FROM pg_catalog.pg_trigger t\n" - "WHERE t.tgrelid = '%s' AND ", - (pset.sversion >= 90000 ? ", true" : ""), - oid); - if (pset.sversion >= 90000) - appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "NOT t.tgisinternal"); - else if (pset.sversion >= 80300) - appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "t.tgconstraint = 0"); - else - appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, - "(NOT tgisconstraint " - " OR NOT EXISTS" - " (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_depend d " - " JOIN pg_catalog.pg_constraint c ON (d.refclassid = c.tableoid AND d.refobjid = c.oid) " - " WHERE d.classid = t.tableoid AND d.objid = t.oid AND d.deptype = 'i' AND c.contype = 'f'))"); - appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "\nORDER BY 1"); + printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, + "SELECT t.tgname, " + "pg_catalog.pg_get_triggerdef(t.oid%s), " + "t.tgenabled\n" + "FROM pg_catalog.pg_trigger t\n" + "WHERE t.tgrelid = '%s' AND ", + (pset.sversion >= 90000 ? ", true" : ""), + oid); + if (pset.sversion >= 90000) + appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "NOT t.tgisinternal"); + else if (pset.sversion >= 80300) + appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "t.tgconstraint = 0"); + else + appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, + "(NOT tgisconstraint " + " OR NOT EXISTS" + " (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_depend d " + " JOIN pg_catalog.pg_constraint c ON (d.refclassid = c.tableoid AND d.refobjid = c.oid) " + " WHERE d.classid = t.tableoid AND d.objid = t.oid AND d.deptype = 'i' AND c.contype = 'f'))"); + appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "\nORDER BY 1"); - result = PSQLexec(buf.data, false); - if (!result) - goto error_return; - else - tuples = PQntuples(result); + result = PSQLexec(buf.data, false); + if (!result) + goto error_return; + else + tuples = PQntuples(result); - if (tuples > 0) + if (tuples > 0) + { + bool have_heading; + int category; + + /* + * split the output into 4 different categories. Enabled triggers, + * disabled triggers and the two special ALWAYS and REPLICA + * configurations. + */ + for (category = 0; category < 4; category++) { - bool have_heading; - int category; - - /* - * split the output into 4 different categories. Enabled - * triggers, disabled triggers and the two special ALWAYS and - * REPLICA configurations. - */ - for (category = 0; category < 4; category++) + have_heading = false; + for (i = 0; i < tuples; i++) { - have_heading = false; - for (i = 0; i < tuples; i++) + bool list_trigger; + const char *tgdef; + const char *usingpos; + const char *tgenabled; + + /* + * Check if this trigger falls into the current category + */ + tgenabled = PQgetvalue(result, i, 2); + list_trigger = false; + switch (category) + { + case 0: + if (*tgenabled == 'O' || *tgenabled == 't') + list_trigger = true; + break; + case 1: + if (*tgenabled == 'D' || *tgenabled == 'f') + list_trigger = true; + break; + case 2: + if (*tgenabled == 'A') + list_trigger = true; + break; + case 3: + if (*tgenabled == 'R') + list_trigger = true; + break; + } + if (list_trigger == false) + continue; + + /* Print the category heading once */ + if (have_heading == false) { - bool list_trigger; - const char *tgdef; - const char *usingpos; - const char *tgenabled; - - /* - * Check if this trigger falls into the current - * category - */ - tgenabled = PQgetvalue(result, i, 2); - list_trigger = false; switch (category) { case 0: - if (*tgenabled == 'O' || *tgenabled == 't') - list_trigger = true; + printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, _("Triggers:")); break; case 1: - if (*tgenabled == 'D' || *tgenabled == 'f') - list_trigger = true; + printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, _("Disabled triggers:")); break; case 2: - if (*tgenabled == 'A') - list_trigger = true; + printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, _("Triggers firing always:")); break; case 3: - if (*tgenabled == 'R') - list_trigger = true; + printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, _("Triggers firing on replica only:")); break; - } - if (list_trigger == false) - continue; - - /* Print the category heading once */ - if (have_heading == false) - { - switch (category) - { - case 0: - printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, _("Triggers:")); - break; - case 1: - printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, _("Disabled triggers:")); - break; - case 2: - printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, _("Triggers firing always:")); - break; - case 3: - printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, _("Triggers firing on replica only:")); - break; - } - printTableAddFooter(&cont, buf.data); - have_heading = true; } - - /* Everything after "TRIGGER" is echoed verbatim */ - tgdef = PQgetvalue(result, i, 1); - usingpos = strstr(tgdef, " TRIGGER "); - if (usingpos) - tgdef = usingpos + 9; - - printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, " %s", tgdef); printTableAddFooter(&cont, buf.data); + have_heading = true; } + + /* Everything after "TRIGGER" is echoed verbatim */ + tgdef = PQgetvalue(result, i, 1); + usingpos = strstr(tgdef, " TRIGGER "); + if (usingpos) + tgdef = usingpos + 9; + + printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, " %s", tgdef); + printTableAddFooter(&cont, buf.data); } } - PQclear(result); + } + PQclear(result); } /* @@ -2052,7 +2051,7 @@ describeOneTableDetails(const char *schemaname, } printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, "Server: %s", - PQgetvalue(result, 0, 0)); + PQgetvalue(result, 0, 0)); printTableAddFooter(&cont, buf.data); PQclear(result); } @@ -2293,7 +2292,7 @@ describeRoles(const char *pattern, bool verbose) } if (pset.sversion >= 90100) { - appendPQExpBufferStr(&buf,"\n, r.rolreplication"); + appendPQExpBufferStr(&buf, "\n, r.rolreplication"); } appendPQExpBufferStr(&buf, "\nFROM pg_catalog.pg_roles r\n"); @@ -2525,8 +2524,8 @@ listTables(const char *tabtypes, const char *pattern, bool verbose, bool showSys if (verbose) { /* - * As of PostgreSQL 9.0, use pg_table_size() to show a more acurate size - * of a table, including FSM, VM and TOAST tables. + * As of PostgreSQL 9.0, use pg_table_size() to show a more acurate + * size of a table, including FSM, VM and TOAST tables. */ if (pset.sversion >= 90000) appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, @@ -2622,7 +2621,7 @@ bool listLanguages(const char *pattern, bool verbose, bool showSystem) { PQExpBufferData buf; - PGresult *res; + PGresult *res; printQueryOpt myopt = pset.popt; initPQExpBuffer(&buf); @@ -2631,9 +2630,9 @@ listLanguages(const char *pattern, bool verbose, bool showSystem) "SELECT l.lanname AS \"%s\",\n", gettext_noop("Name")); if (pset.sversion >= 80300) - appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, - " pg_catalog.pg_get_userbyid(l.lanowner) as \"%s\",\n", - gettext_noop("Owner")); + appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, + " pg_catalog.pg_get_userbyid(l.lanowner) as \"%s\",\n", + gettext_noop("Owner")); appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, " l.lanpltrusted AS \"%s\"", @@ -2641,17 +2640,17 @@ listLanguages(const char *pattern, bool verbose, bool showSystem) if (verbose) { - appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, - ",\n NOT l.lanispl AS \"%s\",\n" - " l.lanplcallfoid::regprocedure AS \"%s\",\n" - " l.lanvalidator::regprocedure AS \"%s\",\n ", - gettext_noop("Internal Language"), - gettext_noop("Call Handler"), - gettext_noop("Validator")); - if (pset.sversion >= 90000) - appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "l.laninline::regprocedure AS \"%s\",\n ", - gettext_noop("Inline Handler")); - printACLColumn(&buf, "l.lanacl"); + appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, + ",\n NOT l.lanispl AS \"%s\",\n" + " l.lanplcallfoid::regprocedure AS \"%s\",\n" + " l.lanvalidator::regprocedure AS \"%s\",\n ", + gettext_noop("Internal Language"), + gettext_noop("Call Handler"), + gettext_noop("Validator")); + if (pset.sversion >= 90000) + appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "l.laninline::regprocedure AS \"%s\",\n ", + gettext_noop("Inline Handler")); + printACLColumn(&buf, "l.lanacl"); } appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, @@ -2907,11 +2906,11 @@ listCollations(const char *pattern, bool verbose, bool showSystem) if (verbose) appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, - ",\n pg_catalog.obj_description(c.oid, 'pg_collation') AS \"%s\"", + ",\n pg_catalog.obj_description(c.oid, 'pg_collation') AS \"%s\"", gettext_noop("Description")); appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, - "\nFROM pg_catalog.pg_collation c, pg_catalog.pg_namespace n\n" + "\nFROM pg_catalog.pg_collation c, pg_catalog.pg_namespace n\n" "WHERE n.oid = c.collnamespace\n"); if (!showSystem && !pattern) @@ -2981,7 +2980,7 @@ listSchemas(const char *pattern, bool verbose, bool showSystem) if (!showSystem && !pattern) appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, - "WHERE n.nspname !~ '^pg_' AND n.nspname <> 'information_schema'\n"); + "WHERE n.nspname !~ '^pg_' AND n.nspname <> 'information_schema'\n"); processSQLNamePattern(pset.db, &buf, pattern, !showSystem && !pattern, false, @@ -3838,11 +3837,11 @@ listExtensions(const char *pattern) initPQExpBuffer(&buf); printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, "SELECT e.extname AS \"%s\", " - "e.extversion AS \"%s\", n.nspname AS \"%s\", c.description AS \"%s\"\n" + "e.extversion AS \"%s\", n.nspname AS \"%s\", c.description AS \"%s\"\n" "FROM pg_catalog.pg_extension e " - "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = e.extnamespace " - "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_description c ON c.objoid = e.oid " - "AND c.classoid = 'pg_catalog.pg_extension'::pg_catalog.regclass\n", + "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = e.extnamespace " + "LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_description c ON c.objoid = e.oid " + "AND c.classoid = 'pg_catalog.pg_extension'::pg_catalog.regclass\n", gettext_noop("Name"), gettext_noop("Version"), gettext_noop("Schema"), @@ -3954,7 +3953,7 @@ listOneExtensionContents(const char *extname, const char *oid) initPQExpBuffer(&buf); printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, - "SELECT pg_catalog.pg_describe_object(classid, objid, 0) AS \"%s\"\n" + "SELECT pg_catalog.pg_describe_object(classid, objid, 0) AS \"%s\"\n" "FROM pg_catalog.pg_depend\n" "WHERE refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_extension'::pg_catalog.regclass AND refobjid = '%s' AND deptype = 'e'\n" "ORDER BY 1;", diff --git a/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c b/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c index 994c05373f..3ef2fa421d 100644 --- a/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c +++ b/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c @@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ static const pgsql_thing_t words_after_create[] = { {"INDEX", NULL, &Query_for_list_of_indexes}, {"OPERATOR", NULL, NULL}, /* Querying for this is probably not such a * good idea. */ - {"OWNED", NULL, NULL, THING_NO_CREATE}, /* for DROP OWNED BY ... */ + {"OWNED", NULL, NULL, THING_NO_CREATE}, /* for DROP OWNED BY ... */ {"PARSER", Query_for_list_of_ts_parsers, NULL, THING_NO_SHOW}, {"ROLE", Query_for_list_of_roles}, {"RULE", "SELECT pg_catalog.quote_ident(rulename) FROM pg_catalog.pg_rules WHERE substring(pg_catalog.quote_ident(rulename),1,%d)='%s'"}, @@ -638,17 +638,18 @@ static const pgsql_thing_t words_after_create[] = { {"SERVER", Query_for_list_of_servers}, {"TABLE", NULL, &Query_for_list_of_tables}, {"TABLESPACE", Query_for_list_of_tablespaces}, - {"TEMP", NULL, NULL, THING_NO_DROP}, /* for CREATE TEMP TABLE ... */ + {"TEMP", NULL, NULL, THING_NO_DROP}, /* for CREATE TEMP TABLE ... */ {"TEMPLATE", Query_for_list_of_ts_templates, NULL, THING_NO_SHOW}, {"TEXT SEARCH", NULL, NULL}, {"TRIGGER", "SELECT pg_catalog.quote_ident(tgname) FROM pg_catalog.pg_trigger WHERE substring(pg_catalog.quote_ident(tgname),1,%d)='%s'"}, {"TYPE", NULL, &Query_for_list_of_datatypes}, - {"UNIQUE", NULL, NULL, THING_NO_DROP}, /* for CREATE UNIQUE INDEX ... */ - {"UNLOGGED", NULL, NULL, THING_NO_DROP},/* for CREATE UNLOGGED TABLE ... */ + {"UNIQUE", NULL, NULL, THING_NO_DROP}, /* for CREATE UNIQUE INDEX ... */ + {"UNLOGGED", NULL, NULL, THING_NO_DROP}, /* for CREATE UNLOGGED TABLE + * ... */ {"USER", Query_for_list_of_roles}, {"USER MAPPING FOR", NULL, NULL}, {"VIEW", NULL, &Query_for_list_of_views}, - {NULL} /* end of list */ + {NULL} /* end of list */ }; @@ -663,7 +664,7 @@ static char *_complete_from_query(int is_schema_query, static char *complete_from_list(const char *text, int state); static char *complete_from_const(const char *text, int state); static char **complete_from_variables(char *text, - const char *prefix, const char *suffix); + const char *prefix, const char *suffix); static PGresult *exec_query(const char *query); @@ -806,11 +807,11 @@ psql_completion(char *text, int start, int end) { static const char *const list_ALTER[] = {"AGGREGATE", "COLLATION", "CONVERSION", "DATABASE", "DEFAULT PRIVILEGES", "DOMAIN", - "EXTENSION", "FOREIGN DATA WRAPPER", "FOREIGN TABLE", "FUNCTION", - "GROUP", "INDEX", "LANGUAGE", "LARGE OBJECT", "OPERATOR", - "ROLE", "SCHEMA", "SERVER", "SEQUENCE", "TABLE", - "TABLESPACE", "TEXT SEARCH", "TRIGGER", "TYPE", - "USER", "USER MAPPING FOR", "VIEW", NULL}; + "EXTENSION", "FOREIGN DATA WRAPPER", "FOREIGN TABLE", "FUNCTION", + "GROUP", "INDEX", "LANGUAGE", "LARGE OBJECT", "OPERATOR", + "ROLE", "SCHEMA", "SERVER", "SEQUENCE", "TABLE", + "TABLESPACE", "TEXT SEARCH", "TRIGGER", "TYPE", + "USER", "USER MAPPING FOR", "VIEW", NULL}; COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(list_ALTER); } @@ -1137,7 +1138,7 @@ psql_completion(char *text, int start, int end) { static const char *const list_ALTER2[] = {"ADD", "ALTER", "CLUSTER ON", "DISABLE", "DROP", "ENABLE", "INHERIT", - "NO INHERIT", "RENAME", "RESET", "OWNER TO", "SET", + "NO INHERIT", "RENAME", "RESET", "OWNER TO", "SET", "VALIDATE CONSTRAINT", NULL}; COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(list_ALTER2); @@ -1423,7 +1424,7 @@ psql_completion(char *text, int start, int end) { static const char *const list_ALTERTYPE[] = {"ADD ATTRIBUTE", "ADD VALUE", "ALTER ATTRIBUTE", "DROP ATTRIBUTE", - "OWNER TO", "RENAME", "SET SCHEMA", NULL}; + "OWNER TO", "RENAME", "SET SCHEMA", NULL}; COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(list_ALTERTYPE); } @@ -1437,7 +1438,7 @@ psql_completion(char *text, int start, int end) COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(list_ALTERTYPE); } - /* ALTER TYPE <foo> RENAME */ + /* ALTER TYPE <foo> RENAME */ else if (pg_strcasecmp(prev4_wd, "ALTER") == 0 && pg_strcasecmp(prev3_wd, "TYPE") == 0 && pg_strcasecmp(prev_wd, "RENAME") == 0) @@ -1453,7 +1454,10 @@ psql_completion(char *text, int start, int end) pg_strcasecmp(prev2_wd, "ATTRIBUTE") == 0) COMPLETE_WITH_CONST("TO"); - /* If we have TYPE <sth> ALTER/DROP/RENAME ATTRIBUTE, provide list of attributes */ + /* + * If we have TYPE <sth> ALTER/DROP/RENAME ATTRIBUTE, provide list of + * attributes + */ else if (pg_strcasecmp(prev4_wd, "TYPE") == 0 && (pg_strcasecmp(prev2_wd, "ALTER") == 0 || pg_strcasecmp(prev2_wd, "DROP") == 0 || @@ -2193,7 +2197,7 @@ psql_completion(char *text, int start, int end) else if (pg_strcasecmp(prev3_wd, "CREATE") != 0 && pg_strcasecmp(prev2_wd, "FOREIGN") == 0 && pg_strcasecmp(prev_wd, "TABLE") == 0) - COMPLETE_WITH_SCHEMA_QUERY(Query_for_list_of_foreign_tables, NULL); + COMPLETE_WITH_SCHEMA_QUERY(Query_for_list_of_foreign_tables, NULL); /* GRANT && REVOKE */ /* Complete GRANT/REVOKE with a list of privileges */ @@ -2454,7 +2458,8 @@ psql_completion(char *text, int start, int end) pg_strcasecmp(prev_wd, "LABEL") == 0) { static const char *const list_SECURITY_LABEL_preposition[] = - {"ON", "FOR"}; + {"ON", "FOR"}; + COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(list_SECURITY_LABEL_preposition); } else if (pg_strcasecmp(prev4_wd, "SECURITY") == 0 && @@ -2464,14 +2469,14 @@ psql_completion(char *text, int start, int end) else if ((pg_strcasecmp(prev3_wd, "SECURITY") == 0 && pg_strcasecmp(prev2_wd, "LABEL") == 0 && pg_strcasecmp(prev_wd, "ON") == 0) || - (pg_strcasecmp(prev5_wd, "SECURITY") == 0 && + (pg_strcasecmp(prev5_wd, "SECURITY") == 0 && pg_strcasecmp(prev4_wd, "LABEL") == 0 && pg_strcasecmp(prev3_wd, "FOR") == 0 && pg_strcasecmp(prev_wd, "ON") == 0)) { static const char *const list_SECURITY_LABEL[] = {"LANGUAGE", "SCHEMA", "SEQUENCE", "TABLE", "TYPE", "VIEW", "COLUMN", - "AGGREGATE", "FUNCTION", "DOMAIN", "LARGE OBJECT", + "AGGREGATE", "FUNCTION", "DOMAIN", "LARGE OBJECT", NULL}; COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(list_SECURITY_LABEL); @@ -2847,15 +2852,15 @@ psql_completion(char *text, int start, int end) if (strcmp(prev_wd, "format") == 0) { static const char *const my_list[] = - {"unaligned", "aligned", "wrapped", "html", "latex", - "troff-ms", NULL}; + {"unaligned", "aligned", "wrapped", "html", "latex", + "troff-ms", NULL}; COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(my_list); } else if (strcmp(prev_wd, "linestyle") == 0) { static const char *const my_list[] = - {"ascii", "old-ascii", "unicode", NULL}; + {"ascii", "old-ascii", "unicode", NULL}; COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(my_list); } @@ -3305,13 +3310,13 @@ complete_from_variables(char *text, const char *prefix, const char *suffix) for (ptr = pset.vars->next; ptr; ptr = ptr->next) { - char *buffer; + char *buffer; if (nvars >= maxvars) { maxvars *= 2; varnames = (const char **) realloc(varnames, - (maxvars + 1) * sizeof(char *)); + (maxvars + 1) * sizeof(char *)); if (!varnames) { psql_error("out of memory\n"); diff --git a/src/bin/scripts/droplang.c b/src/bin/scripts/droplang.c index 83c1b531c7..7fadee0d51 100644 --- a/src/bin/scripts/droplang.c +++ b/src/bin/scripts/droplang.c @@ -195,8 +195,8 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) PQclear(result); /* - * Attempt to drop the language. We do not use CASCADE, so that - * the drop will fail if there are any functions in the language. + * Attempt to drop the language. We do not use CASCADE, so that the drop + * will fail if there are any functions in the language. */ printfPQExpBuffer(&sql, "DROP EXTENSION \"%s\";\n", langname); diff --git a/src/include/access/gin.h b/src/include/access/gin.h index cf9603c7c4..31e9733546 100644 --- a/src/include/access/gin.h +++ b/src/include/access/gin.h @@ -39,9 +39,9 @@ typedef struct GinStatsData { BlockNumber nPendingPages; - BlockNumber nTotalPages; - BlockNumber nEntryPages; - BlockNumber nDataPages; + BlockNumber nTotalPages; + BlockNumber nEntryPages; + BlockNumber nDataPages; int64 nEntries; int32 ginVersion; } GinStatsData; diff --git a/src/include/access/gin_private.h b/src/include/access/gin_private.h index 6381bffb21..74c1098458 100644 --- a/src/include/access/gin_private.h +++ b/src/include/access/gin_private.h @@ -73,14 +73,14 @@ typedef struct GinMetaPageData /* * Statistics for planner use (accurate as of last VACUUM) */ - BlockNumber nTotalPages; - BlockNumber nEntryPages; - BlockNumber nDataPages; + BlockNumber nTotalPages; + BlockNumber nEntryPages; + BlockNumber nDataPages; int64 nEntries; /* - * GIN version number (ideally this should have been at the front, but - * too late now. Don't move it!) + * GIN version number (ideally this should have been at the front, but too + * late now. Don't move it!) * * Currently 1 (for indexes initialized in 9.1 or later) * @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ typedef signed char GinNullCategory; #define GinGetPostingTree(itup) GinItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(itup)->t_tid) #define GinGetPostingOffset(itup) GinItemPointerGetBlockNumber(&(itup)->t_tid) -#define GinSetPostingOffset(itup,n) ItemPointerSetBlockNumber(&(itup)->t_tid,n) +#define GinSetPostingOffset(itup,n) ItemPointerSetBlockNumber(&(itup)->t_tid,n) #define GinGetPosting(itup) ((ItemPointer) ((char*)(itup) + GinGetPostingOffset(itup))) #define GinMaxItemSize \ @@ -427,12 +427,12 @@ extern Buffer GinNewBuffer(Relation index); extern void GinInitBuffer(Buffer b, uint32 f); extern void GinInitPage(Page page, uint32 f, Size pageSize); extern void GinInitMetabuffer(Buffer b); -extern int ginCompareEntries(GinState *ginstate, OffsetNumber attnum, - Datum a, GinNullCategory categorya, - Datum b, GinNullCategory categoryb); -extern int ginCompareAttEntries(GinState *ginstate, +extern int ginCompareEntries(GinState *ginstate, OffsetNumber attnum, + Datum a, GinNullCategory categorya, + Datum b, GinNullCategory categoryb); +extern int ginCompareAttEntries(GinState *ginstate, OffsetNumber attnuma, Datum a, GinNullCategory categorya, - OffsetNumber attnumb, Datum b, GinNullCategory categoryb); + OffsetNumber attnumb, Datum b, GinNullCategory categoryb); extern Datum *ginExtractEntries(GinState *ginstate, OffsetNumber attnum, Datum value, bool isNull, int32 *nentries, GinNullCategory **categories); @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ extern GinBtreeStack *ginPrepareFindLeafPage(GinBtree btree, BlockNumber blkno); extern GinBtreeStack *ginFindLeafPage(GinBtree btree, GinBtreeStack *stack); extern void freeGinBtreeStack(GinBtreeStack *stack); extern void ginInsertValue(GinBtree btree, GinBtreeStack *stack, - GinStatsData *buildStats); + GinStatsData *buildStats); extern void ginFindParents(GinBtree btree, GinBtreeStack *stack, BlockNumber rootBlkno); /* ginentrypage.c */ @@ -525,8 +525,8 @@ extern IndexTuple ginPageGetLinkItup(Buffer buf); /* gindatapage.c */ extern int ginCompareItemPointers(ItemPointer a, ItemPointer b); extern uint32 ginMergeItemPointers(ItemPointerData *dst, - ItemPointerData *a, uint32 na, - ItemPointerData *b, uint32 nb); + ItemPointerData *a, uint32 na, + ItemPointerData *b, uint32 nb); extern void GinDataPageAddItem(Page page, void *data, OffsetNumber offset); extern void GinPageDeletePostingItem(Page page, OffsetNumber offset); @@ -538,10 +538,10 @@ typedef struct } GinPostingTreeScan; extern GinPostingTreeScan *ginPrepareScanPostingTree(Relation index, - BlockNumber rootBlkno, bool searchMode); + BlockNumber rootBlkno, bool searchMode); extern void ginInsertItemPointers(GinPostingTreeScan *gdi, - ItemPointerData *items, uint32 nitem, - GinStatsData *buildStats); + ItemPointerData *items, uint32 nitem, + GinStatsData *buildStats); extern Buffer ginScanBeginPostingTree(GinPostingTreeScan *gdi); extern void ginDataFillRoot(GinBtree btree, Buffer root, Buffer lbuf, Buffer rbuf); extern void ginPrepareDataScan(GinBtree btree, Relation index); @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ extern void ginPrepareDataScan(GinBtree btree, Relation index); * * In each GinScanKeyData, nentries is the true number of entries, while * nuserentries is the number that extractQueryFn returned (which is what - * we report to consistentFn). The "user" entries must come first. + * we report to consistentFn). The "user" entries must come first. */ typedef struct GinScanKeyData *GinScanKey; @@ -591,17 +591,17 @@ typedef struct GinScanKeyData OffsetNumber attnum; /* - * Match status data. curItem is the TID most recently tested (could be - * a lossy-page pointer). curItemMatches is TRUE if it passes the + * Match status data. curItem is the TID most recently tested (could be a + * lossy-page pointer). curItemMatches is TRUE if it passes the * consistentFn test; if so, recheckCurItem is the recheck flag. - * isFinished means that all the input entry streams are finished, so - * this key cannot succeed for any later TIDs. + * isFinished means that all the input entry streams are finished, so this + * key cannot succeed for any later TIDs. */ ItemPointerData curItem; bool curItemMatches; bool recheckCurItem; bool isFinished; -} GinScanKeyData; +} GinScanKeyData; typedef struct GinScanEntryData { @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ typedef struct GinScanEntryData bool isFinished; bool reduceResult; uint32 predictNumberResult; -} GinScanEntryData; +} GinScanEntryData; typedef struct GinScanOpaqueData { diff --git a/src/include/access/gist.h b/src/include/access/gist.h index 230e138f08..df9f39c7b8 100644 --- a/src/include/access/gist.h +++ b/src/include/access/gist.h @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ #define RTOverAboveStrategyNumber 12 #define RTOldContainsStrategyNumber 13 /* for old spelling of @> */ #define RTOldContainedByStrategyNumber 14 /* for old spelling of <@ */ -#define RTKNNSearchStrategyNumber 15 +#define RTKNNSearchStrategyNumber 15 /* * Page opaque data in a GiST index page. diff --git a/src/include/access/gist_private.h b/src/include/access/gist_private.h index 70638705c2..ecc188f7df 100644 --- a/src/include/access/gist_private.h +++ b/src/include/access/gist_private.h @@ -79,13 +79,13 @@ typedef struct GISTSearchItem BlockNumber blkno; /* index page number, or InvalidBlockNumber */ union { - GistNSN parentlsn; /* parent page's LSN, if index page */ + GistNSN parentlsn; /* parent page's LSN, if index page */ /* we must store parentlsn to detect whether a split occurred */ GISTSearchHeapItem heap; /* heap info, if heap tuple */ } data; -} GISTSearchItem; +} GISTSearchItem; -#define GISTSearchItemIsHeap(item) ((item).blkno == InvalidBlockNumber) +#define GISTSearchItemIsHeap(item) ((item).blkno == InvalidBlockNumber) /* * Within a GISTSearchTreeItem's chain, heap items always appear before @@ -132,9 +132,9 @@ typedef GISTScanOpaqueData *GISTScanOpaque; /* XLog stuff */ #define XLOG_GIST_PAGE_UPDATE 0x00 -/* #define XLOG_GIST_NEW_ROOT 0x20 */ /* not used anymore */ + /* #define XLOG_GIST_NEW_ROOT 0x20 */ /* not used anymore */ #define XLOG_GIST_PAGE_SPLIT 0x30 -/* #define XLOG_GIST_INSERT_COMPLETE 0x40 */ /* not used anymore */ + /* #define XLOG_GIST_INSERT_COMPLETE 0x40 */ /* not used anymore */ #define XLOG_GIST_CREATE_INDEX 0x50 #define XLOG_GIST_PAGE_DELETE 0x60 @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ typedef struct gistxlogPageUpdate * If this operation completes a page split, by inserting a downlink for * the split page, leftchild points to the left half of the split. */ - BlockNumber leftchild; + BlockNumber leftchild; /* number of deleted offsets */ uint16 ntodelete; @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ typedef struct gistxlogPageSplit { RelFileNode node; BlockNumber origblkno; /* splitted page */ - BlockNumber origrlink; /* rightlink of the page before split */ + BlockNumber origrlink; /* rightlink of the page before split */ GistNSN orignsn; /* NSN of the page before split */ bool origleaf; /* was splitted page a leaf page? */ @@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ typedef struct GISTInsertStack Page page; /* - * log sequence number from page->lsn to recognize page update and - * compare it with page's nsn to recognize page split + * log sequence number from page->lsn to recognize page update and compare + * it with page's nsn to recognize page split */ GistNSN lsn; @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ extern void gist_xlog_cleanup(void); extern XLogRecPtr gistXLogUpdate(RelFileNode node, Buffer buffer, OffsetNumber *todelete, int ntodelete, - IndexTuple *itup, int ntup, + IndexTuple *itup, int ntup, Buffer leftchild); extern XLogRecPtr gistXLogSplit(RelFileNode node, diff --git a/src/include/access/hio.h b/src/include/access/hio.h index 6951dfb010..6b661a3e87 100644 --- a/src/include/access/hio.h +++ b/src/include/access/hio.h @@ -31,13 +31,13 @@ typedef struct BulkInsertStateData { BufferAccessStrategy strategy; /* our BULKWRITE strategy object */ Buffer current_buf; /* current insertion target page */ -} BulkInsertStateData; +} BulkInsertStateData; extern void RelationPutHeapTuple(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, HeapTuple tuple); extern Buffer RelationGetBufferForTuple(Relation relation, Size len, Buffer otherBuffer, int options, - struct BulkInsertStateData *bistate); + struct BulkInsertStateData * bistate); #endif /* HIO_H */ diff --git a/src/include/access/htup.h b/src/include/access/htup.h index 0e626e8469..c147707169 100644 --- a/src/include/access/htup.h +++ b/src/include/access/htup.h @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ typedef HeapTupleHeaderData *HeapTupleHeader; * any visibility information, so we can overlay it on a visibility flag * instead of using up a dedicated bit. */ -#define HEAP_TUPLE_HAS_MATCH HEAP_ONLY_TUPLE /* tuple has a join match */ +#define HEAP_TUPLE_HAS_MATCH HEAP_ONLY_TUPLE /* tuple has a join match */ /* * HeapTupleHeader accessor macros diff --git a/src/include/access/itup.h b/src/include/access/itup.h index cab7193964..29247068fd 100644 --- a/src/include/access/itup.h +++ b/src/include/access/itup.h @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ typedef IndexTupleData *IndexTuple; typedef struct IndexAttributeBitMapData { bits8 bits[(INDEX_MAX_KEYS + 8 - 1) / 8]; -} IndexAttributeBitMapData; +} IndexAttributeBitMapData; typedef IndexAttributeBitMapData *IndexAttributeBitMap; diff --git a/src/include/access/relscan.h b/src/include/access/relscan.h index f703280b27..7663033723 100644 --- a/src/include/access/relscan.h +++ b/src/include/access/relscan.h @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ typedef struct HeapScanDescData int rs_mindex; /* marked tuple's saved index */ int rs_ntuples; /* number of visible tuples on page */ OffsetNumber rs_vistuples[MaxHeapTuplesPerPage]; /* their offsets */ -} HeapScanDescData; +} HeapScanDescData; /* * We use the same IndexScanDescData structure for both amgettuple-based @@ -64,9 +64,9 @@ typedef struct IndexScanDescData Relation indexRelation; /* index relation descriptor */ Snapshot xs_snapshot; /* snapshot to see */ int numberOfKeys; /* number of index qualifier conditions */ - int numberOfOrderBys; /* number of ordering operators */ - ScanKey keyData; /* array of index qualifier descriptors */ - ScanKey orderByData; /* array of ordering op descriptors */ + int numberOfOrderBys; /* number of ordering operators */ + ScanKey keyData; /* array of index qualifier descriptors */ + ScanKey orderByData; /* array of ordering op descriptors */ /* signaling to index AM about killing index tuples */ bool kill_prior_tuple; /* last-returned tuple is dead */ @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ typedef struct IndexScanDescData bool xs_hot_dead; /* T if all members of HOT chain are dead */ OffsetNumber xs_next_hot; /* next member of HOT chain, if any */ TransactionId xs_prev_xmax; /* previous HOT chain member's XMAX, if any */ -} IndexScanDescData; +} IndexScanDescData; /* Struct for heap-or-index scans of system tables */ typedef struct SysScanDescData @@ -96,6 +96,6 @@ typedef struct SysScanDescData Relation irel; /* NULL if doing heap scan */ HeapScanDesc scan; /* only valid in heap-scan case */ IndexScanDesc iscan; /* only valid in index-scan case */ -} SysScanDescData; +} SysScanDescData; #endif /* RELSCAN_H */ diff --git a/src/include/access/tupdesc.h b/src/include/access/tupdesc.h index fb8ee0ad4f..99448efe12 100644 --- a/src/include/access/tupdesc.h +++ b/src/include/access/tupdesc.h @@ -115,8 +115,8 @@ extern void TupleDescInitEntry(TupleDesc desc, int attdim); extern void TupleDescInitEntryCollation(TupleDesc desc, - AttrNumber attributeNumber, - Oid collationid); + AttrNumber attributeNumber, + Oid collationid); extern TupleDesc BuildDescForRelation(List *schema); diff --git a/src/include/access/xact.h b/src/include/access/xact.h index 8b60e8f163..cb440d41f1 100644 --- a/src/include/access/xact.h +++ b/src/include/access/xact.h @@ -54,13 +54,13 @@ extern bool XactDeferrable; typedef enum { - SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_OFF, /* asynchronous commit */ - SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_LOCAL_FLUSH, /* wait for local flush only */ - SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_REMOTE_FLUSH /* wait for local and remote flush */ -} SyncCommitLevel; + SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_OFF, /* asynchronous commit */ + SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_LOCAL_FLUSH, /* wait for local flush only */ + SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_REMOTE_FLUSH /* wait for local and remote flush */ +} SyncCommitLevel; /* Define the default setting for synchonous_commit */ -#define SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_ON SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_REMOTE_FLUSH +#define SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_ON SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT_REMOTE_FLUSH /* Synchronous commit level */ extern int synchronous_commit; diff --git a/src/include/access/xlog.h b/src/include/access/xlog.h index 7e9bad6e3a..7056fd6189 100644 --- a/src/include/access/xlog.h +++ b/src/include/access/xlog.h @@ -259,12 +259,12 @@ typedef struct CheckpointStatsData int ckpt_segs_removed; /* # of xlog segments deleted */ int ckpt_segs_recycled; /* # of xlog segments recycled */ - int ckpt_sync_rels; /* # of relations synced */ - uint64 ckpt_longest_sync; /* Longest sync for one relation */ - uint64 ckpt_agg_sync_time; /* The sum of all the individual sync - * times, which is not necessarily the - * same as the total elapsed time for - * the entire sync phase. */ + int ckpt_sync_rels; /* # of relations synced */ + uint64 ckpt_longest_sync; /* Longest sync for one relation */ + uint64 ckpt_agg_sync_time; /* The sum of all the individual sync + * times, which is not necessarily the + * same as the total elapsed time for + * the entire sync phase. */ } CheckpointStatsData; extern CheckpointStatsData CheckpointStats; diff --git a/src/include/access/xlogdefs.h b/src/include/access/xlogdefs.h index 2982a4799c..6530df06ac 100644 --- a/src/include/access/xlogdefs.h +++ b/src/include/access/xlogdefs.h @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ typedef uint32 TimeLineID; * read those buffers except during crash recovery or if wal_level != minimal, * it is a win to use it in all cases where we sync on each write(). We could * allow O_DIRECT with fsync(), but it is unclear if fsync() could process - * writes not buffered in the kernel. Also, O_DIRECT is never enough to force + * writes not buffered in the kernel. Also, O_DIRECT is never enough to force * data to the drives, it merely tries to bypass the kernel cache, so we still * need O_SYNC/O_DSYNC. */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/catalog.h b/src/include/catalog/catalog.h index bb3aa781f2..e4f1535db3 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/catalog.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/catalog.h @@ -25,10 +25,10 @@ extern const char *forkNames[]; extern ForkNumber forkname_to_number(char *forkName); -extern int forkname_chars(const char *str, ForkNumber *); +extern int forkname_chars(const char *str, ForkNumber *); extern char *relpathbackend(RelFileNode rnode, BackendId backend, - ForkNumber forknum); + ForkNumber forknum); extern char *GetDatabasePath(Oid dbNode, Oid spcNode); /* First argument is a RelFileNodeBackend */ @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ extern bool IsSharedRelation(Oid relationId); extern Oid GetNewOid(Relation relation); extern Oid GetNewOidWithIndex(Relation relation, Oid indexId, AttrNumber oidcolumn); -extern Oid GetNewRelFileNode(Oid reltablespace, Relation pg_class, +extern Oid GetNewRelFileNode(Oid reltablespace, Relation pg_class, char relpersistence); #endif /* CATALOG_H */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/dependency.h b/src/include/catalog/dependency.h index 582294c6b3..a3bd729156 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/dependency.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/dependency.h @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ typedef enum ObjectClass OCLASS_FOREIGN_SERVER, /* pg_foreign_server */ OCLASS_USER_MAPPING, /* pg_user_mapping */ OCLASS_DEFACL, /* pg_default_acl */ - OCLASS_EXTENSION, /* pg_extension */ + OCLASS_EXTENSION, /* pg_extension */ MAX_OCLASS /* MUST BE LAST */ } ObjectClass; @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ extern void recordMultipleDependencies(const ObjectAddress *depender, extern void recordDependencyOnCurrentExtension(const ObjectAddress *object); extern long deleteDependencyRecordsFor(Oid classId, Oid objectId, - bool skipExtensionDeps); + bool skipExtensionDeps); extern long deleteDependencyRecordsForClass(Oid classId, Oid objectId, Oid refclassId, char deptype); diff --git a/src/include/catalog/namespace.h b/src/include/catalog/namespace.h index e72d82eb16..f59beee80d 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/namespace.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/namespace.h @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ extern Oid get_namespace_oid(const char *nspname, bool missing_ok); extern Oid LookupCreationNamespace(const char *nspname); extern void CheckSetNamespace(Oid oldNspOid, Oid nspOid, Oid classid, - Oid objid); + Oid objid); extern Oid QualifiedNameGetCreationNamespace(List *names, char **objname_p); extern RangeVar *makeRangeVarFromNameList(List *names); extern char *NameListToString(List *names); diff --git a/src/include/catalog/objectaccess.h b/src/include/catalog/objectaccess.h index f1eace251a..29254758e7 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/objectaccess.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/objectaccess.h @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ /* * Object access hooks are intended to be called just before or just after - * performing certain actions on a SQL object. This is intended as + * performing certain actions on a SQL object. This is intended as * infrastructure for security or logging pluggins. * * OAT_POST_CREATE should be invoked just after the the object is created. @@ -30,10 +30,10 @@ typedef enum ObjectAccessType * Hook, and a macro to invoke it. */ -typedef void (*object_access_hook_type)(ObjectAccessType access, - Oid classId, - Oid objectId, - int subId); +typedef void (*object_access_hook_type) (ObjectAccessType access, + Oid classId, + Oid objectId, + int subId); extern PGDLLIMPORT object_access_hook_type object_access_hook; @@ -43,4 +43,4 @@ extern PGDLLIMPORT object_access_hook_type object_access_hook; (*object_access_hook)((access),(classId),(objectId),(subId)); \ } while(0) -#endif /* OBJECTACCESS_H */ +#endif /* OBJECTACCESS_H */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_am.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_am.h index 566d4fac5d..feab4201de 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_am.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_am.h @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ CATALOG(pg_am,2601) int2 amsupport; /* total number of support functions that this * AM uses */ bool amcanorder; /* does AM support order by column value? */ - bool amcanorderbyop; /* does AM support order by operator result? */ + bool amcanorderbyop; /* does AM support order by operator result? */ bool amcanbackward; /* does AM support backward scan? */ bool amcanunique; /* does AM support UNIQUE indexes? */ bool amcanmulticol; /* does AM support multi-column indexes? */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_amop.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_amop.h index aabb900ddc..3b88c41599 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_amop.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_amop.h @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ CATALOG(pg_amop,2602) char amoppurpose; /* is operator for 's'earch or 'o'rdering? */ Oid amopopr; /* the operator's pg_operator OID */ Oid amopmethod; /* the index access method this entry is for */ - Oid amopsortfamily; /* ordering opfamily OID, or 0 if search op */ + Oid amopsortfamily; /* ordering opfamily OID, or 0 if search op */ } FormData_pg_amop; /* allowed values of amoppurpose: */ @@ -581,15 +581,15 @@ DATA(insert ( 627 2277 2277 1 s 1070 405 0 )); * gist box_ops */ -DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 1 s 493 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 2 s 494 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 3 s 500 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 4 s 495 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 5 s 496 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 6 s 499 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 7 s 498 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 8 s 497 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 9 s 2571 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 1 s 493 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 2 s 494 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 3 s 500 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 4 s 495 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 5 s 496 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 6 s 499 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 7 s 498 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 8 s 497 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 9 s 2571 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 10 s 2570 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 11 s 2573 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 12 s 2572 783 0 )); @@ -600,10 +600,10 @@ DATA(insert ( 2593 603 603 14 s 2862 783 0 )); * gist point_ops */ DATA(insert ( 1029 600 600 11 s 506 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 1029 600 600 1 s 507 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 1029 600 600 5 s 508 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 1029 600 600 1 s 507 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 1029 600 600 5 s 508 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 1029 600 600 10 s 509 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 1029 600 600 6 s 510 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 1029 600 600 6 s 510 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 1029 600 600 15 o 517 783 1970 )); DATA(insert ( 1029 603 600 27 s 433 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 1029 600 603 28 s 511 783 0 )); @@ -617,15 +617,15 @@ DATA(insert ( 1029 600 718 68 s 758 783 0 )); * gist poly_ops (supports polygons) */ -DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 1 s 485 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 2 s 486 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 3 s 492 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 4 s 487 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 5 s 488 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 6 s 491 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 7 s 490 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 8 s 489 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 9 s 2575 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 1 s 485 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 2 s 486 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 3 s 492 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 4 s 487 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 5 s 488 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 6 s 491 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 7 s 490 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 8 s 489 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 9 s 2575 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 10 s 2574 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 11 s 2577 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 12 s 2576 783 0 )); @@ -636,15 +636,15 @@ DATA(insert ( 2594 604 604 14 s 2860 783 0 )); * gist circle_ops */ -DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 1 s 1506 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 2 s 1507 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 3 s 1513 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 4 s 1508 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 5 s 1509 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 6 s 1512 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 7 s 1511 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 8 s 1510 783 0 )); -DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 9 s 2589 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 1 s 1506 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 2 s 1507 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 3 s 1513 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 4 s 1508 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 5 s 1509 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 6 s 1512 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 7 s 1511 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 8 s 1510 783 0 )); +DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 9 s 2589 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 10 s 1515 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 11 s 1514 783 0 )); DATA(insert ( 2595 718 718 12 s 2590 783 0 )); diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_authid.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_authid.h index 0c5ae443a0..c48d96bcac 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_authid.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_authid.h @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ CATALOG(pg_authid,1260) BKI_SHARED_RELATION BKI_ROWTYPE_OID(2842) BKI_SCHEMA_MAC bool rolcreatedb; /* allowed to create databases? */ bool rolcatupdate; /* allowed to alter catalogs manually? */ bool rolcanlogin; /* allowed to log in as session user? */ - bool rolreplication; /* role used for streaming replication */ + bool rolreplication; /* role used for streaming replication */ int4 rolconnlimit; /* max connections allowed (-1=no limit) */ /* remaining fields may be null; use heap_getattr to read them! */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_class.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_class.h index e103530a3f..ffcce3c87c 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_class.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_class.h @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ CATALOG(pg_class,1259) BKI_BOOTSTRAP BKI_ROWTYPE_OID(83) BKI_SCHEMA_MACRO Oid reltoastidxid; /* if toast table, OID of chunk_id index */ bool relhasindex; /* T if has (or has had) any indexes */ bool relisshared; /* T if shared across databases */ - char relpersistence; /* see RELPERSISTENCE_xxx constants below */ + char relpersistence; /* see RELPERSISTENCE_xxx constants below */ char relkind; /* see RELKIND_xxx constants below */ int2 relnatts; /* number of user attributes */ @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ DESCR(""); #define RELKIND_TOASTVALUE 't' /* for out-of-line values */ #define RELKIND_VIEW 'v' /* view */ #define RELKIND_COMPOSITE_TYPE 'c' /* composite type */ -#define RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE 'f' /* foreign table */ +#define RELKIND_FOREIGN_TABLE 'f' /* foreign table */ #define RELKIND_UNCATALOGED 'u' /* not yet cataloged */ #define RELPERSISTENCE_PERMANENT 'p' /* regular table */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_collation.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_collation.h index 2ab0c504f6..7d6a544a7d 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_collation.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_collation.h @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ typedef FormData_pg_collation *Form_pg_collation; */ #define Natts_pg_collation 6 #define Anum_pg_collation_collname 1 -#define Anum_pg_collation_collnamespace 2 +#define Anum_pg_collation_collnamespace 2 #define Anum_pg_collation_collowner 3 #define Anum_pg_collation_collencoding 4 #define Anum_pg_collation_collcollate 5 diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_collation_fn.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_collation_fn.h index 63a9cf2d63..df36ee40cb 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_collation_fn.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_collation_fn.h @@ -15,9 +15,9 @@ #define PG_COLLATION_FN_H extern Oid CollationCreate(const char *collname, Oid collnamespace, - Oid collowner, - int32 collencoding, - const char *collcollate, const char *collctype); + Oid collowner, + int32 collencoding, + const char *collcollate, const char *collctype); extern void RemoveCollationById(Oid collationOid); #endif /* PG_COLLATION_FN_H */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_constraint.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_constraint.h index a7967ab5c6..1566af2973 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_constraint.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_constraint.h @@ -244,8 +244,8 @@ extern void AlterConstraintNamespaces(Oid ownerId, Oid oldNspId, extern Oid get_constraint_oid(Oid relid, const char *conname, bool missing_ok); extern bool check_functional_grouping(Oid relid, - Index varno, Index varlevelsup, - List *grouping_columns, - List **constraintDeps); + Index varno, Index varlevelsup, + List *grouping_columns, + List **constraintDeps); #endif /* PG_CONSTRAINT_H */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_control.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_control.h index fb458acf83..d543ef6e24 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_control.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_control.h @@ -45,8 +45,8 @@ typedef struct CheckPoint /* * Oldest XID still running. This is only needed to initialize hot standby * mode from an online checkpoint, so we only bother calculating this for - * online checkpoints and only when wal_level is hot_standby. Otherwise it's - * set to InvalidTransactionId. + * online checkpoints and only when wal_level is hot_standby. Otherwise + * it's set to InvalidTransactionId. */ TransactionId oldestActiveXid; } CheckPoint; @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ typedef struct CheckPoint #define XLOG_SWITCH 0x40 #define XLOG_BACKUP_END 0x50 #define XLOG_PARAMETER_CHANGE 0x60 -#define XLOG_RESTORE_POINT 0x70 +#define XLOG_RESTORE_POINT 0x70 /* diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_enum.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_enum.h index a0fca30019..b95e94ad1b 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_enum.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_enum.h @@ -65,6 +65,6 @@ typedef FormData_pg_enum *Form_pg_enum; extern void EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals); extern void EnumValuesDelete(Oid enumTypeOid); extern void AddEnumLabel(Oid enumTypeOid, const char *newVal, - const char *neighbor, bool newValIsAfter); + const char *neighbor, bool newValIsAfter); #endif /* PG_ENUM_H */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_extension.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_extension.h index 63a1a0711f..064b9991f0 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_extension.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_extension.h @@ -26,22 +26,22 @@ * typedef struct FormData_pg_extension * ---------------- */ -#define ExtensionRelationId 3079 +#define ExtensionRelationId 3079 CATALOG(pg_extension,3079) { NameData extname; /* extension name */ Oid extowner; /* extension owner */ Oid extnamespace; /* namespace of contained objects */ - bool extrelocatable; /* if true, allow ALTER EXTENSION SET SCHEMA */ + bool extrelocatable; /* if true, allow ALTER EXTENSION SET SCHEMA */ /* * VARIABLE LENGTH FIELDS start here. * * extversion should never be null, but the others can be. */ - text extversion; /* extension version name */ - Oid extconfig[1]; /* dumpable configuration tables */ + text extversion; /* extension version name */ + Oid extconfig[1]; /* dumpable configuration tables */ text extcondition[1]; /* WHERE clauses for config tables */ } FormData_pg_extension; diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_index.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_index.h index d8142e12bc..9f446a5547 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_index.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_index.h @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ CATALOG(pg_index,2610) BKI_WITHOUT_OIDS BKI_SCHEMA_MACRO int2 indnatts; /* number of columns in index */ bool indisunique; /* is this a unique index? */ bool indisprimary; /* is this index for primary key? */ - bool indisexclusion; /* is this index for exclusion constraint? */ + bool indisexclusion; /* is this index for exclusion constraint? */ bool indimmediate; /* is uniqueness enforced immediately? */ bool indisclustered; /* is this the index last clustered by? */ bool indisvalid; /* is this index valid for use by queries? */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_operator.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_operator.h index 05a2b0eb07..c9332777c1 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_operator.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_operator.h @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ DATA(insert OID = 917 ( "*" PGNSP PGUID b f f 23 790 790 912 0 int4_mul_c DESCR("multiply"); DATA(insert OID = 918 ( "*" PGNSP PGUID b f f 21 790 790 914 0 int2_mul_cash - - )); DESCR("multiply"); -DATA(insert OID = 3825 ( "/" PGNSP PGUID b f f 790 790 701 0 0 cash_div_cash - - )); +DATA(insert OID = 3825 ( "/" PGNSP PGUID b f f 790 790 701 0 0 cash_div_cash - - )); DESCR("divide"); DATA(insert OID = 965 ( "^" PGNSP PGUID b f f 701 701 701 0 0 dpow - - )); diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_proc.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_proc.h index 7919a40487..3c183ce7b5 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_proc.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_proc.h @@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ CATALOG(pg_proc,1255) BKI_BOOTSTRAP BKI_ROWTYPE_OID(81) BKI_SCHEMA_MACRO Oid proallargtypes[1]; /* all param types (NULL if IN only) */ char proargmodes[1]; /* parameter modes (NULL if IN only) */ text proargnames[1]; /* parameter names (NULL if no names) */ - pg_node_tree proargdefaults; /* list of expression trees for argument - * defaults (NULL if none) */ + pg_node_tree proargdefaults;/* list of expression trees for argument + * defaults (NULL if none) */ text prosrc; /* procedure source text */ text probin; /* secondary procedure info (can be NULL) */ text proconfig[1]; /* procedure-local GUC settings */ @@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ DATA(insert OID = 332 ( btbulkdelete PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 4 0 22 DESCR("btree(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 972 ( btvacuumcleanup PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 2 0 2281 "2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ btvacuumcleanup _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("btree(internal)"); -DATA(insert OID = 1268 ( btcostestimate PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 9 0 2278 "2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ btcostestimate _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 1268 ( btcostestimate PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 9 0 2278 "2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ btcostestimate _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("btree(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 2785 ( btoptions PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f s 2 0 17 "1009 16" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ btoptions _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("btree(internal)"); @@ -638,13 +638,13 @@ DATA(insert OID = 447 ( hashrestrpos PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 1 0 22 DESCR("hash(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 448 ( hashbuild PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 3 0 2281 "2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ hashbuild _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("hash(internal)"); -DATA(insert OID = 327 ( hashbuildempty PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 1 0 2278 "2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ hashbuildempty _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 327 ( hashbuildempty PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 1 0 2278 "2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ hashbuildempty _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("hash(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 442 ( hashbulkdelete PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 4 0 2281 "2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ hashbulkdelete _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("hash(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 425 ( hashvacuumcleanup PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 2 0 2281 "2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ hashvacuumcleanup _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("hash(internal)"); -DATA(insert OID = 438 ( hashcostestimate PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 9 0 2278 "2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ hashcostestimate _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 438 ( hashcostestimate PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 9 0 2278 "2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ hashcostestimate _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("hash(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 2786 ( hashoptions PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f s 2 0 17 "1009 16" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ hashoptions _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("hash(internal)"); @@ -891,13 +891,13 @@ DATA(insert OID = 781 ( gistrestrpos PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 1 0 22 DESCR("gist(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 782 ( gistbuild PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 3 0 2281 "2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gistbuild _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("gist(internal)"); -DATA(insert OID = 326 ( gistbuildempty PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 1 0 2278 "2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gistbuildempty _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 326 ( gistbuildempty PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 1 0 2278 "2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gistbuildempty _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("gist(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 776 ( gistbulkdelete PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 4 0 2281 "2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gistbulkdelete _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("gist(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 2561 ( gistvacuumcleanup PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 2 0 2281 "2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gistvacuumcleanup _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("gist(internal)"); -DATA(insert OID = 772 ( gistcostestimate PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 9 0 2278 "2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gistcostestimate _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 772 ( gistcostestimate PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 9 0 2278 "2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gistcostestimate _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("gist(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 2787 ( gistoptions PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f s 2 0 17 "1009 16" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gistoptions _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("gist(internal)"); @@ -2250,17 +2250,17 @@ DESCR("I/O"); DATA(insert OID = 1799 ( oidout PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 1 0 2275 "26" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ oidout _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("I/O"); -DATA(insert OID = 3058 ( concat PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 2276 f f f f f s 1 0 25 "2276" "{2276}" "{v}" _null_ _null_ text_concat _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 3058 ( concat PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 2276 f f f f f s 1 0 25 "2276" "{2276}" "{v}" _null_ _null_ text_concat _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("concatenate values"); -DATA(insert OID = 3059 ( concat_ws PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 2276 f f f f f s 2 0 25 "25 2276" "{25,2276}" "{i,v}" _null_ _null_ text_concat_ws _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 3059 ( concat_ws PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 2276 f f f f f s 2 0 25 "25 2276" "{25,2276}" "{i,v}" _null_ _null_ text_concat_ws _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("concatenate values with separators"); DATA(insert OID = 3060 ( left PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 2 0 25 "25 23" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ text_left _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("extract the first n characters"); DATA(insert OID = 3061 ( right PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 2 0 25 "25 23" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ text_right _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("extract the last n characters"); -DATA(insert OID = 3062 ( reverse PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 1 0 25 "25" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ text_reverse _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 3062 ( reverse PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 1 0 25 "25" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ text_reverse _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("reverse text"); -DATA(insert OID = 3539 ( format PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 2276 f f f f f s 2 0 25 "25 2276" "{25,2276}" "{i,v}" _null_ _null_ text_format _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 3539 ( format PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 2276 f f f f f s 2 0 25 "25 2276" "{25,2276}" "{i,v}" _null_ _null_ text_format _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("format text message"); DATA(insert OID = 3540 ( format PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f f f s 1 0 25 "25" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ text_format_nv _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("format text message"); @@ -2602,7 +2602,7 @@ DATA(insert OID = 3069 ( pg_stat_get_db_conflict_startup_deadlock PGNSP PGUID 1 DESCR("statistics: recovery conflicts in database caused by buffer deadlock"); DATA(insert OID = 3070 ( pg_stat_get_db_conflict_all PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f s 1 0 20 "26" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_stat_get_db_conflict_all _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("statistics: recovery conflicts in database"); -DATA(insert OID = 3074 ( pg_stat_get_db_stat_reset_time PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f s 1 0 1184 "26" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_stat_get_db_stat_reset_time _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 3074 ( pg_stat_get_db_stat_reset_time PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f s 1 0 1184 "26" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_stat_get_db_stat_reset_time _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("statistics: last reset for a database"); DATA(insert OID = 2769 ( pg_stat_get_bgwriter_timed_checkpoints PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f s 0 0 20 "" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_stat_get_bgwriter_timed_checkpoints _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("statistics: number of timed checkpoints started by the bgwriter"); @@ -3818,13 +3818,13 @@ DATA(insert OID = 2739 ( ginbulkdelete PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 4 0 DESCR("gin(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 2740 ( ginvacuumcleanup PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 2 0 2281 "2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ ginvacuumcleanup _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("gin(internal)"); -DATA(insert OID = 2741 ( gincostestimate PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 9 0 2278 "2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gincostestimate _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 2741 ( gincostestimate PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 9 0 2278 "2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gincostestimate _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("gin(internal)"); DATA(insert OID = 2788 ( ginoptions PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f s 2 0 17 "1009 16" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ ginoptions _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("gin(internal)"); /* GIN array support */ -DATA(insert OID = 2743 ( ginarrayextract PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 3 0 2281 "2277 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ ginarrayextract _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 2743 ( ginarrayextract PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 3 0 2281 "2277 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ ginarrayextract _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("GIN array support"); DATA(insert OID = 2774 ( ginqueryarrayextract PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 7 0 2281 "2277 2281 21 2281 2281 2281 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ ginqueryarrayextract _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("GIN array support"); @@ -3940,7 +3940,7 @@ DESCR("evaluate XPath expression, with namespaces support"); DATA(insert OID = 2932 ( xpath PGNSP PGUID 14 1 0 0 f f f t f i 2 0 143 "25 142" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ "select pg_catalog.xpath($1, $2, ''{}''::pg_catalog.text[])" _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("evaluate XPath expression"); -DATA(insert OID = 2614 ( xmlexists PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 2 0 16 "25 142" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ xmlexists _null_ _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 2614 ( xmlexists PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 2 0 16 "25 142" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ xmlexists _null_ _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("test XML value against XPath expression"); DATA(insert OID = 3049 ( xpath_exists PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 3 0 16 "25 142 1009" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ xpath_exists _null_ _null_ _null_ )); diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_seclabel.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_seclabel.h index f41b85a368..1f9a6a0432 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_seclabel.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_seclabel.h @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* ------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * pg_seclabel.h - * definition of the system "security label" relation (pg_seclabel) + * definition of the system "security label" relation (pg_seclabel) * * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2011, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California @@ -22,11 +22,11 @@ CATALOG(pg_seclabel,3596) BKI_WITHOUT_OIDS { - Oid objoid; /* OID of the object itself */ - Oid classoid; /* OID of table containing the object */ - int4 objsubid; /* column number, or 0 if not used */ - text provider; /* name of label provider */ - text label; /* security label of the object */ + Oid objoid; /* OID of the object itself */ + Oid classoid; /* OID of table containing the object */ + int4 objsubid; /* column number, or 0 if not used */ + text provider; /* name of label provider */ + text label; /* security label of the object */ } FormData_pg_seclabel; /* ---------------- @@ -40,4 +40,4 @@ CATALOG(pg_seclabel,3596) BKI_WITHOUT_OIDS #define Anum_pg_seclabel_provider 4 #define Anum_pg_seclabel_label 5 -#endif /* PG_SECLABEL_H */ +#endif /* PG_SECLABEL_H */ diff --git a/src/include/catalog/pg_type.h b/src/include/catalog/pg_type.h index 9baed6c769..d72ca2342f 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/pg_type.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/pg_type.h @@ -194,9 +194,8 @@ CATALOG(pg_type,1247) BKI_BOOTSTRAP BKI_ROWTYPE_OID(71) BKI_SCHEMA_MACRO int4 typndims; /* - * Collation: 0 if type cannot use collations, - * DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID for collatable base types, possibly other - * OID for domains + * Collation: 0 if type cannot use collations, DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID for + * collatable base types, possibly other OID for domains */ Oid typcollation; @@ -205,7 +204,7 @@ CATALOG(pg_type,1247) BKI_BOOTSTRAP BKI_ROWTYPE_OID(71) BKI_SCHEMA_MACRO * a default expression for the type. Currently this is only used for * domains. */ - pg_node_tree typdefaultbin; /* VARIABLE LENGTH FIELD */ + pg_node_tree typdefaultbin; /* VARIABLE LENGTH FIELD */ /* * typdefault is NULL if the type has no associated default value. If @@ -350,7 +349,7 @@ DESCR("XML content"); #define XMLOID 142 DATA(insert OID = 143 ( _xml PGNSP PGUID -1 f b A f t \054 0 142 0 array_in array_out array_recv array_send - - - i x f 0 -1 0 0 _null_ _null_ )); -DATA(insert OID = 194 ( pg_node_tree PGNSP PGUID -1 f b S f t \054 0 0 0 pg_node_tree_in pg_node_tree_out pg_node_tree_recv pg_node_tree_send - - - i x f 0 -1 0 100 _null_ _null_ )); +DATA(insert OID = 194 ( pg_node_tree PGNSP PGUID -1 f b S f t \054 0 0 0 pg_node_tree_in pg_node_tree_out pg_node_tree_recv pg_node_tree_send - - - i x f 0 -1 0 100 _null_ _null_ )); DESCR("string representing an internal node tree"); #define PGNODETREEOID 194 diff --git a/src/include/catalog/storage.h b/src/include/catalog/storage.h index 0b93b370bd..8dee8cf225 100644 --- a/src/include/catalog/storage.h +++ b/src/include/catalog/storage.h @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ extern void RelationTruncate(Relation rel, BlockNumber nblocks); * naming */ extern void smgrDoPendingDeletes(bool isCommit); -extern int smgrGetPendingDeletes(bool forCommit, RelFileNode **ptr); +extern int smgrGetPendingDeletes(bool forCommit, RelFileNode **ptr); extern void AtSubCommit_smgr(void); extern void AtSubAbort_smgr(void); extern void PostPrepare_smgr(void); diff --git a/src/include/commands/alter.h b/src/include/commands/alter.h index 21731685f5..e942b538af 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/alter.h +++ b/src/include/commands/alter.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ extern void ExecRenameStmt(RenameStmt *stmt); extern void ExecAlterObjectSchemaStmt(AlterObjectSchemaStmt *stmt); extern Oid AlterObjectNamespace_oid(Oid classId, Oid objid, Oid nspOid); -extern Oid AlterObjectNamespace(Relation rel, int oidCacheId, int nameCacheId, +extern Oid AlterObjectNamespace(Relation rel, int oidCacheId, int nameCacheId, Oid objid, Oid nspOid, int Anum_name, int Anum_namespace, int Anum_owner, AclObjectKind acl_kind); diff --git a/src/include/commands/collationcmds.h b/src/include/commands/collationcmds.h index 60504694a5..6dbeb751aa 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/collationcmds.h +++ b/src/include/commands/collationcmds.h @@ -23,6 +23,6 @@ extern void RenameCollation(List *name, const char *newname); extern void AlterCollationOwner(List *name, Oid newOwnerId); extern void AlterCollationOwner_oid(Oid collationOid, Oid newOwnerId); extern void AlterCollationNamespace(List *name, const char *newschema); -extern Oid AlterCollationNamespace_oid(Oid collOid, Oid newNspOid); +extern Oid AlterCollationNamespace_oid(Oid collOid, Oid newNspOid); #endif /* COLLATIONCMDS_H */ diff --git a/src/include/commands/copy.h b/src/include/commands/copy.h index 7098a70c95..a31479defb 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/copy.h +++ b/src/include/commands/copy.h @@ -25,12 +25,12 @@ extern uint64 DoCopy(const CopyStmt *stmt, const char *queryString); extern void ProcessCopyOptions(CopyState cstate, bool is_from, List *options); extern CopyState BeginCopyFrom(Relation rel, const char *filename, - List *attnamelist, List *options); + List *attnamelist, List *options); extern void EndCopyFrom(CopyState cstate); extern bool NextCopyFrom(CopyState cstate, ExprContext *econtext, - Datum *values, bool *nulls, Oid *tupleOid); + Datum *values, bool *nulls, Oid *tupleOid); extern bool NextCopyFromRawFields(CopyState cstate, - char ***fields, int *nfields); + char ***fields, int *nfields); extern void CopyFromErrorCallback(void *arg); extern DestReceiver *CreateCopyDestReceiver(void); diff --git a/src/include/commands/dbcommands.h b/src/include/commands/dbcommands.h index f54c57907a..21dacff39c 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/dbcommands.h +++ b/src/include/commands/dbcommands.h @@ -27,14 +27,14 @@ typedef struct xl_dbase_create_rec_old Oid db_id; char src_path[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH STRING */ /* dst_path follows src_path */ -} xl_dbase_create_rec_old; +} xl_dbase_create_rec_old; typedef struct xl_dbase_drop_rec_old { /* Records dropping of a single subdirectory incl. contents */ Oid db_id; char dir_path[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH STRING */ -} xl_dbase_drop_rec_old; +} xl_dbase_drop_rec_old; typedef struct xl_dbase_create_rec { diff --git a/src/include/commands/defrem.h b/src/include/commands/defrem.h index 157ee39461..bbc024f50c 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/defrem.h +++ b/src/include/commands/defrem.h @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ extern void AlterFunctionNamespace(List *name, List *argtypes, bool isagg, const char *newschema); extern Oid AlterFunctionNamespace_oid(Oid procOid, Oid nspOid); extern void ExecuteDoStmt(DoStmt *stmt); -extern Oid get_cast_oid(Oid sourcetypeid, Oid targettypeid, bool missing_ok); +extern Oid get_cast_oid(Oid sourcetypeid, Oid targettypeid, bool missing_ok); /* commands/operatorcmds.c */ extern void DefineOperator(List *names, List *parameters); @@ -107,9 +107,9 @@ extern void AlterOpFamilyOwner(List *name, const char *access_method, Oid newOwn extern void AlterOpFamilyOwner_oid(Oid opfamilyOid, Oid newOwnerId); extern void AlterOpFamilyNamespace(List *name, char *access_method, const char *newschema); extern Oid AlterOpFamilyNamespace_oid(Oid opfamilyOid, Oid newNspOid); -extern Oid get_am_oid(const char *amname, bool missing_ok); -extern Oid get_opclass_oid(Oid amID, List *opclassname, bool missing_ok); -extern Oid get_opfamily_oid(Oid amID, List *opfamilyname, bool missing_ok); +extern Oid get_am_oid(const char *amname, bool missing_ok); +extern Oid get_opclass_oid(Oid amID, List *opclassname, bool missing_ok); +extern Oid get_opfamily_oid(Oid amID, List *opfamilyname, bool missing_ok); /* commands/tsearchcmds.c */ extern void DefineTSParser(List *names, List *parameters); @@ -164,9 +164,9 @@ extern void RemoveUserMapping(DropUserMappingStmt *stmt); extern void RemoveUserMappingById(Oid umId); extern void CreateForeignTable(CreateForeignTableStmt *stmt, Oid relid); extern Datum transformGenericOptions(Oid catalogId, - Datum oldOptions, - List *options, - Oid fdwvalidator); + Datum oldOptions, + List *options, + Oid fdwvalidator); /* support routines in commands/define.c */ diff --git a/src/include/commands/explain.h b/src/include/commands/explain.h index 2c38c92ae5..d7998c3178 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/explain.h +++ b/src/include/commands/explain.h @@ -73,14 +73,14 @@ extern void ExplainEndOutput(ExplainState *es); extern void ExplainSeparatePlans(ExplainState *es); extern void ExplainPropertyList(const char *qlabel, List *data, - ExplainState *es); + ExplainState *es); extern void ExplainPropertyText(const char *qlabel, const char *value, - ExplainState *es); + ExplainState *es); extern void ExplainPropertyInteger(const char *qlabel, int value, - ExplainState *es); + ExplainState *es); extern void ExplainPropertyLong(const char *qlabel, long value, - ExplainState *es); + ExplainState *es); extern void ExplainPropertyFloat(const char *qlabel, double value, int ndigits, - ExplainState *es); + ExplainState *es); #endif /* EXPLAIN_H */ diff --git a/src/include/commands/extension.h b/src/include/commands/extension.h index c6e69d5fd4..2792c6dd49 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/extension.h +++ b/src/include/commands/extension.h @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ * installation script. */ extern bool creating_extension; -extern Oid CurrentExtensionObject; +extern Oid CurrentExtensionObject; extern void CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt); @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ extern void CreateExtension(CreateExtensionStmt *stmt); extern void RemoveExtensions(DropStmt *stmt); extern void RemoveExtensionById(Oid extId); -extern Oid InsertExtensionTuple(const char *extName, Oid extOwner, +extern Oid InsertExtensionTuple(const char *extName, Oid extOwner, Oid schemaOid, bool relocatable, const char *extVersion, Datum extConfig, Datum extCondition, List *requiredExtensions); diff --git a/src/include/commands/proclang.h b/src/include/commands/proclang.h index aa1fb34d1a..644c371dcc 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/proclang.h +++ b/src/include/commands/proclang.h @@ -21,6 +21,6 @@ extern void RenameLanguage(const char *oldname, const char *newname); extern void AlterLanguageOwner(const char *name, Oid newOwnerId); extern void AlterLanguageOwner_oid(Oid oid, Oid newOwnerId); extern bool PLTemplateExists(const char *languageName); -extern Oid get_language_oid(const char *langname, bool missing_ok); +extern Oid get_language_oid(const char *langname, bool missing_ok); #endif /* PROCLANG_H */ diff --git a/src/include/commands/seclabel.h b/src/include/commands/seclabel.h index 1ae922b7e9..06ce602d7d 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/seclabel.h +++ b/src/include/commands/seclabel.h @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ extern char *GetSecurityLabel(const ObjectAddress *object, const char *provider); extern void SetSecurityLabel(const ObjectAddress *object, - const char *provider, const char *label); + const char *provider, const char *label); extern void DeleteSecurityLabel(const ObjectAddress *object); /* @@ -27,9 +27,9 @@ extern void DeleteSecurityLabel(const ObjectAddress *object); */ extern void ExecSecLabelStmt(SecLabelStmt *stmt); -typedef void (*check_object_relabel_type)(const ObjectAddress *object, - const char *seclabel); +typedef void (*check_object_relabel_type) (const ObjectAddress *object, + const char *seclabel); extern void register_label_provider(const char *provider, - check_object_relabel_type hook); + check_object_relabel_type hook); -#endif /* SECLABEL_H */ +#endif /* SECLABEL_H */ diff --git a/src/include/commands/trigger.h b/src/include/commands/trigger.h index 80a779ed0b..ad97871d98 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/trigger.h +++ b/src/include/commands/trigger.h @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ extern Oid CreateTrigger(CreateTrigStmt *stmt, const char *queryString, extern void DropTrigger(Oid relid, const char *trigname, DropBehavior behavior, bool missing_ok); extern void RemoveTriggerById(Oid trigOid); -extern Oid get_trigger_oid(Oid relid, const char *name, bool missing_ok); +extern Oid get_trigger_oid(Oid relid, const char *name, bool missing_ok); extern void renametrig(Oid relid, const char *oldname, const char *newname); diff --git a/src/include/commands/typecmds.h b/src/include/commands/typecmds.h index 1b20296934..6d9d1ccaa9 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/typecmds.h +++ b/src/include/commands/typecmds.h @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ extern void AlterTypeOwnerInternal(Oid typeOid, Oid newOwnerId, bool hasDependEntry); extern void AlterTypeNamespace(List *names, const char *newschema); extern Oid AlterTypeNamespace_oid(Oid typeOid, Oid nspOid); -extern Oid AlterTypeNamespaceInternal(Oid typeOid, Oid nspOid, +extern Oid AlterTypeNamespaceInternal(Oid typeOid, Oid nspOid, bool isImplicitArray, bool errorOnTableType); diff --git a/src/include/commands/vacuum.h b/src/include/commands/vacuum.h index cc1441372d..79c9f5d90f 100644 --- a/src/include/commands/vacuum.h +++ b/src/include/commands/vacuum.h @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ typedef struct VacAttrStats * type-specific typanalyze function. * * Note: do not assume that the data being analyzed has the same datatype - * shown in attr, ie do not trust attr->atttypid, attlen, etc. This is + * shown in attr, ie do not trust attr->atttypid, attlen, etc. This is * because some index opclasses store a different type than the underlying * column/expression. Instead use attrtypid, attrtypmod, and attrtype for * information about the datatype being fed to the typanalyze function. diff --git a/src/include/executor/executor.h b/src/include/executor/executor.h index 3e9df936e5..1d651dd408 100644 --- a/src/include/executor/executor.h +++ b/src/include/executor/executor.h @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ #define EXEC_FLAG_REWIND 0x0002 /* need efficient rescan */ #define EXEC_FLAG_BACKWARD 0x0004 /* need backward scan */ #define EXEC_FLAG_MARK 0x0008 /* need mark/restore */ -#define EXEC_FLAG_SKIP_TRIGGERS 0x0010 /* skip AfterTrigger calls */ +#define EXEC_FLAG_SKIP_TRIGGERS 0x0010 /* skip AfterTrigger calls */ /* @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ extern JunkFilter *ExecInitJunkFilterConversion(List *targetList, extern AttrNumber ExecFindJunkAttribute(JunkFilter *junkfilter, const char *attrName); extern AttrNumber ExecFindJunkAttributeInTlist(List *targetlist, - const char *attrName); + const char *attrName); extern Datum ExecGetJunkAttribute(TupleTableSlot *slot, AttrNumber attno, bool *isNull); extern TupleTableSlot *ExecFilterJunk(JunkFilter *junkfilter, @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ extern HeapTuple EvalPlanQualFetch(EState *estate, Relation relation, extern void EvalPlanQualInit(EPQState *epqstate, EState *estate, Plan *subplan, List *auxrowmarks, int epqParam); extern void EvalPlanQualSetPlan(EPQState *epqstate, - Plan *subplan, List *auxrowmarks); + Plan *subplan, List *auxrowmarks); extern void EvalPlanQualSetTuple(EPQState *epqstate, Index rti, HeapTuple tuple); extern HeapTuple EvalPlanQualGetTuple(EPQState *epqstate, Index rti); diff --git a/src/include/executor/functions.h b/src/include/executor/functions.h index b926e99cbb..aaa36c5826 100644 --- a/src/include/executor/functions.h +++ b/src/include/executor/functions.h @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ extern SQLFunctionParseInfoPtr prepare_sql_fn_parse_info(HeapTuple procedureTupl Oid inputCollation); extern void sql_fn_parser_setup(struct ParseState *pstate, - SQLFunctionParseInfoPtr pinfo); + SQLFunctionParseInfoPtr pinfo); extern bool check_sql_fn_retval(Oid func_id, Oid rettype, List *queryTreeList, diff --git a/src/include/executor/hashjoin.h b/src/include/executor/hashjoin.h index 5ea165434a..0c6e06f8ff 100644 --- a/src/include/executor/hashjoin.h +++ b/src/include/executor/hashjoin.h @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ typedef struct HashJoinTupleData struct HashJoinTupleData *next; /* link to next tuple in same bucket */ uint32 hashvalue; /* tuple's hash code */ /* Tuple data, in MinimalTuple format, follows on a MAXALIGN boundary */ -} HashJoinTupleData; +} HashJoinTupleData; #define HJTUPLE_OVERHEAD MAXALIGN(sizeof(HashJoinTupleData)) #define HJTUPLE_MINTUPLE(hjtup) \ @@ -158,6 +158,6 @@ typedef struct HashJoinTableData MemoryContext hashCxt; /* context for whole-hash-join storage */ MemoryContext batchCxt; /* context for this-batch-only storage */ -} HashJoinTableData; +} HashJoinTableData; #endif /* HASHJOIN_H */ diff --git a/src/include/executor/nodeHash.h b/src/include/executor/nodeHash.h index 4810f4be5e..2c3c1b534b 100644 --- a/src/include/executor/nodeHash.h +++ b/src/include/executor/nodeHash.h @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ extern void ExecEndHash(HashState *node); extern void ExecReScanHash(HashState *node); extern HashJoinTable ExecHashTableCreate(Hash *node, List *hashOperators, - bool keepNulls); + bool keepNulls); extern void ExecHashTableDestroy(HashJoinTable hashtable); extern void ExecHashTableInsert(HashJoinTable hashtable, TupleTableSlot *slot, @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ extern void ExecHashGetBucketAndBatch(HashJoinTable hashtable, extern bool ExecScanHashBucket(HashJoinState *hjstate, ExprContext *econtext); extern void ExecPrepHashTableForUnmatched(HashJoinState *hjstate); extern bool ExecScanHashTableForUnmatched(HashJoinState *hjstate, - ExprContext *econtext); + ExprContext *econtext); extern void ExecHashTableReset(HashJoinTable hashtable); extern void ExecHashTableResetMatchFlags(HashJoinTable hashtable); extern void ExecChooseHashTableSize(double ntuples, int tupwidth, bool useskew, diff --git a/src/include/fmgr.h b/src/include/fmgr.h index 9e5224d374..e58060f834 100644 --- a/src/include/fmgr.h +++ b/src/include/fmgr.h @@ -458,9 +458,9 @@ extern Datum DirectFunctionCall9(PGFunction func, Datum arg1, Datum arg2, /* The same, but passing a collation to use */ extern Datum DirectFunctionCall1WithCollation(PGFunction func, Oid collation, - Datum arg1); + Datum arg1); extern Datum DirectFunctionCall2WithCollation(PGFunction func, Oid collation, - Datum arg1, Datum arg2); + Datum arg1, Datum arg2); /* These are for invocation of a previously-looked-up function with a * directly-computed parameter list. Note that neither arguments nor result @@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ extern int AggCheckCallContext(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, * We allow plugin modules to hook function entry/exit. This is intended * as support for loadable security policy modules, which may want to * perform additional privilege checks on function entry or exit, or to do - * other internal bookkeeping. To make this possible, such modules must be + * other internal bookkeeping. To make this possible, such modules must be * able not only to support normal function entry and exit, but also to trap * the case where we bail out due to an error; and they must also be able to * prevent inlining. @@ -585,13 +585,13 @@ typedef enum FmgrHookEventType FHET_ABORT } FmgrHookEventType; -typedef bool (*needs_fmgr_hook_type)(Oid fn_oid); +typedef bool (*needs_fmgr_hook_type) (Oid fn_oid); -typedef void (*fmgr_hook_type)(FmgrHookEventType event, - FmgrInfo *flinfo, Datum *arg); +typedef void (*fmgr_hook_type) (FmgrHookEventType event, + FmgrInfo *flinfo, Datum *arg); -extern PGDLLIMPORT needs_fmgr_hook_type needs_fmgr_hook; -extern PGDLLIMPORT fmgr_hook_type fmgr_hook; +extern PGDLLIMPORT needs_fmgr_hook_type needs_fmgr_hook; +extern PGDLLIMPORT fmgr_hook_type fmgr_hook; #define FmgrHookIsNeeded(fn_oid) \ (!needs_fmgr_hook ? false : (*needs_fmgr_hook)(fn_oid)) diff --git a/src/include/foreign/fdwapi.h b/src/include/foreign/fdwapi.h index 2873187388..3378ba9ade 100644 --- a/src/include/foreign/fdwapi.h +++ b/src/include/foreign/fdwapi.h @@ -27,11 +27,11 @@ typedef struct FdwPlan NodeTag type; /* - * Cost estimation info. The startup_cost is time before retrieving - * the first row, so it should include costs of connecting to the remote - * host, sending over the query, etc. Note that PlanForeignScan also - * ought to set baserel->rows and baserel->width if it can produce any - * usable estimates of those values. + * Cost estimation info. The startup_cost is time before retrieving the + * first row, so it should include costs of connecting to the remote host, + * sending over the query, etc. Note that PlanForeignScan also ought to + * set baserel->rows and baserel->width if it can produce any usable + * estimates of those values. */ Cost startup_cost; /* cost expended before fetching any tuples */ Cost total_cost; /* total cost (assuming all tuples fetched) */ @@ -39,10 +39,10 @@ typedef struct FdwPlan /* * FDW private data, which will be available at execution time. * - * Note that everything in this list must be copiable by copyObject(). - * One way to store an arbitrary blob of bytes is to represent it as a - * bytea Const. Usually, though, you'll be better off choosing a - * representation that can be dumped usefully by nodeToString(). + * Note that everything in this list must be copiable by copyObject(). One + * way to store an arbitrary blob of bytes is to represent it as a bytea + * Const. Usually, though, you'll be better off choosing a representation + * that can be dumped usefully by nodeToString(). */ List *fdw_private; } FdwPlan; @@ -52,17 +52,17 @@ typedef struct FdwPlan * Callback function signatures --- see fdwhandler.sgml for more info. */ -typedef FdwPlan * (*PlanForeignScan_function) (Oid foreigntableid, - PlannerInfo *root, - RelOptInfo *baserel); +typedef FdwPlan *(*PlanForeignScan_function) (Oid foreigntableid, + PlannerInfo *root, + RelOptInfo *baserel); typedef void (*ExplainForeignScan_function) (ForeignScanState *node, - struct ExplainState *es); + struct ExplainState *es); typedef void (*BeginForeignScan_function) (ForeignScanState *node, - int eflags); + int eflags); -typedef TupleTableSlot * (*IterateForeignScan_function) (ForeignScanState *node); +typedef TupleTableSlot *(*IterateForeignScan_function) (ForeignScanState *node); typedef void (*ReScanForeignScan_function) (ForeignScanState *node); diff --git a/src/include/foreign/foreign.h b/src/include/foreign/foreign.h index 2fda9e39fe..2c436aef80 100644 --- a/src/include/foreign/foreign.h +++ b/src/include/foreign/foreign.h @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ extern ForeignDataWrapper *GetForeignDataWrapperByName(const char *name, bool missing_ok); extern ForeignTable *GetForeignTable(Oid relid); -extern Oid get_foreign_data_wrapper_oid(const char *fdwname, bool missing_ok); -extern Oid get_foreign_server_oid(const char *servername, bool missing_ok); +extern Oid get_foreign_data_wrapper_oid(const char *fdwname, bool missing_ok); +extern Oid get_foreign_server_oid(const char *servername, bool missing_ok); #endif /* FOREIGN_H */ diff --git a/src/include/libpq/auth.h b/src/include/libpq/auth.h index 7d15b73370..884daf59ec 100644 --- a/src/include/libpq/auth.h +++ b/src/include/libpq/auth.h @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ extern char *pg_krb_realm; extern void ClientAuthentication(Port *port); /* Hook for plugins to get control in ClientAuthentication() */ -typedef void (*ClientAuthentication_hook_type)(Port *, int); +typedef void (*ClientAuthentication_hook_type) (Port *, int); extern PGDLLIMPORT ClientAuthentication_hook_type ClientAuthentication_hook; #endif /* AUTH_H */ diff --git a/src/include/libpq/libpq-be.h b/src/include/libpq/libpq-be.h index 4cdb15f064..77e190fd1a 100644 --- a/src/include/libpq/libpq-be.h +++ b/src/include/libpq/libpq-be.h @@ -109,10 +109,14 @@ typedef struct Port SockAddr laddr; /* local addr (postmaster) */ SockAddr raddr; /* remote addr (client) */ char *remote_host; /* name (or ip addr) of remote host */ - char *remote_hostname; /* name (not ip addr) of remote host, if available */ - int remote_hostname_resolv; /* +1 = remote_hostname is known to resolve to client's IP address; - -1 = remote_hostname is known NOT to resolve to client's IP address; - 0 = we have not done the forward DNS lookup yet */ + char *remote_hostname;/* name (not ip addr) of remote host, if + * available */ + int remote_hostname_resolv; /* +1 = remote_hostname is known to + * resolve to client's IP address; -1 + * = remote_hostname is known NOT to + * resolve to client's IP address; 0 = + * we have not done the forward DNS + * lookup yet */ char *remote_port; /* text rep of remote port */ CAC_state canAcceptConnections; /* postmaster connection status */ diff --git a/src/include/libpq/libpq.h b/src/include/libpq/libpq.h index 2df735f61f..38f96af5cd 100644 --- a/src/include/libpq/libpq.h +++ b/src/include/libpq/libpq.h @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ extern int pq_getbyte_if_available(unsigned char *c); extern int pq_putbytes(const char *s, size_t len); extern int pq_flush(void); extern int pq_flush_if_writable(void); -extern bool pq_is_send_pending(void); +extern bool pq_is_send_pending(void); extern int pq_putmessage(char msgtype, const char *s, size_t len); extern void pq_putmessage_noblock(char msgtype, const char *s, size_t len); extern void pq_startcopyout(void); diff --git a/src/include/nodes/execnodes.h b/src/include/nodes/execnodes.h index a2dcc68145..9c688c0368 100644 --- a/src/include/nodes/execnodes.h +++ b/src/include/nodes/execnodes.h @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ typedef struct EState List *es_subplanstates; /* List of PlanState for SubPlans */ - List *es_auxmodifytables; /* List of secondary ModifyTableStates */ + List *es_auxmodifytables; /* List of secondary ModifyTableStates */ /* * this ExprContext is for per-output-tuple operations, such as constraint @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ typedef struct TupleHashTableData TupleTableSlot *inputslot; /* current input tuple's slot */ FmgrInfo *in_hash_funcs; /* hash functions for input datatype(s) */ FmgrInfo *cur_eq_funcs; /* equality functions for input vs. table */ -} TupleHashTableData; +} TupleHashTableData; typedef HASH_SEQ_STATUS TupleHashIterator; @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ typedef struct SubPlanState TupleHashTable hashnulls; /* hash table for rows with null(s) */ bool havehashrows; /* TRUE if hashtable is not empty */ bool havenullrows; /* TRUE if hashnulls is not empty */ - MemoryContext hashtablecxt; /* memory context containing hash tables */ + MemoryContext hashtablecxt; /* memory context containing hash tables */ MemoryContext hashtempcxt; /* temp memory context for hash tables */ ExprContext *innerecontext; /* econtext for computing inner tuples */ AttrNumber *keyColIdx; /* control data for hash tables */ @@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ typedef struct ModifyTableState PlanState **mt_plans; /* subplans (one per target rel) */ int mt_nplans; /* number of plans in the array */ int mt_whichplan; /* which one is being executed (0..n-1) */ - ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo; /* per-subplan target relations */ + ResultRelInfo *resultRelInfo; /* per-subplan target relations */ List **mt_arowmarks; /* per-subplan ExecAuxRowMark lists */ EPQState mt_epqstate; /* for evaluating EvalPlanQual rechecks */ bool fireBSTriggers; /* do we need to fire stmt triggers? */ @@ -1093,9 +1093,9 @@ typedef struct MergeAppendState int ms_nkeys; ScanKey ms_scankeys; /* array of length ms_nkeys */ TupleTableSlot **ms_slots; /* array of length ms_nplans */ - int *ms_heap; /* array of length ms_nplans */ + int *ms_heap; /* array of length ms_nplans */ int ms_heap_size; /* current active length of ms_heap[] */ - bool ms_initialized; /* are subplans started? */ + bool ms_initialized; /* are subplans started? */ int ms_last_slot; /* last subplan slot we returned from */ } MergeAppendState; diff --git a/src/include/nodes/makefuncs.h b/src/include/nodes/makefuncs.h index 152cb0de2b..61314608f5 100644 --- a/src/include/nodes/makefuncs.h +++ b/src/include/nodes/makefuncs.h @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ extern Var *makeVar(Index varno, Index varlevelsup); extern Var *makeVarFromTargetEntry(Index varno, - TargetEntry *tle); + TargetEntry *tle); extern Var *makeWholeRowVar(RangeTblEntry *rte, Index varno, @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ extern Expr *makeBoolExpr(BoolExprType boolop, List *args, int location); extern Alias *makeAlias(const char *aliasname, List *colnames); extern RelabelType *makeRelabelType(Expr *arg, Oid rtype, int32 rtypmod, - Oid rcollid, CoercionForm rformat); + Oid rcollid, CoercionForm rformat); extern RangeVar *makeRangeVar(char *schemaname, char *relname, int location); diff --git a/src/include/nodes/params.h b/src/include/nodes/params.h index 824816e53d..cf9a788019 100644 --- a/src/include/nodes/params.h +++ b/src/include/nodes/params.h @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ typedef struct ParamListInfoData void *parserSetupArg; int numParams; /* number of ParamExternDatas following */ ParamExternData params[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */ -} ParamListInfoData; +} ParamListInfoData; /* ---------------- diff --git a/src/include/nodes/parsenodes.h b/src/include/nodes/parsenodes.h index d9eac766f0..566cd3af76 100644 --- a/src/include/nodes/parsenodes.h +++ b/src/include/nodes/parsenodes.h @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ typedef struct Query Node *setOperations; /* set-operation tree if this is top level of * a UNION/INTERSECT/EXCEPT query */ - List *constraintDeps; /* a list of pg_constraint OIDs that the query + List *constraintDeps; /* a list of pg_constraint OIDs that the query * depends on to be semantically valid */ } Query; @@ -724,14 +724,14 @@ typedef struct RangeTblEntry * Fields valid for a function RTE (else NULL): * * If the function returns RECORD, funccoltypes lists the column types - * declared in the RTE's column type specification, funccoltypmods - * lists their declared typmods, funccolcollations their collations. - * Otherwise, those fields are NIL. + * declared in the RTE's column type specification, funccoltypmods lists + * their declared typmods, funccolcollations their collations. Otherwise, + * those fields are NIL. */ Node *funcexpr; /* expression tree for func call */ List *funccoltypes; /* OID list of column type OIDs */ List *funccoltypmods; /* integer list of column typmods */ - List *funccolcollations; /* OID list of column collation OIDs */ + List *funccolcollations; /* OID list of column collation OIDs */ /* * Fields valid for a values RTE (else NIL): @@ -746,7 +746,7 @@ typedef struct RangeTblEntry bool self_reference; /* is this a recursive self-reference? */ List *ctecoltypes; /* OID list of column type OIDs */ List *ctecoltypmods; /* integer list of column typmods */ - List *ctecolcollations; /* OID list of column collation OIDs */ + List *ctecolcollations; /* OID list of column collation OIDs */ /* * Fields valid in all RTEs: @@ -789,7 +789,7 @@ typedef struct RangeTblEntry * here, but it's cheap to get it along with the sortop, and requiring it * to be valid eases comparisons to grouping items.) Note that this isn't * actually enough information to determine an ordering: if the sortop is - * collation-sensitive, a collation OID is needed too. We don't store the + * collation-sensitive, a collation OID is needed too. We don't store the * collation in SortGroupClause because it's not available at the time the * parser builds the SortGroupClause; instead, consult the exposed collation * of the referenced targetlist expression to find out what it is. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ typedef struct CommonTableExpr List *ctecolnames; /* list of output column names */ List *ctecoltypes; /* OID list of output column type OIDs */ List *ctecoltypmods; /* integer list of output column typmods */ - List *ctecolcollations; /* OID list of column collation OIDs */ + List *ctecolcollations; /* OID list of column collation OIDs */ } CommonTableExpr; /* Convenience macro to get the output tlist of a CTE's query */ @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ typedef struct SetOperationStmt typedef enum ObjectType { OBJECT_AGGREGATE, - OBJECT_ATTRIBUTE, /* type's attribute, when distinct from column */ + OBJECT_ATTRIBUTE, /* type's attribute, when distinct from column */ OBJECT_CAST, OBJECT_COLUMN, OBJECT_CONSTRAINT, @@ -2040,7 +2040,7 @@ typedef struct FetchStmt * * This represents creation of an index and/or an associated constraint. * If indexOid isn't InvalidOid, we are not creating an index, just a - * UNIQUE/PKEY constraint using an existing index. isconstraint must always + * UNIQUE/PKEY constraint using an existing index. isconstraint must always * be true in this case, and the fields describing the index properties are * empty. * ---------------------- @@ -2319,8 +2319,8 @@ typedef struct AlterEnumStmt NodeTag type; List *typeName; /* qualified name (list of Value strings) */ char *newVal; /* new enum value's name */ - char *newValNeighbor; /* neighboring enum value, if specified */ - bool newValIsAfter; /* place new enum value after neighbor? */ + char *newValNeighbor; /* neighboring enum value, if specified */ + bool newValIsAfter; /* place new enum value after neighbor? */ } AlterEnumStmt; /* ---------------------- diff --git a/src/include/nodes/pg_list.h b/src/include/nodes/pg_list.h index e5dd04bd1c..38b94aaa01 100644 --- a/src/include/nodes/pg_list.h +++ b/src/include/nodes/pg_list.h @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ extern int list_length(List *l); /* * forthree - - * the same for three lists + * the same for three lists */ #define forthree(cell1, list1, cell2, list2, cell3, list3) \ for ((cell1) = list_head(list1), (cell2) = list_head(list2), (cell3) = list_head(list3); \ diff --git a/src/include/nodes/plannodes.h b/src/include/nodes/plannodes.h index 764fc36521..7c085b3f4f 100644 --- a/src/include/nodes/plannodes.h +++ b/src/include/nodes/plannodes.h @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ typedef struct ModifyTable CmdType operation; /* INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE */ bool canSetTag; /* do we set the command tag/es_processed? */ List *resultRelations; /* integer list of RT indexes */ - int resultRelIndex; /* index of first resultRel in plan's list */ + int resultRelIndex; /* index of first resultRel in plan's list */ List *plans; /* plan(s) producing source data */ List *returningLists; /* per-target-table RETURNING tlists */ List *rowMarks; /* PlanRowMarks (non-locking only) */ @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ typedef Scan SeqScan; * that are being implemented by the index, while indexorderby is modified to * have index column Vars on the left-hand side. Here, multiple expressions * must appear in exactly the ORDER BY order, and this is not necessarily the - * index column order. Only the expressions are provided, not the auxiliary + * index column order. Only the expressions are provided, not the auxiliary * sort-order information from the ORDER BY SortGroupClauses; it's assumed * that the sort ordering is fully determinable from the top-level operators. * indexorderbyorig is unused at run time, but is needed for EXPLAIN. @@ -309,8 +309,8 @@ typedef struct IndexScan Oid indexid; /* OID of index to scan */ List *indexqual; /* list of index quals (usually OpExprs) */ List *indexqualorig; /* the same in original form */ - List *indexorderby; /* list of index ORDER BY exprs */ - List *indexorderbyorig; /* the same in original form */ + List *indexorderby; /* list of index ORDER BY exprs */ + List *indexorderbyorig; /* the same in original form */ ScanDirection indexorderdir; /* forward or backward or don't care */ } IndexScan; @@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ typedef struct FunctionScan List *funccolnames; /* output column names (string Value nodes) */ List *funccoltypes; /* OID list of column type OIDs */ List *funccoltypmods; /* integer list of column typmods */ - List *funccolcollations; /* OID list of column collation OIDs */ + List *funccolcollations; /* OID list of column collation OIDs */ } FunctionScan; /* ---------------- diff --git a/src/include/nodes/primnodes.h b/src/include/nodes/primnodes.h index 47e5719321..f1e20ef937 100644 --- a/src/include/nodes/primnodes.h +++ b/src/include/nodes/primnodes.h @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ typedef struct RangeVar char *relname; /* the relation/sequence name */ InhOption inhOpt; /* expand rel by inheritance? recursively act * on children? */ - char relpersistence; /* see RELPERSISTENCE_* in pg_class.h */ + char relpersistence; /* see RELPERSISTENCE_* in pg_class.h */ Alias *alias; /* table alias & optional column aliases */ int location; /* token location, or -1 if unknown */ } RangeVar; @@ -565,7 +565,8 @@ typedef struct SubPlan /* Extra data useful for determining subplan's output type: */ Oid firstColType; /* Type of first column of subplan result */ int32 firstColTypmod; /* Typmod of first column of subplan result */ - Oid firstColCollation; /* Collation of first column of subplan result */ + Oid firstColCollation; /* Collation of first column of + * subplan result */ /* Information about execution strategy: */ bool useHashTable; /* TRUE to store subselect output in a hash * table (implies we are doing "IN") */ @@ -909,7 +910,7 @@ typedef struct CoalesceExpr { Expr xpr; Oid coalescetype; /* type of expression result */ - Oid coalescecollid; /* OID of collation, or InvalidOid if none */ + Oid coalescecollid; /* OID of collation, or InvalidOid if none */ List *args; /* the arguments */ int location; /* token location, or -1 if unknown */ } CoalesceExpr; @@ -942,7 +943,7 @@ typedef struct MinMaxExpr * 'args' carries all other arguments. * * Note: result type/typmod/collation are not stored, but can be deduced - * from the XmlExprOp. The type/typmod fields are just used for display + * from the XmlExprOp. The type/typmod fields are just used for display * purposes, and are NOT the true result type of the node. */ typedef enum XmlExprOp diff --git a/src/include/nodes/relation.h b/src/include/nodes/relation.h index ab7ae2ebbd..78b03e024e 100644 --- a/src/include/nodes/relation.h +++ b/src/include/nodes/relation.h @@ -215,8 +215,8 @@ typedef struct PlannerInfo struct Plan *non_recursive_plan; /* plan for non-recursive term */ /* These fields are workspace for createplan.c */ - Relids curOuterRels; /* outer rels above current node */ - List *curOuterParams; /* not-yet-assigned NestLoopParams */ + Relids curOuterRels; /* outer rels above current node */ + List *curOuterParams; /* not-yet-assigned NestLoopParams */ /* optional private data for join_search_hook, e.g., GEQO */ void *join_search_private; @@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ typedef struct IndexOptInfo bool predOK; /* true if predicate matches query */ bool unique; /* true if a unique index */ bool hypothetical; /* true if index doesn't really exist */ - bool amcanorderbyop; /* does AM support order by operator result? */ + bool amcanorderbyop; /* does AM support order by operator result? */ bool amoptionalkey; /* can query omit key for the first column? */ bool amsearchnulls; /* can AM search for NULL/NOT NULL entries? */ bool amhasgettuple; /* does AM have amgettuple interface? */ @@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ typedef struct IndexOptInfo * equal to each other, where "equal" is according to the rules of the btree * operator family(s) shown in ec_opfamilies, as well as the collation shown * by ec_collation. (We restrict an EC to contain only equalities whose - * operators belong to the same set of opfamilies. This could probably be + * operators belong to the same set of opfamilies. This could probably be * relaxed, but for now it's not worth the trouble, since nearly all equality * operators belong to only one btree opclass anyway. Similarly, we suppose * that all or none of the input datatypes are collatable, so that a single @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ typedef struct MinMaxAggInfo * to do so for Param slots. Duplicate detection is actually *necessary* * in the case of NestLoop parameters since it serves to match up the usage * of a Param (in the inner scan) with the assignment of the value (in the - * NestLoop node). This might result in the same PARAM_EXEC slot being used + * NestLoop node). This might result in the same PARAM_EXEC slot being used * by multiple NestLoop nodes or SubPlan nodes, but no harm is done since * the same value would be assigned anyway. */ diff --git a/src/include/optimizer/cost.h b/src/include/optimizer/cost.h index e3cf7464df..08898c13b9 100644 --- a/src/include/optimizer/cost.h +++ b/src/include/optimizer/cost.h @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ typedef enum CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_OFF, /* do not use c_e */ CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_ON, /* apply c_e to all rels */ CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION_PARTITION /* apply c_e to otherrels only */ -} ConstraintExclusionType; +} ConstraintExclusionType; /* diff --git a/src/include/optimizer/pathnode.h b/src/include/optimizer/pathnode.h index 7a24da2c51..1da2131b09 100644 --- a/src/include/optimizer/pathnode.h +++ b/src/include/optimizer/pathnode.h @@ -49,9 +49,9 @@ extern TidPath *create_tidscan_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, List *tidquals); extern AppendPath *create_append_path(RelOptInfo *rel, List *subpaths); extern MergeAppendPath *create_merge_append_path(PlannerInfo *root, - RelOptInfo *rel, - List *subpaths, - List *pathkeys); + RelOptInfo *rel, + List *subpaths, + List *pathkeys); extern ResultPath *create_result_path(List *quals); extern MaterialPath *create_material_path(RelOptInfo *rel, Path *subpath); extern UniquePath *create_unique_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel, diff --git a/src/include/optimizer/paths.h b/src/include/optimizer/paths.h index 5ff951e67e..7f1353a2a3 100644 --- a/src/include/optimizer/paths.h +++ b/src/include/optimizer/paths.h @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ extern bool have_join_order_restriction(PlannerInfo *root, extern bool process_equivalence(PlannerInfo *root, RestrictInfo *restrictinfo, bool below_outer_join); extern Expr *canonicalize_ec_expression(Expr *expr, - Oid req_type, Oid req_collation); + Oid req_type, Oid req_collation); extern void reconsider_outer_join_clauses(PlannerInfo *root); extern EquivalenceClass *get_eclass_for_sort_expr(PlannerInfo *root, Expr *expr, @@ -164,9 +164,9 @@ extern List *make_pathkeys_for_sortclauses(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist, bool canonicalize); extern void initialize_mergeclause_eclasses(PlannerInfo *root, - RestrictInfo *restrictinfo); + RestrictInfo *restrictinfo); extern void update_mergeclause_eclasses(PlannerInfo *root, - RestrictInfo *restrictinfo); + RestrictInfo *restrictinfo); extern List *find_mergeclauses_for_pathkeys(PlannerInfo *root, List *pathkeys, bool outer_keys, diff --git a/src/include/optimizer/placeholder.h b/src/include/optimizer/placeholder.h index 976c5439ca..cce9e1ef1b 100644 --- a/src/include/optimizer/placeholder.h +++ b/src/include/optimizer/placeholder.h @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ extern PlaceHolderInfo *find_placeholder_info(PlannerInfo *root, PlaceHolderVar *phv); extern void find_placeholders_in_jointree(PlannerInfo *root); extern void update_placeholder_eval_levels(PlannerInfo *root, - SpecialJoinInfo *new_sjinfo); + SpecialJoinInfo *new_sjinfo); extern void fix_placeholder_input_needed_levels(PlannerInfo *root); extern void add_placeholders_to_base_rels(PlannerInfo *root); extern void add_placeholders_to_joinrel(PlannerInfo *root, diff --git a/src/include/optimizer/subselect.h b/src/include/optimizer/subselect.h index c437412149..ff9e2b7f89 100644 --- a/src/include/optimizer/subselect.h +++ b/src/include/optimizer/subselect.h @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ extern Node *SS_process_sublinks(PlannerInfo *root, Node *expr, bool isQual); extern void SS_finalize_plan(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *plan, bool attach_initplans); extern Param *SS_make_initplan_from_plan(PlannerInfo *root, Plan *plan, - Oid resulttype, int32 resulttypmod, Oid resultcollation); + Oid resulttype, int32 resulttypmod, Oid resultcollation); extern Param *assign_nestloop_param(PlannerInfo *root, Var *var); extern int SS_assign_special_param(PlannerInfo *root); diff --git a/src/include/parser/parse_collate.h b/src/include/parser/parse_collate.h index 20acb43504..4332ffc2b9 100644 --- a/src/include/parser/parse_collate.h +++ b/src/include/parser/parse_collate.h @@ -22,6 +22,6 @@ extern void assign_list_collations(ParseState *pstate, List *exprs); extern void assign_expr_collations(ParseState *pstate, Node *expr); -extern Oid select_common_collation(ParseState *pstate, List *exprs, bool none_ok); +extern Oid select_common_collation(ParseState *pstate, List *exprs, bool none_ok); #endif /* PARSE_COLLATE_H */ diff --git a/src/include/parser/parse_func.h b/src/include/parser/parse_func.h index a2011be52f..2fe6f90a2e 100644 --- a/src/include/parser/parse_func.h +++ b/src/include/parser/parse_func.h @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ typedef struct _InhPaths int nsupers; /* number of superclasses */ Oid self; /* this class */ Oid *supervec; /* vector of superclasses */ -} InhPaths; +} InhPaths; /* Result codes for func_get_detail */ typedef enum diff --git a/src/include/parser/parse_type.h b/src/include/parser/parse_type.h index 509e3b7f11..373acd8af7 100644 --- a/src/include/parser/parse_type.h +++ b/src/include/parser/parse_type.h @@ -23,15 +23,15 @@ extern Type LookupTypeName(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typeName, int32 *typmod_p); extern Type typenameType(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typeName, int32 *typmod_p); -extern Oid typenameTypeId(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typeName); +extern Oid typenameTypeId(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typeName); extern void typenameTypeIdAndMod(ParseState *pstate, const TypeName *typeName, - Oid *typeid_p, int32 *typmod_p); + Oid *typeid_p, int32 *typmod_p); extern char *TypeNameToString(const TypeName *typeName); extern char *TypeNameListToString(List *typenames); -extern Oid LookupCollation(ParseState *pstate, List *collnames, int location); -extern Oid GetColumnDefCollation(ParseState *pstate, ColumnDef *coldef, Oid typeOid); +extern Oid LookupCollation(ParseState *pstate, List *collnames, int location); +extern Oid GetColumnDefCollation(ParseState *pstate, ColumnDef *coldef, Oid typeOid); extern Type typeidType(Oid id); diff --git a/src/include/parser/parser.h b/src/include/parser/parser.h index 4d7f648568..21e2b0b126 100644 --- a/src/include/parser/parser.h +++ b/src/include/parser/parser.h @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ typedef enum BACKSLASH_QUOTE_OFF, BACKSLASH_QUOTE_ON, BACKSLASH_QUOTE_SAFE_ENCODING -} BackslashQuoteType; +} BackslashQuoteType; /* GUC variables in scan.l (every one of these is a bad idea :-() */ extern int backslash_quote; diff --git a/src/include/pgstat.h b/src/include/pgstat.h index 1ab1ac838f..f04be95b45 100644 --- a/src/include/pgstat.h +++ b/src/include/pgstat.h @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ typedef enum TrackFunctionsLevel TRACK_FUNC_OFF, TRACK_FUNC_PL, TRACK_FUNC_ALL -} TrackFunctionsLevel; +} TrackFunctionsLevel; /* ---------- * The types of backend -> collector messages @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ typedef struct PgBackendStatus Oid st_databaseid; Oid st_userid; SockAddr st_clientaddr; - char *st_clienthostname; /* MUST be null-terminated */ + char *st_clienthostname; /* MUST be null-terminated */ /* Is backend currently waiting on an lmgr lock? */ bool st_waiting; diff --git a/src/include/port/win32.h b/src/include/port/win32.h index f442cca523..4fe7c61c75 100644 --- a/src/include/port/win32.h +++ b/src/include/port/win32.h @@ -4,8 +4,8 @@ #define WIN32_ONLY_COMPILER #endif -/* - * Make sure _WIN32_WINNT has the minumum required value. +/* + * Make sure _WIN32_WINNT has the minumum required value. * Leave a higher value in place. */ #if defined(_WIN32_WINNT) && _WIN32_WINNT < 0x0501 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ #undef ERROR -/* +/* * The Mingw64 headers choke if this is already defined - they * define it themselves. */ @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ typedef unsigned short mode_t; /* see also S_IRGRP etc below */ #define S_ISDIR(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFDIR) #define S_ISREG(m) (((m) & S_IFMT) == S_IFREG) -#endif /* __BORLANDC__ */ +#endif /* __BORLANDC__ */ #define F_OK 0 #define W_OK 2 @@ -393,8 +393,7 @@ typedef unsigned short mode_t; #define _O_SHORT_LIVED O_SHORT_LIVED #endif /* ifndef O_RANDOM */ #endif /* __BORLANDC__ */ - -#endif /* WIN32_ONLY_COMPILER */ +#endif /* WIN32_ONLY_COMPILER */ /* These aren't provided by either MingW or MSVC */ #ifndef __BORLANDC__ @@ -406,4 +405,5 @@ typedef unsigned short mode_t; #define S_IWOTH 0 #define S_IXOTH 0 #define S_IRWXO 0 -#endif /* __BORLANDC__ */ + +#endif /* __BORLANDC__ */ diff --git a/src/include/replication/replnodes.h b/src/include/replication/replnodes.h index 6fc037580f..e027f9203b 100644 --- a/src/include/replication/replnodes.h +++ b/src/include/replication/replnodes.h @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ typedef enum ReplNodeTag typedef struct IdentifySystemCmd { NodeTag type; -} IdentifySystemCmd; +} IdentifySystemCmd; /* ---------------------- @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ typedef struct BaseBackupCmd { NodeTag type; List *options; -} BaseBackupCmd; +} BaseBackupCmd; /* ---------------------- @@ -57,6 +57,6 @@ typedef struct StartReplicationCmd { NodeTag type; XLogRecPtr startpoint; -} StartReplicationCmd; +} StartReplicationCmd; #endif /* REPLNODES_H */ diff --git a/src/include/replication/syncrep.h b/src/include/replication/syncrep.h index 728e2c8f2d..efbebbcc06 100644 --- a/src/include/replication/syncrep.h +++ b/src/include/replication/syncrep.h @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ extern void SyncRepReleaseWaiters(void); extern void SyncRepUpdateSyncStandbysDefined(void); /* called by various procs */ -extern int SyncRepWakeQueue(bool all); +extern int SyncRepWakeQueue(bool all); extern bool check_synchronous_standby_names(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source); #endif /* _SYNCREP_H */ diff --git a/src/include/replication/walprotocol.h b/src/include/replication/walprotocol.h index 9baca948a2..94146679fa 100644 --- a/src/include/replication/walprotocol.h +++ b/src/include/replication/walprotocol.h @@ -48,9 +48,9 @@ typedef struct typedef struct { /* - * The xlog locations that have been written, flushed, and applied - * by standby-side. These may be invalid if the standby-side is unable - * to or chooses not to report these. + * The xlog locations that have been written, flushed, and applied by + * standby-side. These may be invalid if the standby-side is unable to or + * chooses not to report these. */ XLogRecPtr write; XLogRecPtr flush; @@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ typedef struct { /* * The current xmin and epoch from the standby, for Hot Standby feedback. - * This may be invalid if the standby-side does not support feedback, - * or Hot Standby is not yet available. + * This may be invalid if the standby-side does not support feedback, or + * Hot Standby is not yet available. */ - TransactionId xmin; - uint32 epoch; + TransactionId xmin; + uint32 epoch; /* Sender's system clock at the time of transmission */ TimestampTz sendTime; diff --git a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h index 775232b6e6..816fa5ba72 100644 --- a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h +++ b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ #include "pgtime.h" extern bool am_walreceiver; -extern int wal_receiver_status_interval; +extern int wal_receiver_status_interval; extern bool hot_standby_feedback; /* @@ -52,17 +52,17 @@ typedef struct pg_time_t startTime; /* - * receiveStart is the first byte position that will be received. - * When startup process starts the walreceiver, it sets receiveStart - * to the point where it wants the streaming to begin. + * receiveStart is the first byte position that will be received. When + * startup process starts the walreceiver, it sets receiveStart to the + * point where it wants the streaming to begin. */ XLogRecPtr receiveStart; /* * receivedUpto-1 is the last byte position that has already been - * received. At the first startup of walreceiver, receivedUpto is - * set to receiveStart. After that, walreceiver updates this whenever - * it flushes the received WAL to disk. + * received. At the first startup of walreceiver, receivedUpto is set to + * receiveStart. After that, walreceiver updates this whenever it flushes + * the received WAL to disk. */ XLogRecPtr receivedUpto; diff --git a/src/include/replication/walsender.h b/src/include/replication/walsender.h index 2670a2e806..6ee8668d0a 100644 --- a/src/include/replication/walsender.h +++ b/src/include/replication/walsender.h @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ typedef enum WalSndState WALSNDSTATE_BACKUP, WALSNDSTATE_CATCHUP, WALSNDSTATE_STREAMING -} WalSndState; +} WalSndState; /* * Each walsender has a WalSnd struct in shared memory. @@ -37,9 +37,9 @@ typedef struct WalSnd XLogRecPtr sentPtr; /* WAL has been sent up to this point */ /* - * The xlog locations that have been written, flushed, and applied - * by standby-side. These may be invalid if the standby-side has not - * offered values yet. + * The xlog locations that have been written, flushed, and applied by + * standby-side. These may be invalid if the standby-side has not offered + * values yet. */ XLogRecPtr write; XLogRecPtr flush; @@ -49,17 +49,17 @@ typedef struct WalSnd slock_t mutex; /* - * Latch used by backends to wake up this walsender when it has work - * to do. + * Latch used by backends to wake up this walsender when it has work to + * do. */ Latch latch; /* - * The priority order of the standby managed by this WALSender, as - * listed in synchronous_standby_names, or 0 if not-listed. - * Protected by SyncRepLock. + * The priority order of the standby managed by this WALSender, as listed + * in synchronous_standby_names, or 0 if not-listed. Protected by + * SyncRepLock. */ - int sync_standby_priority; + int sync_standby_priority; } WalSnd; extern WalSnd *MyWalSnd; @@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ typedef struct /* * Synchronous replication queue. Protected by SyncRepLock. */ - SHM_QUEUE SyncRepQueue; + SHM_QUEUE SyncRepQueue; /* - * Current location of the head of the queue. All waiters should have - * a waitLSN that follows this value. Protected by SyncRepLock. + * Current location of the head of the queue. All waiters should have a + * waitLSN that follows this value. Protected by SyncRepLock. */ XLogRecPtr lsn; diff --git a/src/include/rewrite/rewriteSupport.h b/src/include/rewrite/rewriteSupport.h index 11e8173454..77417ba034 100644 --- a/src/include/rewrite/rewriteSupport.h +++ b/src/include/rewrite/rewriteSupport.h @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ extern bool IsDefinedRewriteRule(Oid owningRel, const char *ruleName); extern void SetRelationRuleStatus(Oid relationId, bool relHasRules, bool relIsBecomingView); -extern Oid get_rewrite_oid(Oid relid, const char *rulename, bool missing_ok); -extern Oid get_rewrite_oid_without_relid(const char *rulename, Oid *relid); +extern Oid get_rewrite_oid(Oid relid, const char *rulename, bool missing_ok); +extern Oid get_rewrite_oid_without_relid(const char *rulename, Oid *relid); #endif /* REWRITESUPPORT_H */ diff --git a/src/include/storage/backendid.h b/src/include/storage/backendid.h index b702da2435..ec0ebc6a65 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/backendid.h +++ b/src/include/storage/backendid.h @@ -22,6 +22,6 @@ typedef int BackendId; /* unique currently active backend identifier */ #define InvalidBackendId (-1) -extern PGDLLIMPORT BackendId MyBackendId; /* backend id of this backend */ +extern PGDLLIMPORT BackendId MyBackendId; /* backend id of this backend */ #endif /* BACKENDID_H */ diff --git a/src/include/storage/buf_internals.h b/src/include/storage/buf_internals.h index 0652bdf711..b7d4ea53a4 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/buf_internals.h +++ b/src/include/storage/buf_internals.h @@ -37,7 +37,8 @@ #define BM_JUST_DIRTIED (1 << 5) /* dirtied since write started */ #define BM_PIN_COUNT_WAITER (1 << 6) /* have waiter for sole pin */ #define BM_CHECKPOINT_NEEDED (1 << 7) /* must write for checkpoint */ -#define BM_PERMANENT (1 << 8) /* permanent relation (not unlogged) */ +#define BM_PERMANENT (1 << 8) /* permanent relation (not + * unlogged) */ typedef bits16 BufFlags; diff --git a/src/include/storage/latch.h b/src/include/storage/latch.h index f64e13bed2..03ec07119b 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/latch.h +++ b/src/include/storage/latch.h @@ -23,11 +23,11 @@ */ typedef struct { - sig_atomic_t is_set; - bool is_shared; - int owner_pid; + sig_atomic_t is_set; + bool is_shared; + int owner_pid; #ifdef WIN32 - HANDLE event; + HANDLE event; #endif } Latch; @@ -39,10 +39,11 @@ extern void InitSharedLatch(volatile Latch *latch); extern void OwnLatch(volatile Latch *latch); extern void DisownLatch(volatile Latch *latch); extern bool WaitLatch(volatile Latch *latch, long timeout); -extern int WaitLatchOrSocket(volatile Latch *latch, pgsocket sock, +extern int WaitLatchOrSocket(volatile Latch *latch, pgsocket sock, bool forRead, bool forWrite, long timeout); extern void SetLatch(volatile Latch *latch); extern void ResetLatch(volatile Latch *latch); + #define TestLatch(latch) (((volatile Latch *) latch)->is_set) /* diff --git a/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h b/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h index 0ca8ca0cc7..7606b0961c 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h +++ b/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ typedef enum PMSIGNAL_START_AUTOVAC_LAUNCHER, /* start an autovacuum launcher */ PMSIGNAL_START_AUTOVAC_WORKER, /* start an autovacuum worker */ PMSIGNAL_START_WALRECEIVER, /* start a walreceiver */ - PMSIGNAL_ADVANCE_STATE_MACHINE, /* advance postmaster's state machine */ + PMSIGNAL_ADVANCE_STATE_MACHINE, /* advance postmaster's state machine */ NUM_PMSIGNALS /* Must be last value of enum! */ } PMSignalReason; diff --git a/src/include/storage/predicate_internals.h b/src/include/storage/predicate_internals.h index 0556125636..bd42004c2c 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/predicate_internals.h +++ b/src/include/storage/predicate_internals.h @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ typedef struct PredXactListElementData { SHM_QUEUE link; SERIALIZABLEXACT sxact; -} PredXactListElementData; +} PredXactListElementData; typedef struct PredXactListElementData *PredXactListElement; @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ typedef struct PredXactListData SERIALIZABLEXACT *OldCommittedSxact; /* shared copy of dummy sxact */ PredXactListElement element; -} PredXactListData; +} PredXactListData; typedef struct PredXactListData *PredXactList; @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ typedef struct RWConflictData SHM_QUEUE inLink; /* link for list of conflicts in to a sxact */ SERIALIZABLEXACT *sxactOut; SERIALIZABLEXACT *sxactIn; -} RWConflictData; +} RWConflictData; typedef struct RWConflictData *RWConflict; @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ typedef struct RWConflictPoolHeaderData { SHM_QUEUE availableList; RWConflict element; -} RWConflictPoolHeaderData; +} RWConflictPoolHeaderData; typedef struct RWConflictPoolHeaderData *RWConflictPoolHeader; @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ typedef struct PREDICATELOCKTARGETTAG * version, before the reading transaction is obsolete, we need some way to * prevent errors from reuse of a tuple ID. Rather than attempting to clean * up the targets as the related tuples are pruned or vacuumed, we check the - * xmin on access. This should be far less costly. + * xmin on access. This should be far less costly. */ typedef struct PREDICATELOCKTARGET PREDICATELOCKTARGET; @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ typedef enum PredicateLockTargetType PREDLOCKTAG_PAGE, PREDLOCKTAG_TUPLE /* TODO SSI: Other types may be needed for index locking */ -} PredicateLockTargetType; +} PredicateLockTargetType; /* @@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ typedef enum TwoPhasePredicateRecordType { TWOPHASEPREDICATERECORD_XACT, TWOPHASEPREDICATERECORD_LOCK -} TwoPhasePredicateRecordType; +} TwoPhasePredicateRecordType; /* * Per-transaction information to reconstruct a SERIALIZABLEXACT. Not diff --git a/src/include/storage/proc.h b/src/include/storage/proc.h index f2e063c6cb..4819cb8110 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/proc.h +++ b/src/include/storage/proc.h @@ -124,10 +124,10 @@ struct PGPROC * syncRepState must not be touched except by owning process or WALSender. * syncRepLinks used only while holding SyncRepLock. */ - Latch waitLatch; /* allow us to wait for sync rep */ - XLogRecPtr waitLSN; /* waiting for this LSN or higher */ - int syncRepState; /* wait state for sync rep */ - SHM_QUEUE syncRepLinks; /* list link if process is in syncrep queue */ + Latch waitLatch; /* allow us to wait for sync rep */ + XLogRecPtr waitLSN; /* waiting for this LSN or higher */ + int syncRepState; /* wait state for sync rep */ + SHM_QUEUE syncRepLinks; /* list link if process is in syncrep queue */ /* * All PROCLOCK objects for locks held or awaited by this backend are diff --git a/src/include/storage/procarray.h b/src/include/storage/procarray.h index 334f9a25c1..3c20fc48f6 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/procarray.h +++ b/src/include/storage/procarray.h @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ extern VirtualTransactionId *GetCurrentVirtualXIDs(TransactionId limitXmin, extern VirtualTransactionId *GetConflictingVirtualXIDs(TransactionId limitXmin, Oid dbOid); extern pid_t CancelVirtualTransaction(VirtualTransactionId vxid, ProcSignalReason sigmode); -extern bool MinimumActiveBackends(int min); +extern bool MinimumActiveBackends(int min); extern int CountDBBackends(Oid databaseid); extern void CancelDBBackends(Oid databaseid, ProcSignalReason sigmode, bool conflictPending); extern int CountUserBackends(Oid roleid); diff --git a/src/include/storage/relfilenode.h b/src/include/storage/relfilenode.h index d8eb4c6be9..659a339e61 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/relfilenode.h +++ b/src/include/storage/relfilenode.h @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ typedef enum ForkNumber MAIN_FORKNUM = 0, FSM_FORKNUM, VISIBILITYMAP_FORKNUM, - INIT_FORKNUM + INIT_FORKNUM /* * NOTE: if you add a new fork, change MAX_FORKNUM below and update the @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ typedef struct RelFileNode */ typedef struct RelFileNodeBackend { - RelFileNode node; + RelFileNode node; BackendId backend; } RelFileNodeBackend; diff --git a/src/include/tsearch/dicts/spell.h b/src/include/tsearch/dicts/spell.h index 86c7e748e3..f59b30fcab 100644 --- a/src/include/tsearch/dicts/spell.h +++ b/src/include/tsearch/dicts/spell.h @@ -152,10 +152,10 @@ typedef struct bool usecompound; /* - * Remaining fields are only used during dictionary construction; - * they are set up by NIStartBuild and cleared by NIFinishBuild. + * Remaining fields are only used during dictionary construction; they are + * set up by NIStartBuild and cleared by NIFinishBuild. */ - MemoryContext buildCxt; /* temp context for construction */ + MemoryContext buildCxt; /* temp context for construction */ /* Temporary array of all words in the dict file */ SPELL **Spell; diff --git a/src/include/utils/acl.h b/src/include/utils/acl.h index b28b764fd5..75bdaa5343 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/acl.h +++ b/src/include/utils/acl.h @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ extern bool is_member_of_role(Oid member, Oid role); extern bool is_member_of_role_nosuper(Oid member, Oid role); extern bool is_admin_of_role(Oid member, Oid role); extern void check_is_member_of_role(Oid member, Oid role); -extern Oid get_role_oid(const char *rolname, bool missing_ok); +extern Oid get_role_oid(const char *rolname, bool missing_ok); extern void select_best_grantor(Oid roleId, AclMode privileges, const Acl *acl, Oid ownerId, diff --git a/src/include/utils/builtins.h b/src/include/utils/builtins.h index 72b0cdea7f..14215db1b4 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/builtins.h +++ b/src/include/utils/builtins.h @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ extern Datum pg_relation_filepath(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); /* genfile.c */ extern bytea *read_binary_file(const char *filename, - int64 seek_offset, int64 bytes_to_read); + int64 seek_offset, int64 bytes_to_read); extern Datum pg_stat_file(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); extern Datum pg_read_file(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); extern Datum pg_read_file_all(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); diff --git a/src/include/utils/bytea.h b/src/include/utils/bytea.h index df247c40a9..b64a6fff66 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/bytea.h +++ b/src/include/utils/bytea.h @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ typedef enum { BYTEA_OUTPUT_ESCAPE, BYTEA_OUTPUT_HEX -} ByteaOutputType; +} ByteaOutputType; extern int bytea_output; /* ByteaOutputType, but int for GUC enum */ diff --git a/src/include/utils/datetime.h b/src/include/utils/datetime.h index 9911d20793..2880304fdb 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/datetime.h +++ b/src/include/utils/datetime.h @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ extern int j2day(int jd); extern bool CheckDateTokenTables(void); extern void ConvertTimeZoneAbbrevs(TimeZoneAbbrevTable *tbl, - struct tzEntry *abbrevs, int n); + struct tzEntry *abbrevs, int n); extern void InstallTimeZoneAbbrevs(TimeZoneAbbrevTable *tbl); extern Datum pg_timezone_abbrevs(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); diff --git a/src/include/utils/elog.h b/src/include/utils/elog.h index 1f2a9f53c1..fb5ef1620b 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/elog.h +++ b/src/include/utils/elog.h @@ -203,7 +203,8 @@ __attribute__((format(printf, 2, 3))); /* Support for constructing error strings separately from ereport() calls */ extern void pre_format_elog_string(int errnumber, const char *domain); -extern char *format_elog_string(const char *fmt,...) +extern char * +format_elog_string(const char *fmt,...) /* This extension allows gcc to check the format string for consistency with the supplied arguments. */ __attribute__((format(printf, 1, 2))); @@ -335,7 +336,7 @@ typedef enum PGERROR_TERSE, /* single-line error messages */ PGERROR_DEFAULT, /* recommended style */ PGERROR_VERBOSE /* all the facts, ma'am */ -} PGErrorVerbosity; +} PGErrorVerbosity; extern int Log_error_verbosity; extern char *Log_line_prefix; diff --git a/src/include/utils/guc.h b/src/include/utils/guc.h index 452310f2bd..5a42d8cec3 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/guc.h +++ b/src/include/utils/guc.h @@ -102,11 +102,11 @@ typedef enum */ typedef struct ConfigVariable { - char *name; - char *value; + char *name; + char *value; char *filename; int sourceline; - struct ConfigVariable *next; + struct ConfigVariable *next; } ConfigVariable; extern bool ParseConfigFile(const char *config_file, const char *calling_file, diff --git a/src/include/utils/lsyscache.h b/src/include/utils/lsyscache.h index b6ceb26c8b..0a419dcf65 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/lsyscache.h +++ b/src/include/utils/lsyscache.h @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ extern AttrNumber get_attnum(Oid relid, const char *attname); extern Oid get_atttype(Oid relid, AttrNumber attnum); extern int32 get_atttypmod(Oid relid, AttrNumber attnum); extern void get_atttypetypmodcoll(Oid relid, AttrNumber attnum, - Oid *typid, int32 *typmod, Oid *collid); + Oid *typid, int32 *typmod, Oid *collid); extern char *get_collation_name(Oid colloid); extern char *get_constraint_name(Oid conoid); extern Oid get_opclass_family(Oid opclass); @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ extern void getTypeOutputInfo(Oid type, Oid *typOutput, bool *typIsVarlena); extern void getTypeBinaryInputInfo(Oid type, Oid *typReceive, Oid *typIOParam); extern void getTypeBinaryOutputInfo(Oid type, Oid *typSend, bool *typIsVarlena); extern Oid get_typmodin(Oid typid); -extern Oid get_typcollation(Oid typid); +extern Oid get_typcollation(Oid typid); extern bool type_is_collatable(Oid typid); extern Oid getBaseType(Oid typid); extern Oid getBaseTypeAndTypmod(Oid typid, int32 *typmod); diff --git a/src/include/utils/numeric.h b/src/include/utils/numeric.h index 6147634817..229c2c0606 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/numeric.h +++ b/src/include/utils/numeric.h @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ typedef struct NumericData *Numeric; * Utility functions in numeric.c */ extern bool numeric_is_nan(Numeric num); -int32 numeric_maximum_size(int32 typmod); +int32 numeric_maximum_size(int32 typmod); extern char *numeric_out_sci(Numeric num, int scale); #endif /* _PG_NUMERIC_H_ */ diff --git a/src/include/utils/portal.h b/src/include/utils/portal.h index 3068003caa..6af1cd5b10 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/portal.h +++ b/src/include/utils/portal.h @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ * all the auxiliary queries.) * * PORTAL_ONE_MOD_WITH: the portal contains one single SELECT query, but - * it has data-modifying CTEs. This is currently treated the same as the + * it has data-modifying CTEs. This is currently treated the same as the * PORTAL_ONE_RETURNING case because of the possibility of needing to fire * triggers. It may act more like PORTAL_ONE_SELECT in future. * @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ typedef struct PortalData /* Presentation data, primarily used by the pg_cursors system view */ TimestampTz creation_time; /* time at which this portal was defined */ bool visible; /* include this portal in pg_cursors? */ -} PortalData; +} PortalData; /* * PortalIsValid diff --git a/src/include/utils/rbtree.h b/src/include/utils/rbtree.h index c506a689e0..c0dc63e463 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/rbtree.h +++ b/src/include/utils/rbtree.h @@ -17,13 +17,13 @@ * RBNode is intended to be used as the first field of a larger struct, * whose additional fields carry whatever payload data the caller needs * for a tree entry. (The total size of that larger struct is passed to - * rb_create.) RBNode is declared here to support this usage, but + * rb_create.) RBNode is declared here to support this usage, but * callers must treat it as an opaque struct. */ typedef struct RBNode { char iteratorState; /* workspace for iterating through tree */ - char color; /* node's current color, red or black */ + char color; /* node's current color, red or black */ struct RBNode *left; /* left child, or RBNIL if none */ struct RBNode *right; /* right child, or RBNIL if none */ struct RBNode *parent; /* parent, or NULL (not RBNIL!) if none */ @@ -63,4 +63,4 @@ extern void rb_delete(RBTree *rb, RBNode *node); extern void rb_begin_iterate(RBTree *rb, RBOrderControl ctrl); extern RBNode *rb_iterate(RBTree *rb); -#endif /* RBTREE_H */ +#endif /* RBTREE_H */ diff --git a/src/include/utils/rel.h b/src/include/utils/rel.h index d47c4beaa5..e2c2fa9ae4 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/rel.h +++ b/src/include/utils/rel.h @@ -179,9 +179,9 @@ typedef struct RelationData * index access support info (used only for an index relation) * * Note: only default support procs for each opclass are cached, namely - * those with lefttype and righttype equal to the opclass's opcintype. - * The arrays are indexed by support function number, which is a - * sufficient identifier given that restriction. + * those with lefttype and righttype equal to the opclass's opcintype. The + * arrays are indexed by support function number, which is a sufficient + * identifier given that restriction. * * Note: rd_amcache is available for index AMs to cache private data about * an index. This must be just a cache since it may get reset at any time @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ typedef struct RelationData Oid *rd_exclprocs; /* OIDs of exclusion ops' procs, if any */ uint16 *rd_exclstrats; /* exclusion ops' strategy numbers, if any */ void *rd_amcache; /* available for use by index AM */ - Oid *rd_indcollation; /* OIDs of index collations */ + Oid *rd_indcollation; /* OIDs of index collations */ /* * Hack for CLUSTER, rewriting ALTER TABLE, etc: when writing a new diff --git a/src/include/utils/tuplesort.h b/src/include/utils/tuplesort.h index 59505d4b57..a2085df869 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/tuplesort.h +++ b/src/include/utils/tuplesort.h @@ -41,9 +41,9 @@ typedef struct Tuplesortstate Tuplesortstate; * The "heap" API actually stores/sorts MinimalTuples, which means it doesn't * preserve the system columns (tuple identity and transaction visibility * info). The sort keys are specified by column numbers within the tuples - * and sort operator OIDs. We save some cycles by passing and returning the + * and sort operator OIDs. We save some cycles by passing and returning the * tuples in TupleTableSlots, rather than forming actual HeapTuples (which'd - * have to be converted to MinimalTuples). This API works well for sorts + * have to be converted to MinimalTuples). This API works well for sorts * executed as parts of plan trees. * * The "cluster" API stores/sorts full HeapTuples including all visibility @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ typedef struct Tuplesortstate Tuplesortstate; * go with this API, not the "begin_heap" one! * * The "index_btree" API stores/sorts IndexTuples (preserving all their - * header fields). The sort keys are specified by a btree index definition. + * header fields). The sort keys are specified by a btree index definition. * * The "index_hash" API is similar to index_btree, but the tuples are * actually sorted by their hash codes not the raw data. @@ -60,11 +60,11 @@ typedef struct Tuplesortstate Tuplesortstate; extern Tuplesortstate *tuplesort_begin_heap(TupleDesc tupDesc, int nkeys, AttrNumber *attNums, - Oid *sortOperators, Oid *collations, bool *nullsFirstFlags, + Oid *sortOperators, Oid *collations, bool *nullsFirstFlags, int workMem, bool randomAccess); extern Tuplesortstate *tuplesort_begin_cluster(TupleDesc tupDesc, - Relation indexRel, - int workMem, bool randomAccess); + Relation indexRel, + int workMem, bool randomAccess); extern Tuplesortstate *tuplesort_begin_index_btree(Relation indexRel, bool enforceUnique, int workMem, bool randomAccess); @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ extern Tuplesortstate *tuplesort_begin_index_hash(Relation indexRel, uint32 hash_mask, int workMem, bool randomAccess); extern Tuplesortstate *tuplesort_begin_datum(Oid datumType, - Oid sortOperator, Oid sortCollation, bool nullsFirstFlag, + Oid sortOperator, Oid sortCollation, bool nullsFirstFlag, int workMem, bool randomAccess); extern void tuplesort_set_bound(Tuplesortstate *state, int64 bound); diff --git a/src/include/utils/typcache.h b/src/include/utils/typcache.h index 2154657d88..e2f8c9ce3c 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/typcache.h +++ b/src/include/utils/typcache.h @@ -53,9 +53,9 @@ typedef struct TypeCacheEntry /* * Pre-set-up fmgr call info for the equality operator, the btree - * comparison function, and the hash calculation function. These are kept + * comparison function, and the hash calculation function. These are kept * in the type cache to avoid problems with memory leaks in repeated calls - * to array_eq, array_cmp, hash_array. There is not currently a need to + * to array_eq, array_cmp, hash_array. There is not currently a need to * maintain call info for the lt_opr or gt_opr. */ FmgrInfo eq_opr_finfo; @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ typedef struct TypeCacheEntry TupleDesc tupDesc; /* - * Private information about an enum type. NULL if not enum or + * Private information about an enum type. NULL if not enum or * information hasn't been requested. */ struct TypeCacheEnumData *enumData; diff --git a/src/include/utils/varbit.h b/src/include/utils/varbit.h index 847a1d33e2..e329d52e24 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/varbit.h +++ b/src/include/utils/varbit.h @@ -80,6 +80,7 @@ extern Datum bitle(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); extern Datum bitgt(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); extern Datum bitge(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); extern Datum bitcmp(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); + /* avoid the names bitand and bitor, since they are C++ keywords */ extern Datum bit_and(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); extern Datum bit_or(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); diff --git a/src/include/utils/xml.h b/src/include/utils/xml.h index 74464e82d6..6359cd6043 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/xml.h +++ b/src/include/utils/xml.h @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ typedef enum XML_STANDALONE_NO, XML_STANDALONE_NO_VALUE, XML_STANDALONE_OMITTED -} XmlStandaloneType; +} XmlStandaloneType; extern void pg_xml_init(void); extern void xml_ereport(int level, int sqlcode, const char *msg); @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ typedef enum { XMLBINARY_BASE64, XMLBINARY_HEX -} XmlBinaryType; +} XmlBinaryType; extern int xmlbinary; /* XmlBinaryType, but int for guc enum */ diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/compatlib/informix.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/compatlib/informix.c index af185d533b..3b30864866 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/compatlib/informix.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/compatlib/informix.c @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ static char * ecpg_strndup(const char *str, size_t len) { size_t real_len = strlen(str); - int use_len = (int) ((real_len > len) ? len : real_len); + int use_len = (int) ((real_len > len) ? len : real_len); char *new = malloc(use_len + 1); @@ -983,33 +983,33 @@ ldchar(char *src, int len, char *dest) int rgetmsg(int msgnum, char *s, int maxsize) { - (void) msgnum; /* keep the compiler quiet */ - (void) s; /* keep the compiler quiet */ - (void) maxsize; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) msgnum; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) s; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) maxsize; /* keep the compiler quiet */ return 0; } int rtypalign(int offset, int type) { - (void) offset; /* keep the compiler quiet */ - (void) type; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) offset; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) type; /* keep the compiler quiet */ return 0; } int rtypmsize(int type, int len) { - (void) type; /* keep the compiler quiet */ - (void) len; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) type; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) len; /* keep the compiler quiet */ return 0; } int rtypwidth(int sqltype, int sqllen) { - (void) sqltype; /* keep the compiler quiet */ - (void) sqllen; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) sqltype; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) sqllen; /* keep the compiler quiet */ return 0; } diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/connect.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/connect.c index 1f91878395..997046b38b 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/connect.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/connect.c @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ ECPGnoticeReceiver(void *arg, const PGresult *result) struct sqlca_t *sqlca = ECPGget_sqlca(); int sqlcode; - (void) arg; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) arg; /* keep the compiler quiet */ if (sqlstate == NULL) sqlstate = ECPG_SQLSTATE_ECPG_INTERNAL_ERROR; diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/memory.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/memory.c index 542bfc0c7d..a09cd26a54 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/memory.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/memory.c @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ static pthread_once_t auto_mem_once = PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT; static void auto_mem_destructor(void *arg) { - (void) arg; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) arg; /* keep the compiler quiet */ ECPGfree_auto_mem(); } diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/prepare.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/prepare.c index 0296d925b9..60c9c50b22 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/prepare.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/prepare.c @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ ECPGprepare(int lineno, const char *connection_name, const bool questionmarks, c struct prepared_statement *this, *prev; - (void) questionmarks; /* quiet the compiler */ + (void) questionmarks; /* quiet the compiler */ con = ecpg_get_connection(connection_name); if (!ecpg_init(con, connection_name, lineno)) @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ ecpg_prepared(const char *name, struct connection * con) char * ECPGprepared_statement(const char *connection_name, const char *name, int lineno) { - (void)lineno; /* keep the compiler quiet */ + (void) lineno; /* keep the compiler quiet */ return ecpg_prepared(name, ecpg_get_connection(connection_name)); } diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c index f198035a9a..6f7314875e 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ #include "extern.h" int ret_value = 0; -bool autocommit = false, +bool autocommit = false, auto_create_c = false, system_includes = false, force_indicator = true, @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ main(int argc, char *const argv[]) int fnr, c, out_option = 0; - bool verbose = false, + bool verbose = false, header_mode = false; struct _include_path *ip; const char *progname; diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/extern.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/extern.h index f2072f85d9..05b273cc24 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/extern.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/extern.h @@ -18,14 +18,14 @@ /* variables */ -extern bool autocommit, +extern bool autocommit, auto_create_c, system_includes, force_indicator, questionmarks, regression_mode, auto_prepare; -extern int braces_open, +extern int braces_open, ret_value, struct_level, ecpg_internal_var; diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-auth.c b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-auth.c index 7d2ef51f17..45e39e08e3 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-auth.c +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-auth.c @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ pg_krb5_sendauth(PGconn *conn) } retval = krb5_sendauth(info.pg_krb5_context, &auth_context, - (krb5_pointer) & conn->sock, (char *) conn->krbsrvname, + (krb5_pointer) &conn->sock, (char *) conn->krbsrvname, info.pg_krb5_client, server, AP_OPTS_MUTUAL_REQUIRED, NULL, 0, /* no creds, use ccache instead */ @@ -892,14 +892,14 @@ pg_fe_sendauth(AuthRequest areq, PGconn *conn) pgunlock_thread(); } break; -#else /* defined(ENABLE_GSS) || defined(ENABLE_SSPI) */ +#else /* defined(ENABLE_GSS) || defined(ENABLE_SSPI) */ /* No GSSAPI *or* SSPI support */ case AUTH_REQ_GSS: case AUTH_REQ_GSS_CONT: printfPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, libpq_gettext("GSSAPI authentication not supported\n")); return STATUS_ERROR; -#endif /* defined(ENABLE_GSS) || defined(ENABLE_SSPI) */ +#endif /* defined(ENABLE_GSS) || defined(ENABLE_SSPI) */ #ifdef ENABLE_SSPI case AUTH_REQ_SSPI: @@ -919,19 +919,20 @@ pg_fe_sendauth(AuthRequest areq, PGconn *conn) pgunlock_thread(); break; #else + /* * No SSPI support. However, if we have GSSAPI but not SSPI * support, AUTH_REQ_SSPI will have been handled in the codepath - * for AUTH_REQ_GSSAPI above, so don't duplicate the case label - * in that case. + * for AUTH_REQ_GSSAPI above, so don't duplicate the case label in + * that case. */ #if !defined(ENABLE_GSS) case AUTH_REQ_SSPI: printfPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, libpq_gettext("SSPI authentication not supported\n")); return STATUS_ERROR; -#endif /* !define(ENABLE_GSSAPI) */ -#endif /* ENABLE_SSPI */ +#endif /* !define(ENABLE_GSSAPI) */ +#endif /* ENABLE_SSPI */ case AUTH_REQ_CRYPT: diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c index aa24c37f9c..729730aa8c 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ #endif #define near #include <shlobj.h> -#ifdef WIN32_ONLY_COMPILER /* mstcpip.h is missing on mingw */ +#ifdef WIN32_ONLY_COMPILER /* mstcpip.h is missing on mingw */ #include <mstcpip.h> #endif #else @@ -1011,13 +1011,13 @@ connectFailureMessage(PGconn *conn, int errorno) else #endif /* HAVE_UNIX_SOCKETS */ { - char host_addr[NI_MAXHOST]; - bool display_host_addr; + char host_addr[NI_MAXHOST]; + bool display_host_addr; struct sockaddr_storage *addr = &conn->raddr.addr; /* - * Optionally display the network address with the hostname. - * This is useful to distinguish between IPv4 and IPv6 connections. + * Optionally display the network address with the hostname. This is + * useful to distinguish between IPv4 and IPv6 connections. */ if (conn->pghostaddr != NULL) strlcpy(host_addr, conn->pghostaddr, NI_MAXHOST); @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ connectFailureMessage(PGconn *conn, int errorno) else if (addr->ss_family == AF_INET6) { if (inet_net_ntop(AF_INET6, - &((struct sockaddr_in6 *) addr)->sin6_addr.s6_addr, + &((struct sockaddr_in6 *) addr)->sin6_addr.s6_addr, 128, host_addr, sizeof(host_addr)) == NULL) strcpy(host_addr, "???"); @@ -1043,25 +1043,25 @@ connectFailureMessage(PGconn *conn, int errorno) strcpy(host_addr, "???"); /* - * If the user did not supply an IP address using 'hostaddr', and - * 'host' was missing or does not match our lookup, display the - * looked-up IP address. + * If the user did not supply an IP address using 'hostaddr', and + * 'host' was missing or does not match our lookup, display the + * looked-up IP address. */ display_host_addr = (conn->pghostaddr == NULL) && - ((conn->pghost == NULL) || - (strcmp(conn->pghost, host_addr) != 0)); + ((conn->pghost == NULL) || + (strcmp(conn->pghost, host_addr) != 0)); appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, libpq_gettext("could not connect to server: %s\n" - "\tIs the server running on host \"%s\"%s%s%s and accepting\n" + "\tIs the server running on host \"%s\"%s%s%s and accepting\n" "\tTCP/IP connections on port %s?\n"), SOCK_STRERROR(errorno, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf)), (conn->pghostaddr && conn->pghostaddr[0] != '\0') ? conn->pghostaddr : (conn->pghost && conn->pghost[0] != '\0') - ? conn->pghost - : DefaultHost, - /* display the IP address only if not already output */ + ? conn->pghost + : DefaultHost, + /* display the IP address only if not already output */ display_host_addr ? " (" : "", display_host_addr ? host_addr : "", display_host_addr ? ")" : "", @@ -1121,10 +1121,10 @@ setKeepalivesIdle(PGconn *conn) if (setsockopt(conn->sock, IPPROTO_TCP, TCP_KEEPALIVE, (char *) &idle, sizeof(idle)) < 0) { - char sebuf[256]; + char sebuf[256]; appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("setsockopt(TCP_KEEPALIVE) failed: %s\n"), + libpq_gettext("setsockopt(TCP_KEEPALIVE) failed: %s\n"), SOCK_STRERROR(SOCK_ERRNO, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); return 0; } @@ -1196,8 +1196,7 @@ setKeepalivesCount(PGconn *conn) return 1; } - -#else /* Win32 */ +#else /* Win32 */ #ifdef SIO_KEEPALIVE_VALS /* * Enable keepalives and set the keepalive values on Win32, @@ -1206,20 +1205,20 @@ setKeepalivesCount(PGconn *conn) static int setKeepalivesWin32(PGconn *conn) { - struct tcp_keepalive ka; - DWORD retsize; - int idle = 0; - int interval = 0; + struct tcp_keepalive ka; + DWORD retsize; + int idle = 0; + int interval = 0; if (conn->keepalives_idle) idle = atoi(conn->keepalives_idle); if (idle <= 0) - idle = 2 * 60 * 60; /* 2 hours = default */ + idle = 2 * 60 * 60; /* 2 hours = default */ if (conn->keepalives_interval) interval = atoi(conn->keepalives_interval); if (interval <= 0) - interval = 1; /* 1 second = default */ + interval = 1; /* 1 second = default */ ka.onoff = 1; ka.keepalivetime = idle * 1000; @@ -1237,14 +1236,14 @@ setKeepalivesWin32(PGconn *conn) != 0) { appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("WSAIoctl(SIO_KEEPALIVE_VALS) failed: %ui\n"), + libpq_gettext("WSAIoctl(SIO_KEEPALIVE_VALS) failed: %ui\n"), WSAGetLastError()); return 0; } return 1; } -#endif /* SIO_KEEPALIVE_VALS */ -#endif /* WIN32 */ +#endif /* SIO_KEEPALIVE_VALS */ +#endif /* WIN32 */ /* ---------- * connectDBStart - @@ -1661,12 +1660,12 @@ keep_going: /* We will come back to here until there is || !setKeepalivesInterval(conn) || !setKeepalivesCount(conn)) err = 1; -#else /* WIN32 */ +#else /* WIN32 */ #ifdef SIO_KEEPALIVE_VALS else if (!setKeepalivesWin32(conn)) err = 1; -#endif /* SIO_KEEPALIVE_VALS */ -#endif /* WIN32 */ +#endif /* SIO_KEEPALIVE_VALS */ +#endif /* WIN32 */ if (err) { @@ -1864,8 +1863,8 @@ keep_going: /* We will come back to here until there is if (getpeereid(conn->sock, &uid, &gid) != 0) { appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("could not get peer credentials: %s\n"), - pqStrerror(errno, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); + libpq_gettext("could not get peer credentials: %s\n"), + pqStrerror(errno, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); goto error_return; } #elif defined(SO_PEERCRED) @@ -1878,20 +1877,20 @@ keep_going: /* We will come back to here until there is so_len != sizeof(peercred)) { appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("could not get peer credentials: %s\n"), - pqStrerror(errno, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); + libpq_gettext("could not get peer credentials: %s\n"), + pqStrerror(errno, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); goto error_return; } uid = peercred.uid; #elif defined(HAVE_GETPEERUCRED) ucred_t *ucred; - ucred = NULL; /* must be initialized to NULL */ + ucred = NULL; /* must be initialized to NULL */ if (getpeerucred(conn->sock, &ucred) == -1) { appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("could not get peer credentials: %s\n"), - pqStrerror(errno, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); + libpq_gettext("could not get peer credentials: %s\n"), + pqStrerror(errno, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); goto error_return; } @@ -1899,7 +1898,7 @@ keep_going: /* We will come back to here until there is { appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, libpq_gettext("could not get effective UID from peer credentials: %s\n"), - pqStrerror(errno, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); + pqStrerror(errno, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); ucred_free(ucred); goto error_return; } @@ -1925,7 +1924,7 @@ keep_going: /* We will come back to here until there is conn->requirepeer, pass->pw_name); goto error_return; } -#else /* can't support requirepeer */ +#else /* can't support requirepeer */ appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, libpq_gettext("requirepeer parameter is not supported on this platform\n")); goto error_return; @@ -2613,18 +2612,18 @@ internal_ping(PGconn *conn) * failure in sufficient detail to decide what to return. We do not want * to report that the server is not up just because we didn't have a valid * password, for example. In fact, any sort of authentication request - * implies the server is up. (We need this check since the libpq side - * of things might have pulled the plug on the connection before getting - * an error as such from the postmaster.) + * implies the server is up. (We need this check since the libpq side of + * things might have pulled the plug on the connection before getting an + * error as such from the postmaster.) */ if (conn->auth_req_received) return PQPING_OK; /* * If we failed to get any ERROR response from the postmaster, report - * PQPING_NO_RESPONSE. This result could be somewhat misleading for a + * PQPING_NO_RESPONSE. This result could be somewhat misleading for a * pre-7.4 server, since it won't send back a SQLSTATE, but those are long - * out of support. Another corner case where the server could return a + * out of support. Another corner case where the server could return a * failure without a SQLSTATE is fork failure, but NO_RESPONSE isn't * totally unreasonable for that anyway. We expect that every other * failure case in a modern server will produce a report with a SQLSTATE. @@ -2638,8 +2637,8 @@ internal_ping(PGconn *conn) return PQPING_NO_RESPONSE; /* - * Report PQPING_REJECT if server says it's not accepting connections. - * (We distinguish this case mainly for the convenience of pg_ctl.) + * Report PQPING_REJECT if server says it's not accepting connections. (We + * distinguish this case mainly for the convenience of pg_ctl.) */ if (strcmp(conn->last_sqlstate, ERRCODE_CANNOT_CONNECT_NOW) == 0) return PQPING_REJECT; diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-exec.c b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-exec.c index 42da1a8f90..83c5ea363f 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-exec.c +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-exec.c @@ -1787,8 +1787,8 @@ PQexecStart(PGconn *conn) { /* We don't allow PQexec during COPY BOTH */ printfPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("PQexec not allowed during COPY BOTH\n")); - return false; + libpq_gettext("PQexec not allowed during COPY BOTH\n")); + return false; } /* check for loss of connection, too */ if (conn->status == CONNECTION_BAD) @@ -1813,8 +1813,8 @@ PQexecFinish(PGconn *conn) * than one --- but merge error messages if we get more than one error * result. * - * We have to stop if we see copy in/out/both, however. We will resume parsing - * after application performs the data transfer. + * We have to stop if we see copy in/out/both, however. We will resume + * parsing after application performs the data transfer. * * Also stop if the connection is lost (else we'll loop infinitely). */ @@ -3464,11 +3464,11 @@ PQunescapeBytea(const unsigned char *strtext, size_t *retbuflen) (ISOCTDIGIT(strtext[i + 1])) && (ISOCTDIGIT(strtext[i + 2]))) { - int byte; + int byte; byte = OCTVAL(strtext[i++]); - byte = (byte <<3) +OCTVAL(strtext[i++]); - byte = (byte <<3) +OCTVAL(strtext[i++]); + byte = (byte << 3) + OCTVAL(strtext[i++]); + byte = (byte << 3) + OCTVAL(strtext[i++]); buffer[j++] = byte; } } diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-protocol2.c b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-protocol2.c index 05357de1c7..77c4d5ac57 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-protocol2.c +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-protocol2.c @@ -100,11 +100,11 @@ pqSetenvPoll(PGconn *conn) { switch (conn->setenv_state) { - /* - * The _CLIENT_ENCODING_SEND code is slightly different - * from _OPTION_SEND below (e.g., no getenv() call), which - * is why a different state is used. - */ + /* + * The _CLIENT_ENCODING_SEND code is slightly different from + * _OPTION_SEND below (e.g., no getenv() call), which is why a + * different state is used. + */ case SETENV_STATE_CLIENT_ENCODING_SEND: { char setQuery[100]; /* note length limit in @@ -601,9 +601,10 @@ pqParseInput2(PGconn *conn) case 'H': /* Start Copy Out */ conn->asyncStatus = PGASYNC_COPY_OUT; break; + /* - * Don't need to process CopyBothResponse here because - * it never arrives from the server during protocol 2.0. + * Don't need to process CopyBothResponse here because it + * never arrives from the server during protocol 2.0. */ default: printfPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-protocol3.c b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-protocol3.c index cf0b91a9bc..45a84d8e55 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-protocol3.c +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-protocol3.c @@ -1400,8 +1400,8 @@ pqGetCopyData3(PGconn *conn, char **buffer, int async) /* * On end-of-copy, exit COPY_OUT or COPY_BOTH mode and let caller * read status with PQgetResult(). The normal case is that it's - * Copy Done, but we let parseInput read that. If error, we expect - * the state was already changed. + * Copy Done, but we let parseInput read that. If error, we + * expect the state was already changed. */ if (msgLength == -1) conn->asyncStatus = PGASYNC_BUSY; diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c index 2b7b0341cd..cd1292ccb6 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c @@ -589,8 +589,8 @@ static bool verify_peer_name_matches_certificate(PGconn *conn) { /* - * If told not to verify the peer name, don't do it. Return true indicating - * that the verification was successful. + * If told not to verify the peer name, don't do it. Return true + * indicating that the verification was successful. */ if (strcmp(conn->sslmode, "verify-full") != 0) return true; @@ -839,7 +839,7 @@ initialize_SSL(PGconn *conn) !(conn->sslrootcert && strlen(conn->sslrootcert) > 0) || !(conn->sslcrl && strlen(conn->sslcrl) > 0)) have_homedir = pqGetHomeDirectory(homedir, sizeof(homedir)); - else /* won't need it */ + else /* won't need it */ have_homedir = false; /* Read the client certificate file */ @@ -1135,8 +1135,8 @@ initialize_SSL(PGconn *conn) "Either provide the file or change sslmode to disable server certificate verification.\n")); else printfPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("root certificate file \"%s\" does not exist\n" - "Either provide the file or change sslmode to disable server certificate verification.\n"), fnbuf); + libpq_gettext("root certificate file \"%s\" does not exist\n" + "Either provide the file or change sslmode to disable server certificate verification.\n"), fnbuf); return -1; } } diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-fe.h b/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-fe.h index de13a03cf0..d7802753ef 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-fe.h +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-fe.h @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ extern int PQisnonblocking(const PGconn *conn); extern int PQisthreadsafe(void); extern PGPing PQping(const char *conninfo); extern PGPing PQpingParams(const char **keywords, - const char **values, int expand_dbname); + const char **values, int expand_dbname); /* Force the write buffer to be written (or at least try) */ extern int PQflush(PGconn *conn); diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h b/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h index 25c779acd7..fbd94ebfb8 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ struct pg_conn char *pgtty; /* tty on which the backend messages is * displayed (OBSOLETE, NOT USED) */ char *connect_timeout; /* connection timeout (numeric string) */ - char *client_encoding_initial; /* encoding to use */ + char *client_encoding_initial; /* encoding to use */ char *pgoptions; /* options to start the backend with */ char *appname; /* application name */ char *fbappname; /* fallback application name */ @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ struct pg_conn PGTransactionStatusType xactStatus; /* never changes to ACTIVE */ PGQueryClass queryclass; char *last_query; /* last SQL command, or NULL if unknown */ - char last_sqlstate[6]; /* last reported SQLSTATE */ + char last_sqlstate[6]; /* last reported SQLSTATE */ bool options_valid; /* true if OK to attempt connection */ bool nonblocking; /* whether this connection is using nonblock * sending semantics */ @@ -353,7 +353,8 @@ struct pg_conn SockAddr raddr; /* Remote address */ ProtocolVersion pversion; /* FE/BE protocol version in use */ int sversion; /* server version, e.g. 70401 for 7.4.1 */ - bool auth_req_received; /* true if any type of auth req received */ + bool auth_req_received; /* true if any type of auth req + * received */ bool password_needed; /* true if server demanded a password */ bool dot_pgpass_used; /* true if used .pgpass */ bool sigpipe_so; /* have we masked SIGPIPE via SO_NOSIGPIPE? */ diff --git a/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c b/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c index 35bf72ca30..ac9134272c 100644 --- a/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c +++ b/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c @@ -1211,7 +1211,7 @@ plperl_sv_to_datum(SV *sv, FmgrInfo *finfo, Oid typid, Oid typioparam, ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), - errmsg("PL/Perl function must return reference to hash or array"))); + errmsg("PL/Perl function must return reference to hash or array"))); return (Datum) 0; /* shut up compiler */ } else diff --git a/src/pl/plperl/plperl.h b/src/pl/plperl/plperl.h index 65b27a344f..5eaec73d2b 100644 --- a/src/pl/plperl/plperl.h +++ b/src/pl/plperl/plperl.h @@ -44,9 +44,9 @@ /* supply HeUTF8 if it's missing - ppport.h doesn't supply it, unfortunately */ #ifndef HeUTF8 -#define HeUTF8(he) ((HeKLEN(he) == HEf_SVKEY) ? \ - SvUTF8(HeKEY_sv(he)) : \ - (U32)HeKUTF8(he)) +#define HeUTF8(he) ((HeKLEN(he) == HEf_SVKEY) ? \ + SvUTF8(HeKEY_sv(he)) : \ + (U32)HeKUTF8(he)) #endif /* declare routines from plperl.c for access by .xs files */ @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ HV *plperl_spi_exec_prepared(char *, HV *, int, SV **); SV *plperl_spi_query_prepared(char *, int, SV **); void plperl_spi_freeplan(char *); void plperl_spi_cursor_close(char *); -char *plperl_sv_to_literal(SV *, char *); +char *plperl_sv_to_literal(SV *, char *); diff --git a/src/pl/plperl/plperl_helpers.h b/src/pl/plperl/plperl_helpers.h index 4480ce8f5e..81c177b164 100644 --- a/src/pl/plperl/plperl_helpers.h +++ b/src/pl/plperl/plperl_helpers.h @@ -7,7 +7,8 @@ static inline char * utf_u2e(const char *utf8_str, size_t len) { - char *ret = (char*)pg_do_encoding_conversion((unsigned char*)utf8_str, len, PG_UTF8, GetDatabaseEncoding()); + char *ret = (char *) pg_do_encoding_conversion((unsigned char *) utf8_str, len, PG_UTF8, GetDatabaseEncoding()); + if (ret == utf8_str) ret = pstrdup(ret); return ret; @@ -19,7 +20,8 @@ utf_u2e(const char *utf8_str, size_t len) static inline char * utf_e2u(const char *str) { - char *ret = (char*)pg_do_encoding_conversion((unsigned char*)str, strlen(str), GetDatabaseEncoding(), PG_UTF8); + char *ret = (char *) pg_do_encoding_conversion((unsigned char *) str, strlen(str), GetDatabaseEncoding(), PG_UTF8); + if (ret == str) ret = pstrdup(ret); return ret; @@ -32,8 +34,8 @@ utf_e2u(const char *str) static inline char * sv2cstr(SV *sv) { - char *val; - STRLEN len; + char *val; + STRLEN len; /* * get a utf8 encoded char * out of perl. *note* it may not be valid utf8! @@ -55,8 +57,8 @@ sv2cstr(SV *sv) static inline SV * cstr2sv(const char *str) { - SV *sv; - char *utf8_str = utf_e2u(str); + SV *sv; + char *utf8_str = utf_e2u(str); sv = newSVpv(utf8_str, 0); SvUTF8_on(sv); diff --git a/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_comp.c b/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_comp.c index 8b963bf818..9f919b88c2 100644 --- a/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_comp.c +++ b/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_comp.c @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ do_compile(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, /* Create datatype info */ argdtype = plpgsql_build_datatype(argtypeid, -1, - function->fn_input_collation); + function->fn_input_collation); /* Disallow pseudotype argument */ /* (note we already replaced polymorphic types) */ @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ do_compile(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, (void) plpgsql_build_variable("$0", 0, build_datatype(typeTup, -1, - function->fn_input_collation), + function->fn_input_collation), true); } } @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ do_compile(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, var = plpgsql_build_variable("tg_when", 0, plpgsql_build_datatype(TEXTOID, -1, - function->fn_input_collation), + function->fn_input_collation), true); function->tg_when_varno = var->dno; @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ do_compile(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, var = plpgsql_build_variable("tg_level", 0, plpgsql_build_datatype(TEXTOID, -1, - function->fn_input_collation), + function->fn_input_collation), true); function->tg_level_varno = var->dno; @@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ do_compile(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, var = plpgsql_build_variable("tg_op", 0, plpgsql_build_datatype(TEXTOID, -1, - function->fn_input_collation), + function->fn_input_collation), true); function->tg_op_varno = var->dno; @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ do_compile(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, var = plpgsql_build_variable("tg_argv", 0, plpgsql_build_datatype(TEXTARRAYOID, -1, - function->fn_input_collation), + function->fn_input_collation), true); function->tg_argv_varno = var->dno; @@ -998,13 +998,13 @@ plpgsql_post_column_ref(ParseState *pstate, ColumnRef *cref, Node *var) /* * If we find a record/row variable but can't match a field name, throw - * error if there was no core resolution for the ColumnRef either. In + * error if there was no core resolution for the ColumnRef either. In * that situation, the reference is inevitably going to fail, and - * complaining about the record/row variable is likely to be more - * on-point than the core parser's error message. (It's too bad we - * don't have access to transformColumnRef's internal crerr state here, - * as in case of a conflict with a table name this could still be less - * than the most helpful error message possible.) + * complaining about the record/row variable is likely to be more on-point + * than the core parser's error message. (It's too bad we don't have + * access to transformColumnRef's internal crerr state here, as in case of + * a conflict with a table name this could still be less than the most + * helpful error message possible.) */ myvar = resolve_column_ref(pstate, expr, cref, (var == NULL)); @@ -1970,7 +1970,7 @@ build_row_from_class(Oid classOid) var = plpgsql_build_variable(refname, 0, plpgsql_build_datatype(attrStruct->atttypid, attrStruct->atttypmod, - attrStruct->attcollation), + attrStruct->attcollation), false); /* Add the variable to the row */ diff --git a/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c b/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c index f793991209..5fccf096de 100644 --- a/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c +++ b/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ static int exec_stmt_fors(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, static int exec_stmt_forc(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_forc *stmt); static int exec_stmt_foreach_a(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, - PLpgSQL_stmt_foreach_a *stmt); + PLpgSQL_stmt_foreach_a *stmt); static int exec_stmt_open(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_open *stmt); static int exec_stmt_fetch(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, @@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ exec_stmt_block(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_block *block) MemoryContext oldcontext = CurrentMemoryContext; ResourceOwner oldowner = CurrentResourceOwner; ExprContext *old_eval_econtext = estate->eval_econtext; - ErrorData *save_cur_error = estate->cur_error; + ErrorData *save_cur_error = estate->cur_error; estate->err_text = gettext_noop("during statement block entry"); @@ -1518,7 +1518,7 @@ exec_stmt_case(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_case *stmt) if (t_var->datatype->typoid != t_oid) t_var->datatype = plpgsql_build_datatype(t_oid, -1, - estate->func->fn_input_collation); + estate->func->fn_input_collation); /* now we can assign to the variable */ exec_assign_value(estate, @@ -2046,16 +2046,16 @@ exec_stmt_forc(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_forc *stmt) static int exec_stmt_foreach_a(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_foreach_a *stmt) { - ArrayType *arr; - Oid arrtype; - PLpgSQL_datum *loop_var; - Oid loop_var_elem_type; - bool found = false; - int rc = PLPGSQL_RC_OK; - ArrayIterator array_iterator; - Oid iterator_result_type; - Datum value; - bool isnull; + ArrayType *arr; + Oid arrtype; + PLpgSQL_datum *loop_var; + Oid loop_var_elem_type; + bool found = false; + int rc = PLPGSQL_RC_OK; + ArrayIterator array_iterator; + Oid iterator_result_type; + Datum value; + bool isnull; /* get the value of the array expression */ value = exec_eval_expr(estate, stmt->expr, &isnull, &arrtype); @@ -2085,8 +2085,8 @@ exec_stmt_foreach_a(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_foreach_a *stmt) if (stmt->slice < 0 || stmt->slice > ARR_NDIM(arr)) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_ARRAY_SUBSCRIPT_ERROR), - errmsg("slice dimension (%d) is out of the valid range 0..%d", - stmt->slice, ARR_NDIM(arr)))); + errmsg("slice dimension (%d) is out of the valid range 0..%d", + stmt->slice, ARR_NDIM(arr)))); /* Set up the loop variable and see if it is of an array type */ loop_var = estate->datums[stmt->varno]; @@ -2104,19 +2104,19 @@ exec_stmt_foreach_a(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_foreach_a *stmt) loop_var)); /* - * Sanity-check the loop variable type. We don't try very hard here, - * and should not be too picky since it's possible that exec_assign_value - * can coerce values of different types. But it seems worthwhile to - * complain if the array-ness of the loop variable is not right. + * Sanity-check the loop variable type. We don't try very hard here, and + * should not be too picky since it's possible that exec_assign_value can + * coerce values of different types. But it seems worthwhile to complain + * if the array-ness of the loop variable is not right. */ if (stmt->slice > 0 && loop_var_elem_type == InvalidOid) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), - errmsg("FOREACH ... SLICE loop variable must be of an array type"))); + errmsg("FOREACH ... SLICE loop variable must be of an array type"))); if (stmt->slice == 0 && loop_var_elem_type != InvalidOid) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH), - errmsg("FOREACH loop variable must not be of an array type"))); + errmsg("FOREACH loop variable must not be of an array type"))); /* Create an iterator to step through the array */ array_iterator = array_create_iterator(arr, stmt->slice); @@ -3949,9 +3949,9 @@ exec_assign_value(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, /* * We need to do subscript evaluation, which might require * evaluating general expressions; and the caller might have - * done that too in order to prepare the input Datum. We - * have to save and restore the caller's SPI_execute result, - * if any. + * done that too in order to prepare the input Datum. We have + * to save and restore the caller's SPI_execute result, if + * any. */ save_eval_tuptable = estate->eval_tuptable; estate->eval_tuptable = NULL; @@ -4017,11 +4017,11 @@ exec_assign_value(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, errmsg("array subscript in assignment must not be null"))); /* - * Clean up in case the subscript expression wasn't simple. - * We can't do exec_eval_cleanup, but we can do this much - * (which is safe because the integer subscript value is - * surely pass-by-value), and we must do it in case the - * next subscript expression isn't simple either. + * Clean up in case the subscript expression wasn't + * simple. We can't do exec_eval_cleanup, but we can do + * this much (which is safe because the integer subscript + * value is surely pass-by-value), and we must do it in + * case the next subscript expression isn't simple either. */ if (estate->eval_tuptable != NULL) SPI_freetuptable(estate->eval_tuptable); @@ -4355,7 +4355,7 @@ exec_get_datum_collation(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, /* XXX there's no SPI_getcollid, as yet */ if (fno > 0) collid = rec->tupdesc->attrs[fno - 1]->attcollation; - else /* no system column types have collation */ + else /* no system column types have collation */ collid = InvalidOid; break; } @@ -4726,7 +4726,7 @@ loop_exit: * Because we only store one execution tree for a simple expression, we * can't handle recursion cases. So, if we see the tree is already busy * with an evaluation in the current xact, we just return FALSE and let the - * caller run the expression the hard way. (Other alternatives such as + * caller run the expression the hard way. (Other alternatives such as * creating a new tree for a recursive call either introduce memory leaks, * or add enough bookkeeping to be doubtful wins anyway.) Another case that * is covered by the expr_simple_in_use test is where a previous execution @@ -4907,7 +4907,7 @@ setup_param_list(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_expr *expr) /* sizeof(ParamListInfoData) includes the first array element */ paramLI = (ParamListInfo) palloc0(sizeof(ParamListInfoData) + - (estate->ndatums - 1) *sizeof(ParamExternData)); + (estate->ndatums - 1) * sizeof(ParamExternData)); paramLI->paramFetch = plpgsql_param_fetch; paramLI->paramFetchArg = (void *) estate; paramLI->parserSetup = (ParserSetupHook) plpgsql_parser_setup; diff --git a/src/pl/plpgsql/src/plpgsql.h b/src/pl/plpgsql/src/plpgsql.h index 0429f68d4c..e50d7eb45f 100644 --- a/src/pl/plpgsql/src/plpgsql.h +++ b/src/pl/plpgsql/src/plpgsql.h @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ extern PLpgSQL_type *plpgsql_parse_cwordtype(List *idents); extern PLpgSQL_type *plpgsql_parse_wordrowtype(char *ident); extern PLpgSQL_type *plpgsql_parse_cwordrowtype(List *idents); extern PLpgSQL_type *plpgsql_build_datatype(Oid typeOid, int32 typmod, - Oid collation); + Oid collation); extern PLpgSQL_variable *plpgsql_build_variable(const char *refname, int lineno, PLpgSQL_type *dtype, bool add2namespace); @@ -906,7 +906,7 @@ extern void plpgsql_subxact_cb(SubXactEvent event, SubTransactionId mySubid, extern Oid exec_get_datum_type(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_datum *datum); extern Oid exec_get_datum_collation(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, - PLpgSQL_datum *datum); + PLpgSQL_datum *datum); /* ---------- * Functions for namespace handling in pl_funcs.c diff --git a/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c b/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c index 47d898a976..5e600daa96 100644 --- a/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c +++ b/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ typedef union PLyTypeInput struct PLyObToDatum; typedef Datum (*PLyObToDatumFunc) (struct PLyObToDatum *, int32 typmod, - PyObject *); + PyObject *); typedef struct PLyObToDatum { @@ -288,8 +288,8 @@ static HTAB *PLy_spi_exceptions; typedef struct PLyExceptionEntry { - int sqlstate; /* hash key, must be first */ - PyObject *exc; /* corresponding exception */ + int sqlstate; /* hash key, must be first */ + PyObject *exc; /* corresponding exception */ } PLyExceptionEntry; @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(plpython_inline_handler); /* most of the remaining of the declarations, all static */ /* - * These should only be called once from _PG_init. Initialize the + * These should only be called once from _PG_init. Initialize the * Python interpreter and global data. */ static void PLy_init_interp(void); @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ static PyObject *PLy_procedure_call(PLyProcedure *, char *, PyObject *); static PLyProcedure *PLy_procedure_get(Oid fn_oid, bool is_trigger); static PLyProcedure *PLy_procedure_create(HeapTuple procTup, - Oid fn_oid, bool is_trigger); + Oid fn_oid, bool is_trigger); static void PLy_procedure_compile(PLyProcedure *, const char *); static char *PLy_procedure_munge_source(const char *, const char *); @@ -660,17 +660,16 @@ PLy_trigger_handler(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, PLyProcedure *proc) HeapTuple rv = NULL; PyObject *volatile plargs = NULL; PyObject *volatile plrv = NULL; - TriggerData *tdata; + TriggerData *tdata; Assert(CALLED_AS_TRIGGER(fcinfo)); /* - * Input/output conversion for trigger tuples. Use the result - * TypeInfo variable to store the tuple conversion info. We do - * this over again on each call to cover the possibility that the - * relation's tupdesc changed since the trigger was last called. - * PLy_input_tuple_funcs and PLy_output_tuple_funcs are - * responsible for not doing repetitive work. + * Input/output conversion for trigger tuples. Use the result TypeInfo + * variable to store the tuple conversion info. We do this over again on + * each call to cover the possibility that the relation's tupdesc changed + * since the trigger was last called. PLy_input_tuple_funcs and + * PLy_output_tuple_funcs are responsible for not doing repetitive work. */ tdata = (TriggerData *) fcinfo->context; @@ -1086,8 +1085,8 @@ PLy_function_handler(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, PLyProcedure *proc) if (!proc->is_setof || proc->setof == NULL) { /* - * Simple type returning function or first time for SETOF function: - * actually execute the function. + * Simple type returning function or first time for SETOF + * function: actually execute the function. */ plargs = PLy_function_build_args(fcinfo, proc); plrv = PLy_procedure_call(proc, "args", plargs); @@ -1304,26 +1303,26 @@ static PyObject * PLy_procedure_call(PLyProcedure *proc, char *kargs, PyObject *vargs) { PyObject *rv; - int volatile save_subxact_level = list_length(explicit_subtransactions); + int volatile save_subxact_level = list_length(explicit_subtransactions); PyDict_SetItemString(proc->globals, kargs, vargs); PG_TRY(); { #if PY_VERSION_HEX >= 0x03020000 - rv = PyEval_EvalCode(proc->code, - proc->globals, proc->globals); + rv = PyEval_EvalCode(proc->code, + proc->globals, proc->globals); #else - rv = PyEval_EvalCode((PyCodeObject *) proc->code, - proc->globals, proc->globals); + rv = PyEval_EvalCode((PyCodeObject *) proc->code, + proc->globals, proc->globals); #endif - /* - * Since plpy will only let you close subtransactions that - * you started, you cannot *unnest* subtransactions, only - * *nest* them without closing. - */ - Assert(list_length(explicit_subtransactions) >= save_subxact_level); + /* + * Since plpy will only let you close subtransactions that you + * started, you cannot *unnest* subtransactions, only *nest* them + * without closing. + */ + Assert(list_length(explicit_subtransactions) >= save_subxact_level); } PG_CATCH(); { @@ -1470,8 +1469,8 @@ PLy_procedure_valid(PLyProcedure *proc, HeapTuple procTup) /* If there are composite input arguments, they might have changed */ for (i = 0; i < proc->nargs; i++) { - Oid relid; - HeapTuple relTup; + Oid relid; + HeapTuple relTup; /* Short-circuit on first changed argument */ if (!valid) @@ -1516,7 +1515,7 @@ static PLyProcedure * PLy_procedure_get(Oid fn_oid, bool is_trigger) { HeapTuple procTup; - PLyProcedureEntry * volatile entry; + PLyProcedureEntry *volatile entry; bool found; procTup = SearchSysCache1(PROCOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(fn_oid)); @@ -1636,8 +1635,8 @@ PLy_procedure_create(HeapTuple procTup, Oid fn_oid, bool is_trigger) procStruct->prorettype != RECORDOID) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("PL/Python functions cannot return type %s", - format_type_be(procStruct->prorettype)))); + errmsg("PL/Python functions cannot return type %s", + format_type_be(procStruct->prorettype)))); } if (rvTypeStruct->typtype == TYPTYPE_COMPOSITE || @@ -1986,8 +1985,11 @@ PLy_output_record_funcs(PLyTypeInfo *arg, TupleDesc desc) arg->out.d.typmod = desc->tdtypmod; /* proceed with normal I/O function caching */ PLy_output_tuple_funcs(arg, desc); - /* it should change is_rowtype to 1, so we won't go through this again - * unless the the output record description changes */ + + /* + * it should change is_rowtype to 1, so we won't go through this again + * unless the the output record description changes + */ Assert(arg->is_rowtype == 1); } @@ -2373,9 +2375,9 @@ PLyDict_FromTuple(PLyTypeInfo *info, HeapTuple tuple, TupleDesc desc) } /* - * Convert a Python object to a PostgreSQL tuple, using all supported - * conversion methods: tuple as a sequence, as a mapping or as an object that - * has __getattr__ support. + * Convert a Python object to a PostgreSQL tuple, using all supported + * conversion methods: tuple as a sequence, as a mapping or as an object that + * has __getattr__ support. */ static HeapTuple PLyObject_ToTuple(PLyTypeInfo *info, TupleDesc desc, PyObject *plrv) @@ -2469,7 +2471,7 @@ PLyObject_ToComposite(PLyObToDatum *arg, int32 typmod, PyObject *plrv) { HeapTuple tuple = NULL; Datum rv; - PLyTypeInfo info; + PLyTypeInfo info; TupleDesc desc; if (typmod != -1) @@ -2977,7 +2979,7 @@ static PyTypeObject PLy_SubtransactionType = { /* * methods */ - PLy_subtransaction_dealloc, /* tp_dealloc */ + PLy_subtransaction_dealloc, /* tp_dealloc */ 0, /* tp_print */ 0, /* tp_getattr */ 0, /* tp_setattr */ @@ -3000,7 +3002,7 @@ static PyTypeObject PLy_SubtransactionType = { 0, /* tp_weaklistoffset */ 0, /* tp_iter */ 0, /* tp_iternext */ - PLy_subtransaction_methods, /* tp_tpmethods */ + PLy_subtransaction_methods, /* tp_tpmethods */ }; static PyMethodDef PLy_methods[] = { @@ -3264,12 +3266,11 @@ PLy_spi_prepare(PyObject *self, PyObject *args) PG_TRY(); { - int i; + int i; /* - * the other loop might throw an exception, if PLyTypeInfo - * member isn't properly initialized the Py_DECREF(plan) will - * go boom + * the other loop might throw an exception, if PLyTypeInfo member + * isn't properly initialized the Py_DECREF(plan) will go boom */ for (i = 0; i < nargs; i++) { @@ -3311,9 +3312,10 @@ PLy_spi_prepare(PyObject *self, PyObject *args) elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for type %u", typeId); Py_DECREF(optr); + /* - * set optr to NULL, so we won't try to unref it again in - * case of an error + * set optr to NULL, so we won't try to unref it again in case of + * an error */ optr = NULL; @@ -3324,7 +3326,7 @@ PLy_spi_prepare(PyObject *self, PyObject *args) else ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("plpy.prepare does not support composite types"))); + errmsg("plpy.prepare does not support composite types"))); ReleaseSysCache(typeTup); } @@ -3355,9 +3357,9 @@ PLy_spi_prepare(PyObject *self, PyObject *args) } PG_CATCH(); { - ErrorData *edata; + ErrorData *edata; PLyExceptionEntry *entry; - PyObject *exc; + PyObject *exc; /* Save error info */ MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext); @@ -3372,9 +3374,9 @@ PLy_spi_prepare(PyObject *self, PyObject *args) CurrentResourceOwner = oldowner; /* - * If AtEOSubXact_SPI() popped any SPI context of the subxact, it - * will have left us in a disconnected state. We need this hack to - * return to connected state. + * If AtEOSubXact_SPI() popped any SPI context of the subxact, it will + * have left us in a disconnected state. We need this hack to return + * to connected state. */ SPI_restore_connection(); @@ -3470,7 +3472,7 @@ PLy_spi_execute_plan(PyObject *ob, PyObject *list, long limit) PG_TRY(); { - char * volatile nulls; + char *volatile nulls; volatile int j; if (nargs > 0) @@ -3535,9 +3537,9 @@ PLy_spi_execute_plan(PyObject *ob, PyObject *list, long limit) PG_CATCH(); { int k; - ErrorData *edata; + ErrorData *edata; PLyExceptionEntry *entry; - PyObject *exc; + PyObject *exc; /* Save error info */ MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext); @@ -3563,9 +3565,9 @@ PLy_spi_execute_plan(PyObject *ob, PyObject *list, long limit) CurrentResourceOwner = oldowner; /* - * If AtEOSubXact_SPI() popped any SPI context of the subxact, it - * will have left us in a disconnected state. We need this hack to - * return to connected state. + * If AtEOSubXact_SPI() popped any SPI context of the subxact, it will + * have left us in a disconnected state. We need this hack to return + * to connected state. */ SPI_restore_connection(); @@ -3636,9 +3638,9 @@ PLy_spi_execute_query(char *query, long limit) } PG_CATCH(); { - ErrorData *edata; - PLyExceptionEntry *entry; - PyObject *exc; + ErrorData *edata; + PLyExceptionEntry *entry; + PyObject *exc; /* Save error info */ MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext); @@ -3651,9 +3653,9 @@ PLy_spi_execute_query(char *query, long limit) CurrentResourceOwner = oldowner; /* - * If AtEOSubXact_SPI() popped any SPI context of the subxact, it - * will have left us in a disconnected state. We need this hack to - * return to connected state. + * If AtEOSubXact_SPI() popped any SPI context of the subxact, it will + * have left us in a disconnected state. We need this hack to return + * to connected state. */ SPI_restore_connection(); @@ -3877,8 +3879,8 @@ PLy_subtransaction_exit(PyObject *self, PyObject *args) PLy_free(subxactdata); /* - * AtEOSubXact_SPI() should not have popped any SPI context, but - * just in case it did, make sure we remain connected. + * AtEOSubXact_SPI() should not have popped any SPI context, but just in + * case it did, make sure we remain connected. */ SPI_restore_connection(); @@ -3937,11 +3939,11 @@ PLy_add_exceptions(PyObject *plpy) if (PyModule_AddObject(plpy, "spiexceptions", excmod) < 0) PLy_elog(ERROR, "failed to add the spiexceptions module"); -/* +/* * XXX it appears that in some circumstances the reference count of the * spiexceptions module drops to zero causing a Python assert failure when * the garbage collector visits the module. This has been observed on the - * buildfarm. To fix this, add an additional ref for the module here. + * buildfarm. To fix this, add an additional ref for the module here. * * This shouldn't cause a memory leak - we don't want this garbage collected, * and this function shouldn't be called more than once per backend. @@ -4329,9 +4331,9 @@ PLy_exception_set_plural(PyObject *exc, static void PLy_spi_exception_set(PyObject *excclass, ErrorData *edata) { - PyObject *args = NULL; - PyObject *spierror = NULL; - PyObject *spidata = NULL; + PyObject *args = NULL; + PyObject *spierror = NULL; + PyObject *spidata = NULL; args = Py_BuildValue("(s)", edata->message); if (!args) @@ -4378,11 +4380,13 @@ PLy_elog(int elevel, const char *fmt,...) char *tbmsg; int tb_depth; StringInfoData emsg; - PyObject *exc, *val, *tb; - const char *primary = NULL; - char *detail = NULL; - char *hint = NULL; - char *query = NULL; + PyObject *exc, + *val, + *tb; + const char *primary = NULL; + char *detail = NULL; + char *hint = NULL; + char *query = NULL; int position = 0; PyErr_Fetch(&exc, &val, &tb); @@ -4463,7 +4467,7 @@ PLy_elog(int elevel, const char *fmt,...) static void PLy_get_spi_error_data(PyObject *exc, char **detail, char **hint, char **query, int *position) { - PyObject *spidata = NULL; + PyObject *spidata = NULL; spidata = PyObject_GetAttrString(exc, "spidata"); if (!spidata) @@ -4484,9 +4488,9 @@ cleanup: static char * get_source_line(const char *src, int lineno) { - const char *s = NULL; - const char *next = src; - int current = 0; + const char *s = NULL; + const char *next = src; + int current = 0; while (current < lineno) { @@ -4597,11 +4601,11 @@ PLy_traceback(char **xmsg, char **tbmsg, int *tb_depth) appendStringInfoString(&tbstr, "Traceback (most recent call last):"); while (tb != NULL && tb != Py_None) { - PyObject *volatile tb_prev = NULL; - PyObject *volatile frame = NULL; - PyObject *volatile code = NULL; - PyObject *volatile name = NULL; - PyObject *volatile lineno = NULL; + PyObject *volatile tb_prev = NULL; + PyObject *volatile frame = NULL; + PyObject *volatile code = NULL; + PyObject *volatile name = NULL; + PyObject *volatile lineno = NULL; PG_TRY(); { @@ -4634,15 +4638,14 @@ PLy_traceback(char **xmsg, char **tbmsg, int *tb_depth) /* The first frame always points at <module>, skip it. */ if (*tb_depth > 0) { - char *proname; - char *fname; - char *line; - long plain_lineno; + char *proname; + char *fname; + char *line; + long plain_lineno; /* - * The second frame points at the internal function, but - * to mimick Python error reporting we want to say - * <module>. + * The second frame points at the internal function, but to mimick + * Python error reporting we want to say <module>. */ if (*tb_depth == 1) fname = "<module>"; @@ -4654,22 +4657,22 @@ PLy_traceback(char **xmsg, char **tbmsg, int *tb_depth) if (proname == NULL) appendStringInfo( - &tbstr, "\n PL/Python anonymous code block, line %ld, in %s", - plain_lineno - 1, fname); + &tbstr, "\n PL/Python anonymous code block, line %ld, in %s", + plain_lineno - 1, fname); else appendStringInfo( &tbstr, "\n PL/Python function \"%s\", line %ld, in %s", - proname, plain_lineno - 1, fname); + proname, plain_lineno - 1, fname); if (PLy_curr_procedure) { /* - * If we know the current procedure, append the exact - * line from the source, again mimicking Python's - * traceback.py module behavior. We could store the - * already line-split source to avoid splitting it - * every time, but producing a traceback is not the - * most important scenario to optimize for. + * If we know the current procedure, append the exact line + * from the source, again mimicking Python's traceback.py + * module behavior. We could store the already line-split + * source to avoid splitting it every time, but producing a + * traceback is not the most important scenario to optimize + * for. */ line = get_source_line(PLy_curr_procedure->src, plain_lineno); if (line) @@ -4813,7 +4816,6 @@ PLyUnicode_FromString(const char *s) return o; } - #endif /* PY_MAJOR_VERSION >= 3 */ #if PY_MAJOR_VERSION < 3 diff --git a/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c b/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c index 6e8c5c05b5..7b952b27e1 100644 --- a/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c +++ b/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c @@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ PG_MODULE_MAGIC; **********************************************************************/ typedef struct pltcl_interp_desc { - Oid user_id; /* Hash key (must be first!) */ - Tcl_Interp *interp; /* The interpreter */ - Tcl_HashTable query_hash; /* pltcl_query_desc structs */ + Oid user_id; /* Hash key (must be first!) */ + Tcl_Interp *interp; /* The interpreter */ + Tcl_HashTable query_hash; /* pltcl_query_desc structs */ } pltcl_interp_desc; @@ -148,18 +148,19 @@ typedef struct pltcl_query_desc **********************************************************************/ typedef struct pltcl_proc_key { - Oid proc_id; /* Function OID */ + Oid proc_id; /* Function OID */ + /* * is_trigger is really a bool, but declare as Oid to ensure this struct * contains no padding */ - Oid is_trigger; /* is it a trigger function? */ - Oid user_id; /* User calling the function, or 0 */ + Oid is_trigger; /* is it a trigger function? */ + Oid user_id; /* User calling the function, or 0 */ } pltcl_proc_key; typedef struct pltcl_proc_ptr { - pltcl_proc_key proc_key; /* Hash key (must be first!) */ + pltcl_proc_key proc_key; /* Hash key (must be first!) */ pltcl_proc_desc *proc_ptr; } pltcl_proc_ptr; @@ -196,7 +197,7 @@ static HeapTuple pltcl_trigger_handler(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS, bool pltrusted); static void throw_tcl_error(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *proname); static pltcl_proc_desc *compile_pltcl_function(Oid fn_oid, Oid tgreloid, - bool pltrusted); + bool pltrusted); static int pltcl_elog(ClientData cdata, Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, CONST84 char *argv[]); diff --git a/src/port/chklocale.c b/src/port/chklocale.c index 62932c2005..e4f3dc99e0 100644 --- a/src/port/chklocale.c +++ b/src/port/chklocale.c @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ pg_get_encoding_from_locale(const char *ctype, bool write_message) ereport(WARNING, (errmsg("could not determine encoding for locale \"%s\": codeset is \"%s\"", ctype, sys), - errdetail("Please report this to <[email protected]>."))); + errdetail("Please report this to <[email protected]>."))); #endif } diff --git a/src/port/crypt.c b/src/port/crypt.c index 7f18e1d2a7..9347d3b47c 100644 --- a/src/port/crypt.c +++ b/src/port/crypt.c @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ typedef union #if defined(B64) B64 b64; #endif -} C_block; +} C_block; /* * Convert twenty-four-bit long in host-order diff --git a/src/port/dirmod.c b/src/port/dirmod.c index b6a5564c2c..17fd96573d 100644 --- a/src/port/dirmod.c +++ b/src/port/dirmod.c @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ typedef struct WORD PrintNameOffset; WORD PrintNameLength; WCHAR PathBuffer[1]; -} REPARSE_JUNCTION_DATA_BUFFER; +} REPARSE_JUNCTION_DATA_BUFFER; #define REPARSE_JUNCTION_DATA_BUFFER_HEADER_SIZE \ FIELD_OFFSET(REPARSE_JUNCTION_DATA_BUFFER, SubstituteNameOffset) diff --git a/src/port/exec.c b/src/port/exec.c index 6027917b57..21a951c424 100644 --- a/src/port/exec.c +++ b/src/port/exec.c @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ pipe_read_line(char *cmd, char *line, int maxsize) if (fgets(line, maxsize, pgver) == NULL) { perror("fgets failure"); - pclose(pgver); /* no error checking */ + pclose(pgver); /* no error checking */ return NULL; } diff --git a/src/port/getaddrinfo.c b/src/port/getaddrinfo.c index fabd50dddb..db19878ae1 100644 --- a/src/port/getaddrinfo.c +++ b/src/port/getaddrinfo.c @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ gai_strerror(int errcode) return "Not enough memory"; #endif #ifdef EAI_NODATA -#if !defined(WIN64) && !defined(WIN32_ONLY_COMPILER) /* MSVC/WIN64 duplicate */ +#if !defined(WIN64) && !defined(WIN32_ONLY_COMPILER) /* MSVC/WIN64 duplicate */ case EAI_NODATA: return "No host data of that type was found"; #endif @@ -390,9 +390,9 @@ getnameinfo(const struct sockaddr * sa, int salen, if (sa->sa_family == AF_INET) { if (inet_net_ntop(AF_INET, &((struct sockaddr_in *) sa)->sin_addr, - sa->sa_family == AF_INET ? 32 : 128, - node, nodelen) == NULL) - return EAI_MEMORY; + sa->sa_family == AF_INET ? 32 : 128, + node, nodelen) == NULL) + return EAI_MEMORY; } else return EAI_MEMORY; diff --git a/src/port/inet_net_ntop.c b/src/port/inet_net_ntop.c index 7ed3867c05..9c3c93b8ec 100644 --- a/src/port/inet_net_ntop.c +++ b/src/port/inet_net_ntop.c @@ -78,11 +78,11 @@ char * inet_net_ntop(int af, const void *src, int bits, char *dst, size_t size) { /* - * We need to cover both the address family constants used by the PG - * inet type (PGSQL_AF_INET and PGSQL_AF_INET6) and those used by the - * system libraries (AF_INET and AF_INET6). We can safely assume - * PGSQL_AF_INET == AF_INET, but the INET6 constants are very likely - * to be different. If AF_INET6 isn't defined, silently ignore it. + * We need to cover both the address family constants used by the PG inet + * type (PGSQL_AF_INET and PGSQL_AF_INET6) and those used by the system + * libraries (AF_INET and AF_INET6). We can safely assume PGSQL_AF_INET + * == AF_INET, but the INET6 constants are very likely to be different. + * If AF_INET6 isn't defined, silently ignore it. */ switch (af) { diff --git a/src/port/path.c b/src/port/path.c index df2c4e7be6..0d40a0bb9c 100644 --- a/src/port/path.c +++ b/src/port/path.c @@ -374,21 +374,22 @@ path_is_relative_and_below_cwd(const char *path) else if (path_contains_parent_reference(path)) return false; #ifdef WIN32 + /* - * On Win32, a drive letter _not_ followed by a slash, e.g. 'E:abc', is - * relative to the cwd on that drive, or the drive's root directory - * if that drive has no cwd. Because the path itself cannot tell us - * which is the case, we have to assume the worst, i.e. that it is not - * below the cwd. We could use GetFullPathName() to find the full path - * but that could change if the current directory for the drive changes - * underneath us, so we just disallow it. + * On Win32, a drive letter _not_ followed by a slash, e.g. 'E:abc', is + * relative to the cwd on that drive, or the drive's root directory if + * that drive has no cwd. Because the path itself cannot tell us which is + * the case, we have to assume the worst, i.e. that it is not below the + * cwd. We could use GetFullPathName() to find the full path but that + * could change if the current directory for the drive changes underneath + * us, so we just disallow it. */ else if (isalpha((unsigned char) path[0]) && path[1] == ':' && - !IS_DIR_SEP(path[2])) + !IS_DIR_SEP(path[2])) return false; #endif else - return true; + return true; } /* diff --git a/src/port/pgmkdirp.c b/src/port/pgmkdirp.c index b65db5e969..84367f7c9b 100644 --- a/src/port/pgmkdirp.c +++ b/src/port/pgmkdirp.c @@ -9,18 +9,18 @@ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright - * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright - * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the - * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors - * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software - * without specific prior written permission. + * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software + * without specific prior written permission. * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE - * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) diff --git a/src/port/snprintf.c b/src/port/snprintf.c index 88cb4d4c2b..9f719505f4 100644 --- a/src/port/snprintf.c +++ b/src/port/snprintf.c @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ typedef struct /* bufend == NULL is for sprintf, where we assume buf is big enough */ FILE *stream; /* eventual output destination, or NULL */ int nchars; /* # chars already sent to stream */ -} PrintfTarget; +} PrintfTarget; /* * Info about the type and value of a formatting parameter. Note that we @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ typedef enum ATYPE_LONGLONG, ATYPE_DOUBLE, ATYPE_CHARPTR -} PrintfArgType; +} PrintfArgType; typedef union { @@ -133,11 +133,11 @@ typedef union int64 ll; double d; char *cptr; -} PrintfArgValue; +} PrintfArgValue; -static void flushbuffer(PrintfTarget * target); -static int dopr(PrintfTarget * target, const char *format, va_list args); +static void flushbuffer(PrintfTarget *target); +static int dopr(PrintfTarget *target, const char *format, va_list args); int @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ pg_printf(const char *fmt,...) /* call this only when stream is defined */ static void -flushbuffer(PrintfTarget * target) +flushbuffer(PrintfTarget *target) { size_t nc = target->bufptr - target->bufstart; @@ -268,29 +268,29 @@ flushbuffer(PrintfTarget * target) static void fmtstr(char *value, int leftjust, int minlen, int maxwidth, - int pointflag, PrintfTarget * target); -static void fmtptr(void *value, PrintfTarget * target); + int pointflag, PrintfTarget *target); +static void fmtptr(void *value, PrintfTarget *target); static void fmtint(int64 value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, int minlen, int zpad, int precision, int pointflag, - PrintfTarget * target); -static void fmtchar(int value, int leftjust, int minlen, PrintfTarget * target); + PrintfTarget *target); +static void fmtchar(int value, int leftjust, int minlen, PrintfTarget *target); static void fmtfloat(double value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, int minlen, int zpad, int precision, int pointflag, - PrintfTarget * target); -static void dostr(const char *str, int slen, PrintfTarget * target); -static void dopr_outch(int c, PrintfTarget * target); + PrintfTarget *target); +static void dostr(const char *str, int slen, PrintfTarget *target); +static void dopr_outch(int c, PrintfTarget *target); static int adjust_sign(int is_negative, int forcesign, int *signvalue); static void adjust_padlen(int minlen, int vallen, int leftjust, int *padlen); static void leading_pad(int zpad, int *signvalue, int *padlen, - PrintfTarget * target); -static void trailing_pad(int *padlen, PrintfTarget * target); + PrintfTarget *target); +static void trailing_pad(int *padlen, PrintfTarget *target); /* * dopr(): poor man's version of doprintf */ static int -dopr(PrintfTarget * target, const char *format, va_list args) +dopr(PrintfTarget *target, const char *format, va_list args) { const char *format_start = format; int ch; @@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ pg_strnlen(const char *str, size_t maxlen) static void fmtstr(char *value, int leftjust, int minlen, int maxwidth, - int pointflag, PrintfTarget * target) + int pointflag, PrintfTarget *target) { int padlen, vallen; /* amount to pad */ @@ -792,7 +792,7 @@ fmtstr(char *value, int leftjust, int minlen, int maxwidth, } static void -fmtptr(void *value, PrintfTarget * target) +fmtptr(void *value, PrintfTarget *target) { int vallen; char convert[64]; @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ fmtptr(void *value, PrintfTarget * target) static void fmtint(int64 value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, int minlen, int zpad, int precision, int pointflag, - PrintfTarget * target) + PrintfTarget *target) { uint64 base; int dosign; @@ -883,7 +883,7 @@ fmtint(int64 value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, } static void -fmtchar(int value, int leftjust, int minlen, PrintfTarget * target) +fmtchar(int value, int leftjust, int minlen, PrintfTarget *target) { int padlen = 0; /* amount to pad */ @@ -903,7 +903,7 @@ fmtchar(int value, int leftjust, int minlen, PrintfTarget * target) static void fmtfloat(double value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, int minlen, int zpad, int precision, int pointflag, - PrintfTarget * target) + PrintfTarget *target) { int signvalue = 0; int vallen; @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ fmtfloat(double value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, } static void -dostr(const char *str, int slen, PrintfTarget * target) +dostr(const char *str, int slen, PrintfTarget *target) { while (slen > 0) { @@ -959,7 +959,7 @@ dostr(const char *str, int slen, PrintfTarget * target) } static void -dopr_outch(int c, PrintfTarget * target) +dopr_outch(int c, PrintfTarget *target) { if (target->bufend != NULL && target->bufptr >= target->bufend) { @@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ adjust_padlen(int minlen, int vallen, int leftjust, int *padlen) static void -leading_pad(int zpad, int *signvalue, int *padlen, PrintfTarget * target) +leading_pad(int zpad, int *signvalue, int *padlen, PrintfTarget *target) { if (*padlen > 0 && zpad) { @@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ leading_pad(int zpad, int *signvalue, int *padlen, PrintfTarget * target) static void -trailing_pad(int *padlen, PrintfTarget * target) +trailing_pad(int *padlen, PrintfTarget *target) { while (*padlen < 0) { diff --git a/src/port/unsetenv.c b/src/port/unsetenv.c index 248cead79d..339e172593 100644 --- a/src/port/unsetenv.c +++ b/src/port/unsetenv.c @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ unsetenv(const char *name) * that we zap the actual environ member. However, there are some libc * implementations (notably recent BSDs) that do not obey SUS but copy the * presented string. This method fails on such platforms. Hopefully all - * such platforms have unsetenv() and thus won't be using this hack. - * See: http://www.greenend.org.uk/rjk/2008/putenv.html + * such platforms have unsetenv() and thus won't be using this hack. See: + * http://www.greenend.org.uk/rjk/2008/putenv.html * * Note that repeatedly setting and unsetting a var using this code will * leak memory. diff --git a/src/test/isolation/isolation_main.c b/src/test/isolation/isolation_main.c index 7d2cfa2ea8..2df12f879e 100644 --- a/src/test/isolation/isolation_main.c +++ b/src/test/isolation/isolation_main.c @@ -18,9 +18,9 @@ */ static PID_TYPE isolation_start_test(const char *testname, - _stringlist ** resultfiles, - _stringlist ** expectfiles, - _stringlist ** tags) + _stringlist ** resultfiles, + _stringlist ** expectfiles, + _stringlist ** tags) { PID_TYPE pid; char infile[MAXPGPATH]; diff --git a/src/test/isolation/isolationtester.c b/src/test/isolation/isolationtester.c index 9946051945..44a4858c96 100644 --- a/src/test/isolation/isolationtester.c +++ b/src/test/isolation/isolationtester.c @@ -17,16 +17,16 @@ #include "isolationtester.h" -static PGconn **conns = NULL; -static int nconns = 0; +static PGconn **conns = NULL; +static int nconns = 0; -static void run_all_permutations(TestSpec *testspec); -static void run_all_permutations_recurse(TestSpec *testspec, int nsteps, Step **steps); -static void run_named_permutations(TestSpec *testspec); -static void run_permutation(TestSpec *testspec, int nsteps, Step **steps); +static void run_all_permutations(TestSpec * testspec); +static void run_all_permutations_recurse(TestSpec * testspec, int nsteps, Step ** steps); +static void run_named_permutations(TestSpec * testspec); +static void run_permutation(TestSpec * testspec, int nsteps, Step ** steps); -static int step_qsort_cmp(const void *a, const void *b); -static int step_bsearch_cmp(const void *a, const void *b); +static int step_qsort_cmp(const void *a, const void *b); +static int step_bsearch_cmp(const void *a, const void *b); static void printResultSet(PGresult *res); @@ -35,6 +35,7 @@ static void exit_nicely(void) { int i; + for (i = 0; i < nconns; i++) PQfinish(conns[i]); exit(1); @@ -49,9 +50,8 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) /* * If the user supplies a parameter on the command line, use it as the - * conninfo string; otherwise default to setting dbname=postgres and - * using environment variables or defaults for all other connection - * parameters. + * conninfo string; otherwise default to setting dbname=postgres and using + * environment variables or defaults for all other connection parameters. */ if (argc > 1) conninfo = argv[1]; @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) conns = calloc(nconns, sizeof(PGconn *)); for (i = 0; i < testspec->nsessions; i++) { - PGresult *res; + PGresult *res; conns[i] = PQconnectdb(conninfo); if (PQstatus(conns[i]) != CONNECTION_OK) @@ -94,8 +94,9 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) /* Set the session index fields in steps. */ for (i = 0; i < testspec->nsessions; i++) { - Session *session = testspec->sessions[i]; - int stepindex; + Session *session = testspec->sessions[i]; + int stepindex; + for (stepindex = 0; stepindex < session->nsteps; stepindex++) session->steps[stepindex]->session = i; } @@ -121,7 +122,7 @@ static int *piles; * Run all permutations of the steps and sessions. */ static void -run_all_permutations(TestSpec *testspec) +run_all_permutations(TestSpec * testspec) { int nsteps; int i; @@ -135,13 +136,13 @@ run_all_permutations(TestSpec *testspec) steps = malloc(sizeof(Step *) * nsteps); /* - * To generate the permutations, we conceptually put the steps of - * each session on a pile. To generate a permuation, we pick steps - * from the piles until all piles are empty. By picking steps from - * piles in different order, we get different permutations. + * To generate the permutations, we conceptually put the steps of each + * session on a pile. To generate a permuation, we pick steps from the + * piles until all piles are empty. By picking steps from piles in + * different order, we get different permutations. * - * A pile is actually just an integer which tells how many steps - * we've already picked from this pile. + * A pile is actually just an integer which tells how many steps we've + * already picked from this pile. */ piles = malloc(sizeof(int) * testspec->nsessions); for (i = 0; i < testspec->nsessions; i++) @@ -151,10 +152,10 @@ run_all_permutations(TestSpec *testspec) } static void -run_all_permutations_recurse(TestSpec *testspec, int nsteps, Step **steps) +run_all_permutations_recurse(TestSpec * testspec, int nsteps, Step ** steps) { - int i; - int found = 0; + int i; + int found = 0; for (i = 0; i < testspec->nsessions; i++) { @@ -181,12 +182,13 @@ run_all_permutations_recurse(TestSpec *testspec, int nsteps, Step **steps) * Run permutations given in the test spec */ static void -run_named_permutations(TestSpec *testspec) +run_named_permutations(TestSpec * testspec) { - int i, j; - int n; - int nallsteps; - Step **allsteps; + int i, + j; + int n; + int nallsteps; + Step **allsteps; /* First create a lookup table of all steps */ nallsteps = 0; @@ -207,7 +209,7 @@ run_named_permutations(TestSpec *testspec) for (i = 0; i < testspec->npermutations; i++) { Permutation *p = testspec->permutations[i]; - Step **steps; + Step **steps; steps = malloc(p->nsteps * sizeof(Step *)); @@ -215,7 +217,7 @@ run_named_permutations(TestSpec *testspec) for (j = 0; j < p->nsteps; j++) { steps[j] = *((Step **) bsearch(p->stepnames[j], allsteps, nallsteps, - sizeof(Step *), &step_bsearch_cmp)); + sizeof(Step *), &step_bsearch_cmp)); if (steps[j] == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "undefined step \"%s\" specified in permutation\n", p->stepnames[j]); @@ -231,8 +233,8 @@ run_named_permutations(TestSpec *testspec) static int step_qsort_cmp(const void *a, const void *b) { - Step *stepa = *((Step **) a); - Step *stepb = *((Step **) b); + Step *stepa = *((Step **) a); + Step *stepb = *((Step **) b); return strcmp(stepa->name, stepb->name); } @@ -240,8 +242,8 @@ step_qsort_cmp(const void *a, const void *b) static int step_bsearch_cmp(const void *a, const void *b) { - char *stepname = (char *) a; - Step *step = *((Step **) b); + char *stepname = (char *) a; + Step *step = *((Step **) b); return strcmp(stepname, step->name); } @@ -250,10 +252,10 @@ step_bsearch_cmp(const void *a, const void *b) * Run one permutation */ static void -run_permutation(TestSpec *testspec, int nsteps, Step **steps) +run_permutation(TestSpec * testspec, int nsteps, Step ** steps) { - PGresult *res; - int i; + PGresult *res; + int i; printf("\nstarting permutation:"); for (i = 0; i < nsteps; i++) @@ -292,11 +294,12 @@ run_permutation(TestSpec *testspec, int nsteps, Step **steps) /* Perform steps */ for (i = 0; i < nsteps; i++) { - Step *step = steps[i]; + Step *step = steps[i]; + printf("step %s: %s\n", step->name, step->sql); res = PQexec(conns[step->session], step->sql); - switch(PQresultStatus(res)) + switch (PQresultStatus(res)) { case PGRES_COMMAND_OK: break; @@ -353,20 +356,21 @@ run_permutation(TestSpec *testspec, int nsteps, Step **steps) static void printResultSet(PGresult *res) { - int nFields; - int i, j; - - /* first, print out the attribute names */ - nFields = PQnfields(res); - for (i = 0; i < nFields; i++) - printf("%-15s", PQfname(res, i)); - printf("\n\n"); - - /* next, print out the rows */ - for (i = 0; i < PQntuples(res); i++) - { - for (j = 0; j < nFields; j++) - printf("%-15s", PQgetvalue(res, i, j)); - printf("\n"); - } + int nFields; + int i, + j; + + /* first, print out the attribute names */ + nFields = PQnfields(res); + for (i = 0; i < nFields; i++) + printf("%-15s", PQfname(res, i)); + printf("\n\n"); + + /* next, print out the rows */ + for (i = 0; i < PQntuples(res); i++) + { + for (j = 0; j < nFields; j++) + printf("%-15s", PQgetvalue(res, i, j)); + printf("\n"); + } } diff --git a/src/test/isolation/isolationtester.h b/src/test/isolation/isolationtester.h index 1f86db8727..377c10c393 100644 --- a/src/test/isolation/isolationtester.h +++ b/src/test/isolation/isolationtester.h @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ struct Session struct Step { - int session; + int session; char *name; char *sql; }; @@ -37,19 +37,19 @@ typedef struct { int nsteps; char **stepnames; -} Permutation; +} Permutation; typedef struct { char *setupsql; char *teardownsql; - Session **sessions; + Session **sessions; int nsessions; Permutation **permutations; int npermutations; -} TestSpec; +} TestSpec; -extern TestSpec parseresult; +extern TestSpec parseresult; extern int spec_yyparse(void); diff --git a/src/test/regress/pg_regress.c b/src/test/regress/pg_regress.c index fd7068dcc6..c639c479e4 100644 --- a/src/test/regress/pg_regress.c +++ b/src/test/regress/pg_regress.c @@ -1805,8 +1805,8 @@ create_database(const char *dbname) } /* - * Install any requested extensions. We use CREATE IF NOT EXISTS - * so that this will work whether or not the extension is preinstalled. + * Install any requested extensions. We use CREATE IF NOT EXISTS so that + * this will work whether or not the extension is preinstalled. */ for (sl = loadextension; sl != NULL; sl = sl->next) { |